JP2019216758A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine with new playability.SOLUTION: A game machine includes state control means controllable to one of a first state in which the reception of the game ball into a first special start port is relatively easy and a second state in which the reception of the game ball into the first special start port is relatively difficult. The expected value of entering a probability change attacker during execution of a special game is configured to be different between cases when a first lottery is performed and when a second lottery is performed. When controlled to the first state, the reception of the game ball into the first special start port is relatively easy, so that the reception of the game ball into a second special start port is more difficult than that into the first special start port. When controlled to the second state, the reception of the game ball into the first special start port is relatively difficult, so that the reception of the game ball into the second special start port is easier than that in the first state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 288

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there have been known gaming machines in which various winning devices such as a general winning opening and a starting opening are provided in a game area. When a game ball fired toward the game ball wins a prize device, a prize ball corresponding to the winning device is paid out.

  As this type of gaming machine, among gaming balls fired in a specific area, a game ball that has entered a predetermined entrance is distributed toward a first place or a second place and is released. A gaming machine including a device and having different profits when discharged toward a first location and when released toward a second location is disclosed (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2005-047336

  According to the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, the amount of profit obtained when the game is released toward the first location and when the game is released toward the second location can be made different, In addition to the distribution of the downflow route of the game balls released by the distribution device, the distribution of profit can be realized.

  However, in recent years, gaming machines having further new gaming properties have been desired.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having new gaming properties.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
When a predetermined movable member (for example, the shutter 6310 in FIG. 286) is operated, a first special start port (for example, FIG. 28) capable of receiving a game ball fired in a specific manner (for example, right-handed) toward the game area. 286, a first starting port 5443);
On the basis of the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit), the movable member for operating the predetermined movable member to facilitate the reception of the game ball to the first special starting port. Control means (for example, main CPU 101);
A first lottery means capable of performing a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) based on reception of a game ball to the first special starting port (for example, a main CPU 101);
A first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of variably displaying a first special symbol and deriving a result of the first lottery;
A second special start port (for example, the second start port 440 in FIG. 286) configured to be able to receive only game balls that have not been received by the first special start port;
A second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of performing a second lottery (for example, a first special lottery) based on the reception of the game ball to the second special starting port;
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of variably displaying a second special symbol and deriving the result of the second lottery;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, a special game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101) for executing a special game advantageous to the player )When,
If a specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the special game (entering a probable change attacker), the game state after the end of the special game is changed to a specific game state in which the probability of deriving the special result is increased (for example, a high accuracy time reduction). Specific game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) for controlling the game state)
A first state (for example, an electric support state) in which it is relatively easy to receive game balls in the first special start port, and a second state in which game balls are relatively difficult to be received in the first special start port. A state control unit (for example, the main CPU 101) that can be controlled to any state after the state (for example, the non-electric support state);
With
During the execution of the special game, an expected value (for example, ease of entry into the probability change attacker) at which the specific condition is satisfied depends on when the first lottery is performed and when the second lottery is performed. Are configured differently,
When the state control means is controlled to the first state (for example, a high-precision time-saving game state), it becomes relatively easy to receive a game ball to the first special starting port, and the second state is controlled. 2 While it is more difficult to receive game balls in the special opening than in the first special opening,
When the state control unit is controlled to the second state (for example, a high-accuracy non-time saving game state), it becomes relatively difficult to receive a game ball to the first special starting port, It is characterized in that the game ball is configured to be more easily received in the second special starting port than in the first state.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), it is possible to change the probability of being controlled to a specific game state in which the probability of deriving a special result is increased without changing the firing mode of the game ball toward the game area. It is possible to provide excellent game characteristics.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
An expectation that the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the special game is configured to be higher when the second lottery is performed than when the first lottery is performed,
The state control means includes:
When the variable display of the special symbol is performed a specified number of times (for example, 24, 30, 36, 42, 48, and 100 times) in the first state, the state is shifted from the first state to the second state. It has a state transition control means capable of executing control.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the variable display of the special symbol is performed a prescribed number of times in the first state where it is more difficult to receive the game ball into the second special start port than in the first special start port, the second The state is shifted to the second state in which the reception of the game ball to the special starting port is easier than the first state. That is, when the state is shifted from the first state to the second state, the frequency at which the second lottery is performed becomes higher than in the first state. During the execution of the special game, the expectation value under which the specific condition is satisfied is higher when the second lottery is performed than when the first lottery is performed, and thus the special result is not easily derived in the first state. Even if it is, the interest will be enhanced without discouraging the player.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to provide the game machine provided with new game property.

It is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing an appearance of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is an example of a diagram showing an operation button group of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a perspective view showing the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment from the back side. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. 1 is an example showing an external perspective view of a game board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to a first embodiment. It is an example showing an exploded front perspective view of the gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment as viewed obliquely from the upper right. It is an example of a front view showing the LED unit including the first and second special symbol display sections. FIG. 3 is an example of a block diagram illustrating a main control circuit. It is a figure showing an example of the functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine concerning a 1st embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of a hit random number determination table stored in a main ROM of a main control circuit. It is a figure showing an example of the symbol judgment table stored in the main ROM of the main control circuit. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in a main ROM of a main control circuit. It is an example of a front view of a game board unit showing a mode in which a game ball flows down a right side area when a blade member of an ordinary electric accessory is opened. FIG. 7 is an example of a front view of a game board unit showing a mode in which a game ball flows down a right side area when a blade member of an ordinary electric accessory is closed. It is an example of a front view of a game board unit showing a mode in which a game ball flows down a left region when a blade member of an ordinary electric accessory is opened. It is an example of the front view of a back unit. It is an example of the back view of a back unit. It is an example of the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the front right diagonal upper part. It is an example of the perspective view which looked at the back unit from back left diagonally above. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the back unit from diagonally forward right upper. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the back unit from diagonally left upper left. It is an example of the back perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from diagonally right above. It is an example of the front view of an attacker unit. It is an example of the side view of an attacker unit. It is an example of the top view of an attacker unit. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from diagonally forward right upper. It is an example of a front view showing a base member of an attacker unit. It is an example of the back view which shows the front side plate part 520 of an attacker unit. It is an example of the front sectional view of an attacker unit. It is an example of the disassembled sectional perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from diagonally forward right. (A) is an example of a plan view showing a special winning opening solenoid, (b) is an example of a plan view showing a link arm, and (c) is an example of a plan view showing a shutter. (A) is an example of a plan view showing an attacker unit when the shutter is at a second position, and (b) is also an example of a plan view showing a special electric accessory. (A) is an example of a plan view showing an attacker unit when a shutter is at a first position, and (b) is also an example of a plan view showing a special electric accessory. It is an example of the top view which shows the special electric accessory concerning another example. It is an example of the perspective view which looked at the special electric auditors character concerning other examples from the front right diagonal upper part. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the special electric accessory concerning another example from diagonally forward right upper. (A) is an example of a plan view showing an accommodation part, (b) is an example of a perspective view of the accommodation part seen from the upper right front, and (c) is an example of a rear perspective view of the accommodation part seen from the upper right corner. (A) An example of a plan view showing a special winning opening solenoid, (b) an example of a perspective view of the special winning opening solenoid viewed from obliquely right above, and (c) a rear perspective view of the special winning opening solenoid viewed obliquely from above right. It is an example of a figure. (A) is an example of a plan view showing a link arm, and (b) is an example of a rear perspective view showing the link arm viewed from diagonally right above. 5A is an example of a plan view showing a regulating member, FIG. 6B is an example of a perspective view of the regulating member as viewed obliquely from the upper right, and FIG. 7C is an example of a rear perspective view of the regulating member viewed obliquely from the upper right. FIG. 4 is an example of a front perspective view showing an assembling configuration of a special electric accessory in a state where there is no accommodation portion. It is an example of a front perspective view showing an assembling configuration of a special winning opening solenoid, a link arm and a regulating member. It is an example of the back perspective view showing the assembling structure of the special winning opening solenoid, the link arm, and the regulating member. (A) is an example of a plan view showing an assembling configuration of a special winning opening solenoid, a link arm and a regulating member, and (b) is an example of a view in which the link arm in (a) is omitted. (A) is an example of a plan view showing an assembling configuration of a special winning opening solenoid, a link arm and a regulating member in a closed state, and (b) is an example of a view in which illustration of the link arm is omitted. (A) An example of a plan view showing an assembling configuration of the special winning opening solenoid, the link arm, and the regulating member when the driving force transmission unit of the special winning opening solenoid starts moving from the state illustrated in FIG. 46, (b) It is an example of the figure which omitted illustration of the link arm of (a). (A) An example of a plan view showing an assembling configuration of the special winning opening solenoid, the link arm, and the regulating member when the driving force transmission unit of the special winning opening solenoid continues to move from the state illustrated in FIG. 47, (b) It is an example of the figure which omitted illustration of the link arm of (a). (A) An example of a plan view showing an assembling configuration of the special winning opening solenoid, the link arm, and the regulating member when the driving force transmission unit of the special winning opening solenoid 6004 continues to move from the state illustrated in FIG. 3A is an example of a diagram in which the link arm of FIG. (A) is an example of a schematic plan view showing a state in which the locked state is achieved by the regulating member, and (b) is an example of a schematic plan view showing a state in which the locked state is released by the regulating member. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the normal electric accessory unit from diagonally forward right upper. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the normal electric accessory unit from diagonally upper left rear. It is an example of the figure which shows a normal electric accessory, a 2nd starting port switch, and a storage member. It is an example of the back view of an ordinary electric accessory. It is an example of the back view which looked at the usual electric accessory from diagonally right upper side. An aspect of the ordinary electric accessory when the blade member is in the closed state (shown by a dashed line), and an aspect of the ordinary electric accessory when the blade member is transitioning from the closed state to the open state (solid line) (Illustrated in FIG. 2). Rear view showing an aspect of the ordinary electric accessory when the blade member is in the transition state (illustrated by a dashed line) and an aspect of the ordinary electric accessory when the blade member is open (illustrated by a solid line). This is an example. It is a rear view of the blade member and power transmission mechanism for demonstrating the function of a flange connection member, (A) The figure for demonstrating that opening of a blade member is prevented, (B) Opening of a blade member. FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining that is allowed. It is an example of the front view of the upper front part in a normal aspect (an aspect at the origin position). It is an example of the back view of the upper front part in a normal mode. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the upper front accessory from diagonally forward right. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the upper front accessory from diagonally left upper rear. It is an example of the front view of an upper front accessory at an origin position. It is an example of a front view of an upper front accessory while a movable ornament is moving downward. It is an example of the front view of the upper front part when the movable decorative body has moved downward to the operation limit position. It is an example of the front view of the upper back accessory in a normal mode (mode at the origin position). It is an example of the back view of the upper back part in a normal mode. It is an example of the perspective view which looked at the upper back part from diagonally forward right. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the upper back role from diagonally forward right upper. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the upper back role from diagonally left upper rear. (A) is an example of a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA shown in FIG. 67, and (B) is an example of an enlarged view of a portion X shown in (A). (A) is an example of a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB shown in FIG. 67, and (B) is an example of an enlarged view of a Y portion shown in (A). It is a figure which shows an example of the upper back accessory 1100 in the normal mode (mode at the origin position) before operation start, (A) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect before the upper left arm and the upper right arm of the pantograph mechanism reach the limit position after the upper back role started to operate, (A) is a front view, (B) is a figure. It is a rear view. It is a figure showing an example of a mode when an upper left arm and an upper right arm of a pantograph mechanism have reached a limit position, (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. When the left upper arm and the right upper arm of the pantograph mechanism operate to the operation limit position, and then the left motor and the right motor rotate, and the movable decoration body is operated downward by the left transmission arm and the right transmission arm (see FIG. FIGS. 4A and 4B are diagrams illustrating an example of a mode when the covering decorative body starts operating on the movable decorative body), wherein FIG. 4A is a front view and FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect which the covering decoration body moved to the operation limit with respect to the movable decoration body, (A) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. It is an example of the front view of the lower part in a normal mode (mode at the origin position). It is an example of the back view of the lower part in a normal mode. It is an example of the perspective view which looked at the lower part from diagonally forward right. It is an example of the back perspective view which looked at the lower part from diagonally upper left. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the lower part from diagonally forward right. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the lower part from diagonally left upper rear. It is a figure which shows an example of the lower part in the aspect at the time of an origin position, (A) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. FIGS. 7A and 7B are diagrams illustrating an example of a lower part when the device is operated to an intermediate position, where FIG. 7A is a front view and FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a lower part in the case of operating to an operation limit, (A.) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. It is an example of the front view of an upper corner accessory. It is an example of the back view of an upper corner accessory. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the upper corner role from diagonally forward right. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the upper corner part from diagonally left upper rear. FIG. 7 is an example in a rear view showing when the first movable body and the second movable body are at the origin positions. It is an example of the back view showing when the 1st movable body and the 2nd movable body started operation from an origin position. FIG. 93 is an example of a rear view showing a state where the first movable body and the second movable body are further operated from the position shown in FIG. 92. FIG. 9 is an example of a rear view illustrating a state where the first movable body and the second movable body have been operated up to an operation limit position. It is an example of the front view of a lower corner accessory. It is an example of the back view of a lower corner accessory. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the lower corner part from diagonally forward right. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the lower corner role from diagonally upper left back. FIG. 11 is an example of a rear view showing when the third movable body and the fourth movable body are at the origin positions. It is an example of the back view showing when the 3rd movable body and the 4th movable body started operation from an origin position. It is an example of the back view showing when the 3rd movable body and the 4th movable body operate to the operation limit position. It is an example of the front view of the back unit 176 which shows a mode when all of a 1st movable body, a 2nd movable body, a 3rd movable body, and a 4th movable body operate | moved to the operation limit position. It is an example of the front view of the back unit which shows a mode when the 1st movable body and the 2nd movable body operate to the operation limit position, and the 3rd movable body and the 4th movable body are waiting at the origin position. It is an example of the front view of the back unit which shows a mode when the 3rd movable body and the 4th movable body operate to the operation limit position, and the 1st movable body and the 2nd movable body are waiting at the origin position. It is an example of the front view of the side accessory in a normal aspect. It is an example of the back view of the side accessory in a normal mode. It is an example of the front view of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the side accessory from diagonally forward right. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the side accessory from diagonally left upper rear. FIG. 4 is an example of a front view of a side accessory in which a movable decorative body is moving forward of a display area of a liquid crystal display device. It is an example of the back view of the side accessory in which the movable decorative object is moving toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It is an example of the front view of the side accessory when the movable decorative body has advanced most toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It is an example of the back view of the side accessory when the movable decorative body has advanced most toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It is an example of the rear view of the side accessory when the motor for side accessories is further rotated in the same direction from the state where the movable decorative body has advanced most toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the 2nd middle panel from front diagonally upper right. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the 2nd middle panel from back diagonally upper left. (A) is an example of the front view of a 2nd middle panel, (B) It is an example of the CC sectional view taken on the line shown to (A). 6 is an example of a flowchart showing processing at power-on by a main CPU. 6 is an example of a flowchart showing a system timer interrupt process by a main CPU. 9 is an example of a flowchart showing a switch input detection process by a main CPU. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the starting opening winning detection processing by the main CPU. 9 is an example of a flowchart showing a fluctuation pattern determination process by a main CPU. 5 is an example of a flowchart showing main control main processing by a main CPU. It is an example of a flowchart showing a special symbol control process by the main CPU. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the special symbol memory check processing by the main CPU. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management processing by the main CPU. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the number-of-times-saving subtraction process by a main CPU. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the big hit end interval process by the main CPU. 9 is an example of a flowchart showing a variation pattern table setting process by a main CPU. It is an example of a flowchart showing a normal symbol control process by the main CPU. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the main processing by a sub CPU. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the command analysis processing by a sub CPU. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the command transmission processing by a sub CPU. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the message setting process by a sub CPU. It is an example of a flowchart showing a direct table registration process by a sub CPU. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the message transmission processing by a sub CPU. It is a block diagram showing an example of a state transition of a plurality of game state stages. It is a figure which shows an example of the battle effect displayed on a liquid crystal display in a secret A stage. It is an example of the flowchart which shows an example of a scenario pre-setting process by a sub CPU. It is a figure showing an example of correspondence of a battle attribute and an effect map. It is a figure showing an example of an effect map used for scenario lottery. It is an example which shows the setting of the temporary change with respect to each hold | maintenance of 1st hold-4th hold along with a time sequence. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the effect determination process (concealment A stage) which is repeatedly performed every predetermined time as a subroutine of the effect mode determination process. It is an example of a fluctuation pattern table. FIG. 142 is an example of a flowchart showing an effect determination process (concealment A stage) continued from FIG. 142. It is a figure which shows an example of the starting storage hold | maintained in 1st hold-4th hold. It is a figure which shows an example of the starting storage hold | maintained in 1st hold-4th hold. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the effect determination process (concealment A stage) which continues from FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect which blocks three temporary fluctuations. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the effect determination processing (concealment A stage) which continues from FIG. It is an example of the sequence of the temporary change in the state where 1st hold-3rd hold is a scenario lottery target. It is an example of the sequence of the temporary change in the state where 1st hold-4th hold is a scenario lottery target. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the modification when it is determined in step S326 that there is a scenario effect being executed. It is an example of a flowchart showing a prefetching effect selection process (high-accuracy stage). It is a figure which shows an example of the pattern at the time of determining the area to perform a prefetch effect. It is a figure showing an example which chooses the details of a look-ahead effect. It is a figure which shows an example when the detail of a prefetch effect is a countdown effect. It is an example of the flowchart which shows a background change control process. It is an example of a flowchart which shows a background change continuation possible number determination process. It is an example of a table regarding a background change control and a background change scenario. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a specific example for describing a flow of a background change control process according to the present embodiment. It is an example of a flowchart showing a fluctuation scenario determination process. It is an example of the flowchart which shows a chance up control process. It is an example of the flowchart which shows hold change determination processing. It is an example of a sequence chart showing lighting control of a character lamp. It is an example of a flowchart showing a control process of a character lamp effect. It is an example of the flowchart which shows control of a full screen effect. It is an example of a screen diagram showing a screen display. It is a figure showing an example of a table showing the probability of a big hit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a figure showing an example about the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is the big hit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 17 is a view illustrating an example of a decorative symbol determination table stored in a program ROM of a sub control circuit in a pachinko gaming machine according to a second embodiment. FIG. 17 is a view showing another example of the special symbol fluctuation time determination table stored in the main ROM in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a first modification of the main symbol selection rate when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 16 is a view illustrating a second modification of the main symbol selection rate when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a modified example of the decorative symbol determination table stored in the program ROM of the sub control circuit. It is a flow chart which shows an example of power-on processing by a main CPU in a pachinko gaming machine according to a second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of a power supply in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game permission process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, (a) is a flowchart showing an example of a setting process, (b) is a flowchart showing another example of the setting process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of backup clear processing in the pachinko gaming machine concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting confirmation process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game return processing in the pachinko gaming machine concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of abnormal time processing in the pachinko gaming machine concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power failure occurrence in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the system timer interruption processing by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of switch input detection processing by a main CPU in a pachinko gaming machine according to a second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of starting mouth winning detection processing by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the setting check processing by main CPU101 in the pachinko gaming machine concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main control main processing by a main CPU in a pachinko gaming machine according to a second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol memory check processing by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol display time management processing by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the number-of-times-savings subtraction process by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit end interval process by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern table setting process by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the normal symbol control processing by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the main processing by a sub CPU in a pachinko gaming machine concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the command analysis processing by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command transmission process by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a message setting process by a sub CPU in a pachinko gaming machine according to a second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the direct table registration process by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of message transmission processing by a sub CPU in a pachinko gaming machine concerning a 2nd embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a table showing an example of the selectivity of the number of limiters in the pachinko gaming machine of the first extended example for each set value. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, in the pachinko gaming machine of the extension example 4, it is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which a game ball passes through a right-gate for successively operating actors. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, in the pachinko gaming machine of the extension example 4, it is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which a game ball passes through a left-gate for continuously operating the accessory. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the whole menu task performed by sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example when a hall menu screen is displayed on a display area of a liquid crystal display device in a pachinko gaming machine according to a second embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is an example of a hole menu screen displayed in a display area of a liquid crystal display device when a hole menu display process is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is an example of a hole menu screen displayed in a display area of a liquid crystal display device when a hole menu display process is executed. It is a figure showing an example of a hole menu screen displayed on a display area of a liquid crystal display device when a hole menu redisplay processing is executed in a pachinko gaming machine according to a second embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is an example of a screen in which an error content is displayed in a display area of a liquid crystal display device, and (a) a screen indicating that backup clear processing without setting change processing has been executed. (B) a screen showing that an abnormal start-up opening winning error has occurred and that the backup clear processing without the setting change processing has been executed; (c) that the backup clear processing without the setting change processing has been executed; 13 is a screen after a notification period indicating that backup clear processing has been executed in a state where both of the start-up opening abnormal winning errors have occurred. It is another example of the hole menu task executed by the sub CPU 201 in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, and is a flowchart in a case where the sub CPU 201 executes a setting determination process for determining whether setting value information is appropriate. . It is a flow chart which shows an example of the hole menu processing performed by sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is an example of the error information history screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history processing performed by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, and is a flowchart continued from FIG. 59. It is a figure showing an example of an initial screen of a setting change / confirmation history screen displayed on a display area of a liquid crystal display device in a pachinko gaming machine according to a second embodiment. It is a figure showing an example when “Page” is selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 17 is a view showing an example of a page update screen on which a page can be updated on a setting change / confirmation history screen in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a figure showing an example when “clear” is selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 13 is a view showing an example of a data clear screen in which each history data is cleared on a setting change / confirmation history screen in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, and is a diagram showing an example of an initial screen. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, showing an example when “setting display” is selected. is there. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, showing an example when a setting value is newly added and displayed. FIG. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, showing an example when “Page” is selected. . In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device, showing an example of a page update screen on which a page can be updated. It is. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, in the hole menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, the operation procedure until the setting change / confirmation history screen for confirming the set value is displayed. It is a flowchart which shows an example. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the maintenance processing performed by sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine concerning a 2nd embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example when a maintenance screen is displayed in a display area of a liquid crystal display device. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is an example of a maintenance screen displayed on a display area of a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure showing an example when a guide initial image is displayed on a display area of a liquid crystal display device in a pachinko gaming machine according to a second embodiment. It is a figure showing an example when a unimemo initial image is displayed on a display area of a liquid crystal display device in a pachinko gaming machine according to a second embodiment. It is a figure showing an example when a password request screen is displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. 20 is a flowchart illustrating a first modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an authentication process in a first modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, in the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU, when the setting change / confirmation history processing is executed, the password request screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example displayed in a display area. It is an example of a password request screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, in the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU, a screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the input password is inappropriate. It is a figure showing the example of. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the setting value is confirmed on the hole menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of an operation procedure until a setting change / confirmation history screen in which the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed. FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a volume switch that generates a volume password applied to an authentication process in a second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. . It is a flowchart which shows an example of the authentication process in the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU, when the setting change / confirmation history processing is executed, the password request screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example displayed in a display area. It is an example of a volume password request display screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change / confirmation history information set value confirming procedure in a modified example 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 21 is a view illustrating a configuration example of a gaming system according to a third modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history processing in the pachinko gaming machine which comprises the gaming system which concerns on the modification 3 in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. 16 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change / confirmation history process in the portable wireless communication terminal and the server device of the gaming system according to Modification 3 in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example of a setting change / confirmation history screen including a two-dimensional code in the pachinko gaming machine of the gaming system according to Modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change / confirmation history information in the gaming system which concerns on the modification 3 in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a two-dimensional code display screen in a portable radio communication terminal of a game system concerning modification 3 in a pachinko gaming machine according to a second embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a password input screen in a portable radio communication terminal of a game system according to a third modification in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 17 is a view illustrating an example of a setting change / confirmation history screen in a portable wireless communication terminal of a gaming system according to Modification 3 in a pachinko gaming machine according to a second embodiment. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the first example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. It is an example of a hit random number determination table stored in the main ROM of the main control circuit in the first example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. It is an example of a symbol determination table (first starting port, second starting port) stored in the main ROM of the main control circuit in the first example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. It is an example of the big hit type determination table stored in the main ROM of the main control circuit in the first example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. In the first example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, it is a table stored in the main ROM, and is an example of a variable time determination table of a special symbol for a low start. In the first example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, it is a table stored in the main ROM, and is an example of a variable time determination table for a special symbol for a high start. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the small hit | winning | winning effect production process performed by sub CPU in 1st Example of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is an example of a flowchart of the index effect processing executed by the sub CPU 201 in the first example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. It is an example showing a flow chart of a standby compulsion suppression effect process executed by the sub CPU in the first example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. In the first example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, it is another example of the flowchart of the small hit winning effect production process executed by the sub CPU. It is an example showing a flowchart of the premiere effect control processing executed by the sub CPU in the first example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. In the first example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, it is a table stored in the main ROM, and is an example of a variable time determination table for a special symbol for a high start. In the first example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the control by the main CPU 101 and the effect by the sub CPU 201 in the “high-accuracy time-saving gaming state”, the “high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state” or the “low-accuracy time-saving gaming state” It is a time chart showing the relationship with control, (a) in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the second special lottery is derived in the order of "losing" → "small hit" → "big hit" (B) In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, this is an example of the case where the result of the second special lottery is derived in the order of “losing” → “small hit” → “big hit”. In the second example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the symbol determination tables (the first starting port and the second starting port) stored in the main ROM of the main control circuit include "high-precision time-saving games". It is an example of a table referred to in the “state” and the “low-probability time-saving gaming state”. It is an example of a front view showing an appearance of a game board unit in a third example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. In the third example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, a variation time determination table executed by the main CPU when the transition from the “high-precision time-saving gaming state” to the “high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state” 9 is a flowchart illustrating a setting process. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the fourth example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation time determination table setting process performed by the main CPU101 at the time of completion | finish of the small hitting gaming state in the 4th Example of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a view showing a table stored in the main ROM and showing a variable time determination table of a special symbol for a middle start in a modification of the fourth example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation | change_time determination table setting process performed by the main CPU in the modification of 4th Example of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is an example of a front view showing an appearance of a game board unit in a fifth example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. It is an example of a front view showing an appearance of a game board unit in a sixth example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. It is a table stored in the main ROM in the sixth example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, and is a diagram showing another example of a variable time determination table of a special symbol for a high start. FIG. 16 is a view showing another example of the variable time determination table of the special symbol for low start in the sixth example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. In the sixth example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, it is a table stored in the main ROM, and is an example of a variable time determination table of a special symbol for a high start. In the sixth example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined to be a very long fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation G), the fluctuation time executed by the main CPU It is a flowchart which shows a determination table setting process. It is an example of a front view showing an appearance of a game board unit in a seventh example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. It is an example of a front view showing an appearance of a game board unit in an eighth example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment and a modification of the eighth example. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit in a modification of the modification of the eighth example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. It is an example of a front view showing an appearance of a game board unit in a first example of a pachinko gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment. It is an example of a front view showing an appearance of a game board unit in a second example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. It is an example of a front view showing an appearance of a game board unit in a third example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. It is an example of a front view showing an appearance of a game board unit in a fourth example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. It is an example of a symbol determination table (first starting port, second starting port) stored in the main ROM of the main control circuit in the fourth example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. It is an example of the big hit type determination table stored in the main ROM of the main control circuit in the fourth example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment.

[1. Pachinko gaming machine according to first embodiment]
[Configuration of gaming machines]
First, the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing an appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing an appearance of the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the operation button group. FIG. 4 is an example of a perspective view showing the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention from the rear side. FIG. 5 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 is an example showing an external perspective view of a game board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is an example showing an exploded perspective view of the game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front right upper right side. FIG. 8 is an example of a front view showing an LED unit including first and second special symbol display portions. The directions shown in the drawings are directions in front view. Therefore, for example, “left” in the right direction of the drawing means “right” on the drawing as “left” in the front view because the drawing is a rear view. Similarly, in the case where “right” is described in the left direction of the drawing, “left” in the drawing is “right” in the front view for the same reason.

  In the following description, the front-rear direction is defined as the front side when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player and the back side as the rear side, unless otherwise specified. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player, the left-hand side is defined as the left side, and the right-hand side is defined as the right side, and the left-right direction is defined. Further, the front is a surface that is visible when viewed from the player side, and the back is a surface that is visible when viewed from the opposite side of the player.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2 and FIGS. 4 to 7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a wooden frame 11, a base door 12, a glass door 13, a plate unit 14, a firing device 15, a liquid crystal display device 16, and a game board unit. 17, a payout unit 18 and a substrate unit 19.

  The wooden frame 11 is a substantially rectangular frame when viewed from the front. The wooden frame 11 is provided with an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The base door 12 is fitted into the opening 21 of the wooden frame 11. The base door 12 supports various members. Specifically, the base door 12 supports the payout unit 18 and the board unit 19 on the back side, and has the glass door 13, the dish unit 14, the firing device 15, the liquid crystal display device 16, and the game board unit 17 on the front side. Support.

  The glass door 13 is attached to the base door 12 so as to be openable and closable. The glass door 13 is provided with an opening 22 and an operation button group 66. A transparent protective glass 23 is disposed in the opening 22 of the glass door 13. The protection glass 23 is disposed so as to face a game board unit 17 described later in the front-rear direction in a state where the glass door 13 is closed with respect to the base door 12. In addition, a speaker 24 and an LED 25 are provided above the glass door 13. The speaker 24 performs, for example, a voice notification, an effect, an error notification, and the like. The LED 25 is, for example, a light emitting unit for performing an announcement with light or performing an effect. The LED 25 is not limited to the LED as long as the light emitting effect can be executed, and may be, for example, a lamp.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the operation button group 66 has a main button 662 and a select button 664. The select button 664 has an upper select button 664a, a lower select button 664b, a left select button 664c, and a right select button 664d. In the following, the term “select button 664” means a general term for the up / down / left / right select buttons 664a to 664d.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can perform an operation on a later-described guide menu screen, hole menu screen, or the like using at least one or both of the main button 662 and the select button 664. The position at which the operation button group 66 is provided is not limited to the glass door 13, and may be provided on the plate unit 14, for example, on the upper plate 26 or the like.

  The plate unit 14 is a unit body in which the upper plate 26 and the lower plate 27 are integrated. The plate unit 14 is arranged at a lower front part of the base door 12 and below the glass door 13.

  The upper plate 26 stores game balls, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 26 are fired from the launch device 15 toward a game area 20 described later. The upper plate 26 is provided with a payout port 61 and an effect button 62. Game balls to be lent out or game balls to be paid out as prize balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26. The effect button 62 is a so-called “CHANCE button”, a “push button”, or the like. The effect button 62 may have a predetermined effect function in addition to the operation function operated by the player. The predetermined effect function corresponds to, for example, a function of projecting upward based on a result of a special symbol big hit determination described later.

  The lower plate 27 is mainly for storing game balls overflowing from the upper plate 26. The lower plate 27 is provided with a payout port 63. The game balls overflowing from the upper plate 26 are paid out from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27.

  The firing device 15 is for firing game balls stored in the upper plate 26 toward the game area 20. The firing device 15 is disposed at the lower right front of the base door 12 and at the lower right of the plate unit 14. The firing device 15 includes a panel body 31, a driving device (not shown), and a firing handle 32.

  The panel body 31 is integrated with the lower right portion of the dish unit 14 in the firing device 15. The firing handle 32 is arranged on the front side of the panel body 31. The driving device is disposed on the back side of the panel body 31 and is configured by, for example, a firing solenoid (not shown). In this way, in the firing device 15, when the firing handle 32 is operated by the player, a game ball is fired by the operation of the driving device according to the operation.

  Although the details will be described later, the liquid crystal display device 16 displays the result of the special symbol big hit determination (hereinafter, the special symbol big hit determination may be simply referred to as “big hit determination”) and various effect images related to the game. Things. The various effect images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 16 include, for example, an effect identification symbol (decorative design), an effect image according to the result of the jackpot determination, an effect image during the big hit, a demonstration effect image, It includes the number of suspensions of variable display (variable display) of special symbols, and the like. The liquid crystal display device 16 (more specifically, a display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) is disposed substantially at the center of the game board unit 17 (the inner peripheral side of a center rail 1742 described later).

  In the present embodiment, one liquid crystal display device 16 is provided for displaying the various effect images. However, a plurality of liquid crystal display devices are provided, and the effect images are displayed using the plurality of liquid crystal display devices. It may be displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control board 30 having a main control circuit 100 (see FIG. 9 described later) and a sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 9 described later). Sub-control board 40, a payout / firing control board 50 having a payout / firing control circuit 300 (see FIG. 9 described later) for controlling payout / firing of game balls, and a power supply circuit 338 (described later) for supplying power. A power supply unit 60 having a power supply switch 60 (see FIG. 9), a power switch 35, and a backup clear switch 330 (see FIG. 9 described later) are provided.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of set values (six stages of “1” to “6” in the present embodiment) in which various data related to the pachinko game are different. The setting “6” is most advantageous to the player, and as the value of the set value decreases, the advantage for the player gradually decreases.

  In the main board case accommodating the main control board 30, a setting switch 332 operated when changing the set value, a setting key 328 operated when changing or confirming the set value, a performance display monitor 334 and an error notification monitor 336 (both shown in FIG. 9 described later) are accommodated. The performance display monitor 334 displays, for example, performance display data and setting values described later. The error notification monitor 336 displays, for example, an error code described later. Note that the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 are housed in the main control board case in consideration of security, the manager of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (hereinafter, referred to as “gaming machine manager”). This is to prevent a third party (for example, a player) other than) from easily accessing the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328. The inside of the main board case means that the setting switch 332 and / or the setting key 328 cannot be accessed unless the main board case is opened. In addition, only the position corresponding to the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 of the main board case is turned off. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is rotated from the island facility where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed using a key managed by the gaming machine manager and the back surface is exposed, Also includes those in which the responsible person can access the setting switch 332 and / or the setting key 328.

  The game board unit 17 is arranged in front of the base door 12 so as to be located behind the protective glass 23. On the front side surface of the game board unit 17, a game area 20 is formed in which the shot game balls can roll down.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, the game board unit 17 is disposed at a substantially central portion of the game area 20 and a transparent panel 172 in which a game area 20 in which a shot game ball can be rolled down is formed. It includes a center unit 174, a normal electric accessory unit 400, an attacker unit 500, a passage gate 49, and a back unit 176. The center unit 174, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400, the attacker unit 500, and the passage gate 49 are provided on the front side of the transparent panel 172. The back unit 176 decorates the game board unit 17 and is provided behind the transparent panel 172. The back unit 176 includes various accessories such as an upper accessory 1000 (see FIG. 7) disposed above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Each of these special effects 1000 functions as a directing effect that can operate based on the result of the special lottery.

  An opening 1722 is formed in the transparent panel 172 at a position where a display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 described later is arranged. As shown in FIGS. 5 and 7, on the front surface of the transparent panel 172, a guide rail 26 is provided, and game nails and the like are implanted. The game ball fired from the firing device 15 jumps out of the guide rail 26 toward the game area 20 and collides with a game nail or the like and flows downward under the game area 20 while changing the traveling direction.

  The guide rail 26 is configured by two rail-shaped members (hereinafter, referred to as “outer rail 26a” and “inner rail 26b”). The game area 20 is defined (defined) by the guide rail 26. The inner rail 26b, together with the outer rail 26a, is for guiding the fired game balls to an upper portion of the game area 20. The inner rail 26b is arranged on the left side of the transparent panel 172 inside the outer rail 26a.

  The center unit 174 includes a center rail 1742 above the opening 1722 of the transparent panel 172 (above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16), and is formed in an arc shape in a front view. The center rail 1742 is arranged above the game area 20, and divides a flow-down area of a game ball in the game area 20 into left and right sides of the center rail 1742.

  The game balls fired by the firing device 15 are divided into left and right sides of the center rail 1742 and flow down the game area 20, and the game balls flowing down the game area 20 are planted on the game board unit 17 (specifically, the transparent panel 172). Due to a collision with a game nail or the like provided, the water flows downward while changing the traveling direction. The flow-down areas of the shot game balls are distributed according to the operation amount of the shooting handle 52. Specifically, when the operation amount of the firing handle 52 is small, the shot game ball flows down the left area of the center rail 1742. On the other hand, when the operation amount of the firing handle 52 is large, the shot game ball flows down the right area of the center rail 1742. Note that the method of hitting the game ball down the left area of the center rail 1742 is called "left hit", and the method of hitting the game ball down the right area of the center rail 1742 is called "right hit". It is allowed to be separated by a player.

  The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the first starting port 420, the special winning opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is disposed substantially at the lower right in the game area 20 and below the pass gate 49.

  The big winning opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the case of the big hit game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is provided in the special winning opening 540 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins in the special winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the count switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 541, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27).

  The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move forward and backward in the front-rear direction, and a special winning opening solenoid 620 that drives the shutter 610 (see FIG. 9). The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the special winning opening 540. When the shutter 610 is driven by the special winning opening solenoid 620, the special electric accessory 600 is in an open state in which a game ball can be (or easily) won to the special winning opening 540, and the special winning combination 600 It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state where it is impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. The opening drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) shifts to the big hit gaming state based on the result of the big hit determination performed when the game ball wins the first starting port 420 or a second starting port 440 described later. It is performed when it is done. In addition, the result of the big hit determination performed when the game ball has won the first starting port 420 or a second starting port 440 described later is displayed in the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 in the special symbol. Is indicated by the stop display mode.

  In this specification, when simply referred to as “special symbol”, it means both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, in the present embodiment, the number of special symbols is two (first special symbol, second special symbol), but the number of special symbols may be one.

  The first opening 420 provides an opportunity to determine a jackpot on condition that a game ball is won (passed), and causes the result of the jackpot determination to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 or a first special symbol display unit 73 described later. Is to give. The first starting port 420 is provided with a first starting port switch 421 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins in the first starting port 420, the winning game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 421. When a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 421, a big hit determination is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 9), and a predetermined number of game balls are discharged from the payout port 61. It is paid out (discharged) to the upper plate 26 or to the lower plate 27 from the payout port 63. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 is performed by left-handing.

  The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is a unit body in which the second starting port 440, the out port 450, and the ordinary electric accessory 460 are integrated. The normal electric accessory unit 400 is disposed substantially at the lower left of the game area 20. The second starting port 440 and the out port 450 are disposed adjacent to each other, and the second starting port 440 is disposed on the right side in front view, and the out port 450 is disposed on the left side in front view. Conventionally, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 has often been arranged, for example, below the first starting port 420. However, in recent years, the liquid crystal display device 16 has been required to be larger, and it has been difficult to arrange the liquid crystal display device 16 below the first starting port 420. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is arranged substantially at the lower left of the gaming area 20.

  The second opening 440 provides a trigger for a jackpot determination on condition that a game ball is awarded (passed), and causes the result of the jackpot determination to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 or a second special symbol display unit 74 described later. Is to give. The second starting port 440 is provided with a second starting port switch 441 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins in the second starting port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441. When a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441, a big hit determination is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 9), and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out by the payout port 61. From the outlet 63 to the lower plate 27 (discharged). The difficulty of winning the second starting port 440 is determined by the ordinary electric accessory 460. The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is performed by right-hand in principle.

  The normal electric accessory 460 includes a blade member 4620 rotatable rightward, a starting port solenoid 4630 (see, for example, FIG. 9), and a power transmission mechanism (not shown) for transmitting the power of the starting port solenoid 4630 to the blade member 4620. ). When the blade member 4620 is driven by the starting port solenoid 4630, the ordinary electric accessory 460 can shift (drive) between an open state where game balls easily pass and a closed state where game balls hardly pass. Is configured. When a game ball passes above the blade member 4620 while the blade member 4620 is driven, the game ball wins the second starting port 440 or is discharged from the out port 450 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is done. The opening and closing drive by the ordinary electric accessory 460 (blade member 4620) is performed for a predetermined period and a predetermined number of times when the ordinary symbol has a specific stop display mode in the ordinary symbol display unit 71.

  The pass gate 49 normally gives a trigger for symbol determination on condition that a game ball is won (passed). The passage gate 49 is disposed on the lower right side of the center unit 174 and on the upper right side of the attacker unit 500. The passage gate 49 is provided with a passage gate switch 49a (see FIG. 9). When a game ball passes through the passage gate 49, the passed game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 49a. When a game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 49a, a normal symbol determination is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 2). The passing of the game ball to the passing gate 49 is performed by right-handed.

  The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the first starting port 420, the special winning opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is disposed substantially at the lower right of the game area 20. The reason why the attacker unit 500 is arranged substantially at the lower right of the game area 20 is that in recent years it has been required that the liquid crystal display device 16 be made larger, and various members such as the attacker unit 500 are arranged in the game area 20. This is because it is necessary to avoid such a large-sized liquid crystal display device 16.

  The big winning opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the case of the big hit game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is provided in the special winning opening 540 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins in the special winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the count switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 541, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out (discharged) from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27).

  The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move forward and backward in the front-rear direction, and a special winning opening solenoid 620 that drives the shutter 610 (see FIG. 9). The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the special winning opening 540. When the shutter 610 is driven by the special winning opening solenoid 620, the special electric accessory 600 is in an open state in which a game ball can be (or easily) won to the special winning opening 540, and the special winning combination 600 It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state where it is impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. The opening drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) is performed when the special symbol is displayed in a specific stop display mode on the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74, and is shifted to the big hit game state. Done in

  The general winning openings 53, 54 and 55 are arranged at the lower left of the game board unit 17, and the general winning opening 56 is arranged at the lower right of the gaming board unit 17. The general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, and 56a are provided in the general winning opening 53, 54, 55, and 56 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 53, 54, 55, 56, the winning game ball is detected by the general winning opening switch 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a. When a game ball is detected by the general winning opening switch 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27). (Discharged).

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440 have three prize balls, the general winning ports 53, 54, 55, and 56 have 10 prize balls, and the large winning port 540 has three prize balls. The number of prize balls is set to 15, respectively. This value (the number of prize balls) can be arbitrarily changed in design.

  The out port 57 is arranged at the lowermost portion of the center of the game area 20 (the most downstream position in the downflow direction of the game ball). The out port 57 finally flows in when the shot game ball does not win any of the starting ports or winning ports.

  The LED unit 70 is disposed at the lower right of the game board unit 17 and outside the guide rail 41 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). The LED unit 70 is a unit body in which various display units are integrated. Specifically, the LED unit 70 includes a normal symbol display unit 71, a normal symbol holding display unit 72, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74, a first special symbol display unit as the various display units. It has a symbol holding display section 75 and a second special symbol holding display section 76.

  The normal symbol display section 71 displays the result of the determination (normal symbol determination) for the normal symbol game. Here, the ordinary symbol game refers to a game in which it is determined whether or not the ordinary electric accessory 460 is driven to be in an open state based on the result of the determination (ordinary symbol determination). The normal symbol display section 71 includes display LEDs 71a and 71b. When the start condition of the variable display (variable display) is satisfied, the display LEDs 71a and 71b start the variable display that alternately turns on and off. The combination (display pattern) by turning on and off the display LEDs 71a and 71b is usually displayed as a symbol. The display LEDs 71a and 71b perform a stop display after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the variable display.

  When the result of the determination (ordinary symbol determination) is a hit (hereinafter, referred to as “ordinary hit”), a combination of turning on and off the display LEDs 71a and 71b (a normal symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. Thus, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode, it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened, and the ordinary electric accessory 460 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the second starting port is opened. The difficulty of winning the game ball to 440 is changed.

  The normal symbol reserved display section 72 displays the number of times of execution of the variable display of the ordinary symbol that has been suspended (hereinafter, referred to as “the number of suspended ordinary symbol variable display”). The normal symbol hold display section 72 includes display LEDs 72a and 72b. The normal symbol hold display section 72 displays the number of times the normal symbol is fluctuated by a combination of turning on and off the display LEDs 72a and 72b. For example, when the execution of the normal symbol change display is suspended for one time, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned off. In addition, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended twice, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned on. In addition, when the execution of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is suspended three times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b lights up. In addition, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended four times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b blinks.

  The first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74 display the result of the determination (big hit determination) for the special symbol game. Here, the special symbol game refers to a game in which transition or maintenance of the gaming state is determined based on the result of the determination (big hit determination).

  The first special symbol display section 73 includes a display LED group 73a including eight LEDs. The display LED group 73a performs a fluctuation display in response to a prize of a game ball to the first starting port 420 (start prize) and displays a result of a jackpot determination based on the prize of the game ball. When the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, the display LED group 73a starts the variable display in which the eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 73a, a combination (display pattern) of turning on and off the eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 73a performs stop display after a predetermined period has elapsed after starting the variable display.

  When the result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 is a jackpot, a combination of turning on and off (special symbols) of the eight LEDs of the display LED group 73a is a specific stop display mode. . In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode, the transition of the gaming state is determined, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the gaming state in which the gaming ball can enter the special winning opening 540 is set. Become. In the following description, a special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display section 73 based on a winning of a game ball to the first starting port 420 is referred to as a first special symbol.

  The second special symbol display section 74 includes a display LED group 74a including eight LEDs. The display LED group 74a performs a fluctuation display in response to a prize of a game ball to the second starting port 440 (start prize), and displays a result of a jackpot determination based on the prize of the game ball. When the condition for starting the variable display is satisfied, the display LED group 74a starts the variable display in which the eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 74a, a combination (display pattern) of turning on and off the eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 74a performs a stop display after a predetermined period has elapsed after starting the variable display.

  When the result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is a jackpot, a combination of turning on and off (special symbols) of the eight LEDs of the display LED group 74a is a specific stop display mode. . In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode, the transition of the gaming state is determined, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the gaming state in which the gaming ball can enter the special winning opening 540 is set. Become. In the following description, a special symbol that is variably displayed on the second special symbol display section 74 based on a winning of a game ball to the second starting port 440 is referred to as a second special symbol.

  As described above, when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode in the display LED groups 73a and 74a of the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, a normal display is performed. The transition from the gaming state (normal gaming state) to the jackpot gaming state which is a state advantageous to the player is determined. In the present embodiment, the jackpot determination includes a jackpot determination based on a winning of a game ball to the first starting port 420 and a jackpot determination based on a winning of a game ball to the second starting port 440. That is, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the game is shifted to the jackpot game state in which the round game in which the big winning opening 540 is opened is executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

  The first special symbol holding display section 75 and the second special symbol holding display section 76 indicate the number of times of execution of the variable display of the special symbol that has been held (hereinafter, referred to as “the number of held special symbol variable display”). To display. The first special symbol hold display section 75 includes display LEDs 75a and 75b. The second special symbol holding display section 76 includes display LEDs 76a and 76b. The first special symbol hold display section 75 and the second special symbol hold display section 76 display the number of changes in the special symbol change display by turning on / off the display LEDs 75a / 75b and 76a / 76b. The display mode of turning on / off the display LEDs 75a / 75b and 76a / 76b is the same as the display LEDs 72a / 72b of the normal symbol hold display section 72.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the back unit 176 decorates the game board unit 17, and is provided with an upper front accessory 1000 disposed above a display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 and a rear of the upper front accessory 1000. An upper back part 1100 disposed on the side and above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 21); a lower part 1200 disposed below the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16; A corner accessory 1300 (see, for example, FIG. 21) in which a movable body, which will be described later, is located at four corners of the display area of the device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 21), and is arranged on the right of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. A side accessory 1400, a middle panel 1500, an attacker ball gutter 1600, a main board case 1700, and a main board case 1700 which accommodates each of the above accessories and is unitized. And a rear box 1800 that. Details of each of the accessories 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, and 1400 included in the back unit 176 will be described later.

  In the following, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above, an outline of the internal processing by the main CPU 101 when a game ball has won the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440 will be described.

  When a game ball wins in the first starting port 5442, the winning game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 5472, and the starting memory for the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 5442 is stored. Is suspended (the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended). As for the suspension of the start memory for the first special symbol, both the change display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display unit 73 and the change display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display unit 74 are executed. It is canceled on condition that there is no. That is, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 5442 during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the holding of the start memory is released after the special symbol in the fluctuation display is stopped and displayed. If a game ball wins in the first starting port 5442 when the variable display is not performed for any of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the holding of the starting memory is immediately released. When the holding of the start-up memory is released, the first special symbol display unit 73 starts to display the change of the first special symbol.

  When a game ball wins in the second starting port 440, the winning ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441, and the change display of the second special symbol based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 440 is performed. Is suspended (variable display of the second special symbol is suspended). As for the suspension of the start memory for the second special symbol, both the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74 are displayed. It is canceled on condition that there is no. That is, when a game ball wins in the second starting port 440 during the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the holding of the start memory is released after the special symbol being displayed in the variation display is stopped and displayed. When a game ball wins in the second starting port 440 when the variable display is not performed for any of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the holding of the starting memory is immediately released. When the suspension of the start memory is released, the second special symbol display unit 74 starts displaying the second special symbol in a variable manner.

  In the first special symbol display section 73 and the second special symbol display section 74, the special symbols (first and second special symbols) do not change at the same time. That is, while the variable display of the special symbol is performed on one of the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, the variable display of the special symbol is not performed on the other display unit. . In the present embodiment, when both the start memory for the first special symbol and the start memory for the second special symbol are held, regardless of which start memory is held first, the second special symbol is held. Priority is given to the release of the hold of the start memory for, and the second special symbol display unit 73 displays the variation of the second special symbol.

  Also, an upper limit is set for the number of times of suspension of the variable display of the first and second special symbols. In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times the variable display is suspended for the first and second special symbols is set to four each. Therefore, the maximum number of times the special symbol is fluctuated is eight times, which is the sum of the number of times the special symbol fluctuating display is held by winning the first starting port 5442 and the second starting port 440.

  In addition, during the change of the first or second special symbol in the first special symbol display section 73 and the second special symbol display section 74, the identification symbol consisting of a number is changed on the liquid crystal display device 16 except in a specific case. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, symbols from “1” to “8” are used as the numbers. In addition, the identification symbol variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is stopped while the first or second special symbol being variably displayed on the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74 is stopped. Is displayed. In addition, the identification symbol is also used as identification information for effect.

  Further, when the first or second special symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display section 73 and the second special symbol display section 74 is in a specific stop display mode, the player is notified that it is a hit. The effect image to be displayed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In this embodiment, as described later, a plurality of types of hits are provided. Further, a specific stop display mode when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed is set corresponding to the type of hit. In such a configuration, the combination of the identification symbols stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is a specific display that can be recognized by the player according to the specific stop display mode of the first or second special symbol. It becomes an aspect. This allows the player to recognize the type of the hit in addition to the hit. In addition, some of the types of hits have a specific display mode that makes it difficult for the player to recognize the first or second special symbol according to the specific stop display mode. According to this, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that it is a hit and the type of the hit.

[Electrical configuration of gaming machine]
Next, a control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly includes a main control circuit 100 for controlling a game, a sub-control circuit 200 for controlling an effect in accordance with the progress of the game, and a payout / launch control circuit 300. And a power supply circuit 338.

  The main control circuit 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (read only memory), a main RAM 103 (read / write memory), and the like, and is housed in a main board case.

  The main CPU 101 is connected to a main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, and the like. The main CPU 101 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 102.

  The main ROM 102 stores a program for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 101, various tables, and the like.

  The main RAM 103 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 101, and can store written information even in a non-energized state. In the present embodiment, the main RAM 103 is used as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 101. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a readable and writable storage medium may be used.

  The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area in which information on the special symbol game is stored as start-up memory. Specifically, in the main RAM 103, a first special symbol start storage area (0) in which information of a special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol is stored as a start memory, There are provided a first special symbol start storage area (1) to a first special symbol start storage area (4) in which information of a special symbol game corresponding to the special symbol is stored as start memory. Similarly, in the main RAM 103, a second special symbol start storage area (0) in which information of a special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is stored as a start memory, and a second special symbol storage area of up to four times. There are provided a second special symbol start storage area (1) to a second special symbol start storage area (4) in which information of a special symbol game corresponding to the symbol is stored as start memory.

  Further, the main control circuit 100 includes an initial reset circuit 104 that generates a reset signal when power is turned on, an I / O port 105, a command output port 106, a backup capacitor 107, and the like. The initial reset circuit 104 is connected to the main CPU 101. The I / O port 105 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 101 and transmits output signals from the main CPU 101 to various devices. The command output port 106 transmits a command from the main CPU 101 to the sub control circuit 200. The backup capacitor 107 retains various data stored in the main RAM 103 by, for example, quickly supplying power to the main RAM 103 when power is turned off (power is turned off).

  Various devices (members) are connected to the main control circuit 100.

  For example, the main control circuit 100 includes a normal symbol display section 71, a normal symbol hold display section 72, a first special symbol display section 73, a second special symbol display section 74, a first special symbol hold display section 75, The second special symbol holding display section 76, the starting port solenoid 4630 for driving the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460, the big winning port solenoid 620 for driving the shutter 610, and the like are connected. The main control circuit 100 can control the operation of these devices (members) by transmitting signals. In addition, the main control circuit 100 transmits data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk, a function of displaying the number of big hits, and a hall computer 700 that manages a pachinko gaming machine in the entire hall. An external terminal plate 323 to be used is connected.

  In the main control circuit 100, a first starting port switch 421, a second starting port switch 441, a passing gate switch 49a, a count switch 541, a general winning opening switch 53a / 54a / 55a / 56a, a performance display monitor 334, etc. Is connected. When a game ball is detected by these members, the main control circuit 100 is supplied with a predetermined detection signal from the member. Further, the main control circuit 100 is connected to a backup clear switch 330 for clearing backup data at the time of power failure in accordance with an operation of a game arcade manager.

  Further, a setting key 328 and a setting switch 332 are also connected to the main control circuit 100. The setting key 328 is similar to a key or a key that triggers execution of a setting change process and a setting confirmation process described later. The setting switch 332 is operable to be pressed, and is used to change a set value set in a setting change process described later. As described above, the setting key 328 and the setting switch 332 are accommodated in the main board case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the gaming machine manager cannot easily access the setting key.

  The main control circuit 100 is connected to a payout / firing control circuit 300. The payout / firing control circuit 300 is connected to a payout device 340 for paying out game balls, a firing device 15 for firing game balls, a card unit 360, and the like. The payout device 340 is provided in the payout unit 18. A ball lending operation panel 370 is connected to the card unit 360, and a signal is supplied to the ball lending operation panel 370 according to a player's operation.

  Upon receiving the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 100 and the lending ball control signal supplied from the card unit 360, the payout / firing control circuit 300 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 340, Control is performed to cause the payout device 340 to pay out game balls. When the firing handle 32 is gripped and rotated clockwise by the player, the payout / firing control circuit 300 controls the firing solenoid (shown in FIG. 4) in accordance with the rotation angle (the amount of rotation). ) To control the firing of the game ball.

  Further, the sub-control circuit 200 (command input port 208) is connected to the command output port 106. The sub-control circuit 200 performs display control on the liquid crystal display device 16, control on sound generated from the speaker 24, control on light of the LED 25, and the like in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

  In the present embodiment, a command is supplied from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200, but a signal is not supplied from the sub-control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The control circuit 200 may be configured to transmit a signal to the main control circuit 100.

  The sub-control circuit 200 includes a sub-CPU 201, a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203 functioning as a backup memory, a display control circuit 204, a voice control circuit 205, an LED control circuit 206, an accessory control circuit 207, a command input port 208, and the like. The sub-control circuit 200 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 100. The sub-control circuit 200 includes an effect button switch 621 that is turned on / off by an operation of the effect button 62, a main button switch 6621 that is turned on / off by an operation of the main button 662, and a select button 664a to 664d. Select button switches 6641a to 6641d that are turned ON / OFF by operation are connected. Note that, in practice, select button switches 6641a to 6641d corresponding to the select buttons 664a to 664d are provided, respectively. However, in FIG. 9, these are collectively referred to as a select button switch 6641.

  The sub CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the program ROM 202. In particular, the sub CPU 201 controls the sub control circuit 200 according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

  The program ROM 202 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the sub CPU 201, various tables, and the like.

  In the present embodiment, the main ROM 102 and the program ROM 202 are used as storage means for storing programs, tables, and the like. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If it is, another mode may be used. For example, a storage medium such as a hard disk drive, a CD-ROM, a DVD-ROM, and a ROM cartridge may be used as the storage unit. Further, the programs, tables, and the like may not be recorded in advance, but may be downloaded after power-on and recorded in the work RAM 203 or the like. Further, the programs, tables, and the like may be recorded on different storage media.

  The work RAM 203 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201. In the present embodiment, the work RAM 203 is used as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a read / write storage medium may be used.

  The display control circuit 204 is a circuit for performing display control on the liquid crystal display device 16. The display control circuit 204 includes an image data processor (hereinafter, referred to as VDP), an image data ROM storing data for generating various image data, a frame buffer for buffering the image data, and an image signal A D / A converter or the like for converting the data as is provided.

  The display control circuit 204 can perform various processes for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 16 according to data supplied from the sub CPU 201. The display control circuit 204 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in a frame buffer according to an image display command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Note that the image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 includes various image data relating to the game, such as decorative design image data indicating a decorative design, background image data, and effect image data.

  Then, the display control circuit 204 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the liquid crystal display device 16 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the liquid crystal display device 16, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In this way, the display control circuit 204 can perform control to display an image related to a game on the liquid crystal display device 16.

  The audio control circuit 205 is a circuit for controlling audio generated from the speaker 24. The audio control circuit 205 includes a sound source IC for controlling audio, an audio data ROM for storing various types of audio data, an amplifier for amplifying audio signals (hereinafter, referred to as AMP), and the like.

  The sound source IC controls a sound generated from the speaker 24. The sound source IC selects one audio data from a plurality of audio data stored in the audio data ROM according to an audio generation command supplied from the sub CPU 201. The sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies an audio signal and generates a sound from the speaker 24.

  The LED control circuit 206 is a circuit for controlling the LEDs 25 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 206 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM storing a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns, and the like.

  The accessory control circuit 207 is a circuit for controlling each accessory. The accessory control circuit 207 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each accessory, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and an accessory data ROM in which an operation pattern and a lighting pattern are stored. Etc.

  Further, the drive circuit selects one operation pattern from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in accordance with the accessory operation command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Then, the mechanical operation of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected operation pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Then, the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected lighting pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

  The command input port 208 receives a command transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

  The payout / firing control circuit 300 controls the payout of prize balls and ball rentals from the pachinko gaming machine 1. The payout / firing control circuit 300 includes a payout device 350 for paying out gaming balls, A launching device 340 for launching a ball, a backup clear switch 330 for clearing backup data at the time of a power failure in response to an operation of a game room manager, and the like are connected.

  The power supply circuit 338 is a power supply circuit created to supply a power supply voltage required for performing a game with the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the main control circuit 100, the sub control circuit 200, the payout / fire control circuit 300, and the like. .

  The power supply circuit 338 is connected to the power switch 35 and the like. The power switch 35 is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The setting key 328 and the setting switch 332 are connected to the main control circuit 100 as described above, but may be connected to the power supply circuit 338 instead. Even in this case, it is preferable that the information is stored in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the gaming machine manager cannot easily access the setting switch 332 or the setting key 328. . Even in such a case, the inside of a predetermined case includes not only a case where the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 cannot be accessed unless the case is opened, but also a case where the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 of the case correspond. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is rotated from the island facility where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed using the key managed by the gaming machine manager and the back is exposed, , And those in which the gaming machine manager can access the setting switch 332 and / or the setting key 328.

  Here, display contents displayed on the performance display monitor 334 will be described. Performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 under the control of the main CPU 101. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating a ratio of game balls paid out in a state other than the jackpot game state to a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 shots) of game balls, and is also referred to as a base value.

  The payout / firing control circuit 300 totals the base values based on the past game history, and stores the totaled result in a specific work area described later in the work area of the main RAM 103. Although the specific work area will be described later, it is an area in which data is not cleared even if a backup clear process described later is performed. Note that the base value may be totaled based on the fact that a predetermined operation has been performed, or that the base value may be constantly displayed so that the base value is always displayed on the performance display monitor 334. .

  The payout / firing control circuit 300 includes: all history totaling means for totalizing all base values based on all game histories from the initial power-on (the first power-on after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is manufactured) to the present; A set value-based history tallying means for executing tallying of set value-based base values based on past game histories for each set value.

  For example, when the display operation of all the base values is performed by the game machine manager or the like, the all history totaling means executes the totalization of the above all base values. All base values totalized by the all history totaling means are displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101. When the display operation of the set value-based base values is performed, the set value-based history tallying means executes the tally of the set value-based base values. The set value-based base values totaled by the set value-specific history totaling means are displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101.

  The set value-based history totaling means can also total only the base value for an arbitrary set value in response to a request (operation). In this case, not only the base value of the set value that has been set, but also the base value of another set value other than the set value can be totaled. Therefore, the main CPU 101 can display the base value of another set value on the performance display monitor 334 without executing the setting change process described later.

  In addition, the main CPU 101, for example, in response to an operation by a game machine manager or the like, both the total base value totalized by the total history totalizing means and the set value-based base value totalized by the set value-specific history totaling means Can be displayed on the performance display monitor 334, or only one of them can be selectively displayed on the performance display monitor 334.

  Further, the main CPU 101 may display only the base value of a specific set value on the performance display monitor 334, or may display the base values of all the set values in a list. Alternatively, both the total base value and the set value-specific base values may be displayed in a list. When displaying the base values of all the set values in a list, or displaying both the all base values and the base values for each set value in a list, both the performance display monitor 334 and other display means are used. It may be displayed.

  In addition, the main CPU 101 includes a total history totalizing unit and a set value-specific history totalizing unit. A post-setting change history totaling unit that totals the post-setting base value based on the game history may be provided. In this case, the main CPU 101 can display the set value-specific base value after the setting change on the performance display monitor 334 based on the display operation of the setting-changed base value.

  In this way, by displaying all or a part of the entire base value and the set value-based base value and / or the set value-based base value after the setting change on the performance display monitor 334, the pachinko game is performed. It is possible to easily confirm information based on past game history in the machine 1.

  In this embodiment, the base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. However, the total number of game balls to be paid out is paid by entering a special electric accessory (large winning opening) or a normal electric accessory. You may make it display the ratio of the number of game balls issued (payout by the accessory). Further, it may be a display for the total number of shots, or may be a display for the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the special electric auditors (large winning opening). They may be displayed for each setting.

  The error notification monitor 336 displays an error code described later. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 336 may display a setting change code indicating that a setting change process described later is being performed, a setting checking code indicating that a setting check process is being described later, and the like. it can. During the setting change, a symbol (setting change symbol) which is not normally displayed on the special symbol display device may be displayed.

  Next, a functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a view illustrating a functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko game is a game in which a game ball is fired by a user's operation, and a payout control process of the game ball is performed when the game ball wins various kinds. The pachinko game includes a special symbol game using a special symbol and a normal symbol game using a normal symbol.

  When a "big hit" in a special symbol game or a "normal hit" in a normal symbol game, the possibility of winning a game ball is relatively increased, and a payout control process of the game ball is performed. It will be easier.

  In addition, in various winnings, a special symbol start winning prize, which is one condition for performing the special symbol variable display in the special symbol game, and one condition for performing the normal symbol variable display in the normal symbol game. It also includes a regular symbol start winning prize.

  Hereinafter, an outline of the processing flow of the special symbol game and the ordinary symbol game will be described. The special symbol game and the normal symbol game are executed by the main CPU 101 as control processing.

  (1) When a special symbol start prize is won in the special symbol game, various random numbers (for example, a random number for a jackpot determination and a random number for a symbol determination) ) Are extracted (acquired), and the extracted random numbers are stored (see the flow of the special symbol start winning process in the special symbol game shown in FIG. 10).

  As shown in FIG. 10, in the special symbol control process during the special symbol game, first, it is determined whether or not a condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. In this discriminating process, it is referred to whether or not various data such as random numbers are stored by a special symbol starting prize, and the condition that various data such as random numbers are stored is used as one condition to display the fluctuation of the special symbol. It is determined that the condition for starting is satisfied.

  Next, when the change display of the special symbol is started, the big hit determination random number value extracted from the big hit determination counter is referred to, and a big hit determination as to whether or not the big hit is made is performed. After that, a stop symbol determination process is performed. In this process, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by referring to the symbol determination random number value extracted from the symbol determination counter and the result of the above-described big hit determination.

  Next, a variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the fluctuation pattern determination counter, and the random number value, the result of the above-described big hit determination, and the above-described special symbol to be stopped and displayed are referred to, and the special symbol variation pattern (variable display pattern) is referred to. ).

  Next, an effect pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the effect pattern determination counter, and the random number value, the result of the above-described big hit determination, the above-described special symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the above-described special symbol variation pattern are referred to, The effect pattern to be executed in accordance with the special symbol change display is determined.

  Next, as a result of the determined big hit determination, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the effect pattern accompanying the variation display of the special symbol are referred to, and the variation display control process for controlling the variation display of the special symbol is performed. And, an effect control process for performing a predetermined effect is executed.

  Then, when the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not a “big hit” is achieved. In this determination process, if it is determined that "big hit" has been reached, a big hit game state control process for performing a big hit game state is executed. In the big hit game state, the possibility of the various winnings described above increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the “big hit” has not been achieved, the big hit gaming state control process is not executed.

  When it is determined that the “big hit” has not been achieved, or when the big hit game state control processing has been completed, a game state shift control processing for shifting the game state is performed. In this game state transition control processing, management of a normal game state different from the big hit game state is performed.

  As the normal game state, for example, in the above-mentioned big hit determination, a game state (hereinafter, referred to as “normal game state”) determined to be “big hit” with a predetermined probability or a probability determined to be “big hit” is A gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as a “high-probability gaming state”) that is greater than the normal gaming state, or a gaming state in which a special symbol starting prize is likely to be obtained as a result of an ordinary hit determination described below (hereinafter, referred to as a “time reduction gaming state”) ). Thereafter, a determination process is performed again to determine whether to start the variable display of the special symbol, and thereafter, the various processes of the above-described special symbol control process are repeated.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a game ball starts and wins during the special symbol change display, various data extracted at the time of the start winning (such as a random number value for determining a big hit, a random number value for determining a symbol, and the like). ) Are stored until the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. As described above, storing various data (for example, a random number value for determining a big hit) until the condition for starting the change display of the special symbol is satisfied is referred to as “holding”, and the various data to be held is referred to as start storage.

  That is, when the game ball wins during the special symbol fluctuation display, the execution of the special symbol fluctuation display corresponding to the start winning is suspended, and is suspended after the currently executed special symbol fluctuation display ends. The special symbols are displayed in order. Hereinafter, various data on the reserved special symbols are also referred to as “reserved balls”.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as described later, two types of special symbol starting prizes (first and second starting opening prizes) are provided, and up to four special symbol starting prizes are provided for each special symbol starting prize. Until the execution of the special symbol change display can be suspended. That is, in the present embodiment, the execution of the variable display of the special symbol can be suspended up to a maximum of eight in total of four first special symbols and four second special symbols.

  Although not shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment determines a hit of a reserved ball (whether a “big hit” has been won) based on the information of the reserved ball described above, It has a function of performing a predetermined effect based on the determination result, that is, a look-ahead effect function.

  (2) When a normal symbol start prize is won in the normal symbol game, a random value is extracted from the ordinary hit determination counter and the random value is stored (the normal symbol start in the normal symbol game shown in FIG. 10). Refer to the winning process flow).

  As shown in FIG. 10, in the normal symbol control process during the normal symbol game, first, it is determined whether or not a condition for starting the variable symbol display is satisfied. In this determination process, it is referred to whether or not the random number value is stored by the normal symbol start winning, and it is determined that the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied as one condition that the random number value is stored. Determine.

  Next, when the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started, the random number value extracted from the ordinary hit determination counter is referred to, and the ordinary hit determination as to whether or not “normal hit” is performed is performed. Thereafter, a variation pattern determination process is performed. In this processing, the result of the ordinary hit determination is referred to to determine the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol.

  Next, the result of the determined normal hit determination and the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol are referred to, and the variation display control process of controlling the variation display of the ordinary symbol and the effect control process of performing a predetermined effect are executed. .

  When the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not “normal hit” is achieved. In this determination process, when it is determined that "normal hit" is achieved, a normal hit game control process for performing a normal hit game is executed.

  In the normal winning game control processing, the possibility of the various winnings described above, especially the possibility of the special symbol starting winning of the game ball in the special symbol game increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that it does not become "normal hit", the normal hit game control processing is not executed. Thereafter, a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the normal symbol is performed again, and thereafter, the above-described various processes of the normal symbol control process are repeated.

  As described above, in the pachinko game, the payout of the game ball depends on conditions such as whether or not a “big hit” is obtained in the special symbol game, a transition state of the gaming state, and whether or not the “simple hit” is generated in the normal symbol game. The ease with which the control process is performed changes.

  In the present embodiment, as a method of extracting various random numbers, a soft random number method in which a random number value is generated within a predetermined range (width) by executing a program by the main CPU 101 is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine includes a random number generator in which random numbers are updated at predetermined intervals, a random number value is counted from a counter (so-called ring counter) in the random number generator. May be adopted as the above-described method for extracting various random numbers.

  When the hard random number method is used, the initial value of the random number value is determined at a timing different from the predetermined period, thereby preventing the same random number value from being extracted in the predetermined period.

[Liquid crystal display]
The liquid crystal display device 16 is composed of liquid crystal, and performs various effect displays in its display area.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, an effect image related to (corresponding to) a special symbol displayed on a special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) described later is displayed in the display area. Will be displayed. At this time, for example, when a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner in the special symbol portion (the first special symbol display portion 73, the second special symbol display portion 74), for example, 1 to 8 except for a specific case. A plurality of effect identification symbols (decorative symbols) including numbers, various characters, and the like are variably displayed in the display area.

  When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol portion (the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74), a plurality of identification symbols corresponding to the special symbol are also stopped and displayed in the display area. You.

  When the special symbol stopped and displayed in the special symbol portion (the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74) is in a specific mode (the result of the stop display is "big hit"). In the display area, an effect image for causing the player to know that the game is a "big hit" is displayed.

  As an effect for causing the player to recognize that it is a “big hit”, for example, first, a plurality of stopped and displayed identification symbols are arranged in a specific mode (for example, a mode in which the same identification symbols are arranged in a predetermined direction). ), And thereafter, an effect of displaying an image for notifying “big hit” is given.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an effect image related to display contents of a first special symbol hold display section 75 and a second special symbol hold display section 76 described later is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. For example, in the display area, holding information (for example, the same number of holding symbols as the number of holding symbols) for notifying the holding number (starting storage number) of variable display of special symbols is displayed. Further, for example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a pre-reading effect is performed based on the information of the specially-designated reserved ball, and a notice at this time is also displayed in the display area.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the ordinary symbol stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display unit 71 described later is in a predetermined mode, an effect image for allowing the player to grasp the information is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. A function for displaying may be further provided.

[Special symbol display]
The special symbol display units (the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74) are arranged at the lower right of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) is a display device that variably displays (variable display and stop display) special symbols in a special symbol game. In the present embodiment, a special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) is configured by a 7-segment display that displays a special symbol with a symbol such as a number or a symbol.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol display units (the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74) may be configured by, for example, a plurality of LEDs. In this case, a display pattern formed by turning on and off a plurality of LEDs is represented as a special symbol.

  The special symbol display section (the first special symbol display section 73 and the second special symbol display section 74) is triggered by the fact that the game ball has won the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440 (special symbol starting prize). , The special symbols (identification information) are displayed in a variable manner. Then, the special symbol display units (the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74) perform the special symbol change display for a predetermined time, and then perform the stop display of the special symbol.

  Hereinafter, a special symbol that is variably displayed when the game ball has won the first starting port 5442 is referred to as a first special symbol. In addition, a special symbol that is variably displayed when the game ball has won the second starting port 440 is referred to as a second special symbol.

  In the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 73, second special symbol display section 74), the first special symbol or the second special symbol stopped and displayed is in a specific mode ("big hit" mode). In, the gaming state shifts from the general gaming state that is not the big hit gaming state to the big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

  That is, in the special symbol display section (the first special symbol display section 73, the second special symbol display section 74), the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a state of shifting to the big hit game state. "Big hit".

  In the big hit game state, the special winning opening 53 is opened. Specifically, in this embodiment, the game ball wins the first starting port 5442, and the first special symbol is specified in the special symbol display section (the first special symbol display section 73, the second special symbol display section 74). When the stop display is performed in the mode described above, the special winning opening 53 is opened.

  The open state of each big winning opening is maintained until a predetermined number of game balls are won or a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. Then, when any one of these conditions is satisfied, the large winning opening that has been open is closed.

  Hereinafter, a game in which the special winning opening 53 is in a state (open state) in which game balls can be easily received is referred to as a round game. Between the round games, the special winning opening is closed.

  The round game is counted as the number of rounds such as one round and two rounds. For example, the first round game is referred to as a first round, and the second round game is referred to as a second round.

  In the special symbol display section (the first special symbol display section 73 and the second special symbol display section 74), when the special symbol stopped and displayed is in a mode other than the specific mode (the mode of "losing"). The game state does not shift except when the lottery is won.

  In other words, in the special symbol game, the special symbols are displayed by the special symbol display units (the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74), and then the special symbols are stopped and displayed. This is a game in which the state is shifted or maintained.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 5442 during the change display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first special symbol corresponding to the winning is changed. The display (holding ball) is held.

  Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the held first special symbol is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays of the first special symbol to be retained (so-called “reserved number (the number of retained balls)”) is defined as a maximum of four times (pieces).

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a game ball wins in the second starting port 440 during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the winning (reserved ball). Is suspended.

  Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol that has been held is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays of the second special symbols to be held (the number of held symbols) is defined as a maximum of four times (pieces). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of variable display of special symbols is eight in total.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are mixed, the variable display of one special symbol is executed with higher priority than the variable display of the other special symbol. . Specifically, the reserved ball of the second special symbol is preferentially digested over the reserved ball of the first special symbol. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and when the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the reserved balls of the second special symbol are mixed, the special symbol may be changed and displayed in the reserved order.

[Normal symbol display section]
The normal symbol display section 71 is arranged at the lower right of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. And in this embodiment, the normal symbol display part 71 is arrange | positioned at the left side of the special symbol display part (1st special symbol display part 73, 2nd special symbol display part 74), when it sees from a player side.

  The normal symbol display unit 71 is a display device that variably displays (variable display and stop display) a normal symbol in a normal symbol game, and the normal symbol display unit 71 includes a plurality of LEDs (ordinary symbol display LEDs). . Then, in the ordinary symbol display section 71, a display pattern formed by turning on / off each ordinary symbol display LED is represented as an ordinary symbol.

  When the game ball passes the ball passage detector 43, the normal symbol display section 71 alternately turns on and off the two normal symbol display LEDs, and performs a variable display of the normal symbol. Then, the normal symbol display section 71 performs a fluctuation display of the normal symbol for a predetermined time, and then performs a stop display of the ordinary symbol.

  When the stopped and displayed normal symbol is in a predetermined mode ("hit" mode) in the normal symbol display section 71, the normal electric accessory 46 is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period. On the other hand, when the stop-displayed normal symbol is in a mode other than the predetermined mode (a mode of “losing”), the normal electric accessory 46 maintains the closed state.

  That is, the ordinary symbol game is a game in which the ordinary symbol is displayed by the ordinary symbol display unit 71, and then the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed, and the ordinary electric accessory 46 operates according to the result.

  When the game ball passes the ball passage detector 43 during the variable display of the normal symbol, the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended. Then, when the normal symbol that is currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the held ordinary symbol is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays of the ordinary symbols to be retained (that is, the “reserved number”) is defined as a maximum of four times.

[Normal symbol hold display]
The normal symbol hold display device 63 is arranged at the lower right of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

  The ordinary symbol hold display device 63 is a device that displays the number of held ordinary symbols in variable display, and the ordinary symbol hold display device 63 includes a plurality of ordinary symbol hold display LEDs. By illuminating / turning off each of the ordinary symbol holding display LEDs, the number of ordinary symbols held for variable display is displayed.

  More specifically, the ordinary symbol hold display device 63 displays an ordinary symbol hold display LED according to the number of held ordinary variable display symbols. Up to four lights.

[First Special Symbol Hold Display Device]
The first special symbol holding display section 75 is arranged at the lower right of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

  The first special symbol holding display section 75 is a device that displays information on the variable display of the held first special symbol (holding ball of the first special symbol). In the present embodiment, the first special symbol hold display section 75 includes a plurality of first special symbol hold display LEDs.

  Specifically, the first special symbol hold display section 75 displays the first special symbol hold display LED in accordance with the number of variable display of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol hold display LED is the first special symbol hold display LED. Up to four are lit according to the number of reserved special symbol variable displays.

[Second special symbol hold display]
The second special symbol hold display section 76 is arranged at the lower right of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

  The second special symbol holding display unit 76 is a device that displays information on the variable display of the held second special symbol (holding ball of the second special symbol), and the second special symbol holding display unit 76 , A plurality of second special symbol holding display LEDs.

  Specifically, the second special symbol holding display section 76 displays a second special symbol holding display LED in accordance with the number of variable display holdings of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol holding display LED indicates the second special symbol holding display LED. A maximum of four are lit according to the number of reserved special variable symbols.

  Next, a data configuration and the like of the main control circuit 100 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Winning random number judgment table]
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a hit random number determination table (first starting port, second starting port) stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100. The hit random number determination table (first starting port) includes “big hits”, “small hits”, and “losing” based on the random numbers for big hit determination obtained when a game ball wins in the first starting port 5442. To be determined by lottery. The hit random number determination table (second starting port) determines one of "big hit" and "losing" by lottery based on the big hit determining random number value obtained when the game ball has won the second starting port 440. To be referred to when

  The big hit determination random value is a random value for determining a lottery result performed when the starting opening prize is won. More specifically, the big hit determination random value is a value indicating a lottery result of a special symbol (a first special symbol and a second special symbol). In the present embodiment, the random number for jackpot determination is selected from 0 to 65535 (65536 types).

  In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 5442, one of “big hit”, “small hit” and “loss” is determined by lottery. Therefore, in the hit random number determination table (at the time of winning the first starting opening), “big hit”, “small hit” for each value of the probability change flag (“0 (= off)” or “1 (= on)”) And the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number for which each of the winnings is determined, and the corresponding determination value data (“big hit determination value data”, “small hit determination value data”, and “losing determination value” Data)). The probability change flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 73, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the “high-probability gaming state”. When the gaming state is the “high-probability gaming state”, the probability change flag is “1”, and when the gaming state is the “low-probability gaming state”, the probability variation flag is “0”.

  In the present embodiment, at the time of winning the first starting port 5442, if the probability change flag is “0” and the random number for hit determination is any of “0” to “204”, “big hit” is won. , "Big hit determination value data" are determined. That is, the winning probability (big hit probability (selection rate)) of “big hit” in this case is 205/65536 (≒ 1/319).

  In addition, when the first start port 5442 is awarded, if the probability change flag is “0” and the random number for hit determination is any of “205” to “409”, “small hit” is won and “ Small hit determination value data "is determined. That is, the winning probability of “small hit” in this case is 205/65536 (≒ 1/319).

  Further, when the first start port 5442 is awarded, if the probability change flag is “0” and the random number for hit determination is not any of “0” to “409”, “losing” is won, and “losing determination” is performed. Value data "is determined.

  On the other hand, if the probability variable flag is “1” and the random number for hit determination is any of “0” to “1637” at the time of winning the first starting port 5442, “big hit” is won and “big hit” is won. Judgment value data "is determined. That is, the winning probability (big hit probability (selection rate)) of “big hit” in this case is 1638/65536 (≒ 1/40), which is higher than that in the case where the probability change flag is “0”.

  In addition, when the first starting port 5442 is awarded, if the probability change flag is “1” and the random number for hit determination is any of “1638” to “1842”, “small hit” is won and “ Small hit determination value data "is determined. That is, the winning probability of “small hit” in this case is 205/65536 (≒ 1/319), which is the same as when the probability change flag is “0”.

  Further, when the first start port 5442 wins, if the probability change flag is “1” and the random number for hit determination is not any of “0” to “1842”, “losing” is won, and “losing determination” is performed. Value data "is determined.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a game ball wins at the first starting port 5442, the jackpot probability varies depending on whether or not the gaming state at the time of winning is the “high-probability gaming state”. Specifically, when the gaming state is the “high-probability gaming state”, the jackpot probability when the gaming ball wins at the first starting port 5442 is about eight times that when the gaming state is not the “high-probability gaming state”. Get higher.

  Similarly, at the time of winning the second starting port 440, if the probability variable flag is “0” and the random number for hit determination is any of “0” to “204”, “big hit” is won, and “ "Big hit determination value data" is determined. That is, the winning probability (big hit probability (selection rate)) of “big hit” in this case is 205/65536 (≒ 1/319).

  If the probability variable flag is "0" and the random number for hit determination is not any of "0" to "204" at the time of winning the second starting opening 440, "losing" is won, and "losing determination" is performed. Value data "is determined.

  On the other hand, if the probability change flag is “1” and the random number for hit determination is any of “0” to “1637” at the time of winning the second starting port 440, “big hit” is won and “big hit” is won. Judgment value data "is determined. That is, the winning probability (big hit probability (selection rate)) of “big hit” in this case is 1638/65536 (≒ 1/40), which is higher than that in the case where the probability change flag is “0”.

  Further, when the winning flag is “1” and the random number for hit determination is not any of “0” to “1637” at the time of winning the second starting port 440, “losing” is won, and “losing determination” is performed. Value data "is determined.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a game ball is won at the second starting port 440, the game state at the time of winning is the “high-probability game state” without winning the “small hit”. The jackpot probability fluctuates depending on whether or not it is, and the jackpot probability when the gaming state is the “high-probability gaming state” is about eight times higher than when the gaming state is the “low-probability gaming state”.

[Symbol judgment table]
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a symbol determination table (first starting port, second starting port) stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100. The symbol determination table (first starting port, second starting port) is based on a symbol random number value obtained when a game ball has won the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440 and the above-described determination value data. Then, it is referred to in order to select a “hit selection symbol command” and a “symbol designation command” that determine the stop symbol. The "hit selection symbol command" is a command for designating a hit symbol determined according to the hit type at the time of winning, and the "symbol designation command" designates a symbol displayed when a special symbol changes and stops. Command to do this. The symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

  According to the symbol determination table (first starting port) of the present embodiment, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number is any of “0” to “9”, With the probability of “z0” is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and “zA1” is selected as the symbol designation command. When the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number is any one of “10” to “19”, “z1” is selected as the hit selection symbol command with a probability of 10/100. , "ZA1" is selected as the symbol designating command. Also, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number is any one of “20” to “29”, “z2” is selected as a hit selection symbol command with a probability of 10/100. , "ZA1" is selected as the symbol designating command. When the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number is any one of “30” to “39”, “z3” is selected as a hit selection symbol command with a probability of 10/100. , "ZA1" is selected as the symbol designating command. Also, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number is any one of “40” to “49”, “z4” is selected as a hit selection symbol command with a probability of 10/100. , "ZA1" is selected as the symbol designating command. Also, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number is any one of “50” to “95”, “z5” is selected as the hit selection symbol command with a probability of 46/100. , "ZA1" is selected as the symbol designating command. When the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is “96” or “97”, “z6” is selected as a hit selection symbol command with a probability of 2/100, and the symbol designation is performed. “ZA4” is selected as the command. When the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number is “98” or “99”, “z7” is selected as a hit selection symbol command with a probability of 2/100, and the symbol designation is performed. “ZA5” is selected as the command. Also, when the small hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number is any of “0” to “99”, “z8” is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and the symbol designation command is “ZA6” is selected. On the other hand, when the loss determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number is any of “0” to “99”, the hit selection symbol command is not selected, and “zA7” is used as the symbol designation command. Selected.

  Further, according to the symbol determination table (second starting port) of the present embodiment, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number is any of “0” to “24”, 25 With the probability of / 100, "z9" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA8" is selected as the symbol designation command. Also, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number is any one of “25” to “49”, “z10” is selected as the hit selection symbol command with a probability of 25/100. , "ZA8" is selected as the symbol designating command. Also, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number is any one of “55” to “99”, “z11” is selected as a hit selection symbol command with a probability of 50/100. , "ZA9" is selected as the symbol designating command. On the other hand, when the loss determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number is any of “0” to “99”, the hit selection symbol command is not selected, and “zA10” is used as the symbol designation command. Selected.

[Big hit type determination table]
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100. The jackpot type determination table indicates the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game in accordance with the jackpot selection symbol command relating to the jackpot, and the game state after the jackpot game is completed and the jackpot game state is shifted to the general game state. Is turned on to determine the type of big hit, such as whether to turn on the time saving flag or not. In the present embodiment, if a big hit is won regardless of the type of the big hit, the time reduction flag is set to “1”. The number of time savings at this time is determined to any of 24, 30, 36, 42, 48, and 100 times, and the determined number of time savings is set. The probability change flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 73, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the “high-probability gaming state”. When the gaming state is the “high-probability gaming state”, the probability change flag is “1”, and when the gaming state is the “low-probability gaming state”, the probability variation flag is “0”. Similarly, the time reduction flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 73, and is a flag for managing whether the gaming state is the “time reduction gaming state”. When the gaming state is the “time reduction gaming state”, the time reduction flag is “1”, and when the gaming state is “non-time reduction gaming state”, the time reduction flag is “0”. The number of time savings is the number of times the special symbol game can be changed so that the time saving gaming state can continue. In other words, if a special symbol change (lottery of special symbols) is performed for the number of time savings (100 times) without winning a big hit in the time saving gaming state, the time saving gaming state ends and the game shifts to the non-time saving gaming state. A gaming state in which both the probable change flag and the time saving flag are “1” is referred to as a “highly accurate time saving gaming state” in this specification. In this embodiment, the high-probability game state continues until the next big hit is won. However, if a special symbol change (lottery of a special symbol) is performed for a predetermined number of times without winning a big hit, the high-probability gaming state may be ended and the low-probability gaming state may be shifted.

  According to the big hit type determination table of the present embodiment, when the hit selection symbol command is “z0”, the number of rounds is “8”, and the big hit of the probable change flag off and the time saving flag on is determined. When the hit selection symbol command is “z1”, the number of rounds is “8”, and the big hit with the probability change flag off and the time reduction flag on is determined. When the hit selection symbol command is “z3”, the number of rounds is “8”, and the big hit with the probability change flag off and the time reduction flag on is determined. When the hit selection symbol command is “z4”, the number of rounds is “8”, and the big hit with the probability change flag off and the time reduction flag on is determined. When the hit selection symbol command is “z5”, the number of rounds is “8”, and the big hit with the probability variable flag on and the time reduction flag on is determined. When the hit time selection symbol command is “z6”, the number of rounds is “5”, and the big hit of the probability change flag ON and the time reduction flag ON is determined. When the hit selection symbol command is “z7”, the number of rounds is “16”, and the big hit with the probability variable flag on and the time reduction flag on is determined. When the hit selection symbol command is “z9”, the number of rounds is “5”, and the big hit with the probability change flag off and the time reduction flag on is determined. When the hit selection symbol command is “z10”, the number of rounds is “5”, and the big hit with the probability variable flag on and the time reduction flag on is determined. When the hit selection symbol command is “z11”, the number of rounds is “16”, and the big hit with the probability variable flag on and the time reduction flag on is determined.

  In the present embodiment, the big hit with the time saving flag on is determined regardless of the hit selection symbol command (ie, the big hit determination value data). However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be determined according to the time-saving flag off.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines the number of time savings to be any of 24 times, 30 times, 36 times, 42 times, 48 times, and 100 times, but is not limited to this. Alternatively, control may be performed so that the time-saving gaming state continues until the next big hit is won, or control may be performed so that the time-saving gaming state continues as long as the high-probability gaming state continues.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 controls the high-precision gaming state to continue until the next big hit is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The control may be performed such that the high-accuracy gaming state is continued (then, the state is shifted to the low-probability gaming state), or until the next big jackpot is substantially won (for example, 10,000) due to the jackpot winning probability. Control may be performed so that the high-accuracy gaming state is continued until the next round, or the high-accuracy gaming state is continued until the next big hit is won.

[Flow of game balls]
Hereinafter, the flow of the game balls fired toward the game area 20 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 14 is an example of a diagram illustrating a mode in which a game ball flows down the right region when the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened. FIG. 15 is an example of a diagram illustrating a mode in which a game ball flows down the right side region when the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is closed. FIG. 16 is an example of a diagram showing a mode in which a game ball flows down the left region when the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened.

  As described above, the attacker unit 500 is disposed substantially at the lower right in the game area 20 and below the pass gate 49. Therefore, in the big hit game state, a so-called right-hand is performed. When the special winning opening 540 is opened by the shutter 610, a right-hit game ball is likely to win the special winning opening 540. In addition, even if the game is not in the jackpot game state, the right-handed operation is performed during the electric support.

  However, when the player hits right, the game ball that has flowed down the right side area loses the sense of expectation when it does not win the special winning opening 540 and only waits to flow into the out opening 57 as it is. Will be. For this reason, when the right-hitting game ball does not win the special winning opening 540, the player feels disadvantage and causes a decrease in interest. In particular, in recent years, the size of the liquid crystal display device 16 has been required to be increased, and at present, the place where the attacker unit 500 and the like can be arranged in the game area 20 is limited. Therefore, in order to respond to the demand for increasing the size of the liquid crystal display device 16, the attacker unit 500 has to be arranged below the gaming area 20 as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. When the attacker unit 500 is arranged in the lower part of the game area 20, if the right-hit game ball does not win the large winning opening 540, it will become more prominent to flow into the out opening 57 as it is.

  In this regard, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is disposed substantially at the lower left of the gaming area 20 as described above. In addition, the attacker unit 500 includes a game ball guiding member 580. The game ball guiding member 580 is used for the game area 20 in which the out port 57 is disposed, including the guide nail 700, including the game ball that is right-hit (flows down the right area) and does not win the big winning port 540. A member for guiding the game ball to the upstream side of the blade member 4620 arranged in the left region beyond the center, and forming a path of the game ball extended on an extension of the special winning opening 540 toward the downflow direction of the game ball. It is. Here, “upstream of the blade member 4620” refers to a region in which the game ball can be received in the second starting port 440 if the blade member 4620 is open (hereinafter, “second starting port receiving port” in this specification). Area). The second starting port receiving area is, for example, a peripheral area of the game ball 223 located above the blade member 4620 in FIG.

  The game area 20 includes a game ball guiding member as a flow path of the game ball which is right-handed (flows down the right area) and reaches the exit side of the special winning opening 540 without winning the special winning opening 540. The guide nail 700 forms a flow-down path connecting the outlet side of the 580 and the outlet 57. The game balls flowing down the flow-down path always pass through the second starting port receiving area before reaching the out port 57.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the normal symbol determination shifts to the high-probability gaming state upon termination of the big hit gaming state. Member 4620 is released.

  As shown in FIG. 14, when the game ball hit right (flows down the right area) does not win the large winning opening 540 when the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is opened, The ball is always guided by the game ball guiding member 580 and the guiding nail 700 to the second starting port receiving area which is upstream of the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460.

  Of the game balls hit right (falling down the right region), the game ball that did not win the special winning opening 540 is always guided to the second starting port receiving region upstream of the blade member 4620, If the wing member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened when the game ball is guided to the starting opening receiving area, it is received by the wing member 4620 without flowing into the out opening 57 and the second starting opening 440. Is likely to win. That is, when the blade member 4620 is closed, the out port 57 is at the most downstream position of the game area 20 as described above, but when the blade member 4620 is open, the second port is used instead of the out port 57. The starting port 440 is located at the most downstream position. As described above, the blade member 4620 has a function of changing the most downstream position in the game area 20.

  In this way, even if the game ball hit right (flows down the right area) does not win the large winning opening 540, the game ball always reaches the second starting port receiving area (upstream of the blade member 4620). As a result, the expectation of winning the second starting port 440 continues, and the interest can be enhanced.

  In particular, a right strike is performed in the electric support state. Therefore, although the special winning opening 540 is not opened during the electric support, the most downstream position is changed from the out opening 57 to the second starting opening 440 by the blade member 4620, so that the progress of the game in the electric support state is performed. It can be promoted and enhance the interest.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 15, when the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is closed, a game ball that is right-handed (flows down the right region) and does not win the large winning opening 540 is Although it is always guided to the upstream of the blade member 4620, it flows into the out port 57 through the space between the blade member 4620 and the guide nail 700 (that is, the left side of the guide nail 700).

  It should be noted that, among the game balls hit right (flowing down the right region), those that did not reach the special winning opening 540 (for example, the game balls flowing down the flowing passage from the right side of the general winning opening 56 to the out opening 57). ) May be configured to be guided to the out port 57. At this time, among the right-hit game balls, the game balls that did not win the special winning opening 540 are those that did not reach the special winning opening 540, but did not reach the special winning opening 540. There are game balls that have not won, but any of the game balls may be guided to the upstream of the blade member 4620, or only one of the game balls may be guided to the upstream of the blade member 4620. .

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 16, a left-hitting game ball (a game ball that has flowed down the left area) generally wins the first starting port 5442 or the general winning ports 53, 54, 55, or It flows into the out port 57 or the out port 450. After the game ball is hit left, the game ball 224 that rolls along the flow path 222 toward the first start port 5442 continues to have a sense of expectation of winning at the first start port 5442, but goes to the first start port 5442. Regarding the gaming balls 2226 that deviated from the flow path 222 and did not win any of the general winning ports 53, 54, 55, the first starting port (corresponding to the first starting port 5442 of the present embodiment) is used in the conventional pachinko machine. Expectation of winning is lost. Further, even if the game ball 224 rolls along the flow path 222 toward the first starting port 5442, if the first starting port 5442 does not win, the feeling of winning expectation is lost at that point. In the present embodiment, when the left-hitting game ball (game ball flowing down the left region) rolls on the flow path 222 toward the first starting port 5442, but does not win the first starting port 5442, and In any of the cases where the game ball goes out of the flow path 222 toward the first starting port 5442 and does not win any of the general winning ports 53, 54, and 55, these game balls reach the out port 57. In between, it always passes through the second starting port receiving area (upstream of the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460). As described above, the upstream of the blade member 4620 is a region where the game ball can be received in the second starting port 440 if the blade member 4620 is open (a second starting port receiving region). When the first start port 5442 does not win, even though the flow path 222 toward the one start port 5442 is rolled, and the general win port 53, 54, 55 deviates from the flow path 222 toward the first start port 5442. In any case where no prize has been won, the expectation of winning in the second starting port 440 continues, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In the present embodiment, since the passage gate 49 is arranged in the right area, the expectation that the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened when left-handed is low. However, immediately after the big hit game state or the time saving game state ends, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol may be suspended. In addition, even if the player makes a left hit, a game ball that jumps out into the game area 20 vigorously may flow down the right area. Therefore, even in the general gaming state, the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is rarely opened. In addition, the guide nail 700 ensures that not only the game ball that has flowed down the right region but also the game ball that has flowed down the left region and has rolled over to the guide member 700 side immediately flows into the out port 57. Since it has the function of suppressing, if the blade member 4620 is opened, there is a possibility that the second starting port 440 will win. Therefore, even if the expectation of winning in the first starting port 5442 and the general winning ports 53, 54 and 55 is lost for a left-hit game ball, the expectation of winning in the second starting port 440 continues. In addition, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the passage gate 49 is arranged in the right region. Alternatively, the passage gate 49 may be arranged in the left region. In this case, the frequency of opening the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 may be increased as compared with the case where the passage gate 49 is arranged in the right region. Therefore, even if the expectation of winning in the first starting port 5442 has been lost for the game ball hit left, it is possible to continue the winning in the second starting port 440 with a higher expectation. .

  Note that among the left-hit game balls (game balls flowing down the left area), as the game balls that did not reach above the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 or did not reach the first starting port 5442, for example, It may be configured such that there is a game ball that has flowed down an out port 450 (see, for example, FIG. 5 and FIG. 51) or a down flow path leading to the out port 57 which is present below the normal electric accessory unit 400. At this time, among the left-hitting game balls, the game balls that did not reach the first starting port 5442 include the game balls that did not reach the first starting port 5442 above the normal electric accessory unit 400 or the normal starting. There are game balls that have reached the upper part of the electric accessory unit 400 or the vicinity of the first starting port 5442, but have not won, but any of the game balls may be guided to the upstream of the blade member 4620, Only one of the game balls may be guided to the upstream of the blade member 4620.

  Also, when a game ball that has rolled in the direction of the special winning opening 540 among the left-hitting game balls (game balls that have flowed down the left area) has rolled the game ball guiding member 580, the game ball is turned into the special winning opening 540. The shutter 610 or the rib provided on the game ball guiding member 580 collides with the first starting port 5442, or flows into the out 55 or the out port 450.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the game ball that is right-handed (flows down the right region) and does not win the special winning opening 540 is always moved to the left side beyond the center of the gaming region 20 in which the out opening 57 is arranged. A game ball guiding member 580 for guiding to the second starting port receiving area of the area is provided. However, the game ball guiding member 580 has a function of guiding such a game ball (a game ball that has been hit right (flows down the right area) and has not won the special winning opening 540) to the second starting port receiving area. Need not be provided, and may be limited to guiding to the left area beyond the center of the game area 20. For example, although the game ball guiding member 580 has a function of guiding such a game ball to the left region, the game ball guided to the left region is further distributed to a plurality of regions including the second starting port receiving region. The configuration is equivalent.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the game ball that is right-handed (flows down the right region) and does not win the special winning opening 540 is guided to the left region by the game ball guiding member 580. The game ball guiding member 580 is not necessarily required. For example, a configuration may be employed in which a game ball that has been hit to the right and has not won the special winning opening 540 is guided to the left region only by the guiding nail.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a game ball guiding member is defined as a flow path of the game ball which is right-handed (flows down the right region) and reaches the exit side of the special winning opening 540 without winning the special winning opening 540. A downflow path connecting the outlet side of 580 and the out port 57 is formed, and the game ball flowing down this downflow path must pass through the second starting port receiving area before reaching the out port 57. It is supposed to. In the present embodiment, since the second starting port 440 is formed in the left region, the game ball flowing down the flow path is always guided to the left region. However, in view of the idea that the game ball flowing down the route always passes through the second starting port receiving area before reaching the out port 57, in such a case, the second starting port 440 is located in the left area. It is not essential that they be located.

[Configuration of back unit]
Hereinafter, the configuration of the back unit 176 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 17 is an example of a front view of the back unit 176. FIG. 18 is an example of a rear view of the back unit 176. FIG. 19 is an example of a perspective view of the rear unit 176 as viewed obliquely from the front right upper side. FIG. 20 is an example of a perspective view of the back unit 176 viewed from diagonally upper left on the back. FIG. 21 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the rear unit 176 as viewed obliquely from the front right upper side. FIG. 22 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the back unit 176 viewed from diagonally upper left on the back.

  As described above, the back unit 176 includes an upper front accessory 1000, an upper rear accessory 1100, a lower accessory 1200, a corner accessory 1300, a side accessory 1400, a middle panel 1500, and an attacker ball gutter 1600. And a main board case 1700 and a rear box 1800. In addition, the corner role 1300 includes an upper corner role 1320 and a lower corner role 1350.

  The rear box 1800 has a box shape, and an opening 1820 is formed substantially at the center. The liquid crystal display device 16 and the like are arranged in the opening 1820.

  The upper rear accessory 1100 (specifically, a base member 1180 described later (for example, see FIG. 69)) is attached and fixed above the opening 1820 on the front side of the rear box 1800. The details of the upper back accessory 1100 will be described later.

  The lower accessory 1200 (specifically, a lower accessory fixing base 1220 described later (for example, see FIG. 77)) is attached and fixed below the opening 1820 on the front side of the rear box 1800. Details of the lower part 1200 will be described later.

  The side accessory 1400 (specifically, a mounting plate 1410 (to be described later, for example, see FIG. 107)) is mounted and fixed to the right side of the opening 1820 on the front side of the rear box 1800. Details of the side accessory 1400 will be described later.

  The upper movable corner 1320 (see, for example, FIG. 88) has the first movable body 1330 at the upper left corner of the liquid crystal display device 16 and the second movable body 1330 so as to be on the front side of the upper rear movable body movable decorative body 110. The body 1340 is attached and fixed to the rear box 1800 so as to be located at the upper right corner of the liquid crystal display device 16. The third movable body 1355 is located at the lower left corner of the liquid crystal display device 16 and the fourth movable body 1357 is located at the lower right corner of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the lower corner role 1350 is located forward of the lower role 1200. Are fixed to the rear box 1800 so as to be positioned respectively. The first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are arranged at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. The details of the upper corner accessory 1320 will be described later.

  The upper front accessory 1000 (specifically, a decorative accessory base member 1010 (to be described later, for example, see FIG. 61)) is attached and fixed to the rear box 1800 so as to be disposed forward of the upper rear accessory 1000. You. The details of the upper front accessory 1000 will be described later.

  The middle panel 1500 is disposed in an area corresponding to a part of the game area 20 on the back of the transparent panel 172, and includes a first middle panel 1520 and a second middle panel 1550. The first middle panel 1520 is a plate-shaped member having a pattern or pattern applied to the front surface, and allows the user to visually recognize the pattern or pattern applied to the front surface via the transparent panel 172. The second middle panel 1550 is a plate-like member having an annular opening window 1552, which will be described in detail later, and is configured such that a predetermined picture appears on the opening window when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Details of the second middle panel 1550 will be described later.

  The attacker ball gutter 1600 has a gutter shape for receiving a game ball that has won the general winning port 56 and discharging the ball to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball that has won the big winning port 540 is merged and discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board case 1700 houses a lamp relay board 1710, a main control relay board 1720, and the like.

  The back unit 176 further includes a first decorative design 1900 and a second decorative design 1920. The first decorative design 1900 is attached to the front right side of the upper back accessory 1100. The second decorative design 1920 is attached to the left side on the front side of the upper rear accessory 1100. The first decorative design 1900 and the second decorative design 1920 are decorated on the front surface, and both have a design function without being movable.

[Attacker unit]
Hereinafter, the configuration of the attacker unit 500 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.

  The attacker unit 500 includes a base member 510, a front plate 520, a taxiway 530, a special winning opening 540, a rear case 550, and a special electric accessory 600.

  The base member 510 shown in FIGS. 23 to 28 and FIGS. 30 and 31 is a member serving as a basis of the attacker unit 500. The base member 510 is formed in an elongated substantially flat plate shape. The base member 510 is arranged such that its longitudinal direction is directed to the left and right directions and its plate surface is directed to the front and rear directions. Various members constituting the attacker unit 500 are attached to the base member 510. A slit 511 is formed in the base member 510.

  The slit 511 is formed to penetrate the base member 510 in the front-rear direction. The slit 511 is formed in an upper portion of the base member 510 in a substantially linear shape that extends gently from right to left as viewed from the front. A shutter 610 described later (more specifically, a guide 611 of the shutter 610) is disposed in the slit 511.

  The front side plate portion 520 shown in FIGS. 23 to 27 and FIG. 29 is a member arranged at the front end of the attacker unit 500. The front side plate portion 520 is formed in substantially the same shape and size as the base member 510. The front side plate portion 520 is arranged with its plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The front side plate portion 520 faces the base member 510 in the front-rear direction, and is arranged in a state separated from the base member 510 forward. In this way, a gap (hereinafter, referred to as "special electric part space R2") is formed between the front plate portion 520 and the base member 510 to allow a game ball to enter. The special electric role space R2 is formed to have substantially the same shape and size as the front plate portion 520 and the base member 510 in a front view. The front plate 520 is attached to the base member 510 via screws or the like. The front side plate portion 520 is formed of a transparent resin material, and makes the rear of the front side plate portion 520 visible to a player.

  The guiding path 530 shown in FIGS. 23, 25 to 31 is for appropriately guiding the moving game ball in a predetermined direction. The guide path 530 is formed by the shutter 610 and a substantially plate-shaped member (wall) that stands upright from the front plate 520 to the rear. The taxiway 530 includes a first taxiway 531, a second taxiway 532, and a third taxiway 533.

  As described above, the guide path 530 (more specifically, the first guide path 531) is formed by the shutter 610. Here, the shutter 610 is configured to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction with respect to the base member 510 via the slit 511 as described later. In such a configuration of the shutter 610, the first guide path 531 is formed when the shutter 610 advances forward with respect to the base member 510. Therefore, hereinafter, for the sake of convenience, the description will be made assuming that the shutter 610 has advanced forward with respect to the base member 510 (the state in which the first guide path 531 is formed).

  The first taxiway 531 is arranged near the upper end of the special electric part space R2. The first taxiway 531 is formed in a substantially straight line extending gently inclining from right to left. The length of the first guide path 531 in the left-right direction (longitudinal direction) is slightly shorter than the base member 510. The left end of the first taxiway 531 is formed near the left end of the special electric utility space R2. The right end of the first taxiway 531 is formed near the right end of the special electric part space R2. The first guiding path 531 configured as described above guides the moving game ball from right to left. The first taxiway 531 includes a deceleration rib 534.

  The deceleration rib 534 is for reducing the moving speed of the game ball guided (moved) by the first guide path 531 (deceleration means). The deceleration rib 534 includes a plurality of rear protrusions 534a protruding forward from the base member 510, and a plurality of front protrusions 534b protruding rearward from the front plate portion 520. In the present embodiment, six rear projections 534a are provided. Further, five front projections 534b are provided. The plurality of rear protrusions 534a and the front protrusions 534b are arranged at appropriate intervals from each other along the extending direction (left-right direction) of the first guide path 531. The appropriate interval is set so as to be at least longer than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the plurality of rear projections 534a and the front projections 534b are arranged so as not to overlap in front view (not to be opposed in the front-rear direction, but to be shifted in the left-right direction).

  With such a configuration of the first taxiway 531, the game ball (moved by the first taxiway 531) moves zigzag in plan view while colliding with the rear protrusion 534 a and the front protrusion 534 b. (Because smooth movement of the game ball is regulated), the moving speed is reduced.

  As described above, when the moving speed of the game ball moved by the first taxiway 531 is reduced, a situation where a plurality of game balls are moving on the first taxiway 531 can be created. As described above, in a situation where a plurality of game balls are moving on the first taxiway 531, the plurality of game balls are guided to the third taxiway 533 only by opening the shutter 610 once. Then, the large winning opening 540 can be won. That is, the round digestion in the big hit game can be quickly performed. Even if the opening time of the shutter 610 is short, many winnings can be generated if many game balls stay on the shutter 610. In addition, since many game balls can be won at one time, it is easy to generate a prize (so-called over prize) which is equal to or larger than the number of prizes that can be won in one round of the jackpot game.

  The second taxiway 532 is disposed immediately to the right of the first taxiway 531 in the special electric part space R2. The second taxiway 532 is formed in a substantially linear shape that extends gently from right to left. Note that the inclination angle of the second guide path 532 is formed to be substantially the same as the inclination angle of the first guide path 531. Thus, the second taxiway 532, together with the first taxiway 531, is configured as one substantially straight taxiway that is gently inclined from right to left. The second taxiway 532 configured in this way guides the moving game ball from the right to the left (the first taxiway 531 side).

  The third taxiway 533 is arranged at a substantially central portion of the special electric part space R2 in the up-down direction. The third taxiway 533 is formed in a substantially linear shape that extends gently from right to left. The third taxiway 533 is arranged below the first taxiway 531. The third taxiway 533 is formed in substantially the same shape and size as the first taxiway 531 in a front view.

  As shown in FIG. 31 and the like, a wall connected to the third guideway 533 is disposed between the left end of the third guideway 533 and the left end of the first guideway 531. A wall connected to the third guideway 533 is disposed between the right end of the third guideway 533 and the right end of the second guideway 532. Thus, the third taxiway 533 is formed in a concave shape when viewed from the front.

  The third guiding path 533 configured as described above guides the moving game ball from the right to the left (the big winning opening 540 side). The third guide path 533 includes a guide section 535.

  The guide part 535 is formed at the lowermost part of the third guiding path 533. The guide portion 535 is a substantially triangular plate-shaped member in plan view. The guide section 535 is configured to be able to guide the game ball guided (moved) by the third guide path 533 backward.

  The special winning opening 540 shown in FIGS. 25, 28, 30, and 31 is formed by the base member 510 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The special winning opening 540 is formed at the lowermost rear portion of the third taxiway 533 (behind the guide portion 535). The special winning opening 540 includes a count switch 541. As shown in FIG. 27, the count switch 541 is disposed below and behind the special winning opening 540.

  The rear case 550 shown in FIGS. 23, 25 to 27, 31, 33, and 34 includes various members (shutter 610, large winning opening solenoid 620, link arm 630, and the like) constituting the special electric accessory 600. ). The rear case 550 is formed in a substantially rectangular hollow substantially box shape in plan view. As shown in FIG. 33, the upper case and the lower space of the rear case 550 are partitioned by a substantially flat mounting portion 551 formed in a substantially rectangular shape in plan view. That is, the rear case 550 is formed in a two-story structure by the mounting portion 551, and predetermined members are arranged in the upper space and the lower space, respectively. Specifically, a shutter 610, a link arm 630, and the like are arranged in the upper space. In the lower space, a special winning opening solenoid 620 or the like is arranged. The rear case 550 is attached to the rear side surface of the base member 510 via screws or the like. The inside of the rear case 550 and the outside (in front of the base member 510) are communicated via the slit 511.

[Special electric accessory]
Hereinafter, the configuration of the special electric accessory 6000 according to another example will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 35 to 50.

  It should be noted that the special electric accessory 6000 switches between a state in which it is easy for the gaming ball to enter the large winning opening 540 (open state) and a state in which it is difficult for the gaming ball to enter the large winning opening 540 (closed state). In the following, the arrangement and configuration of various members will be described as being in a closed state unless otherwise specified.

  As shown in FIG. 35 to FIG. 37, the special electric accessory 6000 includes a housing portion 6001, a shutter 6002, a special winning opening solenoid 6003, a link arm 6004, and a regulating member 6005.

  The storage section 6001 shown in FIGS. 35 to 38 is a member that stores various members (such as the shutter 6002, the special winning opening solenoid 6003, the link arm 6004, and the regulating member 6005) constituting the special electric accessory 6000. The storage section 6001 is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper side and the front side opened. The accommodation section 6001 is attached to the rear side surface of the base member 510 (see FIG. 23 and the like) via screws and the like. The accommodation section 6001 includes a communication opening 6011, a support shaft 6012, a boss 6013, and a guide opening 6014.

  The communication opening 6011 allows the upper side and the lower side of the housing section 6001 to communicate with each other. The communication opening 6011 is formed on the right side of the housing section 6001. The communication opening 6011 is formed so as to penetrate the housing part 6001 in the vertical direction. The communication opening 6011 is formed so as to surround from the rear to the right of a boss 6013 described later in plan view.

  The support shaft 6012 rotatably supports a link arm 6004 described later. The support shaft 6012 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with the longitudinal direction directed vertically. The support shaft 6012 is formed so as to protrude upward. The support shaft 6012 is formed at the right rear portion of the housing portion 6001 and behind the communication opening 6011.

  The boss 6013 rotatably supports a regulating member 6005 described later. The boss portion 6013 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with the longitudinal direction directed vertically. The boss portion 6013 is formed so as to protrude upward. The boss portion 6013 is formed in the vicinity of the center of the accommodation portion 6001 (slightly rightward from the center) in a plan view, and at the left front of the communication opening portion 6011. In addition, in appropriate drawings such as FIGS. 35 to 37, the boss portion 6013 illustrates a state where a screw is attached to support the regulating member 6005.

  The guide opening 6014 allows a guide shaft 6056 of a regulating member 6005 to be described later to pass therethrough. More specifically, as described later, the movement (displacement) path of the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is defined. The guide opening 6014 is formed in the vicinity of the center of the housing portion 6001 (slightly right from the center and to the left of the boss portion 6013) in plan view. The guide opening 6014 is formed so as to penetrate the housing part 6001 in the up-down direction. The guide opening 6014 is formed in a substantially L-shape in a plan view that is bent halfway from one end to the other end in the longitudinal direction. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 38A, the guide opening 6014 includes a first guide opening 6016 and a second guide opening 6017.

  The first guide opening 6016 is formed to extend substantially linearly in the left-right direction. The first guide opening 6016 is formed rearward in the front-rear direction with respect to the center P of the boss 6013. The length in the left-right direction of the first guide opening 6016 is formed to be substantially the same as the length in the left-right direction of the connection opening 6036 of the special winning opening solenoid 6003 described later.

  The second guide opening 6017 is formed to extend in an arc shape in plan view. More specifically, the second guide opening 6017 is formed so as to overlap with a part of an imaginary circle centered on the center P of the boss 6013 (see the dashed line arrow in FIG. 38A). Thus, the second guide opening 6017 is formed near the boss 6013 so as to extend along the outer shape of the boss 6013 in a plan view. The rear end of the second guide opening 6017 is connected to the left end of the first guide opening 6016. The front end of the second guide opening 6017 is formed forward in the front-rear direction with respect to the center P of the boss 6013.

  A shutter 6002 shown in FIGS. 35 to 37 is a member (a member for switching between an open state and a closed state) for opening and closing the special winning opening 540 by power from a special winning opening solenoid 6003 described later. Note that the configuration of the shutter 6002 is substantially the same as that of the shutter 610 of the special electric accessory 600 (see FIG. 31 and FIG. 32C). The shutter 6002 includes an elongated plate portion 6021, a connection plate portion 6022, and a connection shaft 6023.

  The elongated plate portion 6021 is a member that forms the first guide path 531 (see FIG. 31 and the like). The elongated plate portion 6021 is formed in an elongated substantially flat plate shape. The elongated plate portion 6021 is formed so that the longitudinal direction thereof is turned to the left and right in plan view, and is lowered to the left in front view (the upper side faces upward and to the left).

  The connection plate portion 6022 is a member that connects the elongated plate portion 6021 and a connection shaft 6023 described later. The connection plate portion 6022 is formed in a substantially rectangular flat plate shape in plan view. The connection plate portion 6022 is formed so as to extend rearward from a central portion of the elongated plate portion 6021 in the left-right direction.

  The connection shaft 6023 is connected to a link arm 6004 described later. The connection shaft 6023 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with the longitudinal direction directed in the up-down direction. The connection shaft 6023 is formed so as to protrude upward. The connection shaft 6023 is formed near the rear end of the connection plate 6022.

  The shutter 6002 having such a configuration is configured such that the elongated plate portion 6021 is inserted into the slit 511 (see FIG. 31 and the like) from the rear, and the connection plate portion 6022 is placed on the bottom surface of the storage portion 6001. 6001. The shutter 6002 is configured to be slidable in the front-rear direction with respect to the housing section 6001.

  The special winning opening solenoid 6003 shown in FIGS. 36, 37 and 39 is a member for driving the shutter 6002. The special winning opening solenoid 6003 includes a solenoid housing section 6031, a power generation section 6032, a plunger 6033, a power transmission section 6034, and a spring 6035.

  The solenoid accommodating portion 6031 is a member for accommodating various members constituting the special winning opening solenoid 6003. The solenoid accommodating portion 6031 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper side is opened. The solenoid accommodating portion 6031 is arranged with the longitudinal direction facing left and right. The solenoid housing section 6031 is attached to the housing section 6001 from below.

  The power generation unit 6032 is a member that generates power of the special winning opening solenoid 6003. The power generation unit 6032 includes a coil, a fixed iron core, and the like (not shown). The power generation unit 6032 can suck a plunger 6033, which will be described later, in accordance with energization from a predetermined power supply. The power generation unit 6032 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape. The power generation unit 6032 is housed inside the solenoid housing unit 6031 (left portion) with the longitudinal direction (axial direction) directed leftward and rightward.

  The plunger 6033 is a member (movable iron core) formed in a substantially rod shape. The plunger 6033 is arranged with the longitudinal direction (axial direction) directed in the left-right direction. Plunger 6033 is arranged to extend rightward from power generation unit 6032. The plunger 6033 is configured to be able to reciprocate in the left-right direction with respect to the power generation unit 6032.

  The power transmission unit 6034 is a member that transmits the power generated by the special winning opening solenoid 6003 to another member (specifically, the link arm 6004). The power transmission unit 6034 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The power transmission unit 6034 is housed inside (the right part) of the solenoid housing 6031 and is attached to the right end of the plunger 6033. The power transmission unit 6034 includes a connection opening 6036 and a connection protrusion 6037.

  The connection opening 6036 is connected to a link arm 6004 described later. The connection opening 6036 is formed on the right side of the power transmission unit 6034 in plan view. The connection opening 6036 is formed to penetrate the power transmission unit 6034 in the up-down direction.

  The connecting protrusion 6037 is connected to a regulating member 6005 described later. The connection protrusion 6037 is formed by a pair of plate-like portions formed to protrude upward. The pair of plate-shaped portions are formed so as to be parallel to each other on the left and right. With such a configuration, the connection protrusion 6037 has a gap extending in the front-rear direction between the pair of plate-shaped portions. The coupling projection 6037 is formed at the left rear end of the power transmission unit 6034. In the following, the connection protrusion 6037 indicates the gap.

  The spring 6035 is a so-called compression coil spring. The spring 6035 is disposed between the power generation unit 6032 and the power transmission unit 6034 in a state where the plunger 6033 is inserted and is always compressed. Thus, the spring 6035 always applies a rightward biasing force to the plunger 6033 (the power transmission unit 6034).

  In the special winning opening solenoid 6003 having such a configuration, when the power generation unit 6032 is not energized, the plunger 6033 moves rightward by the urging force of the spring 6035. On the other hand, when power is supplied to the power generation unit 6032, the plunger 6033 moves to the left against the urging force of the spring 6035 due to the suction force of the power generation unit 6032. As described above, in the special winning opening solenoid 6003, by turning on / off the power to the power generation unit 6032, the plunger 6033 can reciprocate in the left and right direction with respect to the power generation unit 6032 to generate power.

  In the present embodiment, when the plunger 6033 is moving to the right (that is, when power is not supplied to the power generation unit 6032), the game ball is slid forward by the shutter 6002 sliding. Is in a state (closed state) where it is difficult to win the special winning opening 540. On the other hand, when the plunger 6033 is moving to the left (that is, when the power generation unit 6032 is energized), the shutter 6002 slides rearward to the large winning opening 540 of the game ball. Is in a state where the winning is easy (open state).

  The link arm 6004 shown in FIG. 35 to FIG. 37 and FIG. 40 connects the special winning opening solenoid 6003 and the shutter 6002 in an interlockable manner (interlocking connection), and transmits the power from the special winning opening solenoid 6003 to the shutter 6002. It is a member. The link arm 6004 is formed in a substantially L-shape in plan view by a portion extending substantially in the left-right direction (first link extension portion 6041) and a portion extending substantially in the front-rear direction (second link extension portion 6042). Is done. The link arm 6004 includes a central cylindrical portion 6043, a connection opening 6044, a connection shaft 6045, and a regulating protrusion 6046.

  The central cylindrical portion 6043 is inserted through the support shaft 6012 of the housing portion 6001. The central cylindrical portion 6043 is formed substantially at the center of the link arm 6004 (the connection portion between the first link extension portion 6041 and the second link extension portion 6042) in plan view. The central cylindrical portion 6043 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with the longitudinal direction directed vertically. Note that when the support shaft 6012 is inserted through the central cylindrical portion 6043, the link arm 6004 is rotatably supported clockwise or counterclockwise around the central cylindrical portion 6043 in plan view.

  The connection opening 6044 is inserted through the connection shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002. The connection opening 6044 is formed at the left (front) end of the first link extension 6041. The connection opening 6044 is formed so as to vertically pass through the first link extension 6041. The connection opening 6044 is formed in a long hole shape that extends linearly from the distal end side to the proximal end side (the central cylindrical portion 6043 side). The length of the connection opening 6044 in the lateral direction in plan view is formed so as to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the connection shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002.

  The connection shaft 6045 is connected to the connection opening 6036 of the special winning opening solenoid 6003. The connection shaft 6045 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with the longitudinal direction directed in the up-down direction. The connection shaft 6045 is formed so as to protrude downward. The connection shaft 6045 is formed at the front (front) end of the second link extension 6042. The outer diameter of the connecting shaft 6045 is formed to be smaller than the inner diameter (length in the left-right direction) of the connecting opening 6036 of the special winning opening solenoid 6003.

  The regulating protrusion 6046 is to be brought into contact with a regulating block 6054 of the regulating member 6005 described later in a predetermined case. The regulating protrusion 6046 is formed in a plate shape protruding downward. The restricting projection 6046 is formed near the base end of the first link extension 6041 and at the front left of the central tubular portion 6043 in plan view. The rear side surface of the regulating protrusion 6046 is formed to be a flat surface facing rearward.

  A restricting member 6005 shown in FIGS. 35 to 37 and 41 is a member for restricting an unintended opening of the shutter 6002 when the shutter 6002 is in a closed state. The restricting member 6005 includes a central cylindrical portion 6053, a restricting block portion 6054, a connecting shaft 6055, and a guide shaft 6056.

  The central cylindrical portion 6053 is inserted through the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001. The central cylindrical portion 6053 is formed substantially at the center of the regulating member 6005 in plan view. The central tubular portion 6053 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with the longitudinal direction directed vertically. The central cylindrical portion 6053 is formed in a long hole shape extending in the left-right direction in plan view.

  Further, a plate-shaped portion (first regulating extension portion 6051) extending so as to be widened in a plan view is formed on the right rear side of the central cylindrical portion 6053. Further, a plate-shaped portion (second regulating extension portion 6052) that extends so as to expand in a plan view is formed on the left side of the central cylindrical portion 6053. In this way, the central cylindrical portion 6053, the first regulating extension 6051, and the second regulating extension 6052 are formed in a substantially L-shaped positional relationship with each other in plan view. Note that when the boss portion 6013 is inserted through the central cylindrical portion 6053, the regulating member 6005 is rotatably supported clockwise or counterclockwise around the central cylindrical portion 6053 in plan view.

  The restricting block portion 6054 is to be brought into contact with the restricting protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 in a predetermined case. The restriction block portion 6054 is a substantially rectangular parallelepiped (block-shaped) portion protruding upward. The restriction block portion 6054 is formed substantially at the center of the first restriction extension portion 6051 in plan view (that is, at the right rear of the central cylindrical portion 6053). The front side surface of the restriction block portion 6054 is formed to be a flat surface facing forward.

  The connection shaft 6055 is connected to the special winning opening solenoid 6003. The connection shaft 6055 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with the longitudinal direction directed in the up-down direction. The connection shaft 6055 is formed so as to protrude downward. The connection shaft 6055 is formed substantially at the center of the first regulating extension 6051 (that is, at the right rear of the central cylindrical portion 6053) in plan view. Thus, the axis of the connecting shaft 6055 is formed so as to substantially vertically overlap with the axis of the restriction block portion 6054. The outer diameter of the connection shaft 6055 is formed to be smaller than the width of the connection protrusion 6037 of the power transmission unit 6034 (that is, the gap of the connection protrusion 6037).

  The guide shaft 6056 is inserted into the guide opening 6014 of the housing section 6001. The guide shaft 6056 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with the longitudinal direction directed vertically. The guide shaft 6056 is formed to protrude downward. The connecting shaft 6055 is formed substantially at the center of the second regulating extension 6052 in plan view (that is, to the left of the central cylindrical portion 6053). The outer diameter of the guide shaft 6056 is formed to be substantially the same as the length of the guide opening 6014 (the first guide opening 6016 and the second guide opening 6017) in the lateral direction in plan view.

  Hereinafter, the assembling configuration of the housing section 6001, the shutter 6002, the special winning opening solenoid 6003, the link arm 6004, and the restricting member 6005 in the special electric accessory 6000 will be described using FIGS. 35 to 37 and FIGS. 42 to 46. I do.

  Note that, in the drawings after FIG. 45, the housing portion 6001 is shown by a broken line, but the support shaft 6012, the boss portion 6013, and the guide opening 6014 are shown by solid lines for convenience of explanation. Further, in the drawings after FIG. 45, the link arm 6004 is shown by a broken line, but the regulating protrusion 6046 is shown by a solid line for convenience of explanation. In the drawings after FIG. 46, the illustration of the configuration of each member is simplified for convenience of explanation.

  First, an outline of an assembling configuration of various members (shutter 6002, large winning opening solenoid 6003, link arm 6004, and regulating member 6005) with respect to accommodation portion 6001 will be described.

  The shutter 6002 is placed on the bottom of the housing 6001. In this manner, the shutter 6002 is slidably disposed in the front-rear direction with respect to the storage section 6001.

  The special winning opening solenoid 6003 is attached to the housing section 6001 from below. Thus, the upper side and the lower side of the housing section 6001 (the power transmission section 6034 of the special winning opening solenoid 6003) are communicated through the communication opening 6011.

  The support shaft 6012 of the housing part 6001 is inserted into the central cylindrical part 6043 of the link arm 6004 so as to be relatively rotatable from below. Thus, the link arm 6004 is rotatably supported by the housing portion 6001 clockwise or counterclockwise in plan view about the support shaft 6012 of the housing portion 6001.

  The boss 6013 of the housing portion 6001 is inserted into the central tubular portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 so as to be relatively rotatable from below. In this manner, the regulating member 6005 is rotatably supported by the housing portion 6001 around the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001 clockwise or counterclockwise in plan view.

  Next, details of an assembling configuration of various members will be described.

  As described above, in a state where the link arm 6004 is supported by the support shaft 6012 of the housing section 6001, the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 moves downward of the housing section 6001 via the communication opening 6011 of the housing section 6001. And projected. The connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 is inserted from above into the connection opening 6036 of the special winning opening solenoid 6003 below the housing portion 6001. In this way, the link arm 6004 and the special winning opening solenoid 6003 are operably connected via the connection shaft 6045 and the connection opening 6036.

  As shown in FIG. 46A, the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 is arranged so as to abut the left edge of the connection opening 6036 of the special winning opening solenoid 6003. That is, the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 is arranged with a gap in the left-right direction in plan view between the connection shaft 6045 of the large winning opening solenoid 6003 and the right edge of the connection opening 6036 of the large winning opening solenoid 6003.

  In a state where the link arm 6004 is supported by the support shaft 6012 of the housing section 6001, the connection shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002 is inserted into the connection opening 6044 of the link arm 6004 from below. In this way, the link arm 6004 and the shutter 6002 are operatively connected via the connection opening 6044 and the connection shaft 6023.

  In a state where the link arm 6004 is supported by the support shaft 6012 of the accommodation portion 6001, the regulating protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 is in contact with the regulating block 6054 of the regulating member 6005.

  As shown in FIG. 46A, the rear side surface of the restriction protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the front side surface of the restriction block portion 6054 of the restriction member 6005 are planes parallel to each other. Surface contact (not contact).

  Further, in a state where the link arm 6004 is supported by the support shaft 6012 of the housing section 6001, as shown in FIGS. 46A and 46B, the boss 6013 of the housing section 6001 is It is arranged so as to be in contact with the left edge of the portion 6053.

  In a state where the regulating member 6005 is supported by the boss 6013 of the housing portion 6001, the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 protrudes below the housing portion 6001 via the communication opening 6011 of the housing portion 6001. Is done. The connection shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 is inserted from below into the connection protrusion 6037 (that is, the gap of the connection protrusion 6037) of the special winning opening solenoid 6003 below the housing portion 6001. In this way, the link arm 6004 and the regulating member 6005 are operatively connected via the connecting shaft 6055 and the connecting protrusion 6037.

  As shown in FIG. 46B, the connection shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 is disposed in front of the connection protrusion 6037 (that is, the gap of the connection protrusion 6037) of the special winning opening solenoid 6003.

  In a state where the regulating member 6005 is supported by the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is inserted into the guiding opening 6014 of the housing portion 6001 from above.

  As shown in FIG. 46B, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is the first guide opening 6016 and the second guide opening 6017 of the guide opening 6014 of the housing portion 6001. It is arranged so as to be located within the portion 6016 (more specifically, to abut on the right end of the first guide opening 6016).

  As described above, when the left edge of the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is in contact with the boss 6013 of the housing portion 6001 as described above, the guiding shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is connected to the first guiding opening 6016. Is in contact with the right end of the.

  In the following, referring to FIGS. 46 and 50, when the shutter 6002 is in the closed state, the shutter 6002 is unintentionally opened by the restricting member 6005 and the guide opening 6014 (locking means) of the storage section 6001 (in more detail). Will be described in detail with respect to regulation of unintended rotation of the link arm 6004 and unintended movement of the shutter 6002).

  In the present embodiment, the unintended opening of the shutter 6002 is not an opening in accordance with the power generated by the special winning opening solenoid 6003, but an external force directly applied to the shutter 6002 (for example, a game ball to the shutter 6002). Of the shutter 6002 performed by the wrongdoer or a wrongdoer).

  In the following description, the rotation direction of each member is based on a plan view unless otherwise specified. In the following description, a state in which the unintended opening of the shutter 6002 is restricted by the restricting member 6005 and the guide opening 6014 (locking means) of the storage section 6001 is referred to as a “locked state”.

  In the special electric accessory 6000 assembled as described above, when an external force (a force that causes the shutter 6002 to slide backward) is directly applied to the shutter 6002, the special electric accessory 6000 is connected via the connection opening 6044 and the connection shaft 6023. A force that rotates clockwise from the shutter 6002 to the link arm 6004 is transmitted.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 46A, the regulating protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 is in contact with the regulating block 6054 of the regulating member 6005 at the rear (that is, in the moving direction when the link arm rotates clockwise). Be abutted. Therefore, when a force that rotates clockwise from the shutter 6002 to the link arm 6004 is transmitted, the link arm 6004 and the restriction member 6005 rotate counterclockwise from the link arm 6004 via the restriction protrusion 6046 and the restriction block 6054. A rotating force is transmitted.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 46 (b), the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is located inside the first guide opening 6016 (more specifically, the right end of the first guide opening 6016 Abutting). That is, in front of the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 (moving direction when the regulating member 6005 rotates counterclockwise), the edge of the first guide opening 6016 (hereinafter, the front edge) is arranged. You. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50 (a), even when a force that rotates counterclockwise is transmitted from the link arm 6004 to the regulating member 6005, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is The restriction member 6005 cannot rotate because it interferes with the front edge of the guide opening 6016.

  As described above, since the regulating member 6005 cannot rotate, the link arm 6004 transmitting the force to the regulating member 6005 cannot also rotate. Further, since the link arm 6004 cannot rotate, the shutter 6002 transmitting the force to the link arm 6004 cannot move. That is, even when an external force is directly applied to the shutter 6002, the shutter 6002 does not move backward against the external force and can maintain the closed state.

  As described above, when the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is located in the first guiding opening 6016, the intention of the shutter 6002 is determined by the regulating member 6005 and the guiding opening 6014 (locking means) of the housing portion 6001. Opening (more specifically, unintended rotation of the link arm 6004 and unintended movement of the shutter 6002) is in a restricted state (locked state).

  In a locked state, when a force that rotates counterclockwise is transmitted from the link arm 6004 to the regulating member 6005, the rear side surface of the regulating protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the regulating block 6054 The front side surfaces press against each other with a relatively strong force. However, since the rear side surface of the restricting projection 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the front side surface of the restricting block portion 6054 of the restricting member 6005 are in point contact with each other instead of point contact as described above, their durability is improved. Can be done.

  Hereinafter, a configuration in which the shutter 6002 is opened according to the power generated by the special winning opening solenoid 6003 when the shutter 6002 is in the closed state will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50.

  As described later, when the shutter 6002 is opened in response to the power generated by the special winning opening solenoid 6003, unlike the case where an external force is directly applied to the shutter 6002, the regulating member 6005 and the housing portion 6001 are different. Is unlocked by the guide opening 6014 (locking means).

  When the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is located in the first guide opening 6016 (when the shutter 6002 is in the closed state), when the shutter 6002 is opened, the power generation unit 6032 of the special winning opening solenoid 6003 is energized. Is performed. When power is supplied to the power generation unit 6032, as shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the plunger 6033 starts to move to the left, and power is generated by the special winning opening solenoid 6003. When the plunger 6033 starts to move to the left, the power transmission unit 6034 (the connection opening 6036 and the connection protrusion 6037) fixed to the right end of the plunger 6033 also moves to the left.

  When the connection protrusion 6037 of the power transmission unit 6034 moves to the left, power from the special winning opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted to the restriction member 6005 via the connection protrusion 6037 and the connection shaft 6055 of the restriction member 6005. . Specifically, the connection protrusion 6037 of the power transmission unit 6034 presses the connection shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 to the left. In this way, when the power from the special winning opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted, the regulating member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the housing portion 6001.

  Specifically, the central tubular portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001, and the right edge of the central tubular portion 6053 contacts the boss portion 6013. In addition, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the first guide opening 6016 of the storage section 6001, and the left end of the first guide opening 6016 (the rear end of the second guide opening 6017). Part).

  In the following, the movement of the power transmission unit 6034 until the right edge of the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 abuts on the boss portion 6013 (the guiding shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is moved to the first guiding opening of the housing portion 6001). The movement of the power transmission unit 6034 until it contacts the left end of the power transmission unit 6016) is referred to as “first movement of the power transmission unit 6034”. Further, the movement of the power transmission unit 6034 after the right edge of the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is brought into contact with the boss portion 6013 (the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is moved to the first guiding opening 6016 of the housing portion 6001). Of the power transmission unit 6034) is referred to as “second movement of the power transmission unit 6034”.

  In addition, when the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission unit 6034 moves leftward due to the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, the connection opening 6036 moves leftward with respect to the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004. Then, the right edge of the connection opening 6036 contacts the connection shaft 6045. In the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission unit 6034 does not press the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 at all during the movement. That is, in the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, the power from the special winning opening solenoid 6003 is not transmitted to the link arm 6004.

  In the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, the timing at which the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 abuts on the left end of the first guide opening 6016 (the rear end of the second guide opening 6017), and the timing of the regulation. The timing at which the right edge of the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the member 6005 contacts the boss portion 6013 and the timing at which the right edge of the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission portion 6034 abuts the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 are all They are set to be substantially the same.

  In the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is located inside the first guiding opening 6016, and the guide shaft 6056 is moved forward (the regulating member 6005 rotates counterclockwise). In this case, the front edge of the first guiding opening 6016 is disposed in the moving direction. That is, in the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, even when a force that rotates counterclockwise from the link arm 6004 to the regulating member 6005 is transmitted, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is moved. Since it interferes with the front side edge of the first guide opening 6016, the locked state of the regulating member 6005 and the guide opening 6014 (locking means) of the storage section 6001 is continued.

  Further, as described above, in the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, the power from the special winning opening solenoid 6003 is not transmitted to the link arm 6004. That is, although the power from the special winning opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted from the power transmission unit 6034 to the regulating member 6005, it is not transmitted to other members (for example, the link arm 6004). Thus, although the regulating member 6005 moves to the left, the link arm 6004 and the shutter 6002 do not rotate (move) in any direction, and maintain the posture when the shutter 6002 is in the closed state. Become.

  In such a state, as shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, when the power transmission unit 6034 further moves to the left (when the power transmission unit 6034 performs the second movement), the connection protrusion of the power transmission unit 6034 The power from the special winning opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted to the regulating member 6005 via the connection shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6037 and the regulating member 6005. Specifically, the connection protrusion 6037 of the power transmission unit 6034 presses the connection shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 to the left.

  Here, when the power transmission unit 6034 performs the second movement, the right edge of the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is in contact with the boss 6013. That is, the central tubular portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 cannot move to the left with respect to the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001. Therefore, when the connecting protrusion 6037 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the restricting member 6005 to the left, the restricting member 6005 tends to rotate counterclockwise about the boss 6013 of the housing portion 6001.

  When the power transmission unit 6034 performs the second movement, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 contacts the left end (the rear end of the second guide opening 6017) of the first guide opening 6016 of the storage unit 6001. Touched. The second guide opening 6017 is formed so as to overlap a part of a virtual circle centered on the center P of the boss 6013. That is, an opening is formed in front of the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 (moving direction when the regulating member 6005 rotates counterclockwise) along the locus along which the guide shaft 6056 moves ( Nothing interferes when the guide shaft 6056 moves).

  In this way, when the connecting protrusion 6037 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 to the left, and the regulating member 6005 tries to rotate counterclockwise around the boss 6013 of the housing portion 6001, FIG. As shown in (b), the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is guided by the second guide opening 6017 of the housing section 6001, and moves the second guide opening 6017 forward. When the regulating member 6005 tries to rotate counterclockwise about the boss 6013 of the housing portion 6001, the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 moves relatively rearward with respect to the power transmission portion 6034. I will do it.

  Note that the regulating member 6005 makes the position of the center of rotation different in the left-right direction between the case where the power transmission unit 6034 performs the first movement as described above and the case where the power transmission unit 6034 performs the second movement. ing. Specifically, when the power transmission unit 6034 performs the first movement, the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001 that is in contact with the left edge of the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is positioned at the center of rotation. And When the power transmission unit 6034 performs the second movement, the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001 that is in contact with the right edge of the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is set as the center of rotation.

  In this way, the regulating member 6005 is moved forward in the front of the first guiding opening 6016 by moving the position of the center of rotation differently in front of the guiding shaft 6056 (in the moving direction when the regulating member 6005 rotates counterclockwise). It switches between having an edge or extending the second guide opening 6017.

  As described above, when the power transmission unit 6034 performs the second movement, the locked state of the restricting member 6005 and the guide opening 6014 (lock means) of the storage unit 6001 is released, and the guide shaft 6056 of the restricting member 6005 is stored. The second guide opening 6017 of the part 6001 can be moved forward. That is, when the connecting protrusion 6037 of the power transmission unit 6034 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the restricting member 6005 leftward, the restricting member 6005 rotates counterclockwise around the boss 6013 of the housing 6001. I do.

  When the power transmission unit 6034 performs the second movement, the right edge of the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission unit 6034 is in contact with the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004. That is, the power from the special winning opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted to the link arm 6004 via the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission unit 6034 and the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004. Specifically, the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission unit 6034 presses the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 to the left. Thus, when the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission unit 6034 presses the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 leftward, the link arm 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise.

  Note that when the power transmission unit 6034 is performing the first movement (when the power transmission unit 6034 is in the locked state), the link arm 6004 attempts to rotate counterclockwise, that is, When a force such as to rotate counterclockwise from the link arm 6004 to the regulating member 6005 is transmitted via the regulating block portion 6054 of the regulating member 6005, the guiding shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 moves the first guiding opening. The restriction member 6005 could not rotate because it interfered with the front edge of the portion 6016.

  However, when the power transmission unit 6034 performs the second movement, the guide shaft 6056 of the control member 6005 can move the second guide opening 6017 of the storage unit 6001 forward as described above, so that the control member The restriction block portion 6054 of 6005 also moves rearward. When the regulating block portion 6054 of the regulating member 6005 moves rearward, it moves in a direction away from the regulating protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004.

  Therefore, when the power transmission unit 6034 performs the second movement and the link arm 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise, the restriction protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the restriction block 6054 of the restriction member 6005 are used. Does not interfere with That is, the link arm 6004 can rotate counterclockwise.

  When the link arm 6004 rotates counterclockwise, power from the special winning opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted to the shutter 6002 via the connection opening 6044 of the link arm 6004 and the connection shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002. Specifically, the connection opening 6044 of the link arm 6004 presses the connection shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002 backward. Thus, when the connection opening 6044 of the link arm 6004 presses the connection shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002 backward, the shutter 6002 starts sliding backward.

  The second movement of the power transmission unit 6034 ends when the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 reaches the front end of the second guide opening 6017 of the storage unit 6001, as shown in FIG. In this way, when the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 reaches the front end of the second guide opening 6017 of the storage section 6001, the shutter 6002 is opened.

  As described above, the configuration in which the shutter 6002 is opened from the closed state has been described. However, in the case where the shutter 6002 is closed from the open state, after the energization of the special winning opening solenoid 6003 is stopped, the shutter 6002 is opened. The various members (the shutter 6002, the special winning opening solenoid 6003, the link arm 6004, and the regulating member 6005) respectively operate in the reverse order to the case in which the operation is performed.

  Here, conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, for example, a technique of providing a displaceable member that can be displaced to a position where a game ball easily passes and a position where a game ball hardly passes with respect to a passage area. Are known. For example, as described in JP-A-2008-307103.

  In the technique described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-307103, a door member of a winning device is provided as the displacement member. A solenoid is employed as a drive source for displacing the door member (reciprocating between a position for opening and a position for closing).

  Further, in the technique described in JP-A-2008-307103, the lock is provided by a transmission unit of a solenoid and an engagement protrusion provided on a door member, whereby the door is closed. The opening of the door member at the position can be restricted (locked).

  However, since a certain degree of accuracy is required in the positional relationship between the lock portion and the engagement protrusion, if the solenoid has deteriorated over time or foreign matter has entered the drive path of the solenoid, etc. No longer touches. As described above, when the lock portion and the engagement protrusion are not completely in contact with each other, there is a possibility that the door member may play in the closed position or the door member may be slightly opened (unintended displacement is performed). Possibility), which was inconvenient.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problem, and when a displacement member is displaced to a position where it is difficult for a game ball to pass, it is possible to more reliably restrict an unintended displacement of the displacement member. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of performing the following.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes the gaming board 17 having the gaming area 20 in which the gaming balls roll, the second starting port 440 provided in the gaming area 20 and through which the gaming balls can pass. (Passing area), and a displacement member (shutter 6002 and link arm 6004) displaceable with respect to the second starting port 440 (passing area) to a position where game balls easily pass and a position where game balls do not easily pass. ), A gaming machine having a special winning opening solenoid 6003 (driving means) for driving the displacement member, and a main control circuit 100 (driving control means) capable of controlling the special winning opening solenoid 6003 (driving means). In this state, the displacement member is controlled to be displaced to a position where it is difficult for the game ball to pass, and the main control circuit 100 (drive control means) moves the displacement member so that the game ball can easily pass therethrough. A locking means (a regulating member 6005 and a guide opening 6014 of the accommodation portion 6001) capable of locking the displacement member at a position where it is difficult for the game ball to pass when the control for displacement is not performed. A mouth solenoid 6003 (driving means) includes a power generation unit 6032 for generating power, and a power transmission capable of transmitting the power generated by the power generation unit 6032 to the displacement member by contacting at least a part of the displacement member. A locking member that regulates the displacement of the displacement member by contacting at least a part of the displacement member, and a displacement path of the regulation member. A guide opening 6014 (a displacement guide), and the displacement path includes a first guide opening 6016 (a first displacement section) and the first guide opening. 6016 (first displacement section) and a second guide opening 6017 (second displacement section) different from the first transmission section. The displacement is controlled to a position where the passage is easy and a position where the passage of the game ball is difficult, and the regulating member 6005 (the regulating portion) is moved to the guiding opening 6014 (the displacement guiding portion) with the displacement of the power transmission portion 6034. When the regulating member 6005 (regulating portion) is located in the first guiding opening 6016 (first displacement section), the locking means maintains the locked state of the displacement member. When the regulating member 6005 (regulating portion) is located in the second guide opening 6017 (second displacement section), the locked state of the displacement member is released.

  With such a configuration, the locking means (the restricting member 6005 and the guide opening 6014 of the storage portion 6001) is used only when the guide shaft 6056 of the restricting member 6005 is located at the right end of the first guide opening 6016. Alternatively, while the guide shaft 6056 is located in the first guide opening 6016, the locked state of the displacement member (the shutter 6002 and the link arm 6004) can be maintained. In other words, even if the positional relationship between the regulating member 6005 and the guide opening 6014 of the housing section 6001 is slightly shifted (for example, even if the power transmission section 6034 is not arranged at a normal position), the locked state is maintained. Can be maintained. Therefore, when the displacement member (shutter 6002 and link arm 6004) is displaced to a position where it is difficult for game balls to pass, unintended displacement of the displacement member (shutter 6002 and link arm 6004) is more reliably restricted. can do.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the displacement of the regulation member 6005 (regulation portion) includes movement and rotation, and the locking means is such that the regulation member 6005 (regulation portion) is When positioned at one guide opening 6016 (first displacement section), the rotation of the regulating member 6005 (regulating portion) is regulated and locked while the regulating member 6005 (regulating portion) is movable. When the state is maintained and the regulating member 6005 (regulating portion) is located in the second guide opening 6017 (second displacement section), the position of the center of rotation of the regulating member 6005 (regulating portion) is regulated. By making the member 6005 (regulator) different from the case where it is located in the first guide opening 6016 (first displacement section), the locking member 6005 (regulator) can be rotated to release the locked state. Is shall.

  With such a configuration, the regulating member 6005 (regulator), which is one member, can switch between maintaining and releasing the locked state by a combination of two operations (movement and rotation). In this way, the number of components can be reduced as compared with a case where members for performing two operations (movement and rotation) are provided. In particular, in the special electric accessory as in the present embodiment, the arrangement space of the components is limited, and thus having such a configuration is advantageous.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the displacement member includes a shutter 6002 (game ball guiding unit) for guiding a game ball, and a link arm 6004 (link unit) connected to the game ball guiding unit. And the power transmission portion 6034 is in contact with the link arm 6004 (link portion).

  With such a configuration, since the power transmission unit 6034 is in contact with the link arm 6004 (link unit) instead of the shutter 6002 (game ball guiding unit), the power transmission unit 6034 does not directly contact the shutter 6002 (game ball guiding unit). The shutter 6002 (game ball guiding unit) can be in a locked state.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

  For example, in the present embodiment, the special electric accessory 6000 has been described as an example of the object to be locked, but the object to be locked is not limited to this, and is usually an electric accessory and the like. You may.

  In addition, when the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034 ends, the restriction block 6054 of the restriction member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the link arm 6004. As described above, when the restriction block portion 6054 of the restriction member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the link arm 6004, the restriction protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the restriction block portion 6054 of the restriction member 6005 abut. Can be released. That is, the regulating protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the regulating block 6054 of the regulating member 6005 can be arranged so as not to overlap in the front-rear direction.

  According to such a configuration, when the power transmission unit 6034 performs the second movement, when the link arm 6004 attempts to rotate counterclockwise, the regulating protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the regulating member 6005 are rotated. (Restriction of rotation of the link arm 6004) with the restriction block portion 6054 can be more reliably prevented.

  Further, even when the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034 is completed, the state in which the regulating protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 is in contact with the regulating block 6054 of the regulating member 6005 is maintained. When the link 6004 rotates counterclockwise, the restricting protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 presses the restricting block 6054 of the restricting member 6005 to assist the turning of the restricting member 6005. .

  Further, the configuration of the guide opening 6014 (the first guide opening 6016 and the second guide opening 6017) is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. For example, the guide opening 6014 (displacement guide) is provided when the link arm 6004 attempts to rotate counterclockwise when the power transmission unit 6034 is performing the first movement (in the locked state). In addition, the guide shaft 6056 may be formed so as to interfere with the movement of the guide shaft 6056 in front of the guide shaft 6056 (movement direction when the regulating member 6005 rotates counterclockwise). In addition, from the viewpoint of smoothly promoting the movement of the guide shaft 6056, the configuration according to the present embodiment formed along the movement path of the guide shaft 6056 is desirable.

[Configuration of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400]
With reference to FIGS. 51 and 52, the configuration of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 will be briefly described. FIG. 51 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 as viewed obliquely from the upper front right side. FIG. 52 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 viewed from diagonally above the rear left (left in front view).

  The normal electric accessory unit 400 is attached and fixed to the lower left of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the game area 20. The normal electric accessory unit 400 includes a general winning opening 53, 54, 55, a second starting opening 440, a second starting opening switch 441 for detecting winning of a game ball to the second starting opening 440, and an out opening 450. And a housing member 443 that receives the game ball that has won the second starting port 440 and the game ball that has been received in the out port 450 and discharges it out of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the front of the second starting port 440 and the out port 450. And a normal electric accessory 460 provided on the front side. The second starting port 440 and the out port 450 are formed in a plate-shaped opening forming member 420. The opening forming member 420 is formed with a hole 442 through which a rotation shaft 4622 of a blade member 4620 described later penetrates.

  The second starting port 440 and the out port 450 are disposed adjacent to each other, and the second starting port 440 is disposed on the right side in front view, and the out port 450 is disposed on the left side in front view.

  On the back surface of the front cover 445, a wall 4452 that partitions the second starting port 440 and the out port 450 is formed. The wall 4452 prevents game balls that have passed through the upper portion of the blade member 4620 when the blade member 4620 is opened (game balls winning the second starting port 440) from being received by the out port 450, When the wing member 4620 is not opened, the game ball has a function of preventing the second starting port 440 from winning.

  The second starting port switch 441 is disposed on the back side of the second starting port 440 so that a game ball that has won the second starting port 440 can be detected.

  The housing member 443 is provided with openings 4434 and 4436 at portions corresponding to the second starting port 440 and the out port 450, respectively, and the second starting port 440 is won and detected by the second starting port switch 441. The game ball is accommodated in the opening 4434, and the game ball received in the out port 450 is accommodated in the opening 4436. The game balls accommodated in the openings 4434 and 4436 are collected by game ball circulation equipment provided in the island equipment (not shown). The housing member 443 has a hole 4432 through which a rotating shaft 4622 of a blade member 4620 described later penetrates.

[Composition of ordinary electric accessory 460]
With reference to FIGS. 51 to 55, the configuration of the ordinary electric accessory 460 will be described. FIG. 53 is an example of a diagram showing the ordinary electric accessory 460, the second starting port switch 441, and the housing member 443. FIG. 54 is an example of a rear view of the ordinary electric accessory 460. FIG. 55 is an example of a rear view of the ordinary electric accessory 460 as viewed obliquely from the upper right.

  The ordinary electric accessory 460 includes a base cover 4610, a blade member 4620, a starting port solenoid 4630, and a power transmission mechanism 4640 for transmitting power from the starting port solenoid 4630 to the blade member 4620.

  The base cover 4610 houses the starting port solenoid 4630 and the power transmission mechanism 4640 between the base cover 4610 and the housing member 443, and is attached to the back side of the opening forming member 420. The back side of the base cover 4610 is attached and fixed to the transparent panel 172 described above. On the front side of the base cover 4610, a guide groove 4612 long in the left-right direction is formed. A bearing (not shown) for rotatably supporting a pin 4648 described later is formed on the front side of the base cover 4610.

  The blade member 4620 is provided with a rotation shaft 4622 below the paper surface. The rotating shaft 4622 penetrates a hole 442 formed in the opening forming member 420 and a hole 4432 formed in the housing member 443, and is rotatably supported by a bearing 46444 of a blade connecting member 4642 described later. The rotating shaft 4622 has a cutout at a portion pivotally supported by the bearing 46444 of the blade connecting member 4642, and has a non-circular cross-sectional shape in the axial direction. In addition, when power from starting port solenoid 4630 is transmitted to rotating shaft 4622 as rotating force by power transmitting mechanism 4640, blade member 4620 rotates around rotating shaft 4622 as a center of rotation. In this embodiment, blade member 4620 is in the closed state when standing up, and is in the open state when rotated clockwise about rotation shaft 4622 from the closed state.

  The starting port solenoid 4630 includes a plunger 4632 that expands and contracts in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The plunger 4632 has a flange 4634 at the tip (the tip on the right side in the front view). The starting port solenoid 4630 is normally (non-excited) in a state where the plunger 4632 is extended rightward when viewed from the front, and when energized, the plunger 4632 moves leftward (shrinking direction) when viewed from the front.

  The power transmission mechanism 4640 converts the power into a rotational force and transmits it to the rotating shaft 4622 of the blade member 4620 as the plunger 4632 of the starting port solenoid 4630 expands and contracts in the left-right direction. The power transmission mechanism 4640 is connected to a rotating shaft 4622 of the blade member 4620, a blade connecting member 4646, a flange connecting member 4646, which is connected to a flange 4634 at a distal end of a plunger 4632 of the starting port solenoid 4630. And a link member 4644 provided between the flange connection member 4646.

  The blade connecting member 4642 has a bearing 46444 that supports the rotating shaft 4622 of the blade member 4620. The bearing 46444 of the blade connecting member 4642 corresponds to the shape of the rotating shaft 4622 that supports the shaft. Therefore, the blade connecting member 4642 rotates with the rotation shaft 4622 about the rotation shaft 4622 as a rotation center. Further, the blade connecting member 4642 has a support shaft 46426 protruding to the rear side. The support shaft 46426 can rotate around a rotation shaft 4622 supported by a bearing 46424.

  The link member 4644 is a member that is curved in a front view, and has an elongated hole 46442 formed at the lower end in the front view. The support shaft 46426 of the blade connecting member 4642 is slidably connected to the long hole 46442. A support shaft 46446 projecting rearward is formed at an upper end of the link member 4644 in a front view. An engagement shaft 46448 projecting rearward is formed below the support shaft 46446. A bearing 46444 that rotatably supports the pin 4648 is formed at the center of the link member 4644 (the portion where the angle of the letter changes). The link member 4644 is rotatable around a pin 4648 pivotally supported by a bearing 46444. When the link member 4644 rotates around the pin 4648 supported by the bearing 46444, the support shaft 46446 and the engagement shaft 46448 also rotate about the pin 4648 supported by the bearing 46444.

  The flange connection member 4646 has a flange holding portion 46462, a connection hole 46644, and an engagement groove 46466. The flange holding portion 46462 holds the flange 4634 at the tip of the plunger 4632 of the starting port solenoid 4630, and the flange connecting member 4646 moves in the direction of expansion and contraction of the plunger 4632 as the plunger 4632 expands and contracts. The support shaft 46446 of the link member 4644 is connected to the connection hole 46464 so that the support shaft 46446 can move inside the connection hole 46464. The engagement shaft 46448 of the link member 4644 is engaged with the engagement groove 46466. Here, the shape of the cross section of the engaging shaft 46448 crossing the longitudinal direction is a drop shape having a pointed end. Then, the link member 4644 is engaged with the engagement groove 46466 at this distal end. The flange connecting member 4646 has a guide piece 46468 that is long in the left-right direction on the back side (the base cover 4610 side). The guide piece 46468 is guided by a guide groove 4612 formed in the base cover 4610.

[Description of operation of ordinary electric accessory 460]
Next, the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 56 shows a state of the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in the closed state (shown by a dashed line) and a normal state when the blade member 4620 is transitioning from the closed state to the open state. It is an example of the back view showing the mode (illustrated by a solid line) of electric accessory 460. FIG. 57 shows a state of the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in the transition state (shown by a dashed line) and an aspect of the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in the open state (solid line). (Illustrated in FIG. 2).

  When the starting port solenoid 4630 is excited, the plunger 4632 moves in the contracting direction (left direction in front view (right direction in FIGS. 56 and 57)). When the plunger 4632 moves in the contracting direction, the flange 4634 (see FIGS. 51 and 52) moves in the contracting direction. When the flange 4634 moves in the contracting direction, the flange connecting member 4646 that clamps the flange 4634 with the flange clamping portion 46462 moves in the contracting direction. When the flange connection member 4646 moves in the contracting direction, the engagement of the engagement shaft 46448 of the link member 4644 engaged with the engagement groove 46466 of the flange connection member 4646 is released. When the engagement shaft 46448 of the link member 4644 disengaged from the engagement groove 46466 of the flange connection member 4646 is disengaged, the link member 4644 is moved forward with the pin 4648 pivotally supported by the pin insertion hole 46444 as the center of rotation. It rotates counterclockwise (clockwise in FIGS. 56 and 57) when viewed. At this time, the link member 4644 can move downward in the connection hole 46464 of the flange connection member 4646. When the link member 4644 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front with the pin 4648 pivotally supported by the pin insertion hole 46444 as a rotation center, the support shaft 46426 slidably connected in the elongated hole 46442 of the blade connection member 4642 is formed. The blade connecting member 4642 rotates clockwise around the rotation shaft 4622 as the center of rotation, and the blade member 4620 operates toward the open state.

  The operation of the blade member 4620 from the open state to the closed state is a movement opposite to the operation from the closed state to the open state when the starting port solenoid 4630 is de-energized and the plunger 4632 moves in the extending direction. Done by In order to smoothly engage the engaging shaft 46448 with the engaging groove 46466 when the blade member 4620 is operated from the open state to the closed state, the portion of the engaging groove 46466 that contacts the engaging shaft 46448 Are obliquely directed downward and obliquely rightward (obliquely downward left in FIGS. 56 and 57) when viewed from the front.

[Function description of ordinary electric accessory 460]
Next, the function of the ordinary electric accessory 460 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a rear view of the blade member 4620 and the power transmission mechanism 4640 for explaining the function of the flange connecting member 4646, and illustrates (A) that the opening of the blade member 4620 is prevented. (B) is a diagram for explaining that the opening of the blade member 4620 is permitted. FIG. 58 (A) and 58 (B), illustration of the starting port solenoid 4630 is omitted.

  When the blade member 4620 is in the closed state (when the plunger 4632 of the starting port solenoid 4630 (both shown in FIG. 56, for example) is not excited), the engagement shaft 46448 of the link member 4644 is engaged with the engagement groove 46466. Therefore, the link member 4644 cannot rotate (rotate about the pin 4648 pivotally supported by the pin insertion hole 46444) (see FIG. 58A). Therefore, as long as the plunger 4632 does not move in the contraction direction (unless the starting port solenoid 4630 is excited except for special circumstances such as a failure), the blade member 4620 cannot be opened even if it is to be opened. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to improperly open the blade member 4620 by applying a force from the outside, this can be prevented.

  On the other hand, when the starting port solenoid 4630 is excited, the plunger 4632 moves in the contracting direction as described above, the engagement between the engagement shaft 46448 and the engagement groove 46466 is released, and the blade member 4620 is opened (FIG. 58 (b)).

  In this manner, the link member 4644 forming the engaging shaft 46448, the flange connecting member 4646 forming the engaging groove 46466, and the starting port solenoid 4630 prevent the blade member 4620 from being illegally opened. Functions as a means for preventing unauthorized opening.

[Configuration of the upper front accessory 1000]
The configuration of the upper front accessory 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 59 is an example of a front view of the upper front accessory 1000 in a normal mode (a mode at the origin position). FIG. 60 is an example of a rear view of the upper front accessory 1000 in a normal mode. FIG. 61 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper front accessory 1000 as viewed obliquely from the upper front right side. FIG. 62 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper front accessory 1000 viewed obliquely from the rear left (left in front view).

  The upper front accessory 1000 includes a base plate 1010 to which various members constituting the upper front accessory 1000 are attached, a decorative plate 1030 attached and fixed to the front side of the base plate 1010, and an operable member with respect to the base plate 1010. A movable decorative body 1040, a drive motor 1050 as a drive source for operating the movable decorative body 1040, a plurality of gears 1060 capable of transmitting the power of the drive motor 1050 to the movable decorative body 1040, A force transmitting member 1020 for transmitting power from the drive motor 1050 to the movable decorative body 1040 via the plurality of gears 1060, and a coil spring 1070 as an example of an elastic member for urging the movable decorative body 1040 toward the origin position. And a photo sensor 1080 (see FIG. 62) for detecting the position of the movable decorative body 1040.The gear 1060 and the force transmitting member 1020 function as a force transmitting mechanism that transmits the power of the drive motor 1050 to the movable decorative body 1040.

  The base plate 1010 is a plate-shaped member that is attached and fixed to the upper part of the rear box 1800 of the above-described back unit 176 so as to be located on the front side of the upper rear accessory 1100. On the front side of the base plate 1010, a first support shaft 1011, a second support shaft 1012, a third support shaft 1013, and a fourth support shaft 1014, which are connected to various members of the force transmitting member 1020, are formed. Further, when the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position, the base plate 1010 has a notch 1016 formed at a position where a bearing 10226 of the first transmission member 1022 described later is located, and a movable decorative body 1040 at the origin position. And a notch 1017 formed at a position corresponding to a coil spring support shaft 1042 (a lower end of the coil spring 1070), which will be described later, formed on the back side of the movable decorative body 1040. In this specification, the notch 1016 and the notch 1017 are referred to as a first backside notch 1016 and a second rear notch 1017, respectively. Further, the base plate 1010 has a bearing 1054 for supporting a hollow boss 10662 formed at the center of the first gear 1062 described later, and a hole 1015 corresponding to the movable range of the boss 10672 of the fourth gear 1067 described later. And a hole 1018 corresponding to the movable range of the position detecting piece 10682 of the position detecting gear 1068 described later.

  The decoration plate 1030 has a decoration on its front side, not shown. When the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position, the decorative plate 1030 is formed at a position where a bearing 10226 of the first transmission member 1022 described below is located (a position on the front side corresponding to the back side first cutout 1016). Cutout 1036 and a cutout 1038 formed at a position where the lower end of the coil spring 1070 is located (a position on the front side corresponding to the second backside cutout 1017). In this specification, the notch 1036 and the notch 1038 are referred to as a front-side first notch 1036 and a front-side second notch 1038, respectively.

  The movable decorative body 1040 includes a coil spring support shaft 1042 connected to a lower end portion of the coil spring 1070, a first transmission member side support shaft 1044 supported by a bearing 10226 of the first transmission member 1022 described later, and a later described description. A second transmission member-side support shaft 1046 that is supported by a bearing 10264 of the second transmission member 1026 is formed.

  The drive motor 1050 is mounted and fixed to the base plate 1010 via a motor mounting member 1054. The drive motor 1050 is a motor with a speed reducer, and the rotation speed of the drive motor 1050 is reduced to output power from the motor output shaft 1052.

  The gear 1060 includes a first gear 1062, a second gear 1064, a third gear 1066, a fourth gear 1067, and a position detection gear 1068. Among these gears, the first gear 1062, the second gear 1064, the third gear 1066, and the fourth gear 1067 have a function of transmitting power output from the motor output shaft 1052 to the force transmission member 1020. The detection gear 1068 does not have such a function.

  At the center of the first gear 1062, a hollow shaft 10622 is formed. The motor output shaft 1052 is press-fitted into the hollow shaft 10622. Thus, when the drive motor 1050 rotates, the first gear 1062 rotates about the center of the first gear 1062 (motor output shaft 1052) as the rotation center.

  A boss 10672 is formed in the fourth gear 1067 at a position on the front side that is separated from the center 1067 by a predetermined distance in the radial direction. The position detection gear 1068 is provided with a position detection piece 10682 at a portion on the front side that is separated from the center 10684 by a predetermined distance in the radial direction. The position detecting gear 1068 has substantially the same diameter as the fourth gear 1067. Therefore, the position detection gear 1068 rotates by the same rotation angle in the opposite direction in synchronization with the rotation of the fourth gear 1067. Thus, the position of the movable decorative body 1040 can be detected. In the present embodiment, the position detection of the movable decorative body 1040 detects whether or not it is at the origin position.

  The power transmission member 1020 includes a first transmission member 1022 to which the power from the drive motor 1050 is transmitted via the gear 1060, a rack 1024 to which the power transmitted to the first transmission member 1022 is transmitted, and a first transmission member. And a second transmission member 1026 to which the power from the motor 1022 is transmitted via the rack 1024.

  The first transmission member 1022 is a fan-shaped plate member, and a bearing 10222 is formed at the center in the radial direction. The bearing 10222 supports the first support shaft 1011 formed on the base plate 1010. The first transmission member 1022 is arranged from the outside in the radial direction to the inside (that is, the center (the bearing 10222) of the first transmission member 1022) along the left side 1022a in the front view of the two sides 1022a and 1022b in the radial direction. A long hole 10224 is formed in the direction toward the head. The boss 10672 of the fourth gear 1067 penetrating the hole 1015 is connected to the long hole 10224 so as to be movable in the long hole 10224. A bearing 10226 is formed at a radially outer end along the right side 1022b in the front view of the two radial sides 1022a and 1022b of the first transmission member 1022. The bearing 10226 supports a support shaft 1044 formed on the movable decorative body 1040. The side 1022b of the first transmission member 1022 is substantially horizontal when the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position. The first transmission member 1022 includes a gear 10228 that is coaxial with the first support shaft 1011 (bearing 10222) and rotates in synchronization with the rotation of the first transmission member 1022.

  The second transmission member 1026 is a rod-shaped member that is substantially horizontal when the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position, and has a bearing 10262 formed at the left end in front view and at the right end in front view. A bearing 10264 is formed. The bearing 10262 supports the fourth support shaft 1014 of the base plate 1010. The bearing 10264 supports the support shaft 1046 of the movable decorative body 1040. The second transmission member 1026 includes a gear 10266 that is coaxial with the fourth support shaft 1014 (bearing 10262). This gear 10266 has substantially the same diameter as the gear 10228 provided on the first transmission member 1022.

  A rack 1024 for transmitting power from the first transmission member 1022 to the second transmission member 1026 is provided between the first transmission member 1022 and the second transmission member 1026. The rack 1024 is a rod-shaped member provided substantially horizontally, and has a gear 10244 formed on the right side in the front view (on the first transmission member 1022 side) and a gear 10248 on the left side in the front view (on the second transmission member 1026 side). Is formed. The gear 10244 meshes with the gear 10228, and converts the rotational power of the gear 10228 into a substantially horizontal direction. The gear 10248 is for converting the power converted in the substantially horizontal direction by the gear 10244 into a rotational direction and transmitting the power to the second transmission member 1026. The rack 1024 has a long hole 10242 formed in a substantially horizontal direction on the right side (the gear 10244 side) in a front view, and a long hole 10246 formed in a substantially horizontal direction on the left side (a gear 10248 side) in a front view. The second support shaft 1012 formed on the base plate 1010 is connected to the long hole 10242, and the third support shaft 1013 formed on the base plate 1010 is connected to the long hole 10246.

  The coil spring 1070 urges the movable decorative body 1040 toward the origin position. The upper end of the coil spring 1070 is attached and fixed to the back surface of the base plate 1010, and the lower end is attached and fixed to a coil spring support shaft 1042 formed on the back surface of the movable decorative body 1040. When the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position, the lower end of the coil spring 1070 is located at the front second notch 1038 and the rear second notch 1017.

  The photo sensor 1080 is provided so as to be located in a photo sensor disposition area 1019 formed on the base plate 1010. The photo sensor 1080 detects the position of the movable decorative body 1040 by detecting the position detecting piece 10682 provided on the position detecting gear 1068. In the present embodiment, the photo sensor 1080 is provided so that the position detecting piece 10682 can be detected when the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position.

[Description of operation of upper front accessory 1000]
Next, the operation of the upper front accessory 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 63 is an example of a front view showing the upper front accessory 1000 at the origin position. FIG. 64 is an example of a front view showing the upper front accessory 1000 while the movable decorative body 1040 is moving downward. FIG. 65 is an example of a front view showing the upper front accessory 1000 when the movable decorative body 1040 has moved downward to the operation limit position. 63 to 65, the components and the like of the force transmitting member 1020 are indicated by broken lines so that the movement of each member can be understood.

  When the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position, the drive motor 1050 rotates and the motor output shaft 1052 rotates counterclockwise in front view, and accordingly, the first gear 1062 rotates counterclockwise in front view. I do. When the first gear 1062 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the second gear 1064 meshing with the teeth of the first gear 1062 rotates clockwise in front view. When the second gear 1064 rotates clockwise in front view, the third gear 1066 meshing with the teeth of the second gear 1064 rotates counterclockwise in front view. When the third gear 1066 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, the fourth gear 1067 meshing with the third gear 1066 rotates clockwise in a front view about a center 1067 of the fourth gear 1067 as a rotation center. When the fourth gear 1067 rotates clockwise around the center 10675 as a center of rotation, the boss 10672 also rotates in the circumferential direction around the center 1067 as the center of rotation, and moves clockwise along the inside of the hole 1015. Since the boss 10672 is movably connected in the elongated hole 10224, when the boss 10672 rotates clockwise around the center 1067 in the front view, the first transmission member 1022 (that is, the gear 10228) rotates the first support shaft. It rotates clockwise in a front view with 1011 (bearing 10222) as the center of rotation. When the first transmission member 1022 rotates clockwise in front view about the first support shaft 1011, the support shaft 1044 supported by the bearing 10226 rotates clockwise in front view about the first support shaft 1011 as the rotation center. Go to

  In addition, when the gear 10228 rotates clockwise around the first support shaft 1011 in the front view, the power of the gear 10228 is transmitted to the gear 10244, and the rack 1024 moves substantially horizontally to the right in the front view. Here, the second support shaft 1012 connected to the long hole 10242 and the third support shaft 1013 connected to the long hole 10246 function as a guide for moving the rack 1024 in a substantially horizontal direction. When the rack 1024 moves substantially horizontally to the right in front view, this power is transmitted to the gear 10266, and the gear 10266 rotates clockwise in front view about the fourth support shaft 1014 (bearing 10262) as the center of rotation. When the gear 10266 rotates clockwise around the fourth support shaft 1014 as a rotation center, the second transmission member 1026 rotates clockwise around the fourth support shaft 1014 (the bearing 10262) as the rotation center. When the second transmission member 1026 rotates clockwise in front view about the fourth support shaft 1014 as a rotation center, the support shaft 1046 supported by the bearing 10264 rotates clockwise in front view about the fourth support shaft 1014 as the rotation center. Go to

  Here, the gear 10228 and the gear 10266 have the same diameter, the distance from the first support shaft 1011 (the bearing 10222) to the support shaft 1044 (the bearing 10226), and the distance from the fourth support shaft 1014 (the bearing 10262) to the support shaft. The distance to 1046 (bearing 10264) is the same. Therefore, when the motor output shaft 1052 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, the support shaft 1044 and the support shaft 1046 are synchronized, and the clock is viewed in a front view with the first support shaft 1011 and the fourth support shaft 1014 as rotation centers, respectively. Operate around. As a result, the movable decorative body 1040 moves downward (i.e., toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) while drawing a clockwise arc in a front view while maintaining a substantially horizontal state.

  When the third gear 1066 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the position detection gear 1068 meshing with the third gear 1066 also rotates clockwise in front view with the center 10684 of the position detection gear 1068 as the rotation center. Rotate. The position detection gear 1068 is not meshed with the fourth gear 1067, but the fourth gear 1067 and the position detection gear 1068 have the same diameter and are both meshed with the third gear 1066. Therefore, the rotation angle of the fourth gear 1067 and the rotation angle of the position detection gear 1068 are the same, and the position of the position detection piece 10682 formed on the position detection gear 1068 is detected by the photo sensor 1080, so that the fourth angle is obtained. The rotation angle of the gear 1067 and thus the position of the movable decorative body 1040 can be detected.

  When the drive motor 1050 rotates and the motor output shaft 1052 rotates clockwise in a front view, the above-described movement is reversed, and the movable decorative body 1040 arcs counterclockwise in a front view while maintaining a substantially horizontal state. It works upward while drawing.

  In this way, the movable decorative body 1040 can operate between the origin position and the operation limit position. Here, the movement of the movable decorative body 1040 from the origin position toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (movable body effect) occurs when the game ball wins the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440. Is performed based on the result of the hit determination performed on On the other hand, the movement from the front surface of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 toward the origin position is performed when the movable body effect based on the result of the current collision determination is completed, and based on the result of the collision determination from the next time. It will be prepared for the movable body effect to be performed.

[Structure of the upper back accessory 1100]
With reference to FIGS. 66 to 72, the configuration of the upper rear accessory 1100 will be described. FIG. 66 is an example of a front view of the upper rear accessory 1100 in the normal mode (the mode at the origin position). FIG. 67 is an example of a rear view of the upper back accessory 1100 in the normal mode. FIG. 68 is an example of a perspective view of the upper rear accessory 1100 as viewed obliquely from the front right above. FIG. 69 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper rear accessory 1100 as viewed obliquely from the upper front right side. FIG. 70 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper rear accessory 1100 as viewed from obliquely above the rear left (left in front view). 71A is an example of a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA shown in FIG. 67, and FIG. 71B is an example of an enlarged view of a portion X shown in FIG. 72A is an example of a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB shown in FIG. 67, and FIG. 72B is an example of an enlarged view of a Y portion shown in FIG.

  The AA line shown in FIG. 67 is a vertical line passing through the center of a bearing 11724 (to be described later) formed on an extension 11174 (to be described later) of the upper left arm 1172, and is shown in FIG. The BB line is a line that vertically crosses the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172.

  The upper rear accessory 1100 is made of substantially flat metal, has a substantially frame shape without a lower side, and has a base member 1180 on which various members are attached, and a left driving mechanism having a left motor 1151 and the like. 1150, a right driving mechanism 1160 having a right motor 1161 and the like, a decorative cover 1130 for covering the left motor 1151 and the like from the front so as to be invisible to the player, and a front cover so as to prevent the right motor 1161 and the like from being visible to the player. A movable decorative body 1110 that can be moved up and down by a decorative cover 1140 to be covered, a left driving mechanism 1150, and a right driving mechanism 1160, and a pair of left and right covered decorative bodies 1120 that are supported by the movable decorative body 1110 and movable. And one end is connected to the base member 1180 and the other end is connected to the covering decoration 1120. A pantograph mechanism 1170 that operates (contracts in a substantially rhombic shape) with the vertical movement of the movable decorative body 1110, a regulating member 1190 that regulates the operation of the pantograph mechanism 1170, and is attached to a substantially central portion of the base member 1180; And a static decoration 1196 fixedly attached to the base member 1180, the member having a decoration provided on the front surface.

  The base member 1180 includes a central plate 1182 extending in the left-right direction, a left vertical plate 1184 extending downward from the left end of the central plate 1182, and a right vertical plate extending downward from the right end of the central plate 1182. 1186.

  On the front surface of the central plate portion 1182, a static decoration 1196 is attached as a decoration that is decorated and does not operate on the front. At a substantially central upper end of the central plate portion 1182, a horizontally long rectangular central plate 1188 is provided facing upward. The front surface of the center plate 1188 has a pair of left support shafts 11882 and right support shafts 11884 protruding forward.

  On the front surface of the center plate 1188, below the left support shaft 11882 and the right support shaft 11884, a restricting member 1190 for restricting the pantograph mechanism 1170 from operating more than a certain amount is attached. The regulating member 1190 is a trapezoidal plate member, and has a left contact surface 1192 inclined downward and left and a right contact surface 1194 inclined downward and right.

  The left vertical plate portion 1184 is configured such that a left motor mounting member 1152 to which the left motor 1151 is mounted can be mounted. A hole 11842 is formed in the left vertical plate portion 1184 at a position corresponding to the output shaft of the left motor 1151 when the left motor mounting member 1152 is mounted. A left driven gear mounting shaft 11844 and a left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 are formed on the front surface of the left vertical plate 1184. A substantially C-shaped hole 11846 is formed around the left driven gear mounting shaft 11844 in a front view. The hole 11846 is formed corresponding to a locus of a movement of a support shaft 11562 formed on the driven gear 1156 when the driven gear 1156 described later rotates.

  The right vertical plate portion 1186 is configured so that a right motor mounting member 1162 to which the right motor 1161 is mounted can be mounted. When the right motor mounting member 1162 is mounted on the right vertical plate portion 1186, a hole 11862 is formed at a position corresponding to the output shaft of the right motor 1161. A right driven gear mounting shaft 11864 and a right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 are formed on the front surface of the right vertical plate portion 1186. A substantially C-shaped hole 11866 is formed around the right driven gear mounting shaft 11864 in a front view. The hole 11866 is formed corresponding to a locus of a movement of a support shaft 11662 formed on the driven gear 1166 when the driven gear 1166 described later rotates.

  The left driving mechanism 1150 includes a left motor 1151, a left motor mounting member 1152 to which the left motor 1151 is mounted, a driving gear 1157, a driven gear 1156, a left arm member 1155, and a left transmission arm 1154. Among them, the left arm member 1155, the driven gear 1156, and the drive gear 1157 function as a left drive transmission member that transmits power from the left motor 1151 to the left transmission arm 1154. The installation area of the left drive transmission member in the up-down direction (the operation direction of the movable decorative body 1110) is provided on the outer left side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when viewed from the front. It is smaller than the operating range. The hollow shaft 11544 formed at one (right) end of the left transmission drive arm 1154 is supported by the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 in the installation region of the left drive transmission member.

  The left motor 1151 is a motor that can rotate forward and reverse. The left motor 1151 is attached to the left motor attachment member 1152. The left motor mounting member 1152 to which the left motor 1151 is mounted has a left vertical plate portion 1184 such that the output shaft of the left motor 1151 is coaxial with the drive gear 1157 and passes through a hole 11842 formed in the left vertical plate portion 1184. Attached to. Therefore, when the left motor 1151 rotates, the drive gear 1157 rotates coaxially with the output shaft of the left motor 1151.

  The driven gear 1156 meshes with the drive gear 1157. When the drive gear 1157 rotates, the driven gear 1156 rotates in a direction opposite to the direction of the rotation. The driven gear 1156 is a gear having a larger diameter than the driving gear 1157. Thus, the rotational force of the left motor 1151 transmitted from the drive gear 1157 is amplified. The driven gear 1156 has a bearing 11564 at the center and a support shaft 11562 at a predetermined distance from the center on the front surface. A bearing 11564 is rotatably supported by the left driven gear mounting shaft 11844 so that the driven gear 1156 can rotate around the left driven gear mounting shaft 11844 as a rotation center.

  The left arm member 1155 is a substantially C-shaped member as viewed from the front (substantially C-shaped when viewed from behind), has a left arm bearing 11552 at one end (upper end on the paper), and the other end. A left arm support shaft 11554 is provided at the portion (the end on the lower side in the drawing). The left arm bearing 11552 is rotatably supported on a support shaft 11562 of the driven gear 1156.

  The left transmission arm 1154 is a member that transmits the rotational force of the left motor 1151 to the movable decorative body 1110 via the driving gear 1157, the driven gear 1156, and the left arm member 1155. The left transmission arm 1154 has a hollow shaft 11544 protruding forward at one (left) end, and has a long hole 11542 at the other (center) end. A boss 1112 described later (a boss formed on the rear surface of the movable decorative body 1110) is slidably connected to the elongated hole 11542, and supports the movable decorative body 1110. Further, the left transmission arm 1154 has a left arm bearing 11548 rotatably supported by the left arm support shaft 11554 of the left arm member 1155. The left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 rotates the hollow shaft 11544 within the installation region of the left drive transmission member so that the left transmission arm 1154 can rotate (arc movement) about the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 as a rotation center. It is supported as much as possible. In addition, a coil spring 1153 is externally inserted into the hollow shaft 11544 as an example of an elastic member that urges the left transmission arm 1154 in a counterclockwise direction (left rotation direction).

  The right driving mechanism 1160 includes a right motor 1161, a right motor mounting member 1162 to which the right motor 1161 is mounted, a driving gear 1167, a driven gear 1166, a right arm member 1165, and a right transmission arm 1164. Among these, the right arm member 1165, the driven gear 1166, and the drive gear 1167 function as a right drive transmission member that transmits power from the right motor 1161 to the right transmission arm 1164. The installation area of the right drive transmission member in the vertical direction (the operation direction of the movable decorative body 1110) is provided on the right outside of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when viewed from the front. It is smaller than the operating range. The hollow shaft 11644 formed at one (right) end of the right transmission drive arm 1164 is pivotally supported by the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 in the installation region of the right drive transmission member.

  The right motor 1161 is a motor that can rotate forward and reverse. The right motor 1161 is mounted on the right motor mounting member 1162. The right motor mounting member 1162 to which the right motor 1161 is mounted is attached to the right vertical plate portion 1186 so that the output shaft of the right motor 1161 is coaxial with the drive gear 1167 and penetrates a hole 11862 formed in the right vertical plate portion 1186. It is attached. Therefore, when the right motor 1161 rotates, the driving gear 1167 rotates coaxially with the output shaft of the right motor 1161.

  The driven gear 1166 meshes with the driving gear 1167. When the drive gear 1167 rotates, the driven gear 1166 rotates in a direction opposite to the direction of the rotation. The driven gear 1166 is a gear having a larger diameter than the driving gear 1167. Thus, the rotational force of the right motor 1161 transmitted from the drive gear 1167 is amplified. The driven gear 1166 has a bearing 11664 at the center and a support shaft 11662 at a predetermined distance from the center on the front surface. The driven gear 1166 has a bearing 11664 rotatably supported by the right driven gear mounting shaft 11864 so that the driven gear 1166 can rotate about the right driven gear mounting shaft 11864 as a rotation center.

  The right arm member 1165 is a member having a substantially C shape in a front view (substantially C shape when viewed from the rear), and has a right arm bearing 11652 at one end (upper end on the paper) and the other end. A right arm support shaft 11654 is provided at a portion (an end on the lower side in the drawing). The right arm bearing 11652 is rotatably supported on a support shaft 11662 of the driven gear 1166.

  The right transmission arm 1164 is a member that transmits the rotational force of the right motor 1161 to the movable decorative body 1110 via the driving gear 1167, the driven gear 1166, and the right arm member 1165. The right transmission arm 1164 has a hollow shaft 11644 protruding forward at one (right) end, and has a long hole 11642 at the other (center) end. A boss 1114 (a boss formed on the rear surface of the movable decorative body 1110), which will be described later, is slidably connected to the elongated hole 11742, and supports the movable decorative body 1110. In addition, the right transmission arm 1164 has a right arm bearing 11648 rotatably supported by the right arm support shaft 11654 of the right arm member 1165. In the installation region of the right drive transmission member, the hollow shaft 11644 rotates around the right transmission arm attachment shaft 11868 so that the right transmission arm 1164 can rotate (arc movement) about the right transmission arm attachment shaft 11868 as a rotation center. It is supported as much as possible. Further, a coil spring 1163 is externally inserted into the hollow shaft 11644 as an example of an elastic member that urges the right transmission arm 1164 clockwise (rightward rotation direction).

  In this manner, the movable decorative body 1110 is supported from the left and right sides by the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164, and the power from the left motor 1154 and the right motor 1161 is transmitted from the left drive transmission member and the right drive transmission member described above. Is transmitted through.

  The pantograph mechanism 1170 has an upper left arm 1172, a lower left arm 1174, an upper right arm 1176, and a lower right arm 1178. The pantograph mechanism 1170 forms a substantially rhombic side by four arms of the upper left arm 1172, the lower left arm 1174, the upper right arm 1176, and the lower right arm 1178, and deforms the substantially rhombic shape (the upper left arm 1172). (An angle formed by the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178) is performed. The upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 are made of a colorless and transparent resin. The lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 are made of black resin.

  In addition, as the above “substantially rhombic shape”, of the four arms of the upper left arm 1172, the lower left arm 1174, the upper right arm 1176, and the lower right arm 1178, for example, two pairs of opposed arms are parallel (for example, upper left arm). Arm 1172 and the lower right arm 1178 are parallel, the lower left arm 1174 and the upper right arm 1176 are parallel), and the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 have the same length. Shapes and squares are also assumed. Of the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178, for example, two opposing arms have the same length (for example, the left upper arm 1172 and the right lower arm 1178 have the same length, the left lower arm 1174 and the upper right arm The arm 1176 may be the same length) or may not be the same length. Further, for example, one arm of the two opposing arms has the same length and the other arm May have different lengths. That is, the lengths of the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 are not limited to specific lengths, and various variations can be adopted. Further, considering that each arm, that is, the accessory (movable decorative body 1110 and covering decorative body 1120) operates, it is not always necessary for the facing arms to be parallel, and the accessory (movable decorative body 1110 and covering decorative body 1120) is always required. In response to the drive, the opposite arm may change from a non-parallel state to a parallel state, or may change from a parallel state to a non-parallel state. Regarding the above-mentioned “facing arms are parallel”, it may be difficult to obtain perfect parallelism in consideration of the structure when the accessory (movable decorative body 1110 and covering decorative body 1120) is driven. Because it is assumed that the arms are facing in the same direction, the arms are considered to be parallel (substantially parallel). Also, even when each of the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 has a different length, the accessory (movable decorative body 1110 and covering decorative body 1120) can move (for example, from the origin position to the operation limit position). , The length of the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 can be changed in various ways.

  The upper left arm 1172 has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, is a horizontally long flat plate along an imaginary plane substantially perpendicular to the front-rear direction, has a bearing 11722 at a center end, and has a left end. It has a bearing 11724 in the part. The bearing 11722 is rotatably supported by the left support shaft 11882.

  The lower left arm 1174 has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and is a horizontally long flat plate along an imaginary plane substantially orthogonal to the front-rear direction. An extension 111741 extending upward (toward the upper left arm 1172) is formed. The thickness in the front-rear direction of the extension 11174 is smaller than the thickness of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction. The extension 111741 has a support shaft 11742 extending in the front-rear direction at a position above the upper end 11743 of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174. A hollow shaft 11744 is formed at the center end of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction.

  The upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are connected to each other by a bearing 11724 rotatably supported by a support shaft 11742. The upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are connected to each other at the origin position (the position where both the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are in a horizontal state, for example, as shown in FIG. 67). Except for the bearing 11724 and the support shaft 11742), they do not overlap in the front-rear direction and are arranged side by side substantially vertically. At this time, the longitudinal portions (the portions excluding the bearing 11724 and the support shaft 11742) of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are disposed on substantially the same plane when viewed from the side. Thus, the thickness of the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction can be reduced. Further, the hollow shaft 11744 is supported by the guide shaft 11224 through the elongated hole 11104 of the movable decorative body 1110. The vertical direction at the origin position is the width direction of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174.

  The upper right arm 1176 has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, has a horizontally long flat plate shape along a virtual plane substantially perpendicular to the front-rear direction, has a bearing 11762 at a center end, and has a right end. The bearing 11664 is provided in the portion. The bearing 11762 is rotatably supported by the right support shaft 11884.

  The lower right arm 1178 has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and has a horizontally long flat plate shape along an imaginary plane substantially perpendicular to the front-rear direction. An extension portion 11781 extending upward (to the lower right arm 1178 side) is formed. The thickness of the extending portion 11781 in the front-rear direction is smaller than the thickness of the longitudinal portion of the upper right arm 1176 in the front-rear direction. A support shaft 11782 extending in the front-rear direction is formed in the extension portion 11781 at a position above the upper end 11783 of the longitudinal portion of the lower right arm 1178. A hollow shaft 11784 is formed at the center end of the lower right arm 1178 in the front-rear direction.

  The upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 are connected to each other by a bearing 11764 being rotatably supported by a support shaft 11782. The upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 are connected to each other at the origin position (where the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 are both in a horizontal state, for example, in the mode shown in FIG. 67). Except for 11764 and the support shaft 11782), they are arranged side by side substantially vertically in parallel without overlapping in the front-rear direction. At this time, the longitudinal portions of the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 (the portions excluding the bearing 11764 and the support shaft 11782) are arranged on substantially the same plane when viewed from the side. Thus, the thickness of the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction can be reduced. In the present embodiment, the thickness of the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction is within the thickness range of the left motor 1151 and the right motor 1161. The hollow shaft 11784 penetrates the elongated hole 11108 of the movable decorative body 1110 and is supported by the guide shaft 11244. The vertical direction at the origin position is the width direction of the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178.

  In the above description, the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 have been described as being arranged on substantially the same plane when the longitudinal portions of the respective arms 1172 and 1174 are viewed from the side. A detailed positional relationship between the 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 in the front-rear direction will be described.

  In the upper left arm 1172, the forefront position of the longitudinal portion in the front-rear direction (thickness direction) is F1, and the rear surface position of the longitudinal portion in the front-rear direction is B1 (see FIGS. 71 (B) and 72 (B)). reference). Further, in the lower left arm 1174, the frontmost position in the front-rear direction (thickness direction) of the longitudinal portion is F2, and the rearmost position in the front-rear direction is B2 (see FIGS. 71 (B) and 72 (B)). ). Here, the frontmost position F1 of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction is located behind the frontmost position F2 of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the frontward / rearward direction. Is located behind the last surface position B2 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174. However, the rearmost position B2 of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the front-rear direction is behind the frontmost position F1 of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction and the rearmost position of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction. It is located forward of the surface position B1 (between the frontmost position F1 of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction and the rearmost position B1 of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction). That is, the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are arranged such that when viewed in a cross section perpendicularly crossing the longitudinal portions of the arms 1172, 1174, the thickness portions of the arms 1172, 1174 are in the vertical direction (the width direction of each arm). ) (Positional relationship in which the longitudinal portions of the respective arms 1172 and 1174 are arranged on substantially the same plane when viewed from the side).

  In the present embodiment, although the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 are arranged on substantially the same plane when viewed from the side, in detail, they are more inferior than the lower left arm 1174. The upper left arm 1172 is configured to be located slightly rearward. However, instead of this, the upper left arm 1172 may be configured to be slightly located on the front side of the lower left arm 1174. That is, in the present embodiment, the frontmost position F1 of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction is located behind the frontmost position F2 of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the front-rear direction. The rearmost position B1 of the longitudinal portion of the longitudinal portion 1172 in the front-rear direction is located behind the rearmost position B2 of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the longitudinal direction, and the rearmost surface of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the longitudinal direction. Although the position B2 is located behind the frontmost position F1 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and ahead of the rearmost position B1 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172, Instead, the frontmost position of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the front-rear direction is the upper left arm. 172 is located behind the frontmost position in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion, and the rearmost position of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the front-rear direction is greater than the rearmost position of the longitudinal portion of the upper right arm 1176 in the front-rear direction. The rearmost position of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction is located rearward from the frontmost position of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the longitudinal direction, and the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174. (The rearmost position of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction is the frontmost position of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the longitudinal direction, and the rearmost position of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the longitudinal direction. (Between flush surfaces).

  Also, in the present embodiment, the rearmost position B2 of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the front-rear direction is behind the frontmost position F1 of the longitudinal portion of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and the longitudinal direction of the upper left arm 1172. Position (between the frontmost position F1 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and the rearmost position B1 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172). are doing. However, instead of this, the total thickness of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (from the position of the foremost arm to the position of the rearmost arm of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174). As long as the thickness can be reduced, the rearmost position of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the front-rear direction and the rearmost position of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction may be substantially flush. Alternatively, the frontmost position of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the front-rear direction may be substantially flush with the frontmost position of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction. Further, the rearmost position of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the front-rear direction and the rearmost position of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the frontward / rearward direction are substantially flush with each other. The frontmost position in the front-back direction and the frontmost position in the front-back direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 are substantially flush (that is, the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are substantially on the same plane). You may.

  Note that the positional relationship between the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 in the front-rear direction is the same as the positional relationship between the lower left arm 1174 and the upper right arm 1176 in the front / rear direction, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 (the longitudinal portion of the upper right arm 1176 and the longitudinal portion of the lower right arm 1178) are vertically aligned (in the width direction of each arm). , The total thickness of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the lower right arm 1178) without reducing the thickness of each of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178. ) From the frontmost position to the rearmost position of the longitudinal portion of the upper right arm 1176 in the front-rear direction can be reduced, and the area occupied by the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction can be reduced. When a pachinko gaming machine is installed in a pachinko hall, the length in the front-rear direction is restricted, but by reducing the area occupied by the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction, other functions can be provided in the front-back direction of the pantograph mechanism 1170. Objects can be arranged, and a dynamic movable effect using a plurality of characters overlapping in the front-back direction can be executed.

  In addition, in the contracted state of the pantograph mechanism 1170, since the extending portion 11741 extends upward beyond the upper end 11743 of the lower left arm 1174, the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are at the origin position. It is almost horizontal. Similarly, since the extending portion 11781 extends upward to a position exceeding the upper end 11783 of the lower right arm 1178, the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 are substantially horizontal at the origin position. In addition, the movable range of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178) can be further increased by the formation of the extended portion 11742 (extended portion 11781). Become. In addition, since each of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 can have a thickness, the strength of each of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 is increased, and the arms are stabilized during operation. Further, since the strength of each of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 can be increased, the size of the movable role that operates with the operation of each of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 is increased. This makes it possible to execute more dynamic movable effects.

  In this way, by setting the positional relationship between the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (the positional relationship between the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178) as described above, a plurality of characters overlapping in the front-rear direction can be obtained. It is possible to execute a dynamic movable effect that is used and a dynamic movable effect by increasing the size of the movable role, and it is possible to further enhance the entertainment interest of the movable effect.

  The movable decorative body 1110 is decorated on the front surface and has openings 1101 and 1105 formed at substantially symmetric left and right positions. Lenses 1103 and 1107 are fitted in these openings 1101 and 1105, respectively. The movable decorative body 1110 can be slid up and down by the left driving mechanism 1150 and the right driving mechanism 1160 together with the covering decorative body 1120. The movable decorative body 1110 has a hole 11102, a long hole 11104, a hole 11106 and a long hole 11108, and a boss 1112 and a boss 1114. The hole 11102 and the hole 11106 are holes provided at positions substantially symmetric to each other. The long hole 11104 and the hole 11106 are provided at positions substantially symmetric to each other, and are vertically long holes. The boss 1112 and the boss 1114 are provided on the rear surface side of the movable decorative body 1110 at positions substantially symmetrical to each other. Further, the movable decorative body 1110 has an LED board 1116 on which a large number of LEDs are arranged attached behind the lenses 1103 and 1107, and is configured to emit light in accordance with the progress of the game. When the LED arranged on the LED substrate 1116 emits light, the light is emitted and displayed through the lenses 1103 and 1107.

  The covering decorative body 1120 includes a covering decorative body 1122 disposed on the left side of the movable decorative body 1110, and a covering decorative body 1124 disposed on the right side of the movable decorative body 1110. The covering decorative body 1122 has a support shaft 11222 and a guide shaft 11224. The covering decorative body 1124 includes a support shaft 11242 and a guide shaft 11244.

  In the covering decorative body 1122, the support shaft 11222 is rotatably supported by the hole 11102 of the movable decorative body 1110, and the guide shaft 11224 is slidably inserted into the elongated hole 11104 of the movable decorative body 1110. The covering decorative body 1122 is connected to a pantograph mechanism 1170 (specifically, rotatably supported by a bearing 11744 at an end on the center side of the lower left arm 1174). Thus, the covering decorative body 1122 covers the front surface (the lens 1103) of the movable decorative body 1110, and is movably disposed with respect to the movable decorative body 1110 about the support shaft 11222 as a rotation center.

  In the cover decoration 1124, the support shaft 11242 is rotatably supported by the hole 11106 of the movable decoration 1110, and the guide shaft 11244 is slidably inserted into the elongated hole 11108 of the movable decoration 1110. The covering decorative body 1124 is connected to a pantograph mechanism 1170 (specifically, rotatably supported by a bearing 11784 at an end on the center side of the lower right arm 1178). Thereby, the covering decorative body 1124 covers the front surface (the lens 1107) of the movable decorative body 1110 and is arranged so as to be movable with respect to the movable decorative body 1110 about the support shaft 11242 as the center of rotation.

  Note that the covering decorative body 1122 and the covering decorative body 1124 are arranged so as to be substantially symmetrical with each other.

[Description of operation of upper backside accessory 1100]
Next, the operation of the upper rear accessory 1100 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of the upper back accessory 1100 before the start of operation, that is, in a normal mode (a mode at the origin position), where (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing an example of a mode before the upper left back arm 1172 and the right upper arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 reach the limit position after the upper back accessory 1100 starts operating, and FIG. Is a front view, and (B) is a rear view. FIG. 75 is a diagram illustrating an example of a mode when the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 reach the limit positions, where (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. . FIG. 76 shows that after the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 operate to the operation limit position, the left motor 1151 and the right motor 1161 further rotate, and the movable decoration is moved by the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164. It is a figure which shows an example of a mode when the body 1110 operates toward the lower part of the paper surface (when the covering decorative body 1120 starts operating with respect to the movable decorative body 1110), wherein (A) is a front view, and (B) is a front view. ) Is a rear view. FIG. 77 is a diagram illustrating an example of a mode in which the covering decorative body 1120 has moved to the operation limit with respect to the movable decorative body 1110, wherein (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view.

  As shown in FIG. 73, when the upper back accessory 1100 is at the origin position, the pantograph mechanism 1170 is in a closed state (the longitudinal portions of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 are all substantially horizontal). is there. Here, the members (the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178) that can be hidden by the movable decorative body 1110 when the movable decorative body 1110 is operated downward on the paper surface are described on the rear surface of the movable decorative body 1110. The members (the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176) that are difficult to hide with the movable decorative body 1110 are made of colorless and transparent members. Thus, there is little possibility that the arms 1172, 1174, 1176, and 1178 hinder the visual recognition of the image displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the player does not easily notice the image.

  Then, as the movable decorative body 1110 operates downward in the drawing, the longitudinal portions of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176 change their postures in the vertical direction, and the upper arms 1172, 1176, the lower arms 1174, 1178 The angle formed by is increased. When the movable decorative body 1110 is operated downward in the drawing, the direction in which the longitudinal portions of the left lower arm 1174 and the right lower arm 1178 are directed in the vertical direction, but until the movable decorative body 1110 exceeds a certain operation range. The lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 remain on the rear side of the movable decorative body 1110.

  When the left motor 1151 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, the drive gear 1157 also rotates counterclockwise. When the drive gear 1157 rotates counterclockwise, the driven gear 1156 rotates clockwise. When the supporting shaft 11562 is at the origin position (when the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120 are at the original position), the support shaft 11562 is positioned above the paper surface, and when the driven gear 1156 rotates clockwise, the bearing 11564 (the left It rotates clockwise around the driven gear mounting shaft 11844). When the support shaft 11562 rotates clockwise around the bearing 11564 (the left driven gear mounting shaft 11844), the left arm member 1155 is pushed down to the lower left. When the left arm member 1155 is pushed down to the lower left, a clockwise pressing force around the hollow shaft 11544 (the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848) acts on the left transmission arm 1154. When a clockwise pressing force around the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 acts on the left transmission arm 1154, the left transmission arm 1154 rotates clockwise about the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 as a fulcrum. When the left transmission arm 1154 rotates clockwise, the boss 1112 slidably connected to the long hole 11542 moves the movable decorative body 1110 downward while moving inside the long hole 11542.

  When the right motor 1161 rotates clockwise in a front view, the drive gear 1167 also rotates clockwise. When the drive gear 1167 rotates clockwise, the driven gear 1166 rotates counterclockwise. When the support shaft 11662 is at the origin position (when the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120 are at the home position), the support shaft 11662 rotates when the driven gear 1166 rotates counterclockwise. It rotates counterclockwise around the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868). When the support shaft 11662 rotates counterclockwise around the bearing 11664 (the right driven gear mounting shaft 11864), the right arm member 1165 is pushed down to the lower right. When the right arm member 1165 is pushed down to the lower right, a counterclockwise pressing force about the hollow shaft 11644 (the right transmission arm attachment shaft 11868) acts on the right transmission arm 1164. When a counterclockwise pressing force about the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 acts on the right transmission arm 1164, the right transmission arm 1164 rotates counterclockwise about the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 as a fulcrum. . When the right transmission arm 1164 rotates counterclockwise, the boss 1114 slidably connected to the elongated hole 11624 moves the movable decorative body 1110 downward while moving in the elongated hole 11644.

  When the movable decoration 1110 moves downward, the covering decorations 1122 and 1124 also move downward accompanying the movement of the movable decoration 1110. This is because the guide axes 11224 and 11244 of the covering decorative bodies 1122 and 1124 are slidably inserted into the elongated holes 11104 and 11108 of the movable decorative body 1110, so that when the movable decorative body 1110 moves downward, the gravity This is because the coated decorative bodies 1122 and 1124 also move downward by the action.

  When the left motor 1151 rotates counterclockwise in front view and in synchronism therewith, the right motor 1161 rotates clockwise in front view, the movable decorative body 1110 and the coated decorative body 1120 maintain a substantially horizontal state while maintaining a substantially horizontal state. Operate downward.

  When the left side motor 1151 rotates counterclockwise in front view and the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120 move downward in the drawing, the lower central hollow shaft 1744 connected to the covering decorative body 1122 moves downward in the drawing. It is pushed down toward. Thus, the lower left arm 1174 rotates clockwise about the support shaft 11742, and the upper left arm 1172 rotates counterclockwise about the bearing 11722 (center left support shaft 11882). When the right side motor 1161 rotates clockwise in a front view and the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120 move downward in the drawing, the hollow shaft 11784 connected to the covering decorative body 1124 is pushed downward in the drawing. Can be Thus, the lower right arm 1178 rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 11782, and the upper right arm 1176 rotates clockwise around the bearing 11762 (center right support shaft 11884). Thus, the pantograph mechanism 1170 operates.

  When the upper left arm 1172 rotates counterclockwise around the bearing 11722 (center left support shaft 11882) as a fulcrum, the upper left arm 1172 eventually comes into contact with the left contact surface 1192 of the regulating member 1190. When the upper right arm 1176 rotates clockwise around the bearing 11762 (center right support shaft 11884), it eventually comes into contact with the right contact surface 1194 of the regulating member 1190. The upper left arm 1172 is at an operation limit position facing downward on the sheet when the upper left arm 1172 contacts the left contact surface 1192, and the position when the upper right arm 1176 contacts the right contact surface 1194 on the sheet It is an operation limit position directed downward.

  When the left motor 1151 further rotates counterclockwise in front view after the upper left arm 1172 has moved to the operation limit position, the movable decorative body 1110 moves further downward in the drawing. Move from the lower end position to the upper end position. Along with this, the coated decorative body 1122 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 11222 as a fulcrum. When the right motor 1161 further rotates clockwise in front view after the upper right arm 1176 has moved to the operation limit position, the movable decorative body 1110 further moves further downward in the drawing, and the hollow shaft 11784 has an elongated hole 11108. Move from the lower end position to the upper end position. Along with this, the covering decorative body 1124 rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 11242 as a fulcrum. In this way, the covering decorative body 1122 and the covering decorative body 1124 operate downward together with the movable decorative body 1110 from the origin position downward, and the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 operate downward as described above. When the movable decorative body 1110 moves to the limit position and moves further downward in the drawing, the covering decorative body 1120 relatively operates with respect to the movable decorative body 1110. When the cover decoration 1120 is relatively operated with respect to the movable decoration 1110, the lenses 1103 and 1107 fitted in the openings 1101 and 1105 are exposed and can be visually recognized by a player. The amount of exposure of the lenses 1103 and 1107 increases as the operating range of the covering decorative body 1120 relative to the movable decorative body 1110 increases.

  As described above, the upper backside accessory 1100 is vertically movable between the origin position (see FIG. 73) and the descending end position (see FIG. 75). Specifically, the movable decorative body 1110 is movable between the origin position and the descending end position, and the covering decorative body 1120 is moved between the origin position and the operation limit positions of the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176. Is movable. The operation limit position is such that after the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120 have moved to the descending end position, the movable decorative body 1110 is at the descending end position, and the covering decorative body 1120 reaches the limit with respect to the movable decorative body 1110. This is the activated position. That is, the vertical position of the movable decorative body 1110 is the same at the descending end position and the operation limit position. When the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120 are at the origin position, they are waiting at a position that does not hinder the visual recognition of the image displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. On the other hand, when the upper back accessory 1100 (specifically, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120) is at the lower end position, the liquid crystal display device 16 includes the case where the covering decorative body 1120 is at the operation limit position. It is located in front of the display area. That is, when the upper back accessory 1100 at the origin position moves toward the lower end position, the upper back accessory 1100 (the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120) moves from the origin position to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Will advance forward. The advance of the upper back role 1100 from the origin to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the forward direction is based on the progress of the game (for example, winning of a game ball to the first starting port 762 or the second starting port 752 (passing). ) Is performed in accordance with the result of the hit determination performed on the condition of).

  When the upper back role 1100 advances toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the upper right arm 1176 and the upper left arm 1172 are exposed at positions visible to the player. Since each of the upper left arms 1172 is made of a transparent resin, the left upper arm 1172 does not hinder the visual recognition of the effect image displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Moreover, since the upper back accessory 1100 (specifically, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120) is moved up and down by the pantograph mechanism, the fulcrum between the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 and the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm The fulcrum with the arm 1174 is located on the side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 and does not hinder the player's visual recognition (the player tends to gaze at the center), as well as the left driving mechanism. The 1150 and the right drive mechanism 1160 can be compactly provided in a range smaller than the vertical movable range of the upper rear accessory 1100. Although the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 are made of black resin, even if the upper rear accessory 1100 advances toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm The arm 1178 moves so as to hide behind the movable decorative body 1110, so that the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 are less likely to be in the field of view of the player. In addition, by reducing the thickness of the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction, the upper back accessory 1100 can be entirely thinned (in the present embodiment, the thickness of the upper motor 1100 is approximately the same as the width of the left motor 1151 and the right motor 1161). ing).

  In addition, when the movable decorative body 1110 starts operating, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120 both start operating from the origin position, and the movable decorative body 1110 is covered with the covering decorative body 1120 (covering decorative body) halfway. 1122 and the coated decorative body 1124) will relatively start to operate. That is, when the movable decorative body 1110 starts to operate, the covering decorative body 1120 is not operating with respect to the movable decorative body 1110, and therefore, the covering decorative body 1120 starts to operate from the beginning when the movable decorative body 1110 starts operating. It is difficult to predict the final shape, and the movable decorative body 1110 performs an operation that exceeds the player's expectation in the middle, thereby increasing the interest.

  In the present embodiment, at the beginning of the operation of the movable decorative body 1110, the movable decorative body 1110 does not have the movable decorative body 1120 (the decorative decorative body 1122 and the movable decorative body 1124) actuated. The configuration is such that the covering decorative body 1120 starts operating relative to the decorative body 1110, but is not limited to this, and the configuration is such that the covering decorative body 1120 operates regardless of the position of the movable decorative body 1110. It may be.

  By the way, after the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 abut against the left abutment surface 1192 and the right abutment surface 1194, respectively (after reaching the operation limit position), the left motor 1151 and the right motor 1161 further rotate. Even if it does, the posture of the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 (the direction in which the longitudinal portions of the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 face) will not change. On the other hand, regarding the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178, after the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 abut on the left abutment surface 1192 and the right abutment surface 1194, respectively, The longitudinal portion of each arm 1178 changes its posture in the vertical direction. If the longitudinal portions of the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 change their postures in the vertical direction, the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 will eventually be exposed from the back side of the movable decorative body 1110. .

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, before the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 are exposed from the back side of the movable decorative body 1110, the movable decorative body 1110 is covered with the covering decorative body 1120 (the covering decorative body 1122). And the coated decorative body 1124) is relatively operated. That is, when the movable decorative body 1110 is operated downward in the drawing, the longitudinal portions of the left lower arm 1174 and the right lower arm 1178 change their postures in the vertical direction. And the lower right arm 1178 appears at a position where it can be viewed from the front, but at that timing, the covering decorative body 1120 is moved upward relative to the movable decorative body 1110, and the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm The arm 1178 is located on the back side of the covering decoration 1120. When the covering decorative body 1120 is relatively operated with respect to the movable decorative body 1110, the accessory area (the combined area of the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120) that can be visually recognized in a front view becomes large. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the left lower arm 1174 and the right lower arm 1178 from being exposed in a natural manner without a sense of incongruity for the player.

  Also, in the present embodiment, as described above, after the upper back accessory 1100 at the origin position starts operating toward the descending end position, the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 respectively contact the left contact surface. When the movable decorative body 1110 is brought into contact with the movable decorative body 1110 toward the descending end position when the movable decorative body 1110 contacts the movable decorative body 1110 and the right abutment surface 1194, the movable decorative body 1110 is covered with the decorative cover 1120 (the decorative cover 1122 and the decorative cover 1122). The body 1124) moves upward. Here, the operation of the covering decorative body 1122 with respect to the movable decorative body 1100 is performed by one operation control such as simply rotating the left motor 1151 counterclockwise in front view. Similarly, the operation of the covering decorative body 1124 with respect to the movable decorative body 1100 is performed by one operation control such as simply rotating the right motor 1161 clockwise in front view. That is, for each of the coated decorative body 1122 and the coated decorative body 1124, only the corresponding motor (the left motor 1151 for the coated decorative body 1122 and the right motor 1161 for the coated decorative body 1124) is rotated in a specific direction. With one simple operation control, it is possible to operate the movable decorative body 1100 independently of the operation of the movable decorative body 1100 while continuing the operation of the movable decorative body 1100. In addition, since only one motor is rotated for each of the decorative cover 1122 and the decorative cover 1124, the movable decorative member 1100 can be operated with a simple configuration and space saving while continuing the operation of the movable decorative member 1100. Can be operated independently of the operation of. In particular, in recent years, it has become mainstream to increase the size of the movable role and arrange a plurality of movable roles, so that contribution to space saving is a great effect.

  By the way, conventionally, when the accessory is operated substantially linearly in the vertical direction, a driving mechanism is provided on both sides of the accessory, and the driving mechanism performs a linear motion in the vertical direction. When the drive mechanism is provided on both sides of the accessory, it is necessary to provide the drive mechanism at least over the operating range of the accessory in the vertical direction, and the installation of such a drive mechanism requires a large area. Space saving can be achieved if the accessory can be operated by the circular motion, but in this case, the accessory also operates by the circular motion. In this regard, in this embodiment, the left transmission arm 1154 rotates clockwise around the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848, and the boss 1112 slidably connected to the long hole 11542 moves in the long hole 11542. Meanwhile, the movable decorative body 1110 is moved downward. In synchronization with this, the right transmission arm 1164 rotates counterclockwise around the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868, and the boss 1114 slidably connected to the elongated hole 11842 moves in the elongated hole 11842. Meanwhile, the movable decorative body 1110 is moved downward. That is, according to the present embodiment, while each of the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 is making a circular motion with one end as a fulcrum, the posture of the movable decorative body 1110 is held substantially horizontally. The movable decorative body 1110 can be moved substantially linearly in the vertical direction over an operation range larger than the installation area of the drive mechanism. Moreover, since the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 perform an arc movement, the installation area in the vertical direction of the driving mechanism (the left driving mechanism 1150 and the right driving mechanism 1160) for driving the movable decoration 1110 is changed to the movable decoration 1110. Can be made smaller than the operating range, and it can greatly contribute to space saving.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the same type of decoration is provided on the front surfaces of the movable decorative body 1110, the covering decorative body 1120, the decorative cover 1130, the decorative cover 1140, the left transmitting arm 1154, the right transmitting arm 1164, and the static decorative body 1196. Has been given. The same type of decoration means, for example, a decoration that recalls the same idea. If a decoration that can be recognized as having the same color, pattern, or shape in appearance is given, the same idea can be recalled. In the present embodiment, the members 1110, 1120, 1130, 1140, 1154, 1164, and 1196 are formed on the front surfaces of the members 1110, 1120, 1130, 1140, and 1196 in a shape that has the same appearance and forms the same accessory (upper and lower accessory 1100). The decoration is recognizable. In addition, since the upper back role 1100 is a character related to the concept of a gaming machine, the same members 1110, 1120, 1130, 1140, 1154, 1164, 1196 having the same type of decoration on the front face are identical. A character shape is formed.

  In a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, in particular, a supporting member for supporting a movable member (corresponding to the movable decorative body 1110 of the present embodiment) and a driving member for driving the movable member (the left transmission of the present embodiment) (The arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 correspond to each other.) When the movable accessory has advanced to the front side of the liquid crystal display device, there is a possibility that the movable accessory can be visually recognized in a front view. In this regard, in the present embodiment, unlike such a conventional gaming machine, the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 can be visually recognized in front view, and then other members (movable decorative body 1110) can be used. , The decorative cover 1120, the decorative covers 1130, 1140, and the static decorative body 1196) so as to be recognized by the player as members constituting the same accessory (upper and lower accessory 1100). In addition, the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are assimilated with the other members regardless of the position of the movable decorative body 1110 between the origin position and the operation limit position due to the operation. , And FIGS. 73 to 77 (A). More specifically, the left transfer arm 1154 is provided with a decoration for providing continuity between the movable decorative body 1110 and the decorative cover 1130, and the right transfer arm 1164 is provided with a movable decorative body 1110 and a decorative cover. The decoration which gives continuity to 1140 is provided. Moreover, the same type of decoration is applied to the front surfaces of the left transmission arm 1154, the right transmission arm 1164, and the other members to form one character. In this way, the transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are connected to the movable decorative body 1110 to support the movable decorative body 1110, while the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are intentionally viewed from the front. It is difficult for the player to grasp that the member is a member to be played. Further, while the movable decorative body 1110 has an eye-like shape, the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are shaped to image the outer corner of the eye from the left and right ends of the movable decorative body 1110. . Therefore, it is more difficult for a player to grasp that the transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are members that drive the movable decorative body 1110.

[Configuration of lower part 1200]
The configuration of lower accessory 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 78 is an example of a front view of lower accessory 1200 in a normal mode (a mode at the origin position). FIG. 79 is an example of a rear view of the lower accessory 1200 in the normal mode. FIG. 80 is an example of a perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 as viewed from obliquely forward right above. FIG. 81 is an example of a rear perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 as viewed obliquely from the upper left. FIG. 82 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 as viewed obliquely from the upper front right side. FIG. 83 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 as viewed from obliquely above the rear left (left in front view).

  The lower part 1200 includes a lower part fixed base 1220 to which various members constituting the lower part 1200 are attached, a lower part movable decorative body 1210 configured to be operable with respect to the lower part fixed base 1220, A left guide 1260 member and a right guide 1270 member for guiding the vertical movement of the lower part movable decorative body 1210 on both the left and right sides, and an assist for applying an upward urging force to the vertically movable lower part movable decorative body 1210. An arm 1280, a lower accessory drive motor 1230 as a drive source for operating the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 with respect to the lower accessory fixed base 1220, and a lower accessory movable motor that drives the power of the lower accessory drive motor 1230. A gear 1240 for transmitting to the decorative body 1210 and a rear cover 1250 made of a transparent resin disposed behind the gear 1240 are provided. Although the rear cover 1250 is made of a transparent resin, various members such as the gear 1240 are not shown in FIGS. 79 and 81 so that the shape of the rear cover 1250 can be easily grasped. The lower accessory fixed base 1220 and the lower accessory drive motor 1230 function as an operating mechanism for moving the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 up and down.

  The lower accessory fixing base 1220 is a horizontally long rectangular plate-shaped member. The lower accessory fixing base 1220 is attached and fixed to the rear box 1800 of the back unit 176 described above. A lower accessory drive motor 1230 is attached to the lower accessory fixed base 1220 at a substantially lower center on the front side. On the left side of the front surface of the lower part fixed base 1220, a support shaft 12202 that supports the auxiliary arm 1280 is formed toward the front. A pair of left and right support shafts 12203 and 12205 are formed rearward on the back side of the lower part fixed base 1220. The lower part fixed base 1220 has a pair of semicircular holes 12204 and 12206 which are substantially symmetric with respect to the lower part drive motor 1230 and bulge outward above the lower part drive motor 1230. Is formed. The hole 12204 is formed so as to draw an arc around the support shaft 12203. The hole 12206 is formed so as to draw an arc around the support shaft 12205. A photo sensor 12208 for detecting the position of the movable movable lower body 1210 is disposed on the front side of the lower part fixed base 1220 and to the right of the lower part drive motor 1230. In the present embodiment, the photo sensor 12208 detects whether or not the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is at the origin position.

  The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is a decorative member that is long in the horizontal direction. It is attached to the front side of the lower part fixed base 1220 so as to be able to operate vertically with respect to the lower part fixed base 1220. The movable movable lower body 1210 has a movable lower base 12102 made of a transparent resin, which can be operated vertically with respect to the lower fixed base 1220, and a lower fixed base 1220 which is decorated on the front surface. And a lower accessory decoration cover 12104 that moves up and down together with the lower accessory movable base 12102. The lower accessory decoration cover 12104 is configured to transmit light from behind toward the front.

  A pair of long holes 12106 and 12108 are formed on both left and right sides of the lower accessory movable base 12102. These long holes 12106 and 12108 are long holes elongated in the lateral direction. A boss 12110 that engages with the auxiliary arm 1280 is formed on the lower accessory movable base 12102 on the right side of the elongated hole 12106 toward the front.

  In addition, an LED substrate on which LEDs (not shown) as light emission sources are arranged on the front side of the lower accessory movable base 12102. When the LED arranged on this LED board emits light, it emits light forward through the lower accessory decoration cover 12104. Thus, for example, it is possible to perform a light emission effect in accordance with the vertical movement of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210.

  The left guide member 1260 is a vertically long plate-like member, and is attached to the left side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 at the attachment portions 12604 and 12606. The left guide member 1260 is attached to the left side of the lower part fixed base 1220 so as to sandwich the lower part movable base 12102 with the lower part fixed base 1220. A groove formed between the left guide member 1260 and the lower accessory fixed base 1220 functions as a guide groove when the lower accessory movable base 12102 moves up and down with respect to the lower accessory fixed base 1220. .

  The right guide member 1270 is a vertically long plate-like member, and is attached to the right side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 at the attachment portions 12704 and 12706. The right guide member 1270 is attached to the right side of the lower part fixed base 1220 so as to sandwich the lower part movable base 12102 with the lower part fixed base 1220. The groove formed between the right guide member 1270 and the lower part fixing base 1220 functions as a guide groove when the lower part movable base 12102 moves up and down with respect to the lower part fixing base 1220. .

  The auxiliary arm 1280 is a rod-shaped member provided on the left front side of the lower accessory decoration cover 12104. The auxiliary arm 1280 has a bearing 12804 supported on a support shaft 12202 of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 at the left end. The auxiliary arm 1280 has a long hole 12802 formed at the right end thereof so as to engage with a boss 12110 formed on the lower accessory movable base 12102.

  An auxiliary coil spring 1290 is provided between the support shaft 12202 formed on the lower part fixed base 1220 and the bearing 12804 formed on the auxiliary arm 1280 as an example of an elastic member. The auxiliary coil spring 1290 urges the auxiliary arm 1280 counterclockwise (left-rotating direction) with the bearing 12804 (support shaft 12202) as the center of rotation. The upward movement of the lower part movable ornament 1210 with respect to the lower part fixed base 1220 is assisted by the biasing force of the auxiliary coil spring 1290 counterclockwise.

  The lower accessory drive motor 1230 is a stepping motor, and its rotation is controlled by a pulse signal from the accessory control circuit 207.

  The gear 1240 is provided behind the lower accessory fixed base 1220. The gear 1240 includes a drive gear 12402 provided coaxially with the lower accessory drive motor 1230, a left driven gear 12404 and a right driven gear 12406.

  The left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 have the same diameter. They are arranged side by side. The left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 rotate in opposite directions in synchronization with each other.

  The left driven gear 12404 has a bearing 12404a at the center. The bearing 12404a rotatably supports the support shaft 12203. The teeth of the left driven gear 12404 mesh with the teeth of the drive gear 12402. The right driven gear 12406 has a bearing 12406a at the center. The bearing 12406a rotatably supports the support shaft 12205. The teeth of the right driven gear 12406 mesh with the teeth of the left driven gear 12404 and do not mesh with the teeth of the drive gear 12402. That is, the torque of the lower accessory drive motor 1230 is transmitted to the left driven gear 12404 via the drive gear 12402, and the torque transmitted to the left driven gear 12404 is further transmitted to the right driven gear 12406. Thus, the rotation of the drive gear 12402 and the rotation of the right driven gear 12406 rotate in synchronization.

  A boss 12405 is formed on the front surface of the left driven gear 12404 at a position radially away from the center of the left driven gear 12404 by a predetermined distance. Similarly, with respect to the right driven gear 12406, a boss 12407 is formed on a front surface of the right driven gear 12406 at a position radially away from the center of the right driven gear 12406 by a predetermined distance. Note that the distance from the center of the left driven gear 12404 to the boss 12405 is the same as the distance from the center of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407.

  Note that “the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 have the same diameter”, “the height position of the center of the left driven gear 12404 and the height position of the center of the right driven gear 12406 are the same” and “the left driven gear The distance from the center of the gear 12404 to the boss 12405 is the same as the distance from the center of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407 ", which are not strict enough to require the same value up to the decimal point. When transmitting the power of the lower part drive motor 1230 to the lower part movable decorative body 1210, the lower part movable decorative body 1210 is stably maintained (with good balance in the left-right direction) while maintaining the same posture in appearance. What is necessary is just to be able to move up and down within a range in which the colleague is transmitted to the left and right sides of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 substantially equally.

  The boss 12405 penetrates a hole 12204 formed in the lower part fixed base 1220 and is slidably connected to a long hole 12106 formed in the lower part movable base 12102. Here, the hole 12204 is formed so as to correspond to a trajectory around which the boss 12405 rotates around the support shaft 12203 when the left driven gear 12404 rotates clockwise.

  The boss 12407 passes through a hole 12206 formed in the lower part fixed base 1220 and is slidably connected to an elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower part movable base 12102. Here, the hole 12206 is formed so as to correspond to a trajectory around which the boss 12407 rotates around the support shaft 12205 when the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise.

  In the normal state, the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 are respectively located at the lowest lowermost position (the position shown in FIG. 84).

  Note that the holes 12204 and 12206 also have a function of defining the movement range of the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 (that is, the rotation range of the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406), respectively.

  When the uppermost position of the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 when the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 rotate are the uppermost position, the holes 12204 and 12206 are at least the lowermost position and the uppermost position. The bosses 12405 and 12407 need to be formed so that they can move between them. In this embodiment, the hole 12404 is formed from the lowermost position (see FIG. 84) to a position exceeding the uppermost position clockwise. The hole 12206 is formed from the lowermost position (see FIG. 84) to a position beyond the uppermost position in a counterclockwise direction.

  Here, of two positions where the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 and the hole 12204 intersect, the upper part is the uppermost end position of the boss 12405, and the lower part is the lowermost position of the boss 12405. Also, of the two positions where the vertical line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406 and the hole 12206 intersect, the upper part is the uppermost position of the boss 12407, and the lower part is the lowermost position of the boss 12407. FIG. 86). However, in FIG. 86, both the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 have moved to a position slightly beyond the uppermost end position.

  The “position slightly exceeding the uppermost end position” of the boss 12405 is defined as a right side in a front view (the right side in FIG. 86A, FIG. (B) (left side of (B)), which is a position where the substantially uppermost position can be maintained. Further, the “position beyond the uppermost end position” of the boss 12407 is defined as a left side in a front view (left side in FIG. 86A, FIG. 86B ) On the right). However, it is preferable that the degree of the “exceeding position” is so small that it is difficult to recognize that the lower accessory movable ornament 1212 has moved down when the lower accessory movable ornament 1210 moves upward. This is because if the bosses 12405 and 12407 greatly exceed the uppermost position, the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 will descend to a position lower than the uppermost position.

[Description of operation of lower part 1200]
Next, the operation of the lower accessory 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 84 is a diagram illustrating an example of the lower accessory 1200 before the operation is started, that is, in a normal mode (a mode at the origin position), where (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. FIGS. 85A and 85B are diagrams illustrating an example of the lower accessory 1200 in a case where the lower accessory 1200 has been operated up to the intermediate position, where FIG. 85A is a front view and FIG. 85B is a rear view. FIG. 86 is a view showing an example of the lower part 1200 when the operation is performed up to the operation limit, where (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. In FIG. 86, the bosses 12407 and the elongated holes 12108 are shown so as to be able to be grasped.

  The lower accessory movable decoration 1210 is vertically movable between an origin position (see FIG. 84) and an operation limit position (see FIG. 86). It should be noted that when the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is at the origin position, it is hidden behind the center unit 74, so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it. On the other hand, when the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is at the operation limit position, it is located in front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. That is, when the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 at the origin position moves toward the operation limit position, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 moves forward from the rear of the center unit 74 to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. To advance. The advance of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 from the rear of the center unit 74 to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 toward the front is performed when the game progresses (for example, the game to the first starting port 762 or the second starting port 752). It is executed in accordance with the result of the hit determination executed on condition that the ball wins (passes).

  When the lower part drive motor 1230 rotates counterclockwise, the left driven gear 12404 rotates clockwise and the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise. When the left driven gear 12404 rotates clockwise, the lowermost boss 12405 in a normal state rotates clockwise while drawing an arc having a radius equal to the linear distance RL from the center 12404a of the left driven gear 12404 to the boss 12405. Rotate to move. When the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise, the boss 12407, which is located at the lowest position in the normal state, draws an arc having a radius equal to the linear distance RR from the center 12406a of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407. Rotate clockwise. In other words, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 rises toward the operation limit position.

  While the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 operates from the origin position (see FIG. 84) to the intermediate position (see FIG. 85), the boss 12405 moves leftward in the elongated hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102 (see FIG. 85). The lower part movable base 12102 is pushed upward while moving to the right in FIGS. 84 (B) and 85 (B). The boss 12407 moves the lower part movable base 12102 upward while moving in the right direction (left direction in FIGS. 84B and 85B) inside the elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower part movable base 12102. Push up. At this time, the hole 12204 and the hole 12206 function as guide grooves for guiding the operation of the boss 12405 and the boss 12407, respectively, and as described above, the operating range of the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 (the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12404). 12406).

  In addition, while the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 operates from the intermediate position (see FIG. 85) to the operation limit position (see FIG. 86), the boss 12405 moves in the elongated hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. While moving in the right direction (left direction in FIGS. 85 (B) and 86 (B)), the lower part movable base 12102 is pushed up, and the boss 12407 is formed into an elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower part movable base 12102. While moving leftward (rightward in FIGS. 85B and 86B), the lower part movable base 12102 is pushed up. Since the auxiliary coil spring 1290 applies a counterclockwise urging force with the bearing 12804 as a fulcrum to the auxiliary arm 1280, the force of pushing up the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 by the auxiliary coil spring 1290 is increased. Supported.

  When the lower part drive motor 1230 rotates clockwise, the left driven gear 12404 rotates counterclockwise, and the right driven gear 12406 rotates clockwise. When the left driven gear 12404 rotates counterclockwise, the boss 12405 rotates counterclockwise while drawing an arc whose radius is the linear distance RL from the center 12404a of the left driven gear 12404 to the boss 12405. When the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise, the boss 12407 rotates clockwise while drawing an arc whose radius is the linear distance RR from the center 12406a of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407. That is, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 descends toward the origin position.

  While the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 operates from the operation limit position (see FIG. 86) to the intermediate position (see FIG. 85), the boss 12405 moves leftward in the elongated hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. The lower boss 12102 is pushed down while moving to the right (in FIGS. 85 (B) and 86 (B)), and the boss 12407 moves through the elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower boss movable base 12102. While moving in the right direction (left direction in FIGS. 85 (B) and 86 (B)), the lower part movable base 12102 is pushed down. Also, while the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 operates from the intermediate position (see FIG. 85) to the origin position (see FIG. 84), the boss 12405 moves right inside the elongated hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. While moving in the direction (left direction in FIGS. 84B and 85B), the lower part movable base 12102 is pushed down, and the boss 12407 is inserted into the elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower part movable base 12102. Is moved to the left (in FIGS. 84 (B) and 85 (B), to the right) while the lower part movable base 12102 is pushed down.

  As described above, the height position of the rotation center of the left driven gear 12404 and the height direction position of the rotation center of the right driven gear 12406 are the same, and the diameter of the left driven gear 12404 and the position of the right driven gear 12406 are the same. The diameter is the same. The linear distance RL from the center 12404a of the left driven gear 12404 to the boss 12405 and the linear distance RR from the center 12406a of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407 are the same distance (length). Therefore, when the lower accessory drive motor 1230 rotates, the height position of the boss 12405 and the height position of the right driven gear 12406 are the same. Here, since the LED board is mounted on the lower part movable base 12102, the lower part movable decorative body 1210 to be raised has a considerable weight. Moreover, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is an accessory that is long in the left-right direction. When raising such an accessory, power may be transmitted to one of the right and left. However, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, even if the object to be lifted is somewhat heavy or a long object in the left-right direction, only the rotation force (power) of one lower object drive motor 1230 is used. The power at the origin position (see FIG. 84) is maintained without any biased transmission of power to either the left or right, and the movable movable body for lower part 1210 is stably (balanced in the left-right direction). It is possible to operate in the vertical direction.

  By the way, when operating the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 from the origin position to the operation limit position, the accessory control circuit 207 requires the lower accessory drive motor 1230 to operate from the origin position to the operation limit position. A pulse signal is output so as to rotate more than a certain number of rotations (to rotate beyond the operation limit position). The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 started to operate by the rotation of the lower accessory drive motor 1230 is physically moved when the boss 12405 collides with the end of the hole 12204 and the boss 12407 collides with the end of the hole 12206. Stopped. In this way, it is possible to quickly operate the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 from the origin position to the operation limit position.

  Here, the hole 12204 is formed to the center side (on the right side of the vertical direction line LL in FIG. 86 (A) on the paper) with respect to the vertical direction line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404. Similarly, the hole 12206 is formed to the center side of the vertical line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406 (to the left side of the vertical line LR in FIG. 86A on the paper surface). Therefore, when the movable movable lower body 1210 moves to the operation limit position, the boss 12405 moves to a position slightly beyond the uppermost position and the boss 12407 moves to a position slightly beyond the uppermost position. That is, the boss 12405 is located on the center side of the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (on the right side of the vertical line LL in FIG. 86A), and the center of the right driven gear 12406 The boss 12407 is located on the center side of the line of the vertical ship LR passing through the OR (on the left side of the vertical line LL on the paper surface in FIG. 86A).

  When the boss 12405 moves to a position slightly beyond the uppermost end position and the boss 12407 moves to a position slightly above the uppermost end position, a downward force (for example, gravity) is applied to the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210. , The rotation of the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 is restricted by the holes 12204 and 12206. Therefore, the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 cannot rotate in any direction, and the rotation of the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 is locked at this position.

  In this way, when the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 moves to the operation limit position, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 does not descend due to gravity, and of course, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 does not move externally due to vibration or the like. Even if a strong force is applied, the lower part drive motor 1230 does not descend and is kept at the operation limit position unless the lower part drive motor 1230 rotates in the direction toward the origin position (clockwise). With this, the lower part movable decorative body 1210 is locked in a series of operations for moving the lower part movable decorative body 1210 upward with a simple configuration without newly providing a member as a lock mechanism, The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 can be maintained above.

  If the boss 12405 is not to the left of the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (if the boss 12407 is not to the right of the vertical line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406) The movement of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 downward is locked. Therefore, when the boss 12405 is on the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (when the boss 12407 is on the vertical line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406), The movement of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 toward it is locked. When the boss 12405 is on the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (when the boss 12407 is on the vertical line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406), the lower accessory movable decoration The gravity of the body 1210 acts in the vertical direction, and the component force of the gravity acts on the left driven gear 12404 (right driven gear 12406) in the rotational direction (at the uppermost end position, the left driven gear 12404 is horizontally leftward and rightward when viewed from the front. This is because the driven gear 12406 does not act in the horizontal right direction when viewed from the front.

  In this embodiment, when the boss 12405 moves to a position slightly beyond the uppermost end position and the boss 12407 moves to a position slightly beyond the uppermost end position, the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 The rotation is restricted. This is because it is desired to hold the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102) at the uppermost end position. The movable range of the bosses 12405 and 12407 can be changed as appropriate in accordance with the position where the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 of this embodiment is to be held. For example, the rotation range of the left driven gear 12404 is set to a position further rotated 90 degrees to the right in front view (the right side in FIG. 86A, the left side in FIG. 86B) from the vertical line LL. When the rotation range of the right driven gear 12406 is further rotated by 90 degrees to the left in front view (left side in FIG. 86 (A) and right side in FIG. 86 (B)) from the vertical line LR, The movable lower body accessory decorative body 1210 can be held at an intermediate position between the upper end position and the lowermost position.

  In the present embodiment, the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 are rotated to rotate the boss 12405 and the boss 12407, and the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102) ) Is moved up and down, but the mode of moving the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 up and down is not limited to this. It is sufficient if the bosses 12405 and 12407 of the form move in an arc to move the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 up and down. Therefore, instead of using the gears (corresponding to the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 in the present embodiment) to move the force acting member, for example, A rotating member having a force acting member may be used.

  In addition, the above-mentioned force acting members (corresponding to the bosses 12405 and 12407 of the present embodiment) can be moved by drawing a perfect circular arc by using a gear, but are necessarily moved by drawing a perfect circular arc. It is not necessary, and it may be moved by drawing an elliptical arc. In other words, when the moving direction of the force acting member becomes horizontal, the symmetrical character (the lower part movable decorative body 1210 of the present embodiment (more specifically, the lower part movable The component force of the load of the base 12102) becomes zero, and the force acting member does not move due to the load of the target accessory (corresponding to the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 of the present embodiment). Therefore, as long as the driving source of the force acting member (corresponding to the lower part driving motor 1230 of the present embodiment) is not driven in the direction in which the target role descends, a simple configuration without providing a member as a lock mechanism is provided. Thus, the target character can be locked upward in a series of operations for moving the target character upward.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the rotation of the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 (movement of the boss 12405 and the boss 12407) is not stopped by stopping the driving of the lower part driving motor 1230, but is stopped. It is physically stopped by 12204 and 12206. For example, when the target accessory (corresponding to the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 according to the present embodiment) is stopped by controlling the motor (corresponding to the lower accessory driving motor 1230 of the present embodiment), the stop is performed. The rotation of the motor has to be decelerated near the upper position where it is desired to be performed, and there is a possibility that the rising speed of the target accessory near the upper position is reduced. In this regard, as in the present embodiment, by physically restricting the movement of the force acting member (corresponding to the bosses 12405 and 12407 of the present embodiment), the target object can be moved unless the rotation of the motor is decelerated. In addition, high-speed movement can be realized with a simple configuration without stalling near the upper position to be stopped. In addition, since the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 are arranged side by side as a pair, even if the symmetric role is long in the horizontal direction, the target role is maintained while maintaining the stability in the horizontal direction. Objects can be moved up and down.

  In this embodiment, the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 rotate in opposite directions in synchronization with each other. That is, the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 move in opposite directions in synchronization with each other. Accordingly, even if an external force (for example, vibration or the like) is applied to the lower movable movable body 1210 (more specifically, the lower movable movable base 12102) in either the left or right direction, the lower movable drive motor Unless the 1230 is driven, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102) can be locked near the uppermost position. This is because unless the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 move in opposite directions, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 does not descend.

[Corner Special 1300]
The corner role 1300 includes the upper corner role 1320 and the lower corner role 1350 as described above. Here, the upper corner role 1320 will be described first, then the lower corner role 1350 will be described, and then the mode when the corner role 1300 has moved to the operation limit position will be described.

[Configuration of upper corner accessory 1320]
The configuration of the upper corner accessory 1320 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 87 is an example of a front view of the upper corner role 1320. FIG. 88 is an example of a rear view of the upper corner role 1320. FIG. 89 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper corner role 1320 as viewed obliquely from the upper front right side. FIG. 90 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper corner role 1320 as viewed obliquely from the rear left (left in front view).

  The upper corner accessory 1320 includes a fixed plate 1322 to which various members constituting the upper corner accessory 1320 are attached, a first movable body 1330 and a second movable body 1340 operable with respect to the fixed plate 1322, A motor 1332 as a drive source for operating the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340, and a power transmission mechanism 1333 as a mechanism for transmitting the power of the motor 1332 to the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 And a photo sensor 1345 for confirming the origin positions of the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340.

  The fixing plate 1322 is a horizontally long plate-shaped member that is attached to and fixed to an upper portion of the rear box 1800 of the back unit 176 on the rear side of the upper front accessory 1000 and on the front side of the upper rear accessory 1100. On the front side of the fixing plate 1322, support shafts 13222, 13224, 13226 are formed. A hole 13225 is formed between the support shaft 13222 and the support shaft 13224 in the left-right direction and above the support shafts 13222 and 13224. A hole 13229 is formed around the support shaft 13226 in a substantially upper half around the support shaft 13226.

  The first movable body 1330 includes a decoration portion 13302 on which decoration such as characters is provided, and an arm portion 13304 integrally formed with the decoration portion 13302. A bearing 13306 that rotatably supports the support shaft 13222 is formed at the base end of the arm portion 13304. A support shaft 13308 is formed at the upper right of the bearing 13306 in front view. The first movable body 1330 is rotatable around a bearing 13306 (support shaft 13222). On the back surface of the first movable body 1330, a long linear slope 13307 is formed along the moving direction of the first movable body 1330. The slope 13307 has a mountain shape that becomes higher from both sides in the longitudinal direction toward the center.

  The second movable body 1340 includes a decoration portion 13402 on which decoration such as characters is provided, and an arm portion 13404 integrally formed with the decoration portion 13402. A bearing 13406 that rotatably supports the support shaft 13228 is formed at the base end of the arm portion 13404. A support shaft 13408 is formed at the upper left of the bearing 13406 in a front view. The second movable body 1340 is rotatable around a bearing 13406 (support shaft 13228). A long linear slope 13407 is formed on the back surface of the second movable body 1340 along the moving direction of the second movable body 1340. The slope 13407 has a mountain shape that becomes higher from both sides in the longitudinal direction toward the center.

  The motor 1332 is attached and fixed to a fixed plate 1322 via a motor attachment member 1331. The power of the motor 1332 is output from a motor output shaft 13322.

  The power transmission mechanism 1333 includes a first gear 1334, a second gear 1335, a third gear 1336, a first transmission arm 1337, and a second transmission arm 1338. The first gear 1334 and the second gear 1335 mesh with each other, and the second gear 1335 and the third gear 1336 mesh with each other. Power from the motor 1332 is transmitted to the first movable body 1330 via the respective gears 1334 and 1335. Power from the motor 1332 is transmitted to the second movable body 1340 via the respective gears 1334 to 1336.

  The first gear 1334 has a hollow shaft 13342 formed at the center. The hollow shaft 13342 is supported by the motor output shaft 13322 so as to be coaxial and rotatable with the motor output shaft 13322. The hollow shaft 13342 supported by the motor output shaft 13322 is located in the hole 13225.

  The second gear 1335 has a hollow shaft 13352 formed at the center. The hollow shaft 13352 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 13224. A boss 13354 is formed on the front side of the second gear 1335 at a position radially outward from the center at a predetermined distance.

  The third gear 1336 has a hollow shaft 13362 formed at the center. The hollow shaft 13362 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 13226. In addition, a boss 13364 is formed on a front side of the third gear 1336 at a position radially outward from the center by a predetermined distance. A boss 13366 is formed on the rear side of the third gear 1336 at a position radially outward from the center by a predetermined distance. The boss 13366 moves in the hole 13229 when the third gear 1336 rotates. The boss 13364 and the boss 13366 are formed on the surfaces opposite to each other and substantially diagonally with respect to the center of the third gear 1336. On the front surface of the third gear 1336, a detection piece 13368 that can be detected by the photo sensor 1345 is formed.

  The first transmission arm 1337 has a C-shaped curved portion 13370 and a rod-shaped portion 13371. A bearing 13372 is formed at the end on the rod-shaped portion 13371 side. The bearing 13372 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 13308. A bearing 13374 is formed at the end on the curved portion 13370 side. The bearing 13374 is rotatably supported by the boss 13354.

  The second transmission arm 1338 has a C-shaped curved portion 13380 and a rod-shaped portion 13381. A bearing 13382 is formed at the end on the rod-shaped portion 13381 side. The bearing 13382 is rotatably supported on the support shaft 13408. A bearing 13384 is formed at the end on the bending portion 13380 side. The bearing 13384 is rotatably supported by the boss 13364.

  The photo sensor 1345 detects the positions of the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340. In the present embodiment, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are located at the origin positions (see FIG. 91 described later). ) Is attached so that the detection piece 13368 can be detected.

[Description of operation of upper corner accessory 1320]
Next, the operation of the upper corner accessory 1320 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 91 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are at the origin positions. FIG. 92 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 start operating from the origin positions. FIG. 93 is an example of a rear view showing a state where the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are further operated from the position shown in FIG. FIG. 94 is an example of a rear view showing a state where the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 have been operated to the operation limit position.

  When the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are at the origin positions, the first movable body 1330 is located at the upper left corner of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the second movable body 1340 is located at the upper right corner of the liquid crystal display device 16. It is located in. At the origin position, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are arranged behind the upper front accessory 1000 (see, for example, FIG. 21), so that it is difficult to recognize them in a front view.

  When the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are at the origin position (see FIG. 91), the motor 1332 rotates, and the motor output shaft 13322 rotates counterclockwise in front view (clockwise in FIGS. 91 to 94). , The first gear 1334 rotates counterclockwise in front view. When the first gear 1334 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, the second gear 1335 rotates clockwise in a front view. When the second gear 1335 rotates clockwise in front view, the third gear 1336 rotates counterclockwise in front view.

  When the second gear 1335 rotates clockwise in front view around the support shaft 13224 (hollow shaft 13352), the boss 13354 (see FIG. 89) rotates clockwise in front view about the hollow shaft 13352 (support shaft 13224). Orbit around. When the boss 13354 rotates clockwise around the hollow shaft 13352 in a front view, the bearing 13374 pivotally supported by the boss 13354 also rotates clockwise around the support shaft 13224 in a front view. As a result, the bearing 13372 of the first transmission arm 1337 moves leftward (rightward in FIGS. 91 to 94) when viewed from the front. Since the bearing 13372 of the first transmission arm 1337 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 13308 of the first movable body 1330, when the bearing 13372 moves to the left in front view, the support shaft 13308 is attached to the fixed plate 1322. It rotates counterclockwise in front view about the formed support shaft 13222 (bearing 13306) as a rotation center. That is, the first movable body 1330 rotates counterclockwise in the front view with the support shaft 13222 as the center of rotation, and as a result, the first movable body 1330 moves from the origin position to the lower right (the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16). Toward the front).

  Also, when the second gear 1335 rotates clockwise in front view with the support shaft 13224 (hollow shaft 13352) as the center of rotation, the third gear 1336 rotates counterclockwise in front view with the hollow shaft 13362 (support shaft 13226) as the center of rotation. Rotate around. When the third gear 1336 rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 13226 as a rotation center, the boss 13364 (see FIG. 89) orbits around the hollow shaft 13362 counterclockwise as viewed from the front. When the boss 13364 orbits around the hollow shaft 13362 in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, the bearing 13382 of the second transmission arm 1338 moves rightward in the front view (leftward in FIGS. 91 to 94). Since the bearing 13382 of the second transmission arm 1338 is rotatably mounted on the support shaft 13408 of the second movable body 1340, when the bearing 13382 moves rightward in a front view, the support shaft 13408 is attached to the fixed plate 1322. The support shaft 13228 (bearing 13406) formed is rotated clockwise in a front view around the rotation center. That is, the second movable body 1340 moves from the origin position to the lower left (front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) with the support shaft 13228 as the center of rotation.

  In this way, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 can be operated synchronously by the rotation of one motor 1332.

  In addition, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 move in a direction in which the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 approach each other from an origin position that is difficult to visually recognize in a front view. That is, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 move and appear so as to be sandwiched inward from the outside of the field of view in front view.

  When the motor 1332 rotates and the motor output shaft 13322 rotates clockwise in a front view, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 operate in the direction of returning to the origin position by the movement opposite to the above movement. I do.

  By the way, when the first movable body 1330 moved to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 returns to the origin position, the first movable body 1330 and the fixed plate 1322 interfere with each other, and the first movable body 1330 smoothly moves to the origin position. There is a possibility that it cannot be returned. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the slope 13307 formed on the back surface of the first movable body 1330 slides on the flat portion of the fixed plate 1322, so that the first movable body 1330 can be smoothly returned to the origin position. ing. Similarly, also with respect to the second movable body 1340, the slope 13407 formed on the back surface of the second movable body 1340 slides on the flat portion of the fixed plate 1322, so that the second movable body 1340 smoothly moves to the origin position. Return is possible.

[Configuration of lower corner accessory 1350]
With reference to FIGS. 95 to 98, the configuration of the lower corner role 1350 will be described. FIG. 95 is an example of a front view of the lower corner role 1350. FIG. 96 is an example of a rear view of the lower corner role 1350. FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the lower corner role 1350 as viewed obliquely from the upper front right side. FIG. 98 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower corner role 1350 viewed from diagonally above the rear left side.

  The lower corner role 1350 includes a fixed plate 1352 to which various members constituting the lower corner role 1350 are attached, a third movable body 1355 and a fourth movable body 1357 operable with respect to the fixed plate 1352, A motor 1354 as a drive source for operating the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357, and a power transmission mechanism 1360 as a mechanism for transmitting the power of the motor 1354 to the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357. And a photo sensor 1375 for checking the positions of the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357.

  The fixing plate 1352 is a horizontally long plate-shaped member fixedly attached to the lower side of the rear box 1800 on the rear side of the middle panel 1500 and the front side of the lower accessory 1200. On the front side of the fixing plate 1352, support shafts 13522, 13523, 13524, 13525, 13526, 13527, 13528, and 13529 are formed. A hole 13530 is formed in the lower half of the periphery of the support shaft 13527 around the support shaft 13527.

  The third movable body 1355 includes a decorative portion 13552 on which decorations such as characters are provided, and an arm portion 13554 integrally formed with the decorative portion 13552. An arm cover 13559 is provided on the back of the arm 13554. A hole 135592 is formed at the center end of the arm cover 13559. A bearing 13556 that supports the support shaft 13524 is formed at the base end of the arm portion 13554. A support shaft 13558 is formed below and to the right of the bearing 13556 in a front view. The third movable body 1355 is rotatable around a support shaft 13524 on which the bearing 13556 is supported. A coil spring 1395 is provided between the bearing 13556 of the arm 13554 and the hole 135592 of the arm cover 13559. The coil spring 1395 is urged clockwise about the support shaft 13524 as the center of rotation. As a result, a clockwise urging force with the support shaft 13524 as the center of rotation acts on the third movable body 1355. Further, on the back surface of the third movable body 1355, a long linear slope 13557 is formed along the moving direction of the third movable body 1355. The slope 13557 has a mountain shape that becomes higher from both sides in the longitudinal direction toward the center.

  The fourth movable body 1357 includes a decorative portion 13572 on which decorations such as characters are provided, and an arm portion 13574 integrally formed with the decorative portion 13572. An arm cover 13579 is provided on the back of the arm 13574. A hole 135792 is formed at the center end of the arm cover 13579. A bearing 13576 that supports the support shaft 13529 is formed at the base end of the arm 13574. A support shaft 13578 is formed at the lower left of the bearing 13576 in front view. The fourth movable body 1357 is rotatable around a support shaft 13529 on which the bearing 13576 is supported. A coil spring 1396 is provided between the bearing 13576 of the arm 13574 and the hole 135792 of the arm cover 13579. The coil spring 1396 is urged counterclockwise about the support shaft 13529 as the center of rotation. As a result, a counterclockwise urging force is applied to the fourth movable body 1357 around the support shaft 13529 as the center of rotation. Further, on the back surface of the fourth movable body 1357, a long linear slope 13577 is formed along the moving direction of the fourth movable body 1357. The slope 13577 has a mountain shape that becomes higher from both sides in the longitudinal direction toward the center.

  The motor 1354 is attached and fixed to a fixed plate 1352 via a motor attachment member 1356. The power of the motor 1354 is output from a motor output shaft 13542.

  The power transmission mechanism 1360 includes a first gear 1361, a second gear 1362, a third gear 1363, a fourth gear 1364, a fifth gear 1365, a sixth gear 1366, a seventh gear 1367, and respective gears. A third transmission arm 1370 for transmitting the power from all or a part of 1361, 1362, 1363, 1364, 1365, 1366, 1366 to the third movable body 1355, and each gear 1361, 1362, 1363, 1364, 1365, 1366. , 1367 to the fourth movable body 1357.

  The first gear 1361 has a hollow shaft 13612 formed at the center. The motor output shaft 13542 is press-fitted into the hollow shaft 13612 so as to be coaxial and rotatable with the motor output shaft 13542.

  Power from the motor 1354 is transmitted to the first gear 1361, the second gear 1362, the third gear 1363, the fourth gear 1364, the fifth gear 1365, the sixth gear 1366, and the seventh gear 1367 in this order. The sixth gear 1366 has a hollow shaft 13662 formed at the center, and a boss 13664 formed at a position radially outward from the center at a predetermined distance. In the sixth gear 1366, a detection piece 13666 that can be detected by the photo sensor 1375 is formed on a front surface of the sixth gear 1366 at a position radially outward from the center by a predetermined distance. In the seventh gear 1367, a hollow shaft 13672 that rotatably supports the support shaft 13528 is formed at the center, and a boss 13675 is formed at a position radially outward from the center at a predetermined distance.

  The third transmission arm 1370 has a C-shaped curved portion 13702 and a bar-shaped portion 13704. A bearing 13706 is formed at the end on the rod-shaped portion 13704 side. The bearing 13706 rotatably supports the support shaft 13558 of the third movable body 1355. A bearing 13708 is formed at the end on the bending portion 13702 side. The bearing 13708 rotatably supports the boss 13664 of the sixth gear 1366.

  The fourth transmission arm 1372 has a C-shaped curved portion 13722 and a rod-shaped portion 13724. A bearing 13726 is formed at the end on the rod-shaped portion 13724 side. The bearing 13726 rotatably supports the support shaft 13578. A bearing 13728 is formed at the end on the curved portion 13722 side. The bearing 13728 rotatably supports the boss 13677.

  The photosensor 1375 detects the positions of the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357. In the present embodiment, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are at the origin positions (see FIG. 99 described later). ) Is attached so that the detection piece 13666 can be detected.

[Description of operation of lower corner accessory 1350]
Next, the operation of the lower corner role 1350 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 99 is an example of a rear view showing when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are at the origin positions. FIG. 100 is an example of a rear view showing when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 start operating from the origin positions. FIG. 101 is an example of a rear view showing a state where the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 have been operated up to the operation limit position.

  When the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are at the origin positions, the third movable body 1355 is located at the lower left corner of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the fourth movable body 1357 is located on the liquid crystal display device 16. It is located in the lower right corner of the display area. At the origin position, since the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are arranged behind the first middle panel 1520 and the second middle panel 1550, they are difficult to see in front view.

  When the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are at the origin position (see FIG. 99), the motor 1354 rotates, and the motor output shaft 13542 rotates clockwise in front view (counterclockwise in FIGS. 99 to 101). , The first gear 1361 rotates clockwise in front view. When the first gear 1361 rotates clockwise in a front view, the second gear 1362 rotates counterclockwise in a front view. When the second gear 1362 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, the third gear 1363 rotates clockwise in a front view. When the third gear 1363 rotates clockwise in front view, the fourth gear 1364 rotates counterclockwise in front view. When the fourth gear 1364 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, the fifth gear 1365 rotates clockwise in a front view. When the fifth gear 1365 rotates clockwise in front view, the sixth gear 1366 rotates counterclockwise in front view. When the sixth gear 1366 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, the seventh gear 1367 rotates clockwise in a front view.

  When the sixth gear 1366 rotates counterclockwise (clockwise in FIGS. 99 to 101) in front view around the support shaft 13527 (hollow shaft 13662), the boss 13664 (see FIG. 97) rotates around the hollow shaft 13662. Orbits counterclockwise in front view. When the boss 13664 rotates counterclockwise around the hollow shaft 13662 in front view, the bearing 13706 of the third transmission arm 1370 moves leftward (rightward in FIGS. 99 to 101) in front view. Since the bearing 13706 of the third transmission arm 1370 rotatably supports the third movable body 1355 support shaft 13558, when the bearing 13706 moves to the left in front view, the support shaft 13558 is formed on the fixed plate 1352. The shaft 13524 (bearing 13556) is rotated clockwise in a front view with respect to the rotation shaft 13524 (bearing 13556). That is, the third movable body 1355 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 13524 in a front view, and as a result, the third movable body 1355 moves upward from the origin position.

  When the sixth gear 1366 rotates counterclockwise in front view around the support shaft 13527 (hollow shaft 13662), the seventh gear 1367 rotates clockwise in front view around the support shaft 13528 (hollow shaft 13672). Rotate around. When the seventh gear 1367 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 13528 in a front view, the boss 13675 (see FIG. 97) rotates clockwise around the hollow shaft 13672 in a front view. When the boss 13672 rotates clockwise around the hollow shaft 13672 in a front view, the bearing 13726 of the fourth transmission arm 1372 moves rightward (leftward in FIGS. 99 to 101) in a front view. Since the bearing 13726 of the fourth transmission arm 1372 rotatably supports the support shaft 13578 of the fourth movable body 1357, when the bearing 13726 moves rightward in front view, the support shaft 13578 is attached to the fixed plate 1352. The support shaft 13529 (bearing 13576) formed is rotated counterclockwise in a front view around the center of rotation. That is, the fourth movable body 1357 moves upward from the origin position with the support shaft 13529 as the center of rotation.

  In this way, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 can be operated synchronously by the rotation of one motor 1354.

  In addition, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 move in a direction in which the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 approach each other from an origin position that is difficult to visually recognize in a front view. That is, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 appear to move so as to be sandwiched inward from the outside of the field of view in front view.

  When the motor 1354 rotates and the motor output shaft 1354 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 return to the origin positions by the reverse movement to the above-described movement. Operate.

  By the way, when the third movable body 1355 moved to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 returns to the origin position, the third movable body 1355 and the fixed plate 1352 interfere with each other, and the third movable body 1355 smoothly moves to the origin position. There is a possibility that it cannot be returned. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the slope 13557 formed on the back surface of the third movable body 1355 slides on the flat portion of the fixed plate 1352, so that the third movable body 1355 can smoothly return to the origin position. ing. Similarly, with respect to the fourth movable body 1357, the slope 13577 formed on the back surface of the fourth movable body 1357 slides on the flat portion of the fixed plate 1352, so that the fourth movable body 13570 smoothly moves to the origin position. Return is possible.

[Mode when corner accessory 1300 operates to operation limit position]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 102 to 104, a description will be given of an aspect when the corner accessory 1300 operates to the operation limit position. FIG. 102 is a back unit showing an aspect when all of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 of the corner role 1300 have been operated to the operation limit position. 176 is an example of a front view of FIG. FIG. 103 shows a case where the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 of the corner role 1300 operate to the operation limit position, and the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 stand by at the origin position. It is an example of the front view of the back unit 176 which shows the aspect. FIG. 104 shows a case where the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 of the corner role 1300 operate to the operation limit position, and the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 stand by at the origin position. It is an example of the front view of the back unit 176 which shows the aspect. However, in FIGS. 102 to 104, the illustration of the upper front accessory 1000, the lower accessory 1200, the middle panel 1500, and the attacker ball gutter 1600 is omitted for convenience of description.

  Although not shown, each of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 has one character (for example, kanji, hiragana, katakana, alphabet). ) Is attached.

  As shown in FIG. 102, when the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 operate to the operation limit position, the liquid crystal display device 16 (for example, see FIG. 5) At the front, one design (for example, idiom) is formed by the characters attached to each of the movable bodies 1330, 1340, 1355, and 1357.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 103, when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 operate to the operation limit position, and the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are waiting at the origin position, In front of the liquid crystal display device 16 (for example, see FIG. 5), one design (for example, idiom) is formed by the characters attached to the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 104, when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 operate to the operation limit position and the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are waiting at the origin position, In front of the liquid crystal display device 16 (for example, see FIG. 5), one design (for example, idiom) is formed by the characters attached to the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357.

  In this way, for example, the driving of the motor 1332 (for example, see FIG. 89) and the motor 1354 (for example, see FIG. 98) by the accessory control circuit 207 (see FIG. 9) of the sub CPU 201 is a big hit determination process. By controlling according to the result of (1), all the characters of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 constitute one design (hereinafter, referred to as “first design”). One design (hereinafter, referred to as a "second design") with some (two) characters of the upper corner role 1320 (the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340). Or form one design (hereinafter, referred to as a “third design”) with some (two) characters of the lower corner role 1350 (the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357). It is possible to or. This makes it possible to change the visual impression given to the player by the movable effect by the operation of the accessory, with only a limited number of the accessory.

  In addition, a design formed by two or more of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 includes information related to the progress of the game (for example, a big hit). The information can be recognized by the player as a specific reach execution suggestion having a high degree of expectation. For example, when a specific reach effect that expects a player to be a big hit is executed as a result of the big hit determination based on the start winning at the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440, the specific specifying is performed. The idiom indicating (or related to) the reach effect of two or more movable bodies (a first movable body 1330, a second movable body 1340, a third movable body 1355, and a fourth movable body) is provided in front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Any of two or more movable bodies 1357 of the movable bodies 1357 may be represented by a design (for example, a idiom) that can be recognized when they are arranged close to each other.

  In the present embodiment, first movable body 1330 and second movable body 1340 move in a direction in which first movable body 1330 and second movable body 1340 approach each other from an origin position that is difficult to visually recognize in front view. That is, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 appear to move so as to be sandwiched from the upper outer side to the lower inner side of the field of view in front view.

  In addition, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 move from the origin position where it is difficult to visually recognize the front view, and move in a direction in which the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 approach each other. That is, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 appear to move so as to be sandwiched from the upper side to the lower side of the field of view in front view.

  Here, the front surfaces of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are respectively provided with characters, but each movable body 1330, 1340, 1355, A single character given to each of 1357 alone has no meaning, and information relating to the progress of the game is not shown to the player.

  In addition, the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are all located at positions that are difficult to visually recognize at the origin position, and are respectively located at the upper left and the front in the front view. It is arranged at a position separated from the upper right, the lower left in the front, and the lower right in the front as viewed from each other. Therefore, two or more of the one movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are directed from the outside to the inside of the field of view of the player in front view. In the course of the operation, it is difficult for the player to immediately recognize the design (for example, idiom) formed by the characters attached to the two or more movable bodies that operate, and the liquid crystal display It can be recognized only when stopped close to the front of the display area of the device 16.

  As described above, two or more of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 move inward from outside the field of view in front view. By doing so, the gaze of the player can be moved from the back (the effect image shown in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) to the front (the character of the movable body that has advanced forward of the liquid crystal display device 16). Thereby, conventionally, for example, information related to the progress of the game has been shown to the player by, for example, an effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device, but according to the present embodiment, the information is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 according to the present embodiment. Two or more of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 that have advanced forward of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 without depending on the effect image to be performed. Information relating to the progress of the game can be shown to the player using only the movable body. As a result, not only can the rhythm of the effect be changed, but also an effect having an impact on the player can be performed, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, when the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 operate to the operation limit position, the liquid crystal display device 16 (for example, see FIG. 5). It is preferable that one design is formed by characters attached to all the movable bodies 1330, 1340, 1355, and 1357 in the front, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and two or more of the movable bodies are attached. One design may be formed only by characters. For example, among the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357, one design is formed only by characters attached to the first movable body 1330 and the third movable body 1355. In this case, the second movable body 1340 and the fourth movable body 1357 (characters need not be attached) are formed as separate movable bodies without constituting a design.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one character is attached to each of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357, but is not limited thereto. Two or more characters may be attached to all or some of the movable bodies.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the characters attached to each of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are not limited thereto, but are not limited thereto. In the front of the display device 16 (for example, see FIG. 5), any device may be used as long as it forms a single design or forms a meaningful shape (for example, a device that reminds a specific idea).

  In the present embodiment, when the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are located in front of the liquid crystal display device 16 (for example, see FIG. 5). Although there is a gap between the movable body and another movable body, the present invention is not limited to this, and all or a part of the movable bodies may be combined to form one design.

  In this embodiment, the rotation of one motor 1332 (for example, see FIG. 89) causes the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 to operate in synchronization with each other, and the rotation of one motor 1354 causes the third movable body 1330 to rotate. The movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are configured to operate in synchronization with each other, but the present invention is not limited to this. The first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body Each of the bodies 1357 may be configured to operate alone.

[Configuration of side accessory 1400]
The configuration of the side accessory 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 105 is an example of a front view of the side accessory 1400 in a normal mode (a mode at the origin position). FIG. 106 is an example of a rear view of the side accessory 1400 in the normal mode. FIG. 107 is an example of a front view of an exploded perspective view of the side accessory 1400 viewed from obliquely forward right above. FIG. 108 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the side accessory 1400 viewed obliquely from the rear left (left in front view). In FIG. 106, various members such as the link member 1420 are shown transparently through the mounting plate 1410 so as to be easily recognized, but are actually opaque members.

  The side accessory 1400 includes an attachment plate 1410 to which various members constituting the side accessory 1400 are attached, a movable decorative body 1450 configured to be operable with respect to the attachment plate 1410, and an actuator for operating the movable decorative body 1450. Side accessory motor 1440 as a driving source, movable piece 1430 and L-shaped link member 1420 as a mechanism for transmitting the power of side accessory motor 1440 to movable decorative body 1450, and position of movable decorative body 1450 And a photo sensor 1464 for checking the

  The mounting plate 1410 is a vertically long plate-shaped member that is mounted and fixed to the right side of the rear box 1800 of the back unit 176 described above. A link support shaft 1412 that supports the link member 1420 is formed at an upper portion on the front side of the mounting plate 1410. A movable decorative body support shaft 1414 that supports the movable decorative body 1450 is formed below the mounting plate 1410.

  The movable decorative body 1450 is a vertically long patterned main body 1452 with a decoration on the front surface, and a single movable body that is operable with the main body 1452 and operable independently of the main body 1452. 1454. The main body 1452 of the movable decorative body 1450 has a movable decorative bearing 1458 that supports the movable decorative body support shaft 1414 below the main body 1452. The movable decorative body 1450 is supported by the movable decorative body support shaft 1414 at the movable decorative bearing 1458, and is configured to be rotatable around the movable decorative body support shaft 1414 (movable decorative bearing 1458). The movable decorative body 1450 has an origin confirmation movable piece 1456 at the lower end. Further, the movable decorative body 1450 has a movable decorative boss 1455 protruding rearward on the right side in front view.

  The side accessory motor 1440 is attached and fixed to an attachment plate 1410 via a motor attachment member 1444. The side accessory motor 1440 is a motor with a speed reducer. The rotation speed of the side accessory motor 1440 is reduced, and power is output from the motor output shaft 1442.

  The movable piece 1430 has a gear bearing 1432 connected to the side accessory motor 1440 by supporting the motor output shaft 1442, and a link member boss 1434 connected to the link member 1420. When the side accessory motor 1440 rotates, the movable piece 1430 rotates around the gear bearing 1432 (motor output shaft 1442) as a rotation center.

  The link member 1420 includes a link bearing 1422 that supports the link support shaft 1412 of the mounting plate 1410, a first link 1421 that is long in the lateral direction, and a second link 1425 that is substantially perpendicular to the first link 1421 and that is long in the downward direction. And The link member 1420 is rotatable about a link support shaft 1412 that is supported by a link bearing 1422. The first link 1421 is formed with a movable piece elongated hole 1424 to which the link member boss 1434 of the movable piece 1430 is slidably connected. The link member boss 1434 is slidable along the long hole direction of the movable piece long hole 1424 when the link member 1420 rotates about the link bearing 1422 as a rotation center. The second link 1425 has a movable decorative body elongated hole 1426 to which the movable decorative boss 1455 of the movable decorative body 1450 is slidably connected. The movable decorative boss 1455 is slidable along the long hole direction of the movable decorative body elongated hole 1426 when the link member 1420 rotates about the link bearing 1422 as a rotation center.

  The photo sensor 1464 is mounted and fixed to a lower portion of the mounting plate 1410 via a photo sensor mounting member 1460. The photo sensor 1464 detects the position of the movable decorative body 1450. As described above, in the present embodiment, the origin confirmation movable piece 1456 is provided at the lower end of the movable decorative body 1450, and the photo sensor 1464 detects the origin confirmation movable when the movable decorative body 1450 is at the origin position. The piece 1456 can be detected. That is, the photo sensor 1464 detects whether or not the movable decorative body 1450 is at the origin position.

[Description of operation of side accessory 1400]
Next, the operation of the side accessory 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 105, 106, and 109 to 113. FIG. 109 is an example of a front view showing the side accessory 1400 in which the movable decorative body 1450 is moving toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 110 is an example of a rear view showing the side accessory 1400 in which the movable decorative body 1450 is moving toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 111 is an example of a front view showing the side accessory 1400 when the movable decorative body 1450 has advanced most toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 112 is an example of a rear view showing the side accessory 1400 when the movable decorative body 1450 has advanced most toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 113 is a rear view showing side accessory 1400 when side accessory motor 1440 is further rotated in the same direction from a state in which movable decorative body 1450 has advanced most toward the front of the display area of liquid crystal display device 16. This is an example. Hereinafter, in this specification, the position at which the movable decorative body 1450 has advanced the most toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is referred to as “most advanced position”.

  The degree of inclination of the link member 1420 when the movable decorative body 1450 is at the origin position is approximately 1 o'clock in rear view (see FIG. 106), and the degree of inclination of the link member 1420 when the movable decorative body 1450 is at the most advanced position is shown. The degree of inclination is approximately 4:30 in rear view (see FIG. 112). In the present embodiment, the reduction ratio of the side accessory motor 1440 is such that when the side accessory motor 1440 makes one rotation, the motor output shaft 1442 moves from approximately 1 o'clock to approximately 4:30 (movable decorative body 1450). Moves from the origin position to the most advanced position), but the reduction ratio is not limited to this.

  In the most advanced position shown in FIG. 112, the movable decorative boss 1455 has not moved to the end of the movable decorative body elongated hole 1426. This is because the direction of rotation about the movable decorative body support shaft 1414 (the movable decorative body 1450) is different from the direction of the long direction of the movable decorative body elongated hole 1426. This is because the movement of the movable decorative boss 1455 is restricted on the side surface (the surface in the longitudinal direction).

  When the movable decorative body 1450 is at the origin position (the position where the degree of inclination of the link member 1420 is approximately 1 o'clock in rear view), the motor 1440 for the side accessory rotates, and the motor output shaft 1442 rotates counterclockwise in front view. When rotated in the counterclockwise direction in FIGS. 105, 109 and 111, and clockwise in FIGS. 106, 110, 112 and 113, the movable piece 1430 rotates around the motor output shaft 1442 (gear bearing 1432). Rotate counterclockwise in front view. When the movable piece 1430 rotates counterclockwise in a front view with the gear bearing 1432 as the center of rotation, the link member boss 1434 slides in the movable piece elongated hole 1424, and the link member 1420 is linked to the link bearing 1422 ( A rotational force acts clockwise (clockwise in FIG. 109 and counterclockwise in FIG. 110) in front view with the link support shaft 1412) as the center of rotation. When the link member 1420 rotates clockwise around the link bearing 1422 in a front view, a force for pushing the movable decorative body 1450 forward of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 via the movable decorative boss 1455 is obtained. Works. When the degree of inclination of the link member 1420 is approximately 4:30 in rear view (see FIG. 112) and the rotation of the side accessory motor 1440 stops, the movable decorative body 1450 stops at the most advanced position.

  When the degree of inclination of the link member 1420 is approximately 4:30 in rear view (see FIG. 112), the side accessory motor 1440 further rotates, and the motor output shaft 1442 rotates counterclockwise in front view (FIGS. 105 and 109). When the movable piece 1430 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 111 and clockwise in FIGS. 106, 110, 112, and 113), the movable piece 1430 rotates counterclockwise around the motor output shaft 1442 (gear bearing 1432) as a center of rotation. To rotate. When the movable piece 1430 rotates counterclockwise in a front view with the gear bearing 1432 as the center of rotation, the link member boss 1434 slides in the movable piece elongated hole 1424, and the link member 1420 is linked to the link bearing 1422 ( A rotational force acts clockwise (clockwise in FIG. 109 and counterclockwise in FIG. 110) in front view with the link support shaft 1412) as the center of rotation. Then, when the link member 1420 rotates clockwise around the link bearing 1422 in the front view, a force acts on the movable decorative body 1450 to return the movable decorative body 1450 to the origin position via the movable decorative boss 1455. I do. When the degree of inclination of the link member 1420 is approximately 1 o'clock in rear view (see FIG. 106) and the rotation of the side accessory motor 1440 stops, the movable decorative body 1450 stops at the origin position.

  In this manner, the movable accessory body 1440 is rotated only in the same direction (counterclockwise in front view in the present embodiment) without rotating the side accessory motor 1440 in the normal direction or the reverse direction. The 1450 can be moved back and forth between the origin position and the most advanced position. When the link member 1420 moves from approximately 1 o'clock in rear view (see FIG. 106) to approximately 4:30 in rear view (see FIG. 112), the movable decorative body 1450 moves from the origin position to the most advanced position. On the other hand, when the link member 1420 moves from approximately 4:30 in the rear view to approximately 1 o'clock in the rear view, the movable decorative body 1450 moves from the most advanced position to the origin position. That is, the movement of the movable decorative body 1450 from the origin position to the most advanced position can be realized only by moving the link member 1420 from approximately 1 o'clock in rear view to approximately 4:30 in rear view. The movement of the movable decorative body 1450 to the position requires that the link member 1420 move from approximately 4:30 to 1:00 in rear view.

  Therefore, as long as the rotation speed of the side accessory motor 1440 (motor output shaft 1442) is constant, as long as the rotation speed of the side accessory motor 1440 does not fluctuate significantly, the position from the origin position to the most advanced position is not changed. Movement of movable decorative body 1450 is performed relatively quickly, and movement of movable decorative body 1450 from the most advanced position to the origin position is performed relatively slowly. Here, the movement (movable body effect) of the movable decorative body 1450 from the origin position to the most advanced position is determined by a hit determination performed when a game ball wins in the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440. Although it is performed based on the result, it is required that the movement of the movable decorative body 1450 be performed quickly. On the other hand, the movement of the movable decorative body 1450 from the most advanced position to the origin position does not require a quicker movement than the movement from the origin position to the most advanced position. Therefore, the movable decorative body 1450 can be reciprocated between the origin position and the most advanced position only by rotating the side accessory motor 1440 in one direction (the same direction), but the movable decorative body is also movable. The rotation angle of the side accessory motor 1440 required for the 1450 to move from the origin position to the most advanced position is determined by the rotation of the side accessory motor 1440 required for the movable decorative body 1450 to move from the most advanced position to the origin position. By making the angle smaller than the angle, the movable decorative body 1450 from the origin position to the most advanced position can be compared with the movement from the most advanced position to the original position without changing the rotation speed of the side accessory motor 1440. Movement can be performed quickly.

  The single movable body 1454 moves from the origin position to the most advanced position together with the movable decorative body 1450 when the movable decorative body 1450 moves from the origin position to the most advanced position. By causing the 1454 to operate in conjunction with the main body 1452, it is possible to make the action presentation of the side accessory 1400 more dynamic. However, in place of or in addition to this, when the movable decorative body 1450 is on standby between the origin position, the most advanced position or the origin position and the re-entered position, the single movable body 1454 is moved to the main body 1452. You may make it operate.

[Configuration of Second Middle Panel 1550]
The configuration of the second middle panel 1550 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 114 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the second middle panel 1550 as viewed obliquely from the upper front right side. FIG. 115 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the second middle panel 1550 viewed obliquely from the rear left (left in front view). FIG. 116 is (A) an example of a front view of the second middle panel 1550, and (B) is an example of a cross-sectional view taken along line CC shown in (A).

  The second middle panel 1550 includes a panel mounting case 1556 to which various members constituting the second middle panel 1550 are mounted, an LED board 1560 on which LEDs 1562 and 1564 are arranged, a light guide lens 1570, a black sheet 1580, and an inner A lens 1583, a decorative sheet 1584, a half mirror 1585, a window edge 1586 having the above-described opening window 1552, and a panel cover 1590 are provided.

  The panel mounting case 1556 is a case-shaped member that is fixedly mounted to the lower right portion of the rear box 1800 of the back unit 176 described above.

  The LED substrate 1560 is a plate-like member having an annular protrusion 1561 formed in a shape corresponding to the above-described opening window 1552 and having a plane area 1563. A plurality (five in the present embodiment) of LEDs 1562 are annularly arranged on the LED substrate 1560 radially inside the annular protrusion 1561, and a plurality of LEDs 1564 are arranged in the plane area 1563. The LED 1562 is provided so as to emit light outward in the radial direction. The LED 1564 is provided so as to emit light forward when viewed from the front.

  Light guide lens 1570 is provided to accommodate LED board 1560 between panel mounting case 1556. The light guide lens 1570 has a function of dispersing light emitted forward from the LEDs 1564 disposed on the LED substrate 1560 to emit light in a planar manner. Further, a hole having a shape corresponding to the opening window 1552 is formed in the light guide lens 1570.

  Black sheet 1580 is attached to the back surface of panel cover 1590. The black sheet 1580 has a black color on the front side and a watermark such as characters on the rear side. The watermark is normally not visible from the front (when the LEDs 1562 and 1564 are not emitting light), but appears when the LEDs 1562 and 1564 emit light when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In the black sheet 1580, holes having a shape corresponding to the opening windows 1552 are formed.

  The half mirror 1585, the decorative sheet 1584, and the inner lens 1583 are arranged in this order from the front so as to face the opening window 1552. At this time, the inner lens 1583 is arranged in such a manner that the LED 1562 is accommodated inside the radial direction (so as to be located outside the LED 1562 in the radial direction).

  The inner lens 1583 has a flange 15832 (see FIG. 116B) that protrudes along the outer circumference to the rear side when viewed from the front. Part of the light emitted from the LED 1562 radially outward is absorbed by the inner lens 1583, and the unabsorbed light passes through the inner lens 1583. The inner lens 1583 is partitioned into five fan-shaped regions 15831, 15833, 15835, 13837, and 13839 (see FIG. 115). Each of the five regions 15831, 15833, 15835, 13837, and 13839 has a plurality of notches formed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the radial direction. In addition, since the boundary between the five regions 15831, 15833, 15835, 13837, and 13839 is inclined so that the height decreases from the peripheral edge toward the center of the circle, the light incident on the inner lens 1583 is It flows along the notch formed in the inner lens 1583, and gathers toward the radial center of the inner lens 1583. When light is incident on the inner lens 1583, the light intensity is higher at the outer peripheral portion than at the central portion in the radial direction, but by collecting the incident light toward the radial center, the surface of the inner lens 1583 can be formed. It is possible to more uniformly emit the surface light.

  The decorative sheet 1584 is a light-transmitting sheet having a picture of a character or the like drawn on the front. The character drawn on the decorative sheet 1584 cannot be visually recognized from the front by the half mirror 1585 during normal times (when the LED 1562 does not emit light), but when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the LED 1562 emits light, the character in the opening window 1552 is displayed. Appears to emerge. As described above, when the LED 1562 emits light, a character appears in the area within the window frame 1552. Therefore, in this specification, the LED 1562 is also referred to as a character lamp.

  The window edge 1586 is plated with gloss and is configured to reflect light. The window edge 1586 is provided with the above-described opening window 1552, and decoration is applied to the outer peripheral portion so as to keep the external appearance beautiful.

  The panel cover 1590 is a transparent plate-shaped member, and has the black sheet 1580 attached to the back side as described above. Further, a hole corresponding to the opening window 1552 is formed in the panel cover 1590.

  The light emitted from the LED 1562 is emitted outward in the radial direction. Part of the light enters the flange 15832 (see FIG. 116) of the inner lens 1583, part of the incident light is absorbed in the inner lens 1583, and other light passes through the inner lens 1583 and passes through the inner lens 1583. Light is emitted outward in the direction. The light transmitted through the inner lens 1583 and emitted outward in the radial direction is reflected on a radially inner surface 15862 (see FIG. 116) of the outer peripheral edge of the window edge member 1586. The light reflected on the inner surface 15862 of the outer peripheral edge of the window edge member 1586 in the radial direction is incident on the inner lens 1583 by changing the traveling direction of the light to the direction inward in the radial direction. In this way, the light emitted from the LED 1562 is prevented from leaking to the outside as much as possible, and is absorbed by the inner lens 1583 as much as possible. In addition, since light including the above part of light enters the inner lens 1583 from the outer peripheral portion of the inner lens 1583, the light can be dispersed along the surface of the inner lens 1583, and the light can be uniformly distributed on the surface. It becomes possible to emit light.

  Hereinafter, various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are shown in FIGS.

[Power-on processing]
FIG. 117 illustrates an example of a power-on process performed by the main CPU 101. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main CPU 101 sets an initial value to a stack pointer, as shown in the figure (step S11).

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power interruption detection signal is ON (step S12). The power interruption detection signal is turned ON when the voltage drops to a predetermined level, for example. When the power interruption detection signal is ON, the main CPU 101 determines that the power interruption is detected, and repeats the process of S12 until the power interruption detection signal is turned OFF. When the power failure detection signal is OFF, the main CPU 101 determines that the power failure has been detected, and proceeds to the process of step S13.

  In step S13, the main CPU 101 permits access to the RWM (main RAM 103).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a sub-control reception acceptance wait process that waits until the sub-control circuit 200 can accept a signal (step S14).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing for various devices built in the CPU (step S15).

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the backup clear signal is ON (step S16). The backup clear signal is a signal for instructing clearing of the backup contents of the main RAM 103 provided in the main CPU 101 constituting the main control circuit 70 and the RAM (not shown) constituting the payout / fire control circuit 300. . If the backup clear signal is ON, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S23. When the backup clear signal is OFF, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S17.

  In step S17, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power interruption detection flag is set to ON. The power interruption detection flag is a flag indicating that the power interruption processing has been executed in response to the occurrence of the power interruption. When the power interruption detection flag is ON, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S18. If the power interruption detection flag is off, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S23.

  In step S18, the main CPU 101 performs a work area damage check on the main RAM 103 using, for example, a checksum.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the work area is normal (step S19). If the work area is normal, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S20. If the work area is not normal, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S23.

  In step S20, the main CPU 101 performs initialization of a work area that requires an initial value at the time of restoration from power failure.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs the notification setting for the high-probability game state (probable change game state) at the time of power-off recovery (step S21).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of power-off recovery (power-off recovery command) to the sub-control circuit 200 (step S22). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the power-on process.

  In step S23, the main CPU 101 performs processing for clearing the work area of the main RAM 103.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs an initial setting of a work area that requires an initial value when the RWM (main RAM 103) is initialized (step S24).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a command for RWM initialization (initialization command) to the sub-control circuit 200 (step S25).

[System timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 118 shows an example of the system timer interrupt processing by the main CPU 101. The system timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, every 2 ms. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 saves the value of each register in the stack area of the main RAM 103 (step S31).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a random number update process for updating various random number values (step S32).

  Next, the main CPU 101 executes a switch input detection process for detecting input signals from various switches (step S33). The switch input detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a timer update process for updating values of various timers (step S34).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a command output process of outputting (transmitting) various commands to the sub control circuit 200 (step S35).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game information output process of outputting (transmitting) various game information to the sub control circuit 200 (step S36). The game information is information related to a game processed in the main control circuit 70, the sub control circuit 200, the payout / fire control circuit 300, and the like, and is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout / fire control circuit 300, and the hall computer. .

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of restoring the value of each saved register (step S37). When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the system timer interrupt processing.

[Switch input detection processing]
FIG. 119 illustrates an example of a switch input detection process performed by the main CPU 101. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described system timer interrupt process. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 executes a start opening winning detection process (step S41). The starting opening winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a general winning opening passage detection process (step S42). In the general winning opening passage detection processing, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like is set at the time of winning in the general winning openings 53, 54, 55, for example.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening passage detection process (step S43). In the special winning opening passage detection processing, payout information indicating the number of payouts, for example, is set when winning in the special winning opening 540.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a ball passage detector passage detection process (step S44). In the ball passage detector passage detection processing, a lottery result (random number value) of the ordinary symbol game is acquired according to the detection of the passage of the game ball by the ball passage detector 43. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the system timer interrupt processing.

[Start opening winning detection process]
FIG. 120 shows an example of the start-up winning detection processing by the main CPU 101. The start opening winning detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described switch input detection process. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first starting port switch 5472 (step S51). When a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 5472, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S52. If a game ball has not been detected by the first start port switch 5472, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S59.

  In step S52, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting payout information according to the first starting opening winning.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of retained first starting opening winnings (the number of retained special first symbols) is less than four (step S53). If the suspended number is less than four, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S54. If the number is four, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S59.

  In step S54, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of pending first starting opening winnings.

  Next, the main CPU 101 acquires a random number for hit determination and a symbol random number, and performs a process of storing these random numbers in the main RAM 103 (step S55).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a first special stop symbol determination process (step S56). In the first special stop symbol determination process, a winning random number determination table (first starting port), a symbol determining table (first starting port), and a big hit type determination table are referred to based on the hit determination random number value and the symbol random number value. Then, a symbol designating command, a hit selection symbol command, and the like relating to the first special symbol to be stopped and displayed are determined.

  Next, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern determination process (step S57). In the variation pattern determination processing, the variation pattern relating to the first special symbol is determined by referring to the game state transition table and the variation pattern selection table based on the symbol designating command, the determination value data, the gaming state and the table pattern. The variation pattern determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a command to increase the number of held first winning opening winnings (step S58). The command for increasing the number of held first winning opening winnings is a command indicating that the number of held first special symbols is increased by one, and is sent to the sub-control circuit 200 together with a command indicating the variation pattern determined in the process of step S57. Is sent.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second starting port switch 441 (step S59). When a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S60. If a game ball has not been detected by the second starting port switch 441, the main CPU 101 ends the starting port winning detection processing.

  In step S60, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting payout information according to the second starting opening winning.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of retained second starting opening winnings (the number of retained second special symbols) is less than four (step S61). If the suspended number is less than four, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S62. When the number of holdings is four, the main CPU 101 ends the start-up winning detection processing.

  In step S62, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of retained second winning opening winnings.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of acquiring the hit determination random number value and the symbol random number value and storing these random number values in the main RAM 103 (step S63).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a second special stop symbol determination process (step S64). Similarly to the first special stop symbol determination process, the second special stop symbol determination process is based on the hit determination random number value and the symbol random number value, and the hit random number determination table (second starting port) and the symbol determination table (second With reference to the jackpot type and the big hit type determination table, a symbol designating command, a hit selection symbol command, and the like for the second special symbol to be stopped and displayed are determined.

  Next, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern determination process (step S65). Also in this variation pattern determination processing, the variation pattern related to the second special symbol is determined by referring to the game state transition table and the variation pattern selection table based on the symbol designation command, the determination value data, the game state and the table pattern. The variation pattern determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a command to increase the number of held second winning opening winnings (step S66). The second start opening winning number increase command is a command indicating that the number of held second special symbols is increased by one, and is sent to the sub-control circuit 200 together with a command indicating a variation pattern determined in the process of step S65. Is sent. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the start-up winning detection process.

[Variation pattern determination processing]
FIG. 121 illustrates an example of a fluctuation pattern determination process performed by the main CPU 101. The fluctuation pattern determination processing is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described starting opening winning detection processing. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 refers to a game state transition table and a fluctuation pattern selection table based on a table pattern, a hit determination random number value and a symbol random number value to be described later, and selects a fluctuation pattern type. Is performed (step S71).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of selecting the first half and second half variation patterns from the selected variation pattern types based on a predetermined lottery probability (step S72). When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the fluctuation pattern determination processing.

  In addition, since the variable pattern stores the variable display time of the identification symbol in association with the variable pattern, the variable pattern determined in the above-described variable pattern determination processing is substantially information that can represent the variable time. It becomes.

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 122 shows an example of main control main processing by the main CPU 101. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main CPU 101 performs an initial setting process as shown in the figure (step S81). In this processing, the main CPU 101 performs processing such as the above-described power-on processing.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs an initial value random number update process (step S82). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of updating the initial value random number counter.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol control process (step S83). The special symbol control processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol control process (step S84). The normal symbol control processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol display unit control process (step S85). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines the special symbol display unit (the first special symbol display unit 73, according to the result of the special symbol control process and the result of the normal symbol control process stored in the main RAM 103 in steps S83 and S84. The control signal for driving the second special symbol display unit 74) and the normal symbol display unit 71 is stored in the main RAM 103. Thereby, the main CPU 101 transmits a control signal to the special symbol display unit (the first special symbol display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74) and the normal symbol display unit 71, and the special symbol display unit (the first special symbol display unit). The symbol display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74) and the normal symbol display unit 71 perform variable display and stop display of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol based on the received control signal.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game information data generation process (step S86). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates a game state command related to game information data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, and the hall computer, and stores the generated game state command in the main RAM 103.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a storage / game state data generation process (step S87). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates storage / game state data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 based on the value of the probable change flag and the value of the time reduction flag, and stores the storage / game state data in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S82.

[Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 123 shows an example of the special symbol control process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. Numerical values (“00” to “08”) written in parentheses to the left of each process shown in FIG. 6 indicate the value of the control state flag. This control state flag is stored in a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 advances the special symbol game by executing a process corresponding to the numerical value of the control state flag.

  As shown in FIG. 123, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading a control state flag (step S91). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines, based on the read value of the control state flag, whether or not to execute each of steps S92 to S100 described below. The control state flag indicates the state of the special symbol game, and enables execution of any one of steps S92 to S100. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to a waiting time set for each process of steps S92 to S100. Before reaching the predetermined timing, the processing related to another subroutine is executed without executing each processing. Of course, the above-described system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 118) is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage check process (step S92). In this process, when the control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process, the main CPU 101 checks the number of held special display variable displays, and if the number of held symbols is not “0”. In the case where there is a reserved ball, a hit determination result, a special symbol determination result, a special symbol change pattern determination result, and the like obtained in the starting opening winning detection processing are acquired. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“01”) indicating a special symbol variable display time management process (step S93) described later, and sets the variation pattern acquired in the current process. The variable display time of the corresponding special symbol is set in the waiting time timer. That is, after the variable display time of the special symbol corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the starting opening winning detection process has elapsed, the special symbol variable display time management process described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, when the reserved number is “0” (when there is no reserved ball), the main CPU 101 performs a demonstration display process for displaying a demonstration screen. This special symbol storage check processing will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol variable display time management process (step S93). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control status flag to a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variable display time management process, and sets the control status flag to a special status described later when the special symbol variable display time has elapsed. The value ("02") indicating the symbol display time management process (step S94) is set, and the wait time after determination is set in the wait time timer. That is, it is set so that the special symbol display time management process described later is executed after the elapse of the wait time after determination set in the process of step S93.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol display time management process (step S94). In this process, when the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process, and the waiting time after determination set in the process of step S93 has elapsed, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the hit determination is performed. It is determined whether the result is “big hit” or “small hit”. When the result of the hit determination is “big hit” or “small hit”, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“03”) indicating a big hit start interval management process (step S95) described later in the control state flag. , The time corresponding to the big hit start interval is set in the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the big hit start interval set in the process of step S94 has elapsed, the big hit start interval management process described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination is not “big hit” or “small hit”, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“08”) indicating a special symbol game ending process (step S100) described later in the control state flag. That is, in this case, it is set so that a special symbol game end process described later is executed. This special symbol display time management processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a big hit start interval management process (step S95). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value (“03”) indicating the jackpot start interval management process, and that the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of step S94 has elapsed, In order to open the winning opening 540, the variables located in the main RAM 103 are updated based on the data read from the main ROM 102. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“04”) indicating the processing for opening the special winning opening (described later) (step S96), and sets an upper limit time for opening the special winning opening 540 (for example, 30 seconds) is set in the special winning opening time timer. In other words, the processing is set so that the processing for opening the special winning opening described later is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening opening process (step S96). In this process, first, when the control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the special winning opening process, the main CPU 101 determines that the special winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than a predetermined number, and It is determined whether one of the conditions that the upper limit time has elapsed (the special winning opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied (a predetermined closing condition is satisfied). When one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates a variable positioned in the main RAM 103 to close the special winning opening 540. Then, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“05”) indicating the later-described winning prize opening ball monitoring process (step S97) to the control state flag, and sets the monitoring time of the remaining sphere in the winning prize mouth to a waiting time timer. I do. That is, by this processing, after the remaining ball monitoring time in the special winning opening set in step S97 elapses, it is set so that the processing for monitoring the remaining ball in the special winning opening described later is executed. Immediately before the end of the special winning opening processing, a round display command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process for monitoring the remaining balls in the special winning opening (step S97). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to the value (“05”) indicating the processing for monitoring the remaining sphere in the special winning opening, and when the monitoring time for the remaining sphere in the special winning opening has elapsed, the main CPU 101 sets the value of the opening counter for the special winning opening. It is determined whether or not the condition that the value is equal to or more than the maximum winning opening number (the last round) is satisfied. When determining that the above condition is not satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value ("06") indicating the special winning opening reopening waiting time management process in the control state flag. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a time corresponding to the interval between rounds in the waiting time timer. That is, by this processing, after the time corresponding to the interval between rounds elapses, it is set so that the waiting time management processing before reopening of the special winning opening described later is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S97 that the above condition is satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value indicating the jackpot end interval processing (“07”) in the control state flag, and sets a time corresponding to the jackpot end interval (the jackpot end interval). Time) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval set in this process elapses, it is set so that the jackpot end interval process described later is executed.

  Next, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the special winning opening release frequency counter is not equal to or more than the maximum value of the special winning opening number, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening pre-opening waiting time management process (step S98). In this processing, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“06”) indicating the waiting time management processing before reopening of the special winning opening, and when the time corresponding to the interval between rounds elapses, the main CPU 101 opens the special winning opening. The value of the number-of-times counter is stored and updated so as to increase by "1". Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating the processing during opening of the special winning opening in the control state flag. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 30 seconds) in the special winning opening time timer. That is, it is set so that the above-described opening processing of the special winning opening (step S96) is executed again in this processing. In addition, immediately before the end of the special winning opening re-opening waiting time management process, a special winning opening opening display command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200.

  Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the special winning opening opening frequency counter is equal to or more than the maximum value of the special winning opening number, the main CPU 101 performs a big hit end interval process (step S99). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the value (“07”) indicating the special symbol game end process when the control state flag indicates the big hit end interval process (“07”) and the time corresponding to the big hit end interval has elapsed. 08 ”) is set in the control state flag. That is, by this processing, the special symbol game ending processing described later is set after the processing of step S99. If the hit selection symbol command described above is any one of “z5”, “z6”, “z7”, “z10” and “z11”, the main CPU 101 shifts the gaming state to the probable changing gaming state. If the hit selection symbol command described above is any one of “z0”, “z1”, “z2”, “z3”, “z4” and “z9”, the gaming state is changed. Control is performed to change to the non-probable change game state. In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit (when the random number for big hit determination is “small hit determination value data”), the main CPU 101 performs control to maintain the gaming state.

  Next, when the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state ends, or when "losing" is won, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol game ending process (step S100). In this process, when the control state flag is the value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process, the main CPU 101 updates the storage so as to decrease the data indicating the number of held items (startup storage information) by “1”. I do. Further, the main CPU 101 updates the special symbol storage area in order to perform the variable display of the next special symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process in the control state flag. That is, this process is set so that the above-described special symbol storage check process (step S92) is executed after the process of step S100. When the special symbol game end processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol control processing.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special symbol game is advanced by sequentially setting various values in the control state flag. Specifically, when the gaming state is neither the big hitting gaming state nor the small hitting gaming state and the result of the hit determination is “losing”, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags to “00”, “01”, “ 02 "and" 08 ". As a result, the main CPU 101 executes the special symbol memory check process (step S92), the special symbol variable display time management process (step S93), the special symbol display time management process (step S94), and the special symbol game end process (step S100). ) Are executed at a predetermined timing in this order.

  When the gaming state is neither the big hitting game state nor the small hitting gaming state and the result of the hit determination is “big hit” or “small hit”, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to “00”, “01”. , “02”, and “03” in this order. Thereby, the main CPU 101 executes the special symbol storage check process (step S92), the special symbol variable display time management process (step S93), the special symbol display time management process (step S94), and the big hit start interval management process (step S95). ) Are executed in this order at a predetermined timing, and the control to shift to the big hit game state or the small hit game state is executed.

  Further, when the transition control to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state is executed, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of “04”, “05”, “06”. Thereby, the main CPU 101 performs the above-described processing during opening of the special winning opening (step S96), the processing for monitoring the remaining balls in the special winning opening (step S57), and the waiting time management processing before reopening the special winning opening (step S98) in this order. The game is executed at a predetermined timing, and a big hit game or a small hit game is executed.

  In addition, if the termination condition of the big hit gaming state is satisfied during the big hit gaming state, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of “04”, “05”, “07”, and “08”. Thereby, the main CPU 101 executes the above-described processing during the opening of the special winning opening (step S96), the processing for monitoring the remaining balls in the special winning opening (step S97), the processing for ending the big hit (step S99), and the processing for ending the special symbol game (step S100). At a predetermined timing in this order, and the big hit gaming state ends.

  As described above, in the special symbol control processing, the processing flow is branched according to the status. Also, in the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 129 described later) in step S84 in the main control main process shown in FIG. 122, the process flow is branched according to the status, similarly to the special symbol control process.

  The processing program of the present embodiment is programmed so that a pure return process from a small module to a parent module can be performed by a call instruction when a process is branched according to a status. As a result, in the present embodiment, the capacity of the program can be reduced as compared with the case where a jump table is arranged to execute the above processing.

[Special design memory check process]
FIG. 124 shows an example of the special symbol storage check process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol storage check process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described special symbol control process. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 reads a control state flag from a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103 by a load process (step S111).

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the read control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process (step S112). When determining that the control state flag is not “00”, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check processing. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is “00”, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S113.

  In step S113, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of reserves of the second starting opening winning (variable display of the second special symbol) (the second number of stored starting) is “0”. If the main CPU 101 determines that the number of retained second starting opening winnings is not “0”, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S114. If the main CPU 101 determines that the number of retained second starting opening winnings is “0”, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S119.

  In step S114, the main CPU 101 subtracts “1” from the value of the second start storage number corresponding to the number of retained second start opening winnings. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103, It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the variable display or the second special symbol being held. In the second special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol being variably displayed is stored as start storage information. In the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display (holding ball) of the second special symbol held for four times. Is stored as start storage information. In addition, the start storage information of each second special symbol start storage area includes, for example, data indicating a random number for hit determination or a symbol random number obtained at the time of winning the second start opening 440, a determined random pattern, and the like. It is.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage transfer process based on the winning of the second starting opening (step S115). In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data in the second special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the second special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. Thereafter, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S116.

  In step S116, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value ("01") indicating the special symbol variable display time management process in the control state flag. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol effect start command to the sub control circuit 200.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a big hit / small hit determination process (step S117). In this process, the main CPU 101 extracts the random number for jackpot determination extracted at the time of winning the starting opening and set earlier in the first special symbol start storage area (0) or the second special symbol start storage area (0). Based on this, the judgment value data is acquired with reference to the hit judgment table (see FIG. 9) corresponding to the type of the winning start port. Then, based on the acquired determination value data, the main CPU 101 determines which of “big hit”, “small hit” and “loss” has been won (hit determination).

  Next, the main CPU 101 sets the variable display time corresponding to the determined special symbol variation pattern in the waiting time timer (step S118). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process.

  In step S119, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of reserves (the number of second start storages) of the first start opening winning (variable display of the first special symbol) is “0”. If the main CPU 101 determines that the number of pending first opening prizes is not “0”, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S120. If the main CPU 101 determines that the number of pending first starting opening winnings is “0”, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S122.

  In step S120, the main CPU 101 subtracts “1” from the value of the first start storage number corresponding to the number of suspended first start opening winnings. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether data is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103, It is determined whether or not there is a memory for starting the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol being variably displayed or held. In the first special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol being variably displayed is stored as start storage information. Then, in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display (holding ball) of the first special symbol for four times being held. Is stored as start storage information. In addition, the start storage information of each first special symbol start storage area includes, for example, data indicating a hit determination random number, a symbol random number, a determined variation pattern, and the like acquired at the time of winning the first opening 5442. It is.

  Next, a special symbol memory transfer process is performed based on the first starting opening winning (step S121). In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data in the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. Thereafter, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S116.

  In step S122, the main CPU 101 performs a demonstration display process for displaying a demonstration screen. In this process, the main CPU 101 transmits a demonstration display command to the sub control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process.

[Special symbol display time management processing]
FIG. 125 shows an example of the special symbol display time management processing by the main CPU 101. The special symbol display time management process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described special symbol control process. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management processing (step S131). When it is determined that the control state flag is not the value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management processing, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management processing. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is the value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management processing, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing of step S132.

  In step S132, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value (waiting time) of the waiting time timer is “0”. In this processing, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time after the variable display is set (variable display start waiting time) set in the waiting time timer is exhausted. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management processing. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S133.

  In step S133, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit". When determining that the special symbol game is “big hit”, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S142. On the other hand, when determining that the special symbol game is not the “big hit”, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S134.

  In step S134, the main CPU 101 further determines whether or not the special symbol game is “small hit”. When determining that the special symbol game is “small hit”, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S137. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol game is not “small hit”, that is, when the special symbol game is “losing”, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S135.

  In step S135, the main CPU 101 performs a time saving number subtraction process. The time saving subtraction process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value ("08") indicating the special symbol game ending process to the control state flag (step S136). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

  In step S137, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a small hit flag indicating a small hit. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S138.

  In step S138, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value ("03") indicating the big hit start interval management process in the control status flag.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the big hit start interval time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) in the waiting time timer (step S139).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a big hit start command or a small hit start command corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 103 (step S140). Thereby, the big hit start command or the small hit start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

  Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the big hit type determination table (see FIG. 13), and sets the upper limit of the number of rounds (the upper limit of the number of open winning openings) corresponding to the special symbol (type of the symbol designating command) in the main RAM 103. Then, the round number display LED pattern flag is set (step S141). The round number display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether or not the remaining round number is displayed in a predetermined pattern. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

  In step S142, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a big hit flag indicating a big hit. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S143.

  In step S143, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the time saving counter, the time saving flag, and the probability change flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S138.

[Time saving number subtraction process]
FIG. 126 illustrates an example of the number-of-times-savings-subtraction process performed by the main CPU 101. The time saving number subtraction process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol display time management process described above or the big hit end interval process described later. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S151). The time reduction counter counts down until the set number of time reductions (determined to be 24, 30, 36, 42, 48, or 100 in this embodiment) becomes zero. It is a counter. When the value of the time reduction counter is 0, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S154. When the value of the time saving number counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 ends the time saving number subtraction process.

  In step S152, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting one from the value of the time reduction counter.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines again whether or not the value of the time saving counter is 0 (step S153). When the value of the time reduction counter is 0, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S154. When the value of the time saving number counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 ends the time saving number subtraction process.

  In step S154, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting “0” as the time saving flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the time saving number subtraction process.

[Big hit end interval processing]
FIG. 127 shows an example of the big hit end interval processing by the main CPU 101. The big hit end interval process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the big hit end interval processing (step S161). When it is determined that the control state flag is not the value indicating the big hit end interval processing (“07”) (step S161: NO), the main CPU 101 ends the big hit end interval processing. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is the value indicating the big hit end interval processing (“07”), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing of step S162.

  In step S162, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer is “0”. In this processing, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the big hit end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 101 ends the big hit end interval processing. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S163.

  In step S163, the main CPU 101 clears the special winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag. The large winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag is used as a management flag indicating whether or not the number of rounds at the time of a big hit is displayed by an LED light emission pattern.

  Next, the main CPU 101 clears the round number distribution flag (step S164). The round number distribution flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and indicates whether the large winning opening 540 is to be periodically opened and closed a predetermined number of times even during one round. Flag. If the special winning opening 540 is opened and closed periodically even during one round, the round number distribution flag becomes “1”. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol hit end display command to the sub control circuit 200.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value ("08") indicating the special symbol game end process to the control state flag (step S165).

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit" (step S166). When determining that the special symbol game is “big hit”, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S167. On the other hand, when determining that the special symbol game is not “big hit”, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S174.

  In step S167, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a big hit flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a probability change big hit (step S168). If it is a probability change jackpot, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S169. If it is not a probability change jackpot, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S171.

  In step S169, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting “1” as the probability change flag.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting “1” as the time saving flag (step S171).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a prescribed number of time savings (100 in the present embodiment as an example) in the number of times saving counter (step S172).

  Next, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern table setting process (step S173). The variation pattern table setting processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the big hit end interval processing.

  In step S174, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the value of the small hit flag.

  Next, the main CPU 101 executes the time saving number subtraction process described above (step S175). When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the big hit end interval processing.

[Variation pattern table setting processing]
FIG. 128 illustrates an example of a fluctuation pattern table setting process performed by the main CPU 101. The variation pattern table setting process is called as a subroutine during the power-on process or the big hit end interval process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power is on (step S181). If the power is on, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S182. If the power is not turned on, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S183.

  In step S182, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 1 as a table pattern when referring to the gaming state transition table.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the probability change flag is “1” (step S183). If the value of the probable change flag is “1”, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S184. When the value of the probable change flag is “0”, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S185.

  In step S184, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 2 as a table pattern when referring to the gaming state transition table. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the fluctuation pattern table setting processing.

  In step S185, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 3 as a table pattern when referring to the gaming state transition table. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the fluctuation pattern table setting processing.

[Normal symbol control processing]
FIG. 129 shows an example of the ordinary symbol control process by the main CPU 101. The normal symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. The numerical values (“00” to “04”) written in parentheses to the left of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 129 indicate a normal symbol control state flag. Is stored in a predetermined storage area. The main CPU 101 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the numerical value of the normal symbol control state flag.

  As shown in FIG. 129, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading a normal symbol control state flag (step S191). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads out the ordinary symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines, based on the read value of the ordinary symbol control state flag, whether or not to execute various processes of steps S192 to S196 described below. The normal symbol control state flag indicates a game state of the normal symbol game, and enables execution of any one of steps S162 to S166. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to a waiting time set for each process of steps S162 to S166. Before reaching the predetermined timing, other subroutine processing is executed without executing each processing. Of course, the above-described system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 118) is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol storage check process (step S192). In this process, when the ordinary symbol control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the ordinary symbol memory check process, the main CPU 101 checks the number of suspended ordinary symbols in variable display, and the number of suspended symbols is “0”. If not, a process such as a hit determination is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value ("01") indicating a later-described ordinary symbol variable display time monitoring process (step S193) in the ordinary symbol control state flag, and sets the variation time determined in the current process. Is set to the waiting time timer. That is, by the processing of step S192, after the determined fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol has elapsed, the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring processing described later is set to be executed.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol variable display time monitoring process (step S193). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the ordinary symbol control status flag to a value (“01”) indicating the ordinary symbol variation time monitoring process, and when the variation time of the ordinary symbol has elapsed, sets the ordinary symbol control status flag to be described later. A value ("02") indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S194) is set, and a wait time after confirmation (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in a wait time timer. That is, in the process of step S193, after the set waiting time after the determination has elapsed, the normal symbol display time monitoring process described later is set to be executed.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S194). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the normal symbol control status flag is a value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process, and that if the waiting time after determination set in the process of step S193 has elapsed, It is determined whether or not the result of the determination is “hit”. Then, when the result of the hit determination is "hit", the main CPU 101 performs a normal electric accessory opening setting process, and sets a value indicating the later-described ordinary electric accessory opening process (step S195) in the normal symbol control state flag (step S195). "03") is set. That is, the processing is set so that the ordinary electric accessory opening processing described later is executed by this processing. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination is not “hit”, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating a normal symbol game end process (step S196) to be described later in the ordinary symbol control state flag. That is, in this case, it is set so that a later-described ordinary symbol game ending process is executed.

  Next, when the result of the hit determination in step S194 is determined to be "hit", the main CPU 101 performs an ordinary electric accessory opening process (step S195). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“03”) indicating the normal electric accessory opening process, the main CPU 101 determines that a predetermined number of prizes have been won while the ordinary electric accessory 460 is being opened. It is determined whether one of the condition and the condition that the opening upper limit time of the ordinary electric accessory 460 has elapsed (the ordinary electric opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied. When one of the above conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates a variable located in the main RAM 103 in order to close the blade member 4620 (for example, see FIG. 5) of the ordinary electric accessory 460. Then, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating a later-described ordinary symbol game end process (step S196) in the ordinary symbol control state flag. That is, this process is set so that a later-described ordinary symbol game ending process is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol game end process (step S196). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the normal symbol game end process, the main CPU 101 decreases the data indicating the number of suspended variable symbols in the normal symbol by “1”. Is updated. Further, the main CPU 101 updates the ordinary symbol storage area in order to perform the next variable display of the ordinary symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating the ordinary symbol storage check process in the ordinary symbol control state flag. That is, after the processing in step S196, the setting is made so that the above-described ordinary symbol storage check processing (step S192) is executed. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the normal symbol control process.

[Sub control circuit main processing]
On the other hand, the sub CPU 201 executes the sub control circuit main processing. The sub-control circuit main processing will be described with reference to FIG. The sub-control circuit main process is a process that is started when the power is turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 130, the sub CPU 201 performs initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, and the like (step S201).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to clear the counter value of the watchdog timer (step S202). In the watchdog timer, a reset time (for example, 2000 ms) is set at the time of start-up, and when a service pulse is not written (time-out), power interruption processing is executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes an operation unit input process (step S203).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes a command analysis process (step S204). The command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes an effect mode determination process (step S205). The effect mode determination process includes a scenario pre-setting process described later, an effect determination process (concealment A stage 2002), a look-ahead effect selection process (high-accuracy stage 2004), a background change control process (high-accuracy stage 2004), and the number of continuous background changes. Judgment processing (high-accuracy stage 2004), fluctuation scenario determination processing (high-accuracy stage 2004), chance-up control processing (high-accuracy stage 2004), hold change determination processing (high-accuracy stage 2004), character lamp effect control processing, full screen It is composed of subroutines such as effect control processing. These processes will be described later with reference to FIGS. 136 to 167.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes a command transmission process (step S206). The command transmission processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the display control circuit 204 executes a drawing control process (step S207). In this process, the display control circuit 204 performs drawing control for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 16 based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

  Next, the voice control circuit 205 performs a voice control process (Step S208). In this process, the voice control circuit 205 performs voice control for causing the speaker 24 to output voice based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

  Next, the LED control circuit 206 performs a lamp control process (step S209). In this process, the LED control circuit 206 performs light emission control for turning on or off the lamp 25 based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

  Next, the accessory control circuit 207 performs an accessory control process (step S210). In this process, the accessory control circuit 207 performs drive control for operating the effect drive motor for operating the movable accessory unit based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201. In such a sub-control circuit main process, after the initialization process in step S201 ends, each process in steps S202 to S210 is repeatedly executed.

[Command analysis processing]
FIG. 131 illustrates an example of a command analysis process by the sub CPU 201. The command analysis process is called as a subroutine during execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, after receiving from the main control circuit 70 (main CPU 101), the sub CPU 201 performs a process of analyzing a command stored in a reception buffer of the work RAM 203 (step S241).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a consistency check on the received command (step S242). The consistency check is performed in order to verify that the target data exists when the command is received, and that the data has no error or lack.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a sub lottery process (step S243). In this process, if the received command is a variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 201 selects an effect pattern by lottery based on the variation pattern designation command. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the command analysis processing. In the sub-lottery process, all items related to the production including the production pattern may be selected by lottery, or only the production type (whether there is a speech notice or whether there is a SU notice) as the production pattern. The effect content (type of effect, type of cut-in, and the like) selected by lottery and executed in the effect may be selected as effect information by another process separately formed as a subroutine. In the present embodiment, an effect pattern indicating the type of effect is selected in the sub-lottery process, and thereafter, the effect content executed based on the effect pattern is selected as effect information by the effect mode determination process described later. ing.

[Command transmission processing]
FIG. 132 illustrates an example of a command transmission process by the sub CPU 201. The command transmission process is called as a subroutine during execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 executes a message setting process when transmitting a control command (message) to each of the control circuits 204 to 207 (step S251). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of generating a message (effect designation information) based on the effect information obtained in the effect mode determination process, and temporarily storing the message in the direct buffer of the work RAM 203. This message setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes a directory table registration process (step S252). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting a corresponding directory table in a predetermined area of the work RAM 203 based on the message and the presentation information stored in the directory buffer. This directory table registration processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes a message transmission process (step S253). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of reading out the message stored in the direct buffer at a predetermined timing based on the directory table and transmitting the message to predetermined control circuits 204 to 207. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the command transmission processing. This message transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Message setting process]
FIG. 133 illustrates an example of a message setting process by the sub CPU 201. The message setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 sets a device (control circuits 204 to 207) to be transmitted based on the effect information (step S261).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting the presence or absence of the system operation (step S262).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 sets the stage information and each effect information (step S263).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 sets a notice pattern (step S264). As a result, the direct buffer stores messages indicating devices to be transmitted (control circuits 204 to 207), presence / absence of system operation, stage information, each effect information, and a notice pattern. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the message setting processing.

[Direct table registration processing]
FIG. 134 illustrates an example of a directory table registration process performed by the sub CPU 201. The directory table registration process is called as a subroutine during execution of the above-described command transmission process. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for registering a single table (step S271).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering a master table based on the effect information determined in the effect mode determination process (step S272).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering a slave table used in the master table (step S273).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering a directory table corresponding to the message set in the directory buffer as a slave table (step S274). When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the directory table registration processing.

[Message transmission processing]
FIG. 135 illustrates an example of a message transmission process by the sub CPU 201. The message transmission process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described command transmission process. As shown in the figure, if a message is registered in the directory buffer corresponding to the directory table, the sub CPU 201 sends a message to each device (control circuits 204 to 207) in accordance with the “destination device” set in the message. Is transmitted (step S281).

  Next, after the transmission of the message is completed, the sub CPU 201 performs processing of discarding unnecessary directory tables (step S282). When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the message transmission processing.

[Production Mode Determination Process by Sub CPU 201]
Next, the details of the effect mode determination process (step S205) of the sub CPU 201 will be described. The production mode is formed with a characteristic for each of a plurality of production stages.

[Direction stage]
First, with reference to FIG. 136, the state transition of a plurality of effect stages will be described. FIG. 136 is a block diagram illustrating an example of state transition of a plurality of game state stages.

  In the normal stage 2000, the winning probability of a hit determination (hereinafter, referred to as “big hit determination”) performed as a process of the main CPU 101 when a game ball wins in the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440 is relatively high. This is a low low-probability state without a power support (ie, a normal game state). If the production state is the normal stage 2000, the player can know that the game state is the normal game state (low probability state).

  The high-accuracy stage 2004 is a high-probability game state in which the winning probability of the jackpot determination is relatively high, and is a state with electric support. If the production state is the high-accuracy stage 2004, the player can know that the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state.

  Both the concealed A stage 2002 and the concealed B stage 2006 are in the high-probability game state where the winning probability of the jackpot determination is relatively high and the state with the electric support, or the winning probability of the jackpot determination is relatively low. This is a low probability state and a state with electric support. In the concealed A stage 2002 and the concealed B stage 2006, the player cannot grasp or grasp whether the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state or the low-probability state by looking at the display effect performed on the liquid crystal display device 16. Have difficulty. However, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the secret A stage 2002 is disclosed as to whether it is in the high-probability gaming state or the low-probability state based on the final result of the battle effect described later. . Further, since the subtraction effect of the character described later performed during the battle effect is an intermediate effect toward the final result of the battle effect, depending on whether the effect is a subtraction effect of the ally character or a subtraction effect of the enemy character, The player can be delighted.

  In the normal stage 2000 (low-probability gaming state, no time savings), if an 8R jackpot (a jackpot in which the big winning opening 540 opens and closes eight rounds) is drawn, after the big hit game is over, the gaming state stage will be a concealed A stage 2002 (high The state transitions to the specified number of power supports in the probability game state or the specified number of power supports in the low probability game state. “Electric support” is a state in which the time-saving game is executed, and “no electric support” is a state in which the time-saving game is not executed.

  In the concealment A stage 2002, when the result of the big hit determination is a 5R big hit or when a specified number of time-saving games are consumed in the high-probability game state, the production stage transitions to the high-accuracy stage 2004. On the other hand, in the concealment A stage 2002, when a predetermined number of time-saving games are exhausted in the low-probability game state, the stage transitions to the normal stage 2000. In the normal stage 2000, if the result of the jackpot determination is a 5R jackpot or a 15R jackpot, the production stage transitions to the high-accuracy stage 2004.

  In the high-accuracy stage 2004, if the result of the jackpot determination is an 8R jackpot, the production stage transitions to the confidential A stage 2002. In the concealment A stage 2002, if the result of the big hit determination is a 5R big hit, the production stage transitions to the concealment B stage 2006. In the concealment B stage 2006, if the result of the big hit determination is 8R big hit, the production stage transitions to the concealment A stage 2002. In the concealment B stage 2006, if the result of the jackpot determination is a 15R jackpot, the production stage transitions to the high-accuracy stage 2004. In the high-accuracy stage 2004, if the result of the big hit determination is a 5R big hit, the production stage transitions to the secret B stage 2006. In the concealment B stage 2006, when the prescribed number of hours has been consumed, the production stage transitions to the normal stage 2000.

  Note that the number of rounds of the jackpot described above is an example. In the above description, the game state transitions to the secret A stage 2002 when the jackpot determination result is 8R jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The sub CPU 201 may perform an effect to transition to the confidential A stage 2002, perform the promotion effect during the big hit game, and transition to the high-accuracy stage 2004 after the big hit is completed.

  The concealment A stage 2002 may have, for example, a higher probability of a high-probability gaming state than the concealment B stage 2006. Each of these concealment stages implements a unique effect form. For example, in the concealment A stage 2002, a battle effect is performed in which a plurality of characters are divided into enemy and ally members to play a winning battle.

  FIG. 137 is a diagram illustrating an example of the battle effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the concealment A stage 2002. In FIG. 137, the ally character CA1 is displayed on the left side of the screen, and the enemy character CA2 is displayed on the right side of the screen. In addition, the type of the ally character currently fighting and the number of ally characters (remaining number) are displayed in the upper left portion of the screen, and the type of the enemy character and the number of enemy characters currently fighting are displayed in the upper right portion of the screen. (Remaining number) is displayed. Although not shown in FIG. 137, for example, other information such as variable display information of the identification symbol and information on the number of stored start-ups may be displayed as appropriate.

  The above-mentioned battle effect is an effect that is an indicator of whether it is highly likely to be in the high-probability game state or high in the low-probability game state in the concealment A stage 2002. It is determined whether the game state is the high-probability game state or the low-probability game state. For example, when the enemy group is completely annihilated, the high-probability gaming state is determined, and when the ally group is completely annihilated, the low-probability gaming state is established. Therefore, the effect of the process until any one of the enemy and ally groups is annihilated is an index effect indicating which of the high-probability gaming state and the low-probability gaming state is more likely. For example, when the subtraction effect in which the number of the enemy group is reduced is performed, it is possible to give the player an expectation that the possibility of the high probability gaming state is high, and the subtraction effect in which the number of the ally group is reduced is performed. , The impression that the player is in the high probability state is low (the player is likely to be in the low probability game state). In the concealment A stage 2002, a rough scenario of such a battle effect is determined in advance before the concealment A stage 2002 starts. In the concealment A stage 2002, the scenario determined in advance is changed and corrected. The production is going on. In the following, the scenario effect selection process (concealment A stage 2002) will be described.

  Further, for example, in the concealment B stage 2006, a battle effect is executed in which the hero character and the enemy character among the ally characters fight one-on-one. When the result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot, an effect in which the main character wins in the battle effect is executed. In the battle production at the concealment B stage 2006, for example, a) a production zone in which the hero character can always defeat the enemy character if the hero character attacks; An effect zone which is unknown, and an effect zone where an enemy character makes a first strike, are prepared. In addition, in the secret B stage 2006, whether or not the game is in the high-probability game state is notified by the operation of the movable decorative body 1040 of the upper front accessory 1000. For example, in the last variable display (the last variable display in the time-saving gaming state (special symbol game) or the last variable display in which it is concealed whether or not the game is in the high-probability gaming state (special symbol game)), If the movable decorative body 1040 of the object 1000 falls (moves) toward the operation limit position, it is in the high-probability gaming state, and if the movable decorative body 1040 does not fall, it is in the low-probability gaming state. However, in the final variable display, a pre-fall sign effect may be performed to expect that the movable decorative body 1040 will fall. When the result of the big hit determination process is a big hit, in addition to the falling of the movable decorative body 1040, all of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 operate. By operating to the limit position (for example, see FIG. 102), it is notified that the result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot.

  Further, in the concealment B stage 2006, transition between the effect zones (a) to (c) described above is performed at any time according to the number of times of performing the variable display (special symbol game). For example, after the jackpot game state is over, the number of times the special symbol game is executed is 1 to 10 times, stays in the effect zone of the above a), and if it is 11 to 90 times, stays in the above 2) effect zone. Then, during the 91 to 99 times, the player stays in the above described effect zone c), and in the 100th special symbol game, an effect indicating that this is the final game in the concealment B stage 2006 is performed. It goes without saying that the production at the concealment B stage 2006 is not limited to the above.

In the present embodiment, the above-described index effect can indicate which of the high-probability game state and the low-probability game state is more likely to be performed in the concealment A stage 2002. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It can also be used for other effects that show the degree of the degree. For example, the above-described index effect can be adopted for the following effects. However, the following effect is merely an example, and it goes without saying that it can be adopted for other effects.
・ When the duration of the high-probability gaming state is disclosed but the high-probability gaming state is concealed, an effect indicating the length of the duration (expected that the duration is long Direction indicating the degree).
-Although it is disclosed that the player is in the time-saving gaming state, when the duration of the time-saving gaming state is concealed, an effect indicating the length of the duration (the degree of expectation that the duration is long) Direction shown).
An effect in which an effect section is set for one or a plurality of start memories, and the degree of expectation that a reach fluctuation effect or a big hit is included in the start memories included in the effect section.

  The degree of expectation (reliability) with respect to a predetermined internal state (i.e., an advantageous state) such as a jackpot or a high-probability game state of each announcement effect is defined as a "big hit" or a "high-probability game state" The probability that each announcement effect is executed to be a "big hit" or a "high-probability game state" and the probability that each announcement effect is executed to be a "losing" or a "low-probability game state" are determined. Is a numerical value obtained by dividing by the sum of the probability of becoming the internal state (that is, the disadvantageous state). However, since the “expectation” may include a case where the expectation is 100% and a case where the expectation is 0%, there is a case where the above-mentioned division is not strictly satisfied (for example, when the effect is executed) In this case, it is not appropriate to divide 1 by 0 because it may include a case where the game state or a hit is reported definitely, and in this case, the expected degree includes the concept of 100%, 0%, or the presence / absence. That would be).

[Scenario production selection process (Hidden A stage)]
The sub CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting the character lost in the battle of the enemy and the ally from the number of participating characters, and deletes the lost character from the screen. An effect form related to the concealment A stage 2002 will be described more specifically.

  The processing for the effect form includes a step of determining a scenario effect in advance before the concealment A stage 2002 starts (specifically, during the execution of the big hit game), and a process of changing the fluctuation pattern when the concealment A stage 2002 starts. Changing and correcting the scenario in accordance with the effect selected based on the effect. The “scenario” is a development of when a character is subjected to a subtraction process in the progress of the game (the number of times reduced) in the concealment A stage 2002. Since the “scenario” includes the correspondence between the number of times reduced and the character subtraction, it may be rephrased as “effect map”. When the concealment A stage 2002 starts, the sub CPU 201 executes the determined scenario to advance the character subtraction processing.

  The sub CPU 201 determines the team configuration and the scenario in advance due to the nature that the production of the concealment A stage 2002 is a team battle. The sub CPU 201 sets the scenario in accordance with a combination of the attribute of the team to be played, the degree of expectation of the high-probability game, and the number of times saved. FIG. 138 is an example of a flowchart showing the scenario pre-setting process. The sub CPU 201 repeatedly executes this flowchart at a predetermined timing as a subroutine of the rendering mode determination process (step S205). When the sub CPU 201 determines that the result of the big hit determination process is an 8R big hit, the sub CPU 201 executes the scenario pre-setting process of FIG. 138. According to FIG. 136, it can be seen that the transition from a stage other than the confidential A stage 2002 to the confidential A stage 2002 is triggered by the result of the jackpot determination process being an 8R big hit.

  In this embodiment, the sub CPU 201 executes the scenario pre-setting process of FIG. 138 when the result of the big hit determination process is 8R big hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The scenario pre-setting process of FIG. 138 may be executed when a big hit other than 8R occurs.

  The sub CPU 201 randomly selects a parameter indicating a degree of expectation of a high-probability game in the concealment A stage 2002 (step S300). This parameter includes, for example, four stages A to D, and A is assumed to have the lowest probability of change probability. B has a medium probability expectation, and C has a high probability expected. D corresponds to determination of a high-probability game. The sub CPU 201 records the determined parameters in a predetermined storage area of a work RAM (not shown in FIG. 9).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 randomly selects the appearance mode of the characters in the concealment A stage 2002, that is, the participation mode of the battle, for each of the enemy and ally (step S302). The appearance order of the character ROM selected by the lottery is also recorded in the work RAM 203. Note that, when information about the order of appearance is lost from the work RAM due to a power interruption, the sub CPU 201 sets a one-on-one battle effect between specific characters. At this time, as the “specific character” to be confronted one-on-one, a character that finally confronts one-on-one when a normal effect is executed without power interruption may be set. For example, the mode of the battle effect selected by the lottery is a battle effect between the ally group of “hero character + α” and the enemy group of “hero rival character + β”, and finally the hero character and the hero. When the information is lost due to a power interruption when the rival character is in a one-on-one confrontation mode, the sub CPU 201 does not perform the confrontation with α and β, and the main character and the main character's rival are not performed. Control can be performed so that a confrontation with the character is set.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 selects a combination (2 × 2, 6 × 5, etc.) of the numbers of the ally characters and the enemy characters (step S304). Further, the sub CPU 201 selects the above-described effect map 2102 by lottery based on the attributes of the team of the ally and the team of the enemy. The attributes of the team may be determined by the probability change parameter and the combination, or may be determined by the probability change parameter and the combination and the number of working hours. The sub CPU 201 determines the pattern value by referring to the conversion table based on the attribute, and determines the effect map 2102 based on the pattern value.

  FIG. 139 shows an example of the correspondence between the battle attribute 2100 and the effect map 2102. The sub CPU 201 determines a pattern value (the pattern value is 4 in the example of FIG. 139) based on the battle attribute 2100, and assigns the effect map 2102 to the battle attribute 2100 using the pattern value as a key. A plurality of pattern values may be assigned to the battle attribute 2100. The sub CPU 201 determines a pattern value corresponding to the battle attribute 2100 with reference to the table. The sub CPU 201 increases the pattern value corresponding to the battle attribute 2100 by including the number of times saved in addition to the combination with the expectation degree parameter in determining the pattern value, so that the effect map that can be assigned to the battle attribute 2100 2102 can be varied.

  As shown in FIG. 139, the effect map 2102 is composed of a set of a plurality of small maps 2110, and the small map 2110 uses a predetermined number (for example, 6) of the number of time savings as one unit in the concealment A stage 2002. From the number of enemy and ally characters to be subtracted in the variable display (for example, the number of characters in the range of 1 to 3 for each enemy and ally) and information on which variable display number of the variable display number is to be subtracted from Be composed. “Friend-1” indicates that “1” is subtracted from the friend character. “Friend-0” indicates that the friend character is not subtracted. “Enemy-1” indicates that “1” is subtracted from the enemy character. "Enemy-0" indicates that the enemy character is not subtracted. The number of the small maps 2110 combined with the effect map 2102 differs depending on the specified number of times (the number of time savings).

  FIG. 140 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect map 2102 used for the scenario lottery. In the present embodiment, the effect map 2102 is composed of a plurality of portions, for example, two combinations of the first half map and the second half map, and the sub CPU 201 has the same pattern value, for example, using the pattern value as a key. The first half map and the second half map are respectively selected (step S306, step S308), and they are combined to form an overall effect map 2102. As a result, the sub CPU 201 can form a scenario in which the number of characters according to the combination of the number of persons is uniformly subtracted throughout the time-saving gaming state. In this specification, an effect in which the number of characters is subtracted is referred to as a “subtraction effect”.

  When the sub-CPU 201 completes (or selects) the overall effect map, the small map 2110 in which at least one character is subjected to the subtraction processing among the small maps 2110 included in the overall effect map, Whether to perform the subtraction process (subtraction effect) of the ally character or the enemy character) is determined based on the lottery table (step S310). The sub CPU 201 records the effect map 2102 in the work RAM by combining the information on the number of times and the character in which the subtraction process is performed with the effect map 2102. The sub CPU 201 may switch the lottery table for the small map 2110 according to the contents of the overall effect map. The map is recorded in the work RAM.

  FIG. 140 shows an example in which the probable change parameter, the number of times saved, and the combination of the number of people are combined. The range of this mode is defined as a table for each of low, medium, high, and fixed categories in which the degree of expectation for a high-probability game at the concealment A stage is low. FIG. 140 shows an example in which the former map and the latter map are applied to this mode.

  If there is no pattern in the table that combines the probability change parameter (step S300) and the combination of the number of people (step S302), the sub CPU 201 determines that the combination of the number of people is “D” and the combination of the number of people is a fixed category. In the case other than the given mode (2 × 2, etc.), any one of the variable parameters A to C other than D may be determined by re-lotting. The sub CPU 201 may change the combination of the number of persons by re-lottery, giving priority to the probability change parameter.

  The sub CPU 201 determines whether the specific character A appearing last in the friendly team or the specific character B appearing last in the enemy team is reduced at the end of the number of hours saved in the effect map 2102. May not be included. For example, if the combination of the number of people is 6 × 4 (6 allies, 4 enemies), it is possible to reduce to 5 allies and 3 enemies. The sub CPU 201 causes the characters to appear at the start of the concealment A stage 2002 in accordance with the combination of the number of persons, but the combination of the number of persons and the number of characters to be displayed may not match. For example, when the enemy team is a number including a specific character, the specific character appears in the final variable display without participating in the battle, and the number of friendly characters displayed when entering the concealed A stage 2002 is reduced by one. In addition, the specific character can be excluded from the effect map 2102 as a target of the subtraction processing.

  When ending the process of selecting the small map 2110 (step S310), the sub CPU 201 determines the BGM in the game of the secret A stage 2002 (step S312). Depending on which BGM is selected, the degree of expectation for the high-probability game state in the concealment A stage 2002 is suggested. Thus, the scenario pre-setting process by the sub CPU 201 ends.

  Next, processing for effect determination in the concealment A stage 2002 will be described. In the concealment A stage 2002, subtraction of the enemy or ally character determined before the start of the concealment A stage 2002 (specifically, during the execution of the big hit game), in accordance with the mode of presentation determined for each time saving game. By adjusting and reinforcing the processing scenario, various scenarios can be developed in accordance with the game result at the concealment A stage 2002. In the initially determined scenario, the character subtraction process is performed evenly over the entire number of time reductions, and the sub CPU 201 performs By adjusting the scenario within a range that does not impair the story of the character subtraction process executed without loss, the player can increase the versatility of scenario development while maintaining the outline of the story determined before the start of the concealment A stage 2002. Can be conscious.

  Further, in the concealment A stage 2002, the sub CPU 201 straddles the display of the hold information (startup storage information) and the digestion of the plurality of held startup memories while not displaying the time saving number information on the liquid crystal display device. By executing the scenario, the player can pay attention to the situation in which a series of scenarios are continuously developed during the concealment A stage 2002 without being aware of the hold information and the number of times saved. it can.

  In the present specification, the suspended start memory may be simply referred to as suspension. In addition, the variable display of the identification symbol is performed for the reserved start memory, which is referred to as “reserved exhaustion”. Further, the starting memory based on the winning in the first starting port 5442 and the starting memory based on the winning in the second starting port 440 can be respectively held up to a maximum of four each. The reservation is called a reservation, a second reservation, a third reservation, and a fourth reservation, and the reservation digestion is performed in this order.

  In the concealment A stage 2002, in order to develop the scenario production in a variety of ways in accordance with the mode of the production determined for each time reduction, provisional fluctuations determined for each start memory within the scope of the scenario production target ( The variable display corresponding to one start memory is converted into one or a plurality of blocks, and the effect can be set for each block. In addition, this change is referred to as “temporary change” for the sake of convenience in the sense that this change is different from the variable display of suspension.

  FIG. 141 is an example showing, together with the time sequence, the setting of the provisional change for each of the first to fourth reservations. Assuming that four reservations have been recorded, the sub CPU 201 displays the variable display when the reservation is exhausted. Set the number of temporary fluctuations according to time. For example, when the variable display time is 3.5 seconds, the number of provisional changes: 1, when the variable display time is 7.5 seconds, the provisional change number: 2, and when the variable display time is 11.5 seconds, the provisional change number : 3 is set. In the present embodiment, the selection ratio between the variable display time of 3.5 seconds, the variable display time of 7.5 seconds, and the variable display time of 11.5 seconds is 1: 1: 1: 1. You may.

  According to FIG. 141, when the variable display time of the first hold is 3.5 seconds, the temporary change is set to 4.0 seconds, which is the sum of the temporary change of 3.5 seconds and the interval period (0.5 seconds), When the variable display time of the second hold is 7.5 seconds, the first temporary variation is 4.0 seconds, the second temporary variation is 3.5 seconds, and the interval period (0.5 seconds) is added. If it is set to 4.0 seconds and the variable display time of the third hold is 11.5 seconds, the first and second temporary fluctuations are 4.0 seconds and the third temporary fluctuation is 3.5 seconds. When the variable display time of the fourth hold is 3.5 seconds, the temporary change is 3.5 seconds and the interval period (0. 5 seconds). 5 seconds) is set to 4.0 seconds. The reason that the interval period is included in the provisional fluctuation is to use this period for effect processing. FIG. 141 shows that the number of temporary fluctuations is determined according to the variable display time (variation pattern), but this is an example, and the sub CPU 201 selects an arbitrary number of temporary fluctuations for the fluctuation pattern. You can also. Further, the sub CPU 201 can set the fluctuation time of one temporary fluctuation to a predetermined value, and can also make the fluctuation time of the temporary fluctuation not include the interval period. From the viewpoint of making the player aware that the effect is not an effect, it is preferable to include the interval time in the fluctuation time of the temporary fluctuation.

  Next, a process for determining an effect in the concealment A stage 2002 will be specifically described based on the flowchart in FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is an example of a flowchart showing an effect determination process (concealment A stage 2002) repeatedly executed at predetermined time intervals as a subroutine of the effect mode determination process (step S205). The sub CPU 201 checks whether or not the stage is the secret A stage 2002 with reference to the effect stage flag (step S320). Here, if it is not the confidential A stage 2002, the effect determination processing ends, and if it is the confidential A stage 2002, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the second starting port 440 (step S322). If the sub CPU 201 determines in step S322 that there is no game ball entering the second starting port 440, it ends the effect determination process, and if it determines that there is a game ball entering the second starting port 440, The temporary fluctuation number is determined, selected, or set based on the fluctuation pattern based on the analysis result of the command of the main control board (step S324). The temporary variation number is uniquely determined by the variation pattern (see, for example, FIG. 143), but is not limited thereto, and may be determined to be an arbitrary temporary variation number as described above. FIG. 143 is an example of a fluctuation pattern table. In this example, this variation pattern table is stored in the program ROM 202 mounted on the sub control circuit 200, and the sub CPU 201 refers to the variation pattern table according to the variable display time transmitted from the main CPU 101 as a command. The variation pattern is determined, but is not limited to this. For example, the variation pattern table is stored in a main ROM mounted on the main control circuit 100, and the main CPU determines the variation pattern table and Command may be transmitted to the server.

  Upon selecting the temporary change number, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a scenario effect being executed (step S326). The sub CPU 201 performs a scenario lottery in the range of the number of reservations. The scenario lottery refers to determining, by lottery, which position in the range of the number of reservations to perform the character subtraction process. For example, assuming that there are four reserved start-up memories, the sub CPU 201 determines which one of the first to fourth reservations to perform the character subtraction processing on by lottery. However, in the scenario lottery, in addition to the lottery at which position in the range of the number of reserved characters to perform the character subtraction process, a battle effect between the enemy character and the ally character is performed although the character subtraction process is not performed (a battle effect as a draw). May be included at which position the lottery is performed.

  At the time of this lottery, the sub CPU 201 refers to the effect map 2102 and checks whether or not the character subtraction is recorded in the small map 2110 covering the number of times of the first to fourth reservations. If it is determined that the character is recorded, the character subtraction processing is performed within the range of the number of reserved characters. If it is determined that the character subtraction is not recorded, the character subtraction processing is not performed. The sub CPU 201 determines that there is a scenario effect being executed in step S326 until the variable display of the first hold to the fourth hold targeted for the scenario lottery ends. When the variable display of the first hold to the fourth hold targeted for the scenario effect ends, the sub CPU 201 determines in step S326 that there is no scenario effect during the execution of the scenario, and thereafter, the first hold to the fourth hold is performed. It is determined whether the start memory is held in any of them (step S328).

  If the sub CPU 201 determines in step S328 that the start memory is held in any one of the first to fourth holds, the sub CPU 201 performs a scenario lottery for the held start memory. As one means for adjusting the character subtraction processing position according to the determined effect pattern, it is determined whether or not there is a start memory in which the reach fluctuation effect is recorded in the held start memories. (Step S330). If the sub CPU 201 determines in step S330 that there is a start memory in which the reach variation effect has been recorded, the sub CPU 201 determines up to the start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded as a scenario lottery target (step S332). For example, even if the starting memory is held in all of the first to fourth holdings, if the starting memory in which the reach fluctuation effect is recorded is held in the third holding, the sub CPU 201 sets the first memory to the first holding. The start-up memory of the hold to the third hold is determined as a scenario lottery target (step S332), and the start-up memory held in the fourth hold is not set as a scenario lottery target. Further, for example, when a plurality of start memories in which the reach fluctuation effects are recorded are held, for example, a second hold and a fourth hold, the hold is released first (variable display is performed first). The start memory up to the hold (the first hold and the second hold start memory) is determined as a scenario lottery target (step S332), and the start memory held in the third hold and the fourth hold is not set as the scenario lottery target. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S330 that there is no start memory in which the reach variation effect has been recorded, the sub CPU 201 determines all of the held start memories as scenario lottery targets (step S334). If it is determined in step S330 that there is no start memory in which the reach variation effect has been recorded in the suspended start memories, control such as to prevent the subtraction effect of the character and the reach variation effect from overlapping is performed. Since it is unnecessary, the control load is smaller than in the case where it is determined in step S330 that the held start memory in which the reach fluctuation effect is recorded is included in the held start memory. ,

  The sub CPU 201 executes the processing from step S328 as a scenario lottery on the start memory (for entering the ball into the second start port 440) held in the first hold to the fourth hold at the time when the scenario effect being executed is completed. This is performed on the basis of the start-up memory that has been suspended. In other words, if there is a running scenario effect, the next scenario lottery is not performed, but when the running scenario effect ends, one or more start-ups held in the first hold to the fourth hold at that time are performed. Since the scenario lottery is performed for storage, in the concealment A stage 2002, the scenario effect is repeatedly executed without interruption as long as the start storage is held in any one of the first to fourth hold. . As a result, it is possible to keep the player from being aware of the effect in the starting memory unit and to be interested in the scenario effect, and to maintain the player's expectation for a relatively long time. Become.

  In this example, the sub CPU 201 does not perform the next scenario lottery when there is a running scenario effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If at least one or more start-up memories are held in the hold to the fourth hold, a scenario lottery may be performed.

  The reason why the sub CPU 201 sets the start memory up to the hold including the reach variation effect as a target of the scenario lottery, and does not set the hold start memory after the reach variation effect as the target of the lottery is because the character is not included in the reach change effect. This is because even if the subtraction process is performed, the player's interest in the match result between the characters is reduced. As described above, the sub CPU 201 can adjust the subtraction processing position of the character based on the effect of the concealment A stage 2002.

  The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the second starting port 440 in step S322, and if it is determined that a game ball has entered the second starting port 440, the sub CPU 201 executes the processing in step S324 and thereafter. If it is determined that a game ball has entered the first starting port 5442 instead of the second starting port 440, the game is suspended based on the ball entering the first starting port 5442. A scenario lottery is performed with only one starting memory. In this case, a plurality of temporary fluctuations may or may not be set for one start memory held based on the ball entering the first start port 5442. Then, if it is determined in the scenario pre-setting process that the subtraction effect is to be performed in the variable display of the starting memory held based on the ball entering the first starting port 5442, the first starting port 5442 is set. The subtraction effect may be performed in the variable display of the starting memory held based on the entering ball. However, a variable display (or a temporary change set for the one start memory) for one of the start memories held based on the ball entering the first start port 5442, and The subtraction effect is not performed over the temporary change set for the starting memory held based on the ball entering the second starting port 440 that is exhausted. Further, when the starting memory is suspended based on the ball entering the first starting port 5442, the sub CPU 201 performs the scenario lottery only when the result of the big hit determination processing is a big hit, and when the hit is not a big hit, The control may be such that the identification symbol is variably displayed only on the first special symbol display unit 73 or the screen edge of the liquid crystal display device 16 without selecting the effect.

  The sub CPU 201 processes the holding of the scenario lottery range as an effect adjustment target, such as determining a character subtraction processing position for each holding range that is the target of the scenario lottery. Therefore, the sub CPU 201 checks the expected degree of the effect in the last hold of the scenario lottery range, for example, the heat of the effect (step S336), and reflects the result in the hold effect belonging to the running scenario. Good. For example, when the sub CPU 201 determines the heat of the effect for the last hold in the range of the scenario lottery, the prefetching effect or the continuous announcement effect according to the heat of the effect may be applied to the effect of the hold for the scenario lottery.

  After the above processing, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for assigning an effect such as a character subtraction process effect to provisional fluctuations for the effect of holding the scenario lottery target. Therefore, the sub CPU 201 refers to the effect map 2102 to determine the number of provisional changes required for the character subtraction processing, and stores the scenario in the start storage of the lottery target (for example, the scenario is held in the first hold to the fourth hold). With respect to the start memory, it is determined whether or not there is a start memory for performing the subtraction process (step S338).

  If the sub CPU 201 determines in step S338 that there is a start memory in which the subtraction process is performed within the range of the scenario lottery target, the sub CPU 201 counts the characters to be subjected to the subtraction process separately for the enemy and the ally (step S340). Next, when the number of subtraction processes for enemy and ally is two or more (step S342: Y), the sub CPU 201 records the order of the subtraction process for two or more characters (step S344). The order between the enemy and friend characters may be determined in the effect map 2102 or may be determined by lottery.

  Next, as a result of the determination of the scenario lottery target (step S332 and step S334), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a scenario lottery target overlapped in the reach variation effect and the effect of the subtraction process in the hold to be the scenario lottery target. It is determined with reference to the effect map 2102 (step S346). Based on the result, the sub CPU 201 can determine the number of provisional fluctuations that can be used for the reach precursor fluctuation, or perform effect adjustment processing such as adjusting the position of the provisional fluctuation where the subtraction processing is performed.

  FIG. 145 and FIG. 146 are diagrams illustrating an example of the start storage held in the first to fourth holdings. FIG. 145 shows that the start-up memory is held in all of the first to fourth holds, that no subtraction process or reach variation effect is executed in the first and fourth holds, and that the enemy character is subtracted in the second hold. This indicates that a process (a process of subtracting 1 from the number of enemy characters) is performed, and that a reach variation effect is performed in the third hold. FIG. 146 shows that the start-up memory is held in all of the first to fourth holds, that no subtraction process or reach effect is performed in the first, second, and fourth holds, and that the enemy is in the third hold. This shows that the character subtraction process (the process of subtracting 1 from the number of enemy characters) and the reach variation effect are performed in an overlapping manner. If the sub CPU 201 determines in step S346 that the reach variation effect and the effect of the subtraction process overlap, the sub CPU 201 sets an overlap flag in the work RAM area (step S348).

  When confirming the setting of the overlap flag, when the character to be subtracted is an enemy character, the sub CPU 201 allows overlapping execution of the reach variation effect and the subtraction process, and for example, reaches the effect of the subtraction process. Execute in a floating production. On the other hand, although the sub CPU 201 confirms the setting of the overlap flag, if the character to be subtracted is a friend character, performing an effect in which the ally character is defeated in the reach variation effect is an expectation for the reach variation effect. Assuming that the degree is unnecessarily lowered, overlapping execution of the reach variation effect and the subtraction process is not allowed, and the effect of the subtraction process is not executed in the reach variation effect. At this time, it does not prevent the subtraction process production of the ally character from being executed with the temporary fluctuation immediately before the reach fluctuation production, but the compensated production such as attacking by losing the ally character who lost is revived. What is necessary is just to make it perform in a fluctuation effect. Alternatively, the sub CPU 201 may assign the ally character subtraction processing to temporary fluctuations that are separated by a predetermined number from the reach fluctuation effect within the range of holding the scenario lottery. When the character to be subtracted is an ally character, instead of permitting the overlapping execution of the reach variation effect and the subtraction process, the overlap execution of the reach variation effect and the subtraction process is allowed, When the variation effect and the subtraction process overlap, the subtraction process may be reassigned to another temporary variation.

  The sub CPU 201 assigns the reach indication effect to the provisional change, and includes the hold of the scenario lottery target (including the hold where the reach change effect and the subtraction process are overlapped (for example, the third hold in FIG. 146)). For example, it is possible to use the temporary fluctuation of the first reservation and the second reservation in FIG. 146 as the one that can be assigned the reach indication effect (step S350). This is because the effect of the subtraction process of the enemy character is executed in the reach variation effect. That is, the sub CPU 201 can use [(total number of temporary fluctuations to be subject to scenario lottery)-(subtraction processing number-1)] as the number of temporary fluctuations that can be used for the reach indication effect. When the subtraction process is performed on the teammate character, the sub CPU 201 executes the later-described step S352 without executing the step S350.

  If the sub CPU 201 determines in step S346 that the reach variation effect and the effect of the subtraction process do not overlap, the process proceeds to step S352 without setting the overlap flag. The sub-CPU 201 removes the number of temporary fluctuations to which the effect of the subtraction processing of the character (not limited to the enemy or ally) is assigned from the total number of temporary fluctuations determined for the hold to be subjected to the scenario lottery, and (Residual change) can be used for the reach prediction effect. Here, the sub CPU 201 performs the reach predictive effect only when the remaining provisional change number is determined to be 0 or more, and determines that the reach predictive effect is not performed when the remaining provisional change number is 0, The control process can be made smoother, and the effect that the reach fluctuation effect is expected by the reach predictive effect can be expected. When the remaining provisional change number is 1, it may be determined that the reach predictor is not performed, or it may be determined whether or not the reach predictor can be executed up to once.

  The starting memory held in the range of the scenario lottery target does not include the starting memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded, and the starting memory next to the last starting memory of the scenario lottery target is used. In the case of the reach fluctuation effect, the next start memory is not a scenario lottery target, but the sub CPU 201 sets the temporary fluctuation set for the last start memory of the scenario lottery target as a reach predictive effect. May be assigned to perform the reach fluctuation effect in the variable display of the start memory stored in the next hold.

  The sub CPU 201 determines the number of executions of the reach indication effect, and determines the number of executions of the determined reach indication effect from the total number of temporary fluctuations determined for the scenario lottery target suspension. The fluctuation may be used for the effect of the character subtraction processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 147, the sub CPU 201 selects the effect of the reach precursor depending on whether or not the duplication flag is set. More specifically, in step S354, the sub CPU 201 checks whether or not there is a duplicate flag set. Gives the player the expectation of being defeated in the reach fluctuation production. Here, the specific effect is an effect that gives the player a great sense of expectation. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S354 that there is no overlap flag set, the reach predictive effect is determined to be an effect in which the expectation that can be given to the player is smaller than the specific effect (step S358). The sub CPU 201 may select the reach indication effect from a plurality of effects set in the table. When performing the reach predictive effect a plurality of times within the range of the scenario effect target, the sub CPU 201 changes the table so that the same effect does not continue. However, the specific effect may be continuous.

  Next, in step S350 or step S352, the sub CPU 201 selects a provisional change number to be used as a reach precursor from the counted provisional change numbers (step S360). For example, the sub CPU 201 may change the table and select the number of provisional changes because the required number of provisional changes varies depending on the reach indication effect content. The sub CPU 201 selects the temporary fluctuations used for the reach indication effect from the temporary fluctuations in the digestion order that are late in the temporary fluctuations of the scenario lottery target suspension. This makes it possible to arrange the reach indication effect at a position close to the reach fluctuation effect. When “0 fluctuation” is selected, the sub CPU 201 does not perform the reach predictive effect without assigning the reach predictive effect to the temporary change. The concept of “0 fluctuation” includes both the temporary fluctuation of 0 and the case where the start memory is not suspended in any of the first to fourth reservations. That is, the sub CPU 201 assigns the reach predictive effect to the provisional change regardless of whether the 0 provisional change is selected and the case where the starting memory is not reserved in any of the first to fourth reservations. There is no sign of reach. If there is no reach fluctuation effect in the starting memory of the scenario lottery target, the reach predictive effect is a gaseous reach predictive effect. When the start-up memory is not held in any of the first to fourth holdings, the gaseous reach indication effect is not performed.

  By the way, as described above, if the start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded is not held in any of the first to fourth holds, the sub CPU 201 uses all of the held start memories for the scenario lottery. It is decided to be the target. However, since the concealment A stage 2002 is in a time-saving game state, the start memory is often held in all of the first to fourth holds when determining the target of the scenario lottery. Therefore, if the player knows that the current scenario production is for four start memories, it is possible that the reach variation production is not included in the scope of the current scenario production at that time. There is a risk that the player will be perceived to be expensive and it will be difficult to maintain expectations. Therefore, when determining the target of the scenario lottery, if there is no start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded in any of the first to fourth reservations, the number of start memories to be subjected to the scenario lottery is different each time. For example, by randomly determining by lottery, it is difficult to detect that the reach fluctuation effect is not included in the target range of the current scenario effect. In particular, even if the player is aware that the reach fluctuation effect is not likely to be included in the target range of this scenario production, it may become extremely unpleasant if the gaseous reach prediction effect is performed . However, by making it difficult to detect that the reach variation effect is not included in the target range of this scenario production, the gaseous reach predictive production will maintain the player's expectation and perform an effective production be able to.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the temporary change number used for the reach indication effect is greater than 0 (step S362). Are divided into blocks, and a block pattern to which a reach indication effect is assigned is selected (step S364). Next, the sub CPU 201 allocates the reach predictive effect to the blocks to which the reach predictive effect can be assigned, of the selected block patterns (step S366). For example, assuming that the number of provisional changes that can be used for the reach predictor is 3, and that the reach predictor effect requires two provisional changes, the sub CPU 201 blocks the three provisional changes and (1) 1 block + 1 block A pattern of +1 block and a pattern of (2) 1 block + 2 blocks are formed. The sub CPU 201 can select the pattern (2) and assign a reach indication effect to two blocks. FIG. 148 shows an embodiment in which the three temporary fluctuations are blocked.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 149, if the sub CPU 201 determines in step S368 that the effect of the subtraction process is to be performed, the sub CPU 201 determines in which temporary variation block the subtraction process effect is to be performed, for example, by random lottery (step S368). S370). Next, the sub CPU 201 determines, by lottery or the like, a provisional change to which the effect of the subtraction process is to be assigned, from among the provisional changes to which the reach indication effect is not assigned among the pending provisional changes of the scenario lottery target (step S372). If there is an order of the subtraction processing for a plurality of characters (step S342), the temporary variation of the subtraction processing effect is determined so as to follow this order. The following is a description using an example.

  For example, by determining the scenario lottery target (step S332, step S334), the start memory in which the subtraction processing of the ally character is recorded and the start memory in which the subtraction processing of the enemy character is recorded within the range of the scenario lottery target. Are held in this order. Then, in step S370, it is assumed that the sub CPU 201 determines the subtraction process of the enemy character to be a medium attack effect for a relatively long time and the subtraction process of the ally character to be a relatively short attack effect. At this time, the sub CPU 201 assigns the medium attack effect to two temporary changes, assigns the weak attack effect to one temporary change, and performs these temporary changes so that the former temporary change is digested earlier than the latter temporary change. The location of the variation can be determined. In this way, the sub CPU 201 assigns a subtraction effect to, for example, one or a plurality of temporary fluctuations according to the effect content of the subtraction process.

  Here, an example in which the effect of one subtraction process is assigned to the temporary fluctuation will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 150 is an example of a temporary change sequence in a state where the first to third reservations are targeted for scenario lottery. As for the start memory stored in the first hold, since the fluctuation time is 3.5 seconds, the number of provisional fluctuations to be set is one (# 1). Since the variable display time of the start memory stored in the second hold is 11.5 seconds, the number of provisional changes set is three (# 2 to # 4). As for the start memory stored in the third hold, the variable display time is “11.5 seconds + reach fluctuation effect”, so the number of provisional fluctuations set is three (# 5 to # 7). Regarding the start memory stored in the third hold, since the reach fluctuation effect is performed when the variable display is performed, the target of the scenario lottery is the start memory held in the first hold to the third hold. . In the example of FIG. 149, the number of subtraction processes in the effect map 2102 determined before the start of the concealment A stage 2002 (specifically, during the execution of the big hit game) is stored in the first hold. Once (weak attack effect), 0 in the start memory held in the second hold, and twice in the start memory held in the third hold (medium attack effect, once in the order of weak attack effect, a total of 2 times) Times) is shown.

  In the example shown in FIG. 150, since the starting memories held in the first to third holdings are the targets of the scenario lottery, the sub CPU 201 sets the weak attacking effect, the medium attacking effect, and the weak attacking effect in this order. Redetermine the timing of the performance. In the example shown in FIG. 150, the weak attack effect recorded in the starting memory held in the first hold is assigned to the temporary fluctuation # 2, and the medium attack effect recorded in the starting memory held in the second hold. Are allocated to the blocked # 4 temporary fluctuation and # 5 temporary fluctuation, and the weak attack effect recorded in the starting memory held in the third hold is allocated to the # 6 temporary fluctuation. In this manner, the subtraction effect of the character is performed with respect to the temporary fluctuation set for one start memory and the start memory that is consumed next to the one start memory, regardless of the reserved start memory unit. It may straddle the set temporary fluctuation. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode without being constrained by one game result (lottery result). In addition, since the display effect can be executed without making the player aware of the variable display in the start storage unit, it is difficult for the player to grasp the number of times of saving time. In addition, in the concealment A stage 2002, an effect mode to be performed during execution of the temporary fluctuation (blocked) divided into predetermined units is determined to indicate the degree of expectation of the high probability gaming state. Therefore, the player's consciousness can be directed to the subtraction effect rather than the remaining number of hours saved, and it is possible to further suppress the decrease in interest.

  In the example shown in FIG. 150, all three subtraction effects recorded in the start memory held in the first to third holds are executed in any of the temporary fluctuations (# 1 to # 7). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 201 may control the last subtraction effect to be executed in the reach variation.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines an effect for the temporary fluctuation to which no effect is assigned (step S374). FIG. 151 is an example of a sequence of the temporary change in a state where the first to fourth reservations (for example, see FIG. 141) are the target of the scenario lottery. The effect of the subtraction process is assigned to the temporary variations # 2 and # 4, the reach predictive effect is assigned to the temporary variation # 7, and the temporary variations # 1, # 3, # 5, and # 6 to which no effect is assigned, for example, In addition, it is possible to arrange a single-shot effect in which the impression on the player is weaker than the subtraction effect and the reach effect effect. The contents of the effects arranged in the temporary fluctuations # 1, # 3, # 5, and # 6 and the temporary fluctuations to which the effects are allocated may be determined by lottery. The single effect is placed on the temporary fluctuation side with a lower number than the reach predictive effect. By assigning an effect to all the temporary fluctuations in the sequence, the execution position of the subtraction processing is determined. The number of provisional changes to be assigned varies depending on the content of the effect. The sub CPU 201 generates effect designation information including information of a sequence in which effects are assigned to all temporary fluctuations.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a reach variation effect exists in the hold of the scenario lottery target (step S376), and determines a reach effect when the reach change effect exists in the hold of the scenario lottery target (step S378). Then, the effect determination processing ends. The sub CPU 201 can select a reach effect with reference to the result of the subtraction process, for example. You can select a reach effect in which the characters remaining in the battle appear.

  Further, the sub-CPU 201 calculates the combination of the number of teammate characters and the number of remaining teammates of the teammate character with respect to the start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded, and refers to the combination of the teammates and / or the number of reduced working hours (or Based on the number of times saved, the presence or absence of execution of the reach effect and the mode of the reach variation effect can be set. For example, if the remaining number of people is less than 2 × 2 and the suspension is other than the final rotation of the prescribed number of revolutions, the special mode reach (SP reach) is executed even if the big hit determination result is a big hit. Instead, for example, in the battle effect, the boss of the enemy group may be defeated to execute the big hit gaming state. On the other hand, when the remaining number of people is 1 × 1 and the suspension is the final variable display with the prescribed number of working hours, the sub CPU 201 may execute a special SP reach effect.

  In addition, when the target range of the scenario effect includes a start memory in which the last variable display is performed in the concealment A stage 2002 (for example, when the number of times of saving time is 48, the 48th variable display in the time saving game state) Is performed), if the reach variation effect and the jackpot effect are not performed in the final variable display of the time-saving gaming state, the character is determined so that the battle effect wins or loses in the final variable display. A subtractive effect may be performed. In this case, it is not an impression that the concealment A stage 2002 has been completed because the time-saving game state has reached the specified number of times (it has been disclosed whether or not the game is in the high-probability game state). The impression that the stage 2002 has ended can be given to the player.

  The sub CPU 201 determines the holding map of the target of the scenario lottery (FIG. 142: S332, S334), before the start of the concealment A stage 2002 (specifically, during the execution of the big hit game). The number of times that the subtraction process in 2102 is executed can be moved within a range of ± 3 according to the fluctuation pattern of the concealment A stage 2002. For example, when it is determined that the subtraction process is to be performed when the time reduction rotation is 8 in the calculation map, the subtraction process can move within the range of 5 to 11 time reductions. More specifically, when the starting memory with the number of savings of 8 is held in the fourth hold, the starting memory with the number of savings of 8 can be moved in the range of 5 to 8, and the starting memory with the number of savings of 8 is held in the first hold. At times, it is possible to move within the range of 8 to 11 times. Therefore, the sub CPU 201 changes the execution timing of the subtraction process fluidly according to the development of the game in the concealment A stage 2002, thereby increasing the variation of the effect and performing the subtraction process of the character accompanying the battle between the character teams. It can be executed reliably.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a scenario effect being executed in step S326, the sub CPU 201 does not draw a new scenario effect until the scenario effect created by lottery ends. Therefore, the sub CPU 201 prefetches, for example, a hold within the range of the scenario effect being executed to make the scenario effect being executed diversified, and converts this into an effect executed during the variable display of the hold digestion. May be applied. For example, if the reach fluctuation effect is recorded in the start memory of the scenario effect object being executed, the sub CPU 201 performs a prefetch lottery for the start memory up to the reach fluctuation effect. If there is no reach fluctuation effect, a suggestion effect indicating the existence of a specific fluctuation pattern (reach fluctuation effect) is applied to the effect being executed. Note that the sub CPU 201 does not perform the suggestion effect when there is no suspension.

  Further, the sub CPU 201 does not prefetch the start memory held at the time of the start winning and applies it to the prefetch effect at the time of the prize, but also applies this to the effect executed during the fluctuation of the hold. Good. For example, the sub CPU 201 pre-reads the effect of the fourth hold when the start memory is held in the fourth hold due to the start winning while executing the scenario effect about the first hold to the third hold, and for example, The look-ahead effect of the fourth hold can be superimposed on the effect of the second hold or / and the third hold.

  Also, in the concealment A stage 2002, although the holding is not shown on the liquid crystal screen, there is no look-ahead effect at the time of the start winning, but the hold look-ahead effect set at the time of the start winning is from the start winning to the display of the effect. Since it does not take much time, the effect with few processing branches must be a simple process of changing the reserved color, for example. On the other hand, the sub CPU 201 performs a look-ahead effect of the start memory held in the fourth hold by using a part or all of the data of the look-ahead effect in the first to third holds (for example, data of the scenario effect). Can reduce the control load. As a result, the look-ahead effect of the start-up memory held in the fourth hold can be varied in comparison with a monotonous one that only changes the hold color. Can be realized as

  FIG. 152 is an example of a flowchart showing a modified example when it is determined in step S326 (see FIG. 142) that there is a scenario effect being executed. As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 152, when the sub CPU 201 determines in step S326 that there is a scenario effect being executed, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the game ball has won the second starting port 440 (step S400). When it is determined that the ball has won the second starting port 440, it is determined whether or not there is a reach fluctuation effect in the starting memory of the scenario object being executed (step S402). If the sub CPU 201 determines in step S402 that there is a start memory in which the reach fluctuation effect is recorded in the target range of the scenario effect being executed, the start memory with a prize later than the start memory in which the reach fluctuation effect is recorded is prefetched. (Step S404). If the sub CPU 201 determines in step S402 that there is no start memory in which the reach variation effect has been recorded in the target range of the scenario effect being executed, it determines whether or not the prefetch effect has already been executed (step S406). If the pre-reading effect is already being executed, the already-executed pre-reading effect is continued (step S408). A prefetch effect is selected for all start memories (step S410).

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, unlike the conventional pachinko machine in which an effect is performed for each start memory, the number of executions of one or more temporary fluctuations for each held start memory is different. Is determined, a variable display for one start memory is displayed, but it looks as if the variable display is performed for a plurality of start memories. Moreover, the provisional variation determined for each start memory is divided into a predetermined unit using a plurality of temporary variations, regardless of the unit of the startup memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during the provisional change blocked in the predetermined unit is determined. Further, as described above, a part of the plurality of temporary fluctuations determined for one start memory and the plurality of temporary fluctuations determined for another start memory in which the variable display is performed next to the one start memory. It is possible that an effect mode that spans a part of the temporary fluctuation may be determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode without being affected by one game result. Further, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the unit of the start memory, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. In this way, the effect mode is determined regardless of the unit of the start memory, so that it is also possible to determine the effect mode so as to extend over a plurality of start memories. Further, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the unit of the start memory, and it is possible to provide a novel game in which it is difficult to make the player aware of the game result for each start memory.

  In addition, in a gaming machine controlled to a specific game state (a time-saving game state or a high-probability game state) that is advantageous to a player separately from the big hit game state, if the period controlled in the specific game state is lengthened, the big hit determination There is a possibility that the winning probability in the processing must be lowered, and the interest may decrease. On the other hand, if the period during which the game is controlled to the specific game state is shortened, the player may be disadvantaged, and in any case, interest may be reduced. In this regard, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since one or a plurality of temporary fluctuations are set for each start memory, it is difficult for the player to recognize such suppression while suppressing the number of times of working hours. In addition, since the winning probability in the jackpot determination can be made appropriate, it is possible to reduce a disadvantage that can be given to the player, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Also, as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, by setting one or a plurality of temporary fluctuations for each start memory, the player can know the period of the concealment A stage 2002, that is, the end timing of the time-saving gaming state. Can be harder to do. That is, the number of working hours is determined in advance, for example, at the time of winning, and in the conventional pachinko machine, even if the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is concealed as to whether or not the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, without winning, It has been disclosed whether or not the game is in a high-probability game state when a certain number of time savings is exhausted. However, by making it difficult for the player to grasp the period of the concealment A-stage 2002 as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it becomes difficult to grasp the number of time savings that have been consumed, and it is possible to maintain the expectation. Become. Moreover, during the concealment A stage 2002, the subtraction effect of the character is performed as an index indicating the degree of expectation of the high-probability gaming state. Rather, it can be directed to the subtractive effect of the character, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to making it difficult to grasp the end timing of the concealment A stage 2002 by setting one or a plurality of temporary fluctuations for each start memory, the confidential A stage 2002 , A subtraction effect of a character that can be an index of whether or not the game is in a high-probability gaming state is performed. The scenario of this subtraction production is such that in the scenario production including the last round of the time reduction, the high-probability game state is determined when the enemy group is completely eliminated, and the low-probability game state is determined when the ally group is completely eliminated. The outline is decided before it becomes. For this reason, it is not an effect of disclosing whether or not the game state is a high-probability game when a certain number of time savings is exhausted as in the conventional pachinko gaming machine 1, but rather a high probability when the winning or losing of the battle effect is settled. It is possible to execute an effect of disclosing whether or not the game state is being played.

  Next, the change effect of the BGM will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the big hit game state ends and the confidential A stage 2002 thereafter enters, the timing at which the concealed A stage 2002 ends (for example, the time reduction of a specified number of times (for example, 48 times)) At the timing of digestion, whether the game is in the high-probability game state or the low-probability state is disclosed based on the final result of the battle effect described above. When the disclosed result is the high-probability game state, the process proceeds to the high-accuracy stage 2004 (when the disclosed result is the low-probability game state, the process proceeds to the normal stage 2000).

  The sub CPU 201 performs a BGM change lottery during the jackpot game state in which the probability change flag is turned on and during the concealment A stage 2002 when the concealed game state is the high-probability game state. That is, when the big hit in which the probability change flag is turned on is won, the BGM change lottery is performed twice from the start of the big hit game state to the transition to the high-precision stage 2004 via the concealed A stage 2002. Become. However, when the BGM change lottery performed in the big hit game state is won, the sub CPU 201 does not perform the BGM change lottery in the subsequent concealment A stage 2002.

  When the BGM change lottery is won, the sub CPU 201 outputs a highly-confirmed confirmed BGM that is determined to be in the high-probability gaming state from the speaker 24 through the audio control circuit 205. Therefore, when moving from the confidential A stage 2002 to the high-accuracy stage 2004, the high-accuracy confirmed BGM is not always output. Highly certain BGM is not output.

  Although the sub CPU 201 controls to output a highly-confirmed confirmed BGM in response to winning in the BGM change lottery, the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in response to winning in the BGM change lottery Do not change For this reason, even if the highly-determined BGM is output, the flow of the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 remains unchanged.

  When the sub CPU 201 wins the BGM change lottery, the sub CPU 201 also determines the timing of outputting the highly-determined BGM (that is, the timing of changing the normal BGM to the highly-determined BGM). The timing of outputting the highly-determined confirmed BGM is, for example, during the big hit game state or during the concealment A stage 2002.

  As a result of winning the BGM change lottery performed in the big hit gaming state, when the high-precision confirmed BGM is output during the big hit gaming state, the sub CPU 201 also ends when the big hit gaming state ends and shifts to the confidential A stage 2002. Then, control is performed so that the highly-confirmed confirmed BGM is output. However, for the effect image displayed on liquid crystal display device 16, sub CPU 201 controls such that the effect image normally displayed on concealment A stage 2002 is displayed.

  As a result of winning the BGM change lottery performed in the big hit game state, when outputting the highly certain confirmed BGM during the secret A stage 2002, the sub CPU 201 determines at which timing of the secret A stage 2002 to output the big hit game state. Predetermined during. First, the output timing of the highly-accurate confirmed BGM is determined at regular intervals of the number of time savings, and a random lottery is further performed within the range of the determined number of time savings. More specifically, for example, when the number of working hours is 48, 1 to 6, 7 to 12, 13 to 18, 19 to 24, 25 to 30, 31 to 36, 37 to 42, 43 Predetermine to any of the groups of ~ 48 times. Next, it is determined in advance which of the determined groups is to output the highly-determined BGM. For example, when the group is determined to be a group of 13 to 18 times, the sub CPU 201 predetermines the timing of outputting the highly-determined BGM within the range of 13 to 18 times. For example, if it is determined to be 16 times, the sub CPU 201 outputs a highly-confirmed confirmed BGM in the variable display of the 16th time saving.

  When the start memory is suspended in the concealment A stage 2002, the sub CPU 201 sets a temporary change for each start memory as described above. The sub CPU 201 also determines which temporary variation to output the high-accuracy confirmed BGM as in the case of the character subtraction effect. For example, when the timing of outputting the highly-confirmed confirmed BGM is determined in advance at the 16th time saving time, the sub CPU 201 determines that all or some of the temporary fluctuations set for the startup memory held at the 16th time saving. To output a highly-determined BGM. At this time, as in the case of the medium attack production as the subtraction production of the character, the high certainty confirmed BGM stores the temporary fluctuation set for one start memory and the start memory that is consumed next to the one start memory. It may be executed over the temporary fluctuation set for the target. As described above, the highly-determined BGM can also be executed regardless of the variable display in the unit of the start memory, and the variable display in the unit of the start memory can be further made invisible to the player. .

[Read-ahead effect selection process (high-precision stage)]
Next, the look-ahead effect selection process in the high-accuracy stage 2004 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 153 is an example of a flowchart showing the prefetching effect selection process (high-accuracy stage 2004).

  First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the current effect state is the high-accuracy stage 2004 (step S500 in FIG. 153). If it is determined that the current production state is the high-accuracy stage 2004 (YES in step S500), sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a start winning (a winning in first starting opening 5442 or second starting opening 440). A determination is made (step S502). If it is determined that there is a start winning (YES in step S502), the sub CPU 201 determines which system to perform an effect on the held start memory (step S504). The effects include, for example, a reach effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, a lamp effect, a so-called movable effect of a character, a pseudo lotus effect, a change in a reserved image, and a look-ahead effect described later.

  In step S506, it is determined whether the effect selected in the lottery in step S504 is a prefetch effect (step S506 in FIG. 153). The look-ahead effect in the present embodiment refers to a mode in which an effect related to a start memory held during the high-accuracy stage 2004 and a start memory (including a plurality of start memories) winning before the start memory is performed. It is. The details of the look-ahead effect will be described later. If it is determined that a prefetch effect is to be performed (YES in step S506), a prefetch effect section determination process is performed (step S508). Here, "it is determined that a prefetch effect is to be performed" means that a lottery in which a prefetch effect is performed has been won.

  Here, the prefetch effect section determination processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 154 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pattern when determining a section in which a prefetch effect is performed. Here, the upper frame of FIG. 154 (A) indicates a reserved frame, and numerals 1 to 4 in the reserved frame indicate first to fourth reserved. The lower frame located below the reservation frame indicates an effect type frame, and describes what effect is to be performed in each reservation. In the present embodiment, the fourth hold is a prize during the high-accuracy stage 2004 (YES in step S502 in FIG. 153) and a hold determined to perform the prefetching effect (YES in step S506 in FIG. 153). is there. Then, in the first hold, it is determined to perform the black effect (FIG. 154 (A)). The black effect is, for example, an effect in which the entire screen is instantaneously darkened as if the black ink is spilled on the screen on the liquid crystal display device 16 instantaneously, or "opportunity" or "chance" "And other characters that can be written with a brush.

  Since the prefetching effect section determination processing is performed by lot for all the stored start memories, even in the present embodiment, as long as the start memories are held in the first to fourth holds, all of these start memories are held. It can be done in memory. However, in the present embodiment, since it is determined that the black effect is already performed in the first hold, in this case, the corresponding section must not be included in the target section determined in the pre-reading effect section determination process. It may be. In addition, the start memory held next to the start memory for which the black effect is determined to be performed (corresponding to the second hold in FIG. 154 (B)) is also a target section determined in the prefetch effect section determination processing. Not included. This is because the black effect performed in the variable display of the start memory stored as the first hold is an effect that may cause the player to have an expectation by itself, and is stored as the first hold. It is preferable to clearly separate the black effect performed by the variable display of the start memory from being performed and the look-ahead effect related to the start memory of the fourth hold (a look-ahead effect performed by the third hold and the fourth hold). Because. In other words, the black effect is performed in the first hold, and no special effect is performed in the second hold, so that the look-ahead effect related to the fourth hold (the effect performed in the third hold and the fourth hold) is performed. This can have the effect of increasing expectations and fun.

  In addition, if the look-ahead effect related to the fourth hold including the black effect performed in the first hold is performed, that is, if the look-ahead effect is performed in the section from the first hold to the fourth hold, a plurality of Are produced in succession, it is possible to have a sense of expectation.On the other hand, whether these series of productions are performed in different categories continuously, There is a disadvantage that it is difficult to determine whether or not it is performed, and on the contrary there is a possibility that the fun as a pre-reading effect may be reduced.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (C), when it is determined that the sections in which the prefetch effect is to be performed are the third hold and the fourth hold (step S508 in FIG. 153), an effect scenario to be performed with these holds is set. (Step S510 in FIG. 154). In the production scenario, a lottery lottery is performed for each hold, and a production scenario is set only for the hold that has won the lottery. In the present embodiment, for example, when the lottery in the large category is won for the third hold (see the third hold in FIG. 154 (D)), the effect scenario is set to the third hold, and the fourth hold is set to the fourth hold. An effect based on the scenario determined in the 3 suspension will be performed.

  The effect scenarios include effects that affect the expansion of the hold (corresponding to the fourth hold in the present embodiment) by expanding the look-ahead, and effects that do not affect the expansion of the hold by expanding the look-ahead. The effect of the development of the pre-reading affects the development of the reservation means that an effect similar to the pre-reading effect is also performed in the reservation, for example, the above-described black ink production and the like. The effect that does not affect the development by the development of the pre-reading corresponds to, for example, an effect that is performed only on the hold, such as a movable effect of an accessory. For an effect that affects the development due to the development of the prefetch, a scenario lottery is performed for a reservation before the reservation (corresponding to a third reservation in the present embodiment). On the other hand, for an effect that does not affect the development by the development of the pre-reading, a scenario lottery is performed including the suspension (corresponding to the fourth suspension in the present embodiment).

  When an effect scenario is set for the hold that has been won in the large division lottery (step S510 in FIG. 153), details of the prefetch effect are selected (step S512). An example of selecting details of the prefetch effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 155 is a diagram illustrating an example of selecting details of a prefetch effect. In FIG. 155 (A), in the high-accuracy stage 2004, the fourth holding is started and won (YES in step S500 in FIG. 153 and YES in S502), and it is determined that a prefetch effect is to be performed (YES in step S506 in FIG. 153). , An example of a state in which a pre-reading effect section and an effect scenario are determined.

  The determination of the prefetch effect section and the effect scenario will be described in detail. Since the prefetch effect section is randomly selected for all stored start memories, in the present embodiment, the prefetch effect section is the first hold. To the fourth hold (step S508 in FIG. 153). There are at least two types of production scenarios of the pre-reading effect. The first is an effect that affects the development of the reservation (corresponding to the fourth reservation in the present embodiment) by the development of the pre-reading. There is a production that does not affect the development by the development. As an effect which affects the development of the reservation by the development of the pre-reading, lots other than the reservation (first to third reservations) are randomly selected. Here, the suspension is randomly selected as a variable effect. As a result, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the black effect is performed in the second hold and the third hold. With respect to the effects that do not affect the development by the development of the pre-reading, lottery is drawn for the reservation (first to fourth reservations) including the reservation. As a result, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the movement of the accessory is performed from the first reservation to the fourth reservation.

  In this case, when the starting memory held in the first hold to the fourth hold is consumed, the black effect is performed while the character is continuously moved. The player encounters a situation in which the player moves. Then, it is difficult for the player to judge whether these series of effects are individual effects or related effects. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 155 (B), when it is determined that the black effect such as the third holding is not performed in the holding (corresponding to the fourth holding in the present embodiment), the fourth holding is performed. In step (2), the effect (in the present embodiment, movable of an accessory) that does not affect the development by the prefetching is canceled (rewritten to “none”).

<Countdown production>
It is determined whether the details of the look-ahead effect selected in step S512 of FIG. 153 are a countdown effect (step S514). The countdown effect in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 156 is a diagram illustrating an example of a case where the details of the prefetch effect are countdown effects. In FIG. 156 (A), during the high-accuracy stage 2004, a fourth hold is won (YES in step S500 in FIG. 153 and YES in step S502), and it is determined that a prefetch effect is to be performed (YES in step S506 in FIG. 153). ), An example of a state in which the pre-reading effect section and the effect scenario are determined.

  The determination of the prefetch effect section and the effect scenario will be described in detail. Since the prefetch effect section is randomly selected for all stored start memories, in the present embodiment, the prefetch effect section is the first hold. To the fourth hold (step S508 in FIG. 153). There are at least two types of production scenarios for pre-reading effects. There is a production that does not affect the development by the development. It has been determined that a countdown effect is to be performed in the first to third reservations as effects that affect the development of the reservation by the development of prefetching. Here, the suspension is randomly selected as a variable effect. With respect to the effects that do not affect the development by the development of the pre-reading, lottery is drawn for the reservation (first to fourth reservations) including the reservation. As a result, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the movement of the accessory is performed from the first reservation to the fourth reservation.

  In this case, when the first hold to the fourth hold are exhausted, the countdown effect is performed while the accessory is continuously moving, and although the countdown effect is not performed in the fourth hold, the accessory is not played. The player will encounter a mobile situation. If the countdown is set to 0 (zero) and a big hit is determined (winning in the main CPU 101), a pattern in which the countdown does not become 0 is a loss determination, so other effects (in the present embodiment) In this case, it is difficult for the player to judge whether the series of productions is an individual production or a related production, as well as other productions. There is a possibility that (the movable object in the present embodiment) is received as meaningless to the player.

  Therefore, if it is determined in step S514 of FIG. 153 that the selected effect is a countdown effect (YES in step S514), it is determined whether the result of the selected countdown effect is gaseous (step S516). . When it is determined that the result of the selected countdown effect is gaseous (YES in step S516), it is determined whether another effect scenario has been determined up to the suspension (step S518). If it is determined that another production scenario has been determined up to the suspension (YES in step S518), the other production scenario in the suspension is canceled (step S520).

  In other words, as shown in FIG. 156 (B), when it is determined that the countdown effect performed over the first hold to the third hold is not performed in the fluctuation (corresponding to the fourth hold in the present embodiment). In the fourth reservation, the effect (in the present embodiment, the movable part of the character) that does not affect the development by the development of the prefetch in the fourth reservation is canceled (rewritten to “none”).

<Background change control processing>
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, during a game on the normal stage 2000, a prefetching effect of the suspended start memory accompanied by a change in the background image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is performed. The look-ahead effect of the reserved start memory accompanied by the background change is defined as a start memory (a hold in the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440) retained by the start prize (a prize in the second start port 440). If the lottery is decided to be performed, an effect based on the background change scenario of the hold is performed over the starting memory held before the hold, and the background change of the hold has continuity It is. As variations of the look-ahead effect, in addition to the image notice, a lamp notice, an accessory notice, and the like can be given. The background change control process will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 157 is an example of a flowchart showing background change control processing. FIG. 158 is an example of a flowchart showing the process of determining the number of continuous background changes. FIG. 159 is an example of a table relating to background change control and a background change scenario. FIG. 160 is a diagram showing a specific example for describing the flow of the background change control process according to the present embodiment.

  First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the starting memory (the holding) held by the starting winning (winning to the first starting opening 5442 or the second starting opening 440) has won the background change lottery (FIG. 157, step S530). If it is determined that the hold has been won in the background change lottery (YES in step S530), the background change continuation possible number determination process determines, by the background change of the hold, the start memory held before the hold. Then, it is determined how many fluctuations the effect can be performed (step S532). The background change continuation possible number determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After determining the number of continuous possible background changes in the process of determining the number of continuous background changes, the sub CPU 201 performs a background change scenario lottery for the suspension (step S534). The background change scenario lottery is selected from the background change scenario table in FIG. 159 (A). When a predetermined background change scenario is selected from the background change scenario table in FIG. 159 (A) (step S534 in FIG. 157), the sub CPU 201 sets the effect information set in each start memory related to the background change scenario, for example, , The information relating to the fluctuation effect such as “out of normal” or “out of reach” is rewritten into the background transition table based on the background change scenario (step S536 in FIG. 157). Examples of the background change scenario will be described later.

  157 will be described with reference to FIG. 158. If the sub CPU 201 determines in step S530 of the background change control process that the start memory (the hold) held due to the start winning has won the background change lottery (YES in step S530 in FIG. 157), the background change in FIG. 158 In the continuation possible number determination process, the number of continuations that can be performed continuously before the suspended background change is determined (step S540 in FIG. 158). The continuation possible number of times refers to the number of start-up memories of a section that goes back from the hold (the hold) to be changed in the background and is not usually selected for the background change drawing due to a change in the normal state.

  A case where the winning start memory (the hold) is 4 (fourth hold) will be described with reference to FIG. 160. FIG. 160 (A) shows that when the holding is won, the starting memory is held from the first holding to the third holding, and the effect contents of “normal loss” are set in the first holding to the third holding, respectively. It has been done. That is, the reserved number is “4”. In the background change continuation possible number determination process of FIG. 158, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the continuous effect related to the suspended background change is possible for three of the four start memories except the suspended start memory. Is determined.

  The sub CPU 201 decrements (subtracts) the reserved number in step S542 in FIG. 158, and 4-1 = 3. That is, it is determined whether or not the third hold can be continued among the first to third holds. The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the reserved number is not 0 in step S544 (step S544 in FIG. 158). As described above, since the hold number 3 is not zero (YES in step S544), the sub CPU 201 next determines whether the third hold satisfies the continuity possible condition (step S546). The continuable condition is a condition described in the continuable condition table in FIG. 159 (B).

  The continuation possible condition in FIG. 159 (B) is that the referenced hold (startup memory) is “1” where the change display of the identification symbol is a normal change, and “2” in the background change scenario of FIG. 159 (A). (3) The pending change lottery which is “(none) or normal” has not been won, that is, the pending display displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is displayed in a manner different from the default display mode by the pending change lottery. It does not mean that "4" has not been won in the prefetching effect lottery, that is, it has not been the object of another prefetching effect. The sub CPU 201 determines that continuation is possible only when all of the above conditions “1” to “4” are satisfied.

  Here, since the third reservation in FIG. 160 (A) is “normal loss”, all the possible continuation conditions (1) to (4) are provided. Therefore, the third hold is a start hold in which a prefetch effect can be performed. Then, the number of possible continuous times is incremented (added) in step S548 of FIG. 158 (step S548 of FIG. 158). That is, the number of consecutive times 0 + 1 = 1. The process of incrementing the number of continuations is repeated until the number of reserved items becomes zero or the continuation possible condition cannot be satisfied.

  In the present embodiment, when the number of holds is decremented, 3-1 = 2 (step S542 in FIG. 158), and it is determined whether or not the second hold can be continued. Since the number of holds 2 is not zero (YES in step S544), it is next determined whether or not the second hold satisfies the continuity possible condition (step S546). Since the second reservation in FIG. 160 (A) is “normal loss”, all the possible conditions (1) to (4) are provided. In other words, since the second reservation can be pre-fetched, the number of continuations is incremented in step S548 of FIG. 158 (step S548 in FIG. 158), so that the number of continuations possible is 1 + 1 = 2.

  Further, when the number of reservations is decremented, 2-1 = 1 (step S542 in FIG. 158), and it is determined whether the first reservation can be continued. Since the number 1 to be held is not zero (YES in step S544), it is next determined whether or not the first hold satisfies the continuability condition (step S546). Since the first reservation in FIG. 160 (A) is “normal loss”, all of the possible continuation conditions (1) to (4) are provided. In other words, since the first hold can also perform the pre-reading effect, the number of continuations is incremented in step S548 of FIG. 158 (step S548 of FIG. 158), and the number of continuations becomes 2 + 1 = 3. Next, when the reserved number is decremented, 1-1 = 0 (step S544 in FIG. 158), and the reserved number = 0 (NO in step S544). It is determined that there is.

  If it is determined in the background change continuation possible number determination process that the possible continuation number is 3 (step S532 in FIG. 157), the background change scenario is randomly selected based on the background change scenario table in FIG. 159 (A). In this embodiment, the number of possible prefetches is 3 in FIG. 159 (A). 3, no. 7-No. 9, No. 13-No. 15, No. 19-No. 21 are selected.

  For example, the background change scenario No. When 3 is selected, the background change scenario type is “normal”, and the background change scenarios before 3 changes, 2 changes, and 1 change are all “normal”. For example, the background change scenario No. When 20 is selected, the background change scenario type is “normal”, and the background change scenarios before 3 changes, before 2 changes, and before 1 change are “normal”, “evening”, and “evening” in that order. Has become. It is expected that by the time of the change of the hold (fourth hold), the background will change from the normal system to the evening background, and some story effects will be performed continuously.

  In addition, for example, the background change scenario No. When 9 is selected, the background change scenario type is “Japanese style”, and the background change scenarios before 3 changes, before 2 changes, and before 1 change are all “Japanese style house”. This can be used as an effect having a higher expectation than “normal” in the background change scenario type. Also, for example, the background change scenario No. 13-No. When 15 is selected, the background change scenario type is “attack” and can be used as an effect with a higher expectation than the “Japanese style” state. In particular, as for the background change scenario type “attack”, since the effect “enemies attack” is performed in the background change scenario, it may indicate the transition to some special mode (zone).

  The example of FIG. 160B is described. FIG. 160 (B) shows that when the holding is won, the starting memory is held from the first holding to the third holding, and the effect contents of “normal loss” are set in the second holding to the third holding, respectively. However, it can be seen that the first suspension is a state in which a “background change”, that is, a background change scenario is set. In this case, the number of holds is “4”, and in the background change continuation possible number determination process of FIG. It is determined whether or not is possible.

  In step S542 of FIG. 158, when the number of reserved items is decremented, 4-1 = 3, and it is determined whether or not the third reserved item can be continued. As described above, since the number 3 of holds is not zero (YES in step S544), it is determined whether or not the third hold satisfies the continuability condition (step S546). Since the third reservation in FIG. 160 (B) is “normal loss”, all the possible conditions (1) to (4) are provided. Therefore, since the third reservation can be prefetched, the continuation possible number is incremented in step S548 of FIG. 158 (step S548 of FIG. 158). That is, the number of consecutive times 0 + 1 = 1. The same applies to the second hold, so that the number of possible continuous times 1 + 1 = 2.

  158 is decremented in step S542 in FIG. 158, and it is determined whether or not the first hold can be continued. As described above, since the number of holdings 1 is not zero (YES in step S544), it is determined whether or not the first holding satisfies the continuity possible condition (step S546). Since the first suspension in FIG. 160 (B) is “background change”, among the continuity possible conditions (1) to (4), “(none) ) Or normal system ".

  If so, it is determined that the continuity condition has not been cleared in step S546 of FIG. 158 (NO in step S546 of FIG. 158), and thus the number of continuation times is determined to be 2 in the background change continuation possible number determination process. Is done.

<Fluctuation scenario determination processing>
With reference to FIG. 161, a description will be given, with reference to FIG. 161, of a change scenario determination process performed at the start of a change in the held start storage (for example, the first to fourth holds). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the starting memory held by the winning start (winning to the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440) is a background effect change effect related to the starting memory held after the holding. Or, by the look-ahead effect, it can be rewritten to effect information different from the initial winning. Therefore, a predetermined effect is selected according to the condition given at the start of the change.

  FIG. 161 is an example of a flowchart showing the variation scenario determination processing. In the change scenario determination process, at the start of the change in which the start winning or the held start memory is consumed by the change, it is determined whether or not the start of the change (step S550 in FIG. 161). If it is determined that the fluctuation has started (YES in step S550), it is determined whether the background displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is a normal system (step S552). The normal system includes, for example, an effect that is different from an effect that affects some interest to the player, such as an attack or assault described below.

  If it is determined that the background displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is the normal system (YES in step S552), it is determined whether the normal system is an exception target (step S554). The exception target is, for example, among the effects determined by the background change scenario lottery in the above-described background change control process, when it is determined that “1” is an effect that enters the Japanese-style house with the change, “2” "If the change determines that the effect enters an enemy attack effect," 3 "the change may correspond to the next change at the end of the evening background.

  If it is determined that the subject is an exception (YES in step S554), an effect according to the exception condition is executed in the normal background exception process (step S556). For example, if it is determined that “1” is an effect that enters a Japanese-style house with the fluctuation, a scenario lottery is executed at the time of the Japanese-style background, and “2” is an effect that enters an enemy invasion effect with the fluctuation. If it is determined, set the effect on the enemy attack in the normal background scenario lottery, and "3" do nothing if the change corresponds to the next change at the end of the evening background. Can be On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the exception target (NO in step S554), a normal background scenario lottery is performed (step S558).

  When it is determined that the background displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is not a normal system (NO in step S552), it is determined whether the background is evening (step S560). If it is determined that the background is the evening (YES in step S560), a scenario lottery in the evening background is performed (step S562). On the other hand, if it is determined that the background is not evening (NO in step S560), it is determined whether the background is Japanese style (step S564). If it is determined that the background is Japanese style (YES in step S564), a Japanese style background scenario lottery is performed (step S566).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the background is not Japanese style (NO in step S564), it is determined whether the background is invading (step S568). If it is determined that the background is an invasion (YES in step S568), a scenario lottery at the time of the invasion background is performed (step S570). On the other hand, when it is determined that the background is not the attack (NO in step S570), the assault background scenario lottery is performed (step S572). The degree of expectation in the effects produced as a result of these scenario lotteries increases in the order of normal background, evening background, normal background exception, Japanese style, invasion, and assault.

<Chance up control processing>
In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, regardless of the normal stage 2000 or the high-accuracy stage 2004, as a fluctuating performance that evolves into a super-reach, it is possible to increase the chance of generating a performance related to the performance that first occurred. Control processing is possible. The chance up control processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 162 is an example of a flowchart showing a chance up control process.

  First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the effect displayed during the current change is an effect that is changing (step S580 in FIG. 162). When it is determined that the effect displayed during the current change is the effect during the change (YES in step S580), it is determined whether or not to increase the chance (step S582). If it is determined that the chance up is to be performed (YES in step S582), it is determined whether or not the chance up has already been performed in the fluctuation. That is, it is determined whether the chance up flag is not 1 (step S584).

  If it is determined in step S584 that the chance up flag is not 1 (YES in step S584), a chance up introduction effect is set (step S586). This means that the chance up flag is not 1 indicates that the chance up effect has not yet been performed in the fluctuation. Therefore, a normal effect that can be a chance-up effect is selected. When the chance up introduction effect is set in step S586 (step S586), the chance up flag is set to 1 (step S588).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the chance up flag is 1 in step S584 (NO in step S584), a chance up effect related to the effect executed last time is set (step S600). For example, if the effect performed last time, that is, the effect performed based on the chance-up introduction effect is a conversation effect in which the character A appears, the character A appears again as a chance-up effect, and the previous conversation In addition, there is a production that produces a conversation that is developed while being related to the character, and a production that makes the character B related to the character A appear and develop into a super reach. As described above, by controlling the effect to be generated later to be related to the effect to be generated first or to perform the effect of developing the effect, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the super reach effect.

  When the chance up flag is set to 1 in step S588 (step S588) or a chance up effect related to the effect executed last time is set in step S600 (step S600), it is determined whether or not the change is completed (step S590). . If it is determined that the fluctuation has ended (YES in step S590), the character lamp flag is set to 0 (step S592). On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation has not been ended (NO in step S590), the chance up control processing ends.

<Pending change decision processing>
In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the starting memory is held by a winning start (winning in first starting opening 5442 or second starting opening 440), the player can visually recognize that the holding has been performed. It is displayed (or notified) in a mode. As a display mode, for example, a mode in which the number is displayed on a part of the liquid crystal display device 16 is given. Further, the display (design) of the reserved start memory can be changed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The pending change is to change the pending image. The pending change determination processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 163 is an example of a flowchart showing the pending change determination process.

  First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a winning is held (step S610 in FIG. 163). Whether or not a holding winning is determined does not mean whether or not there is a starting winning (winning in the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440), but as described above, the starting memory is held and the holding is performed. It is in a state where it can be displayed in a manner visible to the user. If it is determined that the winning is a reserved prize (YES in step S610), a pending change scenario lottery is performed (step S612).

  In the pending change scenario lottery in step S612, a scenario related to the pending change is drawn. More specifically, the scenario related to the change of hold is the number of battles (the number of battles n) when the battle between the insurgents and the insurgents changes the display of the hold only when the insurer wins. Decision), whether to make a pending change, and the like. The mode of the confrontation is, for example, a ninjutsu confrontation. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of battles is eight. When a predetermined scenario is determined by the pending change scenario lottery in step S612 (step S612), it is determined which character is to be selected from the insteps (step S614). Depending on the character selected here, there may be a character that always wins the instep (confirmation of the pending change).

  Next, in a step S616, the second character and the scenario confronting the first party are drawn. Here, in the present embodiment, one character of the instep power is selected in the instep character drawing in step S614, but a maximum of eight confrontation characters are selected as the opponents to confront. The story, cut-in, and other scenarios at the time of appearance are also determined by the confrontation Otsu character scenario lottery. Depending on the character selected here, there may be a character that always wins the instep (confirmation of the pending change).

  Next, a confrontation process is performed in step S618 (step S618). When Party A wins (YES in step S6620), the reserved image is changed in the reserved change processing. For example, the image of the starting memory displayed in the red shuriken image may be changed to a yellow shuriken image, or the image displayed in the shuriken image may be changed to a ninja book (scroll). The display may be different from the current display. When one battle is completed, 1 is subtracted from the number of battles n in step S624 (step S624). If it is determined in step S624 that the number of matches after the subtraction is not 0 (NO in step S626), the match is performed again. This process is repeated until the number of contests becomes zero.

  When the number of confrontations subtracted in step S626 becomes 0 (YES in step S626), an extended effect process is performed in step S628 (step S628). In the advanced production process, there is a production that develops to super reach after the end of the confrontation between the insurgents and the insurgents.

  On the other hand, in step S620, when the instep A does not win in the confrontation between the instep and the inversion B (NO in step S620), it is determined whether or not a draw is made (step S630). If it is determined that there is a draw (YES in step S630), 1 is subtracted from the number of contests n in step S624 (step S624). If it is determined in step S626 that the number of contests subtracted is not 0 (NO in step S626), the confrontation is performed again. This process is repeated until the number of contests becomes zero.

  If it is determined in step S628 that the extended effect process has been completed, or if it is determined in step S630 that it is not a draw (NO in step S630), the pending change determination process ends. Note that a pseudo-run may be used in an effect related to a confrontation between the insurgent and the insurgent in the pending change.

[Character lamp]
In the present embodiment, when the character lamp (LED 1562) emits light, a picture of a character or the like appears inside the opening window 1552. In the following, the character lamp (LED 1562) is simply described as a character lamp.

  The sub CPU 201 selects an effect in which the character lamp is turned on at the start of the variable display of the identification symbol, and may randomly select whether or not the character lamp is turned on in the effect drawing when the effect button 62 shown in FIG. 1 is pressed. .

  Then, since there is a timing at which the character lamp selected at the start of the variable display of the identification symbol and a timing at which the character lamp selected by the lottery when the effect button 62 is pressed exist, one variable display is performed. It is conceivable that there is a timing at which the character lamp is turned on a plurality of times. For this reason, the earliest timing is adopted for the lighting of the character lamp, and the sub CPU 201 controls so that once it is turned on, it is not turned on thereafter.

  FIGS. 164 (A) to 164 (C) are each an example of a sequence chart showing lighting control of a character lamp. In FIGS. 164 (A) to 164 (C), during the period from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the end of the variable display, the first effect lottery is executed at the start of the variable display, and as a result, a conversation notice is given in the first half. Is executed, and a second effect lottery is executed on the way, and as a result, a special reach (hereinafter, referred to as “SP reach”) is executed in the latter half.

  The example shown in FIG. 164 (A) is based on the premise that the lamp lighting timing is selected twice during one variable display. In the illustrated example, in the first half of the conversation notice, there is an executable period of the character ramp effect, and also in the latter half of the SP reach, there is an executable period of the character ramp effect.

  The example shown in FIG. 164 (B) shows a case where the effect button 62 is pressed. In the illustrated example, the sub CPU 201 executes the character lamp effect when the effect button 62 is pressed in the first half of the conversation notice, and does not execute the character lamp effect in the second half SP reach.

  The example shown in FIG. 164 (C) shows a case where the effect button 62 has not been pressed. In the illustrated example, the effect button 62 is not pressed in the first half of the conversation notice, while the sub CPU 201 executes the character ramp effect in the second half of the SP reach.

  If it is determined that the character lamp is turned on when the effect button 62 is pressed at the start of the variable display, if the effect button 62 is not pressed at the time of the button effect, the character lamp is identified without the lighting timing of the character lamp thereafter. It is conceivable that the variable display of the symbol may end, but it is possible to separately execute the lottery of the effect in which the character lamp selected at the start of the variable display is turned on and the lottery of the character lamp when the effect button 62 is pressed. Thus, various lighting timings of the character lamp can be prepared.

  FIG. 165 is an example of a flowchart showing control processing of a character lamp effect. First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the effect is being variably displayed (step S801). If not, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to end variable display (step S807). If the effect is medium, it is determined whether or not it is within the execution period of the character lamp effect (step S802).

  The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display has ended when the character lamp effect is not in the executable period (step S807), whereas the character lamp flag is set to 1 when the character lamp effect is in the execution period. It is determined whether or not there is (step S803).

  If the character lamp flag is 1 (the character lamp effect has been executed), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display has ended (step S807), while if the character lamp flag is not 1 (the character lamp effect has not been performed). For execution, it is determined whether or not the execution condition of the character lamp effect is satisfied (step S804). The execution condition of the character lamp effect refers to, for example, pressing of the effect button 62 or elapse of a predetermined variable display time.

  The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to end the variable display when the character lamp effect execution condition is not satisfied (step S807), and executes the character lamp effect when the character lamp effect execution condition is satisfied. (Step S805).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 sets the character lamp flag to 1 (step S806). Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display has been completed (step S807). If the sub CPU 201 determines that the variable display is not to be ended, the sub CPU 201 ends the process.

  The above description has been given of the embodiment in which the variable display is performed as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution of the character ramp effect is controlled by setting the pre-reading effect and the effect of the pre-reading effect and the variable display as one period. You may do it.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 164 (B), when the operation of the effect button 62 is performed, as a specific notification mode, for example, a conversation notice (a first effect execution) capable of executing a character lamp effect Means) and an SP reach (second effect executing means) capable of executing a character lamp effect when the variable display of the identification symbol has reached a predetermined time during the same variable display. Further, as shown in FIG. 164 (C), in the conversation announcement, when the operation of the effect button 62 is not performed, the character lamp effect is not executed, while in the SP reach, as shown in FIG. 164 (C). If the character lamp effect is executed in the conversation notice, the character lamp effect is not executed. If the character lamp effect is not executed in the conversation notice, as shown in FIG. Perform the production.

  In addition, the following can be rephrased. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can execute a character ramp effect as a predetermined effect, and performs a lottery to execute the character ramp effect under the first condition (for example, when the effect button 62 is pressed). The first lottery that can be performed and the second lottery that can be performed under a second condition (for example, time lapse) different from the first lottery can be performed. When each of the above becomes executable, the first condition may not be satisfied depending on the game situation. When the first condition is satisfied, the character lamp effect can be executed under the first condition and the second condition is invalidated. Only at the time, a predetermined effect can be executed at the execution timing different from the first condition, for example, when the second condition is satisfied.

  In addition, the following can be rephrased. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can execute a character ramp effect as a predetermined effect, and executes the character ramp effect as a first condition, for example, when the button in FIG. 164 (A) is pressed. Each of the first lottery that can perform a lottery and the second lottery that can perform a lottery performed in the time of FIG. 164 (A) as a second condition different from the first lottery can be executed. sell. When each of the above becomes executable, when the second condition is satisfied, the character lamp effect is executed, while the first condition is a condition that is not satisfied or invalid depending on the game situation. For example, as shown in FIG. 164 (B), when the first condition is satisfied, the character lamp effect can be executed under the first condition, and the character lamp effect can be performed under the second condition. Is invalid (or discarded).

[Full screen notice]
FIG. 166 is an example of a flowchart showing the control of the full screen effect, and FIGS. 167 (A) to 167 (C) are screen diagrams showing an example of the screen display. In the present embodiment, when the sub CPU 201 receives the command indicating that the full screen effect should be executed in the state of the normal effect shown in FIG. 167 (A), it outputs a message (effect designation information) to the voice control circuit 205. By doing so, the audio control circuit 205 is controlled to set the volume of a specific channel (a channel on which a symbol sound is reproduced) to zero.

  Note that the voice control circuit 205 controls so as not to output the symbol sound at the time of the full-screen effect. ) Is controlled so as to output a symbol sound.

  However, in this example, the error screen of the full screen is the error screen after the power is restored.However, the error screen of the full screen does not necessarily need to be the error screen after the power is restored, for example, when an error occurs. Message screens, warning screens when fraud is performed, and information screens related to gaming machines that are not involved in the jackpot determination, including those that are displayed full-screen in a manner that makes the variable display of the identification symbol invisible. .

  The voice control circuit 205 has a four-channel (execution system) sound source for performing voice control such as a notification sound, a symbol sound, a sound effect, and BGM, for example. For example, each of them can be reproduced on four channels (execution systems). In the present embodiment, a channel number is assigned to each channel. For example, channel number 1 is a notification sound, channel number 2 is a symbol sound, channel number 3 is a sound effect, and channel number 4 is BGM. is there.

  Describing with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 166, first, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a full-screen effect is being executed (step S901). If not, the process ends. On the other hand, in the case of the full-screen effect, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the power interruption is to be restored as shown in FIG. 167 (B) (step S902).

  If the power is not restored, the sub CPU 201 sets a full screen effect (step S903). Next, the sub CPU 201 transmits a message designating the channel number 2 which is the symbol sound channel to the voice control circuit 205, and in response to the message, the voice control circuit 205 sets the volume of the symbol sound channel to 0. (Step S904).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 167 (C), in the case of power recovery, the sub CPU 201 sets a screen during power recovery (step S905). This is because the effect is not stored when the power is restored, so that the screen during the recovery from the power failure is simply displayed.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 transmits a message to the voice control circuit 205 and, upon receiving the message, causes the voice control circuit 205 to output the volume of the symbol channel for the symbol number 2 (step S906). This may be changed to a sound that is louder than the stop sound of the symbol in the normal effect.

  In the above-mentioned processing, the sound of the design is not output during the full-screen effect as an effect, but if a power failure occurs, the full-screen effect command is transmitted again when the power is restored. In such a case, control is performed so that the volume of the symbol sound channel (channel number: 2) can be output, so that the power-off recovery screen is covered and the liquid crystal display device 16 Even when the displayed identification symbol is not visible, it is possible to recognize that the identification symbol has stopped by the symbol stop sound.

  In other words, at the time of the display effect, the effect sound can be output by a plurality of channels according to the system, and the channel (for example, channel number 2) is changed in accordance with the change of the display effect. The effect tone colors output from the symbol sound channels, sound effect channels, and BGM channels (3, 4) are changed, while the channel of the symbol system (for example, the channel of the symbol of channel number 2) is fixed. The output sound from the symbol system channel is muted according to the symbol display mode.

  According to the above-described configuration, it is possible to reduce processing that is not necessary for the effect while enhancing the interest of the player in the effect, so that the process can be performed smoothly.

  In other words, when the viewpoint of the above embodiment is changed, the effect is produced by a plurality of channels, for example, a notification sound channel of channel numbers 1, 2, 3, and 4, a symbol sound channel, a sound effect channel, and a BGM channel. Shared channels that can output timbres according to the system and that can change the effect timbre output from the channel as the display effect changes, for example, channels of symbols of channel numbers 2, 3, and 4, effects It has a sound channel, a BGM channel, and each channel of a warning system and a symbol system, for example, a notification sound of a channel number 1 and a channel of a symbol sound, and a production sound color through a shared channel according to a display production mode. On the other hand, when a specific display effect, for example, the full screen display shown in FIG. With Yan'neru state is maintained, the output sound from the channel symbol system can also be referred to as a mute.

  Note that, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the channel number of the symbol sound channel is fixed to 2 (hereinafter also referred to as “fixed channel method”) is not limited thereto, and the audio control circuit 205 Based on a message (effect designation information) from the CPU 201, for example, an unused unused channel among the four channels (execution systems) may be dynamically allocated and each sound may be reproduced.

  In this case, the sub CPU 201 stores a specific channel number indicating a specific channel in which a symbol sound is being reproduced, and, for example, when executing a full-screen effect, the specific CPU A message specifying the number is transmitted, and the voice control circuit 205 receiving the message is caused to set the volume of the symbol sound channel to zero. Even in this case, the same effect as that of the fixed channel method can be obtained.

[2. Pachinko gaming machine according to second embodiment]
As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention has been described. For example, a pachinko gaming machine having a setting function may be used. A pachinko gaming machine having this setting function will be described below as a pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. The external configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment is the same as the external configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. In addition, description of the configuration common to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described first embodiment will be omitted.

  First, basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 168 is a diagram showing an example of a table showing the probability of a big hit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 169 shows a hit type (hereinafter, “main FIG. 170 is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol variation time (variable display time) determination table stored in the main ROM 102. is there. FIG. 171 is a diagram illustrating an example of a decorative symbol determination table stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub control circuit 200. In the following description, the terms of the main CPU 101 and the main RAM 103 which are not shown in FIGS. 168 to 171 are used, but these are shown in FIG.

  In describing the probability of a big hit shown in FIG. 168, first, a big hit in a pachinko gaming machine will be briefly described.

  When detecting the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (for example, see FIG. 5), the main CPU 101 extracts the first special symbol big hit determination random number from the big hit determination counter, and stores the random number stored in the main RAM 103. With reference to the 1 special symbol big hit random number determination table (not shown), a big hit determination (hereinafter, referred to as a "big hit determination of the first special symbol") for the extracted random number for big hit determination is performed. It should be noted that the big hit determination random number of the first special symbol is extracted even when the big hit game state is controlled.

  Similarly, when detecting the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (see, for example, FIG. 5), the main CPU 101 extracts the second special symbol big hit determination random number from the big hit determination counter and stores it in the main RAM 103. With reference to the second special symbol big hit random number determination table (not shown), a big hit determination for the extracted big hit determination random number (hereinafter, referred to as a “big hit determination of the second special symbol”) is performed. In addition, the extraction of the random number for the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is performed even when the jackpot game state is controlled.

  When the big hit determination of the first special symbol is performed, it is determined to be either "big hit" or "losing". In addition, when the big hit determination of the second special symbol is performed, it is determined to be one of "big hit" and "losing", similarly to the big hit determination of the first special symbol. The value of the probability change flag (“0 (= off)” or “1 (= on)” is stored in the jackpot random number determination table of the first special symbol and the jackpot random number determination table of the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 103, respectively. ), The relationship between the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number determined to be “big hit” or “losing” and the corresponding determination value data (“big hit determination value data” and “losing determination value data”) Is stipulated.

  In the second embodiment, the total random number is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the big hit determination random number is generated in a range (width) of 0 to 65535. This range is set as a fixed value. The jackpot probability is determined by the number of jackpot determination value data for the range of the jackpot determination random numbers. In addition, the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination can be appropriately changed.

  The probability change flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the “high-probability gaming state”. When the gaming state is the “high-probability gaming state”, the probability change flag is “1”, and when the gaming state is the “low-probability gaming state”, the probability variation flag is “0”.

  The time reduction flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the “time reduction gaming state”. When the game state is the "time reduction game state", the time reduction flag is "1", and when the game state is "non-time reduction game state", the time reduction flag is "0". In the time saving game state, the number of times saved is also managed by the main CPU 101, and each time the special symbol fluctuates once, the number of times saved is decremented by one.

  In the time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is set ON, the probability of being determined as a normal hit in the normal hit determination (normal hit probability) is higher than in the non-time-saving game state. Therefore, in the time-saving gaming state, the frequency of the ordinary electric auditors goods 46 changing from the closed state to the opening state, that is, the winning frequency of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is higher than in the non-time-saving gaming state. However, in the time saving game state, instead of increasing the normal winning probability as compared with the non-time saving gaming state, for example, by increasing the execution frequency of the normal winning lottery (shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol), the normal electric winning combination The frequency at which the object 46 changes from the closed state to the open state may be increased, or the open state of the ordinary electric accessory 46 may be changed to make it easier for the ordinary electric accessory 46 to win. Further, two or three of the above three aspects may be combined.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the normal gaming state in which both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are OFF, the probability variation time saving game state in which the probability variation flag is ON and the time reduction flag is ON, and the probability variation flag is OFF and the time reduction flag is ON. It is configured to be controlled by the main CPU 101 in any of the time-saving gaming states.

  When the main CPU 101 detects a winning of a game ball to the first starting port 420 (for example, see FIG. 5) and extracts a big hit determination random number of the first special symbol, the extracted big hit determination randomness of the first special symbol is extracted. The numerical value is held as a starting memory until the change display of the first special symbol is started. Then, at the time of starting the variable display of the first special symbol, a big hit determination of the first special symbol is performed to determine whether it is a big hit or a loss.

  When the main CPU 101 detects the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (see, for example, FIG. 5) and extracts the random number for the jackpot determination of the second special symbol, the extracted random hit for the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is extracted. The numerical value is held as a starting memory until the change display of the second special symbol is started. Then, at the start of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, a big hit determination of the second special symbol is performed, and it is determined whether it is a big hit or a loss.

[Big hit probability]
As shown in FIG. 168, in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, the jackpot probability differs according to the set value. In the low-probability gaming state in which the jackpot probability is relatively low (probable change flag OFF), the jackpot probability for each set value is about 1/300 in setting 1, about 1/290 in setting 2, and about 1/290 in setting 3. The setting is 1/280, the setting 4 is about 1/270, the setting 5 is about 1/260, and the setting 6 is about 1/250. When the game state is the high-probability game state (the probability change flag is ON) in which the big hit probability is relatively high, the big hit probability for each set value is about 1/30 in setting 1, about 1/29 in setting 2, and 3 in setting 2. The setting is about 1/28, the setting 4 is about 1/27, the setting 5 is about 1/26, and the setting 6 is about 1/25.

  That is, as described above, in the second embodiment, the range (width) of the random number for big hit determination is set as a fixed value in the range of 0 to 65535, so the number of big hit determination value data of the first special symbol is set. By changing according to the value, the big hit probability is changed according to the set value. For example, in the low-probability gaming state in the first special symbol, the number of the big hit determination value data is 218 in the setting 1 and 226 in the setting 2 for the range of the random number for the big hit determination (0 to 65535) which is a fixed value. The number of hits, 234 in setting 3, 243 in setting 4, 252 in setting 5, and 262 in setting 6, make the jackpot probability different depending on the setting value. In addition, the number of the big hit determination value data in the high-probability gaming state is 21 for setting 1, 22 for setting 2, 23 for setting 3, 24 for setting 4, 25 for setting 5, and 26 for setting 6. It has become.

  Also, in the jackpot determination of the second special symbol, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value set. In the low-probability gaming state in which the jackpot probability is relatively low (probable change flag OFF), the jackpot probability for each set value is 1/300 in setting 1, 1/290 in setting 2, and 280 minutes in setting 3. 1, setting 4 is 1/270, setting 5 is 1/260, and setting 6 is 1/250. Also, when the game state is a high-probability game state (probable change flag ON) in which the big hit probability is relatively high, the big hit probability for each set value is 1/30 in setting 1, 1/29 in setting 2, and 28 in setting 3. The setting is 1/1, setting 4 is 1/27, setting 5 is 1/26, and setting 6 is 1/25.

  That is, the big hit probability of the second special symbol is also changed according to the set value by changing the number of the big hit determination value data according to the set value. For example, in the low-probability gaming state in the second special symbol, the number of the big hit determination value data is 218 in the setting 1 and 226 in the setting 2 in the range of the random number for the big hit determination (0 to 65535) which is a fixed value. The number of hits, 234 in setting 3, 243 in setting 4, 252 in setting 5, and 262 in setting 6, make the jackpot probability different depending on the setting value. Further, the number of the big hit determination value data in the high-probability gaming state is also 21 in setting 1, 22 in setting 2, 23 in setting 3, 24 in setting 4, 25 in setting 5, and 26 in setting 6. It is individual.

  It should be noted that the big hit determination of the first special symbol and the big hit determination of the second special symbol have the same big hit probability determined according to the setting. That is, if the set values are the same, the big hit probability in the big hit determination of the first special symbol and the big hit probability in the big hit determination of the second special symbol are the same. For example, if the setting is 3, the big hit probability in the big hit determination of the first special symbol is 1/280 in the low-probability game state (1/28 in the high-probability game state), and the big hit probability is the second special symbol. Is the same as the big hit probability in the big hit determination (1/280 in the low-probability game state, and 1/28 in the high-probability game state).

  In the second embodiment, the setting values are six steps from setting 1 to setting 6, but the setting values are not necessarily six steps, and can be arbitrarily determined as long as there are a plurality of steps.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the jackpot probability is different when the set value is different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a common jackpot probability may be set with a plurality of set values. For example, a common jackpot probability (first probability) is set for setting 1 and setting 2, a common jackpot probability (second probability higher than the first probability) is set for setting 3 and setting 4, and a setting 5 The common jackpot probability (third probability higher than the second probability) may be set to common to setting 6.

  In the second embodiment, the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination generated by the main CPU 101 is set as a fixed value in a range of 0 to 65535, and the range of the random number for jackpot determination which is a fixed value is set. On the other hand, by changing the number of jackpot determination value data according to the set value, the jackpot probability is made different for each set value, but the method of making the jackpot probability different for each set value is not limited to this. The number of determination value data may be common to all settings, and the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination as the total random number may be changed according to the set value, so that the jackpot probability may be changed according to the set value. For example, the number of the jackpot determination value data is 218 common to all the settings, the range (width) of the random number for the jackpot determination is 0 to 65535 in setting 1 (the jackpot probability is about 1/300), and The range of 0 to 63219 (big hit probability is 1/290), the range of 0 to 61039 in setting 3 (big hit probability of 1/280), the range of 0 to 58859 in setting 4 (big hit probability of 1/270) The setting 5 is in the range of 0 to 56679 (big hit probability is 1/260), the setting 6 is in the range of 0 to 54499 (big hit probability is 1/250), and the main CPU 101 determines the big hit in the range according to the set value. By generating a random number for use, the jackpot probability can be changed according to the set value. In addition, according to this method, the jackpot probability is changed by changing the denominator (the range of the jackpot determination random number) having more digits than the numerator (the number of jackpot determination value data). Compared with a method in which the range is fixed and the number of the big hit determination value data is changed according to the set value, the big hit probability for each set value can be set finely.

  In the above description, the number of the big hit determination value data is common to all the settings, and the range (width) of the big hit determination random number as the total random number is changed according to the set value. It is not always necessary to make them common. For example, in setting 1, the number of the jackpot determination value data is 218, and the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination is 0 to 65535 (the jackpot probability is about 1/300). 219, the range (width) of the big hit determination random number is in the range of 0 to 63509 (the big hit probability is about 1/290). In setting 3, the number of big hit determination value data is 220 and the big hit determination random number is The range (width) is in the range of 0 to 61599 (the jackpot probability is about 1/280). In setting 4, the number (221) of jackpot determination value data and the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number are in the range of 0 to 59669. In the setting 5, the number of the jackpot determination value data is 222 and the range (width) of the random number for the jackpot determination is 0 to 57719 (the jackpot probability is about 1/260). And in setting 6 , The number of the jackpot determination value data and the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number are in the range of 0 to 55749 (the jackpot probability is about 1/250), Even when both the range (width) is changed according to the set value, the set value is compared with the method in which the range of the big hit determination random number is fixed and the number of the big hit judgment value data is changed according to the set value. It is possible to finely set the big hit probability for each.

  When the range (width) of the random number for the jackpot determination as the total random number is changed according to the set value, the main CPU 101 performs the setting check processing in step S3072 and step S3082 (see FIG. 188) described later. In addition to or instead of determining whether the set value data is in the range of “0” to “5”, for example, the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number as the total random number is set to the set value. It may be checked whether or not the value is within the range, and / or whether or not the number of the big hit determination value data is the number specified in the set value. Then, if it is determined that the check is not normal (for example, the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number as the total random number and / or the number of the jackpot determination value data is out of the range corresponding to the set value) (step described later) If it corresponds to NO in S3721), the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S3722 described later), and it becomes impossible to proceed with the game.

[Big hit distribution]
Next, with reference to FIG. 169, a description will be given of the big hit distribution when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, that is, a selection rate of a stop symbol (main symbol) of the special symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 169, the distribution of the main symbol is common to all settings. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 169 are stored in the main ROM 102.

  As shown in FIG. 169, when the result of the jackpot determination for the first special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol on the basis of the extracted symbol determination random numbers, as shown in FIG. 25.0%), Toku 1-2 (allocation probability 25.0%), Toku 1-3 (allocation probability 25.0%), and Toku 1-4 (allocation probability 25.0%) ). The special chart 1-1 is a big hit with the number of rounds of 4, the probability change flag being OFF, and the number of time savings being 100. In the special map 1-2, the number of rounds, the probability change flag is ON, and the time saving continues until the next big hit game state is executed (the time saving flag is set to OFF when the next big hit game state is started). It is a big hit. The special chart 1-3 is a big hit with the number of rounds 10, the probability change flag OFF, and the number of times of savings 100. The special map 1-4 is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 10, the probability change flag is ON, and the time saving is continued until the next big hit game state is executed. When the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 displays the first special symbol in a variable manner over a variable time determined with reference to FIG. Execute the control to stop.

  In the second embodiment, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, a predetermined condition is satisfied (in the second embodiment, as shown in the special figures 1-2 and 1-4). When the big hit game state is turned on), the so-called “probable loop machine” in which the high-probability game state continues after the big hit game state ends and the next big hit game state starts. In such a probability changing loop machine, the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the high-probability game state is a big hit, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the big hit game state ends and the next big hit game state starts again. The high-probability gaming state continues until the game is played. Then, if the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the high-probability gaming state is a big hit and a predetermined condition is not satisfied (in the second embodiment, as shown in the special figures 1-1 and 1-3, If it is a big hit that does not turn on the probability change flag), after the big hit game state ends, the game is controlled not to the high probability game state but to the low probability game state.

  When the result of the jackpot determination for the second special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 converts the main symbol into a special symbol 2-1 (allocation probability 50.0%) or a special symbol based on the extracted symbol determining random numbers. 2-2 (allocation probability 50.0%). The special figure 2-1 is a big hit with the number of rounds being 10, the probability change flag being OFF, and the number of times of savings being 100 times. The special figure 2-2 is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 10, the probability change flag is ON, and the time saving is continued until the next big hit game state is executed. When the result of the jackpot determination for the second special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 displays the second special symbol in a variable manner over a variable time determined with reference to FIG. Execute the control to stop.

  When the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a loss, the main CPU 101 determines a loss symbol and executes control to stop the special symbol at the determined loss symbol.

  The number of rounds is the number of rounds of a round game executed in the big hit game state. If the probability change flag is ON, the game state after the big hit game state ends is controlled to a high probability game state (game state in which the probability change flag is set to ON), and if the probability change flag is OFF, the big hit game state is set. Is controlled to a low-probability gaming state (a gaming state in which the probable change flag is set to OFF). In the following, the number of rounds, the probability change flag is OFF, and the big hit of 100 time reductions (for example, the big hit in Tokuju 1-1) is referred to as “4R normal big hit”, and the number of rounds, the certain change flag is ON, and the next big hit game is A jackpot whose time savings continue until it is executed (for example, the jackpot of Toku-zu 1-2) is referred to as a “4R probability changing jackpot”, and has a number of rounds of 10, a probability-changing flag OFF, and a jackpot of 100 times-saving times (for example, FIG. 3, the jackpot of the special map 2-1 is referred to as "10R normal jackpot", and the number of rounds, the probability change flag is ON, and the jackpot whose time saving is continued until the next jackpot game is executed (for example, the special jackpot, FIG. The big hit in Tokujin Figure 2-2) is referred to as "10R probable big hit".

  Further, in the second embodiment, when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the time saving flag is always set to ON. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to determine whether the time reduction flag is set to ON or OFF according to the main symbol determined by the above.

[Special symbol fluctuation time]
Next, a flow until the change time of the special symbol is determined will be described with reference to FIG. Since the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol at the same time. Further, the variation pattern of the special symbol also corresponds to the effect content (for example, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 (for example, see FIG. 5) by the sub control circuit 200 (the sub CPU 201). The pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment is configured so that the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol to be determined (that is, the fluctuation time and the effect contents) can be different depending on the set value. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 170 are stored in the main ROM 102. In addition, there is a case where the execution probability of the reach effect is changed according to the number of reserved special symbols, and the fluctuation time in the normal fluctuation becomes shorter as the number of reserved special symbols increases, but these are omitted in FIG. 170. .

  As shown in FIG. 170, the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation time of the first special symbol based on the result of the first special symbol big hit determination, and determines the second special symbol variation result based on the result of the second special symbol big hit determination. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 170, in the second embodiment, the change time of the special symbol is determined using a common table for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, instead of this, the variation time of the special symbol may be determined using different tables for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  The special symbol fluctuation time determination table includes a special symbol big hit determination result, a game state, a reach determination random number range, a main symbol when the special symbol big hit determination result is a big hit, and an effect selection. It defines the relationship among the random number range for use, the variation pattern (variable display pattern), the variation pattern designation command, the variation time, and the effect contents. However, when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol, the probability-variable time-saving gaming state and the time-saving gaming state are not distinguished. Also, different random number ranges are set for the reach determination random number range and the effect selection random number range when determining the special symbol fluctuation time.

  The reach determination random number range is a random number used for determining whether or not to perform a reach effect for each set value when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a loss. The main CPU 101 extracts a reach determination random number from the reach determination counter when a game ball has won a first start port 420 or a second start port 440 (both shown in FIG. 5 for example), and the extracted reach determination. The random number for use is stored in the main RAM 103. As described above, the main CPU 101 performs the jackpot determination using the random number value for the jackpot determination when starting the fluctuation display of the special symbol. When the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, the main CPU 101 stores the jackpot determination. Using the reach determination random number, it is determined whether or not a reach effect is to be executed. In the second embodiment, the reach determination random value extracted from the reach determination counter is set in the range of 0 to 249, but this range can be changed as appropriate.

  For example, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the normal game state (the probability change flag is OFF and the time saving flag is OFF) is a loss, the reach determination random number range in which the reach effect is determined to be executed is 0 in the settings 1.2. The setting is set to 0 to 26 in the setting 3.4, and is set to 0 to 27 in the setting 5.6. Further, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the probable variation time saving game state (probability variation flag ON and the time reduction flag ON) is a loss, the reach determination random number range for determining that the reach effect is to be executed is set to 1. In the setting 2, 0 to 10 are specified, in the setting 3, 4, the setting is 0 to 11, and in the setting 5, 6, the setting is 0 to 12.

  As described above, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment is a loss, the reach effect is more easily executed in the settings 3.4 than in the settings 1.2. The settings 5 and 6 are more easily executed than the settings 3 and 4. That is, the execution frequency of the reach effect differs depending on the set value, and the higher the set value, the higher the execution frequency of the reach effect.

  In the second embodiment, when determining whether or not to perform the reach effect, the reach determination random number range is common to the setting 1 and the setting 2, common to the setting 3 and the setting 4, and the setting 5 And setting 6 are common, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be different for all settings.

  The determination as to whether or not to execute the reach effect described above is for the case where the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a loss. However, when the special symbol big hit determination result is a big hit, Determines that the reach effect is to be executed regardless of the value of the reach determination random number extracted from the reach determination counter.

  The effect selection random number range is a random number used for determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol for each set value. The main CPU 101 extracts an effect selection random number from the effect selection counter when a game ball wins in the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440 (both shown in, for example, FIG. 5). The random number for use is stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines an effect selection random number stored in the main RAM 103 according to a game state and a result of determining whether or not to execute a reach effect (only when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a loss). Is used to determine the fluctuation time of the special symbol. In the second embodiment, the effect selection random number value extracted from the effect selection counter is set in the range of 0 to 99, but this range can be changed as appropriate. In addition, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 101 determines the variation time of the special symbol using the effect selection random number stored in the main RAM 103 according to the game state.

  Specifically, the special symbol fluctuation time when the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the normal game state (probable change flag OFF and the time saving flag OFF) is a loss and it is determined that the reach effect is to be executed is: It is determined as follows. In other words, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 20000 msec (normal medium reach) is set to 0 to 57 in the setting 1.2 and to 0 to 58 in the setting 3.4. In the settings 5.6, it is defined as 0 to 59. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally medium super reach A) is defined as 58 to 89 for setting 1.2 and 59 to 89 for setting 3.4. It is stipulated, and is set to 60 to 89 in the settings 5 and 6. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40000 msec (normally medium super reach B) is set to 90 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6.

  In addition, the special symbol fluctuation time when the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the normal game state (the probability change flag is OFF and the time reduction flag is OFF) is lost and it is determined not to execute the reach effect is as follows. Is determined. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 10000 msec (normal fluctuation A) is set to 0 to 51 in the setting 1.2 and to 0 to 50 in the setting 3.4. In the settings 5 and 6, it is defined as 0 to 49. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 5000 msec (normal fluctuation B) is defined as 52 to 99 in the setting 1.2 and 51 to 99 in the setting 3.4. In the settings 5.6, it is defined as 50 to 99.

  In addition, the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the probable variation time saving game state (probability variation flag ON and the time reduction flag ON) or the normal time reduction game state (probability variation flag OFF and the time reduction flag ON) is lost, and the reach effect is executed. The fluctuation time of the special symbol when it is determined is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 25000 msec (normal reach during working hours) is set to 0 to 57 in the setting 1.2 and to 0 to 58 in the setting 3.4. In the settings 5.6, it is defined as 0 to 59. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 35000 msec (super-reach A during working hours) is defined as 58 to 89 in settings 1.2 and 59 to 89 in settings 3.4. It is stipulated, and is set to 60 to 89 in the settings 5 and 6. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 45000 msec (super-reach B during the working hours) is set to 90 to 99 for the settings 1 to 6 in common.

  In addition, the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the probable variation time saving game state (probability variation flag ON and the time reduction flag ON) or the normal time reduction game state (probability variation flag OFF and the time reduction flag ON) is lost and the reach effect is not executed. The fluctuation time of the special symbol when it is determined is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 4000 msec (shortened fluctuation A) is set to 0 to 51 in the setting 1.2 and to 0 to 50 in the setting 3.4. In the settings 5 and 6, it is defined as 0 to 49. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 2000 msec (shortened fluctuation B) is defined in the range of 52 to 99 in the setting 1.2 and 51 to 99 in the setting 3.4. In the settings 5.6, it is defined as 50 to 99.

  The main symbol is determined when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. not involved.

  The fluctuation time of the special symbol when the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the normal game state (the probability change flag OFF and the time saving flag OFF) is a big hit is common to all the main symbols and is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 20000 msec (normally normal reach) is set to 0 to 1 in the setting 1.2 and to 0 to 2 in the setting 3.4. In the settings 5.6, 0 to 3 are specified. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally medium super reach A) is defined as 2 to 49 in setting 1.2 and 3 to 49 in setting 3.4. It is stipulated, and is set to 4 to 49 in the settings 5 and 6. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40000 msec (normally medium super reach B) is set to 90 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6.

  In addition, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the probable variation time saving game state (probability variation flag ON and the time saving flag ON) or the normal time saving game state (probability variation flag OFF and the time saving flag ON) is a special symbol variation time, It is common to all main symbols and is determined as follows. In other words, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 25000 msec (normal reach during working hours) is defined as 0 to 1 in the setting 1.2 and 0 to 2 in the setting 3.4. In the settings 5.6, 0 to 3 are specified. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 35,000 msec (Super Reach A during working hours) is set to 2 to 49 in the setting 1.2 and to 3 to 49 in the setting 3.4. It is stipulated, and is set to 4 to 49 in the settings 5 and 6. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 45000 msec (super-reach B during short working hours) is set to 50 to 99 for the settings 1 to 6 in common.

  In this manner, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, as long as the gaming state, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol, and the result of the determination as to whether or not to execute the reach effect are the same, the special symbol Is more likely to be determined to be a shorter fluctuation time in the setting 3.4 than in the setting 1.2, and further, it is more likely to be determined to be a shorter fluctuation time in the setting 5.6 than the setting 3.4. I have. Therefore, as the set value is higher, the average of the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shorter, and the number of times the special symbol changes per unit time (that is, the number of lotteries) is larger. Eventually, the expectation that the number of executions of the jackpot game state when viewed in the unit time is high is high, and the probability that the jackpot game state is executed in the unit time is also high. An advantageous game can be executed.

  In the second embodiment, when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol, the effect selection random number range is common to the setting 1 and the setting 2, common to the setting 3 and the setting 4, and common to the setting 3 and the setting 6. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be different for all set values.

  In addition, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit is determined commonly for all the main symbols, but is not limited thereto, and the special symbol is changed according to the main symbol. May be configured to vary.

  The fluctuation pattern is data representing fluctuation time and effect contents. For example, the fluctuation pattern “02H” represents the normal super reach B having the fluctuation time of 40000 msec.

  The fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 as data representing the fluctuation time and the effect contents. For example, if the fluctuation pattern determined by the main CPU 101 is “05H”, a fluctuation pattern designation command of “83H05H” is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200. At this time, a symbol designating command for specifying the main symbol determined by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) is also transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

[Stop design of decorative design]
Next, with reference to FIG. 171, an example of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol when the main symbol is determined at the selection rate shown in FIG. 169 when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit will be described. . The contents of the table shown in FIG. 171 are stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub-control circuit 200.

  When receiving the symbol designating command transmitted from the main control circuit 100, the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-CPU 201) changes the decorative symbol stop symbol based on the main symbol specified by the symbol designating command, regardless of the set value. decide. For example, when the main symbol specified by the symbol designation command transmitted from the main control circuit 100 is the special symbol 1-2, the sub CPU 201 determines that all the decorative symbols are the same as the specific symbol (for example, the symbol “7”). Since the distribution probability of the aspect is 0%, all of the decorative symbols (three decorative symbols in the second embodiment) become the same even-numbered symbol (allocation probability of 30.0%), or all of them. Are determined to be the same odd symbols (allocation probability: 70.0%). In the second embodiment, the specific symbol is a “7” symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and another symbol (for example, a “V” symbol) is identified if it can be recognized as a big hit with a high degree of profit from the player. It is good also as a design.

  As described above, the main symbol shown in FIG. 171 is determined when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. Therefore, the sub CPU 201 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol with reference to FIG. 171 when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. Are determined as the stop symbols of the decorative symbol. The symbols other than the symbols shown in FIG. 171 correspond to, for example, symbols in which at least one of the decorative symbols is different from the other decorative symbols.

  As described above, according to FIG. 171, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, the mode when all the decorative symbols are stopped depends on which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the big hit determination. Whether the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is a jackpot controlled to the high-probability gaming state, and whether or not the number of rounds of the round game executed in the jackpot gaming state is 10R Or it can vary.

  That is, when the main symbol determined with reference to FIG. 169 is the special figure 1-1, the special figure 1-3, or the special figure 2-1 (4R normal big hit or 10R normal big hit where the probable change flag is not set ON), Regardless of the set value, the operation always stops in a mode (hereinafter, referred to as a "first mode") in which all the decorative symbols are the same even-number symbol.

  Also, when the main symbol is the special symbol 1-2 (4R probability variable big hit), regardless of the set value, the first mode or all the decorative symbols are the same odd-numbered symbols (other than the "7" symbol which is the specific symbol). (Odd number symbol) (hereinafter, referred to as “second mode”).

  Also, when the main symbol is the special symbol 1-4 (10R probability big hit), regardless of the set value, all the decorative symbols have the same odd number symbol, or all the decorative symbols have the same specific symbol. The operation stops in a certain mode (hereinafter, referred to as “specific mode”).

  Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 2-2 (10R probability variation big hit), it stops in a specific mode regardless of the set value. Toku-zu 1-4 and Toku-zu 2-2 each have a 10R probability variable jackpot, but since Toku-zu 1-4 is a jackpot based on a prize of a game ball to the first starting port 420, a jackpot in a normal gaming state It is highly likely that he was won. In addition, since the special map 2-2 is a big hit based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, there is a high possibility that the big hit is won in the high-probability game state or the time-saving game state.

  In this manner, when stopping in the specific mode, the 10R certain jackpot with the highest profit level for the player is determined, and when stopping in a mode in which all the decorative symbols are the same odd-numbered symbol, the odd jackpot (4R certain jackpot or 10R jackpot) is stopped. (Variable jackpot) is determined. On the other hand, when the game is stopped in the first mode, it is determined that the 10R certainty big hit is not the largest profit degree for the player, but the possibility of the 4R certainty big hit remains.

  If the result of the special symbol jackpot determination is a jackpot, which jackpot is the jackpot may be notified to the player when all of the decorative symbols have stopped, or the jackpot game The notification may be made during the execution of the state, or the notification may be made when the big hit game state ends. Although not employed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the high-probability game is performed despite the fact that the gaming state after the big-hit gaming state ends is a big-hit controlled to the high-probability gaming state. The state may be controlled to a so-called “latency change state” that is not clearly indicated to the player.

[Another Example of Basic Specifications of Pachinko Machine According to Second Embodiment]

The basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment are as described above, but are not limited to the above specifications and can be changed as appropriate. An example in which the basic specifications are appropriately changed will be described below. However, the following description is an example, and it is needless to say that the present invention is not limited to this.
[Variation of special symbol variation time]
Next, with reference to FIG. 172, a description will be given of a modified example of the change time of the special symbol (that is, the change pattern of the special symbol). FIG. 172 is a diagram showing another example of the special symbol fluctuation time determination table stored in the main ROM 102. In addition, as described above, the execution probability of the reach effect is changed according to the number of reserved special symbols, and the fluctuation time in the normal fluctuation decreases as the number of reserved special symbols increases. Is omitted.

  In addition, the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the variation of the special symbol described with reference to FIG. 172 has a lottery number for counting the number of times the number of times the special symbol changes (ie, the number of special symbol lotteries). A counting means (not shown) is provided. This lottery number counting means resets, for example, at the start of the big hit game state, and starts counting the number of times the special symbol has changed starting from the end of the big hit game state.

  As shown in FIG. 172, in another example, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the normal game state (probable change flag OFF and time saving flag OFF) is a loss, the determination as to whether or not to execute the reach effect is made. This is performed in accordance with both the number of times the special symbol has been changed counted from the point in time when the big hit gaming state ends and the set value.

  Specifically, when the number of times of the change of the special symbol starting from a specific point in time (for example, the point in time when the big hit game state ends) is 0 to 1000 times, the reach determination random number range is determined to execute the reach effect. Are set to 0 to 25 in the setting 1.2, set to 0 to 26 in the setting 3.4, and set to 0 to 27 in the setting 5.6. These are the same as in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the number of times of the change of the special symbol starting from the point when the big hit gaming state ends becomes 1001 times or more, the reach determination random number range in which the reach effect is determined to be executed is 0 to 10 in the setting 1.2. Are set to 0 to 5 in the settings 3 and 4, and are set to 0 to 1 in the settings 5.6. That is, if the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a loss, the execution probability of the reach effect is twice as high in the setting 1.2 as compared to the setting 3.4, and compared to the setting 5.6 in the setting 3.4. The execution probability of the reach effect is as high as 5 times (the execution probability of the reach effect is as high as 10 in the setting 1.2 and in the setting 5.6).

  As described above, when the number of times of the change of the special symbol starting from the point when the big hit game state ends is 1001 or more, the number of times of the change of the special symbol starting from the point when the big hit game state ends is 0 to 1000 times As compared with the above, the execution probability of the reach effect is significantly different depending on the setting.

  When the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the normal game state (the probability change flag is OFF and the time reduction flag is OFF) is a loss and it is determined that the reach effect is to be executed, the special symbol change time is also changed. The setting difference between the case where the number of times of the change of the special symbol starting from the end of the state is 0 to 1000 times and the case where it is 1001 times or more is remarkable.

  Specifically, when the number of times the special symbol changes from the point in time when the big hit gaming state ends is 0 to 1000 times, the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 20000 msec (normally normal reach), a random number range for effect selection. Are set to 0 to 57 in the setting 1.2, set to 0 to 58 in the setting 3.4, and set to 0 to 59 in the setting 5.6. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally medium super reach A) is defined as 58 to 89 for setting 1.2 and 59 to 89 for setting 3.4. It is stipulated, and is set to 60 to 89 in the settings 5 and 6. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40000 msec (normally medium super reach B) is set to 90 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6. These are the same as in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the number of times the special symbol changes from the point in time when the big hit gaming state ends becomes 1001 or more, the random number range for effect selection in which the change time of the special symbol is determined to be 20,000 msec (normally normal reach) is set to 1 No. is not specified in Nos. 4 to 4, and is specified in a range of 0 to 99 in the settings 5.6. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally medium super reach A) is defined in the range of 0 to 89 in the settings 1 to 4 and is not defined in the settings 5 and 6. . Furthermore, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40000 msec (normally medium super reach B) is specified in 90 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 4, and is specified in the settings 5 and 6. Absent. Therefore, in a so-called large-added situation where the number of times the special symbol changes from the point when the big hit gaming state ends is 1001 or more, the set value is suggested to the player by the reach effect executed. It becomes possible.

  In addition, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the normal game state (the probability change flag is OFF and the time saving flag is OFF) is a loss and it is determined that the reach effect is to be executed, the time when the big hit game state ends is determined as a starting point. When the number of times the special symbol changes is 1001 or more, the higher the set value is, the lower the execution probability of the reach effect is. Further, even if the reach effect is executed, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of execution of the reach effect that the fluctuation time of the special symbol is short.

  As described above, when the number of times of the change of the special symbol starting from the end of the big hit gaming state becomes 1001 or more, the higher the set value, the shorter the average of the change time of the special symbol per one time, and the unit The number of times of the change of the special symbol per time (that is, the number of lotteries) is further increased. Eventually, the expectation that the number of executions of the big hit game as seen in the unit time increases will be higher, and the probability that the big hit game will be executed in the unit time will be higher.

  When the number of times the special symbol changes from the end of the big hit game state is less than 1000 times, it is extremely difficult to estimate the set value from the execution frequency of the reach effect, but the big hit game state When the number of times the special symbol changes starting from the end of “1001” is 1001 or more, the execution frequency of the reach effect is significantly different according to the set value. There can be room to do it. With this, when a so-called "big hit" occurs, the set value set for the player can be changed without giving a direct loss to the hole (for example, without giving a game ball to the player). Providing an opportunity that can be guessed makes it possible to give the player pleasure. In addition, when the player thinks that the reach effect should normally be achieved, in the second embodiment, the setting value may be higher as the execution frequency of the reach effect is lower when the so-called large retraction is performed. Since the player can have the expectation, even if the execution frequency of the reach effect is low, it is possible to reduce a decrease in the motivation to continue the game.

  In the second embodiment, the starting point at which the number of times the special symbol is changed is counted as the time when the big hit gaming state ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. An arbitrary point in time, such as when the high-probability gaming state ends or the time-saving gaming state ends in a pachinko machine called a ST machine in which the state ends, can be set as the starting point.

  In the second embodiment, when the number of times the special symbol changes starting from a specific point in time becomes 1001 or more, the execution probability of the reach effect and the fluctuation time of the special symbol significantly differ according to the set value. It is not necessary that the number be 1001 times or more. For example, the number of times is not limited to a specific number as long as the player feels that he is absorbed.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when the number of times of the change of the special symbol starting from the specific time point is equal to or more than the specified number, the execution probability of the reach effect and the change time of the special symbol are remarkably different depending on the set value. What remarkably differs according to the set value is not necessarily limited to the execution probability of the reach effect and the fluctuation time of the special symbol. For example, the main CPU 101 provides a predetermined standby time (hereinafter, referred to as an “opening time”) between the time when the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery is determined to be a jackpot and the time when the game is actually controlled to the jackpot gaming state. ing. The main CPU 101 also provides a predetermined standby time (hereinafter, referred to as “ending time”) between the end of the big hit game state and the start of the special symbol change display. The sub CPU 201 (display control circuit 204) displays the opening effect on the liquid crystal display device 16 during the opening time, and displays the ending effect on the liquid crystal display device 16 during the ending time. In the opening production, for example, a production that indicates that the result of the special lottery was a big hit, a production that congratulates that the result of the special lottery was a big hit, and a game method (for example, right-handed) in the big hit game state An effect to teach is performed. In the ending effect, an effect indicating the amount of prize balls paid out in the big hit game state, an effect indicating the number of times the big hit game state is continued (the number of extended games), and a game state after the big hit game state ends with a high probability game An effect that indicates that the state is controlled, an effect that teaches a game method (for example, returning to left) in the gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends, an effect that displays the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine, etc. Is performed.

  Specifically, by shortening all or at least one of the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time as the set value increases, the time required for the big hit game state increases as the set value increases. Can be shorter. As a result, it is possible to increase the average of the number of times of change of the special symbol per unit time (that is, the number of lotteries), and the higher the set value, the more advantageous the game can be executed for the player.

  Further, for example, in a pachinko gaming machine having a higher expected value for a higher set value (eg, a higher set value has a higher probability of a big hit), a larger amount of prize balls are paid out in a shorter time than a low set value. In view of the possibility, all or at least one of the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time may be configured to be longer as the set value is higher. In this case, the higher the set value with a higher expected value of the ball, the longer the total time or at least one of the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time, so that the interest of the game by the high set value is ensured. In addition, it is possible to suppress the prize balls paid out per unit time.

  It should be noted that the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a game ball will be awarded to the starting opening (the first starting opening 420 and the second starting opening 440) even when the opening time, the ending time, and the big hitting game state are controlled. Upon detection, various random numbers are extracted, and a setting check process (see FIG. 188) in step S3074 or step S3082 described below is executed. If it is determined in the setting check process that the setting value data is out of the range of “0” to “5” (NO in step S3721 to be described later), even if it is controlled to the big hit gaming state. Then, the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S3722 described later), and the game cannot be advanced.

[Modified example of stop design of big hit distribution and decoration design]
Next, with reference to FIG. 173 to FIG. 175, a first modified example and a second modified example of the big hit distribution (main symbol selection rate) when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, The stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the first modification and the second modification will be described. In the first modified example and the second modified example, the selectivity of the main symbol differs according to the set value. FIG. 173 is a diagram showing a first modification of the selection rate of the main symbol (big hit type determination table) when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, and FIG. 174 is a diagram showing the special symbol big hit determination. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification about the selection rate of a main symbol (big hit type determination table) when a result is a big hit. FIG. 175 is a modified example of the decorative symbol determination table stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub-control circuit 200, and is commonly used in the first modified example and the second modified example.

[First Modification]
First, the first modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 and 175. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 173 are stored in the main ROM 102, and the contents of the table shown in FIG. 175 are stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub-control circuit 200.

  As shown in FIG. 173, in the first modification, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol based on the extracted symbol determining random number in accordance with the set value. By probability, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-3, special figure 1-4, special figure 1-5, special figure 1-6, special figure 1-7, and special figure 1 -8. However, in the first modified example, the special figure 1-1 and the special figure 1-3 are "4R ordinary big hit", the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 are "4R certain variable big hit", and the special figure 1 -5, Toku-zu 1-7, Toku-zu 2-1 and Toku-do 2-3 are "10R normal big hit", Toku-zu 1-6, Toku-zu 1-8, Toku-zu 2-2 and Toku-zu 2- 4 is "10R probable big hit".

  Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol to the special figure 1-1 (allocation probability 12.5%) and the special figure 1-2 (allocation probability 12.5) with the common probability in the settings 1 to 4. %), Special map 1-3 (allocation probability 12.5%), special map 1-4 (allocation probability 12.5%), special map 1-5 (allocation probability 12.5%), special map 1-6 (Distribution probability 12.5%), Toku-zu 1-7 (Distribution probability 12.5%), and Toku-zu 1-8 (Distribution probability 12.5%) decide. On the other hand, in the setting 5, the main symbols are set as special figure 1-1 (allocation probability 10.0%), special figure 1-2 (allocation probability 10.0%), and special figure 1-3 (allocation probability). Minute probability 15.0%), Tokuzu 1-4 (Distribution probability 15.0%), Tokuzu 1-5 (Distribution probability 10.0%), Tokuzu 1-6 (Distribution probability 10.0) %), Toku-zu 1-7 (allocation probability 15.0%), and toku-zu 1-8 (allocation probability 15.0%). Further, in the setting 6, the main symbols are set as special figure 1-1 (allocation probability 5.0%), special figure 1-2 (allocation probability 5.0%), and special figure 1-3 (allocation probability 20%). 0.0%), Toku-zu 1-4 (allocation probability 20.0%), Toku-zu 1-5 (allocation probability 5.0%), Toku-zu 1-6 (allocation probability 5.0%), One of Toku-zu 1-7 (allocation probability 20.0%) and Toku-zu 1-8 (allocation probability 20.0%) is determined.

  That is, in the special figures 1-2 and 1-4 (both 4R probability variable big hits) having the same big hit type, the combination probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high set value ( For example, in the setting 5.6, the selectivity of the special figure 1-4 (15.0 in the setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of the special figure 1-2 (10.0% in the setting 5, and 5.0% in the setting 6). %, 20.0% for setting 6) (higher for settings 1 to 4).

  Similarly, in the special figures 1-6 and 1-8 (both 10R probability variable big hits) having the same big hit type, the combination probability of both is 25.0% irrespective of the setting, but the high set value (E.g., setting 5.6), the selectivity of special figure 1-8 (15.0% in setting 5) is higher than the selectivity of special figure 1-6 (10.0% in setting 5 and 5.0% in setting 6). 0% and 20.0% for setting 6) are higher (common for settings 1 to 4).

  Furthermore, for the special figures 2-2 and 2-4 (both 10R probability variable big hits) having a common jackpot type, the combination probability of both is 50.0% regardless of the setting, but the high set value (E.g., settings 5 and 6), the selectivity of special figure 2-4 (30.000 for setting 5) is higher than the selectivity for special figure 2-2 (20.0% for setting 5, 10.0% for setting 6). 0%, 40.0% at setting 6).

  By the way, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 175, the sub CPU 201 sets the special figure 1-1, the special figure 1-3, the special figure 1-5, and the special figure 1-7. , Special figure 2-1 and special figure 2-3 (4R normal jackpot or 10R normal jackpot in which the probability change flag is not set to ON), regardless of the set value, a decorative pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 without fail. Is controlled to stop in the first mode.

  On the other hand, when it is the special map 1-2 (4R probability variable hit), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the first mode (selection rate 50.0%) or the second mode (selection rate 50.0%) regardless of the set value. ) To stop. Further, when the main symbol is the special pattern 1-4 (4R probability variable hit), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the first mode (selection rate 25.0%) or the second mode (selection rate 75) regardless of the set value. 0.0%). Here, at a high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selectivity of the special figure 1-4 is higher than the selectivity of the special figure 1-2 (10.0% for the setting 5 and 5.0% for the setting 6). (15.0% for setting 5, 20.0% for setting 6). Therefore, despite the fact that the special map 1-2 and the special map 1-4 have the same big hit type (both 4R probability variable big hits), the high setting value is smaller than the low setting value (for example, the settings 1 to 4). Thus, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in the second mode (a mode having a higher degree of expectation for the player than the first mode) is increased.

  Similarly, when it is the special figure 1-6 (10R probability big hit), the sub CPU 201 always controls to stop in the second mode irrespective of the set value. Also, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-8 (10R probability big hit), the sub CPU 201 irrespective of the set value, the second mode (selection rate 50.0%) or the specific mode (selection rate 50.%). 0%). Here, as described above, at the high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selectivity of special figure 1-6 (10.0% at setting 5, 5.0% at setting 6) is higher than that of special figure 1-6. 8 (15.0% for setting 5, 20.0% for setting 6). Therefore, although the special figure 1-6 and the special figure 1-8 have the same big hit type (both 10R probability variable big hits), the high setting value is lower than the low setting value (for example, the settings 1 to 4). Thus, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in the specific mode (the mode having the highest expectation for the player) increases.

  Further, similarly, when it is the special figure 2-2 (10R probability big hit), the sub CPU 201 irrespective of the set value, the second mode (selectivity 50.0%) or the specific mode (selectivity 50.0%) Is controlled to stop. Also, when the main symbol is the special figure 2-4 (10R probability big hit), the sub CPU 201 always controls to stop in a specific mode regardless of the set value. Here, as described above, at the high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selectivity (20.0% in setting 5 and 10.0% in setting 6) of the special figure 2-2 is higher than the selectivity of the special figure 2-2. The selectivity of 4 (30.0% in setting 5, 40.0% in setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special map 2-2 and the special map 2-4 have the same big hit type (both 10R probability big hits), the high setting value is lower than the low setting value (for example, the settings 1 to 4). Thus, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in a specific mode increases.

  As described above, when the result of the special symbol jackpot determination is a jackpot, it is possible to realize that the decoration pattern stop mode can be different depending on the set value even if the jackpot type is the same. Become. In particular, when the set value is a high set value (for example, setting 5 or 6), it is assumed that the combination probability determined for a specific big hit type (for example, 10R probability variable big hit) is the same when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. Also, it is possible to stop the decorative symbol in a mode (for example, a specific mode) having a relatively high degree of expectation for the player with a higher probability than when the value is a low set value (for example, the settings 1 to 4). Become.

[Second Modification]
Next, the second modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 and 175. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 174 are stored in the main ROM 102.

  In the first modification, it is determined whether or not the probable change flag is set ON according to the main symbol determined when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. On the other hand, in the second modified example, it is not immediately determined whether or not the probability change flag is set ON according to the main symbol determined when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. Absent. More specifically, in the second modification, unlike the first modification, a certainty change attacker (not shown) is provided, for example, inside the special winning opening 540 (see, for example, FIG. 5). And, for example, when being controlled to the big hit gaming state, when the entry of the game ball to the probability change attacker is detected, the game state after the big hit game state is ended is controlled to the high probability game state, and to the probability change attacker When the big hit game state ends without detecting the entry of the game ball, the game state after the big hit game state ends is controlled to the low probability game state. As described above, a pachinko gaming machine that is controlled to a high-probability game state based on the entry of a game ball into a probable variable attacker is also a so-called “probable loop machine”.

  As shown in FIG. 174, in the second modified example, the ease of entry of the game ball into the probable change attacker differs depending on the main symbol determined when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. ing. For example, in the special map 1-1, the big hit game state is controlled in a manner in which the game ball does not easily enter the probable attacker, and in the special chart 1-2, the big hit game state is formed in a mode in which the game ball easily enters the probable attacker. Is controlled. In the second embodiment, the number of times reduced in the case of a big hit in the "mode in which the game ball enters the probable attacker is difficult" is 100, and the "mode in which the game ball enters the probable attacker is easy". , The time saving continues until the next big hit game is executed.

  In the second embodiment, the “mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probable change attacker” is almost equal to the possibility that the game ball enters the probable change attacker while being controlled to the jackpot game state (substantially). (A low probability game state is controlled with a probability close to 100%). In addition, the “mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probable attacker” means that the hit ball is in the big hit game state as long as the game ball is fired toward the location of the probable attacker (for example, the special winning opening 540 (see FIG. 5 for example)). This is a mode in which a game ball almost enters a probability change attacker while being controlled (a high probability game state is controlled with a probability close to almost 100%). Therefore, in the second modified example, the jackpot in the "mode in which the game ball is difficult to enter the probable attacker" is referred to as "normal jackpot", and the "game ball easily enters the probable attacker". The big hit is called a "probable big hit".

  However, if it is “an aspect in which the game ball can easily enter the probable attacker”, the game state is controlled to the high-probability game state with a probability close to 100%, and if “the aspect in which the game ball enters the probable attacker is difficult”. Instead of being controlled to a low-probability gaming state with a probability close to 100%, when the “easily-entering of the game ball to the probable attacker” is “difficult to enter the probable attacker” A mode in which the game state is controlled to the high-probability gaming state with a relatively higher probability than the “mode” may be adopted.

  As a method of creating a mode in which the game ball enters the probable change attacker and a mode in which it is difficult, for example, apart from the special winning opening 540 (for example, see FIG. 5) having the probabilistic attacker inside, the probabilistic attacker is not provided. It is conceivable to provide another special winning opening (not shown). Then, a mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probable change attacker (for example, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-4, special figure 1-6, special figure 1-8, special figure 2-2, special figure 2) -4), it is controlled to the big hit game state in which the big winning opening 540 is opened, and it is difficult to enter the game ball into the probable attacker (for example, Toku-zu 1-1, Toku-zu 1-3, Toku-zu 1) -5, Toku-zu 1-7, Toku-zu 2-1 and Toku-zu 2-3), by controlling to the big hit game state in which the other big winning openings are opened without opening the big winning opening 540, It is possible to create a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probable attacker and a mode in which the game ball is easy to enter. The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment as long as it is possible to create an embodiment in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probable change attacker and an easy embodiment.

  In addition, as described above, in the case where the special winning opening 540 provided with the probability changing attacker inside and another special winning opening (not shown) not provided with the certainty changing attacker are provided, the big winning opening opened in the big hit game state. The mouth may have a setting difference. For example, at the low setting value such as the setting 1, the big hit game state in which the other big winning opening is opened more easily than the big winning opening 540, and at the high setting value such as the setting 6, the other big winning opening is higher than the other big winning opening. The higher the set value, the easier it is to select the big hit gaming state in which the big winning opening 540 is opened, such that the big winning game state in which the big winning opening 540 is opened is easily selected.

  As shown in FIG. 174, in such a second modification, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol on the basis of the extracted symbol determining random numbers to set the main symbol to the set value. With the probability according to, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-3, special figure 1-4, special figure 1-5, special figure 1-6, special figure 1-7, One of the special figures 1-8 is determined. However, in this second modification, the special figure 1-1 and the special figure 1-3 are "4R ordinary big hit", the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 are "4R certain variable big hit", and the special figure 1 -5, Tokujin 1-7, Tokujin 2-1 and Tokujin 2-3 are "10R normal big hit", Tokujin 1-6, Tokujin 1-7, Tokujin 2-2 and Tokujin 2- 4 is "10R probable big hit".

  Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol to the special figure 1-1 (allocation probability 12.5%) and the special figure 1-2 (allocation probability 12.5) with the common probability in the settings 1 to 4. %), Special map 1-3 (allocation probability 12.5%), special map 1-4 (allocation probability 12.5%), special map 1-5 (allocation probability 12.5%), special map 1-6 (Distribution probability 12.5%), Toku-zu 1-7 (Distribution probability 12.5%), and Toku-zu 1-8 (Distribution probability 12.5%) decide. On the other hand, in the setting 5, the main symbols are set as special figure 1-1 (allocation probability 10.0%), special figure 1-2 (allocation probability 10.0%), and special figure 1-3 (allocation probability). Minute probability 15.0%), Tokuzu 1-4 (Distribution probability 15.0%), Tokuzu 1-5 (Distribution probability 10.0%), Tokuzu 1-6 (Distribution probability 10.0) %), Toku-zu 1-7 (allocation probability 15.0%), and toku-zu 1-8 (allocation probability 15.0%). Further, in the setting 6, the main symbols are set as special figure 1-1 (allocation probability 5.0%), special figure 1-2 (allocation probability 5.0%), and special figure 1-3 (allocation probability 20%). 0.0%), Toku-zu 1-4 (allocation probability 20.0%), Toku-zu 1-5 (allocation probability 5.0%), Toku-zu 1-6 (allocation probability 5.0%), One of Toku-zu 1-7 (allocation probability 20.0%) and Toku-zu 1-8 (allocation probability 20.0%) is determined.

  That is, in the special figures 1-2 and 1-4 (both 4R probability variable big hits) having the same big hit type, the combination probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high set value ( For example, in the setting 5.6, the selectivity of the special figure 1-4 (15.0 in the setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of the special figure 1-2 (10.0% in the setting 5, and 5.0% in the setting 6). %, 20.0% for setting 6) (higher for settings 1 to 4).

  Similarly, in the special figures 1-6 and 1-8 (both 10R probability variable big hits) having the same big hit type, the combination probability of both is 25.0% irrespective of the setting, but the high set value (E.g., setting 5.6), the selectivity of special figure 1-8 (15.0% in setting 5) is higher than the selectivity of special figure 1-6 (10.0% in setting 5 and 5.0% in setting 6). 0% and 20.0% for setting 6) are higher (common for settings 1 to 4).

  Furthermore, for the special figures 2-2 and 2-4 (both 10R probability variable big hits) having a common jackpot type, the combination probability of both is 50.0% regardless of the setting, but the high set value (E.g., settings 5 and 6), the selectivity of special figure 2-4 (30.000 for setting 5) is higher than the selectivity for special figure 2-2 (20.0% for setting 5, 10.0% for setting 6). 0%, 40.0% at setting 6).

  By the way, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 175, the sub CPU 201 sets the special figure 1-1, the special figure 1-3, the special figure 1-5, and the special figure 1-7. , Special figure 2-1 and special figure 2-3 (4R normal jackpot or 10R normal jackpot in which the probability change flag is not set to ON), regardless of the set value, a decorative pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 without fail. Is controlled to stop in the first mode.

  On the other hand, when it is the special map 1-2 (4R probability variable hit), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the first mode (selection rate 50.0%) or the second mode (selection rate 50.0%) regardless of the set value. ) To stop. Further, when the main symbol is the special pattern 1-4 (4R probability variable hit), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the first mode (selection rate 25.0%) or the second mode (selection rate 75) regardless of the set value. 0.0%). Here, at a high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selectivity of the special figure 1-4 is higher than the selectivity of the special figure 1-2 (10.0% for the setting 5 and 5.0% for the setting 6). (15.0% for setting 5, 20.0% for setting 6). Therefore, despite the fact that the special map 1-2 and the special map 1-4 have the same big hit type (both 4R probability variable big hits), the high setting value is smaller than the low setting value (for example, the settings 1 to 4). Thus, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in the second mode (a mode having a higher degree of expectation for the player than the first mode) is increased.

  Similarly, when it is the special figure 1-6 (10R probability big hit), the sub CPU 201 always controls to stop in the second mode irrespective of the set value. Also, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-8 (10R probability big hit), the sub CPU 201 irrespective of the set value, the second mode (selection rate 50.0%) or the specific mode (selection rate 50.%). 0%). Here, as described above, at the high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selectivity of special figure 1-6 (10.0% at setting 5, 5.0% at setting 6) is higher than that of special figure 1-6. 8 (15.0% for setting 5, 20.0% for setting 6). Therefore, although the special figure 1-6 and the special figure 1-8 have the same big hit type (both 10R probability variable big hits), the high setting value is lower than the low setting value (for example, the settings 1 to 4). Thus, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in the specific mode (the mode having the highest expectation for the player) increases.

  Further, similarly, when it is the special figure 2-2 (10R probability big hit), the sub CPU 201 irrespective of the set value, the second mode (selectivity 50.0%) or the specific mode (selectivity 50.0%) Is controlled to stop. Also, when the main symbol is the special figure 2-4 (10R probability big hit), the sub CPU 201 always controls to stop in a specific mode regardless of the set value. Here, as described above, at the high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selectivity (20.0% in setting 5 and 10.0% in setting 6) of the special figure 2-2 is higher than the selectivity of the special figure 2-2. The selectivity of 4 (30.0% in setting 5, 40.0% in setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special map 2-2 and the special map 2-4 have the same big hit type (both 10R probability big hits), the high setting value is lower than the low setting value (for example, the settings 1 to 4). Thus, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in a specific mode increases.

  As described above, in the second modified example, similarly to the first modified example, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, even if the big hit type is the same, the decoration is performed according to the set value. It becomes feasible to make it possible to change the stop mode of the symbol. In particular, when the set value is a high set value (for example, setting 5 or 6), it is assumed that the combination probability determined for a specific big hit type (for example, 10R probability variable big hit) is the same when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. Also, it is possible to stop the decorative symbol in a mode (for example, a specific mode) having a relatively high degree of expectation for the player with a higher probability than when the value is a low set value (for example, the settings 1 to 4). Become.

  In each of the first and second modifications, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be changed according to the set value by changing the selectivity of the main symbol according to the set value. are doing. That is, the sub CPU 201 does not control the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the set value, but controls the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the main symbol, and as a result, the decorative symbol according to the set value. Stop symbols can be different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the control by the sub CPU 201 may be configured so that the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be different depending on the set value.

  According to the above-described first and second modifications, it is possible to provide a difference in the selection rate of the special symbol according to the set value, that is, to provide a setting difference in the number of rounds, the probability change entry rate, and the time reduction entry rate. It becomes possible.

[Processing by main control circuit]
Next, various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. However, in the following description (the description of the processing in the main CPU 101), the terms of the power switch 35, the setting switch 332, the setting key 328, the performance display monitor 334, the error notification monitor 336, the external terminal board 323, and the hall computer 700 are used. But these are shown in FIG.

[Power on process]
FIG. 176 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on process performed by the main CPU 101. For example, when a person involved in the hall turns on the power switch 35, the power of the pachinko gaming machine is turned on. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine is turned on, as shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 executes a power-on process (step S3010), a setting process related to a set value (step S3020), and a game return process (step S3030). ) Are sequentially executed. Hereinafter, each of these processes will be described. Although not shown, the main CPU 101 constantly checks whether the voltage has dropped to a predetermined level. When the voltage drops to a predetermined level due to the occurrence of a power failure or the OFF operation of the power switch 35, etc. The processing at the time of the occurrence of power interruption described later is performed.

[Power-on processing]
FIG. 177 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the power-on processing. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine is turned on, the main CPU 101 sets an initial value to a stack pointer, as shown in the figure (step S3011).

  Next, after permitting access to the RWM (main RAM 103) (step S3012), the main CPU 101 performs a sub-control reception acceptance wait process of waiting until the sub-control circuit 200 can accept a signal (step S3013). After that, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process for various devices built in the CPU (step S3014).

  Next, the main CPU 101 activates a switch related to the set value (step S3015). The switch related to the setting value is a switch used when performing the setting process in step S3020. For example, a setting key 328 for starting / ending the setting process, a setting switch 332 for changing the setting value, and the like are included. Equivalent to. After activating the switches related to the setting (step S3015), the main CPU 101 performs a reading process for each switch (step S3016), and then performs a game permission process (step S3017).

  FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing an example of the game permission process. In the game permission process of step S3017 (see FIG. 177), a game permission flag for permitting execution of the game is managed. The game permission flag is a flag indicating whether or not the execution of the game is permitted, and is set to OFF when the game cannot be executed, for example, when the work area of the RWM (main RAM 103) is not normal. . Hereinafter, the game permission process (step S3017) will be described.

  The main CPU 101 first determines whether or not the power-off state identification flag is ON (step S31710). The power-off state identification flag is a flag for identifying the state at the time of the previous power-off occurrence. That is, for example, if a power failure occurs during a setting change process to be described later or the like, it is highly likely that the power failure has occurred before the setting change process is properly completed. Can not do it. Therefore, when the power is turned on, it is possible to identify the situation at the time of the last power interruption. In the second embodiment, for example, when a power failure occurs during a normal game or during a setting confirmation process described later, the power failure situation identification flag is set to ON until the power failure occurs. On the other hand, when a power failure occurs during a setting change process described later, the power failure status identification flag is set to OFF before the power failure. Also, when a power failure occurs during an abnormal state in steps S3722 to S3727, which will be described later, the power failure status identification flag is set to OFF. The power-off state identification flag is OFF when the power of the main RAM 103 has been lost due to an initial state where the power has not been turned on yet or the power has not been turned on for a long period of time. The above “normal game” means a game in which neither the setting change process nor the setting confirmation process is performed, and does not mean a normal game state in which neither the probability change flag nor the time saving flag is OFF. (same as below).

  In step S31710, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S31720 if the power cut-off situation identification flag is ON (YES in step S31710), and proceeds to step S31720 if the power cut-off situation identification flag is OFF (NO in step S31710). Is turned off (step S31750), and then the process moves to step S31720.

  In step S31720, the main CPU 101 checks the work area of the main RAM 103. This check of the work area includes checking whether the set value data set is within a prescribed range (in the second embodiment, within a range of “0” to “5”).

  The work area of the main RAM 103 holds a general work area in which data is cleared when a backup clear process described later is performed, and a data without being cleared in principle even when a backup clear process described later is performed. It is divided into a specific work area. In this specific work area, for example, performance display data, set value data set, and the like are stored. This is data indicating a set value. In the second embodiment, the set value data of “0” to “5” correspond to each of the six set values “1” to “6”. That is, for example, if the set value set is “4”, the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is “3”.

  In step S31730, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal. If the work area is normal (YES in step S31730), the process proceeds to step S31740, and if the work area is not normal, that is, abnormal (NO in step S31730). If there is, the game permission flag is turned off (step S31760), and then the process proceeds to step S31740. For example, when the set value data is not within the specified range (in the range of “0” to “5” in the second embodiment), the main CPU 101 determines that the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal.

  In step S31740, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. In this step S31740, a power interruption occurs during a normal game or during a setting confirmation process described later (YES in step S31710), and if the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal (YES in step S31730), the game permission flag is turned on. Is determined. On the other hand, when a power failure occurs during the setting change process or during an abnormal state (NO in step S31710), and when the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal (NO in step S31730), the game permission flag is OFF. Is determined. If the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S31740), the game permission process ends. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S31740), the flow shifts to step S31770.

  In this specification, a power interruption occurring during a normal game, a power interruption occurring during a setting confirmation process, and a power interruption occurring during a setting change process are referred to as normal power interruptions, and will be described later in steps S3722 to S3727. The power interruption occurring at is assumed to be an abnormal power interruption.

  In step S31770, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power has been turned on while the setting key 328 has been turned ON (the operation to turn on the power switch 35 has been performed), that is, whether or not the setting key switch signal has been turned ON. It is determined whether or not the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S31770), the process proceeds to step S31780, and if the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S31770), the process proceeds to step S31810.

  In step S31780, main CPU 101 determines whether or not backup clear switch 330 is pressed, that is, whether or not the backup clear signal is ON, and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S31780). Then, the process shifts to step S31790. If the backup clear signal is OFF, the process shifts to step S31810.

  In step S31790, the main CPU 101 sets the game permission flag to ON, and proceeds to step S31800.

  As described above, even if the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S31740) due to the situation at the time of the previous power interruption or the abnormal working area of the main RAM 103 (NO in step S31740), the main CPU 101 sets the setting key switch signal ON ( If YES in step S31770 and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S31780), the game permission flag is set to ON in step S31790. That is, when both the power-on operation and the press operation of the backup clear switch 330 are performed while the setting key 328 is turned on, the game permission flag is turned on even if the game permission flag is turned off. However, if at least one of the setting key switch signal and the backup clear signal is OFF, the game permission flag is not set from OFF to ON.

  In step S31800, the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to ON, and ends the game permission process. The backup clear flag is a flag indicating whether or not it is necessary to perform a backup clear process described later. When the backup clear process needs to be performed, the backup clear flag is set to ON and when the backup clear process is performed. The backup clear flag is set to OFF.

  In step S31810, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that an error code indicating that execution of a game is not permitted (the game permission flag is OFF) is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. After performing the processing in step S31810, the main CPU 101 ends the game permission processing. In this way, by displaying the error code on the error notification monitor 336, the person in charge of the hole confirms the error code displayed on the error notification monitor 336 and is not in a state where the game can be executed (the game permission flag is OFF). ) Can be understood. In the second embodiment, when the game permission flag is OFF, the game is executed only when both the power-on operation and the backup clear switch 330 are pressed while the setting key switch 328 is turned ON. The permission flag can be set to ON. That is, when the game permission flag is OFF, the power supply operation is performed to temporarily stop the power supply, and the game permission flag does not turn ON unless a setting change process described later is executed. Note that, in the above description, the game permission process ends when the process of step S31810 is performed. Alternatively, the process returns to step S31740 after the process of step S31810 is performed, and the game permission flag is set to ON. Until is established (in FIG. 178, until YES is determined in step S31780), the processing of steps S31740 to S31810 may be looped.

[Setting process]
FIG. 179 (a) is a flowchart illustrating an example of the setting process in step S3020 (see FIG. 176), and FIG. 179 (b) is a flowchart illustrating another example of the setting process in step S3020. 179 (b) is different from FIG. 179 (b) only in the processing when it is determined in step S3021 that the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S3021) and other processing (step S3021). Steps S3022 to S3028) are common to both. Hereinafter, the setting process will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 179 (a), first, in step S3021, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. If the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S3021), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S3022. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S3021), the setting change process (step S3024) and the setting confirmation process (step S3024). The setting process ends without executing any of the steps S3026).

  When the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S3022) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S3023), the main CPU 101 performs a setting change process (step S3024), and turns ON the setting key switch signal (YES in step S3022). ) And the backup clear signal is OFF (NO in step S3023), a setting confirmation process (step S3026) is performed. Therefore, when the power is turned on while the setting key 328 is turned ON, the setting change process (step S3024) is executed if the backup clear signal is ON, and the setting confirmation process (step S3024) if the backup clear signal is OFF. S3026) is performed.

  When the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S3022) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S3027), the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to ON (step S3028), and changes the setting (step S3028). The setting process ends without executing either the S3024) or the setting confirmation process (step S3026). If the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S3022) and the backup clear signal is OFF (NO in step S3027), the main CPU 101 ends the setting processing without executing the processing in step S3028 (setting change). The processing (step S3024) and the setting confirmation processing (step S3026) are not executed).

  In other words, if the previous power interruption is a normal power interruption occurring during a normal game or during a setting confirmation process described later, and the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal, YES is determined in the step S3021. At this time, the main CPU 101 changes the setting (step S3024) and confirms the setting (step S3026) according to the operation status of the setting key 328 when the power is turned on and the operation status of the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330. Alternatively, a backup clear flag process (step S3028) is executed. When the power is turned on without operating either the setting key 328 or the backup clear switch 330, the setting change processing (step S3024), the setting confirmation processing (step S3026), and the backup clear flag processing (step S3028) Without executing any of the above, the process proceeds to the game return process (step S3030), and after the game return process (step S3030) is executed, the game can be executed.

  On the other hand, if the previous power interruption is abnormal power interruption, or if the previous power interruption is normal power interruption but power interruption occurred during the setting change process, NO is determined in step S3021. . At this time, the main CPU 101 performs the setting change processing (step S3024) and the setting confirmation processing (step S3026) regardless of the operation state of the setting key 328 when the power is turned on or the operation state of the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330. Neither the backup clear flag ON (step S3028) nor the backup clear flag is executed, and the setting process ends. Therefore, if a power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure is abnormal power failure, the setting key switch signal is turned on (YES in step S31770) and the backup clear signal is turned on (YES in step S31780). (That is, both the power-on operation and the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 are performed in a state where the setting key 328 is turned ON and the setting is changed to a setting change state), and the set value is determined. Only when the setting change process (step S3024) is executed, the process shifts to the game return process of step S3030, and after the game return process (step S3030) is executed, the game can be executed. Therefore, when neither the setting key 328 nor the backup clear switch 330 is operated, or even if only one of them is operated, the setting change processing (step S3024) and the setting confirmation processing (step S3026) ) And the backup clear flag process (step S3028) are not executed, and the routine goes to the game return process (step S3030). However, in the game return process (step S3030), an abnormal time process (see step S3038 in FIG. 183 to be described later) is executed, the game cannot be executed, and the game is stopped.

  As described above, in the example of the setting process illustrated in the flowchart of FIG. 179 (a), when a power interruption occurs during the setting change process or when the previous power interruption is abnormal, the power is turned on. The setting change process (step S3024), the setting confirmation process (step S3026), and the backup clear flag ON (step S3028) regardless of the operation status of the setting key 328 and the operation status of the operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330. The setting process has been completed without executing the process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, as in the other example of the setting process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 179 (b), when the power interruption occurs during the setting change process or / and when the previous power interruption is abnormal. In the case of, the main CPU 101 forcibly executes the setting change process (step S3024) regardless of the operation state of the setting key 328 when the power is turned on or the operation state of the operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330. You may do so. If a power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure is abnormal power failure, the operation status of the setting key 328 and the operation status of the backup clear switch 330 when the power is turned on are changed. Regardless, by forcibly executing the setting change process (step S3024), when the power is turned on with the operation of the setting key 328 or the backup clear switch 330 being forgotten, the power is turned on again. It is possible to reduce the troublesomeness of forcing a disconnection.

  In the flowchart shown in FIG. 179 (a), if NO is determined in the step S3021, the setting process is performed without determining both the operation status of the setting key 328 and the operation status of the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330. Finished. Similarly, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 179 (b), if NO is determined in the step S3021, the setting is performed without determining any of the operation state of the setting key 328 and the operation state of the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330. A change process (step S3024) is being executed. However, instead of these, the operation status of the setting key 328 and / or the operation status of the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 are determined, and the setting process is terminated or the setting change process is performed (step S3024) regardless of the determination result. May be executed.

[Setting change processing]
FIG. 180 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the setting change process. The setting change process in step S3024 (see FIG. 179) is a process for changing the set value that has been set. However, the setting change process may be ended with the same set value as the set value. . Further, as described above, when the game permission flag is OFF, the game permission flag does not turn ON unless the power cut operation is performed to temporarily stop the power supply and then execute the setting change process.

  First, in step S32410, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S32410), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the setting change process. Even if the game permission flag is OFF when the power is turned on, if the setting key switch signal is ON and the backup clear signal is ON, the game permission flag is set ON in step S31790 (see FIG. 178). Therefore, a setting change process is executed.

  If the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S32410), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S32420 and executes backup clear processing. This backup clear processing will be described later.

  After executing the backup clear processing in step S32420, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S32430, stores the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 in the register, and proceeds to step S32440. Note that the backup clearing process may be executed at any timing as long as the period from the start of the setting change process to the end thereof.

  In step S32440, the main CPU 101 performs output setting of the setting change security signal. This setting change security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323 described above. Note that the setting change security signal is output for a fixed time or more (for example, 50 msec or more) within the output period of the signal.

  In step S32450, the main CPU 101 makes a notification setting so that the setting value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. On the performance display monitor 334, the set value data stored in the register is converted into a set value and displayed. For example, when the set value data stored in the register is “3”, the performance display monitor 334 displays a set value “4” corresponding to the set value data “3”. However, if the set value data stored in the register corresponds to the set value set, the numbers need not necessarily be displayed on the performance display monitor. For example, the set value data “0” to “5” are respectively associated with “A” to “F”, and when the set value data stored in the register is, for example, “3”, the corresponding “D” May be displayed on the performance display monitor 334. In step 2450, the performance display monitor 334 converts the set value data stored in the register into the set value and displays the set value. The set initial value (for example, “1”) may be displayed. When the pachinko gaming machine is powered on for the first time, the main CPU 101 displays a predetermined initial value (for example, “1”) or a value not normally displayed (for example, “8”) on the performance display monitor 334. May be displayed. When displaying a value that is not normally displayed on the performance display monitor 334, the main CPU 101 does not set a valid setting value and turns off the game permission flag unless it is determined in step S32510 that the setting switch 332 has been pressed. It may be.

  In step S32460, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the setting change code indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Thus, the person in charge of the hall can confirm that the setting change process is being performed by checking the display on the error notification monitor 336.

  In step S32470, main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key switch signal is OFF. If the setting key switch signal is not OFF (NO in step S32470), the main CPU 101 shifts to step S32510.

  In step S32510, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting switch 332 has been pressed. If the setting switch 332 has been pressed (YES in step S32510), the process proceeds to step S32520, where the setting value stored in the register is set. After updating the data, the process returns to step S32440. On the other hand, if the setting switch 332 is not pressed (NO in step S32510), the process returns to step S32440. That is, in the setting change process, unless it is determined that the setting key switch signal is ON (unless YES in step S32470), steps S32510, S32520, and S32440 to step S32470 are looped (steps S32510, S32520, and step S32520). S32440 to step S32470 are repeated).

  When the setting switch 332 is pressed (YES in step S32510), the main CPU 101 performs notification setting in step S32450 so that the updated setting value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. .

  Unless the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S32470), the main CPU 101 changes the setting value data stored in the register from “0” to “5” each time the setting switch 332 is pressed. (Returns to “0” when the setting switch 332 is pressed while the setting value data is “5”). Thus, each time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the display on the performance display monitor 334 is also cyclically displayed. However, each time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the set value data stored in the register may be circulated and reduced from “5” to “0”, or the circulating increase and the circulating may be performed according to the pressing mode of the setting switch 332. It may be possible to execute both of the reduction.

  In step S32470, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S32470), the process proceeds to step S32480. In Step S32480, the main CPU 101 ends the loop of Step S32510, Step S32520, and Step S32440 to Step S32470.

  In step S32480, the main CPU 101 stores the set value data stored in the register in the main RAM 103. When the process of step S32480 is executed, the set value is determined. That is, in the setting change processing, the setting value is determined based on the operation of turning off the setting key switch signal (determination of YES in step S32470), and the operation of turning off the setting key switch signal If the setting switch 332 is only depressed without executing (the step S32510, the step S32520, and the step S32440 to the step S32470), only the setting value data stored in the register is updated. The setting value data stored in the main RAM 103 is not updated.

  After the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF in step S32470 (YES in step S32470), even if the operation of returning setting key 328 is performed again, the operation is not detected (the setting key switch signal is detected as ON). However, the set value cannot be changed unless a power-off operation (OFF operation of the power switch 35) is performed. At this time (when the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF in step S32470 (YES in step S32470), and then the operation of returning the setting key 328 is performed again), the main CPU 101 sets the setting stored in the register. The value data may be displayed on the performance display monitor 334 so that the setting can be confirmed (setting confirmation processing is performed). At that time (when setting confirmation processing is performed), the main CPU 101 may set the game permission flag to OFF until the setting key switch signal is turned OFF.

  By the way, when a power failure occurs during the setting change process or when the previous power failure is abnormal power failure, the operation status of the setting key 328 and the backup status when the power is turned on (at the time of power failure recovery) thereafter. A case in which the setting change process (see FIG. 180) is forcibly executed regardless of the operation status (the state of the setting key switch signal or the backup clear signal) of the pressing operation of the clear switch 330 (see FIG. 179 (b)). , The setting change process is executed even if the setting key 328 is not turned ON (the setting key switch signal remains OFF). As described above, when the setting change process (step S3024) is performed without turning on the setting key 328, the setting key switch signal may remain OFF. Therefore, the main CPU 101 sets the setting key in step S32470. It is not immediately determined that the switch signal is OFF (YES in step S32470). Instead, it is determined that the setting key switch signal is OFF when the setting key 328 is once turned ON and then turned OFF. The process moves to S32480 (set value is determined). Note that in this case, the main CPU 101 may determine that the setting key switch signal has been turned ON, and further determine that the setting key switch signal has been turned OFF, thereby determining YES in step S32480. Alternatively, YES may be determined in step S32480 by detecting that the setting key switch signal has been changed from ON to OFF without detecting that the setting key switch signal has been turned ON. In the above, if a power failure occurs during the setting change process or if the previous power failure is abnormal power failure, regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal and backup clear signal at the time of power failure recovery, it is forcibly performed. Although the setting change process is described as being executed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the state may be forcibly changed to the setting change state by the main CPU 101 irrespective of the state of the setting key switch signal or the backup clear signal at the time of power recovery. Also, regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal and the backup clear signal at the time of power failure recovery, the power failure is restored in the setting change state at the time of power failure (that is, the state is maintained when the power failure occurs, At the time of power failure recovery, a process of returning to the held state may be executed irrespective of the state of the setting key switch signal and backup clear signal at the time of power failure recovery).

  In step S32490, the main CPU 101 makes a notification setting so that the performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. In step S32500, the main CPU 101 makes a notification setting so that the initialization code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336, and changes the setting. The processing ends.

  When the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF in step S32470 (YES in step S32470), a command indicating that the setting key switch signal has been turned OFF, that is, a command indicating that the setting change process has been completed, is provided. The initialization command is transmitted to the sub CPU 201.

  When the setting change process in step S3024 (see FIG. 179) ends, the setting process in step S3020 (see FIG. 176) ends, and the flow proceeds to the game return process in step S3030 (see FIG. 176).

  If the game can be executed through the game return process after the setting change process in step S3024 (see FIG. 179) is executed, a certain period after the game is started, or At a predetermined timing after is started, information indicating that the setting change process may have been performed, information indicating that the setting change process may have changed to a higher set value, Information indicating that there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed to a lower setting value by the setting change processing, and the setting value has been changed in a plurality of steps by the setting change processing (for example, two or more steps such as setting 6 to setting 4). Information related to the setting change process, such as information indicating that there is a possibility, may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 or the like, for example. For example, it is possible to make the variation pattern of the effect or the decorative pattern performed by the liquid crystal display device 16 or the like different between when the setting change process is executed and when it is not executed, or to set a higher set value by the setting change process. It may be different between when it is changed and when it is changed to a low setting value, or it may be different when the setting value is changed more than one step by the setting change process and when it is not changed more than one step. May be.

  Further, the output period of the setting change security signal and the period during which the setting change code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336 are from the start of the setting change process to the end of the setting change process. Has become. However, these periods need not be exactly the same.

  Note that the above-described setting change process is a process that is internally executed regardless of whether the game permission flag is ON or OFF. In addition, a command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 at a predetermined timing, such as when the setting change process in the step S3024 is started, every time the setting switch is pressed in the step S32510, or when the process in the step S32480 is executed. Accordingly, the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, and the like may perform notification that the setting is being changed, notification that the setting value has been changed, notification that the setting change has been completed, and the like. .

[Backup clear processing]
FIG. 181 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the backup clearing process in step S32420 (see FIG. 180). This backup clearing process is a process for clearing information stored in the work area of the main RAM 103. However, in the backup clear processing, as described above, information stored in the general work area is cleared, but information stored in the specific work area is not cleared in principle.

  The main CPU 101 first determines in step S32421 whether or not the backup clear flag is OFF. When the backup clear flag is OFF (YES in step S32421), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the backup clear process, and when the backup clear flag is ON (NO in step S32421), the process proceeds to step S32422. Move on to

  In step S32422, the main CPU 101 clears the work area of the RWM (main RAM 103). However, if the previous power interruption occurred during the setting change processing, there is a possibility that all or a part of the backup clear processing has been executed during the setting change processing in which the previous power interruption occurred. Therefore, if the previous power interruption occurred during the setting change processing, the work area of the main RAM 103 is cleared together with the backup clear processing executed during the setting change processing in which the previous power interruption occurred, In this backup clearing process, only partial clearing may be performed.

  In the process of step S32422, as described above, the performance display data and the set value data stored in the specific work area are not cleared in principle. However, when it is determined that the set value data stored in the RWM (main RAM 103) is abnormal (for example, the set value data set is out of the specified range), the set value data is also cleared. You. When it is determined that the performance display data stored in the RWM (main RAM 103) is abnormal, the performance display data is also cleared. When the set value data is abnormal, the set value data is also cleared. In this case, the game permission flag is turned off, and the game is permitted unless the setting change process (for example, see FIG. 180) is performed. The flag may not be turned on.

  In step S32423, the main CPU 101 makes a notification setting so that information indicating that the backup clear processing has been executed (information indicating that the work area of the main RAM 103 has been cleared) is displayed. Thereafter, in step S32424, the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to OFF, and ends the backup clear processing. The notification setting (information indicating that the backup clear processing has been executed) is transmitted, for example, to the sub-control circuit 200, and the display control circuit 204 (see FIG. 9) indicates that the backup clear processing has been executed. The image shown is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, for example.

  When the backup clearing process is performed along with the setting change process (see, for example, FIG. 180), in step S32450 of the setting change process, the main CPU 101 causes the setting value information to be displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Make notification settings. Similarly, even when the backup clearing process is performed without the setting change process, the notification setting may be performed so that the setting value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334.

[Setting confirmation process]
FIG. 182 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the setting confirmation process. The setting confirmation processing in step S3026 (see FIG. 179) is processing for confirming the set values that have been set. The set values that have been set are stored in the main RAM 103.

  First, in step S32610, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S32610), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the setting confirmation process.

  If the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S32610), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S32620 and performs output setting of a setting confirmation security signal. This setting confirmation security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323 described above. Note that the setting confirmation security signal is output for a predetermined time or more (for example, 50 msec or more) within the output period of the signal.

  In step S32630, the main CPU 101 makes a notification setting so that the setting value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. The set value information displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is information indicating set value data that has been set. For example, when the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is “3”, “4” corresponding to the set value data “3” is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 as information indicating the set value.

  In step S32640, main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that a setting confirmation code indicating that setting confirmation is being performed is displayed on error notification monitor 336. Thus, the person in charge of the hall can confirm that the setting confirmation processing is being performed by confirming the display on the error notification monitor 336.

  In step S32650, main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key switch signal is OFF. If the setting key switch signal is not OFF (NO in step S32650), the process returns to step S32620. That is, in the setting confirmation processing, unless it is determined that the setting key switch signal is ON (unless YES in step S32650), the processing of steps S32620 to S32650 is looped (the processing of steps S32620 to S32650 is repeated). It will be.

  In step S32650, when determining that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S32650), main CPU 101 shifts to step S32660. In step S32660, the main CPU 101 ends the processes in steps S32620 to S32650.

  When the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF in step S32650 (YES in step S32650), a power interruption recovery command is transmitted to sub CPU 201 as a command indicating that the setting confirmation processing has been completed in step S37 described later. Will be done.

  In step S32660, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that the performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. In step S32670, the main CPU 101 performs non-report setting so that no information is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. To end.

  When the setting confirmation processing in step S3026 (see FIG. 179) ends, the setting processing in step S3020 (see FIG. 176) ends, and the flow proceeds to the game return processing in step S3030 (see FIG. 176).

[Game return processing]
FIG. 183 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the game return process. In the setting process of step S3030 (see FIG. 176), a process of returning to a state in which a game can be executed is performed on the assumption that the game permission flag is ON. Hereinafter, the game return processing will be described.

  First, in step S3031, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S3031), the main CPU 101 executes the abnormal time process of step S3038. This abnormal processing will be described later.

  If the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S3031), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S3032 and performs a process of validating all switches.

  In step S3033, the main CPU 101 determines whether the backup clear signal is off. When the backup clear signal is OFF (YES in step S3033), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S3034.

  In step S3034, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power-off state identification flag is ON. If the power-off state identification flag is ON (YES in step S3034), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S3035. As described above, the power-off state identification flag is set to ON when a power failure occurs during a normal game (during a game in which neither the setting change process nor the setting confirmation process is performed) or during the setting confirmation process. If power failure occurs during the change process, it is set to OFF. Therefore, when the previous power interruption occurs during the normal game or the setting confirmation process, the process of step S3035 is performed.

  In step S3035, the main CPU 101 performs an initial setting of a work area that requires an initial value when the power is restored.

  Next, in step S3036, when the gaming state at the time of power-off recovery is the high-probability gaming state, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting indicating that the game state is the high-probability gaming state.

  Next, in step S3037, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of power failure recovery (power failure recovery command) to the sub-control circuit 200. This command also includes setting value information on the set value that has been set. Upon ending this processing, the main CPU 101 ends the game return processing of step S3030 (see FIG. 176), and ends a series of power-on processing. Thereby, execution of a game is attained. The above-mentioned power interruption recovery command functions as a command indicating that the power interruption has been recovered or a command indicating that the setting confirmation processing has been completed.

  In step S3033, if the main CPU 101 determines that the backup clear signal is ON (NO in step S3033), the main CPU 101 shifts to the backup clear processing in step S3039. This backup clearing process is the same as the backup clearing process of step S32420 shown in FIG. 180 (the backup clearing process shown in FIG. 181), and thus the description is omitted.

  When the backup clear processing in step S3039 ends, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S3040 and performs initialization of a work area that requires an initial value when initializing the RWM (main RAM 103).

  Next, in step S3041, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a command for RWM initialization (initialization command) to the sub-control circuit 200. Upon ending this processing, the main CPU 101 ends the game return processing of step S3030 (see FIG. 176), and ends a series of power-on processing. Thereby, execution of a game is attained. Note that the above initialization command is a command indicating that the setting change processing has been completed (backup clear processing has also been executed) or a command indicating that backup clear processing without setting change processing has been executed. Function.

  The output period of the setting confirmation security signal and the period during which the setting confirmation code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336 are from the start of the setting confirmation process to the end of the setting confirmation process. Has become. However, these periods need not be exactly the same.

[Error processing]
FIG. 184 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the abnormal time process. As described above, the abnormal time process of step S3038 (see FIG. 183) is executed when the game permission flag is determined to be OFF (NO in step S3031) in the process of step S3031 (see FIG. 183). Processing.

  First, in step S3381, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting to the sub-control circuit 200 an abnormal command indicating that the game permission flag is OFF, that is, the game cannot be executed. Upon receiving the abnormal command, the sub CPU 201 determines that the backup is defective, and can display information indicating that the pachinko gaming machine is not normal on the liquid crystal display device 16 under the control of the sub CPU 201 (display control circuit 204).

  Note that the main CPU 101 does not necessarily need to transmit the abnormal command. For example, the sub CPU 201 determines that the backup is defective when a normal command from the main CPU 101 cannot be received for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the power supply to the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 9) is started. You may make it.

  In step S3382, the main CPU 101 performs output setting of the abnormal security signal. This abnormal security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323 described above.

  In step S3383, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting such that an error code indicating that execution of the game is not permitted (the game permission flag is OFF) is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Thus, by checking the display on the error notification monitor 336, the person in charge of the hall can understand that the game is not in a state where the game can be executed (the game permission flag is OFF).

  In step S3384, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power interruption detection signal is ON. The power interruption detection signal is a signal that turns on when the voltage drops to a predetermined level. If the main CPU 101 determines that the power interruption detection signal is ON (YES in step S3384), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S3385 and executes a power interruption occurrence process. On the other hand, when the power interruption detection signal is OFF (NO in step S3384), main CPU 101 loops steps S3382 to S3384 (the processing of steps S3382 to S3384 is repeated).

[Process when power failure occurs]
FIG. 185 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process at the time of power failure occurrence. As described above, the main CPU 101 constantly checks whether or not the voltage has dropped to a predetermined level. When the voltage has dropped to the predetermined level, the main CPU 101 performs a process at the time of power failure occurrence.

  First, the main CPU 101 performs an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S33851). Then, a checksum in the work area of the main RAM 103 is calculated, and the calculation result and various game data are stored (saved) in the backup area of the main RAM 103 (step S33852). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the main RAM 103 before the power failure are properly held when the power is restored. In this way, various game data stored in the main RAM 103 can be held even when the power supply is stopped.

  Next, the main CPU 101 sets a power-off state identification flag in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 (step S33853). That is, as described above, the main CPU 101 determines whether the power interruption has occurred during a normal game (during a game in which neither the setting change process nor the setting confirmation process is performed) or during the setting confirmation process. The flag is set to ON, and if it occurs during the setting change processing, it is set to OFF.

  After completing the processing in steps S33851 to S33853, the main CPU 101 prohibits access to the RWM (main RAM 103), enters an infinite loop, and prepares to stop power supply.

  As described above, when the game permission flag is OFF, the power supply operation is performed to temporarily stop the power supply as described above, and the game permission flag is not turned ON unless a setting change process described later is executed. Has become.

  By the way, in this processing, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a short-time power outage or the like (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power outage”) and the processing at the time of power failure occurrence is started, it is possible to return from the infinite loop. It may disappear. In order to avoid such adverse effects, a watchdog timer (not shown) is provided in the main CPU 101 of the present embodiment, so that the watchdog timer is reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is updated periodically during normal processing, but is not updated when the process starts when a power failure occurs. As a result, the process starts when a power failure occurs due to a momentary power failure, and even if the process enters the infinite loop of FIG. 185, the reset is performed after a predetermined period has elapsed, and the main CPU 101 starts up in the same process as when the power is turned on.

  Note that a rewritable nonvolatile memory (EEPROM or the like) may be provided instead of the backup area of the RWM (main RAM 103). In this case, there is an advantage that a regular power supply is not required to back up data.

  Alternatively, the entire area of the RWM (main RAM 103) may be used as a backup area in which data is backed up by constant power supply. In this case, it is not necessary to save the data stored in the main RAM 103 to another area when the power is turned off. Further, even when the power is restored, it is not necessary to read the save data to the processing area, so that the load required for these processes is reduced.

[Flow of power-on processing viewed from the operator side]
The above is the control flow of the power-on processing by the main CPU 101. The flow of the power-on processing viewed from a person who performs the operation (for example, a person related to the hall) will be briefly described.

[Setting change process flow]
First, a setting change process, that is, a flow for changing a set value that has been set will be described. In order to change the set value, it is necessary to first perform a power-off operation (OFF operation of the power switch 35). Then, in a state where the power is not turned on, the setting key 328 is turned ON, and both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35 are performed.

  When the power switch 35 is turned on, the operations of all the switches are invalidated, and only the operations related to the setting (for example, the operation of the setting key 328 and the operation of the setting switch 332) among all the switches are enabled, and the setting change is performed. The processing is started, and the setting can be changed.

  When the setting change processing is started, a setting changing code indicating that the setting change processing is being performed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Further, the display on the performance display monitor 334 switches from the light-off state to the information indicating the set value set after the power switch 35 is turned on.

  In the setting change processing, backup clear processing, that is, initialization processing of the main RAM 103 (clearing of the work area of the main RAM 103, notification of clearing of the work area of the main RAM 103, initialization of the work area of the main RAM 103, commands for initializing the RWM When the transmission is performed, a sound indicating that the backup clear processing has been performed is output from the speaker 24. As will be described later, the fact that the backup clear process has been executed is not displayed, but the fact that the backup clear process has been executed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 instead of or in addition to the audio output from the speaker 24. It may be displayed in an area.

  In the setting change process, every time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the information indicating the set value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is circulated and displayed. That is, the information indicating the set value is increased by one each time the set switch 332 is pressed when the set value is “1” to “5”, but is set when the set value is “6”. Pressing returns to "1" and is displayed.

  When the setting key 328 is turned OFF during the setting change process, the setting change state ends, and the set value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is set. Further, the display of the error notification monitor 336 is changed from the setting change code to the initialization code, the performance display (base value) is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, and the operation of all switches is enabled.

  As described above, during the setting change process, only the operation related to the setting (for example, the operation of the setting key 328 and the operation of the setting switch 332) among all the switches is enabled, and all the other switches remain disabled. . When the setting key 328 is turned off, all the switches are activated.

[Setting confirmation process flow]
Next, a setting confirmation process, that is, a flow for confirming the set setting values will be described. The setting confirmation processing is internally executed on condition that the game permission flag is ON, and is not executed when the game permission flag is OFF internally.

  In order to confirm the set value that has been set, on condition that the game permission flag is internally ON, the setting key 328 is turned ON while the power is not turned on, and the backup clear clear switch 330 The ON operation of the power switch 35 is performed without pressing the.

  When the power switch 35 is turned on, the operation of all switches is disabled, only the operation of the setting key 328 of all switches is enabled, the setting check process is started, and the set settings can be checked. It becomes.

  When the setting confirmation processing is started, a setting confirmation code indicating that the setting confirmation processing is being performed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Further, the display on the performance display monitor 334 switches from the light-off state to the information indicating the set value set after the power switch 35 is turned on.

  During the setting confirmation process, the information indicating the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 does not change even if the setting switch 332 is pressed.

  When the setting key 328 is turned OFF during the setting confirmation processing, the setting confirmation state ends, the display of the error notification monitor 336 is changed from the setting confirmation code to non-display, and the performance display (base value) is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Is displayed and the operation of all switches is enabled.

  As described above, during the setting confirmation process, only the setting key 328 among all the switches is enabled, and all the other switches remain disabled. Therefore, the setting switch 332 remains invalidated. When the setting key 328 is turned off, all the switches are activated. As described above, the setting confirmation process may be a process that can be executed during the normal game, regardless of the operation of the power switch 35.

[Flow in abnormal processing]

  As described above, when the game permission flag is internally OFF, the setting change processing can be executed, but the setting confirmation processing cannot be executed. Therefore, when the game permission flag is internally OFF, an operation for executing the setting change process (when the power is not turned on, the setting key 328 is turned ON, and the backup clear clear switch 330 is pressed. If the user performs an operation for executing the setting confirmation process without performing the ON operation of the power switch 35), performs a backup process without the setting change process (details will be described later), or When only the operation of turning on the power is performed, the abnormal-time process is executed. In the following, a flow in the abnormal time process will be described.

  After the power switch 35 is turned on, the operation of all switches is disabled, and only the operation related to the setting (for example, the operation of the setting key 328 and the operation of the setting switch 332) among all the switches is enabled (internal operation). Abnormal processing is started in general). The reason why the operation related to the setting is activated is to enable the game permission flag to be turned ON by executing the setting change process.

  When the abnormal time process is started, an error code indicating that the game cannot be executed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Thereby, the operator can confirm that the game cannot be executed. Further, the performance display monitor 334 displays information indicating an error.

  Further, when the abnormal time process is started, the operation related to the setting is also invalidated. That is, the operation of all switches is invalidated. Therefore, when the abnormal time process is started, no response is made even if any operation is performed, and the pachinko game is set to a state in which the game can be executed unless the above-described setting change process is performed after the power switch 35 is turned off. Machine cannot be restored. Note that the operation of all the switches is disabled in a situation in which a game in which all devices controlled by the sub-control circuit 200 are completely stopped cannot be played, and a device controlled by some of the sub-control circuits 200 (for example, The LEDs 25) include those in a controllable state.

[System timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the system timer interrupt processing by the main CPU 101. The system timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, every 2 ms. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 saves the value of each register in the stack area of the main RAM 103 (step S3051).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a random number update process for updating various random number values (step S3052).

  Next, the main CPU 101 executes switch input detection processing for detecting input signals from various switches (step S3053. The switch input detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 187).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a timer update process for updating the values of various timers (step S3054).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a command output process of outputting (transmitting) various commands to the sub-control circuit 200 (step S3055).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game information output process of outputting (transmitting) various game information to the sub-control circuit 200 (step S3056). The game information is information related to a game processed in the main control circuit 100, the sub control circuit 200, the payout / firing control circuit 300, and the like, and is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout / firing control circuit 300, and the hall computer 700. You.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of restoring the saved values of the registers (step S3057). When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the system timer interrupt processing.

[Switch input detection processing]
FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing a switch input detection process by the main CPU 101. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described system timer interrupt process. As shown in the drawing, the main CPU 101 executes a start opening winning detection process (step S3061). The start opening winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a general winning opening passage detection process (step S3062). In the general winning opening passage detection processing, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning in the general winning openings 53, 54, 55, 56 is set.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening passage detection process (step S3063). In the special winning opening passage detection processing, payout information indicating the number of payouts, for example, is set when winning in the special winning opening 540.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a ball passage detector passage detection process (step S3064). In the ball passage detector passage detection processing, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol game (based on the detection of the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 49 (for example, see FIG. 5) by the ball passage detector (not shown)) Random number value). When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the switch input detection processing.

[Start opening winning detection process]
FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the start opening winning detection processing by the main CPU 101. The start opening winning detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described switch input detection process. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first starting port switch 421 (step S3071). If a game ball has been detected by the first starting port switch 421 (YES in step S3071), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S3052. If a game ball has not been detected by the first start port switch 421 (NO in step S3071), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S3081.

  In step S3072, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process. This setting check processing will be described later.

  In step S3073, the main CPU 101 extracts various random numbers such as the jackpot determination random number and the symbol determination random number for the first special symbol, and performs a process of setting payout information according to the first starting opening winning.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of retained first winning opening winnings (the number of retained special first symbols) is less than four (step S3074). If the suspended number is less than four (YES in step S3074), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S3075. When the number of the holdings is four (NO in step S3074), the main CPU 101 discards the various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420, and proceeds to the processing in step S3080.

  In step S3075, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of pending first winning opening winnings.

  Next, the main CPU 101 stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 420 in the main RAM 103 until a change start condition (start condition) of the first special symbol is satisfied. Performed (Step S3076). As a result, the display of the change of the first special symbol for the extracted random number is suspended until the start condition is satisfied.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a first special stop symbol determination process (step S3077). In the first special stop symbol determination process, a large hit random number determination table, a symbol determination table, and a large hit type determination for the first special symbol are determined based on the random number for jackpot determination and the random number for symbol determination extracted for the first special symbol. With reference to the table, a symbol designating command, a hit selection symbol command, and the like for a main symbol (a first special symbol scheduled to be stopped and displayed) are determined.

  Next, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern determination process (step S3078). The fluctuation pattern determination processing is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described starting opening winning detection processing. Further, the main CPU 101 refers to the special symbol fluctuation time determination table of FIG. 170 (or FIG. 172), and selects a fluctuation pattern based on the hit determination result, the reach determination random number value, and the effect selection random number value. , To perform the determination process.

  As shown in FIG. 170 and FIG. 172, since the fluctuation display time of the decorative symbol is stored in association with the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the above-described fluctuation pattern determination processing is stored. The pattern designation command is substantially information that can represent the fluctuation time.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a command to increase the number of held first winning opening winnings (step S3079). The first start opening winning number increase command is a command indicating that the number of held first special symbols is increased by one, and is sent to the sub-control circuit 200 together with a command indicating the variation pattern determined in the process of step S3078. Is sent.

  In step S3080, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the number-of-first-start-port winning winning number overflow command, and proceeds to step S3081. The first starting opening winning number overflow command is a command indicating that the first starting opening has been won when the holding number of the first special symbol is the upper limit (for example, 4). Is sent.

  As is clear from FIG. 188, the reason why the overflow command for the number of retained first opening winnings is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 is that the setting value data is determined to be normal in the setting check processing in step S3072 described later. It is assumed that

  In step S3081, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second starting port switch 441 has detected a game ball (step S3081). When a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441 (YES in step S3081), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S3082. If a game ball has not been detected by the second starting port switch 441 (NO in step S3081), the main CPU 101 ends the starting port winning detection process.

  In step S3082, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process. This setting check processing will be described later, but is the same processing as step S3072.

  In step S3083, the main CPU 101 extracts various random numbers such as the jackpot determination random number and the symbol determination random number for the second special symbol, and performs a process of setting payout information according to the second starting opening winning.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of retained second starting opening winnings (the number of retained second special symbols) is less than four (step S3084). If the suspended number is less than four (YES in step S3084), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S3085. When the number of the holdings is four (NO in step S3084), the main CPU 101 discards various random numbers extracted based on winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, and ends the starting port winning detection process.

  In step S3085, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of held second starting opening winnings.

  Next, the main CPU 101 stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 440 in the main RAM 103 until the variation start condition (start condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied. Performed (Step S3086). Thereby, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol for the extracted random number is suspended until the start condition is satisfied.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a second special stop symbol determination process (step S3087). In the second special stop symbol determination process, as in the first special stop symbol determination process, the second special symbol is determined based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination and the random number value for symbol determination extracted for the second special symbol. With reference to the big hit random number determination table, the symbol determination table, and the big hit type determination table, a symbol designation command, a big hit selection symbol command, and the like for the main symbol (a second special symbol to be stopped and displayed) are determined.

  Next, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern determination process (step S3088). This variation pattern determination processing is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described start-up winning detection processing, as in step S3078, and the main CPU 101 refers to the special symbol variation time determination table in FIG. 170 (or FIG. 172). Then, a process of selecting a variation pattern is performed based on the hit determination result, the reach determination random number value, and the effect selection random value value.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a command to increase the number of held second winning opening winnings (step S3089). The second start opening winning number increase command is a command indicating that the number of held special second symbols is increased by one, and is sent to the sub control circuit 200 together with a command indicating a variation pattern determined in the processing of step S3088. Is sent. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the start-up winning detection process.

  When the game ball prize to the first starting port 420 and the game ball prize to the second starting port 440 are detected at the same time, either the setting check processing in step S3072 or the setting check processing in step S3082 is performed. Only one of them may be performed.

  In the second embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441 (YES in step S3081), the number of retained second starting port winnings is four (NO in step S3084). Even if the main CPU 101 does not transmit the command for overflowing the second starting port winning number to the sub-control circuit 200, the main CPU 101 discards various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440. Thus, the start opening winning detection processing has been completed. This is because the setting value suggestion effect described later can be effectively performed in the non-time saving game state.

[Setting check process]
FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting check process by the main CPU 101. This setting check process is the same in step S3072 and step S3082 (both refer to FIG. 188). The setting check process is a process for checking whether the set value set is normal. In this setting check processing, for example, the same processing as the work area check of the RWM (main RAM 103) executed in step S31720 (see FIG. 178) may be performed. However, in the second embodiment, the set settings are set. The emphasis is on checking if the value is normal.

  As shown in the figure, first, in step S3721, the main CPU 101 checks whether or not the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is appropriate (for example, within a specified range). As described above, in the second embodiment, “0” to “5” are stored in the main RAM 103 as set value data corresponding to the set values “1” to “6”. Is in the range of “0” to “5”. If the set value data is within the range of “0” to “5” (YES in step S3721), the setting check processing ends. If the set value data is outside the range of “0” to “5” (NO in step S3721), the process moves to step S3722.

  In step S3722, the main CPU 101 sets the game permission flag to OFF, and proceeds to step S3723.

  In step S3723, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If the main CPU 101 determines that the special symbol is being changed and displayed (YES in step S3723), the process proceeds to step S3724, and if it is determined that the special symbol is not being changed and displayed (NO in step S3723), the process proceeds to step S3725.

  In step S3724, the main CPU 101 prohibits the stop of the special symbol during the variable display. That is, with reference to the special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. 170 (or FIG. 172), even if the variation time of the special symbol determined in step S3078 or step S3088 (both refer to FIG. 188) has elapsed, The variable display of the special symbol is continued, and the special symbol is not stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the flow shifts to step S3726.

  For example, if a game ball wins in the starting ports 5442 and 440 while the special symbol is being displayed by the main CPU 101, the step is performed during the display of the special symbol (before the variable display of the special symbol ends). The setting check process of S3072 (or step S3082) may be executed. When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting is not normal (NO in step S3721) in the setting check process, even if the special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner (the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the fluctuating display is not displayed. ), The game permission flag is turned off, and the processing at the time of abnormality is executed. In this case, since the game cannot be executed unless the power is once turned off and the setting change processing is executed, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol during the fluctuation display is cleared in the backup clear processing including the data on hold. The Rukoto.

  In step S3726, the main CPU 101 prohibits firing of the game ball. That is, control is performed so that power is not supplied from the dispensing / firing control circuit 300 (see FIG. 9) to the firing solenoid (not shown). Therefore, even if the player grips the firing handle 32 and performs a turning operation in the clockwise direction, the game ball is not fired and the game cannot be played.

  When prohibiting the launch of the game ball in step S3726, the main CPU 101 shifts to an abnormal time process in step S3727.

  In step S3725, the main CPU 101 prohibits the change display of the special symbol, so that the next new change display is not started. For example, even if the special symbol change display is suspended when the special symbol is not being displayed, or the special symbol change display is stopped and the next variable display is waiting to be started, the special symbol change display is started. Not done. After ending the processing in step S3725, the main CPU 101 moves to step S3726.

  In the abnormal time process of step S3727, the main CPU 101 performs the same process as the abnormal time process of step S3038 (see FIG. 183). That is, the processing of steps S3381 to S3384 shown in FIG. 184 is performed until the power-off detection signal ON is detected, and when the power-off detection signal ON is detected, the processing at the time of power-off occurrence in step S3385, ie, FIG. Steps S33851 to S33854 shown in 185 are performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the setting check process is performed at the time of winning a game ball to the first starting port 420 and at the time of winning a game ball to the second starting port 440, and the main RAM 103 If the set value data stored in is not normal, the execution of the game is prohibited. Therefore, even during the execution of the game, if the setting value data is not normal, it is impossible to continue the game, and unless the power is once turned off and turned on again to perform the setting change process, The game cannot be executed. Thereby, for example, it is possible to prevent the game from being continuously performed in a state where the setting is not normal.

  Further, when the main CPU 101 determines in step S3721 that the set value data is not appropriate, the power is temporarily turned off and the power is turned off again as described above, even if the change display of the special symbol has not been started yet and has been suspended. Since the game cannot be executed unless the setting change processing is performed after the player inputs the data, all the data (for example, the random number for the jackpot determination) stored in the main RAM 103 are cleared. That is, regardless of whether the held various data is based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting port 420 or based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting port 440, all Cleared. As a result, it is possible to prevent the various types of data related to the suspension from being processed based on abnormal setting values, and to enhance security.

  In addition, as described above, the same processing is performed in step S3072 and step S3082 (both refer to FIG. 188) in the setting check processing. Therefore, when it is determined that the setting value data is not normal in the setting check process (step S3072) performed when the game ball has won the first starting port 420 (NO in step S3721), the main CPU 101 is determined in step S3724. Prohibits stopping the second special symbol during the variable display not only when the special symbol during the variable display is the first special symbol but also when the special symbol during the variable display is the second special symbol. Similarly, when it is determined that the setting value data is not normal (NO in step S3721) in the setting check process (step S3082) performed when a game ball has won the second starting port 440, the process proceeds to step S3724. The main CPU 101 prohibits the stop of the first special symbol during the variable display not only when the special symbol during the variable display is the second special symbol but also when the special symbol during the variable display is the first special symbol.

  Similarly, when it is determined that the set value data is not normal in the setting check process (step S3072) performed when the game ball has won the first starting port 420 (NO in step S3721), the process proceeds to step S3725. In addition, the main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the second special symbol not only when the special symbol for which the variable display is suspended is the first special symbol but also when the special symbol is the second special symbol. Similarly, when it is determined that the setting value data is not normal (NO in step S3721) in the setting check process (step S3082) performed when the game ball has won the second starting port 440, the process proceeds to step S3725. The main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the first special symbol not only when the special symbol for which the variable display is suspended is the second special symbol but also when it is the first special symbol.

  In the second embodiment, the setting check process is performed at the time of turning on the power (see step S31730 in FIG. 178) and at the time of winning a game ball to the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, at the time of setting confirmation processing (see step S3024 of FIG. 179), at the time of setting change processing (see step S3026 of FIG. 179), at the time of execution of backup clear processing (see FIG. 181), and a special symbol fluctuation display Is started, when a special symbol stops changing, when a passage is detected by the passage gate switch 49a (see FIG. 9), when a normal symbol starts changing, when a normal symbol stops changing, a setting check is triggered by a predetermined timing. Processing may be performed. The above-mentioned predetermined timing is an example list. The setting check process may be performed not only at a specific timing but also at a plurality of timings (for example, all or a part of the above timings). Even in such a case, for example, it is possible to prevent the game from being continuously performed in a state where the setting is not normal.

  Further, in the second embodiment, if it is determined in the setting check processing that the set value data is not normal, the game is immediately turned off by turning off the game permission flag regardless of whether the game is in the jackpot game state or not. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing at which the setting value data is determined to be abnormal in the setting check process and the timing at which the execution of the game is disabled may be shifted. As a result, it is possible to reduce a player's sense of loss that may be caused by the fact that the variable display is not performed even when the game ball has won the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440. However, since it is not preferable to perform various determination processes (for example, a big hit determination process or the like) in a state where the set value data is not normal, the various symbol determination processes are not performed, and the special symbol variation display is performed for a predetermined time. It is preferable to stop the special symbol with a loss.

  Although not shown in FIG. 189, when the game permission flag is set to OFF in step S3722, it is preferable that the stop of the ordinary symbol is also prohibited if the ordinary symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. . Further, when the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, it is preferable to prohibit the variable display of the normal symbol.

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing main control main processing by the main CPU 101. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine is turned on, the main CPU 101 performs an initial setting process as shown in the figure (step S3091). In this processing, the main CPU 101 performs processing such as the above-described power-on processing.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs an initial value random number update process (step S3092). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of updating the initial value random number counter.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol control process (step S3093). The special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol control process (step S3094). The normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol display unit control process (step S3095). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines the special symbol display unit (the first special symbol display unit 73, and the like) according to the result of the special symbol control process and the result of the normal symbol control process stored in the main RAM 103 in steps S3093 and S3094. The control signal for driving the second special symbol display unit 74) and the normal symbol display unit 71 is stored in the main RAM 103. As a result, the main CPU 101 transmits a control signal to the special symbol display unit (the first special symbol display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74) and the normal symbol display unit 71, and the special symbol display unit (the first special symbol display unit). The display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74), and the normal symbol display unit 71 perform variable display and stop display of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol based on the received control signal.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game information data generation process (step S3096). In this processing, the main CPU 101 generates a game state command related to game information data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, and the hall computer 700, and stores it in the main RAM 103.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a storage / game state data generation process (step S3097). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates storage / game state data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 based on the value of the probable change flag and the value of the time reduction flag, and stores the storage / game state data in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 returns to the process of step S3092.

[Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. Numerical values (“00” to “08”) written in parentheses to the left of each process shown in FIG. 6 indicate the value of the control state flag. This control state flag is stored in a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 advances the special symbol game by executing a process corresponding to the numerical value of the control state flag.

  As shown in FIG. 191, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading a control state flag (step S3101). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines, based on the read value of the control state flag, whether or not to execute each processing of steps S3102 to S110 described below. The control state flag indicates the state of the special symbol game, and enables execution of any one of steps S3102 to S110. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to a waiting time set for each process of steps S3102 to S110. Before reaching the predetermined timing, the processing related to another subroutine is executed without executing each processing. Of course, the above-described system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 186) is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage check process (step S3102). In this process, when the control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol memory check process, the main CPU 101 checks the number of suspended symbols in the variable display of the special symbol, and if the number of symbols is not “0”. In the case where there is a reserved ball, the result of the jackpot determination, the result of the determination of the main symbol, the result of the determination of the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the like obtained in the starting opening winning detection processing are acquired. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variable display time management process (step S3093) described later, and sets the control pattern flag to the fluctuation pattern acquired in the current process. The variable display time of the corresponding special symbol is set in the waiting time timer. That is, the special symbol variation time management process described below is set to be executed after the variation display time of the special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the starting opening winning detection process. On the other hand, when the reserved number is “0” (when there is no reserved ball), the main CPU 101 performs a demonstration display process for displaying a demonstration screen. This special symbol storage check processing will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol fluctuation time management process (step S3103). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variation time management process, and, when the variation display time of the special symbol has elapsed, sets the control status flag to a special symbol described later. The value ("02") indicating the display time management process (step S3104) is set, and the wait time after determination is set in the wait time timer. That is, it is set so that the special symbol display time management process described later is executed after the elapse of the wait time after determination set in the process of step S3103.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol display time management process (step S3104). In this process, when the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process, and the waiting time after determination set in the process of step S3103 has elapsed, the main CPU 101 determines that the big hit is determined. It is determined whether or not the result is a “big hit”. If the big hit determination result is "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value ("03") indicating a big hit start interval management process (step S3105) described later, and sets the big hit start interval as the big hit start interval. Set the corresponding time in the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of step S3104 elapses, it is set so that the jackpot start interval management process described later is executed. On the other hand, when the result of the big hit determination is not “big hit”, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“08”) indicating a special symbol game end process (step S3110) described later in the control state flag. That is, in this case, it is set so that a special symbol game end process described later is executed. This special symbol display time management processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a big hit start interval management process (step S3105). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value (“03”) indicating the big hit start interval management process, and that the time corresponding to the big hit start interval set in the process of step S3104 has elapsed, In order to open the winning opening 540, the variables located in the main RAM 103 are updated based on the data read from the main ROM 102. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“04”) indicating a process of opening a special winning opening (described later) (step S3106), and sets an upper limit time for opening the special winning opening 540 (for example, 30 seconds) is set in the special winning opening time timer. In other words, the processing is set so that the processing for opening the special winning opening described later is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening opening process (step S3106). In this process, first, when the control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the special winning opening process, the main CPU 101 determines that the special winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than a predetermined number, and It is determined whether one of the conditions that the upper limit time has elapsed (the special winning opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied (a predetermined closing condition is satisfied). When one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates a variable positioned in the main RAM 103 to close the special winning opening 540. Then, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“05”) indicating the later-described winning prize opening ball monitoring process (step S3107) in the control state flag and sets the monitoring time of the remaining sphere in the winning prize mouth to a waiting time timer. I do. That is, by this processing, after the elapsed ball monitoring time in the special winning opening set in step S3107 elapses, it is set so that the processing for monitoring the remaining balls in the special winning opening described later is executed. Immediately before the end of the special winning opening processing, a round display command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs the processing for monitoring the remaining sphere in the special winning opening (step S3107). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to the value (“05”) indicating the processing for monitoring the remaining sphere in the special winning opening, and when the monitoring time for the remaining sphere in the special winning opening has elapsed, the main CPU 101 sets the value of the opening counter for the special winning opening. It is determined whether or not the condition that the value is equal to or more than the maximum winning opening number (the last round) is satisfied. When determining that the above condition is not satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value ("06") indicating the special winning opening reopening waiting time management process in the control state flag. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a time corresponding to the interval between rounds in the waiting time timer. That is, by this processing, after the time corresponding to the interval between rounds elapses, it is set so that the waiting time management processing before reopening of the special winning opening described later is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3107 that the above condition is satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value indicating the jackpot end interval processing (“07”) in the control state flag and sets a time corresponding to the jackpot end interval (the jackpot end interval). Time) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval set in this process elapses, it is set so that the jackpot end interval process described later is executed.

  Next, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the special winning opening release frequency counter is not equal to or more than the maximum value of the special winning opening number, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening pre-opening waiting time management process (step S3108). In this processing, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“06”) indicating the waiting time management processing before reopening of the special winning opening, and when the time corresponding to the interval between rounds elapses, the main CPU 101 opens the special winning opening. The value of the number-of-times counter is stored and updated so as to increase by "1". Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating the processing during opening of the special winning opening in the control state flag. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 30 seconds) in the special winning opening time timer. That is, it is set so that the above-described processing during opening of the special winning opening (step S3106) is performed again in this processing. In addition, immediately before the end of the special winning opening re-opening waiting time management process, a special winning opening opening display command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200.

  In addition, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the special winning opening opening frequency counter is equal to or more than the maximum value of the special winning opening number, the main CPU 101 performs a big hit end interval process (step S3109). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the value (“07”) indicating the special symbol game end process when the control state flag indicates the big hit end interval process (“07”) and the time corresponding to the big hit end interval has elapsed. 08 ”) is set in the control state flag. That is, this process is set so that the special symbol game ending process described later is executed after the process of step S3109. In addition, when the above-mentioned main symbol is any of Toku-zu 1-2, Toku-zu 1-8 and Toku-zu 2-2, the main CPU 101 performs control to shift the gaming state to the high-probability gaming state. If the main symbol described above is one of the special maps 1-1, 1-3 and 2-1, the control to set the gaming state to the low-probability gaming state (probable change flag OFF) is performed. Do.

  Next, when the big hit game state ends or when the result of the big hit determination is “losing”, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol game ending process (step S3110). In this process, when the control state flag is the value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process, the main CPU 101 updates the storage so as to decrease the data indicating the number of held items (startup storage information) by “1”. I do. Further, the main CPU 101 updates the special symbol storage area in order to perform the next change display of the special symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process in the control state flag. That is, this process is set so that the above-described special symbol storage check process (step S3102) is executed after the process of step S3110. When the special symbol game end processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol control processing.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the special symbol game is advanced by sequentially setting various values in the control state flag. Specifically, when the gaming state is not the big hit gaming state and the result of the big hit determination is “losing”, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags to “00”, “01”, “02”, and “08”. Set in order. Thereby, the main CPU 101 determines the special symbol storage check process (step S3102), the special symbol variation time management process (step S3103), the special symbol display time management process (step S3104), and the special symbol game end process (step S3110). Are executed in this order at a predetermined timing.

  When the gaming state is not the big hit gaming state and the big hit determination result is “big hit”, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of “00”, “01”, “02”, and “03”. I do. As a result, the main CPU 101 executes the special symbol storage check process (step S3102), the special symbol variation time management process (step S3103), the special symbol display time management process (step S3104), and the big hit start interval management process (step S3105). At a predetermined timing in this order, and control to shift to the big hit gaming state is executed.

  Further, when the transition control to the big hit gaming state is executed, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of “04”, “05”, “06”. Accordingly, the main CPU 101 performs the above-described processing for opening the special winning opening (step S3106), the processing for monitoring the remaining balls in the special winning opening (step S3107), and the waiting time management processing before reopening the special winning opening (step S3108) in this order. The game is executed at a predetermined timing, and the big hit game state is executed.

  In addition, if the termination condition of the big hit gaming state is satisfied during the big hit gaming state, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of “04”, “05”, “07”, and “08”. Accordingly, the main CPU 101 performs the above-described processing during the opening of the special winning opening (step S3106), the processing for monitoring the remaining balls in the special winning opening (step S3107), the interval processing for ending the big hit (step S3109), and the processing for ending the special symbol game (step S3110). At the predetermined timing in this order, and the big hit gaming state ends.

  As described above, in the special symbol control processing, the processing flow is branched according to the status. Also, in the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 197 described later) in step S3094 in the main control main process shown in FIG. 190, the process flow is branched according to the status, similarly to the special symbol control process.

  The processing program of the second embodiment is programmed so that a pure return process from a small module to a parent module can be performed by a call instruction when the process is branched according to the status. As a result, the capacity of the program can be reduced in the second embodiment as compared with the case where a jump table is arranged to execute the above processing.

[Special design memory check process]
FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage check process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol storage check process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described special symbol control process. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 reads a control state flag from a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103 by a load process (step S3111).

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the read control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process (step S3112). When determining that the control state flag is not “00” (NO in step S3112), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state flag is “00” (YES in step S3112), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S3113.

  In step S3113, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of reserves (the number of second start storages) of the second start opening winning (the change display of the second special symbol) is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the reserved number of the second opening prize is “0” (YES in step S3113), the process proceeds to step S3114, and determines that the retained number of the second opening prize is not “0”. If it is determined (NO in step S3113), the process proceeds to step S3121.

  In step S3114, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of reserves (first start storage number) of the first start opening winning (variable display of the first special symbol) is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of pending first opening openings is not “0” (NO in step S3114), the process proceeds to step S3115, and determines that the number of retained first opening entrance winnings is “0”. If it is determined (YES in step S3114), the process proceeds to step S3120.

  In step S3115, the main CPU 101 subtracts “1” from the value of the first start storage number corresponding to the number of pending first start opening winnings. In the second embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether data is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display or on hold. In the first special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display is stored as the start storage information. Then, in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to the change display (holding ball) of the first special symbol held for four times. Is stored as start storage information. In addition, the start storage information of each first special symbol start storage area includes, for example, a random number for jackpot determination, a random number for symbol determination extracted at the time of winning the first opening 420, and data indicating the determined variation pattern. Is included.

  Next, in step S3116, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage transfer process based on the first winning opening winning. In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data in the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. Thereafter, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S3117.

  In step S3117, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variation time management process in the control state flag. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol effect start command to the sub control circuit 200.

  In step S3118, the main CPU 101 performs a big hit determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 extracts the random number for jackpot determination extracted at the time of winning the starting opening and set earlier in the first special symbol start storage area (0) or the second special symbol start storage area (0). Based on this, reference value data is acquired with reference to a big hit determination table (not shown) corresponding to the type of the winning start port. Then, based on the acquired determination value data, the main CPU 101 determines whether it is a “big hit” or a “loss” (big hit determination).

  Next, in step S3119, the main CPU 101 sets the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol determined in the fluctuation pattern determination processing of step S3078 or step S3088 (both shown in FIG. 188) in the waiting time timer. . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process.

  Also, in step S3120, main CPU 101 performs a demonstration display process for displaying a demonstration screen. In this process, the main CPU 101 transmits a demonstration display command to the sub control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process.

  In step S3121, the main CPU 101 subtracts “1” from the value of the second start storage number corresponding to the number of suspended second start opening winnings. In the second embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a memory for starting the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display or on hold. In the second special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display is stored as start storage information. In the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the special symbol game corresponding to the change display (reserved ball) of the second special symbol held for four times. Is stored as start storage information. In addition, the start storage information of each second special symbol start storage area includes, for example, a random number for jackpot determination, a random number for symbol determination extracted at the time of winning the second opening 440, and data indicating the determined variation pattern. Is included.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage transfer process based on the second starting opening winning (step S3122). In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data in the second special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the second special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. Thereafter, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S3117, executes the processes of steps S3118 and S3119, and ends the special symbol storage check process.

[Special symbol display time management processing]
FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the special symbol display time management processing by the main CPU 101. The special symbol display time management process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described special symbol control process. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management processing (step S3131). When it is determined that the control state flag is not the value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management processing (NO in step S3131), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is the value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management processing (YES in step S3131), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S3132.

  In step S3132, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the waiting time timer (waiting time) is “0”. In this processing, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time (variable display start waiting time) after the variable display set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0” (NO in step S3132), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management processing. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0” (YES in step S3132), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S3133.

  In step S3133, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit". If it is determined that the special symbol game is a “big hit” (YES in step S3133), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S3134. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol game is not “big hit” (NO in step S3133), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S3140.

  In step S3134, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a big hit flag indicating a big hit. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S3135.

  In step S3135, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the time-saving counter, the time-saving flag, and the probability change flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S3136.

  In step S3136, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value ("03") indicating the big hit start interval management process in the control status flag.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the big hit start interval time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) in the waiting time timer (step S3137).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a big hit start command corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 103 (step S3138). Thereby, the big hit start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

  Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the big hit type determination table (see FIG. 169, FIG. 173 or FIG. 174), and refers to the special symbol (the type of the symbol designating command), the upper limit of the number of rounds (the upper limit of the number of open winning openings). ) Is set in the main RAM 103, and a round number display LED pattern flag is set (step S3139). The round number display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether or not the remaining round number is displayed in a predetermined pattern. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

  In step S3140, the main CPU 101 performs a time saving number subtraction process. This time reduction processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value ("08") indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag (step S3141). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

[Time saving number subtraction process]
FIG. 194 is a flowchart illustrating the time-saving number subtraction process by the main CPU 101. The time saving number subtraction process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol display time management process described above or the big hit end interval process described later. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the time saving counter is 0 (step S3151). The time reduction counter is a subtraction counter that counts until the set time reduction number becomes zero. If the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (YES in step S3151), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S3154. When the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (NO in step S3151), the main CPU 101 ends the time saving number subtraction process. Although details will be described later, the number of times set as the time saving number counter in the second embodiment is 100 or 10000.

  In step S3152, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time reduction counter.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines again whether or not the value of the time saving counter is 0 (step S3153). When the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (YES in step S3153), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S3154. When the value of the time saving counter is not 0 (NO in step S3153), the main CPU 101 ends the time saving number subtraction process.

  In step S3154, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting “0” as the time saving flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the time saving number subtraction process.

[Big hit end interval processing]
FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end interval processing by the main CPU 101. The big hit end interval process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the big hit end interval processing (step S3161). When it is determined that the control state flag is not the value indicating the big hit end interval processing (“07”) (NO in step S3161), the main CPU 101 ends the big hit end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is the value indicating the big hit end interval processing (“07”) (YES in step S3161), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S3162.

  In step S3162, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer is “0”. In this processing, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the big hit end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0” (NO in step S3162), the main CPU 101 ends the big hit end interval processing. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0” (YES in step S3162), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S3163.

  In step S3163, the main CPU 101 clears the special winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag. The large winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag is used as a management flag indicating whether or not the number of rounds at the time of a big hit is displayed by an LED light emission pattern.

  Next, the main CPU 101 clears the round number distribution flag (step S3164). The round number distribution flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and indicates whether the large winning opening 540 is to be periodically opened and closed a predetermined number of times even during one round. Flag. If the special winning opening 540 is opened and closed periodically even during one round, the round number distribution flag becomes “1”. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol big hit end display command to the sub control circuit 200.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value ("08") indicating the special symbol game ending process in the control state flag (step S3165).

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit" (step S3166). If it is determined that the special symbol game is “big hit” (YES in step S3166), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S3167. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol game is not “big hit” (NO in step S3166), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S3174.

  In step S3167, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a big hit flag to ON in a predetermined area of the main RAM.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a probability change big hit (step S3168). If it is a probability change jackpot (YES in step S3168), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S3169. If it is not a probability change jackpot (NO in step S3168), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S3171.

  In step S3169, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting “1” as the probability change flag.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting “1” as the time saving flag (step S3171).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a prescribed number of times saved in the number of times saved counter (step S3172). In the second embodiment, referring to the big hit type determination table (FIG. 169, FIG. 173, or FIG. 174), a big hit with 100 time savings (for example, Toku-zu 1-1, Toku-zu 1-3, Toku-zu 2) When it is -1 or the like, the time saving counter is set to 100 times, and the big hit where the time saving continues until the next big hit gaming state is executed (for example, Toku-zu 1-2, Toku-zu 1-8, Toku-zu 2) -2, etc.), the time-saving counter is set to 10000 times. However, the time saving counter set when the time saving is a big hit in which the time saving continues until the next big hit game state is executed is not limited to 10,000 times, and even if the game is continued from the opening of the hall to the closing of the hall, The number may be any number that cannot actually occur. In this way, by setting the number of times that cannot actually occur even if the game is continued from the opening of the hall to the closing of the store in the time saving counter, the time saving is substantially continued until the next big hit game state is executed. Will be done. Further, when the hit is a big hit with the number of time savings of 100, the counter processing is performed (the time saving counter is set to 100), and when the hit is a big hit in which the time saving continues until the next big hit gaming state is executed, the flag processing is performed. (The time saving game state is continued as long as the time saving flag is ON).

  Next, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern table setting process (step S3173). The variation pattern table setting processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the big hit end interval processing.

  In step S3174, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the big hit flag, that is, a process of turning off the big hit flag that is set ON in a predetermined area of the main RAM 34.

  In step S3175, the main CPU 101 executes the above-described time saving number subtraction process (step S3175). When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the big hit end interval processing.

[Variation pattern table setting processing]
FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern table setting processing by the main CPU 101. The variation pattern table setting process is called as a subroutine during the power-on process or the big hit end interval process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power is on (step S3181). If the power is on (YES in step S3181), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S3182. If the power is not turned on (NO in step S3181), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S3183.

  In step S3182, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 1 as a table pattern when referring to the special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. 170 (or FIG. 172). Table pattern 1 corresponds to a table pattern in the case where both the probable change flag and the time saving flag are ON (both big hit and loss) in the special symbol change time determination table shown in FIG. 170 (or FIG. 172). .

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (step S3183). If the time saving flag is ON (YES in step S3183), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S3184. If the time saving flag is OFF (NO in step S3183), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S3185.

  In step S3184, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 2 as a table pattern when referring to the special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. 170 (or FIG. 172). When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the fluctuation pattern table setting processing. Table pattern 2 corresponds to the table pattern when the time reduction flag is OFF (both big hit and loss) in the special symbol fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG. 170 (or FIG. 172).

  In step S3185, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 3 as a table pattern when referring to the special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. 170 (or FIG. 172). When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the fluctuation pattern table setting processing. Table pattern 3 corresponds to the table pattern in the case where the time reduction flag is ON (both big hit and loss) in the special symbol fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG. 170 (or FIG. 172).

[Normal symbol control processing]
FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol control processing by the main CPU 101. The normal symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. The numerical value (“00” to “04”) written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 197 indicates a normal symbol control state flag. Is stored in a predetermined storage area. The main CPU 101 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the numerical value of the normal symbol control state flag.

  As shown in FIG. 197, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading a normal symbol control state flag (step S3191). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads out the ordinary symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute various processes in steps S3192 to S196 described below based on the read value of the ordinary symbol control state flag. The normal symbol control state flag indicates a game state of the normal symbol game, and enables execution of any one of steps S3162 to S166. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to a waiting time set for each process of steps S3162 to S166. Before reaching the predetermined timing, other subroutine processing is executed without executing each processing. Of course, the above-described system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 186) is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol storage check process (step S3192). In this process, when the ordinary symbol control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the ordinary symbol memory check process, the main CPU 101 checks the number of suspended symbols in the variable display of the ordinary symbol, and determines that the number of retained symbols is “0”. If not, a process such as a jackpot determination is performed. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“01”) indicating the later-described ordinary symbol variation time monitoring process (step S3193) in the ordinary symbol control state flag, and sets the variation time determined in this process. Set the wait time timer. That is, by the process of step S3192, after the determined fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol has elapsed, the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process described later is set to be executed.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol variation time monitoring process (step S3193). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the ordinary symbol control status flag to a value (“01”) indicating the ordinary symbol variation time monitoring process, and when the variation time of the ordinary symbol has elapsed, sets the ordinary symbol control status flag to be described later. A value ("02") indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S3194) is set, and a wait time after confirmation (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in a wait time timer. That is, by the processing of step S3193, after the set waiting time after the determination has elapsed, it is set so that the later-described ordinary symbol display time monitoring processing is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S3194). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process, and that if the waiting time after determination set in the process of step S3193 elapses, the big hit It is determined whether or not the result of the determination is “big hit”. If the big hit determination result is "big hit", the main CPU 101 performs a normal electric accessory opening setting process, and sets a value (step S3195) indicating a normal electric accessory opening process (step S3195) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. "03") is set. That is, the processing is set so that the ordinary electric accessory opening processing described later is executed by this processing. On the other hand, if the result of the big hit determination is not “big hit”, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating a normal symbol game end process (step S3195) described later in the ordinary symbol control state flag. That is, in this case, it is set so that a later-described ordinary symbol game ending process is executed.

  Next, when the result of the big hit determination is “big hit” in step S3194, the main CPU 101 performs a normal electric accessory opening process (step S3195). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“03”) indicating the normal electric accessory opening process, the main CPU 101 determines that a predetermined number of prizes have been won while the ordinary electric accessory 460 is being opened. It is determined whether one of the condition and the condition that the opening upper limit time of the ordinary electric accessory 460 has elapsed (the ordinary electric opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied. When one of the above conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates a variable located in the main RAM 103 in order to close the blade member 4620 (for example, see FIG. 5) of the ordinary electric accessory 460. Then, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating a later-described ordinary symbol game end process (step S3196) in the ordinary symbol control state flag. That is, this process is set so that a later-described ordinary symbol game ending process is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol game end process (step S3196). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the normal symbol game end process, the main CPU 101 reduces the data indicating the number of suspended symbols in the variable symbol display by “1”. Is updated. Further, the main CPU 101 updates the ordinary symbol storage area in order to perform the next variation display of the ordinary symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating the ordinary symbol storage check process in the ordinary symbol control state flag. That is, after the process of step S3196, it is set so that the above-described ordinary symbol storage check process (step S3192) is executed. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the normal symbol control process.

[Sub control circuit main processing]
On the other hand, the sub CPU 201 executes the sub control circuit main processing. The sub-control circuit main processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 198 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main processing performed by the sub CPU 201. The sub-control circuit main process is a process that is started when the power is turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 198, the sub CPU 201 performs initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, and the like (step S3201).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the counter value of the watchdog timer (step S3202). In the watchdog timer, a reset time (for example, 2000 ms) is set at the time of start-up, and when a service pulse is not written (time-out), power interruption processing is executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes an operation means input process (step S3203).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes a command analysis process (step S3204). The command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes an effect mode determination process (step S3205). The effect mode determination process is a process of determining an effect mode displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 based on various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

  The effect mode determined in the effect mode determination process (step S3205) also includes a setting suggestion effect that indicates the set value that has been set. The setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to a first example and a second example.

(First example)
The first example of the setting suggestion effect is performed on the condition that the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (for example, see FIG. 5) exceeds the upper limit of holding. For example, the sub CPU 201 counts the first start winning port overflow point, and when the main control circuit 100 transmits the number-of-first-start-winning-prize hold number overflow command, the sub-CPU 201 adds 1 to the first start winning port overflow point. I do. Then, when the first start winning port overflow point reaches a predetermined point (for example, 50 points), the main CPU 101 determines that a setting suggestion effect is to be executed in the above-described effect mode determination processing. In a non-time saving game state in which the time saving flag such as a normal game state is OFF, it is not easy to win a game ball to the first starting port 420. Therefore, when the first starting winning port overflow occurs, the player is not discouraged. . Therefore, by performing the setting suggestion effect on the condition that the first starting winning opening overflow has occurred in the non-time-saving game state, it is possible to suppress discouragement of the player without giving a direct loss to the hole. It becomes possible. In addition, some of the players interrupt the emission of the game balls when the winning of the game balls to the first starting port 420 is the holding upper limit. In this regard, the game can be promoted by performing the setting suggestion effect on condition that the winning of the game ball of the first starting port 420 exceeds the hold upper limit.

  In the first example of the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect is performed when the first start winning opening overflow point reaches a predetermined point. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The setting suggestion effect may be performed based on the transmission of the pending number overflow command from the main control circuit 100. In this case, since the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect increases, for example, it is preferable that the setting is difficult to guess at the setting if the setting suggestion effect is performed only once. For example, it is difficult to guess the setting only by information obtained from one setting suggestion effect, but it is possible to estimate the setting by collecting a plurality of information obtained from a plurality of setting suggestion effects. It is conceivable to do so.

  In addition, as described above, the reason why the overflow command for the number of pending first start-up openings is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 is that it is determined that the setting value data is normal in the setting check processing in step S3072. is there. Therefore, when it is not determined that the setting value data is normal in the setting check processing, even if the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (for example, see FIG. 5) exceeds the holding upper limit, , The sub CPU 201 does not add to the first start winning port overflow point. Therefore, under a situation (for example, a predetermined point) where the first start winning port overflow point reaches a predetermined point when the winning of a game ball to the first starting port 420 (for example, see FIG. 5) exceeds the holding upper limit. At 50 points, when it is 49 points, when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (for example, see FIG. 5) exceeds the hold upper limit, the setting check processing of step S3072 (FIG. 188) If the sub CPU 201 determines that the game is not normal, the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S3722 described later) without performing the setting suggestion effect by the sub CPU 201, and the game cannot be advanced. .

  In the first example of the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect is not performed even if the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (see, for example, FIG. 5) exceeds the hold upper limit. 188), on the condition that the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 exceeds the holding upper limit, the setting is made in the same manner as when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 exceeds the holding upper limit. A suggestive effect may be performed.

(Second example)
The second example of the setting suggestion effect is performed when a game ball wins a specific winning opening during execution of the reach effect. For example, at the start of the reach effect, the sub CPU 201 sets a specific winning port out of the first starting port 420, the second starting port 440, and each of the general winning ports 53, 54, 55 (for example, see FIG. 5), for example. Randomly determined by lottery. Then, during the execution of the reach effect, when a winning command of the game ball to the specific winning port determined above is transmitted from the main control circuit 100, it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed. For example, some players stop firing game balls when a reach effect with a long fluctuating time is executed. Therefore, during the execution of the reach effect, by performing the setting suggestion effect based on the winning detection of the game ball to a specific winning opening, it is possible to promote the launch of the game ball even during the reach effect . In some cases, the expectation is low when the reach effect is started. In such a case, the variable display is not started next for the player until the end of the reach effect, and the interest may be reduced. In this regard, by executing the setting suggestion effect based on the detection of winning of a game ball to a specific winning opening during execution of the reach effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, when the manager of the gaming machine can set the set value, the player may be skeptical that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine in which the player plays the game may be low. According to the example, it is possible to reduce such a fear, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, when the specific winning opening is randomly determined by, for example, a lottery from among the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, and each of the general winning openings 53, 54, 55 (see, for example, FIG. 5), It is preferable to keep secret without disclosing which one is a specific winning opening. As a result, the player has an interest in which winning opening should be aimed.

  Further, in the second example of the setting suggestion effect, the specific winning opening is defined as the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, and each of the general winning opening 53, 54, 55 (see, for example, FIG. 5). Among them, for example, random determination is made by lottery, but it is not always necessary to determine a specific winning opening at random, and a fixed winning opening may be set as a specific winning opening.

  In the first example and the second example of the setting suggestion effect, the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed. However, the main CPU 101 may determine the effect.

  When a game ball wins a specific winning opening during execution of the reach effect, if the specific winning opening is a starting opening, the setting check processing in step S3072 or step S3082 (both refer to FIG. 188) is performed. Is The setting suggestion effect in this case is performed only when it is determined that the setting check process is normal (YES in step S3721). When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting check processing is not normal (NO in step S3721), the main CPU 101 not only does not perform the setting suggestion effect but also prohibits the stop of the special symbol during the fluctuation display by the processing of step S734. I do. Also, the sub CPU 201 continues to perform the fluctuating effect of the decorative symbol even if the fancy effect accompanied by the reach effect is being performed. However, the sub CPU 201 may stop the output of the sound effect by the sound control circuit 205 or reduce the output sound volume.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes a command transmission process (step S3206). The command transmission processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the display control circuit 204 executes a drawing control process (step S3207). In this process, the display control circuit 204 performs drawing control for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 16 based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

  Next, the voice control circuit 205 executes a voice control process (step S3208). In this process, the voice control circuit 205 performs voice control for causing the speaker 24 to output voice based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

  Next, the LED control circuit 206 performs a control process on the light emission mode of the LED 25 (Step S3209). In this process, the LED control circuit 206 performs light emission control for turning on or off the LED 25 based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

  Next, the accessory control circuit 207 executes an accessory control process (step S3210). In this process, the accessory control circuit 207 performs drive control for operating the effect drive motor for operating the movable accessory unit based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201. In such a sub-control circuit main process, after the initialization process in step S3201 ends, each process in steps S3202 to S210 is repeatedly executed.

[Command analysis processing]
FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing the command analysis processing by the sub CPU 201. The command analysis process is called as a subroutine during execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, after receiving from the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101), the sub CPU 201 performs a process of analyzing a command stored in a reception buffer of the work RAM 203 (step S3241).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a consistency check on the received command (step S3242). The consistency check is performed in order to verify that the target data exists when the command is received, and that the data has no error or lack.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a sub lottery process (step S3243). In this process, if the received command is a variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 201 selects an effect pattern by lottery based on the variation pattern designation command. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the command analysis processing. In the sub-lottery process, all items related to the production including the production pattern may be selected by lottery, or only the production type (whether there is a speech notice or whether there is a SU notice) as the production pattern. The effect content (type of effect, type of cut-in, and the like) selected by lottery and executed in the effect may be selected as effect information by another process separately formed as a subroutine. In the second embodiment, an effect pattern indicating the type of effect is selected in the sub-lottery process, and thereafter, effect contents executed based on the effect pattern are selected as effect information by an effect mode determination process described later. It has become.

  By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, during execution of the game, a setting check process is performed in steps S3072 and S3082 (see FIG. 188), and in this setting check process, the set value data is “0” to “ If it is not within the range of “5” (NO in step S3721 in FIG. 189), the processing in steps S3722 to S3726 is performed, and then the processing in the abnormal state in step S3727 is performed. However, for example, when the main control board 30 is replaced illegally, there is a high possibility that the setting check processing in step S3072 or step S3082 is not executed. Further, in the case where the set value that is set by the input of the invalid signal is changed, the set value data may be in the range of “0” to “5”. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, when the setting check process is not executed in step S3072 or step S3082 or when the setting value data is set to “0” despite the possibility that the setting value may have been incorrectly changed. Assuming a case where the setting value information is within the range from “1” to “5” (for example, a case where YES is determined in step S3721), the sub CPU 201 executes a setting determination process of determining whether the setting value information is appropriate. This setting determination processing will be described below, not shown.

  First, the main CPU 101 starts the special symbol change display when a special symbol change display is suspended at a specific timing (for example, when a game ball is won in the first start port 420 and the second start port 440). Is transmitted, a command indicating the setting value information stored in the main RAM 103 is transmitted. Then, the sub CPU 201 that has received this command determines the suitability of the setting value information (hereinafter, referred to as “current setting value”) indicated by the command received this time. This suitability determination is, for example, a process of determining whether or not the set value information (hereinafter referred to as “previous set value”) indicated by the previously received command matches the current set value.

  The sub CPU 201 determines that the set value is normal if the previous set value and the current set value match, and determines that the set value is abnormal if the previous set value and the current set value do not match. Is determined.

  When the received setting value information is abnormal, the sub CPU 201 executes a setting value abnormal process. The abnormal time execution process displays, for example, an image notifying that the set value is abnormal in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, or alternatively or additionally displays the image that the set value is abnormal. This is a process of outputting a sound to be notified.

  In addition, the determination of the suitability of the set value information described above is not limited to the determination of whether or not the previous set value and the current set value match. For example, all of the set value information received three or more times match. It may be determined whether or not some of the setting value information received a plurality of times (for example, the setting value indicated by the command received twice before and the current setting value) match. It may be determined whether or not there is. However, when the sub CPU 201 receives a command (for example, a setting change start command or an initialization command) indicating that the setting change process (see step S3024 in FIG. 179) has been executed, the current setting value is stored in the work RAM 203. It is not necessary to determine whether or not the past set value including the previous set value and the current set value are the same.

  In addition, the above-described setting determination processing (determination of suitability of the setting value information) is preferably performed not only during the execution of the game, but also when the power is turned on after the power cutoff, unless the setting change processing is performed. . The setting determination process executed when the power is turned on after the power failure will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The setting determination process executed by the sub CPU 201 described above may be executed in the command analysis process (step S3204), or may be executed after exiting from the command analysis process subroutine.

[Command transmission processing]
FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing the command transmission processing by the sub CPU 201. The command transmission process is called as a subroutine during execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the drawing, the sub CPU 201 executes a message setting process when transmitting a control command (message) to each of the control circuits 204 to 207 (step S3251). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of generating a message (effect designation information) based on the effect information obtained in the effect mode determination process, and temporarily storing the message in the direct buffer of the work RAM 203. This message setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes a directory table registration process (step S3252). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting a corresponding directory table in a predetermined area of the work RAM 203 based on the message and the presentation information stored in the directory buffer. This directory table registration processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes a message transmission process (step S3253). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of reading out the message stored in the direct buffer at a predetermined timing based on the directory table and transmitting the message to predetermined control circuits 204 to 207. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the command transmission processing. This message transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Message setting process]
FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing a message setting process by the sub CPU 201. The message setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 sets the device (control circuits 204 to 207) to be transmitted based on the effect information (step S3261).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting the presence or absence of the system operation (step S3262).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 sets the stage information and each effect information (step S3263).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 sets a notice pattern (step S3264). As a result, the direct buffer stores messages indicating devices to be transmitted (control circuits 204 to 207), presence / absence of system operation, stage information, each effect information, and a notice pattern. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the message setting processing.

[Direct table registration processing]
FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing the directory table registration processing by the sub CPU 201. The directory table registration process is called as a subroutine during execution of the above-described command transmission process. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for registering a single table (step S3271).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering a master table based on the effect information determined in the effect mode determination process (step S3272).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering a slave table used in the master table (step S3273).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering a directory table corresponding to the message set in the directory buffer as a slave table (step S3274). When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the directory table registration processing.

[Message transmission processing]
FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing a message transmission process by the sub CPU 201. The message transmission process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described command transmission process. As shown in the figure, if a message is registered in the directory buffer corresponding to the directory table, the sub CPU 201 sends a message to each device (control circuits 204 to 207) in accordance with the “destination device” set in the message. Is transmitted (step S3281).

  Next, after the transmission of the message is completed, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of discarding unnecessary directory tables (step S3282). When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the message transmission processing.

[Expandability of gaming machine according to second embodiment]
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the jackpot probability, the reach probability, the special symbol variation time, the main symbol selection rate (the number of rounds, the probable inrush rate, Although the time-saving entry rate is changed, it is not always necessary to change all of them according to the set value, and only one or a plurality of them may be changed according to the set value.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, when the stopped and displayed normal symbol is in a predetermined mode (“normal hit” mode) in the normal symbol display section 71, the normal electric accessory 46 is displayed. The state changes from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period. Therefore, the timing at which the ordinary electric accessory 46 changes from the closed state to the open state, or the timing at which the normal electrically powered accessory 46 changes from the open state to the closed state (that is, the timing at which game balls are fired) may be notified to the player. In this case, the frequency at which the timing of firing the gaming balls is notified may be changed according to the set value (the higher the set value, the higher the frequency of notification of the firing timing).

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, when the backup clear processing (for example, step S3039) is performed, data stored in the general work area of the work area of the main RAM 103 is cleared. This backup clear processing is always performed when the setting change processing (step S3024) is executed. Therefore, when the backup clear processing is performed, the data stored in the general work area of the work area of the main RAM 103 is always required. Is cleared. However, instead of this, the clear address range of the main RAM 103 in which data is cleared is determined by the backup clear processing performed when the setting change processing is performed and the backup clear processing performed without performing the setting change processing. You may make it different. For example, after the big hit game state ends, a high probability game state is set until a predetermined number of games are executed (until a special symbol is changed and displayed a predetermined number of times), and a low probability is set after the execution of the predetermined number of games. In a pachinko gaming machine that shifts to a probable gaming state (a so-called “ST machine”), when the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to a high-probability gaming state (before the execution of a predetermined number of games is completed), a setting change process When the backup clearing process is performed without accompanying the setting change process, the probable change flag is set OFF, and when the backup clearing process is performed along with the execution of the setting change process, the probable change flag is set ON (remaining in the high probability game state). The storage of the number of games may be held). Further, when the backup clear processing is performed along with the execution of the setting change processing, the ON setting of the probable change flag is continued when the set value is set to the same value as the previous time, and when the set value is set to a different value from the previous time. May set the probability change flag to OFF.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, in each round game in the jackpot gaming state, the special winning opening 540 is opened when the count of the gaming balls winning the special winning opening 540 reaches 10 balls, If any one of the conditions when the state time reaches 30 seconds is satisfied, the state becomes the closed state. Therefore, in each round game in the big hit gaming state, the condition for the large winning port 540 to be changed from the open state to the closed state may be changed according to the set value. For example, a plurality of conditions for the large winning opening 540 to be changed from the open state to the closed state are prepared (for example, a plurality of gaming balls having different expected values of the number of game balls that can make the large winning opening 540 win a game ball in one round). A condition may be prepared) and the condition may be changed in accordance with the set value, so that a higher set value makes it easier to select a condition having a higher expected value. As a specific example, it is conceivable that the opening time of the special winning opening 540 in the round game is determined by lottery in accordance with the set value, so that the opening time of the special winning opening 540 is likely to be longer at a higher setting value. Can be In addition, by changing the number of game balls in which the large winning opening 540 is changed from the open state to the closed state in the round game in accordance with the set value, the higher the set value, the more the number of game balls to the large winning opening 540 is likely to increase. It is also possible to do.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, when the stopped and displayed normal symbol is in a normal hit state, the normal electric accessory 46 is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period. The opening time of the electric accessory 46 (opening time) may be made different depending on the set value, so that the higher the set value, the longer the open time of the ordinary electric accessory 46 may be.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, when the jackpot is a jackpot in which the probable change flag is ON as shown in FIG. 1-2 and FIG. 1-4, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the next jackpot game is performed. The high-probability game state continues until the game is executed, but is not necessarily limited to this. At a specific timing (for example, when a game ball is awarded to the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440, a special symbol change display is displayed. The transition lottery for determining whether or not to transition from the high-probability gaming state to the low-probability gaming state may be executed at the time when the display is suspended and the special symbol change display is started). In this case, by changing the transition probability from the high-probability game state to the low-probability game state according to the set value, the higher the set value, the higher the continuation probability of the high-probability game state (from the high-probability game state to the low-probability game state). May be lowered). In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the setting check process (step S3072, step S3082) is performed, for example, when a game ball is awarded to the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440. If it is determined in the check process that the status is not normal (NO in step S3721), the result of the above-described lottery is cleared in the backup clear process (step S32420) by executing the setting change process (step S3024) (the probability change flag is also OFF). Is set to.)

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the jackpot probability, the reach probability, the variation time of the special symbol, and the selectivity of the main symbol (the number of rounds, the probability change intrusion rate, the time reduction inrush rate) according to the set value set. Although the pachinko gaming machine in which is changed is described, providing a setting difference is not limited to the above embodiment, and a part of the configuration may be changed. Hereinafter, another extended example in which the configuration is partially changed will be described. Note that, in the following description of other extended examples, the configuration that is not particularly mentioned is the same as the configuration of the second embodiment. However, in the following, except for the step numbers, for example, the members such as the main CPU are denoted by reference numerals. Not attached.

[Expansion example 1]
In the pachinko gaming machine of the first extended example, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, the big hit gaming state ends, and then the high probability gaming until the next big hit gaming state starts. A description will be given using a so-called “probable variable loop machine” in which the state continues as an example. In the first extended example, an upper limit is set for the number of times the jackpot game state and the high-probability game state are repeatedly executed (hereinafter, referred to as “loop count”). When the loop count reaches this upper limit, the jackpot game state ends. The later gaming state is controlled to be a low-probability gaming state, and the upper limit of the number of loops (hereinafter referred to as “limiter number”) can be changed according to a set value (such a gaming machine is called “limiter”). Machine). This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 204 is a table showing, for each set value, an example of the selectivity of the number of limiters in the pachinko gaming machine of the first extended example.

  The main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first extended example includes a loop number checking means for checking the number of loops when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, and a limiter number for performing a limit number lottery when the number of loops is zero. Lottery means, loop number counting means for incrementing the number of loops when the number of loops is within a specified range (in the present example, within a range of 1 to 4), and a specified number of loop times (5 in this example, the upper limit of the limiter). In this case, there is provided a game state control means for controlling the game state after the big hit game state ends to a low probability state, and a loop number reset means for resetting the loop number when the loop number is a specified value. Note that the limiter number lottery may be performed at any time when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, at the start of the big hit gaming state, during the big hit gaming state, or at the end of the big hit gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 204, in the setting 1, the number of limiters is determined, for example, once at a probability of 25%, twice at a probability of 30%, and three times at a probability of 25%. It is determined four times with a probability of 15% and five times with a probability of 5%. In setting 2, for example, the number of limiters is determined to be one at a probability of 25%, to two at a probability of 25%, to three at a probability of 25%, and to four at a probability of 20%. And 5 times with a 5% probability. In setting 3, the number of limiters is determined to be, for example, one at a probability of 15%, two at a probability of 25%, three at a probability of 25%, and four at a probability of 20%. And is determined 5 times with a probability of 15%. In setting 4, for example, the number of limiters is determined to be one at a probability of 15%, to two at a probability of 20%, to three at a probability of 25%, and to four at a probability of 25%. And is determined 5 times with a probability of 15%. In setting 5, for example, the number of limiters is determined to be one at a probability of 5%, to two at a probability of 20%, to three at a probability of 25%, and to four at a probability of 25%. , And 5 times with a 25% probability. In setting 6, for example, the number of limiters is determined to be 1 at a probability of 5%, to 2 at a probability of 10%, to 3 at a probability of 25%, and to 4 at a probability of 30%. , And 5 times with a 25% probability. That is, the higher the set value, the higher the degree of expectation that the limiter count is determined.

  In this way, by changing the degree of expectation for the limiter frequency in accordance with the set value, so that the higher the set value, the larger the jackpot game state and the higher probability game state can be repeated, the one chance (the big hit) It is possible to vary the amount of prize balls awarded to the player in accordance with the set value at an opportunity until the game is controlled to the low-probability game state when one win is made. Moreover, although the expected value for the limiter count is made different according to the set value, since the limiter count is determined by lottery, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing the set value based on the limiter count. Has become.

  In the first extended example, the limiter count is determined by lottery in accordance with the installation value. However, the lottery is not necessarily essential. For example, although there is a concern that the set value may be guessed by a player, The number of limiters may be uniquely determined according to the set value, such as three times for 1.2, four times for setting 3.4, and five times for setting 5.6.

  In addition, the above-mentioned limiter frequency may be determined separately for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, or may be determined for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. good.

  For example, when the above-mentioned limiter number is separately determined for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the first limit number for the first special symbol if the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is a big hit. Is determined, and if the state is controlled to the big hit game state based on the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol during the loop, the number of loops for the first special symbol is incremented. However, when the big hit game state is controlled based on the result of the big hit determination of the second special symbol during the above loop, the second limiter number for the second special symbol is not incremented without incrementing the loop number for the first special symbol. To determine. In this case, when one of the first limiter count and the second limiter count reaches the limiter count, the loop may be ended (control to a low-probability game state), or the first limiter count and the second limiter may be set. The loop may be terminated when both the count reaches the limiter count.

  Also, for example, when the above-mentioned limiter count is determined for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the result of the big hit determination regardless of whether the symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Is a big hit, the limiter number is determined, and during the loop, whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is controlled to the big hit game state based on the result of the big hit determination, the loop Increment the count. When the number of loops reaches the number of limiters, the loop ends.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the above-described extended example 1 is a so-called stochastic loop machine, but is not necessarily a stochastic loop machine. For example, the above-described technical concept is applied to a so-called "ST machine" pachinko gaming machine. You can also. The "ST machine" means that the gaming state after the big hitting gaming state ends is controlled to the high probability gaming state without fail or based on a predetermined lottery result, and the high probability gaming state is controlled a predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as "ST times"). This is a pachinko gaming machine that continues until the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and when the predetermined number of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the high-probability gaming state is terminated and the game is controlled to the low-probability gaming state. Even with such an “ST machine”, the degree of expectation for the number of limiters can be varied according to the set value. In other words, the higher the set value, the more the large hit game state and the high probability game state can be repeated, so that one chance (an opportunity until the game is controlled to the low probability game state when the big hit is won once). ), It is possible to make the prize ball amount given to the player different according to the set value.

  In the so-called “ST machine”, the “ST times” can be set to a predetermined number (for example, 70 times), but the number of STs can be varied according to the set value. . For example, the main CPU of the “ST machine” can determine the number of STs by lottery so that the expected value of the number of STs determined according to the set value is different. As a specific example, the expected value of the number of STs determined by lottery is 60 times in setting 1, 63 times in setting 2, 66 times in setting 3, 69 times in setting 4, 72 times in setting 5, and 72 times in setting 6. With 75 times, the higher the set value, the higher the expected value of the number of times of ST can be. However, it is not essential to determine the number of STs by lottery, and the number of STs may be uniquely determined according to the set value. When the number of times of ST is made different according to the set value, it is preferable that the number of times saved is common to all set values. For example, when the ST count or the expected value of the ST count is 60 times in setting 1, 63 times in setting 2, 66 times in setting 3, 69 times in setting 4, 72 times in setting 5, and 75 times in setting 6. For example, it is conceivable that the number of time savings is set to, for example, 60 times for all settings. Then, the sub CPU performs an effect on the liquid crystal display device 16, for example, in which the high-probability game state can be grasped until the ST number reaches a certain number of games (for example, 60 games), and when the ST number reaches the certain number of games. Regardless of whether the game state is the high-probability game state, it is preferable to perform an effect that is difficult to grasp that the game state is the high-probability game state, for example, on a liquid crystal display device. Accordingly, it is possible to make the ST count and the expected value of the ST count different according to the set value while preventing the player from noticing the set value.

  Also in the pachinko gaming machine of the first extended example, the setting check process (step S3072, step S3082) is performed, for example, at the time of winning a game ball to the first starting port and the second starting port. When it is determined that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S3721), even in the loop (that is, when the jackpot game state and the high-probability game state are repeatedly executed), By executing the setting change process (step S3024), the number of loops is also cleared in the backup clearing process (step S32420) without the number of loops reaching the limiter number (the probable change flag is also set to OFF).

[Extended Example 2-1]
The pachinko gaming machine of the second extended example has a specific area in which a specific port is provided. This specific area is defined as a flow-down area of a game ball by, for example, an accessory, and it is usually difficult (or impossible) for the game ball to enter the specific area. As a result of the special symbol big hit determination, a small hit is also prepared in addition to the big hit.

  More specifically, the main CPU performs a jackpot determination for a special symbol with a jackpot probability determined according to the set value, and performs a small jackpot hit determination when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss. Then, the small hit game is executed when the result of the small hit hit determination is a small hit. That is, the big hit is a hit with the operation of the condition device, but the small hit is not a hit with the operation of the condition device.

  In the second extended example, for example, in a normal game state such as a non-time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to OFF, a first special symbol game based on winning of a game ball to the first starting port, and a second special game Of the second special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port, the first special symbol game is mainly performed. On the other hand, in a time saving game state such as a time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to ON, for example, the second special symbol game is mainly performed among the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. Also, in the second special symbol game, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, the small hit is won with a predetermined probability. When the result of the big hit determination in the first special symbol game is a loss, the small hit hit determination need not be performed.

  Further, when the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol performed based on the entry (acceptance) of the game ball into the starting port is a small hit, the main CPU activates the predetermined movable piece to close the specific area. A small hitting game executing means for executing a small hitting game in which the small hitting game is changed to an open mode, and a payout / firing control circuit based on the fact that the game ball has won in a specific area which has been set in the open mode by execution of the small hitting game. Payout means for paying out a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls as prize balls.

  In addition, in the second extended example, the number of times saved is set to, for example, five, and a specific port is provided in a specific area. Then, for example, as a result of a normal hit in a time saving game state of five times and a game ball winning in the starting port, when a small hit occurs, a predetermined movable piece is activated and a specific area is opened. At this time, when it is detected that the game ball that has entered the specific area further enters the specific opening, the main CPU executes the big hit game. Further, if the normal hit has not been achieved in the five time-saving gaming states, the main CPU ends the time-saving gaming state and controls the non-time-saving gaming state. In the time-saving game state, the game is performed by right-handed firing of the game ball toward the right area of the game area. In the non-time-saving game state, the game is played by left-handed firing of the game ball toward the left area of the game area. A game is played.

  In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the second extended example, at least the small hit probability in the second special symbol game is made different according to the set value, so that the second special symbol game is mainly performed, for example, a time-saving gaming state. In, it is possible to vary the opening frequency of the specific area and, consequently, the payout according to the set value.

  For example, the probability of a small hit is 1/9 for setting 1, 1/8 for setting 2, 1/7 for setting 3, 1/6 for setting 4, 1/5 for setting 5, and 6 for setting. To 1/4. In this case, the higher the set value, the longer the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is, the longer the setting is, or the higher the setting of the opening of the ordinary electric accessory is, the more difficult it is for the game ball to enter the starting opening. Gaming balls are easier to win at the starting port. As a result, the higher the set value, the higher the winning frequency of the game ball in the specific area, and thus it is possible to provide a difference in the payout speed according to the set value.

  In the second extended example, in the time saving game state, the probable change flag may be set to ON, but it is not always necessary to set the probable change flag to ON.

  In addition, when a game ball wins in the first starting opening or the second starting opening while the special symbol is being changed and displayed by the main CPU, the setting check processing in step S3072 or step S3082 is also performed in this case. . If the main CPU determines in this setting check process that the pattern is not normal (NO in step S3721), even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol being displayed in the variable display is a small hit, the main CPU turns off the game permission flag, Execute the processing when an error occurs. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol during the fluctuation display is a small hit, if the setting check process determines that the result is not normal, the main CPU executes the small hit game based on the small hit. Without this, the game permission flag is turned off and the processing at the time of abnormality is executed. Therefore, the game permission flag is not set to ON unless various data including the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol being displayed in the variable display is cleared in the backup clearing process.

[Extended Example 2-2]
The pachinko gaming machine of the extension example 2-2 has a first starting port and a second starting port. The main CPU performs a first special symbol jackpot determination (hereinafter, referred to as a “first special lottery”) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port, and the main CPU determines the winning of the game ball to the second starting port. A jackpot determination for a second special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as a “second special lottery”) is performed based on the second special symbol.

  Further, the main CPU is configured to perform a first game state (for example, a probability change flag) in which a lottery of a first special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as a “first special lottery”) is mainly performed among the first special lottery and the second special lottery. And the time reduction flag are both set to OFF, and a second gaming state in which a lottery of a second special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as a “second special lottery”) is mainly performed (for example, the probability change flag is ON). And a game time control means that can be controlled to any one of a plurality of game states, including an advantageous game state in which the time saving flag is set to OFF. In this pachinko gaming machine, if a big hit is won with a specific symbol in the first game state, the game is controlled to the second game state after the big hit game ends.

  In addition, a general-purpose gate is provided in the right area of the game area, and when a game ball passes through the normal gate, a normal lottery is performed. If the result of the normal lottery is a specific result (for example, a normal hit), the main CPU opens a predetermined movable member (for example, an electric tulip), thereby facilitating the winning of the game ball to the second starting port. Is done. Therefore, when the game is performed by firing the game ball toward the right area of the game area, the second starting port is compared with the case where the game ball is fired toward the left area of the game area to perform the game. The winning frequency of the game ball to the is increased.

  In the first special lottery, the main CPU performs a jackpot determination of the first special symbol with a jackpot probability determined according to the set value, and when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, a predetermined jackpot is determined for a plurality of rounds. A first jackpot game executing means for executing a jackpot game opened over a number of times is provided.

  In the second special lottery, the main CPU determines the jackpot of the second special symbol with a jackpot probability determined according to the set value, and when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, a predetermined jackpot is determined. A second jackpot game executing means for executing a jackpot game opened over a plurality of rounds is provided. Further, in the second special lottery, when the result of the big hit determination of the second special symbol is a loss, the main CPU makes a small hit hit determination, and when the result of the small hit hit determination is a small hit, The small hit game executing means for executing the small hit game is also provided.

  The jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the jackpot probability in the second special lottery are common. The big hit probability in the first game state in which the probability change flag is set to OFF is, for example, 1/300 in setting 1, 1/290 in setting 2, 1/280 in setting 3, and 1/270 in setting 4. , Setting 5 is 1/260, and setting 6 is 1/250. The big hit probability in the second game state in which the probability change flag is set to ON is, for example, 1/30 in setting 1, 1/29 in setting 2, 1/28 in setting 3, and 27 minutes in setting 4. 1, setting 5 is 1/26, and setting 6 is 1/25.

  The main CPU, when the result of the first special lottery is a big hit, a first big hit game executing means for executing a big hit game in which a predetermined special winning opening is opened for a plurality of rounds, and a result of the second special lottery A second big hit game executing means for executing a big hit game in which a predetermined big winning opening is opened for a plurality of rounds when the big hit is made. The big winning opening that is opened when the result of the first special lottery is a big hit, and the big winning opening that is opened when the result of the second special lottery is a big hit, is a common big winning opening. Good or different winning prizes.

  The small hit probability in the first special lottery is 0 (common to setting 1 to setting 6) regardless of whether the probability change flag is ON or OFF. The small hit probability in the second special lottery is, for example, 1/9 in setting 1, 1/8 in setting 2, and 1/7 in setting 3 regardless of whether the probability change flag is ON or OFF. , The setting 4 is set to 1/6, and the setting 5 is set to 1/6. As described above, the small hit probability in the second special lottery differs depending on the set value, but is higher than the small hit probability in the first special lottery regardless of the set value.

  Further, the main CPU has a small hitting game executing means for executing a small hitting game when the result of the second special lottery is a small hit. The small hit game is a game in which the same big winning port as the big winning port opened when the result of the second special lottery is a big hit is opened. When a game ball wins in the special winning opening, the payout / firing control circuit operates the payout device to control a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out as a prize. However, in the small hit game, since the number of game balls that can be won in the big winning opening is smaller than the big hit game, the degree of advantage for the player is smaller in the small hit game than in the big hit game.

  As described above, the small hit probability in the first special lottery is zero. That is, the main CPU performs the small hit determination with the small hit probability of 0 when the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a loss. However, instead of this, when the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a loss, the main CPU may not perform the small hit determination itself.

  The big hit is a hit with the operation of the condition device, but the small hit is not a hit with the operation of the condition device.

  Further, the main CPU includes a first special symbol variation display control means for performing a variation display of the first special symbol based on a winning of the game ball to the first starting opening, and a game CPU based on a winning of the game ball to the second starting opening. And a second special symbol variation display control means for performing a variation display of the second special symbol. The first special symbol change display control means stops the first special symbol so that the result of the first special lottery is displayed after the first special symbol is changed and displayed for a predetermined time. Further, the second special symbol change display control means stops the second special symbol so that the result of the second special lottery is displayed after the second special symbol is changed and displayed for a predetermined time.

  The variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol variable display control means and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol variable display control means can be performed at the same timing. In other words, if the first special symbol is changed and the first special symbol is changed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port, and the second special opening is changed to the game ball, the first special symbol is changed and displayed. Also, the variable display of the second special symbol is started. If a game ball wins in the first opening while the variation display of the second special symbol is being performed based on the winning of the game ball in the second opening, even if the second special symbol is in the variation display. The variable display of the first special symbol is started.

  The average time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol executed by the first special symbol fluctuation display control means is almost the same when the probability change flag is ON and OFF, but the second special symbol is changed. The average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol executed by the fluctuation display control means is significantly different depending on whether the probable change flag is ON or OFF. For example, the average time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 10 sec in the first game state and 10 sec in the second game state, while the average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 1000 sec in the first game state. It is set to 1 second in the second game state. The special lottery (first special lottery, second special lottery) is performed when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started, but the result of the special lottery is displayed. Is when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. Therefore, when a game ball wins in the second starting port in the first gaming state, it takes a considerable time before the result of the second special lottery is displayed, although the second special lottery has already been performed. It becomes.

  In this manner, in the first game state in which the probability change flag is set to OFF, even if the game ball is fired toward, for example, the right side area of the game area and the game ball wins in the second starting port, the second special symbol is obtained. It takes a long time before the variable display is stopped. In addition, since the second special symbol is variably displayed in any one of a plurality of patterns having different fluctuation times, the second special symbol is temporarily stopped in a mode indicating a small hit (it may be a small hit). Even if the special winning opening is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 1.8 seconds), it is difficult to grasp the timing when the second special symbol is determined to be a small hit. For this reason, it is also difficult to perform a so-called aiming, in which a game ball is awarded in a large winning opening aiming at a timing when the second special symbol is determined to be a small hit. Furthermore, in the first game state, when a game ball is fired toward, for example, the right side area of the game area, a warning sound is output from the speaker under the control of the sub CPU, for example. Therefore, in the first game state, a game is played by firing a game ball toward, for example, a left area of the game area. On the other hand, in the second gaming state, the passing of the game ball to the ordinary figure gate not only facilitates the winning of the game ball to the second starting port through the ordinary lottery, but also the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. In the second special lottery, the second special lottery wins a small hit with a probability higher than 1/10 regardless of the set value, so that a game in which a game ball is fired toward a right area of the game area, for example, is required. Done.

  The average time (for example, 1000 sec) of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the first game state is, for example, 50 times or more the average time (for example, 10 sec) of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the first game state. Is preferred, but is preferably at least 10 times or more.

  In addition, the sub CPU is a decorative symbol variation display control unit that controls the variation display of the decorative symbol to be displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display device in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol). Is provided. However, in the first game state, the decorative symbol variation display control means does not display the variation display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the second special symbol in a conspicuous manner even if the game ball wins in the second starting port. When a game ball is awarded at one starting port, the display of the variation of the decorative symbol synchronized with the first special symbol is performed in a conspicuous manner.

  The example of the above-mentioned "conspicuous mode" will be described in detail. For example, the liquid crystal display device includes a left symbol (first symbol), a middle symbol (second symbol), and a right symbol (third symbol) substantially at the center of the display area. Can be displayed in a variable manner to display the result of the special lottery. Further, in a small area of, for example, one corner of the four corners of the display area, a fourth symbol (for example, a circle or a circle) that can be changed and displayed (for example, blinking) in synchronization with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. Such a shape) can be displayed. Since the ratio of the first symbol to the third symbol occupying the display area is much larger than the ratio of the fourth symbol occupying the display area, the player's gaze is more on the first symbol to the third symbol than on the fourth symbol. Will be facing. Then, for example, in the first game state, when a game ball is won at the second starting port, the sub CPU performs the variable display only on the fourth symbol without performing the variable display on the first to third symbols. When a game ball is won at one starting port, the first symbol to the third symbol are displayed in a variable manner, and the variable display of the fourth symbol is also performed. In this manner, in the first gaming state, even if a game ball wins in the second starting port, the display of the variation of the decorative symbol synchronized with the second special symbol is not performed in a prominent manner, and the gaming ball is inserted in the first starting port. Can be realized in such a manner that the display of the decoration symbol synchronized with the first special symbol when the player wins the game is conspicuous.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine of the above-described extended example 2-2, in the first gaming state, the result of the second special lottery is hardly displayed even if a gaming ball wins in the second starting port, but the second gaming state In this case, the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening is not only facilitated, but also the average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is as short as 1 sec. Moreover, in the second gaming state, when a game ball is won at the second starting port, the probability of the second special lottery being a small hit (1/9 to 1/4 depending on the setting) is a big hit. (From 1/30 to 1/25 depending on the setting), the big wins are opened with small hits at a high frequency, and the time reduction flag is not set (ie, normal lottery). Without increasing the frequency of execution), it is possible to increase the chances of paying out game balls as prizes. In addition, the probability that the result of the second special lottery will be a small hit varies depending on the set setting, so even if the big hit game is not executed, the payout is made according to the set value. Can be different.

  In addition, when a game ball wins in the first starting opening or the second starting opening while the special symbol is being changed and displayed by the main CPU, the setting check processing in step S3072 or step S3082 is also performed in this case. . Therefore, for example, in the second game state, even when a game ball wins at the first starting port during the change display of the second special symbol, the main CPU performs the setting check processing of step S3072 or step S3082. When the main CPU determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S3721), the main CPU turns off the game permission flag and executes an abnormal time process. That is, in the second gaming state, even if the result of the big hit determination for the second special symbol during the variable display is a small hit, if the setting check process determines that the result is not normal, the main CPU executes the small hit. Without executing the small hit game based on the hit, the game permission flag is turned off, and the abnormal time process is executed. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the second special symbol during the variable display in the second game state is a small hit, the result including the information indicating the second game state and the information indicating the small hit is included. Unless various data are cleared in the backup clearing process, the game permission flag is not set to ON.

[Expansion example 3]
The pachinko gaming machine of the third extended example is a pachinko gaming machine having two routes for controlling the jackpot gaming state, and therefore has a specific area in which a specific port is provided. This specific area is defined as a flow-down area of a game ball by, for example, an accessory, and it is usually difficult (or impossible) for the game ball to enter the specific area. As a result of the special symbol big hit determination, a small hit is also prepared in addition to the big hit.

  More specifically, the main CPU performs a jackpot determination for a special symbol with a jackpot probability determined according to the set value, and performs a small jackpot hit determination when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss. Then, the small hit game is executed when the result of the small hit hit determination is a small hit. That is, the big hit is a hit with the operation of the condition device, but the small hit is not a hit with the operation of the condition device.

  In the third extended example, for example, in a normal game state such as a non-time-saving game state in which a time-saving flag is set to OFF, a first special symbol game based on a winning of a game ball to the first starting port and a second special symbol game, Of the second special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port, the first special symbol game is mainly performed. On the other hand, in a time saving game state such as a time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to ON, for example, the second special symbol game is mainly performed among the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. Also, in the second special symbol game, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, the small hit is won with a predetermined probability. When the result of the big hit determination in the first special symbol game is a loss, the small hit hit determination need not be performed.

  Further, the main CPU activates a predetermined movable piece when the result of the big hit determination on the special symbol performed based on the entry (acceptance) of the game ball into the starting port is a small hit, and activates the predetermined movable piece, and A small hitting game executing means for executing a small hitting game that allows a game ball to enter the game. When the predetermined movable piece is actuated in this manner, the game ball enters the specific area, and when the game ball that has entered the specific area is detected (accepted) to enter the specific port, the main The CPU controls the big hit game state. That is, when the result of the jackpot determination process performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is a big hit, the main CPU performs the first big hit game in which the round game for opening the big winning port is performed over a plurality of rounds. A first big hit game control means for controlling the state, and a round game for operating the predetermined movable piece based on a game ball entering the specific port when the small hit game is executed, for a plurality of rounds. And a second big hit game control means for controlling a second big hit game state to be performed.

  In such a pachinko gaming machine, in this extended example 3, the ease of winning of the game ball to the starting port (for example, the execution frequency of the small hit game and the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory) is set to the set value. It is different according to. In the third extended example as well, the result of the ordinary symbol determination performed by the main CPU based on detecting that the player has passed through the gate through which the game ball can pass when the player hits right is an ordinary hit. At times, the electric accessory is usually controlled from the closed state to the open state. Normally, when the electric accessory is in the open state, the winning of the game ball to the starting port is facilitated. As a method of making the execution frequency of the small hit game different according to the set value, for example, the probability of the normal hit in the normal symbol determination is made different according to the set value, or the variation time of the normal symbol is made different according to the set value. Can be realized.

  As a technique for varying the ease of winning of a game ball to the starting port according to the set value, a technique for varying the probability of a normal hit in the ordinary symbol determination according to the set value will be described as an example.

  For example, the probability of a normal hit is 1/60 for setting 1, 1/50 for setting 2, 1/40 for setting 3, 1/30 for setting 4, 1/20 for setting 5, and 6 for setting. To 1/10. In this case, the higher the set value, the longer the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is, the longer the setting is, or the higher the setting of the opening of the ordinary electric accessory is, the more difficult it is for the game ball to enter the starting opening. Gaming balls are easier to win at the starting port. As a result, the higher the set value, the higher the frequency of execution of the small hit game, and, as a result, an opportunity to be controlled to the big hit game state by the second big hit game control means is promoted. In this way, it is possible to provide a difference in payout speed according to the set value.

  Also in this extended example 3, if a game ball wins in the first starting port or the second starting port while the special symbol is being displayed by the in-CPU 101, the setting check processing in step S3072 or step S3082 is performed. Be executed. When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S3721), even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol during the variable display is a small hit, the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag, Execute the processing when an error occurs. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol during the fluctuation display is a small hit, if the setting check process determines that it is not normal, the main CPU 101 executes the small hit game based on the small hit. Without this, the game permission flag is turned off and the processing at the time of abnormality is executed. Therefore, the game permission flag is not set to ON unless various data including the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol being displayed in the variable display is cleared in the backup clearing process.

[Expansion example 4]
In the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 4, even if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is not immediately controlled to the jackpot gaming state by itself. , The condition device is operated based on the assumption that the game ball has passed (or entered) a predetermined area on the premise that the condition device has been operated, and the accessory continuous operation device is operated. Hereinafter, description will be made with reference to FIGS. 205 and 206. FIG. 205 is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which a game ball passes through a successively-operated role right gate, and FIG. 206 is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which a game ball passes through a left-gate continuously operated left gate.

  As shown in FIG. 205 and FIG. 206, the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth extended example is provided with an accessory continuous operation left gate 3100 and an accessory continuous operation right gate 3110 in the gaming area. In addition, a distribution device 3120 capable of distributing a game ball flowing down the game area to one of a role-operation continuous operation left gate 3100 and a role-operation continuous operation right gate 3110 is provided with a role-operation continuous operation gate 3100. It is arranged above 3110.

  A left gate sensor 3100 and a right gate sensor (both not shown) capable of detecting the passage of a game ball are provided on the left gate 3100 and the right gate 3110. Normally, the left gate sensor and the right gate sensor have the passage detection of the game ball disabled, and are enabled based on the activation of the condition device. In addition, after the left gate sensor and the right gate sensor are activated based on the activation of the condition device, the game ball passes either one of the left-hand actor continuous operation left gate 3100 and the left-hand actor continuous operation right gate 3110. Invalidated based on detection of passage.

  When the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the role of continuously operating the left gate 3100, the main CPU controls the game state to the 8R big hit game state in which, for example, a round game of 8 rounds is executed. Further, when the right gate sensor detects the passing of the game ball to the role of continuously actuating the right gate 3110, the main CPU determines the 2R big hit game state (selection rate 50%) in which the two rounds of the round game are executed and the 16 rounds Of the 16R jackpot game state (selection rate 50%) in which the round game is executed is determined by lottery, and the state is controlled to the jackpot game state determined by the lottery.

  A big hit occurs when the left gate sensor detects the passage of a game ball to the role of continuously operating the left gate 3100, and when the right gate sensor detects the passage of a game ball to the right gate 3110 of the continuous role of the operational object. The expected value of the prize ball amount paid out in the game state is the same.

  Also, the game ball that has passed through the role of continuously operating the left gate 3100 or the continuously operated right gate 3110 flows down the game area as it is, but instead is discharged out of the pachinko machine from the out port. You may comprise so that it may be.

  The distribution device 3120 distributes the game ball reaching above the distribution device 3120 to one of the role-operation continuous operation left gate 3100 and the role-product continuous operation right gate 3110 by a regular operation. In the first posture in which the distribution device 3120 is tilted to the left, the game balls easily pass through the right-gate for continuous operation of actors 3110 (see FIG. 205), and in the second posture in which the distribution device 3120 is tilted to the right, the game balls play a role. It is easy to pass through the left gate 3100 for continuous operation of objects (see FIG. 206).

  In the fourth extended example, the ease of passing a game ball is different between the left gate 3100 and the right gate 3110 according to the set value. For example, in the setting 1, the operation of the distribution device 3120 is repeated between the first posture 0.5 seconds and the second posture 1.5 seconds, and in the setting 2, the first posture 0.7 seconds and the second posture 1.3. In the setting 3, the first posture is repeated 0.9 seconds and the second posture 1.1 seconds, and in the setting 4, the first posture is repeated 1.1 seconds and the second posture is 0.9 seconds. Operation, setting 5 is an operation of repeating the first posture 1.3 seconds and the second posture 0.7 seconds, and setting 6 is an operation of repeating the first posture 1.5 seconds and the second posture 0.5 seconds. Thus, it is possible to change the mode of the big hit game state according to the set value.

  In addition, in this extended example 4, when the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the left gate 3100, the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the right gate 3110. The expected value of the amount of prize balls paid out in the big hit game state is the same as when the player wins. That is, although the mode of the big hit game state can be changed according to the set value, there is no difference in the amount of prize balls paid out in the big hit game state according to the set value, but the present invention is not limited to this. Is paid in the big hit game state when the game ball is detected to pass through the left gate 3100 and the right gate sensor is detected when the game ball is passed through the right gate 3110. The expected value of the prize ball amount may be made different. For example, when the left gate sensor detects the passing of the game ball to the role of continuously operating the left gate 3100, either the 2R jackpot gaming state (selection rate 70%) or the 16R jackpot gaming state (selection rate 30%) Is determined by the lottery performed at the above selection rate, and when the right gate sensor detects the passing of the game ball to the role of continuously operating the right gate 3110, the 2R big hit game state (selection rate 30%) Which of the game and the 16R big hit game state (selection rate 70%) is to be executed may be determined by the lottery performed at the above selection rate. In this case, it is possible to make a difference in the prize ball amount paid out in the big hit game state according to the set value, and the higher the set value, the larger the game ball is controlled to the bigger hit game state in which the expected value to be paid out as a prize ball is higher. It is possible to increase the possibility of being.

  In addition, in this extended example 4, when the game ball passes through one of the two gates (continuous operation left gate 3100, role continuous operation right gate 3110) under the condition that the condition device is activated, the role is continuously activated. The apparatus is configured to be operated to be controlled to a jackpot game state. However, even if the condition device is activated based on the result of the special symbol big hit determination performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port, the game ball is connected to either of the above two gates. A game ball may win at the starting port before passing. In this case, in a situation where the condition device has been operated but the game ball has not yet passed through any of the two gates, the main CPU 101 sets the setting check process based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port (for example, 188, and the setting check process may determine that the setting is not normal (for example, NO in step S3721 in FIG. 189). In this case, even if the condition device is activated, the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S3722 described later), and the game cannot be advanced.

  In addition, in this extended example 4, two gates (operator continuous operation), which are operated below the sorting device 3120, when the passage of a game ball is detected on the premise that the condition device is operating. Although the left gate 3100 and the continuous operation right gate 3110) are provided, the one provided below the sorting device 3120 is not necessarily limited to the continuous operation gate for the role, and for example, a starting port and a general winning opening are provided. Is also good. That is, in this case, the distribution device 3120 uses a regular operation to cause the game ball that has reached the upper side of the distribution device 3120 to use the starting port that serves as a jackpot determination trigger for a special symbol and the general prize that does not serve as the jackpot determination trigger. Dispatch to one of the mouths. The operation of the distribution device 3120 is, for example, an operation of repeating the first posture 0.5 seconds and the second posture 1.5 seconds in the setting 1, and a first posture 0.7 seconds and the second posture 1 in the setting 2. .3 seconds, setting 3 repeats the first posture 0.9 seconds and second posture 1.1 seconds, and setting 4 sets the first posture 1.1 seconds and the second posture 0.9 seconds. In the setting 5, an operation of repeating the first posture 1.3 seconds and the second posture 0.7 seconds, and in the setting 6, an operation of repeating the first posture 1.5 seconds and the second posture 0.5 seconds. By doing so, it is possible to make the winning rate to the starting port different according to the set value. In addition, according to such a pachinko gaming machine, although it is possible to vary the winning rate to the starting port according to the set value, no matter what the set value, the timing of the launch of the game ball by the player It is possible to have an interest that it is possible to aim for a prize in the starting opening.

[Extended example 5]
The pachinko gaming machine of the extension example 5 does not make the data relating to the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine different according to the set value, but can change the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine according to the set value. . In addition, in the extended example 5, the configuration is such that the set value can be set to any one of the five stages of the setting 1 to the setting 5. However, it is not always necessary to set the setting value to the five stages. Can be arbitrarily determined.

  Specifically, when the set value is set to setting 1, for example, the main CPU performs a jackpot determination for a special symbol with a probability of 1/99, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, five rounds Control to the jackpot game state. In other words, when the set value is set to setting 1, the jackpot probability is relatively high, less than 1/100, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot gaming state is relatively small. It is possible to execute a game with a game.

  Further, when the set value is set to the setting 2, the main CPU performs, for example, a jackpot determination for a special symbol with a probability of 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, (Approximately 1500). In other words, when the set value is set to the setting 2, the game with a game characteristic called a general digi-pachi, such that the probability of a big hit is 1/300 and the amount of prize balls paid out in one big hit game state is about 1500 pieces. Can be executed. And in this gaming machine, the main CPU controls the gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends to the high probability gaming state, and after a predetermined period, the high probability gaming state ends and the low probability gaming state ends. Control. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 2, it is possible to execute a game with a game property called a so-called ST machine.

  When the set value is set to the setting 3, the main CPU performs, for example, a jackpot determination of a special symbol with a probability of 1/300. (Approximately 1500). In other words, when the set value is set to the setting 2, the game with a game characteristic called a general digi-pachi, such that the probability of a big hit is 1/300 and the amount of prize balls paid out in one big hit game state is about 1500 pieces. Can be executed. In this gaming machine, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU determines whether or not to set the probability change flag to ON using, for example, a symbol random number. The game state after the state ends is controlled to the high-probability game state until the next big hit game state is executed. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 3, it is possible to execute a game with a game property called a so-called probable loop machine.

  When the set value is set to setting 4, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of a special symbol with a probability of 1/300, for example, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a big hit, for example, 12 rounds (for example, (Approximately 1500). In other words, when the set value is set to the setting 2, the game with a game characteristic called a general digi-pachi, such that the probability of a big hit is 1/300 and the amount of prize balls paid out in one big hit game state is about 1500 pieces. Can be executed. In this gaming machine, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU determines whether or not to set the probability change flag to ON using, for example, a symbol random number. The game state after the state ends is controlled to the high-probability game state until the next big hit game state is executed. However, an upper limit is set on the number of times the big hit game state and the high probability game state are repeatedly executed (the above-mentioned “loop count”). When the loop count reaches this upper limit, the main CPU ends the big hit game state. The second game state is controlled to the low probability game state. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 4, it is possible to execute a game with a game characteristic called a limiter machine. In the above-mentioned game characteristics, if the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is the high probability gaming state, the high probability gaming state is continued until the next big hit gaming state is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a so-called ST machine may be used in which the high-probability gaming state after the big-hit gaming state ends is controlled to a low-probability gaming state after a predetermined period has elapsed.

  When the set value is set to setting 5, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of, for example, a special probability of 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, (Approximately 1500). In other words, when the set value is set to the setting 2, the game with a game characteristic called a general digi-pachi, such that the probability of a big hit is 1/300 and the amount of prize balls paid out in one big hit game state is about 1500 pieces. Can be executed. In this gaming machine, the main CPU always or at a certain probability when the big hitting game state ends, sets the probability change flag to ON, and when the probability change flag is set to ON, the main CPU changes the game state after the big hitting game state ends. , Control to a high probability gaming state. In addition, in the high-probability gaming state, the main CPU performs a gaming state transition lottery when performing a special symbol big hit determination, and when determining that the gaming state is to be transitioned in the gaming state transition lottery, sets the probability change flag to OFF. Then, control is performed to shift from the high-probability gaming state to the low-probability gaming state. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 5, in the high-probability game state, it is possible to execute a game with a game property in which a shift lottery to the low-probability game state is performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 5, the pachinko gaming machine can change the game property of the pachinko game machine in accordance with the set value, instead of the specifications such as the jackpot probability, for example. The game can be executed by one unit.

  In the above description, in the setting 1, it is possible to execute a game with a so-called sweet digital game, in the setting 2, it is possible to execute a game with a so-called ST machine, and in the setting 3, a so-called ST machine. It is possible to execute a game with a game property called a probable variable loop machine, a game with a game property called a limiter machine in setting 4 and a game with a low probability in a high probability game state in setting 5. Although it is possible to execute a game with a game property in which a lottery is performed for shifting to the probability game state, it is not essential that all of these game properties can be executed according to the set value. However, it is preferable to be able to switch between a game property called a so-called ST machine and a game property called a so-called probabilistic loop machine in accordance with the set value. Both the game property called the so-called ST machine and the game property called the so-called probable loop machine are common in that they can be controlled to the high-probability game state after the end of the jackpot game state, but the high-probability game state is It greatly differs depending on whether the game continues to the next big hit game state or ends halfway. In this way, it is possible to switch between two seemingly similar but substantially different game characteristics so that the manager of the gaming machine can use the pachinko gaming machine in a wider range. It is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine capable of improving the interest while having fun.

[Other extension examples]
The pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment can apply the present invention to all gaming machines in which a game is played using a game medium and a privilege is provided based on a result of the game. That is, a game is performed by a game medium being fired or inserted by the action of a physical player, and not only a form in which the game medium is paid out based on the result of the game, but also the main control circuit 100 itself, The game medium held by the player may be electromagnetically managed to enable a game performed by circulating the enclosed game balls or a game performed without medals. The game medium held by the player may be electromagnetically managed by a game medium management device that is attached (connected) to the main control circuit 100 and manages the game medium.

  When managed by the game medium management device connected to the main control circuit 100, the game medium management device includes a ROM and a RWM (or RAM), is a device provided in the game machine, and is an external game device (not shown). The medium handling device is connected to the two-way communication function via a predetermined interface, and provides a game medium lending operation (that is, a game medium necessary for a player to perform a game medium insertion operation). Operation) or the winning of the role related to the payout of the game medium (the win is established), the payout operation of the game medium (that is, paying out the game medium to the player, and obtaining the required game medium) Operation), or an operation of electromagnetically recording a game medium to be used for a game. In addition, the game medium management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also displays the number of game media held on the front of the pachinko gaming machine based on the management result of the number of game media, for example. A medium number display device (not shown) may be provided to manage the number of game media displayed on the retained game medium number display device. That is, the game medium management device may record and display the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

  Also, in this case, the game medium management device has a performance that allows the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device. In addition to direct operation by the player, the game machine has a performance that cannot reduce the number of recorded game media, and an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between the player and an external game media handling device. In such a case, it is desirable that the player has such a capability that the player cannot transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media unless through the external connection terminal plate.

  In addition to the above, the gaming machine is provided with a lending operation means operable by the player, a return (payment) operation means, and an external connection terminal plate. (E.g., an IC card), a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money or the like from a portable terminal, various other operation means such as a lending operation means, a return operation means, and a game medium handling device side external connection terminal plate. It may be provided (all are not shown).

  As a flow of the game at that time, for example, a player deposits a valuable value into the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any one of the lending operation means. Then, the number of game media corresponding to the value which is subtracted from the game medium handling device to the game medium management device is increased. Then, the player plays the game, and repeats the above operation when a further game medium is required. After that, a predetermined number of game media are obtained as a result of the game, and when the game is completed, any one of the return operation means is operated to transmit the number of game media from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device, The medium handling device discharges the recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored therein when transmitting the number of game media. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like to exchange prizes, or moves the gaming table to play a game based on game media recorded on another stand.

  In the above example, all game media are transmitted to the game medium handling device. The processing may be performed in a divided manner. Further, not only the recording medium is discharged, but also cash or cash equivalents may be discharged, or the recording medium may be stored in a portable terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be configured such that a member recording medium of a game arcade can be inserted therein, stored in the member recording medium, and can be replayed at a later date.

  Further, in a gaming machine or a game medium handling device, by operating a predetermined operation means (not shown), a lock operation for locking game medium or valuable data communication to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device can be executed. Is also good. At this time, information that can only be known to the player, such as a one-time password, may be set, or the player may be recorded by an image pickup unit provided in the game medium handling device.

  In the above description, the case where the game medium management device is applied to a pachinko game machine has been described. It is also possible to provide a game medium of the player.

  As described above, by providing the above-described game medium management device, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced as compared with the case where the game medium is physically provided for the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. Not only can reduce the number of components, but also prevent the player from directly touching the game media, improving the gaming environment, reducing noise, and reducing power consumption by reducing the number of parts. It will be. In addition, it is possible to prevent an illegal act through a game medium or a game medium input port or payout port. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

  In addition, an enclosure-type gaming machine configured to be able to play without discharging the game medium to the outside, and data on increase and decrease of the game medium accompanying consumption, lending, and payout of the game medium are transmitted to the communication machine by a communication cable. When the present invention is applied to a game system having a game medium management device connected so as to be able to transmit and receive by an optical signal through the game system, the game system may be configured as follows.

  The outline of the enclosed gaming machine will be described below. In the enclosed game machine, the launching device is located above the game area and shoots a game ball as a game medium from above the game area. When the player operates the handle, the ball feed solenoid is driven by the payout control circuit, and the ball feed punch pushes the game ball in a standby state toward the launch pad. Thereby, the game ball moves to the launch pad. Further, a subtraction sensor is provided on a path from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects a game ball moving to the launch pad. When a game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, the number of balls held is decremented by one. As described above, since the game ball is fired from above to the game area as a game medium, a so-called return ball (a foul ball) can be avoided in the enclosed game machine. The game balls discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area are polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the firing device. The game balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed game machine, and a certain number (for example, 50) of game balls circulate in a series of paths in the game machine.

  In the enclosed game machine, since the game ball is not discharged to the outside of the game machine, no upper plate or lower plate for temporarily holding the game ball is provided. Since the game balls are not discharged to the outside in the enclosed game machine, the game balls are not actually at hand of the player, and the game balls do not actually increase or decrease by playing the game. In the enclosed gaming machine, a player starts a game after obtaining a possessed ball by lending from a game medium management device. Here, obtaining a possessed ball means that a player obtains a game medium in terms of data management. Then, the game balls are fired from the launch device, so that the possessed balls are consumed, and the number of possessed balls is reduced. Further, when the game balls pass through the respective winning ports provided in the game area, payouts are made by the number according to the conditions set according to the winning ports, and the number of possessed balls increases. Furthermore, the number of possessed balls increases by lending from the game medium management device. In addition, "consumption, lending, and paying out of game media" indicates that consumption, lending, and paying out of a ball are performed. Further, “increase / decrease in game media” indicates that the number of possessed balls increases / decreases due to consumption, lending, and payout. The “data relating to the increase or decrease in game media due to the consumption, lending, and payout of game media” is data relating to a decrease in the number of possessed balls due to the launch of game balls, and an increase in the number of possessed balls due to lending and payout.

  The enclosed gaming machine has a payout control circuit and a liquid crystal display device of a touch panel type. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect the passage of the game ball through each winning opening or the like. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning opening, the payout number of the game ball by that is added to the number of possessed balls. When a game ball is fired, the number of balls held is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data relating to the number of possessed balls to the game medium management device by an operation of the player. The liquid crystal display device is located above the gaming machine, and accepts a request for converting a game value managed by the game medium management device into a possessed ball (lending the ball) and counting (returning) the possessed ball. Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game medium management device, and the payout control circuit instructs the game medium management device to transmit data on the current number of balls held. Here, the “game value” refers to money / banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, and the like, which can be converted into a possessed ball by the game media management device. In the second embodiment, the game medium management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to accept bills, prepaid media, and the like. The counted balls can be used for prize exchange and the like in a game hall or the like where the gaming system is installed.

  In addition, the enclosed gaming machine has a backup power supply. Thus, even when the power is turned off at night or the like, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. Further, the detection of the opening of the door frame by the door opening sensor may be continuously executed by the backup power supply. As a result, it is possible to prevent improper conduct at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be stored. Further, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be output to a liquid crystal display device or the like of the gaming machine.

  The game medium management device has a game machine connection board. The game medium management device is configured to transmit and receive data (transmission signal) to and from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The transmitted / received data includes the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the game machine manufacturer code stored in the game machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the game. Information such as the model code of the machine. When one of the gaming machine and the game medium management device is the transmission source and the other is the transmission destination, and the transmission source transmits the transmission signal, the transmission destination receiving the transmission signal is the same signal as the transmission signal. Is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal and the confirmation signal to determine whether they are the same.

  In this way, at the transmission source, the signal transmitted from the transmission source is not falsified by comparing the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal and determining whether or not they are the same, It can be confirmed that it is being sent to the sender. As a result, it is possible to suppress illegal acts such as falsification of a transmission / reception signal between the gaming machine and the game medium management device.

  Further, in the gaming system, the transmission source has a modulation unit that modulates a signal, transmits the signal modulated by the modulation unit as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation unit. A demodulation unit for demodulation may be provided.

  Thereby, even if the transmission / reception signal between the gaming machine and the game medium management device is read, it is difficult to decode this signal, and the transmission / reception signal between the game machine and the game medium management device is transmitted. Unauthorized acts such as falsification can be suppressed.

  Further, in the gaming system, the transmission destination, when receiving the transmission signal from the transmission source, the approval signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, separately from the confirmation signal, It may be transmitted to the transmission source.

  As a result, by not only confirming that a legitimate signal has been transmitted / received by comparing the transmission signal and the confirmation signal, but also confirming that the legitimate signal has been transmitted / received based on the approval signal. Therefore, the control of fraudulent acts can be further strengthened.

[Hall Menu Task]
First, the hole menu task will be described with reference to FIGS. The whole menu task is a task for controlling the whole menu. The whole menu task is performed by the sub CPU 201 at a predetermined cycle, for example, every 33 msec in the second embodiment.

  FIG. 207 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the hole menu task executed by the sub CPU 201.

  As shown in FIG. 207, first, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being checked (step S3301). Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a setting operation command (setting change start command, setting check start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101 when the power is turned on is received.

  If the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting change processing is being performed or the setting confirmation processing is being performed, that is, that the sub CPU 201 has received the setting operation command (YES in step S3301), the sub CPU 201 executes the hole menu display processing in step S3302. The hole menu display process (step S3302) is a process of displaying a later-described hole menu screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 by the display control circuit 204. The hole menu screen is also displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the processing of step S3310 described below is executed. However, the hole menu screen displayed in step S3302 and the hole menu screen displayed in step S3310 are displayed. There is a difference from the menu screen, which will be described later.

  An image (screen) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the hall menu display processing of step S3302 is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 208 is a diagram illustrating an example when the hole menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the hole menu display processing in step S3302 is performed. FIGS. 209 and 210 are diagrams illustrating an example of the hole menu screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the hole menu display processing of step S3302 is performed.

  As shown in FIGS. 208 to 210, when the hole menu display process (step S3302) is executed, a hole menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. As shown in FIG. 209 and FIG. 210, the hole menu screen includes a hole menu item display area 31610 on the left side of the screen, an operation explanation area 31620 substantially at the center in the left and right direction below the screen, and a preview arranged at substantially the center of the screen. And a display area 31630.

  Each item of the hole menu is displayed in the hole menu item display area 31610. 208 to 210, for convenience, only time setting, prize ball information, setting history / setting confirmation history, error information history, monitoring history, and warning display setting are shown as hole menu items. In addition to the above, items such as notification setting, power saving setting (power saving mode), maintenance, operation of accessory, confirmation of liquid crystal brightness, confirmation of liquid crystal, and volume adjustment setting may be displayed. However, since step S3302 is a process during the setting change process or the setting confirmation process, the display of the hole menu screen is terminated and the game screen cannot be returned to. Therefore, there is no item of the end of the hall menu among the items of the hall menu.

  In the operation explanation area 31620, an image corresponding to the operation button group 66 (see FIG. 3), that is, an image corresponding to the main button 662 and the up, down, left, and right select buttons 664a to 664d is displayed. In the hole menu screen, the enabled operation buttons and the disabled operation buttons in the operation button group 66 are displayed so that they can be distinguished from each other. For example, in FIGS. 208 to 210, activated operation buttons are displayed in white (the main button 662 and the up / down select buttons 664a and 664b are activated), and the disabled operation buttons are displayed. It is displayed in black (the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d are disabled).

  By operating the activated select button (up / down select button 664a, 664b) by the operator, any of a plurality of hole menu items can be selected. In FIG. 208 and FIG. 209, the hole menu items surrounded by solid lines are the selected hole menu items. For example, FIG. 208 shows that “time setting” surrounded by a solid line is selected. FIG. 210 shows that “setting change / confirmation history” surrounded by a solid line is selected.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the sub CPU 201 highlights a selected item. However, the display is not necessarily limited to the highlight display as long as the operator can easily grasp the selected item. The screen on which the time setting item is selected (see FIGS. 208 and 209) is the initial screen of the hole menu screen.

  In preview display area 31630, a preview screen for an item selected from a plurality of hole menu items is displayed. For example, when the item “time setting” is selected, the time setting screen is previewed (see FIGS. 208 and 209), and when the item “setting change / confirmation history” is selected, the setting The change / confirmation history screen is preview-displayed (see FIG. 210). However, it is preferable that the setting value is not displayed on the preview screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen. Note that no operation can be performed in the preview screen. For example, when the time setting screen is displayed in preview, the time setting operation cannot be performed on the time setting screen displayed in preview, and the time setting displayed as a hole menu item is selected and determined. Can be set on the time setting screen displayed by the user.

  Further, the sub CPU 201 sets the “setting is being changed” or “setting confirmation” in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 together with the hole menu screen, for example, in the minimum area at the lower right so as not to hinder the operation on the hall menu screen. It is in the middle. " At the same time, the sub CPU 201 controls the speaker 24 to output a sound such as “setting is being changed” or “setting is being checked” via the sound control circuit 205 (see FIG. 9). Further, the sub CPU 201 executes control for turning on all the LEDs 25 (for example, see FIG. 1) in white via the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. 9). In this way, the operator can be informed of whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being checked without obstructing the operation on the hall menu screen.

  Next, returning to FIG. 207, the sub CPU 201 executes a hole menu process in step S303. The details of the hole menu processing (step S3303) will be described later.

  After executing the hole menu processing (step S3303), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing is completed, that is, a command (initialization command) indicating that the setting change processing is completed or the setting confirmation. It is determined whether or not a command indicating the end of the process (power interruption recovery command) has been received from the main CPU 101 (step S3304). If neither the initialization command nor the power-off recovery command has been received (NO in step S3304), sub CPU 201 continues to execute the hole menu processing in step S3303.

  When transmitting the initialization command, the main CPU 101 also transmits the changed setting value information to the sub CPU 201 at the same timing as the command.

  The changed setting value information does not necessarily need to be transmitted at the same timing as the initialization command, and may be transmitted at a different timing as long as it can be associated with the setting change processing.

  Further, when transmitting the power-off recovery command, the main CPU 101 does not need to transmit the setting value information to the sub CPU 201 because the setting value has not been changed. It may be.

  In step S3304, when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process ends, that is, when the sub CPU 201 receives an initialization command or a power-off recovery command from the main CPU 101 (YES in step S3304), the number of histories stored in the work RAM 203 is reduced. It is determined whether the number is equal to or more than the predetermined number N (step S3305). This is because it is desired to record the history while keeping as much history data as possible by appropriately determining whether to overwrite the data or write the data in the empty area according to the number of histories stored in the work RAM 203. This is intended to prevent a situation where recording cannot be performed sometimes. Note that the predetermined number N can be appropriately set according to the capacity that can be stored in the work RAM 203, but is set to, for example, 500 in the second embodiment.

  If the number of histories of the history information stored in the work RAM 203 is equal to or more than the predetermined number N (YES in step S3305), the process proceeds to step S3306 to execute a history information overwriting process (step S3306). In the history information overwriting process in step S3306, the history stored in the work RAM 203 is overwritten in order from the history stored first (the oldest history information).

  In the history information overwriting process of step S3306, the history information already stored in the work RAM 203 is overwritten with new history information, so that the history information stored in the work RAM 203 is eventually deleted. But it is not limited to this. For example, when a new history information is stored in the work RAM 203 at the time of receiving an initialization command or a power-off recovery command, if there is a possibility that the new history information may exceed a predetermined upper limit, at least a part of the history information stored in the work RAM 203 may be used. May be deleted, and the history information may be stored. Even if an initialization command or a power-off recovery command has not been received, if there is a possibility that the upper limit may be exceeded when more history information is stored in the work RAM 203, at least one of the setting history information stored in the work RAM 203 may be exceeded. The copy may be deleted.

  If the number of histories stored in the work RAM 203 is less than the predetermined number N (NO in step S3305), the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S3307, and records the history information in a free area of the work RAM 203 (step S3307). S3307) is executed.

  In this specification, the history information overwriting process in step S3306 and the history information recording process in step S3307 may be collectively referred to as a history recording process.

  Note that the history information is the time information measured by the RTC 209 when receiving the initialization command or the power-off recovery command from the main CPU 101, the operation type information (the information indicating that the setting change process has been executed or the setting confirmation). (Information indicating that the process has been executed) and information such as set value information. Specifically, when the initialization command is received, the time information at which the initialization command is received, information indicating that the setting change processing has been executed, and the setting value information after the setting change transmitted from the main CPU 101 Is the history information. When the power interruption recovery command is received, the time information when the power interruption recovery command is received, the information indicating that the setting confirmation processing has been executed, and the current setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 are associated with each other. The attached information is history information. It is not essential that the current setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 be included in the history information when the power interruption recovery command is received, but the history setting information is transmitted from the main CPU 101 to execute the above-described setting determination processing. It is preferable that the current setting value information is included in the history information. The browsing history is also included in the above-mentioned history information. If the setting change / confirmation history has been browsed in the hole menu processing (step S3303), whether the browsing history is overwritten as history information in step S3306, Alternatively, in step S3307, the browsing history is recorded as history information in a free area of the work RAM 203.

  In a normal state, when the power is turned on, the main CPU 101 immediately transmits some command (for example, a power-off reset command, a setting operation command, etc.) after the sub-CPU 201 is started. When a command is not received from the main CPU 101 within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after activation, the sub CPU 201 determines that the command is abnormal, and sets the sub control circuit 200 to a game stop state. The display output, audio output, and LED 25 when the game is stopped on the sub control circuit 200 will be described later.

  It is preferable that the time information, which is one of the pieces of history information stored in the work RAM 203, not only stores the information of the date and time, but also stores the information up to the hour and minute or the information up to the hour and minute and second.

  After executing the processing of step S3306 or step S3307, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S3308.

  The sub CPU 201 determines in step S3308 whether or not the setting has been changed, that is, whether or not the initialization command has been received in step S3304 (step S3308). Note that if the setting operation command received in step S3301 is a setting change start command, the power interruption recovery command is not received in step S3304, and the setting operation command received in step S3301 is a setting confirmation start command. Does not receive the initialization command in step S3304. In the process of step S3308, the sub CPU 201 only needs to be able to determine that the setting change has been performed. Therefore, instead of determining whether the command received in step S3304 is an initialization command, It may be determined that the setting change process has been performed by receiving the value information.

  When determining that the setting change has been performed (YES in step S3308), sub CPU 201 performs a setting change initialization process (step S3309), and proceeds to step S3310.

  The sub CPU 201 executes the hole menu redisplay processing in step S3310. At this time, the redisplayed hole menu screen is different from the hole menu screen displayed during the setting change or the setting confirmation (the hole menu screen displayed in step S3302), and the setting change process ends and the game This is a screen displayed in an executable state (or during the game return processing in step S3030). For example, as shown in FIG. Is done. FIG. 211 is a diagram illustrating an example of a hole menu screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the hole menu redisplay processing in step S3310 is performed.

  That is, in the hole menu screen displayed during the setting change or the setting confirmation (the hole menu screen displayed in step S3302), the display of the hole menu screen cannot be ended by the operator's intention, but the setting change processing is performed. The hole menu screen re-displayed after the completion of (the hole menu screen displayed in step S3310) is configured so that the display of the hole menu screen can be ended by the operator's intention. The hole menu screen displayed in step S3302 (for example, see FIG. 209) and the hole menu screen displayed in step S3310 (see FIG. 211) can be operated by selecting and determining any one of the items. (For example, a function for browsing a setting change / confirmation history screen) and the like.

  When the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting has been changed in step S3308 (YES in step S3308), the sub CPU 201 displays the hole menu screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the hole menu redisplay processing in step S3310. For example, a character such as “Setting has been changed” is displayed in the minimum area at the lower right so as not to disturb the operation on the hall menu screen. Similarly, when a screen of a selected hole menu item (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) is displayed, similarly, a "change of setting" Is displayed. At the same time, the sub CPU 201 controls the speaker 24 to output a sound such as “Setting has been changed. RAM has been initialized” via the sound control circuit 205 (see FIG. 9). This allows the operator to know that the setting has been changed (and that the backup clear process has been executed) without disturbing the operation on the hole menu screen or the selected hole menu item screen. It becomes. Further, the sub CPU 201 executes control for turning on all the LEDs 25 (for example, see FIG. 1) in red via the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. 9).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3308 that the setting confirmation has been performed (NO in step S3308), that is, if the command received in step S3304 is a power interruption reset command indicating the end of the setting confirmation processing, sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S3309. Without executing the processing of Step S3314, the game screen return processing of Step S3315 is executed. Therefore, when the setting confirmation processing ends, the hall menu redisplay processing (step S3310) is not executed. Further, a character indicating that the setting check has been completed is not displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Further, no sound indicating that the setting check has been completed is not output. However, the sub CPU 201 controls the LED 25 (for example, see FIG. 1) to be fully lit in red via the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. 9).

  By the way, when the process of step S3302 is performed and the process of step S3310 is performed, the hole menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, but the process of step S3302 is performed. The game cannot be executed when the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed, while the game can be executed when the process of step S3310 is executed. However, as described above, the manner of displaying characters in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (not displayed when the setting check is completed) is performed when the processing in step S3302 is performed and when the processing in step S3310 is performed. ), The manner of sound output from the speaker 24, and the manner of light emission of the LED 25 are greatly different. Therefore, even if the hole menu screen or the screen of the selected hole menu item is displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the operation on the hole menu screen or the screen of the selected hole menu item (for example, the hole menu item) , The pachinko game machine can easily execute the game without obstructing the pachinko gaming machine without obstructing the operation. It has become possible.

  After executing the processing in step S3310, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S3311 and executes the whole menu processing. The hole menu processing in step S3311 is basically the same as the processing in step S3303, except that the processing at the time of YES in step S33072 in FIG. 217 described later is different, and this will be described later.

  In step S3312, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not “end hole menu” is selected on the redisplayed hole menu screen. If it is determined that “End Hall Menu” has been selected (YES in step S3312), sub CPU 201 performs a game screen return display process (step S3315). In this game screen return display processing, the sub CPU 201 does not operate the effect video or the pachinko gaming machine (for example, the firing handle 32) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when playing a game for a predetermined period. Displays the initial video that is displayed in the case. Then, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S3316 after executing the game screen return processing of step S3315.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3312 that “hole menu end” has not been selected (NO in step S3312), sub CPU 201 determines whether a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has not elapsed (step S3313). ). Although illustration is omitted in FIG. 207, when the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing is completed (YES in step S3304), the hole menu redisplay processing (step S3310) is performed, and the hole menu processing (step S3311) is performed. In step S3313, when any one of the hole menu items is selected, the timing has been started based on an operation performed by the operator, and the process in step S3313 determines whether the predetermined time has elapsed. This is a process of determining whether or not the operation is not performed. If the operator does not perform any operation for a predetermined time or longer, the sub CPU 201 determines YES in step S3313.

  If the sub CPU 201 determines that the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without any operation (YES in step S3313), the display of the redisplayed hole menu screen is ended, and the game screen return display processing in step S3315 is performed. Execute.

  If the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has not elapsed without operation (NO in step S3313), sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a command for generating an effect control object has been received (step S3314). . The command for generating the effect control object is a command that can be received when the game is executed, such as a symbol change start command, a symbol change confirmation (change stop) command, a jackpot game execution start command, and a jackpot game. , A round interval command in the big hit game, a big hit game end command, an initialization command, a power interruption return command, and the like. If the sub CPU 201 determines in step S3314 that any of the commands for generating these effect control objects has been received, the display of the redisplayed hole menu screen is terminated, and the game screen return display in step S3315 is performed. Execute the processing. As a result, a game screen in accordance with the progress of the game by the main CPU 101 is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. For example, an image irrelevant to the game despite the progress of the game by the main CPU 101 is displayed. It is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered, such as being displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command for generating the effect control object has not been received (NO in step S3314), the process returns to step S3311.

  After executing the game screen return display processing (step S3315), the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S3316 and executes the hall menu display prohibition processing. The hole menu display prohibition process is a process for prohibiting the hole menu screen from being displayed again in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. That is, when the hole menu display prohibition processing (step S3316) is executed, even if the setting key 328 is turned ON again, the hole menu screen is not displayed, and the power OFF operation is performed to execute the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing. Unless it is performed, the hall menu display process (step S3302) cannot be executed.

  As described above, the hole menu screen is a screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 while the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing is being performed in principle. However, when the setting change processing is executed, even if the setting change processing ends, for example, the operator himself / herself does not select the item “End of the whole menu” on the hall menu screen (NO in step S3312), Under certain conditions, such as that the operation time has not elapsed for a predetermined time (NO in step S3313) and that a command for generating an effect control object has not been received (NO in step S3314), the processing of steps S3311 to S3314 is repeatedly executed. As a result, the hole menu screen is continuously displayed. Therefore, if the operator performs any operation on the hole menu screen or the screen of the selected hole menu item (for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen), the display of the hole menu screen or the screen of the selected hole menu item is performed. It will be displayed continuously without ending. As a result, even when the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing ends, it is possible to give the operator time to operate the home menu screen or the screen of the selected hole menu item. In addition, even if the operator forgets to select “end the hole menu”, if there is no operation for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the display of the hole menu screen or the screen of the selected hole menu item ends and the game is terminated. Since the screen return process (step S3315) is executed, a person without authority (for example, a hall clerk or a player who is not a gaming machine administrator) easily browses confidential information such as a setting change history, a setting confirmation history, and a browsing history. And security can be ensured.

  In the second embodiment, when it is determined in step S3314 that a command for generating an effect control object has been received, a game screen return process (step S3315) and a hole menu display prohibition process (step S3316) are performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on receiving a specific command that can be received when the execution of the game is started, such as receiving a command indicating that the firing handle 32 has been operated, A game screen return process (step S3315) and a hole menu display prohibition process (step S3316) may be performed.

  Here, a notification mode when an error occurs, including a backup clear process without a setting change process, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 212 is an example of a screen in which an error content is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. A screen indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred and that the backup clear processing without the setting change processing has been executed; (c) that the backup clear processing without the setting change processing has been executed and that FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating a screen after a notification period (for example, 30 seconds) indicating that the backup clear process has been executed in a state where both are occurring.

  As shown in FIG. 212, when a plurality of errors have occurred, the sub CPU 201 displays all the details of the errors that have occurred in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 and also operates the audio control circuit 205 ( Sound is output from the speaker 24 via the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. 9), and light emission control of the LED 25 is executed via the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. 9).

  When the backup clear processing without the setting change processing is executed and no other error occurs, the sub CPU 201 returns to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 as shown in FIG. 9 is controlled so that a character such as "RAM is cleared" is displayed, and a sound such as "RAM is cleared" is output from the speaker 24. The LED control circuit 206 (FIG. 9) (See FIG. 1) to control the LED 25 (see, for example, FIG. 1) to be fully lit in red. Characters such as "RAM cleared" are displayed using an area larger than the above-described minimum area (see FIG. 211) on which characters such as "Setting changed" are displayed.

  That is, in the second embodiment, when performing the setting change processing, the backup clear processing is also always performed (see FIG. 180), and in the hole menu redisplay processing in step S3310 executed after the end of the setting change processing, as described above. , "The setting has been changed" is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, but the fact that the backup clear processing has been executed is not displayed, and "The setting has been changed. Is output only from the speaker 24. On the other hand, when the backup clear processing is executed without the setting change processing, the sub CPU 201 uses the area larger than the above-described minimum area (see FIG. 211) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Control is performed so that characters such as "RAM is cleared" are displayed, and sound such as "RAM is cleared" is output from the speaker 24 (see FIG. 212A). Here, the main purpose of the backup clear processing with the setting change processing is to change the setting value (not the backup clear processing), whereas in the backup clear processing without the setting change processing, the main purpose is the backup clear processing. It is considered to be. For this reason, when the backup clear process accompanied by the setting change process is executed, the fact that the backup clear process has been executed is conservatively notified so as not to hinder the operation of the redisplayed hole menu screen. On the other hand, when the backup clear processing without the setting change processing is executed, the fact that the backup clear processing is executed is notified in a more prominent manner than when the backup clear processing with the setting change processing is executed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the backup clear process from being executed improperly.

  After the backup clear processing is executed, if another error such as a start-up opening prize error has also occurred as another error, for example, as shown in FIG. The fact that the backup clear process has been executed is displayed as characters in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. At this time, the fact that the backup clear processing has been executed has a higher priority than the start-up abnormal prize error, so that a character indicating that the backup clear processing has been executed is displayed at a higher rank regardless of the order of occurrence. . In addition, a sound notifying that the backup clear processing having a higher priority has been performed is output from the speaker 24, and the LED 25 emits light in a manner indicating that the backup clear processing has been performed.

  In addition, when the notification period (for example, 30 seconds) of the execution of the backup clear process has elapsed in a state where both the backup clear process has been executed and the start-up opening abnormal winning error, the backup clear process has been performed. Is deleted from the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and if no other error has occurred, only the character indicating the start opening abnormal winning error is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. You. Further, the sound output from the speaker 24 changes from a sound notifying that the backup clear process has been executed to a sound notifying that an abnormal start-up opening prize error has occurred, and the light emission mode of the LED 25 is also changed to the backup clear. The mode changes from a mode indicating that the process has been executed to a mode indicating that an abnormal start-up opening winning error has occurred. In this way, the contents of the error that has occurred can be easily grasped.

  In the above description, when it is determined that the setting change processing is being performed or the setting confirmation processing is being performed, that is, when it is determined that the setting operation command has been received (YES in step S3301), the hole menu display processing (step S3302) is executed. However, it is preferable to execute the backup clear processing when the backup clear processing without the setting change processing is performed. The backup clear processing without the setting change processing is performed when both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35 are performed without turning on the setting key 328 in a state where the power is not turned on. It is executed (see FIG. 179). When the backup clear processing is executed, the main CPU 101 transmits an initialization command to the sub CPU 201. Therefore, the sub CPU 201 that has received the initialization command without receiving the setting operation command performs the backup clear processing without setting change processing. Has been executed, and the whole menu display processing (step S3302) and the whole menu processing (step S3303) can be executed.

[Other examples of hole menu tasks]
Incidentally, the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment determines whether or not the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal in the game permission process (step S17) of the power-on process (see FIG. 177). (See step S31730 in FIG. 178). For example, when the set value data is not within the specified range (in the second embodiment, within the range of “0” to “5”), the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal. (NO in step S31730), the game permission flag is turned off (see step S31760), and the game cannot be executed. However, for example, when the main control board 30 is replaced illegally, there is a high possibility that the work area check processing of the RAM 103 (step S31720) is not executed. Further, in the case where the set value that is set by the input of the invalid signal is changed, the set value data may be in the range of “0” to “5”. Therefore, similarly to the above-described setting determination processing executed during the execution of the game, the setting value may not be set in step S31720 or the setting value may be incorrectly changed even though the setting value may have been incorrectly changed. Assuming a case where the data is in the range of “0” to “5” (for example, a case where YES is determined in step S31730), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the set value information is appropriate (steps 317 and 317). Step S3318) may be executed. FIG. 213 shows the whole menu task in this case. FIG. 213 is another example of the hole menu task executed by the sub CPU 201, and is a flowchart in the case where the sub CPU 201 executes the setting determination processing for determining whether the setting value information is appropriate. Hereinafter, another example of the hole menu task will be described. However, description of the processing common to FIG. 207 will be omitted, and only the setting determination processing will be described.

  First, even when the main CPU 101 transmits a power interruption return command indicating that the setting confirmation processing has been completed, the main CPU 101 stores the setting value information stored in the main RAM 103 as the current setting value used for the progress of the game. It is transmitted to the sub CPU 201.

  On the other hand, upon receiving the power interruption recovery command, the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting has not been changed (NO in step S3308), and proceeds to step S3317. In this step S3317, the sub CPU 201 executes a set value check process. This set value check processing (step S3317) is performed based on the current set value information (the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 before the power failure and stored in the work RAM 203) and the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 ( This is a process for confirming the setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 after the power failure. If it is determined in step S3308 that the setting has not been changed (NO in step S3308), the processing in steps S3309 to S3314 is not performed.

  After confirming the current set value information and the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 in the set value check process (step S3317), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the set value is appropriate, that is, determines whether the set value is appropriate. (Step S3318). At this time, if the current setting value information matches the setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101, it is determined that the current setting value information is appropriate (YES in step S3318), and the process proceeds to step S3315. The processing after step S3315 is as described above.

  On the other hand, if the current set value information does not match the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101, it is determined that the set value information is inappropriate (NO in step S3318), and the process proceeds to step S3319. Execute the processing.

  The above-described setting value abnormality process is a process of displaying an image notifying that the setting value is abnormal in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. In the setting value abnormality process (step S3319), a sound for notifying that the set value is abnormal is output instead of or in addition to the process of displaying an image for notifying that the set value is abnormal. The processing may be executed.

  As described above, when the command transmitted from the main CPU 101 is the power interruption recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation processing, the sub CPU 201 executes the setting determination processing (the processing of step 317 and step S3318) and sets the setting value. Is determined to be inappropriate (NO in step S3318), the setting value abnormality processing (step S3319) is executed to notify the gaming machine manager that the setting value is not appropriate.

  Note that the above-described setting determination processing (the processing in steps S3317 and S3318) is executed when the setting confirmation processing ends, but the setting change processing is performed without executing either the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing. (For example, when the backup clear switch 330 is pressed and the power switch 35 is turned on without turning on the setting key 328 in a state where the power is not turned on) or the power supply is simply turned off. It is also preferable to execute the process even when only is input. Unless the setting change process is performed, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the setting value information received before the power failure matches the setting value information received after the power failure, thereby determining whether the setting value information is appropriate. Can be determined.

[Hall menu processing]
Next, the hole menu processing (step S3303) in the hole menu task (see FIGS. 207 and 213) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 214 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the hole menu process executed by the sub CPU 201.

  First, the sub CPU 201 selects a hole menu item to be used for confirming various information and settings and changing various settings based on the operation of the select button 664 and / or the main button 662 by the operator. A selection process is performed (step S33001). In the hole menu selection processing of FIG. 214, the hole menu items include time setting, prize ball information, setting history / setting confirmation history, error information history, monitoring history, warning display setting, notification setting, power saving mode, maintenance, A description will be given of the case of the accessory operation check, the liquid crystal brightness setting, and the volume adjustment setting, but the hole menu items are not limited to these as described above.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hole menu selected in step S33001 is “time setting” (step S33001). If it is determined in step S33002 that the selected hole menu is “time setting” (YES in step S33002), sub CPU 201 performs a time setting process (step S33003). In this time setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a time setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the set time.

  If the sub CPU 201 determines that the hole menu selected in step S33001 is not “time setting” (NO in step S33002), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the hole menu selected in step S33001 is “prize ball information”. (Step S33004). When determining that the selected hole menu is “prize ball information” (YES in step S33004), the sub CPU 201 performs prize ball information processing (step S33005). In the prize ball information processing, the sub CPU 201 displays a prize ball information screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can check the prize ball information. The prize ball information includes, for example, information on the number of prize balls paid out today, difference information between the number of prize balls paid out today and the number of game balls fired, and the number of prize balls per day paid out in the past several days. Information, difference information (every day) between the number of prize balls paid out in the past several days and the number of prize balls fired, and the like.

  When determining that the hole menu selected in step S33001 is not “prize ball information” (NO in step S33004), sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hole menu selected in step S33001 is “setting change / confirmation history”. It is determined (step S33006). When determining that the selected hole menu is “setting change / confirmation history” (YES in step S33006), sub CPU 201 performs a setting change / confirmation history process (step S33007). In the setting change / confirmation history processing, the sub CPU 201 displays a setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 218 described later) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 and allows the operator to confirm the setting. A history, a change history, and a browsing history can be confirmed.

  When the sub CPU 201 detects that the main button 662 has been operated in a state in which the select button 664 has been operated and “setting change / confirmation history” has been selected, the sub CPU 201 displays the setting in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. A change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 218 to be described later) is displayed, and the operator can change the setting (set value), check the setting (set value), check the browsing history, and check the set (set value). It is possible to confirm the changed settings (set values). The details of the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217.

  If the sub CPU 201 determines that the hole menu selected in step S33001 is not “setting change / confirmation history” (NO in step S33006), it determines whether the hole menu selected in step S33001 is “error information history”. It is determined (step S33008). When determining that the selected hole menu is “error information history” (YES in step S33008), sub CPU 201 performs error information history processing (step S33009). In this error information history processing, the sub CPU 201 displays an error information history screen (for example, see FIG. 215) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can check and change the error information history. I do.

  The error history displayed in the error information history processing is, for example, information stored in the work RAM 203 as the error history when the sub CPU 201 determines that the backup is defective. As described above, the sub CPU 201 may determine that the backup is defective when the abnormal command is received from the main CPU 101, or without transmitting the abnormal command from the main CPU 101, and the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 9). ) May start when a normal command from the main CPU 101 cannot be received for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after power supply to the main CPU 101 is started.

  As shown in FIG. 215, an error information history table is arranged substantially at the center of the error information history screen. The error information history table has an error content column in which an error code is displayed, an occurrence date and time column in which the date and time at which the error code was recorded is displayed, and a release date and time column in which the date and time at which the error was released is displayed. Further, an operation method on the error information history screen is displayed at a lower left portion of the error information history screen. For example, it is shown that the cursor (not shown) can be moved up, down, left, and right by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d (see FIG. 3), and it can be determined by operating the main button 662. It is shown that it can be done.

  When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hole menu selected in step S33001 is not “error information history” (NO in step S33008), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the hole menu selected in step S33001 is “monitoring history” ( Step S33010). If it is determined that the selected hole menu is “monitoring history” (YES in step S33010), sub CPU 201 performs a monitoring history process (step S33011). In this monitoring history processing, the sub CPU 201 displays a monitoring history processing screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can check the monitoring history.

  When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hole menu selected in step S33001 is not “monitoring history” (NO in step S33010), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the hole menu selected in step S33001 is “warning display setting” ( Step S33012). When determining that the selected hole menu is “warning display setting” (YES in step S33012), sub CPU 201 performs a warning display setting process (step S33013). In this warning display setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a warning display setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and allows the operator to confirm and change the warning display setting.

  When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hole menu selected in step S33001 is not “warning display setting” (NO in step S33012), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the hole menu selected in step S33001 is “notification setting” ( Step S33014). When it is determined that the selected hole menu is “notification setting” (YES in step S33014), sub CPU 201 performs a notification setting process (step S33015). In this notification setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a notification setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 and allows the operator to confirm and change the notification settings.

  When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hole menu selected in step S33001 is not “notification setting” (NO in step S33014), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hole menu selected in step S33001 is in “power saving mode” ( Step S33016). If it is determined that the selected hole menu is “power saving mode” (YES in step S33016), sub CPU 201 performs power saving mode processing (step S33017). In the power saving mode processing, the sub CPU 201 displays a power saving mode screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 and allows the operator to confirm and change the setting of the power saving mode. .

  If the sub CPU 201 determines that the hole menu selected in step S33001 is not the “power saving mode” (NO in step S33016), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the hole menu selected in step S33001 is “maintenance” (step S33001). S33018). When it is determined that the selected hole menu is “maintenance” (YES in step S33018), sub CPU 201 performs a maintenance process (step S33019). Details of the maintenance process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hole menu selected in step S33001 is not “maintenance” (NO in step S33018), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hole menu selected in step S33001 is “main item operation check” (step S33001). Step S33020). When it is determined that the selected hole menu is “check of the operation of the accessory” (YES in step S33020), the sub CPU 201 performs an operation check of the accessory (step S33021). In the accessory operation confirmation processing, the sub CPU 201 displays a accessory operation confirmation screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 to enable the operator to confirm the operation of the accessory.

  If the sub-CPU 201 determines that the hole menu selected in step S33001 is not “main item operation confirmation” (NO in step S33020), it determines whether the hole menu selected in step S33001 is “liquid crystal brightness setting”. (Step S33022). When it is determined that the selected hole menu is “liquid crystal brightness setting” (YES in step S33022), sub CPU 201 performs a liquid crystal brightness setting process (step S33023). In this liquid crystal luminance setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a liquid crystal luminance setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and allows the operator to confirm and change the luminance setting of the liquid crystal display device 16. And

  When determining that the hole menu selected in step S33001 is not “liquid crystal brightness setting” (NO in step S33022), sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hole menu selected in step S33001 is “volume adjustment setting”. (Step S33024). When it is determined that the selected hole menu is “volume adjustment setting” (YES in step S33024), sub CPU 201 performs a volume adjustment setting process (step S33025). In this volume adjustment setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a volume adjustment setting screen (not shown) on the liquid crystal display device 16 and allows the operator to check and change the volume of the sound output from the speaker 24. And

  The hall menu selected in step S33001 after the processing of step S33003, step S33005, step S33007, step S33009, step S33011, step S33013, step S33015, step S33017, step S33019, step S33021, step S33023, and step S33025, and "Sound volume" is "volume" If it is determined that the setting is not “adjustment setting” (NO in step S33024), sub CPU 201 ends the whole menu process, and returns the process to step S3304 of the whole menu task (see FIG. 207).

[Modes of various devices when changing settings / checking settings]
The modes and the like of the various devices (the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, the main RAM 103, and the performance display monitor 334) at the time of setting change and at the time of setting confirmation are as described above, but are summarized below for easy understanding. explain.

  First, the setting change will be described in the order in which various operations are performed. In a power OFF state before the power is turned on, the power switch 35 is OFF. At this time, the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, and the performance display monitor 334 are off. To start the setting change process, it is necessary to turn on the setting key 328 before turning on the power. However, even if the setting key 328 is turned on, the liquid crystal display device 16 and the speaker 24, the LED 25 and the performance display monitor 334 remain off.

  Next, when both the backup clear switch 330 and the power switch 35 are turned ON while the setting key 328 is turned ON, the main CPU 101 controls to the setting change state and transmits a setting operation command (setting change start command). . The sub CPU 201 determines that the setting change state has been controlled (the setting change state has been started) based on the reception of the setting operation command (setting change start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101. When controlled to the setting change state, the game cannot be executed, and the sub CPU 201 causes the display control circuit 204 to display a hole menu screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 and to display a character such as “Setting is being changed”. Is displayed. At the same time, the sub CPU 201 outputs a sound such as “Setting is being changed” from the speaker 24 by the sound control circuit 205, and turns on all the LEDs 25 in white by the LED control circuit 206. Further, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting change security signal to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323. Further, the main CPU 101 executes a backup clear process for clearing the work area of the main RAM 103. The set values that are set are displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101.

  Next, when the setting switch 332 is operated in the setting change state, the setting value is updated. However, at this stage, the set value has not been determined yet. The performance display monitor 334 displays the updated set value. In addition, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, a hole menu screen is displayed, and characters such as "Setting is being changed" are continuously displayed. At the same time, a sound such as "Setting is being changed" is continuously output from the speaker 24, and the LED 25 is continuously illuminated in white. In the second embodiment, even if the set value is updated, it is stored only in the register and is not stored in the main RAM 103 until it is determined. The value may be stored in the work area of the main RAM 103. Further, in the second embodiment, the setting value is updated by operating the setting switch 332, but the setting value is updated by operating other operation means (for example, the backup clear switch 330). May be performed.

  Next, when the setting key 328 is turned off, the main CPU 101 ends the setting change state and transmits an initialization command. The sub CPU 201 determines that the setting change state has ended based on receiving the initialization command transmitted from the main CPU 101. When the setting change state ends, the game can be executed. However, even if the setting change state ends, unless execution of the game is started (for example, unless a command for generating an effect control object is received), the sub CPU 201 keeps the display control circuit for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). A hole menu screen or a screen of the selected hole menu item (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) is displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 by the display unit 204, and characters such as “setting changed” are displayed on the liquid crystal display. It is displayed on the display area of the display device 16. However, the fact that the backup clear process has been executed is not displayed. At the same time, the sub CPU 201 outputs a sound such as “Setting has been changed. RAM has been initialized.” From the speaker 24 by the sound control circuit 205 for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). The control circuit 206 turns on all the LEDs 25 in red. Such display in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, output from the speaker 24, and full lighting of the LED 25 in red continue as long as any operation is performed on the hole menu screen or the selected hole menu item screen. The process ends when the no-operation period continues for a predetermined period or when the execution of the game is started. The base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101. By the way, in the above description, the fact that the backup clear process has been executed is not displayed, but the sub CPU 201 additionally displays the message "RAM has been cleared" in addition to the message "Setting has been changed". You may make it.

  In this way, even if the setting change state is completed, a character display such as "Setting has been changed", a voice output such as "Setting has been changed. RAM has been initialized." By performing the lighting for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), it is possible to suppress unauthorized actions such as browsing a setting change / confirmation history screen or the like by an unauthorized third party. Become. Further, since at least the light emission mode of the LED 25 is clearly different between the setting change state and the end of the setting change state, it can be easily grasped from the appearance whether or not the game can be executed.

  The above is the aspect of the various devices (the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, the main RAM 103, and the performance display monitor 334) when the setting is changed.

  Next, the setting confirmation will be described in the order in which various operations are performed. In a power OFF state before the power is turned on, the power switch 35 is OFF. At this time, the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, and the performance display monitor 334 are off. To start the setting confirmation process, it is necessary to turn on the setting key 328 before turning on the power. However, even if the setting key 328 is turned on, the liquid crystal display device 16 and the speaker 24, the LED 25 and the performance display monitor 334 remain off.

  Next, when the power switch 35 is turned ON while the setting key 328 is turned ON (the backup clear switch 330 is not turned ON), the main CPU 101 controls to the setting confirmation state and sets the setting operation command (setting confirmation start command). Send The sub CPU 201 determines that the setting confirmation state has been controlled (the setting confirmation state has been started) based on the reception of the setting operation command (setting confirmation start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101. When it is controlled to the setting confirmation state, the game cannot be executed, and the sub CPU 201 causes the display control circuit 204 to display the hole menu screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 and to display "Setting is being confirmed". Display characters. At the same time, the sub CPU 201 outputs a sound such as “Setting is being confirmed” from the speaker 24 by the sound control circuit 205, and turns on all the LEDs 25 in white by the LED control circuit 206. Further, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting confirmation security signal to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323. The set values that are set are displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101.

  Next, when the setting key 328 is turned off, the main CPU 101 ends the setting confirmation state and transmits a power-off reset command. The sub CPU 201 determines that the setting confirmation state has been completed based on the reception of the power interruption recovery command transmitted from the main CPU 101. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game can be executed. The sub CPU 201 executes the game screen return display process (step S3316) based on the reception of the power interruption return command transmitted from the main CPU 101. At this time, the sub CPU 201 does not display a character indicating that the setting check has been completed, and does not output a sound indicating that the setting check has ended. However, the sub CPU 201 fully turns on the LED 25 in red for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), and ends the full lighting of the LED 25 in red when the execution of the game is started. The base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101.

  In this way, even if the setting confirmation state is completed, by turning on the red light of the LED 25 for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), illegality such as browsing of a setting change / confirmation history screen or the like can be reduced. Can be suppressed by a third party who does not have the above. Further, at least the light emission mode of the LED 25 is clearly different between during the setting change state and when the setting change state ends, so that it can be easily grasped from the appearance whether or not the game can be executed.

  Note that, as described above, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the command has not been received from the main CPU 101 and that it is abnormal even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the activation, the sub CPU 201 determines that the game is stopped. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the game is stopped, the display control circuit 204 and the voice control circuit 205 output a display and a voice saying “Please determine a set value”, and the LED control circuit 206 outputs an LED 25 (for example, FIG. 1) is set to blink all white. This state is again controlled by the main CPU 101 to the setting change state, and continues until the sub CPU 201 receives an initialization command based on the end of the setting change state.

  The above is the mode of various devices (the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, the main RAM 103, and the performance display monitor 334) at the time of setting confirmation.

[Setting change / confirmation history processing]
Next, the setting change / confirmation history processing (step S33007) in the hall menu processing (see step S3303 in FIG. 207) will be described. In the setting change / confirmation history processing, the setting change / confirmation history information (described later) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 with the setting change history of the set value, the history of confirmation of the set value, and the browsing history of the setting change and confirmation. (A generic term for “setting change history information” and “setting confirmation history information”). Before describing the setting change / confirmation history processing, setting change, setting confirmation, and browsing will be described first.

  In the second embodiment, the setting change operation can be performed in the setting change processing as described above. This setting change process is started by turning on the setting key 328 and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. As described above, when the setting change process is started, the set value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Then, for example, by depressing the setting switch 332, the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is increased or decreased in the range of “1” to “6”. When the desired setting value is reached, the setting key switch signal is When operated to be OFF, one of the plurality of set values used for the progress of the game is determined, and the setting change process ends.

  As described above, after executing the setting change process, the main CPU 101 sets the initialization command indicating that the setting change process is completed, and the changed setting value information as described above, so that the setting change history can be displayed. It is transmitted to the sub CPU 201.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 receives the initialization command indicating that the setting change processing has been completed, the operation type information (information indicating that the setting change processing has been executed), the setting value information indicating the setting value after the setting change, The date and time data currently measured by the RTC 209, that is, the date and time data when the initialization command is received, is stored in the work RAM 203 as setting change history information. The setting change history information stored at this time corresponds to, for example, information displayed in columns “No. 3” and “No. 4” in a setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. I do.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when confirming the setting value, the setting confirmation process needs to be executed by the main CPU 101 as described above. This setting confirmation process is executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. As described above, when the setting confirmation process is started, the set value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Then, when the setting key switch signal is operated to be turned off, the setting confirmation processing ends. It should be noted that the setting confirmation process may be executed again when the setting key switch signal is operated to be turned off and then the setting key switch signal is operated to be turned on again. As you did.

  In addition, as described above, the main CPU 101 executes the setting confirmation processing and then transmits a power interruption recovery command to the sub CPU 201 as a command indicating that the setting confirmation processing has been completed, so that the setting confirmation history can be displayed. I do. At this time, although the set value has not been changed, the set value information is also transmitted from the main CPU 101 to the sub CPU 201 in order to execute the above-described setting determination processing (the processing of steps S3317 and S3318, see FIG. 213). Preferably.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 receives the power-off recovery command indicating that the setting confirmation processing has been completed, the operation type information (information indicating that the setting confirmation processing has been executed) and the date and time data currently measured by the RTC 209 are received. That is, the date and time data when the power interruption recovery command is received is stored in the work RAM 203 as setting confirmation history information. The setting confirmation history information stored at this time corresponds to, for example, information shown in a “No. 1” column in a setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. In addition, as shown in the column of "No. 1" in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. May also be displayed together.

  Note that the work RAM 203 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment forms a storage holding storage area capable of storing and holding written information even in a non-energized state. Therefore, even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine is turned off by the operator or when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, for example, the storage of the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 is retained.

  In the second embodiment, the browsing means that the main button 662 is pressed in a state where “setting change / confirmation history” is highlighted on the hole menu screen (see FIGS. 209 and 210), and the work is performed. This means that a setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 218 to be described later) in which the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the RAM 203 is displayed is displayed.

  The sub CPU 201 executes the following processing to enable the browsing history (browsing history) to be displayed. That is, when the setting is being changed or the setting is being checked (YES in step S3301), the sub CPU 201 displays the hole menu screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (step S3301). Then, when “setting change / confirmation history” is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S3303) (YES in step S33006), sub CPU 201 highlights “setting change / confirmation history” (see FIG. 210). ). When the main button 662 is pressed in this state, the sub CPU 201 reads the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 and displays the setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 218 described later) on the liquid crystal display. While being displayed in the display area of the display device 16, the operation type information (information indicating that the browsing has been performed) indicating that the browsing has been performed, and the date and time data currently measured by the RTC 209, that is, when the browsing has been performed ( The date and time data (when the main button 662 is pressed) is stored in the work RAM 203 in association with the date and time data. This is the process when the browsing history is recorded in the above-described history recording process (step S3306, step S3307). That is, the browsing history is recorded in the work RAM 203 when the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 regardless of whether the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing is being performed. When storing the browsing history in the work RAM 203, the sub CPU 201 integrates the browsing history with the setting change / confirmation history information already stored, for example, and stores the information in the work RAM 203. The browsing history stored at this time corresponds to, for example, information displayed in the columns of “No. 2” and “No. 5” in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in FIG.

  Here, the history recording processing of steps S3306 and S3307 is summarized as follows. First, in the hall menu processing (step S3303), "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined (YES in step S33006), and the command received in step S3304 is an initialization command indicating the end of the setting change processing. The sub CPU 201 performs both the setting change history and the browsing history. In the hall menu process (step S3303), "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined (YES in step S33006), and the command received in step S3304 is a power interruption recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process. At this time, the sub CPU 201 performs both the setting confirmation history and the browsing history. If “setting change / confirmation history” is not selected and determined in the hall menu processing (step S3303) (NO in step S33006) and the command received in step S3304 is an initialization command, the sub CPU 201 Of the setting change history and the browsing history, the browsing history is not performed, and only the setting change history is performed. Furthermore, if “setting change / confirmation history” is not selected and determined in the hall menu processing (step S3303) (NO in step S33006), and if the command received in step S3304 is a power interruption recovery command, the sub CPU 201 Of the setting check history and the browsing history, only the setting check history is performed without performing the browsing history. Therefore, in the history record processing of steps S3306 and S3307, regardless of whether the command received in step S3304 is an initialization command or a power-off recovery command, “change setting / confirmation” is performed in the whole menu processing (step S3303). When "History" is selected and determined (YES in step S33006), browsing recording is performed.

  In addition, other than during the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing, when the backup clear processing without the setting change processing is executed as described above, the hole menu display processing (step S3302) and the hole menu processing (step S3302) are performed. In the case where step S3303) is executed, by making the above-mentioned browsing record be performed, it is also possible to monitor fraud of a game store clerk. In other words, in order to perform the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing, a dedicated key (a key that has a cutout only in the corresponding part of the setting key 328 and is managed by the gaming machine manager) is required. For example, a general store clerk who does not have it can not browse, but for backup clear processing without setting change processing, general store clerks or unauthorized players who do not have a dedicated key perform browsing by performing backup processing It is possible to do. Therefore, when the backup clear processing without the setting change processing is executed, the browsing record is performed by the sub CPU 201, so that the security camera corresponding to the time (the security camera normally installed in the store) It is possible to identify the person who browsed by collating with the video such as.

  In the history record processing of steps S3306 and S3307, regardless of whether the command received in step S3304 is an initialization command indicating the end of the setting change processing or a power interruption reset command indicating the end of the setting confirmation processing. If "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S3303) (YES in step S33006), the browsing record is performed as described above, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sub CPU 201 selects and determines “setting change / confirmation history” in the hole menu processing (step S3303) (YES in step S33006), and when the command received in step S3304 is a power-off reset command, Both the setting confirmation history and the browsing history are performed, but “setting change / confirmation history” is selected and determined in the hole menu processing (step S3303) (YES in step S33006), and the command received in step S3304 is initialized. When the command is a command, only the setting change history of the setting change history and the browsing history may be recorded, and the browsing history may not be recorded. This makes it possible to minimize the number of times the browsing history has been recorded, and to prevent the browsing history from increasing unnecessarily and making it difficult to detect fraud. To explain this, when a fraud involving a setting change is performed, it is possible to detect the possibility of fraud with the setting change history not stored in the gaming machine manager's memory, but to check the setting confirmation history. Regarding the accompanying fraud, it is difficult to detect that there is a possibility of fraud only from the confirmation history of the setting. Therefore, when the setting is changed, the browsing history is not recorded regardless of whether or not the browsing is performed. When the setting is confirmed, the browsing history is displayed if the browsing is performed (at least the setting value information is browsed). It is intended to be recorded. This is because it is considered that the person who performs the injustice is more likely to browse after confirming the setting than to browse after changing the setting. That is, in the same time period, if there is no browsing history and there is only a setting confirmation history, the possibility of fraud is low, but if both the setting confirmation history and the browsing history have a large number of times, there is a possibility of fraud. . Regardless of whether the command received in step S3304 is an initialization command or a power-off recovery command, if “setting change / confirmation history” has been selected and determined in the hole menu processing (step S3303) (step S3303). (YES in S33006), the setting change history or both the setting confirmation history and the browsing history are recorded, and when the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the setting confirmation processing is performed. When the operation type information indicates that the setting has been executed, the browsing history may also be displayed. When the operation type information indicates that the setting change process has been executed, the browsing history may not be displayed.

  In the history record processing of steps S3306 and S3307, browsing was performed a plurality of times from the start of the hole menu display processing of step S3302 to the execution of the game screen return display processing of step S3315. However, the viewing record is executed only once in step S3306 or step S3307 which is executed when the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing ends. For example, if "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined on the hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 210) (YES in step S3046), a setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 218) is displayed. However, if "return" is selected and set on this setting change / confirmation history screen, the screen returns to the hole menu screen again. Then, when "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined on this hole menu screen, the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed again. As described above, even if the setting change / confirmation history screen is browsed a plurality of times during steps S3302 to S3315, the browsing record is made once.

  The reason why it is preferable to limit the number of browsing records performed between steps S3302 to S3315 to one is as follows. That is, for example, a person who has performed setting change, setting confirmation, or browsing for the purpose of fraud may intentionally increase the number of browsing records, increase the number of histories, and perform an action that makes it difficult to detect fraud. Therefore, even if such an action is performed, even if the setting change, the setting confirmation, or the browsing is performed a plurality of times during step S3301 to step S3312, the history is recorded only once, Is turned off once, so that the history is not recorded unless it is turned on again, it is possible to prevent these histories from increasing unnecessarily.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, after the setting change processing is completed, the hole menu redisplay processing (step S3310) is executed, and after the setting confirmation processing, the hole menu redisplay processing is not executed. The game screen return process (step S3315) is executed. For example, even after the setting key 328 is turned OFF and the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed, if the setting key 328 is turned ON again, the hole is returned. If the specification is such that the menu screen is displayed, after returning to the game screen, the whole menu screen can be displayed again. In this case, each time the user selects and determines “setting change / confirmation history” on the redisplayed hole menu screen or repeatedly performs the ON / OFF operation of the setting key 328, the user browses the page. Even if there is, it is preferable to make the browsing record only once.

  The pachinko gaming machine has operating means such as a power switch 35, a firing handle 32, a volume switch 108, a setting switch 332, a setting key 328, a backup clear switch 330, and the like, in addition to the main button 662 and the select button 664. I have. Of these, the main button 662, the select button 664, and the firing handle 32 are operation units that can be operated by the player. For the power switch 35, the volume switch 108, the setting switch 332, the setting key 328, and the backup clear switch 330, Is an operation unit that cannot be operated by a player and can be operated only by a specific person such as a gaming machine manager.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the fact that the setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 218) in which the setting value can be confirmed is stored as the browsing history, but the setting value is not displayed. A configuration in which a setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 223 described later) is displayed may be stored as a browsing history.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 216, 217 and 218 to 222, the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201 and the liquid crystal display device 16 when the setting change / confirmation history processing is executed A description will be given in comparison with a setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area.

  FIG. 216 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201. FIG. 217 is an example of a setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201, and is a flowchart continued from FIG. FIG. 218 is a diagram illustrating an example of an initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen (screen at the time of shifting to the setting change / confirmation history screen) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 219 is a diagram illustrating an example when “Page” is selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen. FIG. 220 is a diagram showing an example of a page update screen on which a page can be updated on the setting change / confirmation history screen. FIG. 221 is a diagram illustrating an example when “clear” is selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen. FIG. 222 is a diagram illustrating an example of a data clear screen in which each history data is cleared on the setting change / confirmation history screen.

  When “setting change / confirmation history” is selected in the hole menu process (see FIG. 214) (YES in step S33006 in FIG. 214), the sub CPU 201 performs a setting change / confirmation history screen display process (step S33051). At this time, an initial screen (see FIG. 218) of the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. On the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, "Return" is highlighted.

  The setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 218) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 includes a setting change / confirmation history display area 31640, an operation explanation area 31650, a first selection area 31660a, And a second selection area 31660b. FIG. 218 shows an example in which “Page” is displayed in the first selection area 31660a, and “Clear” and “Return” are displayed in the second selection area 31660b.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 218, the setting change / confirmation history display area 31640 displays a list of time information, operation type information, and setting value information in association with each other. The date and time column displays the date and time when the setting change / setting confirmation / browsing was performed. An operation type (setting change, setting confirmation, browsing) is displayed in the operation type column. In the setting value column, when the setting is changed, the changed setting value is displayed, and when the setting is confirmed, the setting value at that time is displayed. In the operation type column, "change" is simply displayed in the case of setting change, and "confirmation" is simply displayed in the case of setting confirmation.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the time information and the operation type information (setting change, setting confirmation, browsing) are displayed in association with each other on the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen. You. Further, when the operation type is the setting change, the set value after the setting is displayed in association with the date and time and the operation type when the setting is confirmed, and when the operation is the setting confirmation.

  After executing the setting change / confirmation history screen display processing (step S33051), the sub CPU 201 executes a timekeeping process (step S33052). This timekeeping process is a process of starting timekeeping of a timer built in the sub CPU 201. Here, the timer starts counting after the setting change / confirmation history screen display processing (step S33051) is executed (the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (FIG. 218). This is for the purpose of displaying the hole menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 209) when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the is displayed).

  The sub CPU 201 determines in step S33053 whether the select button 664 has been operated. If the select button 664 has not been operated (NO in step S33053), the flow shifts to step S33071 to be described later, and it is determined whether or not “return” has been determined on the initial screen (see FIG. 218) of the setting change / confirmation history screen. On the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, as described above, “return” is highlighted (selected), so if the main button 662 is pressed without operating the select button 664, “return” is determined. Is done.

  When determining that the select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S33053), the sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item (step S33054). For example, when the upper select button 664a is operated on the initial screen (see FIG. 218) of the setting change / confirmation history screen in which “return” is highlighted, the highlight display moves from “return” to “Page” ( See FIG. 219).

  After highlighting the selected item (step S33054), the sub CPU 201 executes a timing process (step S33055). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S33052, and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the sub CPU 201 again. The reason for clearing the timer and restarting the timer is that no process is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the item selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen is highlighted (step S33054). This is because the hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 209) is displayed when not performed.

  The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not “Page” has been determined in step S33056. When the operator presses the main button 662 while “Page” is selected (highlighted) on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 sets “ Page "is determined.

  When determining that “Page” has been determined (YES in step S33056), sub CPU 201 executes a page update screen display process (step S33057). When the page update screen display processing is executed, a page update screen (see FIG. 220) in the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. On the page update screen in the setting change / confirmation history screen, images imitating the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d, and “next page” and “previous page” are displayed on the left and right of the notation of “Page”. Accordingly, the operator grasps that the setting change / confirmation history screen is updated to the previous page when the left select button 664c is operated, and the setting change / confirmation history screen is updated to the next page when the lower select button 664d is operated. can do. When the left select button 664c is operated when the first page of the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed, the last page is displayed. When the right select button 664d is operated when the last page is displayed, one page is displayed. If the eyes are displayed in a circular manner so as to be displayed, convenience can be improved.

  On the other hand, if “Page” has not been determined (NO in step S33056), sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S33065, which will be described later, and determines whether or not “clear” has been determined in the setting change / confirmation history screen.

  After executing the page update screen display process (step 3057), the sub CPU 201 executes a time counting process (step S33058). This timekeeping process is a process for clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S33055 and again starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the sub CPU 201. The timing of the timer is cleared and the timing is started again after the page update screen display processing (step S33057) is executed (after the page update screen (see FIG. 220) in the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed). This is because the hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 209) is displayed when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).

  The sub CPU 201 determines in step S33059 whether a page update operation has been performed. If a page update operation has not been performed (NO in step S33059), the flow shifts to step S33062 described later.

  When determining that the page update operation has been performed (YES in step S33059), sub CPU 201 executes a page update process (step S33060). When the left / right select buttons 664c and 664d are operated on the page update screen (see FIG. 220) in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 determines that the page update processing has been performed. Then, the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is updated and displayed on the next page or the previous page. The setting change / confirmation history screen when the setting change / confirmation history screen of the next page or the previous page is updated is omitted.

  In the second embodiment, the sub CPU 201 operates the left / right select buttons 664c and 664d on the page update screen (see FIG. 220) in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Although the page update process is performed, the operation for performing the page update process is not limited to this. For example, by operating the up / down select buttons 664a and 664b, any of “No. 1” to “No. 5” on the setting change / confirmation history screen can be selected, and the lower select button 664b is operated. In addition, the page update process may be performed when it is determined that the current line is the last line. The same applies to a page update process in a modification of the setting change / confirmation history process described later.

  After executing the page update process (step 3060), the sub CPU 201 executes a time counting process (step S33061). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S33058 and restarting the timekeeping of the timer built in the sub CPU 201. The reason for clearing the timer and restarting the timer is that a predetermined time (after the page change processing (step S33060) is executed (after the next page or previous page setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed)). This is because the hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 209) is displayed when no processing is performed within 30 seconds.

  After executing the time counting process in step S33061, the sub CPU 201 returns to step S33059 and determines whether a page update operation has been performed.

  The sub CPU 201 determines in step S33062 whether or not the select button 664 has been operated. If the select button 664 is not operated (NO in step S33062), the process moves to step S33072 described later. In this case, the process proceeds to step S33072 instead of step S33071 because “Return” is highlighted (selected) on the page update screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen as in the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen. It is not.

  When determining that the select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S33062), the sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item (step S33063). For example, when the lower select button 664b is operated on the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 220), the highlight display moves from “Page” to “clear” (see FIG. 221).

  After highlighting the selected item (step S33063), the sub CPU 201 executes a timing process (step S33064). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S33061 and restarting the timekeeping of the timer built in the sub CPU 201 again. The reason for clearing the timer and restarting the timer is that no processing was performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the selected item was highlighted on the setting change / confirmation history screen. This is because the hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 209) is sometimes displayed.

  After executing the time counting process in step S33064, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S33065 and determines whether or not “clear” has been determined. When the operator presses the main button 662 while “clear” is selected (highlighted) on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 sets “ It is determined that "clear" has been determined.

  If the sub CPU 201 determines that “clear” has been determined (YES in step S33065), it executes a setting change / confirmation history data clearing process (step S33066). The setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is a process for erasing all data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history stored in the work RAM 203. When the setting change / confirmation history data clear processing is executed, all the history data displayed in the setting change / confirmation history display area 31640 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is erased (see FIG. 222). When the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process in step S33065 is executed, the item of “return” is highlighted.

  In the above-described setting change / confirmation history data clearing process (step S33066), all the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history stored in the work RAM 203 are deleted. The present invention is not limited to erasing data, but it may be possible to erase only some data. As a mode of erasing a part of the data, for example, as shown in FIG. 1 to No. 5, time (date and time) information, operation type information, and setting value information corresponding to a specific No. 5, a setting change / confirmation history screen is deleted for each page, a plurality of operation types (setting change , Setting confirmation, and browsing), a mode in which date and time (time) information, operation type information, and set value information corresponding to a specific operation type are erased, and time (date and time) information, operation type information, and set value information A mode in which only specific information (for example, setting value information) is deleted can be considered.

  Further, it is preferable that the setting change / confirmation history data clear processing (step S33066) be executed only by a person who satisfies a specific condition. For example, in a state where “clear” is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen, for example, input of a password may be set as a condition for enabling pressing of the main button 662. In this case, if the operator presses the main button 662 without inputting the password, a screen requesting the password is displayed, and the setting change / confirmation history data clear processing is executed only when the correct password is input. You can do so. This can prevent the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history from being accidentally cleared. Further, for example, it is considered that a person who has performed setting change processing or browsing for the purpose of fraud may erase the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history in order to hide his / her fraud. Therefore, by allowing only a specific person such as a person who knows the password to execute the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process, it is possible to suppress the setting change process and the browsing for unauthorized use. It becomes possible.

  After executing the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process (step S33066), the sub CPU 201 executes a timing process (step S33067). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S33064 and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the sub CPU 201 again. The reason for clearing the timer and restarting the timing is that the history data displayed in the setting change / confirmation history display area 31640 after the setting change / confirmation history data clear processing (step S33066) is executed. This is because the hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 209) is displayed when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after all the data is erased.

  The sub CPU 201 determines in step S33068 whether the select button 664 has been operated. If the select button 664 has not been operated (NO in step S33068), the flow shifts to step S33072 described later. In this case, the reason why the process proceeds to step S33071 instead of step S33072 is that "return" is highlighted (selected) on the data clear screen in which each history data is cleared unless the select button 664 is operated. . Therefore, if “return” is not highlighted on the data clear screen in which each piece of history data has been cleared, the process moves to step S33072.

  When determining that the select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S33068), the sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item (step S33069).

  After highlighting the selected item (step S33069), the sub CPU 201 executes a timing process (step S33070). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S33067, and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the sub CPU 201 again. The reason for clearing the timer and restarting the timer is that no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the item selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen is highlighted (step S33069). This is because the hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 209) is displayed when it is not performed.

  The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not “return” is determined in step S33071. When the operator presses the main button 662 in a state where “return” is selected (highlighted) on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 sets “ It is determined that "return" has been determined.

  If the sub CPU 201 determines that “return” has been determined (YES in step S33071), it executes a hole menu screen display process (step S33073), and ends the setting change / confirmation history process. This hole menu screen display processing is processing for displaying an initial screen of the hole menu screen (see FIG. 209) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 instead of the setting change / confirmation history screen.

  If “return” is not determined in step S33071 (NO in step S33071), sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (step S33072).

  If the sub CPU 201 determines that the predetermined time has elapsed in step S33072 (YES in step S33072), the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S33073, ends the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and exits the hole menu. An initial screen (see FIG. 209) is displayed. In other words, even if the “return” item is not selected and determined by the operator, if the no-operation period continues for a predetermined period, the display of the setting change / confirmation history screen ends, and the initial screen of the hole menu screen is displayed. The Rukoto.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not elapsed in step S33072 (NO in step S33072), the sub CPU 201 returns to step S33053 and continues the processing from step S33053.

  As described above, in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 during the setting change or the setting confirmation, the setting change / confirmation history screen is terminated when a predetermined time has elapsed without any operation being performed. Then, a hole menu screen is displayed. However, on the hole menu screen, even if there is no operation, the sub CPU 201 controls the display of the hole menu screen to be continued without terminating the hole menu screen as long as the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed. In this case, the item of the end of the hole menu is not displayed on the hole menu screen.

  When it is determined in step S33072 that the predetermined time has elapsed (YES in step S33072), the processing that proceeds to step S33073 is the hall menu processing in step S3303 (see FIGS. 207 and 213) described above (that is, during the setting change or In the hole menu processing (that is, after the setting change or the setting confirmation is completed) in step S3311 (see FIGS. 207 and 213), a different processing is executed (not shown). Specifically, when a predetermined time has elapsed without any operation in the setting change / confirmation history processing (step S33007) in the hole menu processing in step S3311 (the predetermined time has elapsed in step S33072 in the hall menu processing in step S3311 (step S33072) ), The sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S3315 (see FIGS. 207 and 213), ends the display of the setting change / confirmation history screen, and returns to the game screen return display processing (step S3315). A menu display prohibition process (step S3316) is executed. In other words, on the setting change / confirmation history screen during setting change or setting confirmation, if no operation time continues for a predetermined time, only the screen returns to the hole menu screen (the setting change / confirmation history screen can be viewed again). However, in the setting change / confirmation history screen that is displayed via the re-displayed hole menu screen after the setting change processing is completed, if no operation time continues for a predetermined time, the setting change / confirmation history screen is viewed again You can't do that.

  When it is determined in step S33072 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (NO in step S33072), the process returns to step S33053. This is a process during the change or the setting confirmation), and a different process is executed (not shown) in the hole menu process of step S3311 (see FIGS. 207 and 213) (that is, after the setting change or the setting confirmation is completed). Specifically, even if the non-operation period has not reached the predetermined period in the setting change / confirmation history process (step S33007) in the hall menu process of step S3311 (NO in step S33072), for example, an effect control object is generated. Based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition such as when it is determined that a command has been received, a game screen return process (step S3315) and a hole menu display prohibition process (step S3316) are executed. That is, on the setting change / confirmation history screen during setting change or setting confirmation, if no operation time continues for a predetermined period of time, only the screen returns to the hole menu screen (the setting change / confirmation history screen can be viewed again). However, in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed via the re-displayed hole menu screen after the setting change processing is completed, even if the inactivity time has not reached the predetermined time, the setting change / confirmation history is displayed again. You will not be able to browse the screen. In other words, in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed via the hole menu screen re-displayed after the setting change processing ends, the no-operation period is not continued for a predetermined period, and the predetermined end condition Unless is established, the processing of steps S33053 to S33072 is repeatedly executed.

  As described above, when the setting change process is performed, even if the setting change process is completed, the operator has a certain time for browsing the confidential information such as the history of the setting change and the setting confirmation, and has a certain time ( If no operation is performed for, for example, 30 seconds, the display of the setting change / confirmation history screen ends, and the game screen return processing (step S3315) and the hole menu prohibition processing (step S3316) are executed. (For example, a hall clerk or a player who is not a gaming machine administrator) cannot easily view confidential information such as a setting change history, a setting confirmation history, and a browsing history, so that security can be ensured.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, for example, on the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 218, the time information, the operation type information, and the setting A list screen showing all the value information is displayed. That is, the first information (for example, No. 3 in FIG. 218) in which the time information and the setting value information when the setting is changed, and the time information and the setting value information when the setting is confirmed are displayed. 218 (for example, No. 3 and No. 4 in FIG. 218), and third information in which time information and set value information when viewed are displayed (for example, No. 3 in FIG. 218). 2, No. 5) are displayed in a list. However, an operator (for example, a gaming machine administrator) may want to narrow down a target to specific operation type information and display it. Therefore, a screen on which time information, operation type information, and set value information are displayed in a list (for example, see FIG. 218), the first information, the second information, and the third information It is preferable that a narrowed-down screen narrowed down to only specific information among them can be selectively displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 according to the operator's intention. This makes it possible to enhance the convenience for the operator. In particular, the first information described above is useful not only for fraud detection, but also for information such as how many days the business has been performed based on the set value. Since the above-described narrowing-down screen only needs to be able to display a target by narrowing down the target to specific operation type information, information irrelevant to the operation type (for example, current time information or the like) may be displayed.

[Another example of the display screen displayed in the setting change / confirmation history processing]
Next, another example of the display screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described with reference to FIGS. However, since the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201 is the same as that in FIGS. 216 and 217, in this other example, the screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 will be described. A description of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the CPU 201 will be omitted.

  FIG. 223 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example of an initial screen. FIG. 224 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example when “setting display” is selected. FIG. 225 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example when a setting value is newly added and displayed. FIG. 226 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example when “Page” is selected. FIG. 227 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example of a page update screen on which a page can be updated.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 223, the setting change / confirmation history screen has a setting change / confirmation history display area 31670, an operation explanation area 31680, a first selection area 31690a, and a second selection area 31690b.

  On the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 223, although the time information and the operation type information are displayed in the setting change / confirmation history display area 31670, the setting value information is not displayed. That is, the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 223 is a screen on which only the time information and the operation type information among the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information are displayed. Note that the date and time when the time information is displayed displays the date and time when the setting change / setting confirmation / browsing was performed, and the operation type where the operation type information is displayed includes the operation type (setting change, Settings confirmation and browsing) are displayed.

  In the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, “setting display” is displayed in the second selection area 31690b in addition to “clear” and “return”. On the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history, “return” is selectively displayed (highlighted). Also in this other example, the item to be highlighted can be selected by operating the select button 664.

  When the user operates the select button 664 to select “setting display”, “setting display” is highlighted (see FIG. 224). When the sub CPU 201 detects that the main button 662 has been pressed while “setting display” is selected (highlighted), the time information and the operation type information are displayed but the setting value information is not displayed. Instead of the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen that is not displayed, a setting change / confirmation history screen (list screen) in which time information, operation type information, and set value information are displayed in a list is displayed (see FIG. 225). ). As described above, in this other example, although the setting value is not displayed on the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, by selecting and determining “setting display”, the setting value is associated with the date and time and the operation type. The set values are newly displayed in a list. When a setting change / confirmation history screen displaying time information, operation type information, and set value information is displayed instead of the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, as shown in FIG. "Back" is highlighted.

  On the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 225) in which time information, operation type information, and set value information are displayed, when the user operates the select button 664 to select “Page”, “Page” is highlighted. (See FIG. 226). When the sub CPU 201 detects that the main button 662 has been pressed while “Page” is selected (highlighted), the sub CPU 201 executes a page update process. When this page update process is executed, a page update screen (see FIG. 227) in the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. By operating the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d on this page update screen, the page can be updated to the next page or the previous page.

  When the user selects “Page” and presses the main button 662 on the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 223) in which the time information and the operation type information are displayed but the set value information is not displayed. Also, the page update process is executed by the sub CPU 201. However, when this page update process is executed, the time information and the operation type information are displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, but the set value information is not displayed. Is displayed. By operating the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d on this page update screen, the page can be updated to the next page or the previous page of the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the setting value is not displayed. However, the page update process may not be executed on the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the time information and the operation type information are displayed but the set value information is not displayed.

  In this other example, for example, only the time information and the operation type information of the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information are displayed on the screen as shown in FIG. 223 can be selectively displayed on a screen displaying a list of setting information and setting value information. The screen of FIG. 223 displays any one or two of time information, operation type information, and setting value information. Any screen may be used as long as only information is displayed.

  Further, the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information are displayed in a list can be viewed only by a person who satisfies a specific condition (for example, a person who has input an appropriate password). This may be done, but this will be described later.

  FIG. 228 shows a setting change / confirmation history screen on which a set value can be confirmed on the hole menu screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 of the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of an operation procedure until the operation is completed. As shown in FIG. 228, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment performs a hole menu when a setting change process or a setting confirmation process is executed as a first procedure for browsing the setting change / confirmation history information. Display the screen. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. The setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key 328 can be turned on in one direction to turn on the setting key switch signal, and turned in the opposite direction (return to the original position) to turn off the setting key switch signal. It can be configured.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the ON operation of the setting key 328 is an operation performed regardless of whether the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is performed, but is not limited thereto. The operation may be performed when at least one of the setting change process and the setting confirmation process is performed. The same applies to any of the modifications described below.

  As a second procedure, the pachinko gaming machine selects the "setting change / confirmation history" in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 210), and thereby the "setting change / confirmation history". Is highlighted, and only the date and time data and the operation type (corresponding operation type among setting change, confirmation, and browsing) are displayed. The preview screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen including the setting change / confirmation history information (See FIG. 210) is displayed (the set values are not displayed).

  As a third procedure, the pachinko gaming machine presses down the main button 662 in a state where “setting change / confirmation history” is highlighted on the hole menu screen (see FIG. 210) displayed in the second procedure. As a result, the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 218) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. On the setting change / confirmation history screen, date and time data, operation type (corresponding operation type of setting change, confirmation, and browsing) and set value are associated with each other.

  Therefore, a person who can use and operate the setting key 328 (an authorized person) can change the setting of the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 218) displayed through the first to third procedures. By viewing the confirmation history, it is possible to confirm at a glance the setting change of the set value that regulates the payout rate, the confirmation of the setting change, the history of the setting change and the viewing of the confirmation, and the corresponding set value at a glance. . The person having the authority is a person who has been given authority for setting change, confirmation of setting change, and the like, and means a store manager of the hall and the like. Hereinafter, the “authorized person” may be referred to as a “managed authority”.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine constituting the gaming machine according to the present invention controls the liquid crystal display device 16 for displaying various images, the operation buttons 66 such as the main button 662 and the select button 664, and controls related to the game. A main CPU 101 serving as a control unit for performing the display, and a sub CPU 201 serving as a display control unit for controlling the display of the liquid crystal display device 16. The control unit is configured to change or confirm a set value (for example, settings 1 to 6). The display control unit includes a setting switch 332 that is a setting unit that enables the transmission, and a data transmission unit that transmits various data to the sub CPU 201. The display control unit includes: a reception unit that receives various data from the data transmission unit; A work RAM 203 functioning as a backup memory capable of storing and holding the written information, an RTC 209 for measuring the date and time, The main CPU 101 transmits the setting change or the setting confirmation and the setting value to the sub CPU 201 by the data transmitting unit, and the sub CPU 201 transmits the setting change or the setting confirmation when the data received by the data receiving unit is the setting change or the setting confirmation. The setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value and the date and time data from the RTC 209 are stored as setting change / confirmation history information in the work RAM 203, and the setting change or setting confirmation and the date and time data stored in the main RAM 203 are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. When the main button 662 is operated in a state where the setting change or the setting confirmation and the date and time data are displayed, the setting value stored in the work RAM 203 is displayed.

  With this configuration, the setting change or setting confirmation, the set value, and the date and time data from the RTC 209 are stored as setting change / confirmation history information in the work RAM 203. When the user operates the button 662, the setting values stored in the work RAM 203 can be displayed. Therefore, when “Setting change / confirmation history” in the hall menu is selected, it is possible to check each history related to the setting value, and it is possible to determine whether an improper setting change or setting confirmation has been performed. Become like

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment may be configured to acquire the date and time data at which the set value is received from the RTC 209, and store the set value, the date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change in association with each other. Good.

  With this configuration, the changed setting value, the changed date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person specifies the date and time when the setting value was changed. When a fraud such as changing a set value has been performed, the fraud can be specified.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment acquires from the RTC 209 the date and time at which the information indicating that the setting value has been confirmed is received, and stores the date and time data and the information indicating the setting confirmation in association with each other. Is also good.

  With this configuration, the date and time data at which the setting value was confirmed and the information indicating the setting confirmation are stored in association with each other, so that an authorized person can specify the date and time at which the setting value was confirmed, and When a fraud such as checking a value has been performed, the fraud can be specified.

  Further, when the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment displays the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data in the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203, the displayed date and time are displayed. The data may be stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

  With this configuration, when a setting change or setting confirmation, a set value, and date and time data of the setting change / confirmation history information are displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing is performed. History can be displayed. Therefore, when “Setting change / confirmation history” in the hole menu where the set value is not displayed is selected, in addition to setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date / time data display, Since the history can be displayed, it can be determined whether or not the browsing history of the setting change or the setting confirmation has been browsed for the purpose of fraudulent acts such as goto.

  With the above configuration, in the present embodiment, the setting change / confirmation history information in which the setting change or the setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data are respectively associated with each other can be saved and displayed. It is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine capable of confirming whether or not an unauthorized setting change or setting confirmation has been performed.

  The pachinko gaming machine that constitutes the gaming machine according to the present invention is a liquid crystal display device 16 that displays various images, operation units such as a main button 662 and a select button 664, and a control unit that performs control related to the game. A main CPU 101 and a sub CPU 201 which is a display control unit for controlling display of the liquid crystal display device 11, wherein the control unit changes or confirms set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). And a data transmission unit for transmitting various data to the sub CPU 201. The display control unit includes a reception unit for receiving various data from the data transmission unit, and a writing unit for writing data even in a non-energized state. A work RAM 203 capable of storing and holding the information obtained, and an RTC 209 for measuring the date and time. The setting change or the setting confirmation and the setting value are transmitted to the sub CPU 201. When the data received by the data receiving unit is the setting change or the setting confirmation, the sub CPU 201 stores the setting change or the setting confirmation and the setting value in the work RAM 203. And a setting display function of storing date and time data from the RTC 209 as setting change / confirmation history information and displaying the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 on the liquid crystal display device 16. When the change / confirmation history information is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

  With this configuration, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as the browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Can be. Therefore, not only can it be determined whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also it can be determined whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an improper operation.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment acquires from the RTC 209 the date and time data in which the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and associates the date and time data with the information indicating the browsing history. Alternatively, the information may be stored.

  According to this configuration, the date and time data and the information indicating the browsing history are stored in association with each other, so that the date and time when the information regarding the setting value was browsed can be specified, and illegality such as changing the setting value can be prevented. If so, the fraud can be identified.

  Further, when the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment displays the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data in the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203, the displayed date and time are displayed. The data may be stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

  With this configuration, when the setting change or setting confirmation, the set value, and the date and time data of the setting change / confirmation history information are displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and The browsing history can be displayed on the display device 16. Therefore, when “Setting change / confirmation history” in the hole menu where the set value is not displayed is selected, in addition to setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date / time data display, Since the history can be displayed, it can be determined whether or not the browsing history of the setting change or the setting confirmation has been browsed for the purpose of fraudulent acts such as goto.

  With the configuration described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to save and display the browsing history information in which the browsing history of browsing the setting change confirmation / history information and the date and time data, so that an unnatural operation relating to the setting value can be performed. It is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine that can not only determine whether or not a pachinko game has been performed, but also determine whether or not it is a chance to investigate a fraudulent activity.

[Maintenance processing]
Next, referring to FIGS. 229 to 231, a maintenance process (step S33019) executed by sub CPU 201 and a maintenance screen displayed on the display area of liquid crystal display device 16 when the maintenance process is executed will be described. This will be described in comparison. FIG. 229 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a maintenance process performed by the sub CPU 201. FIG. 230 is a diagram illustrating an example when the maintenance screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 231 is an example of a maintenance screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

  In the maintenance processing, the sub CPU 201 displays a maintenance screen (see FIGS. 230 and 231) on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. In this maintenance process, for example, devices connected to the sub CPU 201 (eg, various sensors, various types of operating members, and the like), such as the stage buttons such as the stage button switch 621 and the upper item 1000, are subjected to the maintenance process. The operator can confirm whether or not these devices operate normally.

  As shown in FIGS. 230 and 231, the sub CPU 201 displays an operation state display table of various devices (various sensors, various accessories, and the like) substantially at the center of the maintenance screen (see FIGS. 230 and 231). The operation state display table includes, for example, a name column in which the names of 28 various devices are displayed, and a number column in which serial numbers (1 to 28) assigned to the various devices displayed in the name column are displayed. And an operation state column indicating operation states of various devices. “OFF” display in the operation state column indicates that there is no input from various devices. When there is an input from various devices, the display of the operation state column is changed from “OFF” display to “ON” display. For example, when the effect button 1 is operated while the maintenance screen is displayed, the sub CPU 201 changes the display of the operation state column of the effect button 1 from “OFF” display to “ON” display. The “ON” display is displayed in red. The above “input from each device” is based on detection of an input port or the like by the sub CPU 201. In addition, each of the attraction objects has a sensor that detects that it is present at least in a normal position (standby position). When the sensor that detects the normal position is ON, the display is turned off, and the sensor that detects the normal position is used. In the case of OFF, that is, the display is turned ON when the stage combination moves.

  The sub CPU 201 displays an operation method on the maintenance screen below the maintenance screen. Specifically, it is displayed that when the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are simultaneously pressed, the display returns to the initial screen (see FIG. 209) of the hole menu screen (redisplayed). Further below, images corresponding to the main button 662 and the select button 664 are displayed. In FIG. 231, the images corresponding to all the select buttons 664a to 624d are displayed in white, which indicates that the images are valid.

  In the maintenance process (see FIG. 229), the sub CPU 201 first obtains sub device input information (step S33081). The sub-device input information is a detection result of the operation states of various devices given serial numbers 21 to 28 in the operation state display table shown in FIG. The sub-device input information includes sub-input state information indicating whether the various devices are in an on state where there is an input or an off state where there is no input.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a sub input state information editing process of reading out the sub input state information in the obtained sub device input information (step S33082).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a maintenance screen display process of displaying a maintenance screen (see FIGS. 230 and 231) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 based on the sub input state information read in step S33082 (step S33083). ). In this process, display of the maintenance screen and update of the display (for example, change from “OFF” display to “ON” display) are performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are simultaneously operated (step S33084). If it is determined that the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b have been operated at the same time (YES in step S33084), the sub CPU 201 ends the maintenance processing and the hole menu processing (see FIG. 214), and ends the processing. The process returns to step S3304 of the hole menu task (see FIG. 207).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are not operated at the same time (NO in step S33084), the sub CPU 201 returns the process to step S33081.

  By the way, some recent pachinko machines and pachislot machines have a plurality of functions in one device. For example, in the case of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the effect button 62 has a function as an operation button and a function as an effect button. The function of the effect button corresponds to, for example, a function of protruding upwardly based on the result of the special symbol lottery. Then, when the “effect button 1” of the serial number 21 shown in FIG. 231 is selected and determined, the sub CPU 201 performs maintenance on the operation function of the effect button 62. When the “effect button 2” of the serial number 22 shown in FIG. 231 is selected and determined, the sub CPU 201 moves the effect button 62 upward to perform maintenance on the effect function. If the result of the maintenance operation is normal, the sub CPU 201 executes a maintenance screen display process (step S33083) and executes a maintenance screen display process (changes from “OFF” display to “ON” display). The effect button 62 protruding upward due to the selection and determination of the “main button 2” is operated, for example, by operating the select button 664 to select another serial number item shown in FIG. In this case, when the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are simultaneously pressed to end the maintenance mode, the sub CPU 201 controls the sub CPU 201 to return to the normal state (the state before projecting upward). You.

  Further, in recent years, some pachinko gaming machines and pachislots are provided with a plurality of effect components having different driving means, and in such a gaming machine, a plurality of effect components having different driving means are simultaneously operated. The maintenance may be performed, the driving means may operate each of a plurality of different productions at different timings to perform the maintenance, or may be operated independently to perform the maintenance. For example, in a gaming machine in which the driving means is provided with different renderings 1 to 3, when, for example, “Radio 1 + 2” of serial number 14 shown in FIG. 231 is selected and determined, the sub CPU 201 The object 1 and the stage combination 2 are simultaneously operated to perform maintenance. Further, for example, when the “directing effect 1 → 2” of the serial number 17 shown in FIG. 231 is selected and determined, the sub CPU 201 activates the directing effect 1 first, and then activates the directing effect 2. Perform maintenance. Further, for example, when the “directing attraction 1” of serial number 11 shown in FIG. 231 is selected and determined, the sub CPU 201 operates the rendering attraction 1 alone to perform the maintenance. For example, in the case where the effects 1 and 3 simultaneously operate and interfere with each other and become inoperable, for example, it is not possible to select the “directing effect 1 + 3” of the serial number 15 in FIG. (The operation of the main button 662 is not validated.) In FIG. 231, “directing attraction 1 + 3” of serial number 15 is shaded as an unselectable item. However, for example, when the production 1 and the production 3 are simultaneously operated, they interfere with each other and become inoperable, but when they are operated at different timings (for example, first, the production 1 is operated, and then If it does not interfere with the production of the character combination 3), for example, it is preferable that “production character 1 → 3” of the serial number 18 shown in FIG. 231 can be selected and determined. In this way, it is possible to operate a plurality of directing objects in a plurality, to operate at different timings, or to operate independently, and to simultaneously operate when simultaneous operation interferes. By disabling operation, it is possible to improve the maintainability while avoiding the occurrence of trouble.

  In addition, although not shown in FIG. 231, a payout sensor for a game ball or a medal, a payout security ball sensor, a lending button (also referred to as a ball lending button), a return button for a CR card, a settlement button for a pachislot, and a sealed box are enclosed. In a pachinko gaming machine in which a game is made possible by circulating a game ball, it is preferable that a sensor for detecting the launch of the game ball and the like is also subject to maintenance. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the devices (various sensors, various accessories, etc.) connected to the sub CPU 201 have been described as targets of the maintenance processing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the devices are connected to the main CPU 101. Devices (for example, the power switch 35, the first starting port switch 421, the second starting port switch 441, and the like) may be targeted for the maintenance process. Further, in the CR machine, a pseudo-game is performed between the ball rental machine and the pachinko gaming machine (in the case of a CR pachislot, between the ball rental machine and the pachislot machine) based on the operation of the lending button or the return button of the CR card. A typical signal communication may be performed, the normal state of the signal communication may be detected, and if normal, a maintenance screen display process may be executed (change from “OFF” display to “ON” display).

[Mobile terminal link function]
Next, a portable terminal cooperation function of a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example with reference to FIGS.

  The portable terminal cooperation function of the pachinko gaming machine is a function of associating the pachinko gaming machine with the portable terminal. Using the mobile terminal coordination function of pachinko gaming machines, it is possible to record detailed information on the game played by the player or customize functions that do not affect the gaming results of pachinko gaming machines by satisfying predetermined conditions can do.

  Examples of the predetermined condition include, for example, that the result of the special symbol big hit determination is determined to be a small hit that does not involve the operation of the condition device, or that a specific effect is executed. In order to customize a function that does not affect the game result of the pachinko gaming machine, for example, music output during a jackpot game or a high-probability game state is changed to a special song, or the liquid crystal display device 16 is used. And changing the costume of the character displayed in the item.

  When using the mobile terminal cooperation function, first, a guide menu screen (guide initial image) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. When, for example, a pressing operation on the main button 662 is performed in a state where the decorative display displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is not being changed, an initial guide image is displayed on the display region of the liquid crystal display device 16.

  FIG. 232 is a diagram illustrating an example when the guide initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The guide initial image includes characters “Unimemo (registered trademark)”, characters “Please select a favorite menu”, and a guide menu.

  As shown in FIG. 232, the items of the guide menu include "Start Unimemo", "Big hit symbol / number of rounds", "Model site", and "Return to game". In the guide initial image, "Start Unimemo" is highlighted. Then, among the plurality of guide menu items, the highlighted item can be selected by operating the up / down select buttons 664a and 664b. When the main button 662 is operated, the item that is highlighted is determined. In FIG. 232, a plurality of items are surrounded by a solid line frame, and the highlighted “Start Unimemo” is surrounded by a thicker solid line frame.

  When "Start Unimemo" is selected from the guide menu, an initial Unimemo image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. When "big hit symbol / round number" is selected, the big hit symbol / round number is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (not shown). When "model site" is selected, a model site registration code is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (not shown).

  When "return to game" is selected, the display of the guide initial image displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 ends (the display of the guide menu also ends). Then, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, an effect image displayed at the time of playing a game, the firing handle 32 is not operated for a predetermined period, or any one of the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440. Also, a demonstration video displayed when no prize is won for a predetermined period is displayed. Also, even when a predetermined time has elapsed without selecting any of the items in the guide menu, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 displays the effect video displayed when playing a game or the demo video described above. Is displayed.

  FIG. 233 is a diagram illustrating an example when a unimemo initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The unimemo initial image displays characters “unimemo”, characters “customize favorite character”, and a unimemo menu. The items of the uni memo menu include “input password”, “record”, “record and end”, “member registration”, “return to game”, and “return”. In the initial Unimemo image, “Password input” is highlighted. Then, the highlighted item among the plurality of items of the unimemo menu can be selected by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d. When the main button 662 is operated, the item that is highlighted is determined. In FIG. 233, a plurality of items are surrounded by a solid line frame, and the highlighted “password input” is surrounded by a thicker solid line frame.

  Then, when “password input” is selected and determined, a password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see FIG. 234).

  FIG. 234 is a diagram illustrating an example when a password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The password display image includes characters "Please enter a password" and a password input menu.

  The password input menu displays a plurality of items of the password input menu. The items in the password input menu are “enter”, “delete”, numbers “0” to “9”, alphabets “A” to “F”, “return to game”, and “return”. including. In the password display image, an item to be highlighted among “0” to “9” and “A” to “F” can be selected by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d, and when the main button 662 is operated. , Is determined by the highlighted number or alphabet. The determined number or alphabet is displayed on the password display image. When "OK" in the password input menu is selected and determined, a plurality of characters displayed on the password display image are determined as a password to be input. Then, when "delete" is selected in the password input menu, characters are deleted from the password display image one by one from the last input character.

  When "return to game" is selected from the password input menu, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 displays an effect image to be displayed at the time of playing the game, the firing handle 32 has not been operated for a predetermined period, or the A demonstration image is displayed when neither the first opening 420 nor the second opening 440 wins a prize for a predetermined period. When “return” is selected in the password input menu, a unimemo initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

[Modification of setting change / confirmation history processing]
Hereinafter, modified examples 1 to 3 of the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described.
[Modification 1 of setting change / confirmation history processing]
First, a first modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 235 to 240.

  The setting change / confirmation history processing in Modification 1 is substantially the same as the setting change / confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217 except that the setting change / confirmation history processing has an authentication function for browsing the setting values. . Hereinafter, differences from the setting change / confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217 will be described in detail. In the setting change / confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217, when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), a hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 209) Has been described to perform the timing process (see step S33052 in FIG. 216) so that is displayed. In the first modification as well, the timekeeping process is performed in the same manner as the setting change / confirmation history process described above with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217, and no process is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The hole menu screen may be displayed at first, but in the following description, the description of the timing processing will be omitted.

  FIG. 235 is a flowchart illustrating a first modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201. This setting change / confirmation history processing is a state in which “setting change / confirmation history” is selected (highlighted) from the hole menu screen (see FIGS. 209 and 210) displayed in step S33006 in FIG. 214. Is started on condition that the main button 662 is pressed.

  When the setting change / confirmation history process is started, the sub CPU 201 performs an authentication process for authenticating the administrator authority (step S33100). This authentication processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 236 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an authentication process in a first modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201.

  As shown in FIG. 236, in the authentication process, the sub CPU 201 first requests a password from the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 where the hole menu screen is displayed, for example, as shown in FIGS. 237 and 238. Further, a password request screen is displayed (step S33101). FIG. 237 shows a password request screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the setting change / confirmation history processing is executed in the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201. It is a figure showing an example. FIG. 238 is an example of a password request screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201.

  In the first modification, when the setting change / confirmation history processing is started (when the “setting change / confirmation history” is selected (highlighted) on the hole menu screen), the main button 662 is pressed. And, for example, as shown in FIG. 237 and FIG. 238, the password request screen is displayed while the hole menu screen is displayed, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the setting change / confirmation history is started, only the time information and the operation type information of the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information are displayed (the setting values are not displayed). May be displayed and the password request screen may be displayed while the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed, or the password request screen may be displayed without displaying the hole menu or the setting change / confirmation history screen. Only the screen may be displayed.

  When a password is input, sub CPU 201 executes a password input process (step S33102), and proceeds to step S33103.

  In step S33103, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the input password is appropriate. If the input password is appropriate (YES in step S33103), the sub CPU 201 ends the authentication process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the input password is not appropriate (NO in step S33103), sub CPU 201 executes an authentication NG display process (step S33104). When the authentication NG display process is executed, a screen shown in FIG. 239 is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, for example. Here, FIG. 239 shows an example of a screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the input password is inappropriate in the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201. FIG.

  When executing the authentication processing in step S33100, the sub CPU 201 determines that the authentication is OK (YES in step S33103) if it determines that the authentication result is correct, that is, the password is appropriate (YES in step S33110). The process moves to S33120. On the other hand, if it is determined that the password is not appropriate (NO in step S33103), sub CPU 201 determines that the authentication is not OK (NO in step S33110), and ends the setting change / confirmation history processing.

  After the password is input on the password request screen, for example, when the main button 662 is pressed, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the input password is appropriate. If the input password is inappropriate or the main button 662 is pressed without inputting the password, the above-described authentication NG process in step S33103 is executed. Then, only when the correct password is input and the main button 662 is pressed, for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information are displayed is displayed. Can be. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the history information of the set value from being browsed for the purpose of fraud.

  In step S33120, the sub CPU 201 performs a setting change / confirmation history screen display process. At this time, a setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 218) in which the date and time data, the operation type, and the setting value are shown in association with each other is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

  After the setting change / confirmation history screen display processing in step S33120, the sub CPU 201 determines whether a page update operation has been performed (step S33130). If it is determined that a page update operation has been performed (YES in step S33130), a page update process is executed (step S33140), and thereafter, the flow proceeds to step S33130. On the other hand, if the page update operation has not been performed (NO in step S33130), the process moves to step S33150.

  The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not “clear” has been determined in step S33150. The operator presses the main button 662 while “clear” is selected (highlighted) on the setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 221) displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Then, the sub CPU 201 determines that “clear” has been determined.

  If the sub CPU 201 determines that “clear” has been determined (YES in step S33150), the sub CPU 201 executes a setting change / confirmation history data clearing process (step S33160), and proceeds to step S33180. The setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is a process for erasing the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history stored in the work RAM 203. When the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is executed, all the history data displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is deleted (for example, see FIG. 222). On the other hand, if “clear” has not been determined (NO in step S33150), the process moves to step S33170.

  The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not “return” has been determined in step S33170. The operator presses the main button 662 in a state where “return” is selected (highlighted) in the setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 218) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Then, the sub CPU 201 determines that “return” has been determined.

  If the sub CPU 201 determines that “return” has been determined (YES in step S33170), it executes a hole menu screen display process (step S33180), and ends the setting change / confirmation history process. On the other hand, if it is not determined to be “return” (NO in step S33170), the process moves to step S33130 to continue the processing from step S33130.

  FIG. 240 shows a setting change / confirmation in which a set value can be confirmed on a hole menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the operation procedure until a history screen is displayed. As shown in FIG. 240, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment performs a hole menu when a setting change process or a setting confirmation process is executed as a first procedure for browsing the setting change / confirmation history information. Display the screen. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. The setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key 328 can be turned on in one direction to turn on the setting key switch signal, and turned in the opposite direction (return to the original position) to turn off the setting key switch signal. It can be configured.

  As a second procedure, the pachinko gaming machine selects the "setting change / confirmation history" in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 210), and thereby the "setting change / confirmation history". Is highlighted, and only the date and time data and the operation type (corresponding operation type among setting change, confirmation, and browsing) are displayed. The preview screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen including the setting change / confirmation history information (See FIG. 210) is displayed (the set values are not displayed).

  As a third procedure, the pachinko gaming machine requests an input of a password (see FIGS. 237 and 238), and determines whether the input password is appropriate.

  As a fourth procedure, the pachinko gaming machine, if the password entered in the third procedure is appropriate, sets value information, more specifically, date and time data and operation type (setting change, confirmation, browsing correspondence) The setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 225) in which the setting type is associated with the set operation value is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

  Therefore, a person who can use and operate the setting key 328 (a person who has authority) can change the setting of the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 218) displayed through the first to fourth procedures. By looking at the confirmation history, it is possible to confirm at a glance the setting change of the set value that regulates the payout rate, the confirmation of the setting change, the history of the setting change and the viewing of the confirmation, and the corresponding set value at a glance. . The person having the authority is a person who has been given authority for setting change, confirmation of setting change, and the like, and means a store manager of the hall and the like. Hereinafter, the “authorized person” may be referred to as a “managed authority”.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine constituting the gaming machine according to the present invention controls the liquid crystal display device 16 for displaying various images, the operation buttons 66 such as the main button 662 and the select button 664, and controls related to the game. A main CPU 101 serving as a control unit for performing the display, and a sub CPU 201 serving as a display control unit for controlling the display of the liquid crystal display device 16. The control unit is configured to change or confirm a set value (for example, settings 1 to 6). The display control unit includes a setting switch 332 that is a setting unit that enables the transmission, and a data transmission unit that transmits various data to the sub CPU 201. The display control unit includes: a reception unit that receives various data from the data transmission unit; A work RAM 203 functioning as a backup memory capable of storing and holding the written information, an RTC 209 for measuring the date and time, The main CPU 101 transmits the setting change or the setting confirmation and the setting value to the sub CPU 201 by the data transmitting unit, and the sub CPU 201 transmits the setting change or the setting confirmation when the data received by the data receiving unit is the setting change or the setting confirmation. The setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value and the date and time data from the RTC 209 are stored as setting change / confirmation history information in the work RAM 203, and the setting change or setting confirmation and the date and time data stored in the main RAM 203 are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. When the main button 662 is operated in a state where the setting change or the setting confirmation and the date and time data are displayed, the setting value stored in the work RAM 203 is displayed.

  With this configuration, the setting change or setting confirmation, the set value, and the date and time data from the RTC 209 are stored as setting change / confirmation history information in the work RAM 203. When the user operates the button 662, the setting values stored in the work RAM 203 can be displayed. Therefore, when “Setting change / confirmation history” in the hall menu is selected, it is possible to check each history related to the setting value, and it is possible to determine whether an improper setting change or setting confirmation has been performed. Become like

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment may be configured to acquire the date and time data at which the set value is received from the RTC 209, and store the set value, the date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change in association with each other. Good.

  With this configuration, the changed setting value, the changed date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person specifies the date and time when the setting value was changed. When a fraud such as changing a set value has been performed, the fraud can be specified.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment acquires from the RTC 209 the date and time at which the information indicating that the setting value has been confirmed is received, and stores the date and time data and the information indicating the setting confirmation in association with each other. Is also good.

  With this configuration, the date and time data at which the setting value was confirmed and the information indicating the setting confirmation are stored in association with each other, so that an authorized person can specify the date and time at which the setting value was confirmed, and When a fraud such as checking a value has been performed, the fraud can be specified.

  Further, when the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment displays the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data in the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203, the displayed date and time are displayed. The data may be stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

  With this configuration, when a setting change or setting confirmation, a set value, and date and time data of the setting change / confirmation history information are displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing is performed. History can be displayed. Therefore, when “Setting change / confirmation history” in the hole menu where the set value is not displayed is selected, in addition to setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date / time data display, Since the history can be displayed, it can be determined whether or not the browsing history of the setting change or the setting confirmation has been browsed for the purpose of fraudulent acts such as goto.

  With the above configuration, in the present embodiment, the setting change / confirmation history information in which the setting change or the setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data are respectively associated with each other can be saved and displayed. It is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine capable of confirming whether or not an unauthorized setting change or setting confirmation has been performed.

  The pachinko gaming machine that constitutes the gaming machine according to the present invention is a liquid crystal display device 16 that displays various images, operation units such as a main button 662 and a select button 664, and a control unit that performs control related to the game. A main CPU 101 and a sub CPU 201 which is a display control unit for controlling display of the liquid crystal display device 11, wherein the control unit changes or confirms set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). And a data transmission unit for transmitting various data to the sub CPU 201. The display control unit includes a reception unit for receiving various data from the data transmission unit, and a writing unit for writing data even in a non-energized state. A work RAM 203 capable of storing and holding the information obtained, and an RTC 209 for measuring the date and time. The setting change or the setting confirmation and the setting value are transmitted to the sub CPU 201. When the data received by the data receiving unit is the setting change or the setting confirmation, the sub CPU 201 stores the setting change or the setting confirmation and the setting value in the work RAM 203. And a setting display function of storing date and time data from the RTC 209 as setting change / confirmation history information and displaying the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 on the liquid crystal display device 16. When the change / confirmation history information is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

  With this configuration, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as the browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Can be. Therefore, not only can it be determined whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also it can be determined whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an improper operation.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment acquires from the RTC 209 the date and time data in which the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and associates the date and time data with the information indicating the browsing history. Alternatively, the information may be stored.

  According to this configuration, the date and time data and the information indicating the browsing history are stored in association with each other, so that the date and time when the information regarding the setting value was browsed can be specified, and illegality such as changing the setting value can be prevented. If so, the fraud can be identified.

  Further, when the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment displays the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data in the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203, the displayed date and time are displayed. The data may be stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

  With this configuration, when the setting change or setting confirmation, the set value, and the date and time data of the setting change / confirmation history information are displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and The browsing history can be displayed on the display device 16. Therefore, when “Setting change / confirmation history” in the hole menu where the set value is not displayed is selected, in addition to setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date / time data display, Since the history can be displayed, it can be determined whether or not the browsing history of the setting change or the setting confirmation has been browsed for the purpose of fraudulent acts such as goto.

  With the configuration described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to save and display the browsing history information in which the browsing history of browsing the setting change confirmation / history information and the date and time data, so that an unnatural operation relating to the setting value can be performed. It is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine that can not only determine whether or not a pachinko game has been performed, but also determine whether or not it is a chance to investigate a fraudulent activity.

[Modification 2 of setting change / confirmation history processing]
Next, a second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 241 to 245.

  The basic configuration of the setting change / confirmation history processing in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing is substantially the same as that of the first modification except that the configuration of the authentication function is different. In the following, in particular, differences from the first modification will be described in detail.

  The pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing includes, for example, a slide switch as a volume adjusting means for adjusting the volume of the speaker 24, and has a plurality of volume positions (volume positions), for example, a volume “high”. , "Medium" and "small" are switched, and a plurality of volume positions are switched in a predetermined operation order. The switching operation order is set in advance. When the order matches, the user is authenticated as a user having administrator authority. The volume adjusting means for adjusting the volume of the speaker 24 is not limited to the slide switch. For example, the volume may be adjusted by turning a jog dial, and the volume may be determined by pressing the jog dial.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing has the authentication processing function of performing authentication based on the volume password corresponding to the volume position change order. In the second modification, for example, a control program with the above-described authentication processing function added to the voice control circuit 204 is stored, and the sub CPU 201 executes an authentication processing based on the volume password according to the control program.

  FIG. 241 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a volume switch 108 that generates a volume password applied to an authentication process (see FIG. 242) in a modified example 2 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. The volume switch 108 is arranged, for example, in a circuit board of the sub-control circuit 200, and is capable of performing a slide operation for setting an initial set value. For example, the volume switch 108 is set to one of three volume positions 603a, 603b, and 603c (hereinafter, also referred to as volume positions 1, 2, and 3) corresponding to the volume levels "low", "medium", and "high". In addition to the switching operation, the operation is sequentially switched to a plurality of volume positions 1, 2, and 3 in a predetermined operation order. Specifically, when the initial setting value is set, it can be set by sliding the volume switch 108 in the order of “large” → “medium” → “small” → “medium”. That is, the sub CPU 201 configures a position detection unit that detects the volume positions 1, 2, and 3 of the volume switch 108.

  On the other hand, when a user having administrator authority (administrative authority) is set, a predetermined authentication operation via a plurality of volume positions is performed in a different order from that at the time of initial setting according to a predetermined administrator setting procedure. The operation is performed in a pattern, and the plurality of volume positions and the operation order are stored in a memory. Then, when the administrator authority is required to view the change history of the set value, the volume switch 108 is operated in a predetermined authentication operation pattern to enable the view of the change history of the set value.

  As the authentication operation pattern, for example, an operation pattern representing a change in position from volume position 2 (volume “medium”) to volume position 1 (volume “low”) in FIG. 241, or from volume position 2 to volume position 3 ( An operation pattern or the like representing a position change to the volume “loud” can be stored in advance.

  Accordingly, the sub CPU 201 recognizes the operation pattern from the volume position information indicating each volume position of the volume switch 108, and determines whether or not the operation pattern matches a preset authentication operation pattern. Can be determined.

  As described above, in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing, the volume switch 108 functions as an operation unit for inputting a volume password corresponding to the operation pattern of the volume position. The volume switch 108 in Modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing is an operation unit that cannot be operated by the player, like the setting switch 332, the setting key 328, the power switch 35, and the backup clear switch 330. On the other hand, for example, the main button 662, the select button 664, the firing handle 32, and the like are operation units that can be operated by the player.

  FIG. 242 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an authentication process in a second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. In this authentication processing, “setting change / confirmation history” is selected from the hole menu (see FIG. 209) displayed in step S33006 of FIG. 214 (YES in step S33006), and “setting change / confirmation” is selected on the hole menu screen. The process is started when the main button 662 is pressed while “History” is highlighted (see FIG. 210).

  When the authentication processing is started, the sub CPU 201 executes a volume password request display processing (step S33201) for displaying a screen prompting the input of a volume password in a display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 where the hole menu screen is displayed. Execute.

  FIG. 243 shows a password change screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the setting change / confirmation history processing is executed in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201. It is a figure showing an example. FIG. 244 is an example of a volume password request display screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in Modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201. As shown in FIGS. 243 and 244, in the volume password request display processing of step S33201 in FIG. 242, the sub CPU 201 displays, for example, “* operates a volume switch to input a password in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The setting value is displayed after entering the password. "And the setting change / confirmation history information.

  In the second modification, when the setting change / confirmation history processing is started (when the “setting change / confirmation history” is selected (highlighted) on the hole menu screen), the main button 662 is pressed. And, for example, as shown in FIGS. 243 and 244, the volume password request screen is displayed while the hole menu screen is displayed, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the setting change / confirmation history is started, only the time information and the operation type information of the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information are displayed (the setting values are not displayed). May be displayed and the volume password request screen may be displayed while the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed, or the volume may be displayed without displaying any of the hole menu and the setting change / confirmation history screen. Only the password request screen may be displayed.

  After the display of the volume password request display screen, the sub CPU 201 continuously executes the change order of the volume position information of the volume switch 108, that is, the operation pattern acquisition process of monitoring the operation pattern (step S33202).

  When the volume position information is input during the monitoring of the input of the volume position information, the sub CPU 201 extracts an operation pattern corresponding to the volume position information from the volume position information and checks it against an authentication operation pattern set in advance. Then, it is determined whether or not the correct operation has been performed based on whether or not they match (step S33203). Here, when it is determined that the correct operation has been performed (YES in step S33203), sub CPU 201 executes the processing of step S33120 and subsequent steps in FIG. 235.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the correct operation has not been performed (NO in step S33203), the sub CPU 201 performs an authentication NG display process of displaying that the authentication is NG in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Performed (step S33204). Accordingly, the sub CPU 201 ends the authentication processing and shifts to the processing of step S33110 in FIG. 235. In the authentication NG display process, a message such as "Volume password is incorrect. Please try again from the beginning" is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

  Note that FIG. 241 shows an example in which the volume switch 108 having three volume positions is used as the operation switch according to the present invention. However, the invention is not limited to this. For example, the operation switch may include at least three or more arbitrary switches. A switch that can take a position may be used. In this case, the sub CPU 201 is provided with a position detection function capable of detecting each volume position of the operation switch. The position information (volume position information) detected by this position detection function is acquired, and the acquired order and the acquired order are stored in the work RAM 203 in advance. The configuration change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 may be displayed on condition that the stored operation order matches the predetermined operation order.

  FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for confirming the setting value of the setting change / confirmation history information in Modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201. As shown in FIG. 245, in Modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing, as a first procedure for confirming the setting value of the setting change / confirmation history information, the hole is set when the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing is executed. Display the menu screen. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. The setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key 328 can be turned on in one direction to turn on the setting key switch signal, and turned in the opposite direction (return to the original position) to turn off the setting key switch signal. It can be configured.

  As a second procedure, the pachinko gaming machine selects the "setting change / confirmation history" in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 210), and thereby the "setting change / confirmation history". Is highlighted, and only the date and time data and the operation type (corresponding operation type among setting change, confirmation, and browsing) are displayed. The preview screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen including the setting change / confirmation history information (See FIG. 210) is displayed (the set values are not displayed).

  As a third procedure, the pachinko gaming machine requests an input of a volume password (see FIGS. 243 and 244), captures the input volume password, and determines whether the captured volume password is appropriate. The determination of the appropriateness of the volume password is performed by comparing the captured volume password with the authentication operation pattern (authentication password). If the two match and the authentication is successful, the volume password is determined to be appropriate. to decide.

  As a fourth procedure, the pachinko gaming machine, if the volume password input in the third procedure is appropriate, sets value information, more specifically, date and time data and operation type (setting change, confirmation, browsing) A setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 225) in which the setting value is associated with the corresponding operation type is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine that constitutes the gaming machine according to the present invention includes the liquid crystal display device 16 that displays various images, the main button 662 and the select button 664 that are operation units that receive at least the operation of the player, A non-game operation unit that is not operated by a player, a main CPU 101 that is a control unit that performs control related to the game, and a sub CPU 201 that is a display control unit that controls display of the liquid crystal display device 16; The control unit includes a setting switch 332 for changing or confirming set values (for example, settings 1 to 6), and a data transmission unit for transmitting various data to the display control unit. A receiving unit for receiving various data from the transmitting unit, a work RAM 203 capable of storing and holding written information even in a non-energized state, and clocking a date and time TC209, and the main CPU 101 transmits the setting change or the setting confirmation and the set value to the sub CPU 201 by the data transmitting unit to the sub CPU 201, and the sub CPU 201 determines whether the data received by the data receiving unit is the setting change or the setting confirmation. In the work RAM 203, the setting change or setting confirmation, the set value and the date and time data from the RTC 209 are stored as setting change / confirmation history information, and the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. And a configuration display function for displaying setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 on condition that the non-game operation unit is operated in a predetermined order.

  With this configuration, the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 can be displayed on condition that the non-game operation unit is operated in a predetermined order. Therefore, only a person who has the authority to know the predetermined operation order can save and display the setting change / confirmation history information, so that it is possible to judge whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. Or, it is possible to judge whether or not it is the opportunity to investigate the misconduct.

  Further, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment stores the displayed date and time data in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and displays the data on the liquid crystal display device 16. It is good also as composition which displays a browsing history.

  With this configuration, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as the browsing history, and the browsing history can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. Therefore, not only can it be determined whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also it can be determined whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an improper operation.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the non-gaming operation unit may be an operation switch for adjusting a volume, for example, a volume switch 108.

  According to this configuration, the authentication can be performed in the operation sequence known only to the authorized person, so that an operation switch for identifying the authorized person is not added, and the cost can be reduced. Note that this operation order is shown when the pachinko gaming machine is delivered to the hall, and only those having the authority use it to change the setting or confirm the setting.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the operation switch is a switch that can take at least three or more arbitrary positions, and the sub CPU 201 can detect each volume position of the operation switch. The setting display function obtains the volume position information detected by the position detection function, and sets a condition that the order of the obtained volume position information matches a predetermined operation order stored in advance. Alternatively, the configuration change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 may be displayed.

  With this configuration, the operation order of three or more arbitrary volume positions is stored in advance as a predetermined operation order, and the operation order is notified to an authorized person in advance, thereby identifying an authorized one. Authentication can be performed in an operation sequence known only to authorized persons without adding an operation switch.

  With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, only the authorized person can save and display the setting change / confirmation history information. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. Alternatively, it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine capable of determining whether or not it is a time to investigate a fraudulent activity.

  As described above, when displaying the setting change / confirmation history information, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment authenticates by operating the volume switch 108 so that only a person having the authority regarding the setting value in the hall can display the information. Although the configuration has been described, like the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing described below, when displaying the setting change / confirmation history information, the information is input from the input unit of the pachinko game machine. Authentication using a password may be configured.

[Modification 3 of Setting Change / Confirmation History Processing]
Next, a third modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 246 to 253.

  FIG. 246 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a game system 3210 according to a third modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201. The gaming system 3210 includes a pachinko gaming machine A, a portable wireless communication terminal 3220, and a server device 3240 arranged on a network 3230. In the gaming system 3210, as described later, the pachinko gaming machine A, the portable wireless communication terminal 3220, and the server device 3240 cooperate to perform an authentication process for confirming the setting change / confirmation history information.

  In the gaming system 3210, the pachinko gaming machine A has a function of generating a two-dimensional code including setting change / confirmation history information and a URL (Uniform Resource Locator) in addition to the functions of the above-described pachinko gaming machine. Is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A (see FIG. 249). The setting change / confirmation history information included in the two-dimensional code is, for example, information content displayed on the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 218 and includes a set value. The sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine A constitutes a generation unit that generates a two-dimensional code according to the present invention.

  The portable wireless communication terminal 3220 is a mobile communication terminal such as a smart phone, and includes a control unit 3221, a display operation unit 3222, a camera unit (not shown), and the like. The display operation unit 3222 has functions of a display unit and an operation unit, and includes a touch panel or the like. The camera unit is a functional unit that reads (images) the two-dimensional code 3161a and the like (see FIG. 249) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine A. The display operation unit 3222 and the camera unit constitute an operation display unit and an imaging unit in the present invention, respectively.

  The control unit 3221 includes a CPU, a storage device (flash memory, microSD memory card, etc.), a RAM, a communication circuit, and the like. The CPU controls various operations according to a control program stored in, for example, the storage device or the RAM. I do. In the present embodiment, the control unit 3221 analyzes a captured two-dimensional code, extracts setting change / confirmation history information and a URL, and a password input screen for inputting a password to the display operation unit 3222 (see FIG. 252), an authentication result obtaining unit that transmits an input password input on the password input screen to the server device 3240 based on the URL, and obtains an authentication result notified from the server device 3240. If the acquired authentication result is correct, a history information display control unit that displays the setting change / confirmation history information on the display operation unit 3222 in a mode including the set value is provided. The extraction unit, the display control unit, the authentication result acquisition unit, and the history information display control unit are functions that can be realized by a CPU that operates according to a dedicated application previously installed in the storage device or the like. An extraction unit, an input screen display control unit, an authentication result acquisition unit, and a history information display control unit, which are components of the control unit 3221 according to the present embodiment, are an extraction unit, an input screen display control unit, an authentication result An acquisition unit and a history information display control unit are configured.

  The server device 3240 is realized by a computer, functions to manage a dedicated site of the authentication service identified by the URL, receives an input password from the portable wireless communication terminal 3220 accessing the URL, and sets a password set in advance. An authentication service function or the like is provided to determine whether the password is correct by comparing with the password and to notify the portable wireless communication terminal 3220 of the authentication result. The server device 3240 forms an authentication unit in the present invention.

  FIG. 247 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change / confirmation history process in the pachinko gaming machine A included in the gaming system 3210 according to the third modification. This setting change / confirmation history processing is performed by selecting “change setting” from a plurality of hole menu items displayed on the hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 208) displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine A. "Confirmation history" is selected and determined, and the process is started on condition that the main button 662 is pressed while "Change setting / confirmation history" is highlighted on the hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 210).

  In the setting change / confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217, when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), a hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 209) Has been described to perform the timing process (see step S33052 in FIG. 216) so that is displayed. In the third modification as well, the timekeeping process is performed in the same manner as the setting change / confirmation history process described above with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217, and no process is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Although the hole menu screen may be displayed at the same time, the description of the modification 3 omits the description of the timing processing.

  When the setting change / confirmation history processing is started, the sub CPU reads the setting change / confirmation history information from the work RAM, and the two-dimensional code including the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL of the dedicated site for the authentication service. A two-dimensional code generation process for generating 3161a (see FIG. 249) is performed (step S33301). Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a two-dimensional code display process of displaying the setting change / confirmation history information read in step S33301 and the generated two-dimensional code 3161a on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A in a manner shown in FIG. 249, for example. It is executed (step S33302).

  After the execution of the two-dimensional code display process in step S33302, the sub CPU 201 accepts a data clear request, a cursor movement (page break) request, and a process return request based on the operation of the main button 662 and the select button 664. Move to The main button 662 is a button for performing a process return request. The select button 664 is a button for performing a cursor movement (page break) request. By operating the main button 662 and the select button 664 together, a data clear request can be instructed.

  After shifting to the above-mentioned receivable state, the sub CPU 201 performs the processing of steps S33303 to S3305. Note that FIG. 247 omits steps S33056 to S33064 shown in FIG. 216. However, in order to perform these processes, the process of FIG. Are added to the processing of steps S33056 to S33064.

  In FIG. 247, after the two-dimensional code display processing in step S33302, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not “clear” has been determined in step S33303. When the operator presses the main button 662 in a state where “clear” is selected (highlighted) on the setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 249) displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. , The sub CPU 201 determines that “clear” has been determined.

  If the sub CPU 201 determines that “clear” has been determined (YES in step S33303), it executes a setting change / confirmation history data clear process (step S33304), and proceeds to step S33306. The setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is a process for erasing the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history stored in the work RAM 203. When the setting change / confirmation history data clear processing is executed, all the history data displayed in the setting change / confirmation history display area of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is deleted (see FIG. 222). If “clear” has not been determined (NO in step S33303), the process moves to step S33305.

  The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not “return” has been determined in step S33305. The operator presses the main button 662 in a state where “return” is selected (highlighted) on the setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 249) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Then, the sub CPU 201 determines that “return” has been determined.

  If the sub CPU 201 determines that “return” has been determined (YES in step S33305), it executes a hole menu screen display process (step S33306), and ends the setting change / confirmation history process. On the other hand, if it is not determined to be “return” (NO in step S33305), the process moves to step S33303, and the processing after step S33303 is continued.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the sub CPU 201 determines that “clear” has been determined (YES in step S33303), the sub CPU 201 updates the setting change / confirmation history information displayed together with the two-dimensional code 3161a (see FIG. 249). You may make it clear. In this case, the pachinko gaming machine A displays the two-dimensional code 3161a, but has not obtained the authentication result, so that the setting change / confirmation history information can be cleared regardless of whether the authentication result is OK or NG. I can do it.

  FIG. 248 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change / confirmation history process in the portable wireless communication terminal 3220 and the server device 3240 of the gaming system 3210 according to the third modification. This processing is started on the condition that the two-dimensional code 3161a displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine A is photographed by the portable wireless communication terminal 3220.

  When the two-dimensional code 3161a is photographed by the portable wireless communication terminal 3220, the control unit 3221 reads the image data obtained by the photographing, and transmits the image data to the display operation unit 3222 based on the image data in the form shown in FIG. A two-dimensional code reading display process for displaying the two-dimensional code 3222a is performed (step S33401).

  Subsequently, in the portable wireless communication terminal 3220, the control unit 3221 analyzes the read two-dimensional code, extracts the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL included in the two-dimensional code, and temporarily stores them in a predetermined storage area in the RAM, for example. A two-dimensional code acquisition process to be held is executed (step S33402). Next, the control unit 3221 accesses the dedicated site for the authentication service based on the URL, displays a password input screen (see FIG. 252), and executes a password input display process for receiving a password (step S33403).

  After executing the password input display processing in step S33403, the control unit 3221 of the portable wireless communication terminal 3220 performs the password authentication processing through the following steps S33404 and S33405 in cooperation with the server device 3240.

  In the password authentication process, the control unit 3221 of the portable wireless communication terminal 3220 first monitors whether or not a password has been input to the password display field 3222c (see FIG. 252) (step S33404), and then transmits the password from the numeric keypad 3222b. A process of receiving the input of the password of the user is performed. Here, when the password is input (YES in step S33404), control unit 3221 transmits the input password to server device 3240.

  The server device 3240 checks the password transmitted from the portable wireless communication terminal 3220 against a registered password registered in advance, and determines whether authentication is OK or authentication NG based on whether or not the two match. The server device 3240 notifies the portable radio communication terminal 3220 of the determination result. As described above, in the present embodiment, only the authentication is performed by the server device 3240. That is, the server device 3240 returns only the authentication result to the portable wireless communication terminal 3220.

  On the other hand, after transmitting the input password accepted in step S33404, control unit 3221 of portable wireless communication terminal 3220 waits for notification of the authentication result from server device 3240, and determines that the notified authentication result is authentication OK or authentication NG. Then, it is determined whether the password is correct (step S33405).

  If it is determined that the password is incorrect (NO in step S33405), control unit 3221 performs an authentication NG display process of displaying a message indicating that the password is authentication NG on display operation unit 3222 ( Step S33410), and thereafter, the process ends. In the authentication NG display process, for example, a message such as “The password is incorrect. Please try again from the beginning.” Is displayed in the message field 3222d.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the password is correct (YES in step S33405), control unit 3221 sets the setting change / confirmation history information temporarily stored in step S33302 to be displayed on display operation unit 3222. A change / confirmation history display process is performed (step S33406). In the setting change / confirmation history display process, the control unit 3221 embeds (displays) the display information in which the setting change / confirmation history information stored in step S33302 is embedded according to a preset display format. Created, and processing for displaying the setting change / confirmation history information on the display operation unit 3222 based on the display information (see FIG. 253) is performed.

  FIG. 249 is a view illustrating an example of a setting change / confirmation history screen including a two-dimensional code in the pachinko gaming machine A of the gaming system 3210 according to the third modification.

  As shown in FIG. 249, in the pachinko gaming machine A, in the two-dimensional code display process (step S33302) of FIG. 247, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting change / confirmation history information in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine A. And a setting change / confirmation history screen including the two-dimensional code 3161a. As described above, the two-dimensional code 3161a displayed on the setting change / confirmation history screen 116g contains the setting change / confirmation history information displayed in the display area of the front liquid crystal display device 16A and the URL of the dedicated site for the authentication service. Includes

  When displaying the two-dimensional code 3161a in the two-dimensional code display processing (see FIG. 247) in step S33302, the sub CPU 201 displays, for example, “* Please read and access the authentication service. "May be displayed.

  FIG. 250 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change / confirmation history information in the game system 3210 according to the third modification. This setting value confirmation procedure will be described at the end of the present embodiment for convenience.

  FIG. 251 is a view illustrating an example of a two-dimensional code display screen in the portable wireless communication terminal 3220 of the gaming system 3210 according to the third modification. The portable wireless communication terminal 3220 displays a two-dimensional code 3222a as shown in FIG. 251 on the display operation unit 3222 in the two-dimensional code reading and displaying process in S1101.

  FIG. 252 is a view illustrating an example of a password input screen in the portable wireless communication terminal 3220 of the gaming system 3210 according to the third modification. In the password input display process (see FIG. 248) in step S33403, the portable wireless communication terminal 3220 accesses the URL and displays the password input screen shown in FIG. 252 on the display operation unit 3222.

  As shown in FIG. 252, on the password input screen, a numeric key 3222b having keys of "0" to "9", "*", and "@", and a password display field 3222c for displaying a password input by the numeric key 3222b are displayed. Is displayed in the message box 3222d. In the message field 3222d, for example, a message prompting the user to enter a password is displayed, such as "* Enter your password. The set value is displayed after the password is entered." In the portable wireless communication terminal 3220, on the password word input screen shown in FIG. 252, the password converted into the hidden character “*” can be displayed in the password display column 3222c in which the password has been input by operating the numeric keypad 222b.

  FIG. 253 is a view illustrating an example of a setting change / confirmation history screen 222g in the portable wireless communication terminal 3220 of the gaming system 3210 according to the third modification. As shown in FIG. 253, the setting change / confirmation history screen 222g is a display in which the setting change / confirmation history information temporarily stored in S1102 is, for example, a display equivalent to the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. It is displayed in the format. That is, in FIG. 253, in the setting change / confirmation history information, set values are displayed corresponding to the setting change / confirmation date and time.

  In the portable wireless communication terminal 3220, the dedicated application previously installed includes the display format described above, the display format of the setting change / confirmation history screen 222g shown in FIG. 253, the scrolling of the setting change / confirmation history information, and the processing function of batch deletion. Supported. Thus, the control unit 3221 operates the determination button and the select button displayed on the display operation unit 3222 together with the setting change / confirmation history information during the setting change / confirmation history processing in FIG. Shifts to a receivable state in which a page update request based on the request can be received.

  After shifting to the acceptable state, the control unit 3221 of the portable wireless communication terminal 3220 determines whether or not a page update operation has been performed (step S33407). When it is determined that the select button has been operated and the last line has been reached, it is determined that the page update operation has been performed (YES in step S33407), and the page update operation has been performed. The processing is executed (step S33408). Here, as long as it is determined that the page update operation has been performed by operating the select button (that is, as long as it is determined that the select button has been operated and the last line has been reached), the page for which scrolling of the page is continued is performed. An update process is performed (step S33408).

  If the control unit 222 determines that the page update operation has been stopped (NO in step S33407), that is, if it determines that the operation of the select button has been stopped and the determination button has not been pressed, the process proceeds to step S33409. If it is determined in this step S33409 that "return" has been determined (YES in step S33071), the control unit 222 executes a hole menu screen display process (step S33410) and ends the setting change / confirmation history process. On the other hand, if it is determined that “return” has not been determined (NO in step S33409), control unit 222 returns to step S340.

  In the gaming system 3210 according to the second embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine A converts the setting change / confirmation history information into a two-dimensional code as so-called raw data, and displays it in the display area of the front liquid crystal display device 16A. (See steps S33301 and S33030 in FIG. 247), the portable wireless communication terminal 3220 captures the two-dimensional code displayed in the display area of the front liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine A, and outputs the setting change / confirmation history information. A process for returning to the raw data is performed (see steps S3401 and S33402 in FIG. 248).

  On the other hand, many mobile communication terminals in recent years are provided with a function of reading and analyzing a two-dimensional code as standard equipment.

  In this regard, in the gaming system 3210 according to the second embodiment, a dedicated application is installed in the portable wireless communication terminal 3220, and the dedicated application enables display in a display format equivalent to that of the pachinko gaming machine A. .

  In other words, on a mobile communication terminal on which a dedicated application is not installed, even if the setting change / confirmation history information can be viewed as raw data, the mobile terminal must be viewed in a display format equivalent to that of the pachinko gaming machine A. And it is difficult to recognize the setting change / confirmation history information.

  Therefore, in the second embodiment, by installing and using the dedicated application in the portable wireless communication terminal 3220, only the authorized person can see the setting change / confirmation history information with the set value, which is sufficient confidentiality. Property can be ensured.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, when the two-dimensional code is read, all the data obtained by the two-dimensional code is taken into the portable wireless communication terminal 3220. However, the data shown in FIG. Is displayed as follows. Therefore, without having a dedicated application having the display format, even if it is read with a general-purpose bar code reader, it is not possible to understand what kind of display the character string obtained by reading the two-dimensional code is. A certain level of confidentiality can be secured. The application is distributed when the pachinko gaming machine A is delivered, and can be obtained only by an authorized person.

  In the second embodiment, the authentication of the password is notified of the authentication result from the server device 3240, and it is determined whether the password is correct based on whether the notified authentication result is the authentication OK or the authentication NG. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the portable wireless communication terminal 3220 may receive the password from the server device 3240, determine whether the input password matches the password received from the server device 3240, and determine whether the input password is correct, In order to further secure the confidentiality, the pachinko gaming machine A encrypts the setting change / confirmation history information, then generates and displays a two-dimensional code. May be configured to add a function of decrypting setting change / confirmation history information corresponding to the encryption.

  Next, a setting value confirmation procedure of setting change / confirmation history information in the gaming system 3210 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to a flowchart of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 250, as a first procedure for checking the setting value of the setting change / confirmation history information in the gaming system 3210 according to the second embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine A performs a setting change process or a setting check process. Display the hole menu screen when executed. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. The setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key 328 can be turned on in one direction to turn on the setting key switch signal, and turned in the opposite direction (return to the original position) to turn off the setting key switch signal. It can be configured.

  As a second procedure, the pachinko gaming machine A selects the “setting change / confirmation history” in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 210), and thereby the “setting change / confirmation history”. Is highlighted, and only the date and time data and the operation type (corresponding operation type of setting change, confirmation, and browsing) are displayed, and the setting change / confirmation history screen including the setting change / confirmation history information is previewed. A screen (see FIG. 210) is displayed (the set values are not displayed).

  As a third procedure, the pachinko gaming machine A operates in a state where “setting change / confirmation history” is selected (highlighted) on the preview screen (see FIG. 210) of the setting change / confirmation history screen. When the button 662 is pressed, a two-dimensional code including the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL held in the work RAM 203 is generated, and the two-dimensional code is displayed together with the setting change / confirmation history information (see FIG. 249). ).

  As a fourth procedure, the portable wireless communication terminal 3220 photographs the two-dimensional code displayed on the pachinko gaming machine A (see FIG. 251). After capturing the two-dimensional code, the portable wireless communication terminal 3220 extracts the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL included in the two-dimensional code.

  As a fifth procedure, the portable wireless communication terminal 3220 accesses the dedicated site for the authentication service based on the URL extracted in the third procedure, and enters the password from the password input screen (see FIG. 252) provided by the dedicated site. Perform the input.

  This password is, for example, a password disclosed by a manufacturer of the gaming system 3210 in an instruction manual or the like and registered in association with the gaming system 3210 or the individual pachinko gaming machine A or the like. In the dedicated site, the server device 3240 accepts the input password from the portable wireless communication terminal 3220, and performs password authentication by comparing it with the registered password. Here, if the authentication is OK, server device 3240 notifies portable wireless communication terminal 3220 of the fact.

  As a sixth procedure, when the authentication OK is obtained in the fifth procedure, the portable wireless communication terminal 3220 displays the setting change / confirmation history information extracted in the fourth procedure in a screen of a predetermined display format (FIG. 253). (See Reference) on the display operation unit 3222 with the content including the set value. Thereby, the administrative authority who has input the password can check the setting change / confirmation history information together with the set value on the screen displayed on the display operation unit 3222 of the portable wireless communication terminal 3220.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine A according to the second embodiment controls the liquid crystal display device 16A that displays various images, the main button 662 and the select button 664 that are operation units that receive various operations, and controls related to the game. A main CPU 101 that is a control unit that performs the control, and a sub CPU 201 that is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 16A. The control unit changes or confirms a set value (for example, settings 1 to 6). The display control unit includes a setting switch 332 that enables the setting, a data transmission unit that transmits various data to the display control unit, and a reception unit that receives various data from the data transmission unit. The main CPU 101 includes a work RAM 203 capable of storing and holding the written information, and an RTC 209 for measuring the date and time. The sub CPU 201 transmits the setting change or the setting confirmation and the setting value to the sub CPU 201. If the data received by the data receiving unit is the setting change or the setting confirmation, the sub CPU 201 stores the setting change or the setting confirmation in the work RAM 203. And a setting display function for storing the setting value and the date and time data from the RTC 209 as setting change / confirmation history information, and displaying the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 in a display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A. When the main button 662 as the operation unit is operated in a state where the setting change or the setting confirmation and the date and time data are displayed by the display function, the configuration change / confirmation history information is displayed by a two-dimensional code. .

  With this configuration, the setting change or setting confirmation, the set value, and the date and time data from the date and time unit are stored as setting change / confirmation history information in the work RAM 203, so that the setting change or setting confirmation and the date and time data are displayed. When the main button 662 is operated, the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 can be displayed by a two-dimensional code. Therefore, if the display is permitted after reading the two-dimensional code in the portable wireless communication terminal 3220 and authenticating the password, only the person who has the authority to know the predetermined password can save and display the setting change / confirmation history information. Therefore, not only can it be determined whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the set value has been performed, but also it can be determined whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an improper act.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine A according to the second embodiment, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed by the setting display function, the sub CPU 201 uses the displayed date and time data as the browsing history and sets the work RAM 203 And the browsing history may be displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A.

  With this configuration, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as the browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A. Can be. Therefore, not only can it be determined whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also it can be determined whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an improper operation.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine A according to the second embodiment has a portable wireless communication device based on information from a predetermined server device 3240 when the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function is read by the portable wireless communication terminal 3220. A configuration in which the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed on the communication terminal 3220 may be adopted.

  With this configuration, when the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function is read by the portable wireless communication terminal 220, information from a predetermined server device 3240, for example, a predetermined password and the portable wireless communication terminal 3220 are read. The setting change / confirmation history information can be displayed on the portable wireless communication terminal 3220 on condition that the password entered in the step (c) matches. Therefore, since authentication can be performed with a password known only to the authorized person, the cost can be reduced without adding an input means for identifying the authorized person to the pachinko gaming machine A side. Note that this password is shown when the pachinko gaming machine A is delivered to the hall, and is used only by a person having authority to change the setting or confirm the setting.

  The gaming system 3210 according to the second embodiment includes the above-described pachinko gaming machine A and a server device 3240 connected to the network 3230 and managing a site for authentication. The server device 3240 further has a generation function of generating the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 and the two-dimensional code of the URL of the site, and the server device 3240 replaces the password from the portable wireless communication terminal 3220 with a preset password. The portable wireless communication terminal 3220 has an authentication service machine that performs comparison and authentication, and notifies the portable wireless communication terminal 3220 of the authentication result. The camera unit that captures the two-dimensional code displayed on the screen, and analyzes the captured two-dimensional code and changes the settings An extracting unit for extracting the confirmation history information and the URL, an input screen display control unit for displaying a password input screen for inputting a password, and transmitting the input password on the password input screen to the server device 3240 based on the URL, An authentication result obtaining unit that obtains an authentication result notified from 3240, and a history information display control unit that displays setting change / confirmation history information on the display operation unit 3222 when the obtained authentication result is correct. .

  With this configuration, the gaming system according to the second embodiment reads the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function of the pachinko gaming machine A with the portable wireless communication terminal 3220, and after authentication by the server device 3240, the portable wireless communication terminal 3220. Can display setting change / confirmation history information. Therefore, only a person who has the authority to know the predetermined password can save and display the setting change confirmation information, so that not only can it be determined whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed, but also an unauthorized operation can be performed. It will be possible to determine whether it is a time to investigate an action.

  With the above-described configuration, in the second embodiment, only the authorized person can save and display the setting change / confirmation history information, so that it can be determined whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. In addition, it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine A and a gaming system 3210 that can determine whether or not it is a time to investigate a fraudulent activity.

  As above, the gaming machine according to each embodiment of the present invention has been described including the operation and effect thereof. However, it is needless to say that the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described herein, and includes various embodiments without departing from the gist of the present invention described in the claims.

[Example of application to pachislot]
For example, the invention according to the second embodiment can be applied to a pachislot. When the invention according to the second embodiment is applied to a pachi-slot, a procedure for executing a setting change process and a setting confirmation process is different from that of a pachinko gaming machine.

  In the case of the pachislot, the processing shifts to the setting change process on condition that the setting key is operated from OFF to ON while the power is OFF, and the setting value can be changed. Then, when the operation of the start lever is detected or when the setting key is changed from ON to OFF, the setting change is determined.

  In order to enable the history of the setting change to be displayed, the main CPU of the pachi-slot inputs the signal generated from the setting switch by the operation of the setting key by performing the setting change described above, and then operates the start lever. Upon receiving the signal indicating the setting, data indicating that the setting has been changed and a command indicating the current setting value are transmitted to the sub CPU. The main CPU of the pachi-slot constitutes a control unit for performing control relating to the progress of the game. The main CPU also constitutes data transmission means for transmitting various data to the display control unit.

  On the other hand, if the data received from the main CPU is an initialization command indicating that a setting change has been made, the sub CPU sets operation type information (information indicating the setting change) indicating that the setting change has been made, and Then, the date and time data currently measured, that is, the date and time data when the initialization command is received are stored in the work RAM 203 as setting change confirmation history information. The sub CPU of the pachislot configures a display control unit that controls display on the display unit. The sub CPU constitutes a receiving unit that receives various data from the data transmitting unit.

  In the pachislot, the confirmation of the set value means that the set key is operated (turned to the right) and the current set value is displayed on the 7-segment display based on the signal generated from the setting key type switch. . As described above, the pachislo 1 shifts to the setting confirmation processing on condition that the setting key is operated from OFF to ON in the power ON state, and the set value is displayed on the 7-segment display. The setting switch of the pachi-slot constitutes a setting unit that enables the setting value to be changed or confirmed together with the main CPU.

  In order to be able to display the set value check history, the main CPU checks the set value by the above-described operation, and confirms the set value by inputting a signal generated from the setting switch by operating the set key. And a setting confirmation command, which is the current setting value, are transmitted to the sub CPU.

  On the other hand, when the data received from the main CPU is a setting confirmation command indicating that the setting value has been confirmed, the sub CPU has operation type information (information representing setting confirmation) indicating that the setting value has been confirmed; The date and time data currently measured by the RTC, that is, the date and time data when a setting confirmation command indicating that the setting value has been confirmed is received is stored as setting change confirmation history information in the work RAM 203 functioning as a backup memory. The work RAM 203 can store and hold the written information even in a non-energized state.

  The sub CPU that has received the setting change start command or the setting confirmation command determines that the setting key has been turned from OFF to ON. When the sub CPU determines that the setting key has been turned from OFF to ON, the sub CPU performs a hole menu display process of displaying a hole menu screen on the main screen of the liquid crystal display device provided in the pachislot. The hole menu screen displayed in the pachislot is replaced with “prize ball information” displayed on the hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 209) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. Although there are some different points such as “Total medal information” displayed in detail, basically, it is a screen similar to the hole menu screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. is there.

  In pachislot, browsing means that the setting key is operated (turned to the right), and "setting change / confirmation history" in the hole menu screen displayed on the main screen of the liquid crystal display device is selected (highlighted). The setting change confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 is displayed, for example, as a setting change / confirmation history screen, on condition that the main button is pressed in a state where the main button is pressed.

  The sub CPU of the pachislot executes the same processing as the processing executed by the sub CPU 201 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, such as a hall menu process, a setting change / confirmation history process, a maintenance process, and an authentication process. be able to. In addition, when the embodiment of the pachinko game machine is applied to the pachislot machine, the hole menu screen, the setting change / confirmation history screen, the error information history screen, the guide menu screen, the password request screen, and the input screen described in the embodiment of the pachinko game machine. A screen similar to the screen displayed when the given password is inappropriate, the screen displayed on the portable wireless communication terminal, or the like is displayed on the main screen of the pachislot liquid crystal display device or the portable wireless communication terminal.

  In the pachislot, when “bonus winning” is determined by the bonus lottery, any one of “SBB”, “BB”, and “RB” is determined by the bonus sorting lottery. However, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, one of “SBB or BB” and “RB” is determined by the bonus sorting lottery, and one of “SBB” and “BB” is determined at the end of the precursor game. May be.

  In the pachislot, the “BB precursor flag” is on when the “SBB” or “BB” precursor game is being played. That is, the precursor games of “SBB” and “BB” are managed by the “BB precursor flag”. However, the gaming machine of the present invention may have a configuration in which a precursor flag for “SBB” and a precursor flag for “BB” are provided. In this case, the effect of the precursor game corresponding to “SBB” may be different from the effect of the precursor game corresponding to “BB”.

  In the pachislot, the first ART (“SBB”, “BB”, “RB”) and the second ART end on condition that each of the games of the staying games is consumed, but the first ART The second ART may be configured to end on the condition that navigation (notification of display auxiliary information) has been performed a predetermined number of times.

  Further, in the pachislot, the number of staying games of “SBB” in the first ART may be fixed to, for example, “100”, and the number of games added to the number of staying games during “SBB” may be the same as in “BB”. A configuration in which addition (addition) is performed may be employed.

  Further, in the pachislot, the number of games in which the effects of additional additions A, B, and C that may occur in the BR may be fixed to, for example, “2”. That is, when the effects of the additional games A, B, and C are determined, “2” may be set in the additional game counter. However, the number of games in which the additional A, B, and C effects are produced may be variable. For example, the value set in the additional game counter may be made different depending on the type of the additional game effect (addition game A, B, C).

  Further, in the pachislot, the number of staying games of the second ART may be determined to be a fixed number of games such as “50”, for example, or a predetermined number of games may be set as one set (for example, , One set of “50 games”), and the number of games of the second ART may be set by a plurality of sets determined by lottery. For example, the number of stay games of the second ART may be set to two sets of one set of “50” games, that is, a total of “100” games. In this case, a predetermined period may be provided between sets without notifying the stop order and not decrementing the value of the ART game counter for each game. In addition, an additional game number lottery may be performed for each game in the predetermined period. Then, before the predetermined period ends (when the predetermined period is ended when the number of games reaches the predetermined number of games, before the predetermined number of games is reached), the stop sequence other than the forward pushing is performed. When the stop operation (irregular push) is performed, the predetermined period is forcibly terminated, and the value of the ART game number counter is subtracted from the next game after the irregular push is performed by "1" for each game. May be.

  Also, in the pachislot, the rotating accessory unit 122 having the rotating accessory 123 rotated by the driving of the stepping motor has been described as an example of the accessory provided in the pachinko gaming machine. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine may be provided with an accessory that moves in the left-right direction, the up-down direction, or the front-rear direction by driving a stepping motor, a solenoid, or the like.

[3. Pachinko gaming machine according to third embodiment]
[Expansion example of game characteristics using small hit game]
In the above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention and the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment have been described. For example, by using a small hitting game, the game property can be expanded as follows. Is also good. That is, both the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment have a game property of increasing the number of payouts in a jackpot game state. Alternatively, it is also possible to increase the frequency of executing the small hitting game in a specific game state to increase the number of payouts. Hereinafter, a description will be given of a pachinko gaming machine according to a third embodiment for increasing the number of payouts by increasing the execution frequency of the small hitting game in a specific gaming state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, a board configuration of the game board unit 17 (for example, see FIGS. 5 to 7 and FIGS. 14 to 17 and the like) and a block diagram showing a main control circuit (for example, see FIG. 9). A hit random number determination table (for example, see FIG. 11) stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100, a symbol determination table (for example, see FIG. 12) stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100, and Although it has a configuration that is partially different from the pachinko gaming machine according to the above-described first embodiment, such as a jackpot type determination table (see, for example, FIG. 13) stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100, Is substantially the same as the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described first embodiment. Further, the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment may have a setting function similarly to the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment.

  The pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment can adopt various variations of the embodiment, and will be described separately in first to eighth examples. However, in the first example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the configuration different from the pachinko gaming machine according to the above-described first embodiment will be mainly described, and unless otherwise noted, the above-described first embodiment will be described. It has the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment. Therefore, description of the configuration common to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described first embodiment will be omitted.

  In this specification, the first example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment is referred to as the pachinko gaming machine of the first example of the third embodiment (the second to eighth examples are also referred to). The same shall apply).

  Further, with respect to each of the pachinko gaming machines of the second embodiment to the eighth embodiment, the configuration different from that of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment will be mainly described, and unless otherwise specified, the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment will be described. It has a similar configuration. Therefore, the description of the configuration common to the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment will be omitted.

  In describing each of the pachinko machines of the first to eighth examples, the same members as those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals even if the arrangement positions are different. are doing. For example, the large winning port 540 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment (for example, see FIG. 5), and the large winning port 540 provided in the pachinko gaming machine in the first example (for example, see FIG. 254 described later). Are different from each other in the arrangement position, but are the same symbols because they are both big winning ports.

[Pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment]
FIG. 254 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment.

(Appearance configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine of the first example includes an attacker unit 5000 instead of the attacker unit 500 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment. The attacker unit 5000 includes a first starting port 5442, a small hit winning port 5400, a small hitting shutter 6100 capable of moving back and forth with respect to the transparent panel 172, and a small hitting winning port for driving the small hitting shutter 6100. While a solenoid (not shown) is provided, the special winning opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are not provided. As shown in FIG. 254, the special winning opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are located on the upper right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the game area 20 and on the upstream side of any of the attacker unit 5000 and the passage gate 49. Is provided. It should be noted that the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball wins in the small hit prize port 5400 is, for example, 15 balls.

  As with the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the special electric accessory 600 enables the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 540 by driving the shutter 610 by the special winning opening solenoid. ), And a closed mode in which it is impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball to the special winning opening 540.

  A right-hitting game ball collides with the buffer member 950, so that the momentum of the game ball is reduced. Then, the game ball, whose momentum is weakened by colliding with the buffer member 950, falls above the shutter 610.

  The first starting port 5442, the small hit winning port 5400, the small hitting shutter 6100, and the small hit winning port solenoid (not shown) are not necessarily required to be unitized, and each is a separate body. Alternatively, only some of them (for example, only the small hit winning port 5400, the small hit shutter 6100, and the small hit winning port solenoid may be unitized).

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, all or most of the game balls pass through the passage gate 49 when the game balls are fired (right-hit) toward the right area. The pass gate 49, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described first embodiment, gives an opportunity for a normal symbol determination on the condition that a game ball passes, and in the time-saving gaming state, the passage to the second starting port 440 is performed. Will be in a state where the winning of the game ball is facilitated. On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first example, unlike the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described first embodiment, even in the non-time saving gaming state which is not the electric support state, the pachinko gaming machine is not as much as the time saving gaming state. However, the right-hit game ball is relatively configured to win the second starting port 440 (at least the left-hit game ball that fires the game ball toward the left region is the first start ball). It is much easier than winning the mouth 5442). However, even if a game ball wins in the second starting port 440, the number of prize balls paid out is one.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described first embodiment, the normal electric accessory unit 400 is disposed at the lower left of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the gaming area 20 (for example, see FIG. 5). In the pachinko gaming machine of one embodiment, the normal electric accessory unit 400 is arranged between the big winning opening 540 and the small winning opening 5400 (that is, between the shutter 610 and the small hitting shutter 6100). . The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is a unit body in which the second starting port 440, the out port 450, and the ordinary electric accessory 460 are integrated, like the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described first embodiment. It is not necessarily required to be unitized, and they may be separate units, or some of them (for example, only the second starting port 440 and the ordinary electric accessory 460 may be unitized).

  Instead of the blade member 4620 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described first embodiment, the ordinary electric accessory 460 is capable of moving forward and backward with respect to the transparent panel 172 so that the game ball to the second starting port 440 is formed. Is provided with a movable shutter 4650 that can change the ease of winning a prize, or change the mode in which a prize of a game ball to the second starting port 440 is not possible or possible. Further, the ordinary electric accessory 460 includes a starting port solenoid (not shown) and a power transmission mechanism (not shown) for transmitting the power of the starting port solenoid to the movable shutter 4650.

  In addition, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described first embodiment, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 is performed by left-handing, and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is in principle. It is done by right-hand.

(Hit judgment table)
FIG. 255 is an example of the hit random number determination table stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the first example, as shown in FIG. 255, unlike the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described first embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines when a gaming ball has won the first starting port 5442. The result of the jackpot determination using the random number value for jackpot determination acquired in step (1) is not determined as "small hit" but is determined as "big hit" or "losing" (see FIG. 255 (a)). In addition, in the big hit determination using the big hit determination random number acquired when the game ball has won the second starting port 440, the main CPU 101 determines the result of the big hit determination as “big hit”, “small hit”, and “ Loss ”(see FIG. 255 (b)).

  More specifically, in the big hit determination using the big hit determination random number obtained when the game ball has won the first starting port 5442, the main CPU 101 subtracts the big hit determination value data number from the obtained big hit determination random value. If a digit borrow (becomes negative) occurs, it is determined to be a "big hit", and if a digit borrow does not occur, it is determined to be a loss. In addition, in the big hit determination using the big hit determination random number value obtained when the game ball has won the second starting port 440, the main CPU 101 first determines the big hit determination value data number from the obtained big hit determination random number value. If a borrow occurs, it is determined to be a "big hit". If no borrow occurs, the number of small hit determination value data is subtracted. If a borrow occurs, it is determined to be a "small hit". If no borrowing occurs, it is determined that a loss has occurred. For example, in the high-probability gaming state (probable change flag ON), when the random number for jackpot determination acquired when the gaming ball has won the second starting port 440 is 13200, "13200 (acquired random number for jackpot determination) -1311" (Number of jackpot determination value data) = 11889 ≠ digit borrowing ”, the result of the jackpot determination is not determined to be“ big hit ”, but“ 11889 (difference between the acquired random number for jackpot determination and the number of jackpot determination value data) -13107 (number of small hit determination value data) = -1218 = digit borrowing ", and the result of the big hit determination is determined to be" small hit ". When the result of the jackpot determination is not determined to be “big hit”, the acquired random number for the jackpot determination is used without using the difference between the obtained random number value for the jackpot determination and the number of the jackpot determination value data (11889 described above). Using the numerical value (13200 in the above example), “13200 (acquired random number for jackpot determination) −14418 (sum of the number of jackpot determination value data and the number of small jackpot determination value data) = − 1218 = digit borrowing” The result of the determination may be determined to be “small hit”.

  In FIGS. 255 (a) and (b), the value of the jackpot determination data is 0-204 when the probability change flag is 0 and 0-1310 when the probability change flag is 1. In particular, in FIG. According to the value, the value of the small hit determination value data is 205-13311 and 1311-14417, and the data number does not change, but the data value fluctuates. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As another example of holding data, the small hit determination data is set to 0-13106 regardless of the value of the probability change flag. In this case, by setting 13107-14417, the random number value of the small hit does not change depending on the state, and the type of constant data in the program can be reduced.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the small hit is determined in the big hit determination by the main CPU 101 using the random number for big hit determination obtained when the gaming ball has won the first starting port 5442. It does not happen (the probability of being judged as "small hit" is 0%), but it is not always necessary to set the probability of being judged as "small hit" to 0%. For example, in the big hit determination using the random number value for the big hit determination acquired when the game ball has won the first starting port 5442, the main CPU 101 determines that the probability is extremely low as compared with the second special lottery (for example, in the normal game state). If it is a probability that the number of payouts cannot be increased in the game), it may be determined to be "small hit".

(Symbol judgment table)
FIG. 256 is an example of a symbol determination table (first starting port, second starting port) stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. First, regarding the symbol determination table (first starting port), FIG. 256 is significantly different from FIG. 12 in that the determination value data does not include “small hit determination value data” and “big hit determination value data” is obtained. That is, the number of the hit selection symbol commands selected in the case of being set is large. Regarding the symbol determination table (second starting port), FIG. 256 is significantly different from FIG. 12 in that the determination value data includes “small hit determination value data” and “big hit determination value data”. That is, the number of the hit selection symbol commands selected in the case of being set is large.

(Big hit type determination table)
FIG. 257 is an example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. The big hit type determination table is the same as in FIG. 13, and the main CPU 101 determines the number of rounds to be executed in the big hit game, the big hit game ends and the big game state from the big hit game state in accordance with the big hit hit symbol design command. (A gaming state other than the jackpot gaming state, the same applies hereinafter.) In the gaming state after the transition to the gaming state, refer to to determine the type of the jackpot such as whether to turn on the probability change flag and whether to turn on the time saving flag. It is a table. FIG. 257 is significantly different from FIG. 13 in that even if the main CPU 101 sets the probable change flag to “1”, the number of time savings is not necessarily determined to be “100”, but is 24, 30, and 36 times. , 42 times, 48 times, or 100 times, and the number of times saved is set to “100” even when the probability variable flag is set to “0”. There is a point.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment, including the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when both the probable change flag and the time saving flag are set to “1”, the main CPU 101 switches from the big hit gaming state. The game state after the transition to the general game state is controlled to the “probable change time-short game state” that is the high-probability game state and the time-short game state. In this case, the high-probability gaming state is determined by the main CPU 101 using the random number for the jackpot determination acquired when the game ball has won the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440 until the next big hit is won. The game continues until the "big hit" is determined in the big hit determination), but the time-saving game state ends when the determined predetermined number of time-saving games is consumed. For this reason, if the game has shifted from the jackpot game state to the high-accuracy time-saving game state and has not been won in the next big hit until the specified number of time-saving games has been consumed, the main CPU 101 has completed the specified number of time-saving games. The later gaming state is controlled to a “high-accuracy non-hours-saving gaming state” that is a high-probability gaming state and a non-hours-saving gaming state. In this specification, the low-probability game state and the time-short game state are referred to as a “low-probability time-short game state”. In addition, the “time saving game” is a variable display of a special symbol, and the number of times reduced is reduced regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. .

(Variation time of special symbols)
Next, with reference to FIG. 258 and FIG. 259, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol performed in the first special symbol display section 73 or the second special symbol display section 74 (both refer to FIG. 8). I will explain. The variation time of the special symbol is not described in detail in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described first embodiment, but is an important matter in the pachinko gaming machine of the first example.

  FIG. 258 is a table stored in the main ROM 102 in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, and is an example of a variable time (variable display time) determination table for a special symbol for a low start. FIG. 259 is a table stored in the main ROM 102 in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, and is an example of a variable time (variable display time) determination table for a special symbol for a high start. The expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol per unit time is higher for the special symbol for the high start than when determining the variable time of the special symbol by referring to the variable time determination table for the special symbol for the low start. Is larger when the variation time of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation time determination table.

  In the “normal game state”, the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation time of the special symbol with reference to the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 258 (hereinafter, “determining the fluctuation time”). "). In the “high-accuracy time-saving game state”, “high-accuracy non-time-saving game state”, or “low-accuracy time-short gaming state”, the special symbol change time determination table for high start shown in FIG. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined.

  The "N-th time" shown in the column of the number of times of change of the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 259 has shifted from the jackpot game state to the "high accuracy time reduction game state" or the "low accuracy time reduction game state". Sometimes, a special symbol that may be the last in the “high accuracy time reduction game state” or the “low accuracy time reduction game state” is a variable display. In other words, it is a fluctuation display of the special symbol of the number of times reduced which may be determined. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment, as described above, the number of times saved is determined to be any of 24, 30, 36, 42, 48, and 100 times. The variable display of the symbol, the variable display of the 30th special symbol, the variable display of the 36th special symbol, the variable display of the 42nd special symbol, the variable display of the 48th special symbol, and the variable display of the 100th special symbol , N-th special symbol change display. Then, the variable display of the special symbol other than the N-th time is “other than the N-th time”.

  When determining the variation time of the first special symbol and / or the second special symbol, the main CPU 101 transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation time to the sub CPU 201, and also determines a variation corresponding to the determined variation time. The first special symbol and / or the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner over time, and the first special symbol and / or the second special symbol in the variable display are displayed based on the symbol designating command determined with reference to FIG. The control for stopping is executed. Thereby, a jackpot determination (hereinafter, referred to as “first special lottery”) performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 or / and based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440. The result of the jackpot determination (hereinafter, referred to as “second special lottery”) performed is derived. The control for changing and displaying the first special symbol and / or the second special symbol by the main CPU 101 corresponds to the process of step S85 (see FIG. 122) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment.

  In this specification, the one in which the result of the special lottery is displayed on the first special symbol display portion 73 or the second special symbol display portion 74 by the main CPU 101 is referred to as “derivation”, and the sub CPU 201 transmits the result to the liquid crystal display device 16, for example. What shows the result of the special lottery is called "display".

  The sub CPU 201 that has received the variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 101 determines whether the received variation pattern command is the variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the variation pattern command of the second special symbol. Then, when the game state at the start of the change of the special symbol (when the change pattern command is received) is the “normal game state”, the sub CPU 201 determines that the received change pattern command is the change pattern command of the first special symbol. If so, the effect content determined based on the received fluctuation pattern command is controlled via the display control circuit 204 so as to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and the received fluctuation pattern command is used as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol. If it is a command, the control (control for displaying the effect contents determined based on the received fluctuation pattern command on the liquid crystal display device 16) is not executed. When the game state at the start of the change of the special symbol (when the change pattern command is received) is “high-precision time-saving game state”, “high-precision non-time-saving game state” or “low-probability time-saving game state”, If the received variation pattern command is the variation pattern command of the second special symbol, the CPU 201 causes the display control circuit 204 to display the effect content determined based on the received variation pattern command on the liquid crystal display device 16. If the received variation pattern command is the variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the control (control of displaying the effect content determined based on the received variation pattern command on the liquid crystal display device 16) is performed. Do not execute.

  The “normal game state” and the “high-precision time-saving game state” have been described in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described first embodiment, but here, the “normal game state” and the “high-precision The “time saving game state”, the “highly accurate non-time saving game state”, and the “lowly accurate time reduction game state” will be described. In the “normal game state”, the probability that the special combination is changed and the “big hit” symbol combination is derived (the probability of the special lottery result being “big hit”) is relatively low, and It is a game state without support. In the “high-precision time-saving gaming state”, the probability that a special symbol is varied and the “big hit” symbol combination is derived (the probability of the special lottery result being “big hit”) is relatively high, and the It is a game state that becomes a state. The “high-accuracy non-time saving gaming state” is a gaming state in which a special symbol is fluctuated and a symbol combination of “big hit” is relatively derived, and there is no electric support. The “low-probability time-saving gaming state” is a gaming state in which the special symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner and the probability of deriving the “big hit” symbol combination is relatively low, but the power support state is established. In the “high-precision time-saving gaming state” and the “low-precision time-saving gaming state” which are in the power support state, the main CPU 101 sends a command from the command output port 106 to the hall computer via the external terminal board 320 (both refer to FIG. 9). , And outputs a command during the working hours as an external output signal. Thereby, the hall computer can manage whether or not each pachinko gaming machine 1 is during the time reduction (during electric support). Also, for example, a data display connected directly or indirectly to the pachinko gaming machine is arranged above the pachinko gaming machine, and this data display also indicates that it is working for a short time. Is possible.

  The first item, which is a characteristic of the change time of the special symbol in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, is the first special symbol when the game state at the start of the change of the special symbol is the “normal game state”. The point that the average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is much longer than the average time of the fluctuation time. In addition, when the game state at the start of the change of the special symbol is “high-accuracy time-short game state”, “high-accuracy non-time-short game state” or “low-accuracy time-short game state”, the average of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol The point that the average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is much shorter than the time. Such a characteristic point is derived particularly by the fluctuation time when the result of the second special lottery is “small hit” or “loss”.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 258, the result of the second special lottery is "small hit" or "losing" in the "normal gaming state" in which both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are off. At this time, the main CPU 101 performs the fluctuation display (long fluctuation A, long fluctuation B or long fluctuation C) of the second special symbol for an extremely long time, such as 580000 msec to 600000 msec.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, in the “normal gaming state”, as a variation display pattern of the second special symbol when the result of the second special lottery is “small hit” or “loss” Although only three patterns of the long fluctuation A to the long fluctuation C having different fluctuation times are prepared, it can be said from the viewpoint of preventing an action of firing the game ball by right-handing only at the timing when the small hit winning opening 5400 is in an open mode. For example, it is preferable to prepare more patterns (for example, 10 patterns) in the range of, for example, 500,000 msec to 600,000 msec.

  On the other hand, the game state at the start of the change of the special symbol is a "high-probability non-time-saving game state" with the probability variable flag ON and the time-saving flag OFF, a "high-probability time-saving game state" with the probability variable flag ON and the time-saving flag ON, or a probability variation flag. When the result of the second special lottery is “small hit” or “losing” in the “low probability time saving game state” in which the OFF and the time saving flag are ON, under a certain condition, the main CPU 101 sets the time to 1000 msec. The fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed for a very short time (super-speed fluctuation).

  The “normal game state”, the “high-accuracy non-time-saving game state”, the “high-accuracy time-short game state”, and the “low-accuracy time-short game state” are all general game states.

  The second item that is characteristic of the special symbol fluctuation time in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment is that the special symbol fluctuation determination is determined with reference to the high start special symbol fluctuation time table. As shown in FIG. 259, in the highly accurate non-time saving game state, the "highly accurate time reduction game state", or the "lowly accurate time reduction game state", as shown in FIG. Normal reach for high start, super reach A for high start, and super reach B for high start are performed. Such a reach effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 by the sub CPU 201 that has received the command transmitted from the main CPU 101, using a variable display of a plurality of identification symbols.

(Change display control of the first special symbol and the second special symbol)
By the way, as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when both the starting memory for the first special symbol and the starting memory for the second special symbol are suspended, which starting memory is first. Irrespective of whether the second special symbol is held or not, priority is given to the release of the holding of the start memory for the second special symbol (establishment of the start condition of the second special symbol), and the change of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display unit 73. Display is performed (while the variable display of the second special symbol is being performed, the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed), but this point is significantly different in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the start condition of the first special symbol is that the start memory of the first special symbol is suspended even if the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. The condition is satisfied on the condition that the special symbol change display is not performed, and that the game is in the general game state (a game state that is neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state). In addition, the start condition of the second special symbol is that even if the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the start memory of the second special symbol is held and the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. And a normal gaming state (a gaming state that is neither the big hitting gaming state nor the small hitting gaming state). Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment, even if the main CPU 101 performs the fluctuation display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the main CPU 101 starts the other special symbol. When the condition is satisfied, the variable display of the other special symbol is started. In this case, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel.

  As described above, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel, the main CPU 101 sets the symbol combination in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol indicate the big hit symbol. The processing is performed so as not to stop by.

  More specifically, the main CPU 101 performs the change display of the first special symbol and the change display of the second special symbol, and when one of the special symbols is stopped at the symbol combination indicating the big hit symbol, Is controlled to forcibly stop the special symbol with a symbol combination indicating a loss regardless of the result of the special lottery. When one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the big hit symbol, the game shifts from the general game state to the big hit game state as described above. Neither of the conditions is satisfied, and the main CPU 101 does not newly perform any of the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol.

  In addition, the main CPU 101, when performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, when one of the special symbols is stopped in the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol, the general game Based on the transition from the state to the small hitting game state (stopping at the symbol combination indicating the small hitting symbol), the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is interrupted, and the transition from the small hitting gaming state to the general gaming state ( Based on the small hit game, the processing of restarting the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is performed. When one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol, the game shifts from the general game state to the small hit game state as described above. In this small hit game state, the starting condition of the first special symbol and the second special symbol Neither of the symbol starting conditions is satisfied, and the main CPU 101 does not newly perform any of the first special symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display. However, when performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols is stopped at the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol, the main CPU 101 displays the variable display. Of the other special symbol, the LED group 73a or the LED group 74a (see FIG. 8) is displayed in a fluctuating manner in the same manner as during the fluctuating display, but the timing of the fluctuating time is interrupted as described above.

  The small hitting game state includes a standby period (opening interval period) until the execution of the small hitting game, an execution period of the small hitting game of less than 1800 msec, and a waiting period after the small hitting game is executed. (Ending Interval Period) and a game state of about 5000 msec.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the main CPU 101 performs a change display of the first special symbol and a change display of the second special symbol, and one of the special symbols indicates a big hit symbol. When stopping in a combination, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped in a symbol combination indicating a loss, and when one special symbol is stopped in a symbol combination indicating a small hit symbol, the other special symbol is controlled. Of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is restarted based on the transition from the small hitting game state to the general game state (end of the small hitting game). I can't. For example, when both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed, if one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the big hit symbol, the variation time of the other special symbol is changed. Is interrupted, and based on the transition from the big hit game state to the general game state (the end of the big hit game), a process of restarting the time measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is performed, and one special symbol performs the small hit symbol When stopping at the symbol combination shown, control for forcibly stopping the other special symbol at the symbol combination showing the loss may be performed. Also, when performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, one of the special symbols is stopped at either the symbol combination indicating the big hit symbol or at the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol. Even if it does, the timing of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is interrupted, and the timing of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is restarted based on the transition from the big hit game state or the small hit game state to the general game state. Processing may be performed. Furthermore, when performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, one of the special symbols is either a symbol combination indicating a big hit symbol or a symbol combination indicating a small hit symbol. Even in the case of stopping, control for forcibly stopping the other special symbol with a symbol combination indicating a loss may be performed.

  In addition, the main CPU 101 determines that the result of one of the first special lottery and the second special lottery is “big hit” and that the special symbol based on the “big hit” is being displayed while the other special lottery is being changed. Even if the special symbol starting condition is satisfied, the other special lottery is executed as a non-winning process that does not result in a "big hit". This non-winning processing is performed even if the random number value for jackpot determination is obtained based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440, the big hit determination value in the hit random number determination table (see FIG. 255). Since the data is excluded (replaced by the loss determination value data) and the determination is performed, the result of the other special lottery is “small hit” or “loss”. For example, in the high-probability gaming state, if the random number for jackpot determination obtained based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is “650”, according to the hit random number determination table (see FIG. 255) However, if it is originally a "big hit", it is determined as "losing". However, the non-winning process is not limited to such a mode, and the result of the jackpot determination using the random number value for jackpot determination acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440 may be determined. Even if it is a "big hit", the process of clearing the "big hit" and making it "losing" may be performed.

  Further, as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is given priority over the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special lottery and the second special lottery are performed. Both will not win at the same time. For example, as shown in the special symbol storage check process in FIG. 124, when the main CPU 101 performs a special lottery based on winning in the second startup port 440, the first startup port 5442 in the same interrupt processing. This is because no special lottery based on winning the prize is performed.

  However, when the fluctuating display of the first special symbol and the fluctuating display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel as in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state to the “normal gaming state”. , "High-precision time-saving gaming state", "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" and "low-probability time-saving gaming state", both of the first special symbol starting condition and the second special symbol starting condition Holds, both the second special lottery and the first special lottery are performed in this order within the same interrupt processing. As described above, regardless of the game state, the control load of the main CPU 101 can be reduced by enabling both the second special lottery and the first special lottery to be performed in a predetermined order within the same interrupt processing. It is possible to perform the change display of the first special symbol and the change display of the second special symbol in parallel while reducing the amount of light.

  By the way, since it is rare that both the start condition of the first special symbol and the start condition of the second special symbol are satisfied at the same time, the first special lottery and the second special lottery are usually performed within the same interrupt processing. Only one of them (special lottery in which the starting condition is satisfied) is performed by the main CPU 101. In addition, when neither the start condition of the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is satisfied, the main CPU 101 does not perform any of the first special lottery and the second special lottery. However, for example, in the big hit game state, both of the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are stopped (that is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol). If the fluctuation time is not interrupted in any case), and if the start memory of the first special symbol and the start memory of the second special symbol are both held at the time when the big hit game state ends, the big hit game After the state ends, both the start condition of the first special symbol and the start condition of the second special symbol can be satisfied at the same time. Then, the result of both the first special lottery and the second special lottery performed in the same interrupt processing may be a “big hit” at the same time. In particular, when the jackpot game state ends and shifts to the “high-accuracy time-saving gaming state” or the “high-accuracy non-hour-saving gaming state”, the probability that the result of the first special lottery and the second special lottery will be “big hit” Is relatively high, the result of both the first special lottery and the second special lottery performed in the same interrupt process may be a “big hit” at the same time. Although the possibility of establishment is extremely rarer than in the above example, for example, there is no suspension in both the start memory of the first special symbol and the start memory of the second special symbol, and the first start port 5442 and the second start port 440 are not held. At the same time when the game ball enters, or after both the starting memory of the first special symbol and the starting memory of the second special symbol are on hold and after the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously derived. Also, the result of both the first special lottery and the second special lottery performed in the same interrupt processing may be a "big hit" at the same time.

  Therefore, when both the start condition of the first special symbol and the start condition of the second special symbol are simultaneously satisfied, the main CPU 101 first performs the second special lottery regardless of the gaming state as described above, Thereafter, processing is performed so as to perform the first special lottery. If the result of the second special lottery is “big hit”, a big hit flag is set, and in the first special lottery performed thereafter, the big hit flag is set. It is determined whether or not there is. At this time, if the big hit flag is set, the main CPU 101 executes the first special lottery as the above-described non-winning process so that the result of the first special lottery does not become “big hit”, thereby executing the same interrupt processing. The result of both the first special lottery and the second special lottery performed in the game is prevented from being a "big hit" at the same time. However, instead of this, when the result of the second special lottery performed earlier in the same interrupt processing is “big hit” and the big hit flag is set, the first special lottery itself is not executed, If the flag is not set, the first special lottery may be executed. However, when the result of the second special lottery performed earlier in the same interrupt processing is “small hit”, the other first special lottery is performed as usual, not in the non-winning processing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the "small hit" having a relatively low profit degree from canceling the "big hit" having a relatively high profit degree.

  In this way, even if the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are a symbol combination indicating a big hit symbol. Stopping does not occur.

  It should be noted that the result of both the first special lottery and the second special lottery performed in the same interrupt processing becomes a "big hit" at the same time, after the big hit gaming state ends, the "high-precision time-saving gaming state" or There is a relatively high possibility that this will occur when shifting to the “high-precision non-time saving game state”. Therefore, in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" or the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment in which a game is played mainly by winning the second starting port 440 rather than the first starting port 5442, It is preferable to perform the second special lottery and the first special lottery in this order within the same interrupt processing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special lottery and the second special lottery may be performed in this order within the same interrupt processing.

(Game flow)
In the "normal game state" in which both the probable change flag and the time saving flag are off, when the player operates the firing handle 32 and fires the game ball toward the game area 20 to win the first starting port 5442. As long as the reach effect (normal reach for low start, super reach A for low start, super reach B for low start) is not performed, a normal fluctuation (normal fluctuation A, normal fluctuation B) of 5000 msec or 10,000 msec is performed. On the other hand, in the “normal game state”, when a game ball that is fired toward the game area 20 by the player operating the firing handle 32 wins the second starting port 440, as described above, the second special lottery is performed. As long as the result is not "big hit", the fluctuation display (long fluctuation A, long fluctuation B or long fluctuation C) of the second special symbol is performed for an extremely long time, such as 580000 msec to 600000 msec (see FIG. 258). In the second special lottery, unlike the first special lottery, the "small hit" is won with a relatively high probability of about 1/5, but the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed over such an extremely long time. Therefore, in the “normal game state”, a general player plays a game with a left-handed game that can win the first starting port 5442 rather than a right-handed game ball that can be shot in the second starting port 440. Will do.

  In the “normal game state”, when a game ball fired toward the game area 20 wins the first starting port 5442, the main CPU 101 performs a first special lottery. In this first special lottery, a "big hit" is obtained with a probability of about 1/1319, and otherwise, "losing". If the result of the first special lottery is “big hit”, the main CPU 101 activates the condition device and activates the accessory continuous operation device. The condition device operates on condition that the result of the special lottery is “big hit”, and does not operate when the result of the special lottery is “small hit” or “loss”. The accessory continuous operation device is activated on condition that the condition device is activated. The main CPU 101 executes control for shifting from the general gaming state to the big hit gaming state based on the operation of the accessory continuous operating device.

  When shifting to the big hit game state, the main CPU 101 executes a big hit game that is advantageous to the player. As described in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the big hit game is a game in which a round game in which the special winning opening 540 is in an open mode is executed over a plurality of rounds. When the gaming ball wins in the large winning opening 540 in the open mode, as described in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the winning ball is paid out. As described above, the number of rounds of the round game executed in the big hit game is determined by the control of the main CPU 101 based on the big hit type determination table in FIG. 257 when the result of the special lottery is “big hit”. You.

  When the result of the first special lottery is “big hit”, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the big hit game has ended based on the big hit type (hit selection symbol command) determined with reference to FIGS. 256 and 257. Determine the gaming state. For example, when the hit selection symbol command is “z7”, when the execution of the big hit game ends, the main CPU 101 executes a control for shifting from the big hit game state to the “high-accuracy time-short game state”.

  In the “high accuracy non-time saving game state”, the “high accuracy time reduction game state”, and the “low accuracy time reduction game state”, when a game ball has won the second starting port 440, the main CPU 101 returns the result of the second special lottery. Unless it is a "big hit", a super-speed fluctuation of 1000 msec is performed. In the second special lottery, the player wins the "small hit" with a relatively high probability of about 1/5. For this reason, a general player may select the left in which the launched game ball can enter the first starting port 5442 in the “high-accuracy non-time saving game state”, the “high-accuracy short time gaming state”, and the “low-accuracy short time gaming state”. Rather than hitting, the game is played by right-handing that can win the second starting port 440.

  Here, for each of the normal gaming states “normal gaming state”, “high-accuracy time-saving gaming state”, “high-accuracy non-saving time-saving gaming state” and “low-accuracy time-saving gaming state”, a special symbol is provided for each gaming state. Expected value obtained by dividing the number of prize balls paid out while fluctuating by the number of game balls fired (the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of fired balls per unit time [(award per unit time) The expected value of the number of balls / (the number of fired balls per unit time)]) will be described. In addition, among the parameters affecting the “expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of launch balls per unit time”, the “number of launch balls per unit time” is 100 balls per minute. Another parameter, “expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of launch balls per unit time” will be described later.

  In the case of the above-described enclosed gaming machine, the game ball as a game medium is configured to be able to be played without being discharged to the outside. (Referred to as “prize ball data” in this specification). For example, when the number of winning balls is 15 in the winning opening, if the game machine is of an enclosed type, 15 is given as award ball data corresponding to 15 award balls.

  First, in the “normal game state”, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of fired balls is much higher than any of the “highly accurate time reduction game state”, the “highly accurate non-time reduction game state”, and the “lowly accurate time reduction game state”. It is obvious to those skilled in the art that the expected value of the number of awarded balls with respect to the number of launched balls per unit time is much lower than 1 without being explained.

  Next, in the “high-precision time-saving game state” and the “low-probability time-saving game state”, as described above, the power support state is established, and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is easier than in the “normal game state”. Be converted to Further, in the second special lottery executed at a high frequency based on the winning of the game in the second starting port 440, as described above, the "small hit" is won with a probability of about 1/5. For this reason, the main CPU 101 controls the small hitting prize port 5400 to be in the small hitting gaming state in which the small hit prize port 5400 is in an open state with extremely high frequency as compared with the “normal gaming state”. However, since all or most of the right-hitting game balls pass through the passage gate 49, the second starting port 440 is substantially open. Therefore, all or most of the right-hitting game balls will win the second starting port 440, and some of the game balls reaching the small hitting winning port 5400 arranged downstream of the second starting port 440 will be somewhat There are almost no spill spheres. Moreover, even if a game ball wins in the second starting port 440, one prize ball is obtained. Therefore, in the “high-accuracy time-short game state” and the “low-probability time-short game state”, the expected value of the number of awarded balls with respect to the number of launched balls does not exceed 1 (is less than 1) even if the player hits right. However, since the winning in the second starting port 440 is facilitated, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of fired balls does not fall significantly below 1, as in the “normal game state”.

  Next, in the “high-accuracy non-time saving game state”, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of fired balls can exceed 1. This is a) although it is not as high as the “high-accuracy time-short game state” or the “low-accuracy time-short game state”, the right-hit game ball is configured to relatively win the second starting port 440. B) Unless the result of the second special lottery is "big hit", the fluctuation display (variable display) of the second special symbol is performed at a super-high speed fluctuation of 1000 msec. C) In the second special lottery, Winning a "small hit" with a relatively high probability of 1/5. D) When a small hit game is executed, a game ball that did not win the second starting port 440 wins the small hit winning port 5400. And e) a relatively large number of prize balls (for example, 15 balls) to be paid out when a game ball wins the small hit prize port 5400.

  In this specification, the description will be made on the assumption that the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of fired balls per unit time exceeds 1 in the “high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state”. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is sufficient that the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of fired balls per time is the highest when controlled to the “highly accurate non-time saving game state” among the general game states.

  In the big hit gaming state, it is obvious to those skilled in the art that the expected value of the number of awarded balls with respect to the number of fired balls per unit time greatly exceeds 1 without being explained.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of launch balls per unit time in the general gaming state exceeds 1 when in the “highly accurate non-time saving gaming state”. In the “high-precision time-saving gaming state”, the expected value of the number of awarded balls with respect to the number of launched balls per unit time is set to be less than one. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As a “high-probability time-saving gaming state”, the probability that a special symbol is fluctuated and a “big hit” symbol combination is derived (the probability of the result of the special lottery being “big hit”) It is relatively high and is in the electricity support state, and the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of fired balls per unit time is less than 1, "the first highly accurate time-saving gaming state", and the special symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. The prize for the number of balls fired per unit time is obtained by making the probability of deriving the symbol combination of "big hit" relatively high and having no electric support, and making the fluctuation time of the second special symbol shorter than "normal game state". A “second highly accurate time-saving gaming state” in which the expected value of the number of balls exceeds 1 may be provided. In this case, it is not necessary to provide the “high-precision non-time saving game state”.

  As described above, the main CPU 101 outputs the mid-hours signal to the hall computer as an external output signal as an external output signal. Must be changed from ON to OFF. Therefore, if the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of fired balls per unit time exceeds 1 when the signal is turned off during the working hours, the hall computer side indicates that the game is in the "normal gaming state". Regardless of whether the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of launch balls per unit time exceeds 1 (in this case, it is suspected to be fraudulent), or because the game is in the "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state", the launch balls per unit time It cannot be determined whether the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number exceeds one. However, when the "high-precision time-saving gaming state" and the "second high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" are provided as the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming states", 2, the main CPU 101 does not need to turn off the signal during the time reduction. Therefore, from the standpoint of the hall computer, even if the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of launch balls per unit time exceeds 1, if the signal during the time reduction is ON, the "second highly accurate time reduction game state" "Can be grasped. In addition, in the case where the "first high-accuracy time-short game state" and the "second high-accuracy time-short game state" are mixed and continuously generated, the signal during the time reduction is ON in all cases. The above-described data display device can also notify that a series of continuous channel states has occurred. As a result, it is possible to enhance the convenience of the data display device for the player as compared with the case of the “high-accuracy non-time saving game state”.

  Among the parameters that affect the “expected value of the number of prize balls per unit time”, the “expected value of the number of prize balls per unit time” is the unit for the winning opening where the prize balls are paid out. An important factor is the expected winning value per hour and the number of winning balls paid out when winning in the winning opening.

  The expected prize value per unit time to the winning opening from which a prize ball is paid out is 100 balls / min if the winning game balls that all of the launched game balls win are awarded. However, for example, as in the case of the small hit prize opening 5400, if the winning prize is a prize that can be awarded after the variable display of the special symbol, the time required for the variable display of the special symbol, the winning probability of the "small hit", and The time during which the small hit prize port 5400 is in the open mode (win mode) has an effect on the expected prize value per unit time.

  Note that in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the time required for the special symbol change display is as described above with reference to FIGS. 258 and 259, but the time in which the small hit winning opening 5400 is in the open mode is 1800 msec. (For example, 1700 msec).

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the player wins the winning opening is three balls in the first starting port 5442 (the same as the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment), The second starting port 440 has one ball (three balls in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment), and the small hit winning port 5400 has fifteen balls (the small hit winning port 5400 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment). (Not provided), and the number of general winning ports 53, 54, 55, 56 (for example, see FIG. 14) is 10 balls (the same as the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment).

  Returning to the flow of the game, in the "high-precision time-saving gaming state" after the big hit game is completed, if the time-saving game is digested without deriving a combination of special symbols indicating "big hit" (the determined time-saving When the number of special symbols is fluctuated, the main CPU 101 executes control to shift from the “high-accuracy non-hours game state” to the “high-accuracy non-hours game state”. For example, when the hit selection symbol command is “z7”, the number of times saved is 30 times. Therefore, when the 30 times saved game is exhausted, the main CPU 101 executes control to shift to the “highly accurate time saved game state”. I do.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 257, the number of time savings can be any one of a plurality of time savings such as 24, 30, 36, 42, 48, and 100 under the control of the main CPU 101. It is determined. However, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the determined number of times saved can be kept secret without being disclosed by any of the main CPU 101 and the sub CPU 201 until the number of times saved in the time reduction game is consumed. . Therefore, the player can change the expected value of the number of prize balls to the number of shot balls from the “highly accurate time-saving game state” where the expected value of the number of launched balls exceeds 1 to the “highly accurate non-time-saving game state”. It is difficult to grasp at which timing the transition control is performed by the main CPU 101 until the transition to the “high-precision non-time saving gaming state”. In addition, the example in which the transition from the “high-accuracy time-saving gaming state” to the “high-accuracy non-hour-saving gaming state” has been described, but the “first highly accurate time-saving gaming state” and the “second highly accurate time-saving gaming state” are described above. Is applied, and the number of times the power saving is executed may be replaced with the number of times of saving time described above. In this case, the same effect as the above-described effect can be obtained without changing to the time saving state even when the electric support is completed.

  As described above, when the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is the “high-precision time-saving gaming state”, from the player's point of view, the shorter the number of time-saving times determined is, The transition to the "time reduction game state" enhances the interest.

  By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 257, the result of the first special lottery is “big hit”, and the hit selection symbol command is one of “z0” to “z11”. In any case, the main CPU 101 controls the game state after the big hit game is ended to a “high-precision time-short game state” or a “low-precision time-short game state”.

  In the "high-accuracy time-saving game state", "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state" or "low-accuracy time-short gaming state", when the change display of the first special symbol is performed to derive the combination of the big hit symbols (that is, the first special symbol) When the result of the special lottery is “big hit”), as shown in FIG. 259, the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation time to be any one of “05H” to “07H” based on the symbol determination random value. I do. Similarly, in the "high-accuracy time-short game state", "high-accuracy non-short-time game state" or "low-accuracy time-short game state", when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed to derive a combination of big hit symbols ( That is, when the result of the second special lottery is “big hit”, as shown in FIG. 259, the main CPU 101 sets the fluctuation time to any one of “16H” to “18H” based on the symbol determination random value. Is determined. The main CPU 101 transmits a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation time determined in this way to the sub CPU 201. Upon receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 101, the sub CPU 201 generates a reach effect (normal reach for high start, super reach A for high start, or super reach B for high start) based on the received variation pattern command. Control is performed so as to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

  In addition, in the above-mentioned "high-accuracy time-short game state", "high-accuracy time-short game state" or "low-accuracy time-short game state", a special symbol is fluctuated and a combination of a big hit symbol is not derived, and a small hit symbol is obtained. Even if the combination of the symbols or the lost symbol is derived (that is, the result of the special lottery is “small hit” or “losing”), if the number of times the special symbol has changed is N times, When the special symbol variation display is performed, the sub CPU 201 controls the liquid crystal display device 16 to display the same reach effect as the reach effect performed when the result of the special lottery is “big hit”, After performing the reach effect, an image indicating “small hit” or “loss” is displayed. However, as described above, the “N-th” shown in the column of the number of times of the change of the special symbol in FIG. 259 is the display of the change of the special symbol of the number of the time saving times that may be determined. In the “high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state”, the column “other than the Nth time” is always referred to.

  As described above, when the gaming state after the big hit game is completed is “high-precision short-time gaming state” or “low-precision short-time gaming state”, during the N-th special symbol change display, the sub CPU 201 causes the liquid crystal display device 16 to display the special symbol. After the reach effect is displayed, if the image showing the big hit is displayed, the game shifts to the big hit game state, and even if the image showing the big hit is not displayed, there is a possibility that the game will shift to the "highly accurate non-time saving game state" It is possible to perform a so-called stir effect. Regarding the reach performance at the Nth time, even if the hit is a loss, for example, the confrontation reach where the ally character and the enemy character confront each other is executed, and the current game state is the “low-probability time reduction game state”. In the end, a performance to lose is executed, and if the current gaming state is the “high-precision time-saving gaming state”, an effect to finally win is executed, and the game state to be started to the player is “ It is desirable to notify whether the game state is the "normal game state" or the "high-accuracy non-time saving game state". The “high-accuracy non-time saving gaming state” in the present case is the most advantageous gaming state (the most advantageous gaming state among general gaming states) in which a player can play a game up to the next big hit while increasing the number of game media. Since the big hit is guaranteed, an effect equivalent to the effect at the time of another big hit may be executed. Even if the jackpot has not been won, even if an effect such as being won is executed, the degree of advantage is higher than a mere jackpot, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. It goes without saying that it is also possible to use a special production that is different from the jackpot production. Furthermore, in the fluctuation time determination table, the fluctuation pattern may be different between the last N-th time and the N-th time other than the last. For example, at the N-th time other than the last (for example, the 24th time when 48 times have been determined), whether the current game state is the “low-precision time-short game state” or the “high-precision time-short game state” Since it is determined that the game state will be continued, a variation pattern for displaying “drawing” as a result of the effect is selected, and in the last N times (for example, the 48th time when 48 times are determined). Is displayed because the final effect is different depending on whether the current game state is the "low-probability game mode" or the "high-probability game mode" ("win" or "defeat"). May be selected.

  Normally, the execution of the reach effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is determined by lottery, and there is no guarantee that the reach effect is always executed in the “high-accuracy time-short game state” or the “low-accuracy time-short game state”. However, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, in the variation display of the Nth special symbol in the “high accuracy time reduction game state” or the “low accuracy time reduction game state” after the big hit game is completed, the sub CPU 201 In addition, since the reach effect is always controlled to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, when a reach effect is executed in the "high-probability time-saving game state" or the "low-probability time-saving game state", the reach effect may be performed based on the result of the special lottery being "big hit". And a function to indicate that the special symbol may be the last in the “high-accuracy time-saving gaming state” or the “low-accuracy time-saving gaming state”. Thus, the interest of the game can be increased.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 257, when the hit selection symbol command is any one of “z0” to “z5” and “z12”, the main CPU 101 When the big hit game ends, the control is performed to shift from the big hit game state to the “low-probability time-short game state”. Therefore, in addition to the number of time savings, at least the sub CPU 201 does not disclose whether the game state after the big hit game is ended is controlled to one of the “high accuracy time saving game state” and the “low accuracy time saving game state”. (For example, it cannot be grasped from the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16), so that the transition destination after the time-saving game is consumed is the “high-precision non-time-saving game state” or the “normal It is also difficult for the player to know whether the game state is "game state". If the transition destination when the time-saving game is consumed is "high-precision non-time-saving gaming state", it is preferable for the player to reduce the number of time-saving games, but the transition destination when the time-saving game is consumed is "normal game". In the “state”, it is preferable for the player that the number of times saved is large. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an unprecedented interest by making it difficult to grasp not only the number of times reduced but also the destination of the game state after the end of the big hit game.

  In addition, as a result of the first special lottery, the main CPU 101 can execute a jackpot game (hereinafter, referred to as “2R jackpot game” in this paragraph) in a manner that is difficult for the player to grasp. , The sub CPU 201 may execute a specific effect indicating that the 2R jackpot game has been won. In this case, when the number of times the special symbol changes is the Nth time, when the Nth special symbol change display is being performed, the sub CPU 201 is performed when the result of the special lottery is a 2R big hit game. Control is performed so that an effect that is the same as the specific effect or that is difficult to grasp in appearance is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and after performing the effect, an image indicating "small hit" or "losing" is displayed. You may.

  By the way, in the “high-accuracy time-short game state” and the “low-accuracy time-short game state”, as described above, despite the extremely high frequency of the small hit winning opening 5400 being in the open mode, the right-hit game ball Since all or most of the prizes enter the second starting port 440 (the number of prize balls when the second starting port 440 is won is one ball), it is almost impossible for a right-hit game ball to enter the small hitting winning port 5400. There will be none. However, when controlled to the small hitting game state, it takes about 5000 msec for the opening interval period, the execution period of the small hitting game, and the ending interval period. In other words, in the "high accuracy time reduction game state" and the "low accuracy time reduction game state", the game is controlled to the small hitting game state with a high frequency even though the prize of the game ball can hardly be expected. Can be uncomfortable for others.

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, when the small hitting gaming state is controlled in the “high accuracy time saving gaming state” and the “low accuracy time saving gaming state”, the small hitting gaming state is changed to the small hitting gaming state. In order to reduce the player's awareness of being controlled, a ceiling suggestion effect indicating the remaining number of hours reduced is executed. This ceiling suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 260 is an example of a flowchart showing the small hit winning effect production process executed by the sub CPU 201 in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. As described in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the sub CPU 201 executes an effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 130). As described in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the effect mode determination process includes a scenario pre-setting process (see FIG. 138) and an effect determination process (see FIGS. 142, 144, 147, and 149). , Look-ahead effect selection process (see FIG. 153), background change control process (see FIG. 157), background change continuation possible number determination process (see FIG. 158), change scenario determination process (see FIG. 161), chance up control process (see FIG. 161). 162), a hold change determination process (see FIG. 163), a character ramp effect control process (see FIG. 165), a full screen effect control process (see FIG. 166), and the like. In the gaming machine, the small hit winning effect production process also constitutes the above subroutine process.

  Referring to FIG. 260, when the result of the special lottery is “small hit”, sub CPU 201 determines the current game state, and when the current game state is “normal game state” (YES in step S1001) ), The effect indicating that the result of the special lottery is "small hit" is not particularly performed, and the effect process at the time of the small hit winning is ended. When the current gaming state is the “high-accuracy non-time saving gaming state” (YES in step S1002), a small hit winning effect indicating that the result of the special lottery is “small hit” is executed (step S1003). Above, the small hit winning effect processing ends. Also, when the current gaming state is not any of the "normal gaming state" or the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", that is, when the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" or the "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state" It is determined whether or not the special symbol change display performed based on the "hit" is the N-th special symbol change display described above (step S1004). In the “high-probability time-saving game state” and the “low-probability time-saving game state”, when the number of times of the change of the special symbol is other than the Nth (NO in step S1004), the sub CPU 201 performs a ceiling suggestion effect (step S1005). This ceiling suggestion effect is an effect indicating the remaining number of working hours. On the other hand, when the number of times the special symbol has changed is N times in the “high accuracy time reduction game state” and the “low accuracy time reduction game state” (YES in step S1004), the sub CPU 201 performs a ceiling suggestion effect (step S1005). Instead, the small hit winning effect processing ends. By the way, when the number of times of the change of the special symbol is other than the N-th in the “high accuracy time reduction game state” and the “low accuracy time reduction game state”, the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation time to be “19H” and responds to this. The variation pattern command “83H19H” is transmitted to the sub CPU 201, and the variation display of the second special symbol is performed for 1000 msec, and it is derived that the result of the second special lottery is “small hit”. Therefore, the sub CPU 201, which has received the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 101, executes the above-mentioned ceiling suggestion effect after displaying an effect of an ultra-high speed fluctuation of 1000 msec on the liquid crystal display device 16. That is, the sub CPU 201 executes the above ceiling suggestion effect during the small hit game state of 5000 msec.

  This makes it possible to reduce the discomfort that can be given to the player each time the small hitting game state in which the winning of the game ball can hardly be expected is controlled.

  In addition, in the “high-accuracy time-saving game state” and the “low-accuracy time-saving game state”, when the number of times of the special symbol change is N times, when the N-th special symbol change display ends, the “high-accuracy non-time-saving game” State ". Then, the fluctuation display of the Nth special symbol is performed, and when it is derived that the result of the special lottery is "small hit", the small hit game is performed under the "high accuracy non-time saving game state". May be performed. Also, when the N-th special symbol change display is finished, even if the game does not shift to the “high-precision non-time saving game state”, the N-th special symbol change display is performed. Since the effect (normal reach for high start, super reach A for high start or super reach B for high start) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the player's awareness of being controlled to the small hitting game state is reduced. It is thought that. Therefore, in the “high-accuracy time-short game state” and the “low-accuracy time-short game state”, when the number of times of the change of the special symbol is the N-th, the ceiling suggestion effect indicating the remaining number of time savings is not executed. However, it is not always necessary to do so, regardless of whether the number of times the special symbol fluctuates in the “high-accuracy time-short game state” and the “low-accuracy time-short game state” is the Nth time, the remaining number of time savings is indicated. May be performed.

  The remaining number of time savings can be calculated from the difference between the number of time savings determined based on the hit selection symbol command (see FIG. 257) and the number of times of time saving games that have been consumed. The calculation may be performed by the main CPU 101 to transmit a command to the sub CPU 201, or may be performed by the sub CPU 201.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, even when being controlled to any of the "high-accuracy time-short gaming state" and the "low-accuracy time-short gaming state", when controlled to the small hitting gaming state, In this small hitting game state, a ceiling suggestion effect indicating the remaining number of time savings is executed, but is not limited to this, and any one of the "high accuracy time saving game state" and the "low accuracy time saving game state" It may be executed only in.

  Further, the effect indicating the remaining number of time savings may be a confirmed effect for determining the number of remaining time savings, or, for example, “the possibility that the remaining number of time savings is 10 is 80%”. The effect may indicate the possibility.

  By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, since the probability of winning the "small hit" in the second special lottery is about one-fifth, the "high accuracy time reduction gaming state" and / or the "low accuracy time reduction game" In the “state”, if an effect indicating the number of remaining hours is performed every time the small hitting game state is controlled, the player may feel annoyed.

  Therefore, when controlled to the small hitting game state, the main CPU 101 or the sub CPU 201 performs an effect lottery in which, for example, one third is won. The processing may be performed by the sub CPU 201. In addition, if the number of times saved is reduced in the "low-probability time-saving game state", the game shifts to the disadvantageous "normal game state", so the ceiling is suggested in the "high-probability time-saving game state" and the "low-probability time-saving game state". The execution probability of the effect may be changed. For example, the ceiling suggestion effect is executed in 1/5 of the small hit game execution state in the "high accuracy time saving game state" and 1/20 of the small hit game execution in the "low accuracy time reduction game state". In that case, the probability that the ceiling suggestion effect occurs in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" is four times that of the "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state". If the transition ratio is, for example, 50% each, the expected degree of stay in the “highly accurate time-saving gaming state” when the ceiling suggestion effect occurs is 80%, and the ceiling suggestion effect occurs, and the number of hours saved is reduced. Regardless, the frequency of transition to the "normal game state" can be reduced, and it becomes possible to hope for a game with an interest in the occurrence of the ceiling suggestion effect. In addition, because it was not “Ceiling-indicated production occurrence =“ High-accuracy time-saving gaming state ”determined,” a big hit occurred during the “High-accuracy time-saving gaming state” without shifting to the “High-accuracy non-saving time gaming state”. An effect of not giving a sense of loss can also be obtained.

  In addition, the winning probability of the above-mentioned production lottery is changed in accordance with the number of times reduced (hereinafter, simply referred to as “number of times reduced” in this paragraph) determined based on the hit selection symbol command (see FIG. 257). You may do so. For example, if the number of time reductions is 24, the effect suggesting the number of remaining time reductions is performed with a probability of 1/5, and if the number of time reductions is 30, the effect is performed with a probability of 1/6. If it is 36 times, it is executed with a probability of 1/7, if the number of time savings is 42, it is executed with a probability of 1/8, and if the number of time savings is 48, it is executed with a probability of 1/9. Alternatively, if the number of time savings is 100, it may be executed with a probability of 1/10. In this way, by changing the execution frequency of the effect suggesting the remaining number of time reductions according to the number of time reductions, the reliability of the suggested number of remaining time reductions can be calculated from the execution frequency of the effect suggesting the number of remaining time reductions. It is possible to provide the player with fun such as guessing, and it is possible to further reduce the player's awareness of being controlled to the small hitting game state.

  In addition, when the time saving game of the number of time savings determined in the “high accuracy time saving game state” is consumed, if the game shifts to the “high accuracy non-time saving game state”, especially when the number of time savings is different each time, It is not known whether or not the game will be shifted to the first advantageous gaming state, and the player may become suspicious and may lose interest. Therefore, when controlling to the “high-accuracy time-saving gaming state”, the main CPU 101 transmits a command indicating the determined number of time savings to the sub-CPU 201, and the sub-CPU 201 having received this command sets the “high-accuracy time-saving gaming state”. It is preferable to display on the liquid crystal display device 16 the timing at which the game mode shifts to "high-precision non-saving time game state". The display of the timing of transition from the “high-accuracy time-saving gaming state” to the “high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state” may be such that the determined number of time savings may be displayed, but in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, The indication of the timing of transition from the “high-accuracy time-saving gaming state” to the “high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state” is displayed as an index. In other words, the number of times saved may be displayed as it is, but the number of times saved may be displayed instead of the number of times saved. In the following, with reference to FIG. 261, an index effect process that indicates a guideline for a transition from the “high-accuracy time-saving game state” to the “high-accuracy non-time-saving game state” will be described.

  FIG. 261 is an example of a flowchart of the index effect processing executed by the sub CPU 201.

  Referring to FIG. 261, the sub CPU 201 first determines whether or not the big hit game state has ended, that is, whether or not a big hit game state end command has been received from the main CPU 101 (step S2001). If it is determined that the big hit gaming state is not ended including the case where the big hit gaming state is not controlled (NO in step S2001), the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S2008 described later.

  If it is determined that the big hit game state has ended (YES in step S2001), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the transition destination game state is the “high-precision time-short game state”, that is, the main CPU 101 Is determined (step S2002).

  On the other hand, if the game state of the transition destination is not the “high-precision time-saving game state” (NO in step S2002), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the index flag is on (step S2015), and turns on the index flag. If so (YES in step S2015), the index flag is turned off (step S2016), and the index rendering process ends. If the index flag is not ON (NO in step S2015), the process of step S2016 is performed, and the index effect process ends.

  Note that the index flag is a flag that is turned on when a special symbol is fluctuated and “big hit” is derived. The reason why such an indicator flag is provided is that when the "big hit" is derived, the big hit game state is controlled, but when this big hit game state ends and is again controlled to the "high accuracy time saving game state". This is because the continuation is started from the index that was displayed when the “big hit” was derived in the previous “high-precision time-saving gaming state”, but a method of processing using such an index flag is used. Is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

  If the game state at the transition destination is the “high-accuracy time-saving game state” (YES in step S2002), sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a command indicating the number of time savings has been received (step S2003). Upon receiving the command indicating the number of times saved (YES in step S2003), sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the index flag is on (step S2004).

  If the index flag is ON (YES in step S2004), the index stored in the main RAM 103, that is, the index displayed when the "big hit" was derived in the previous "high-precision time-saving gaming state" is displayed. It is displayed (step S2005), and the index flag is turned off (step S2006). When the index flag is turned off, the process moves to step S2008.

  On the other hand, if the index flag is not on (NO in step S2004), an initial index is displayed (step S2007), and the process proceeds to step S2008. The initial index may indicate the determined number of time savings, but here, the number of times determined by lottery is displayed as a measure of the determined number of time savings, instead of the determined number of time savings itself. Note that the initial index may uniformly display a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) instead of the number of times determined by lottery.

  The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the specific condition is satisfied in step S2008 (step S2008). The specific condition may be, for example, a condition in which a player is given a mission (for example, a mission such as “generate reach twice within three minutes”), and the specific condition is satisfied when the mission is cleared. The specific condition may be satisfied when a predetermined number of game balls have won the general winning opening, or the condition may be arbitrarily determined.

  When determining that the specific condition is satisfied (YES in step S2008), sub CPU 201 subtracts a predetermined number from the current index and updates and displays the index (step S2009). Here, the number to be subtracted may be 1, or the number to be subtracted is changed according to the difficulty in satisfying the specific condition, for example, subtracting 3 when it is difficult to satisfy the specific condition. You may do so. After performing the processing in step S2009, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S2010. If the specific condition is not satisfied (NO in step S2008), the process also proceeds to step S2010. However, if the specific condition is not satisfied in step S2008, a process of adding an index may be performed. For example, the index may be added when the mission given to the player has not been achieved for the player.

  However, in the process of step S2009, it is necessary to change the form of the index in order to display the remaining time savings. For example, an index that is far from the remaining number of time savings, such as displaying 20 times even though the number of remaining time savings is 80, should not be displayed. Therefore, the sub CPU 201 controls so as to display a value close to the remaining number of time savings. Further, in the processing of step S2009, the sub CPU 201 controls the index to be 0 when the determined number of time saving games is consumed.

  The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special symbol is variably displayed in step S2010, that is, whether or not the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main CPU 101 is received (step S2010).

  When determining that the special symbol is variably displayed (YES in step S2010), the sub CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the current index and updates the index (step S2011). Upon ending the process in step S2011, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S2012. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is not variably displayed (NO in step S2010), the process proceeds to step S2012.

  In the process of step S2011, although the determined number of time savings has not been exhausted, by subtracting 1 from the current index, the "high-probability time-saving gaming state" is changed to the "high-probability non-time-saving gaming state". Cannot be displayed, indicating that the operation is shifted to. Each time a special symbol is variably displayed, it is necessary to subtract 1 from the current index and update and display it, in order to let the player know that the number of remaining time savings is approaching 0. It is necessary to perform the process of step S2009 so that 0 is not displayed even though the number of remaining time savings is not 0.

  In step S2012, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special symbol has been changed and “big hit” has been derived, that is, whether a big hit command has been received from the main CPU 101 (step S2012).

  When the special symbol is changed and the "big hit" is derived, that is, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the "big hit" is derived based on the command transmitted from the main CPU 101 (YES in step S2012), the sub The CPU 201 stores the currently displayed index in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM (step S2013). Thereafter, the sub CPU 201 turns on the index flag (step S2014), and ends the index effect processing. On the other hand, if the “big hit” is not derived (NO in step S2012), the index effect processing ends without performing the processing in steps S2013 and S2014.

  In this way, every time the variable display is performed, the index is subtracted and updated and displayed so that the remaining number of time savings approaches 0, thereby changing from the “highly accurate time saving gaming state” to the “highly accurate non-time saving gaming state”. The timing of the transition can be suggested to the player, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, the sub CPU 201 can perform the addition and subtraction display of the index not only when the variable display is performed but also when the specific condition is satisfied, in addition to the subtraction of the index when the variable display is performed. It is possible to enhance the entertainment of the game until the game shifts to the “high-precision non-time saving game state”.

  In addition, in the “high-accuracy time-saving game state”, a “big hit” is derived before the determined number of time-saving games is consumed, and the big-hit game state based on the “big hit” ends and the “high-precision When the main CPU 101 is controlled to the “game state”, the main CPU 101 does not execute control to shift to the “high-accuracy non-time-saving game state” unless the determined number of time-saving games is exhausted, but the sub CPU 201 performs An index when a "big hit" is derived in the "probable time saving gaming state" is displayed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to show that the mode of the index changes from the continuation of the index displayed in the previous “high-precision time-saving gaming state”. As a result, although it does not shift to the “high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state” unless the determined number of time-saving games is exhausted internally, the appearance is reduced to the time reduction determined in the previous “high-accuracy time-saving gaming state”. When the "big hit" is derived without the number of time saving games being consumed, it is possible to show as if continuing from the previously consumed time saving game, and it is not shifted to the "highly accurate non-time saving game state" It is possible to reduce a sense of loss that may occur due to this.

  By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first example, like the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the starting memory based on the winning in the first opening 5442 and the starting based on the winning in the second opening 440 are provided. Up to four memories can be reserved, respectively. In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, as described above, the gaming state at the start of the special symbol change is the “normal gaming state” and the gaming state at the start of the special symbol change is “highly accurate The state of the game, the "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state", or the "low-probability time-saving game state" is significantly different in the fluctuation time of the second special symbol.

  Therefore, in the “normal game state”, if the start memory based on the winning in the second start port 440 is suspended, unless the result of the second special lottery executed for this start memory is “big hit”, 580000- After the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed for an extremely long time such as 600000 msec, the result of the second special lottery is derived.

  As described above, a general player makes a left-handed hit in the “normal game state”, so that the possibility that a game ball will be won in the second starting port 440 is low. However, when the gaming state shifts from the “low-probability time-saving gaming state” to the “normal gaming state”, at the time of shifting to the “normal gaming state”, four start memories of the second special symbol are held. Can occur. Then, if the "big hit" is not included in the four holdings, the change display of the second special symbol for all four is completed approximately 40 minutes later (finally the second special symbol). (The start memory of the fourth second special symbol) is "about 31 minutes even if it is" big hit "".

  Then, for example, the game state shifts from the “low-probability time-short game state” to the “normal game state” in a state in which four start memories of the second special symbol are held, and the first to third memory are held. If the starting memory is "losing" and the fourth starting memory is "big hit", this "big hit" is derived from the first starting memory held. May occur after 30 minutes or more have elapsed since the start of the variable display of the second special symbol. It is not preferable to make the player wait for such a long time.

  By the way, the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment has a pre-reading function for determining the result of the special lottery based on the information of the reserved starting memory, similar to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment. Have. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, in the “normal gaming state”, the main CPU 101 is suspended when a specific condition is satisfied while the start storage of the second special symbol is suspended. It is determined whether or not "big hit" and / or "small hit" is included in the starting memory of the second special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as "predetermination of second special symbol prefetch"). The result of the symbol pre-reading determination is sent to the sub CPU 201 as a command. The sub CPU 201 that has received the result of the prefetch determination of the second special symbol, based on the result of the prefetch determination of the second special symbol transmitted from the main CPU 101, in order to prevent the player from waiting for a long time, It is configured to perform a standby force suppression effect process capable of executing a standby force suppression effect indicating whether or not a "big hit" is included in the held start special memory of the second special symbol. The standby compulsion suppression effect processing will be described below.

  FIG. 262 is an example showing a flowchart of the standby coercion suppression effect processing executed by the sub CPU 201 in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. This standby compulsion suppression effect process also constitutes a subroutine process of the effect mode determination process.

  Referring to FIG. 262, sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the result of the prefetch determination of the second special symbol transmitted from main CPU 101 has been received (step S1011). When receiving the result of the prefetch determination of the second special symbol (YES in step S1011), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the current game state is the “normal game state” (step S1012). If the current gaming state is the “normal gaming state” (YES in step S1012), it is determined whether a specific condition is satisfied (step S1013). If the specific condition is satisfied (YES in step S1013), it is determined whether or not the "big hit" is included in the reserved start special memory of the second special symbol (step S1015). Here, if "small hit" or "small hit" is included in the held start special memory of the second special symbol (YES in step S1015), a waiting force suppression effect is executed (step S1016). This standby compulsion suppression effect is an effect indicating that “small hit” or “small hit” is included in the starting memory of the reserved second special symbol, and the display displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. The effect may be performed as an effect, may be performed as a sound effect by an output from the speaker 24, or both the display effect and the sound effect may be performed. As described above, by performing the standby compulsion suppression effect based on the satisfaction of the specific condition, the player can wait for a long time, for example, 30 minutes or more after the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. Can be eliminated.

  In the above description, in the “normal game state”, the standby coercion suppression effect is performed when a specific condition is established. For example, the specific condition is such that a left-hit game ball has a general winning opening 53. , 54, and 55, it is preferable to set conditions that can be satisfied by performing left-handing from the viewpoint of promoting the game. The condition for performing the above-described waiting force suppression effect may be established, for example, based on that one left-hitted game ball has won one of the general winning openings 53, 54, and 55. Alternatively, for example, the game may be established based on a plurality of left-played game balls winning one of the general winning openings 53, 54, 55. Further, in addition to winning in any of the general winning openings 53, 54, 55, weighting conditions (for example, a left-played game ball wins in all the general winning openings 53, 54, 55). The above-mentioned waiting force suppression effect may be performed based on the establishment.

  In addition, the above-mentioned waiting force suppression effect is an effect indicating that the "big hit" or "small hit" is included in the starting memory of the reserved second special symbol, but the "big hit" is included. The effect may be such that it can be distinguished whether it is included or “small hits”, or may be an effect that cannot be distinguished.

  By the way, the above-mentioned standby compulsion suppression effect is an effect indicating that a “big hit” is included in the reserved start special memory of the second special symbol by the look-ahead function of the main CPU 101. That is, the change display of the second special symbol with respect to the start memory of the second special symbol pre-read as the "big hit" (hereinafter, referred to as "specific second start memory") is not yet started. . Therefore, the result of the first special lottery is “big hit” even though the sub CPU 201 has performed the waiting force suppression effect indicating that “big hit” is included in the start memory of the second special symbol. , The “big hit” for the specific second start-up memory may be canceled. For example, when the result of the first special lottery is “big hit”, the change display of the first special symbol based on the “big hit” is started, and before the change display of the first special symbol ends, This is the case where the variable display of the second special symbol for the two-start memory is started.

  Therefore, after the standby compulsion suppression effect is performed for the specific second start memory, the reach effect is executed by the sub CPU 201 based on the result of the first lottery being "big hit", and the reach effect is being executed. When the variation display of the second special symbol for the specific second start memory is started, the sub CPU 201 performs the following effect. First, the reach effect that is being executed is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss. Then, after the reach effect being executed is temporarily stopped and displayed in a losing manner, an effect is performed as if a new symbol change was started due to the establishment of the start condition. At this time, the sub CPU 201 sets the effect indicating that the result of the first special lottery was a loss so that it is difficult to detect that the effect is about the same starting memory such as a re-fluctuation effect or a pseudo continuous effect. It is preferable to carry out also. At the same time, when performing an effect as if a new symbol change has been started, it is preferable that the sub CPU 201 perform an effect as if the change display of the second special symbol for the specific second start memory is started. . In this case, it is preferable to perform a reach effect different from the reach effect described above. For example, if the reach effect before the temporary stop is the super reach effect A, the reach effect to be performed after the temporary stop may be a super reach effect B or a normal reach that is completely different from the super reach effect A. This reduces the disappointment that can be given to the player due to the cancellation of the “big hit” despite the fact that the standby force suppression effect indicating that the specific second start memory is the “big hit” is performed. It is possible to do.

  After the reach effect for the first special symbol being executed is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss, the effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 instead of performing an effect as if a new symbol change was started. The sub CPU 201 may perform an effect as if the effect image to be switched from the reach effect for the first special symbol to the reach effect for the second special symbol. That is, although the reach effect for the first special symbol is actually continued internally, in appearance, it is as if the image was switched to the reach effect for the second special symbol, It is possible to reduce the disappointment that can be given to the player by canceling the “big hit” for the specific second start memory.

  By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, when controlled to the “normal gaming state”, the sub CPU 201 displays an effect image mainly based on the result of the first special lottery on the liquid crystal display device 16. You. The effect image based on the result of the second special lottery is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 when it is controlled to the “normal game state”, or even if it is displayed, it is not detected by the player (for example, , A small display at the corner of the liquid crystal display device 16). On the other hand, when being controlled to the “high-accuracy time-saving gaming state”, the “high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state”, or the “low-accuracy time-saving gaming state”, the liquid crystal display device 16 mainly displays the result of the second special lottery. The effect image is displayed by the sub CPU 201, and the effect image based on the result of the first special lottery is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, or even if it is displayed, it is displayed only in such a manner that the player does not notice it. is there.

  Therefore, even when the result of the second special lottery is a special result when the game is controlled to the “normal game state”, it is extremely difficult for the player to detect the result. Therefore, in the “normal gaming state”, when the result of the second special lottery is “big hit”, the sub CPU 201 visually recognizes the effect image based on the result of the first special lottery displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In an uninterrupted manner, a suggestion effect is provided that suggests that the result of the second special lottery is a "big hit" in a manner that can be grasped by the player. The “mode that does not hinder visual recognition of the effect image based on the result of the first special lottery displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16” means, for example, display using a display device different from the liquid crystal display device 16 or light emission. By causing the LED to emit light in a specific manner (for example, by emitting a rainbow light), the player is notified that the result of the second special lottery is a "big hit".

  However, even if the result of the second special lottery is originally "big hit", if the result of the first special lottery is "big hit", the "big hit" in the second starting memory may be canceled. . For example, this is a case where when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the variable display of the first special symbol is a variable display based on the “big hit”. At this time, in the second special lottery for the second starting memory in which the “big hit” was to be derived, the main CPU 101 sets the non-winning process, or even if the “big hit” is won, Is performed. For this reason, if the result of the second special lottery was originally "big hit" but this "big hit" was canceled, the suggestive effect would have been originally performed. In such a case, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of not executing the suggested effect so that the suggested effect is not always performed. This makes it possible to prevent the "big hit" from being canceled even though a suggestion effect indicating that the result of the second special lottery is "big hit" is performed. In addition, the big hit game can be executed based on the fact that the result of the first special lottery is "big hit" without the player noticing that the result of the second special lottery was originally "big hit". It becomes.

  In addition, the above-described waiting force suppression effect is performed only when “small hit” is included in the held start special memory of the second special symbol (performed only when “small hit” is included). This may be performed only when "small hit" is included (not performed when only "big hit" is included).

  In addition, the above-mentioned standby compulsion suppression effect does not necessarily need to be executed under the control of the sub CPU 201. For example, the lighting mode of the second special symbol holding display unit 76 (see FIG. 8) controlled by the main CPU 101 is changed. May be executed.

  By the way, in the "normal gaming state", when the waiting force suppression effect indicating that the "small hit" is included in the held start special memory of the second special symbol is performed, the second special symbol is performed. Is displayed for about 10 minutes per time for a long time, so it is difficult for the player to know at which timing the small hitting shutter 6100 is activated and the small hit winning opening 5400 is opened. It is. Therefore, even though it is clear that “small hit” is included in the reserved starting special memory of the second special symbol, when the small hit game is executed, the small hit winning opening 5400 is set. A situation may occur in which game balls cannot be awarded, which may reduce interest.

  Therefore, in the "normal gaming state", if the "small hit" is included in the held start special memory of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 201 determines that the "small hit" is included. When performing the waiting force suppression effect shown, a timing suggesting effect indicating the timing at which the small hitting shutter 6100 operates (the timing at which the small hit winning opening 5400 is opened) may be performed. In this case, the sub CPU 201 performs the small hit winning effect production process of FIG. 263 instead of the small hit winning effect production process of FIG. 260. FIG. 263 is another example of the flowchart of the small hit winning effect production process executed by the sub CPU 201 in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. In the small hit winning effect production process of FIG. 263, when the sub CPU 201 is in the “normal game state” (YES in step S1002), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the standby forced suppression effect (see step S1016 of FIG. 262) has been performed. If the judgment is made (step S1006), and the waiting compulsion suppression effect is performed (YES in step S1006), the timing suggestion effect (step S1007) is executed, which is different from the small hit winning effect effect process of FIG. 260. But others are the same.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the winning probability of "small hit" in the second special lottery is relatively high, about 1/5, so the second special symbol held in the "normal gaming state" It is possible that a plurality of "small hits" are included in the starting memory of the game. Therefore, by performing the timing suggestion effect in step S1007, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game. In particular, when the game state shifts from the "low-probability time-short game state" to the "normal game state" in a state where four start memories of the second special symbol are held, the four held second special symbols are stored. When all of the symbols in the starting memory of the symbol are "small hits", the gaming interest can be greatly enhanced.

  Note that the timing suggestion effect in step S1007 is always performed when a standby compulsion effect indicating that "small hit" is included (when YES is determined in step S1006). The present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a standby compulsion effect indicating that “small hit” is included is performed, the timing suggestion effect may be performed only when a specific condition is satisfied. For example, in the “normal game state”, when “small hit” is included in the reserved start special memory of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 201 performs a timing suggestion effect execution lottery, and A timing suggestion effect may be performed only when a lottery is won. When performing the timing suggestion effect execution lottery as described above, an effect may be performed in which the player expects whether or not to win the timing suggestion effect execution lottery.

  The timing suggestion effect is performed at the timing when the small hitting shutter 6100 is operated. However, the effect is not limited to this as long as the effect allows the small hit winning opening 5400 to win. For example, in consideration of the time required for the launched game ball to reach the small hit winning opening 5400, the sub CPU 201 suggests a timing for firing the game ball before the timing for operating the small hit shutter 6100. May be performed.

  By the way, the sub CPU 201 performs the standby compulsion effect (step S1016) indicating that the "small hit" is included in the reserved memory of the second special symbol when it is suspended, and performs the timing Since the suggestion effect (step S1007) is performed after the change display of the second special symbol is started, a time difference occurs between the timing of performing the standby compulsion effect and the timing of performing the timing suggestion effect. Therefore, by utilizing this time difference, the sub CPU 201 performs a specific condition (for example, a general condition) between the time when the small hitting game is executed and the time when the small hitting game is executed after performing the standby compulsion effect indicating that “small hit” is included. The timing suggestion effect (step S1007) may be performed only when the winning opening 53, 54, 55 is established. This not only gives the player a sense of tension during the period from the execution of the standby compulsion effect indicating that the “small hit” is included to the execution of the small hit game, as well as the specific conditions It is possible to enhance the interest by the mini-game that tries to establish.

  Further, as described above, the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment has a look-ahead function for determining the result of the special lottery based on the information of the reserved starting memory. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the pre-reading function provided in the main CPU 101 is used, and the sub CPU 201 executes a plurality of games (for example, a small hit game and a big hit game) executed as a result of a plurality of special lotteries. It is configured to perform a premiere effect control process capable of executing a premiere effect as if it were one game. Hereinafter, the premium effect control processing will be described.

  FIG. 264 is an example showing a flowchart of the premiere effect control process executed by the sub CPU 201 in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. This premiere effect control process also constitutes a subroutine process of the effect mode determination process.

  When the sub CPU 201 executes the premiere effect control process, the main CPU 101 determines the result of the second special lottery in the “high-accuracy time-saving gaming state”, “high-accuracy non-saving-time gaming state”, and “low-accuracy-time-saving gaming state”. 259 is "small hit", the fluctuation display time of the second special symbol is determined with reference to the table of FIG. 265 instead of the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. FIG. 265 is a table stored in the main ROM 102 in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, and is an example of a variable time determination table for a special symbol for a high start. The fluctuation time determination table in FIG. 265 is a table referred to in the “high-accuracy time-saving gaming state”, the “high-accuracy non-hour-saving gaming state”, and the “low-accuracy time-saving gaming state”, and the result of the second special lottery is When it is "small hit", the variation pattern (16H, 17H, 18H) in which the reach effect (normal reach for high start, super reach A for high start, super reach for high start B) is performed is determined with a probability of 50%. Is a table in which a fluctuation pattern (19H) in which a super-speed fluctuation is performed is determined with a probability of 50%.

  Referring to FIG. 264, sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the current gaming state is “normal gaming state” (step S1021). When the sub CPU 201 determines that the game state is not the “normal game state”, that is, any one of the “high-accuracy time-saving game state”, the “high-accuracy non-time-saving game state”, and the “low-accuracy time-saving game state” ( (YES in step S1021), it is determined whether or not the change display of the special symbol to be performed is the change display of the second special symbol (step S1022). When the current gaming state is the “normal gaming state” (NO in step S1021), sub CPU 201 ends the premier effect control process. The reason why the premier effect control process is not performed when the current gaming state is the “normal gaming state” is because the variable display of the second special symbol is performed for about 10 minutes in the “normal gaming state”. This is because it is not practical to perform a premiere performance of a game (for example, a small hit game and a big hit game) as if it were one game.

  Next, when the change display of the special symbol to be performed is the change display of the second special symbol (YES in step S1022), the sub CPU 201 derives the change display of the second special symbol as "small hit". It is determined whether or not the display is a variable display (ie, whether or not the result of the second special lottery is “small hit”) (step S1023). If the special symbol change display to be performed is not the second special symbol change display (NO in step S1022), sub CPU 201 ends the premier effect control process. If the special symbol change display to be performed is not the variable display of the second special symbol, the premier effect control processing is not performed. In the “game state”, the effect mainly displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is based on the result of the second special lottery, and even if the special symbol of the first special lottery is changed and displayed, the player is aware of the effect. This is because it is performed in a manner that does not allow it to be performed.

  Next, when the variation display of the second special symbol to be performed is a variation display in which “small hit” is derived (YES in step S1023), the sub CPU 201 sets the reach effect (normal reach for high start, high reach) It is determined based on the command transmitted from the main CPU 101 whether or not the variation pattern (13H, 14H, 15H) in which the super reach A and the high start super reach B are performed (step S1024). If it is not the fluctuation pattern (13H, 14H, 15H) in which the reach effect is performed (NO in step S1024), the sub CPU 201 ends the premier effect control process.

  When the variation pattern (13H, 14H, 15H) in which the reach effect is performed (YES in step S1024), the sub CPU 201 starts the second special symbol in addition to the start memory of the second special symbol that is to be variably displayed. It is determined whether the storage is suspended (step S1025).

  When the sub CPU 201 determines that the start storage of the second special symbol is suspended in addition to the start storage of the second special symbol which is variably displayed from now on (YES in step S1025), the second special symbol which is variably displayed is displayed. Based on the result of the prefetch determination of the second special symbol transmitted from the main CPU 101, it is determined whether or not it is a "big hit" for the second special symbol starting memory held next to the symbol startup memory. (Step S1026). In addition, if the start storage of the second special symbol other than the start storage of the second special symbol which is variably displayed from now on is not held (NO in step S1025), the sub CPU 201 ends the premier effect control process.

  When the sub CPU 201 determines that the result of the look-ahead determination on the start memory of the second special symbol held next to the start memory of the second special symbol which is to be variably displayed is “big hit” (YES in step S1026). ), The premier effect flag is set to ON (step S1027). That is, when the result of the second special lottery continues in the order of “small hit” → “big hit”, the premium effect flag is set to ON. In addition, if the result of the pre-reading determination regarding the start memory of the second special symbol held next to the start memory of the second special symbol which is variably displayed from now on is not "big hit" (NO in step S1026), the second Since the result of the special lottery is not continuous in the order of “small hit” → “big hit”, the sub CPU 201 ends the premier effect control process.

  Then, when the change display of the second special symbol to be performed is performed, the sub CPU 201 executes the premier effect process (step S1028), and ends the premier effect control process. This premier effect processing is an effect that makes the small hitting game state and the next big hitting game state after the small hitting gaming state look as if they are one advantageous game state (that is, more than the normal big hit game) This is a process of performing an effect that makes it appear as if it is a jackpot game in which the round game is performed.

  When this premiere effect processing is executed, it becomes possible to pay out a prize ball obtained by adding a prize ball that can be obtained in the small hit game state and a prize ball that can be obtained in the big hit game state. More prize balls can be paid out than the prize balls that can be acquired, and it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

  When the sub CPU 201 determines that the variation display of the second special symbol to be performed is not the variation display from which “small hit” is derived (NO in step S1023), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the variation display is “big hit”. It is determined whether or not it is (step S1029).

  When the sub CPU 201 determines that the variation display of the second special symbol to be performed is not the variation display from which “big hit” is derived (NO in step S1029), the sub CPU 201 performs a loss effect (step S1032), and executes the premium effect control process. finish.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation display of the second special symbol to be performed is a variation display in which “big hit” is derived (YES in step S1029), sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the premium effect flag is on. It is determined (step S1030). In the process of step S1030, the result of the second special lottery is changed from "small hit" to "big hit" between the variable display of the immediately preceding second special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol to be performed. Is a process for determining whether or not they are continuous in the order of.

  If the sub CPU 201 determines that the premiere effect flag is not on (NO in step S1030), the sub CPU 201 changes the second special symbol between the immediately preceding second special symbol change display and the next second special symbol change display. It is determined that the result of the special lottery is not continuous in the order of “small hit” → “big hit”, a normal big hit effect is executed (step S1031), and the premium effect control process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the premium effect flag is ON (YES in step S1030), sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S1028, executes a premium effect process that is clearly different from the big hit effect in step S1031, and executes the premier effect process. The effect control processing ends. In the premier effect processing (step S1028), the sub CPU 201 performs an effect that is connected in series with the effect performed in the variable display of the immediately preceding second special symbol, so that the big hit effect performed in step S1031 is clearly a mode. Are different.

  As described above, in the “high accuracy time reduction game state”, the “high accuracy non-time reduction game state”, or the “low accuracy time reduction game state”, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed, and the “big hit” is derived independently. If it is performed (in the case where “small hit” is not derived in the fluctuation display of the immediately preceding second special symbol), a big hit effect is performed. On the other hand, in the "high-accuracy time-short game state", the "high-accuracy non-short-time game state" or the "low-accuracy time-short game state", the result of the second special lottery continues in the order of "small hit" → "big hit" In some cases, the premiere effect as if it were one game is executed by the variation display of the second special symbol from which the "small hit" is derived and the variation display of the second special symbol by which the "big hit" is derived By doing so, it is possible to make it appear as if a game with a higher degree of profit than a normal jackpot game has been executed.

  Although not shown in FIG. 264, after the end of the premier effect by the sub CPU 201 (after the end of the big hit game state by the main CPU 101), the sub CPU 201 turns off the premier effect flag.

  Next, in the "high-accuracy time-short game state", the "high-accuracy non-short-time game state", or the "low-accuracy time-short game state", the control by the main CPU 101, such as the fluctuation control of the second special symbol and the control to the big hit game state. The relationship between the sub CPU 201 and the control such as the control of the variation effect of the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 266 is a time chart showing the relationship between the control by the main CPU 101 and the effect control by the sub CPU 201 in the “high-accuracy time-saving game state”, “high-accuracy non-time-saving game state” or “low-accuracy time-saving game state”. (A) An example in which the result of the second special lottery is derived in the order of “losing” → “small hit” → “big hit” in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, and (b) the first embodiment. This is an example in which the result of the second special lottery is derived in the order of “losing” → “small hit” → “big hit” in the pachinko gaming machine of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 266 (a), in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the second special lottery is derived as “losing” by the control of the main CPU, the result is controlled by the sub-CPU 201 in response to this. For example, an effect image indicating "losing" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. Similarly, when the result of the second special lottery is derived as “small hit” under the control of the main CPU, an effect image indicating “small hit” is displayed correspondingly under the control of the sub CPU 201. In addition, when the result of the second special lottery is derived as “big hit” under the control of the main CPU, an effect image indicating “big hit” is displayed in accordance with the control by the sub CPU 201. Then, when the result of the second special lottery is derived as “big hit”, the main CPU controls the big hit gaming state. In this jackpot game state, a round game is executed over a plurality of rounds. The sub CPU 201 displays the small hit effect on the liquid crystal display device 16 when the small hit game state is controlled by the control of the main CPU 101. Indicates the big hit effect on the liquid crystal display device 16. As described above, in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, the control by the main CPU and the control by the sub CPU 201 correspond one-to-one.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the control by the main CPU 101 and the sub CPU 201 is executed, for example, in the mode shown in FIG. Specifically, when the result of the second special lottery is derived as “losing” under the control of the main CPU, in response to this, an effect indicating “losing” on the liquid crystal display device is performed by the control of the sub CPU 201. The image is displayed.

  However, when the result of the second special lottery is derived as “small hit” under the control of the main CPU, the start storage of the second special symbol in which “big hit” is derived by the prefetch function of the main CPU 101 is suspended. On the premise of this, under the control of the sub CPU 201, for example, an effect image indicating “premier hit” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. The effect image indicating “Premier hit” indicates that more rounds are executed than the number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) of the round game executed in one big hit gaming state (that is, one big hit) It is an effect image showing that there is a possibility that a larger number of prize balls will be paid out than the expected value of the number of prize balls paid out in the gaming state).

  When the main CPU 101 is controlling the small hitting game state, the sub CPU 201 performs a pseudo round effect as if a round game is being executed. This pseudo-round effect is an effect that is the same or very similar to the effect performed during the round game of the actual jackpot game.

  By the way, when performing the premiere effect, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed between the small hitting game state and the big hitting game state. The problem that there is not occurs. For this reason, it is important how the sub CPU 201 performs the effect between the small hitting game state and the big hitting game state, that is, while the variable display of the second special symbol is performed.

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, while the main CPU 101 is performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 201 is as if during an interval between round games. Performs a simulated interval production. This pseudo-interval effect is the same or very similar effect to the effect actually performed during the interval between round games. As a specific example of the pseudo interval effect, for example, when the sub CPU 201 performs “Premier hit display”, a big hit (pre-read big hit) derived thereafter is, for example, a probability change big hit (after the big hit game state ends). Even though the probability change flag is turned on in the gaming state, an effect is performed as if it is a normal big hit (a big hit in which the probability change flag is not turned on in the game state after the big hit game state ends). In the pseudo interval effect, an effect that indicates whether or not the promotion from the normal big hit to the probable big hit is equivalent. By performing such a promotion effect, it is possible to attract the player's consciousness to the effect, and even if the variation display of the second special symbol by the main CPU 101 is slightly longer than the interval time, an uncomfortable feeling that can be given to the player Can be reduced.

  Then, after being controlled to the big hit game state by the control of the main CPU 101, the sub CPU 201 performs a round effect that is normally performed. However, in this round effect, even if the round game executed by the main CPU 101 is actually the first round game, for example, the sub CPU 201 does not explicitly indicate that the round game is the first round game. Is preferably performed.

  In this manner, when the result of the second special lottery in the “high-accuracy time-saving gaming state”, “high-accuracy non-saving time-saving gaming state” or “low-accuracy time-saving gaming state” continues in the order of “small hit” → “big hit” In addition, by performing a series of effects as if the small hitting gaming state and the big hitting gaming state are controlled to one premium big hitting gaming state, the number of rounds is larger than the round game normally performed in one big hitting gaming state It is possible to give the player a feeling as if he / she has won the jackpot game state in which the round game is performed, and it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

  As a method for solving the unnaturalness that can occur between the small hitting game state and the big hitting game state (while the second special symbol change display is performed), in addition to the above-described pseudo interval effect, For example, the following method can be considered.

  For example, the opening production indicating that the "big hit" has been won is usually performed after the result of the special lottery is derived as "big hit", and is controlled to the small hitting game state by the main CPU 101. The sub CPU 201 performs an opening effect indicating that the "big hit" has been won at a stage where the big hit gaming state has not yet been started between the time when the second special symbol is displayed and the time when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed. It may be. That is, the reach effect is not performed during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol based on the "big hit". Even with such a method, it is possible to reduce the unnaturalness that can occur between the small hitting game state and the big hitting gaming state.

  In addition, as a method for solving the above-mentioned problem, when the result of the second special lottery in the “high-accuracy time-saving gaming state”, “high-accuracy non-hour-saving gaming state” or “low-accuracy time-saving gaming state” is “big hit” Is changed to the reach effect (normal reach for high start, super reach A for high start or super reach B for high start) (see FIG. 259), and the reach is performed with a probability of, for example, 50%. The fluctuation pattern (13H, 14H, 15H) in which the effects (normal reach for high start, super reach A for high start, super reach B for high start) are determined, and the fluctuation pattern in which the super-speed fluctuation is performed with a probability of 50% ( 19H). Then, when the result of the second special lottery is “big hit” and the main CPU 101 determines that the fluctuation is super-speed, by executing the above-described premiere effect, the small hitting gaming state and the big hitting gaming state are switched. Possible unnaturalness can be reduced.

  In the above description, the case where "small hit" and "big hit" are continuous in the second special lottery has been described, but it is necessary to reduce unnaturalness that can occur between the small hit game state and the big hit game state. Is not necessarily limited to this, and there may be a "loss" between "small hit" and "big hit" in the second special lottery. In this case, as compared with the case where “small hit” and “big hit” are continuous, the time that occurs between the small hit game state and the big hit game state is likely to be longer, but the small hit game state and the big hit game Between the small hitting game state and the big hitting game state by performing the above-described pseudo interval effect or performing the fluctuation display when the result of the second special lottery is "big hit" at a super-high speed fluctuation. Can be reduced. In addition, it is preferable that the sub CPU 201 does not display the image showing the loss while the main CPU 101 performs the change display of the second special symbol regarding the “loss” between the “small hit” and the “big hit”. .

  Also, in the above description, a series of effects as if the small hitting game state and the big hitting gaming state were controlled to one premium hitting game state were described. The display on the display device 16 is not denied. That is, usually, the liquid crystal display device 16 has effects for showing to the player such as a variation effect of a decorative symbol and an effect by a character, and a special symbol displayed in correspondence with the special symbol variation display separately from these. The effect that the player does not notice, such as the corresponding symbol, is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. Since the series of effects as if the small hitting game state and the big hitting game state are controlled to one premium big hitting game state are effects for showing to the player, separately from such effects, Even if the effect of the special symbol corresponding to the displayed symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, this is an effect that is not made conscious of a technician.

  By the way, when the above-mentioned premiere effect control process is executed, when the main CPU 101 is controlled to the small hitting game state, the pre-reading function of the main CPU 101 causes a “big hit” even though the sub CPU 201 starts the premier effect. There is a possibility that the first special symbol is variably displayed and the "big hit" is derived before the "big hit" for the start memory of the second special symbol determined to be pre-read is present. In this case, the "big hit" in the starting memory of the second special symbol prefetched by the prefetch function of the main CPU 101 is canceled, and "losing" is derived, which may discourage the player. Further, the display control of the premier effect that has already started may become complicated, and the control load of the sub CPU 201 may increase. Therefore, when starting the premiere effect, sub CPU 201 stores the stored first start memory (first start memory stored in step S55 (see FIG. 120)) based on the command transmitted from main CPU 101. Among them, it is determined whether or not a start memory in which it is determined that the “big hit” can be derived by the prefetch function by the main CPU 101 is not included. Then, when the stored first startup memory does not include the startup memory determined to be able to derive the "big hit", the sub CPU 201 executes the premier effect. As a result, it is possible to reduce discouragement and the load of display control that can be given to the player.

  In the above description, the example in which the result of the second special lottery is such that “small hit” is derived earlier than “small hit” is used. The following effects can be performed by the sub CPU 201.

  First, the pre-reading function by the main CPU 101 includes the following in the stored second start memory (the second start memory stored in step S63 (see FIG. 120)) when the big hit gaming state is being controlled. It is determined whether or not "small hit" is included. This determination is made by the sub CPU 201 based on the command transmitted from the main CPU 101. Here, if it is determined that the "small hit" is included in the stored second start memory, after the big hit game state is ended, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed and " "Small hit" is derived.

  Therefore, before the big hitting game state ends, the sub CPU 201 performs a round-up effect that suggests that the number of rounds has increased in a pseudo manner. That is, although the number of execution rounds of the round game executed in the big hit game state does not change, a round-up effect is performed in which it appears as if the number of rounds has been increased by the execution of the small hit game. For example, when a big hit game of 15 rounds is being played, if the stored second start-up memory is determined to be “small hit” by the prefetch function of the main CPU 101, the sub CPU 201 “Plus one round” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

  However, the above-mentioned round-up effect is performed when the big hitting game state is controlled to a “high-precision time-saving game state”, a “high-accuracy non-time-saving game state”, or a “low-probability time-saving game state”. This is because, when controlled in these gaming states, the fluctuation display time of the second special symbol is determined with reference to the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for high start. That is, when the “big game state” is controlled to the “normal game state” after the end of the big hit game state, the fluctuation display time of the second special symbol is determined by referring to the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for low start. Therefore, it takes a long time before the “small hit” is derived.

  Such a round-up effect may be performed when it is determined that the second start memory that first satisfies the start condition among the stored second start memories is “small hit”. Even if the second starting memory in which the big hitting game state ends and the starting condition is first satisfied is “losing”, if the stored second starting memory includes “small hit”, the round-up is performed. An effect may be performed. Even if the second start memory in which the jackpot gaming state ends and the starting condition is first satisfied is “losing”, the “high-accuracy time-saving gaming state”, “high-accuracy non-hour-saving gaming state”, or “low-accuracy time-saving gaming state” Is controlled as described above, the fluctuation display time of the second special symbol can be determined to be the super-speed fluctuation with reference to the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for high start, so that the influence on the round-up effect is It is thought that there are few.

  In addition, as a result of pre-reading the stored second start memory, if “small hits” continue, the sub CPU 201 may display “plus two rounds” on the liquid crystal display device 16 or “plus one round”. "Round" may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and "plus one round" may be further displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 after the small hitting game has been performed once. In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, up to five hit determination results obtained by adding the upper limit number of the second starting memory of four and the one currently changing can be read in advance, and at least one of the hit determination results is a big hit. In the case where the other four wins are small, display of "plus four rounds" can be executed at the maximum. If two or more of the five jackpots are found, the value of “plus round” can be further increased. For example, if all of the five held second start-up memories are 16R jackpots, a display of at most 80R is possible.

  By the way, when the big hit gaming state ends, the sub CPU 201 performs an ending effect indicating the end of the big hit gaming state. However, when performing the round-up effect, it is preferable that the ending effect is not performed at the end of the big hit game state, and the ending effect is performed after the small hit game targeted for the round-up effect ends. As described above, by performing the ending effect after the small hit game targeted for the round-up effect ends, it is possible to increase the credibility of the round-up effect.

[Pachinko machine of the second embodiment]
Next, a pachinko gaming machine according to a second embodiment will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines the type of the big hit, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. As described in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the type of the big hit is the number of rounds executed in the big hit game, the big hit game is completed and the big hit game state is changed to the general game state (a game state other than the big hit game state, The same applies to the game state after the transition to the same state), whether to turn on the probability change flag and whether to turn on the time saving flag, and these are determined according to the hit selection symbol command related to the big hit. . As described in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the hit selection symbol command includes the determination value data and the symbol acquired when the game ball has won the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440. It is determined on the basis of a random number value (both refer to FIG. 256).

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, when determining the hit selection symbol command, the main CPU 101 determines the “normal gaming state”, the “high-accuracy time-saving gaming state”, the “high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state”, In any game state of the “low-probability time-saving game state”, the game state is determined with reference to the symbol determination table (the first starting port and the second starting port) in FIG.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, when determining the hit selection symbol command, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the "normal gaming state" and the "highly accurate non-time saving gaming state" are not in the electric support state. Although the same is the point determined by referring to the symbol determination table (first starting port, second starting port) in FIG. 256, the "high-precision time-short game state" and the "low-precision time-short game state" Is determined with reference to the symbol determination table (first startup port, second startup port) of FIG. 267 instead of the symbol determination table (first startup port, second startup port) of FIG. 256. different.

  FIG. 267 is a symbol determination table (first starting port, second starting port) stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, and shows a “highly accurate time-saving gaming state”. It is an example of a table referred to in "" and "low probability time saving gaming state".

  As shown in the symbol determination table (first starting port) in FIG. 267, the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment is in the “high-precision time-short game state” and the “low-precision time-short game state” in the electric support state. ), When the determination value data obtained based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 is the “big hit determination value data” (the first executed based on the winning in the first starting port 5442). When the result of the special lottery is “big hit”), the hit selection symbol command is determined to be “z14” with a probability of 100%. When the hit selection symbol command is determined to be "z14", the game state after the end of the big hit game is always controlled to the "high-precision non-time saving game state", as can be understood by referring to the big hit type determination table of FIG. Is done.

  In other words, in the “high-precision time-short game state” and the “low-precision time-short game state” that are in the electric support state, by performing a left-hand hit that enables the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442, the big hit game state is achieved. The game state after the end is always controlled to a “highly accurate non-time saving game state” in which the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of fired balls per unit time exceeds 1. However, in the "high accuracy time reduction game state" and the "low accuracy time reduction game state", it is possible to receive the benefit of the electric support when right-handed, and even if left-handed Can not.

  Therefore, when the game is controlled to the "high-precision time-short game state" or the "low-probability time-short game state" that is in the power support state, a game played by the player left-handed may benefit from the power support. Although there is a disadvantage that it can not be done, when the result of the first special lottery is "big hit", after the big hit game state ends, it is always controlled to "high accuracy non-time saving game state" It is a thrilling game with a higher risk and a higher return than games played.

  Further, as shown in the symbol determination table (second starting port) of FIG. 267, the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment is in the “high-precision time-saving gaming state” and the “low-precision time-saving gaming state” in the electric support state. In the "game state", when the determination value data obtained based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is "big hit determination value data" (executed based on the winning in the second starting port 440). When the result of the first special lottery is "big hit"), the hit selection symbol command is determined to be one of "z15" to "z21". That is, as can be seen with reference to FIGS. 256 and 257, the gaming state after the big hit game is ended is controlled to the “high-accuracy time-short game state” with a probability of 80%, and the 20% probability “low-accuracy time-short game”. State ". In the "high-precision time-saving game state", the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner and the "big hit" is not derived, and when the determined number of time-saving games is exhausted, the game is controlled to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state". However, after the big hit game state ends, the game is not immediately controlled to the "high-precision non-time saving game state".

  In other words, in the “high-precision time-short game state” and the “low-precision time-short game state” that are in the electric support state, the right hitting game state can be achieved by performing a right-handed operation in which a game ball can be awarded to the second starting port 440. The game state after the completion is not immediately controlled to the "high-precision non-time-saving game state" in which the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of fired balls per unit time exceeds 1, and a general probabilistic loop game. Become.

  Therefore, when the game is controlled to the “high-precision time-saving game state” or the “low-precision time-saving game state” that is in the power support state, the game played by the player right-handed is performed after the big hitting game state ends. Although it is not immediately controlled to be in the “high-precision non-time saving game state”, it is possible to receive the benefit of the electric support, and it is a stable game with a low risk and a low return compared to a game played left-handed.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, which of a thrilling game with a relatively high risk and a high return and a stable game with a relatively low risk and a low return is executed. Can be given a selection right to the player by the mode of launching the game ball (right-handed or left-handed). However, it is preferable that the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the final number of fired balls is the same between right-handed and left-handed.

  A pachinko machine having a setting function like the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, that is, any one of a plurality of (for example, six levels) setting values having different “big hit” probabilities in a special lottery. In the gaming machine in which the special lottery is executed based on the value, when the probability of "big hit" is a relatively low set value, and when the probability of "big hit" is a relatively high set value As compared with, the expected value at which the special symbol is fluctuated and the “big hit” is derived is lower. Although it is preferable that the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the final number of fired balls be the same between right-handed and left-handed, the expectation that a "big hit" is derived in this way When the value is a low set value, the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player in the “highly accurate non-time saving game state” is larger than when the value is a high set value. Therefore, when the set value is low, the left-handed player is controlled in the “high-precision time-saving gaming state” or the “low-precision time-saving gaming state”, which is the power support state, as compared to the case of right-handed. The expected value of the number of award balls with respect to the number of launch balls per unit time is high. On the other hand, when it is a high set value, a right-handed player who is controlled to be in the `` high-accuracy time-saving gaming state '' or a `` low-accuracy time-saving gaming state '' that is in an electric support state is compared with a left-handed one. The expected value of the number of award balls with respect to the number of launch balls per unit time is high. In this case, simply giving the player a choice of which of a thrilling game with a relatively high risk and a high return and a stable game with a relatively low risk and a low return to execute is given to the player. Instead, it is possible to provide a new game characteristic such that the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of fired balls per unit time differs between right-handed and left-handed according to the set value. Further, by providing an effect that allows the setting value to be estimated, it is possible to provide more interesting game characteristics in combination with the above.

  Although the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment has been described, the configuration provided in the gaming machine in which a game is performed based on any one of a plurality of setting values is as follows. That is, in this type of gaming machine, the main CPU 101 is provided with a non-volatile storage means for storing a plurality of set values having different probabilities that a special symbol is fluctuated and a “big hit” is derived. Further, the main CPU 101 executes a special lottery based on any one of the plurality of set values stored in the storage means, performs a special symbol variation display, and derives a result of the special lottery. A fluctuation control means is provided. The above one set value is used for starting / stopping the supply of power from the power supply circuit to the main control circuit 100 and the sub-control circuit 200 for operating means called setting keys operable by the gaming machine manager. , The backup clear switch 330, and the setting operation means for changing the set value can be changed. Specifically, first, it is necessary to perform a power-off operation. When the operation means called a setting key is turned on while the power is not turned on, and both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch are performed, the main CPU 101 can change the set value. Control to the appropriate setting change state. In the setting change state, every time the setting operation unit is pressed, the main CPU 101 displays information indicating the setting value on a predetermined display monitor in a cyclically increasing manner. When an operation means called a setting key is turned off in the setting change state, the main CPU 101 ends the setting change state and sets a set value displayed on a predetermined display monitor as one set value. The game is executed by the main CPU 101 based on the one set value set as described above.

[Pachinko machine of the third embodiment]
Next, a pachinko gaming machine according to a third embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment has a configuration that is partially different from the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254) in the board configuration of the gaming board unit 17 (see FIG. 268). Also, the trigger for changing the special symbol fluctuation time (variable display time) determination table is different from the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment.

  FIG. 268 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 268, the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment is different from the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment in that the pachinko gaming machine has a pass gate 49 in the left area (there is no pass gate 49 in the right area). . On the downstream side of the passage gate 49, in addition to the conventionally provided first starting port 5442, another first starting port through which a left-hit game ball can be awarded is provided. In order to distinguish the two, the other first starting port is referred to as a first starting port 54421 for the sake of convenience. The control by the main CPU 101 is almost the same as when it is performed.

  Further, by allowing the transparent panel 172 to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, the easiness of winning a game ball to the first starting port 54421 is changed, or it is impossible to win the game ball to the first starting port 54421. There is a movable member 54422 that can be changed between a mode and a possible mode.

  The movable member 54422 is configured to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction with respect to the transparent panel 172. The game ball on the 54422 is guided to the first starting port 54421 (rearward). In this way, the movable member 54422 changes the first starting port 54421 from a mode in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball to a mode that is possible or easy. In the electric support state, the main CPU 101 operates the movable member 54422 in the forward direction so that the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 54421 is facilitated.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, the pass gate 49, the first starting port 5442, and the first starting port 54421 are configured so that a left-hit game ball can pass or win.

  In addition, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254), a special winning opening 540 and a special electric accessory 600 are arranged on the upper right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the gaming area 20. When the shutter 610 is driven by the winning opening solenoid, it is possible to open (or facilitate) the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 540, and it is impossible to win the game ball to the special winning opening 540 (or). (Differential) and a closed state (drive).

  A second starting port 4401 is disposed at the lower right of the liquid crystal display device 16, that is, downstream of the special winning opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600. The game balls that have been hit right and have not won the special winning opening 540 are configured to win approximately one in five balls in the second starting port 4401.

  On the further downstream side of the second starting port 4401, a small hitting shutter 6100 that can move forward and backward with respect to the small hit winning opening 5400 and the transparent panel 172 is arranged. The small hitting shutter 6100 can be driven by a small hit winning opening solenoid (not shown). When the small hitting shutter 6100 operates in the forward direction with respect to the transparent panel 172, the small hit winning opening 5400 is in a closed mode. It becomes an open mode. If the small hit prize port 5400 is in the open mode, most of the game balls that have not won the second starting port 4401 will be configured to win the small hit prize port 5400.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, the large winning port 540, the second starting port 4401, and the small hitting winning port 5400 are configured such that right-hit game balls can pass or win.

  Also, in the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, the main CPU 101 sets the “normal gaming state” and “high-precision time-saving gaming” as the general gaming state other than the big hit gaming state, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. State, high accuracy non-time saving game state, and low accuracy time reduction game state. Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state after the big hitting gaming state has ended based on the winning selection symbol command (see FIG. 257) to a “high-accuracy time-short gaming state” or a “low-accuracy time-short gaming state”. To control. Then, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, when the time savings are exhausted without deriving the special symbol combination indicating the "big hit" in the "high accuracy time saving gaming state", the main CPU 101 sets " The control for shifting from the “high-accuracy time-saving game state” to the “high-accuracy non-time-saving game state” is executed.

  Here, FIG. 269 shows the fluctuating time determination executed by the main CPU 101 when the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment shifts from the “high-precision time-saving gaming state” to the “high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state”. It is a flowchart which shows a table setting process. This variation time determination table setting process is another example of a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process of step S173 (see FIG. 127) executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment.

  With reference to FIG. 269, a description will be given of a variable time determination table setting process that is executed when a transition from the “high-probability time-saving game state” to the “high-probability non-time-saving game state” occurs. The main CPU 101 first determines whether or not the gaming state has shifted (step S1811). If the gaming state has not shifted (NO in step S1811), the main CPU 101 ends the variable time determination table setting process without changing the variable time determination table referred to when determining the special symbol variable time. . If it is determined that the gaming state has transitioned (YES in step S1811), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the transitioning gaming state is the “high-accuracy non-time saving gaming state” (step S1812). When the transfer destination game state is the “high-accuracy non-time saving game state” (YES in step S1812), the main CPU 101 shows a fluctuation time determination table that is referred to when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol, as shown in FIG. It is set in the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for the high start to be performed (step S1813), and the fluctuation time determination table setting processing ends. On the other hand, when the game state of the transition destination is not the “high-accuracy non-time-saving game state” (NO in step S1812), the main CPU 101 sets the fluctuation time determination table referred to when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol in FIG. It is set in the fluctuation time determination table for the special symbol for low start shown (step S1814), and the fluctuation time determination table setting processing ends.

  As described above, in the “normal game state”, a special symbol combination indicating “big hit” is derived and shifted to the big hit game state, and the big hit game state ends, and the “high accuracy time reduction game state” or the “low accuracy Even if the main CPU 101 shifts to the “time reduction game state”, the main CPU 101 does not change the special symbol fluctuation time determination table and refers to the low start special symbol fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG. Is determined. When the time savings are exhausted without deriving the special symbol combination indicating "big hit" in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", the main CPU 101 changes the gaming state from the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" to the "high-accuracy The control for shifting to the "non-time-saving gaming state" is executed, and the special symbol fluctuation time determination table to be referred to is changed from the special symbol fluctuation time determination table for low start shown in FIG. Is executed to change to the special symbol fluctuation time determination table.

(Game flow)
Next, a flow of a game in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment will be described. The main CPU 101 controls any one of the “normal game state”, the “high accuracy time reduction game state”, the “high accuracy non-time reduction game state”, and the “low accuracy time reduction game state”. The "time saving gaming state" is not an essential gaming state. In these gaming states, a general player plays a game by left-handing. In the gaming states other than the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", that is, the "normal gaming state", the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" and the "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state", the result of the second special lottery is obtained even if the player strikes right. Unless it is a "big hit", the fluctuation display of the second special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 4401 is performed for a long time such as about 10 minutes (long fluctuations A to C), and the player is only lost. is there.

  When the first special symbol is fluctuated and the symbol combination of "big hit" is derived in the "normal game state" left-handed, the main CPU 101 selects a hit time as shown in FIG. Based on the design command, the number of time savings is determined to be one of a plurality of time savings such as 24, 30, 36, 42, 48, and 100 times. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is fluctuated and the "big hit" symbol combination is derived, the main CPU 101 controls to the big hit gaming state. In this jackpot game state, a game ball can be won in the special winning opening 540, so that a general player plays a game by right-handing.

  When the big hitting game state ends, the main CPU 101 executes control to shift the game state to the “high-precision time-saving game state” unless the symbol designation command is “zA5” selected with a very low probability. When the game state shifts to the “high-accuracy time-short game state”, a general player returns from right-handed to left-handed to play the game. In the “high-accuracy time-saving gaming state”, as described above, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 5442 and / or the second starting port 4401 for the low start shown in FIG. The change time of the special symbol is determined with reference to the change time determination table of the special symbol. When the symbol designating command is “zA5”, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends to the “highly accurate non-saving time gaming state” without shifting the gaming state to the “highly accurate time saving gaming state”. Control.

  In the “high-precision time-saving game state”, when the determined number of time-saving games is exhausted without deriving the special symbol combination indicating “big hit”, the main CPU 101 sets the game state to “high-precision time-short game state”. From the “state” to the “high-precision non-time saving game state”, and as described above, the fluctuation time determination table referred to when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol is changed to the special symbol for the low start shown in FIG. 259 is changed to the high-start special symbol fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the "normal game state", the "high-accuracy time-short game state" or the "low-accuracy time-short game state", the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is mainly performed, and even if the player strikes right, (2) Since the change display of the special symbol is performed for a long time such as approximately 10 minutes, the frequency of the small hit prize opening 5400 being in the open mode so that the game ball to the small prize winning opening 5400 wins is relatively small.

  On the other hand, in the “high-precision non-time saving game state”, when a game ball is awarded at the second starting port 4401, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is almost not only fluctuated at a very high speed, but also about one-fifth. A game ball can be won in the small hit winning opening 5400 with a probability, and the expected state of the number of awarded balls with respect to the number of launched balls per unit time exceeds one.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the number of time savings determined based on the hit selection symbol command is produced by either the main CPU 101 or the sub CPU 201 until the time saving game of the number of time savings is consumed. It is kept secret without being disclosed above. In addition, as described with reference to FIG. 136 for the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, not only the number of times saved, but also a game state with a high probability such as the secret A stage 2002 or the secret B stage 200 It is preferable that the player cannot grasp or is difficult to grasp whether the player is in the gaming state or the low probability state by looking at the display effect performed by the sub CPU 201 on the liquid crystal display device 16. Then, from the “highly accurate time-saving game state” in which the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of fired balls is less than 1, the “highly accurate non-time-short game” in which the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of fired balls can exceed 1 It is configured such that it is difficult or difficult to know at what timing the main CPU 101 controls the transition to the “state” until the transition to the “high-precision non-time saving gaming state”. Then, in the “high-accuracy time-saving gaming state”, when the time-saving game is completed without deriving the special symbol combination indicating “big hit”, the sub CPU 201 reaches the ceiling (the time-saving has been completed). Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. As a result, it is possible to enhance game entertainment.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment described above, with a very low probability (when the symbol designating command is “zA5”), the gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends is “highly accurate non-time saving gaming state”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game state after the end of the big hit game state may always be controlled to the “high-precision time-saving game state”.

  In the above-described pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, when the gaming ball is controlled to the big hit game state based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442, 54421, and the game ball to the second starting port 4401. In any of the cases where the big hit game state is controlled based on the winning, the game state after the big hit game state ends is controlled to be almost "highly accurate time-saving game state", but is not limited thereto. When the game mode is controlled to the jackpot game state based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting ports 5442 and 54421, the game is controlled to the “high-precision non-time saving game mode” with a probability of 10%, and the second starting port 4401 When the game is controlled to the big hit game state based on the winning of the game ball, the game may be controlled to the “highly accurate non-time saving game state” with a probability of 50%. As described above, when the game is controlled to the big hit game state based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 4401, the game is controlled to the big hit game state based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442, 54421. Once it reaches the ceiling (when time savings are exhausted), then it is controlled by the number of shot balls per unit time. Not only is the specific state where the expected value of the number of prize balls exceeds 1 (high-precision non-time saving gaming state), but also the probability that such a specific state loops is increased, thereby realizing a highly entertaining game. It becomes possible.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment and the first modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, a first starting port 54421 is provided separately from the first starting port 5442, and the movable member 54422 is connected to the transparent panel 172. In this case, it is possible to change the ease of winning of the game ball to the first starting port 54421 by making it possible to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a so-called electric chew such as a blade member 4620 is provided above the first starting port 5442, and in the power support state, the above-mentioned so-called electric chew is operated so that winning in the first starting port 5442 is facilitated. It may be. In this case, irrespective of whether it is in the electric support state or not, the change time of the special symbol is determined with reference to the change time determination table of the special symbol for high start. It suffices if the second starting port can receive a certain amount of gaming balls so that the expected value of the number of winning balls exceeds one. In addition, when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol with reference to the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for the low start, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is extremely long time (long fluctuation A, long fluctuation B or long fluctuation C). ), The expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of launch balls per unit time does not exceed 1 even if game balls can enter the second starting port to some extent.

[Pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment]
Next, a pachinko gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment has a partly different configuration from the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254) in the board configuration of the gaming board unit 17 (see FIG. 270). Also, the trigger for changing the special symbol fluctuation time (variable display time) determination table is different from the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment.

  FIG. 270 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 270, the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment is different from the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment in that the pachinko gaming machine has a pass gate 49 in the left area (there is no pass gate 49 in the right area). . On the downstream side of the passage gate 49, a second starting port 4401 and a method of changing the ease of winning a game ball to the second starting port 4401 by allowing the transparent panel 172 to move back and forth in the front-rear direction. Alternatively, a movable member 4651 is provided which can be changed between a mode in which a game ball cannot be awarded to the second starting port 4401 and a mode in which it is possible. Further, downstream of the second starting port 4401, a small hit prize port 5400, a small hit shutter 6100 capable of moving forward and backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, and a small hit prize for driving the small hit shutter 6100. A mouth solenoid (not shown) is provided.

  The movable member 4651 is configured to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction with respect to the transparent panel 172. When the normal symbol enters a specific stop display mode (hit) in the ordinary symbol display portion 71, the movable member 4651 operates forward. The game ball 4651 is guided to the second starting port 4401 (rearward direction). In this manner, the movable member 4651 changes the second starting port 4401 from a mode in which it is difficult to win a game ball to a mode in which it is easy. In the electric support state, the main CPU 101 operates the movable member 4651 in the forward direction so that the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 4401 is facilitated. Note that when the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 4401 is not facilitated (when it is difficult to win the game ball), the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 4401 is performed by the first starting port. It is almost the same as the winning of the game ball to the mouth 5442, or is slightly more difficult to win the game ball than the first starting port 5442.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, the passing gate 49, the first starting port 5442, the second starting port 4401, and the small hit prize port 5400 all pass through or pass through the left-hitting game ball. It is configured to be able to win. The large winning opening 540 is configured such that a right-hit game ball can win.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, the main CPU 101 shows a special symbol variation time determination table referred to when determining the special symbol variation time, as shown in FIG. 259 is executed to change from the low start special symbol fluctuation time determination table to the high start special symbol fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG. The processing by the main CPU 101 at this time will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 271 is an example of a flowchart showing a variable time determination table setting process executed by the main CPU 101 when the small hitting gaming state ends in the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment.

  With reference to FIG. 271, the variable time determination table setting process executed when the small hitting game state ends will be described. The main CPU 101 first determines whether or not the small hitting game state has shifted (step S1821). If the small hitting game state is not being executed or the small hitting game state is being executed (NO in step S1821), the main CPU 101 changes the fluctuation time determination table referred to when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Without doing this, the variable time determination table setting process ends. If it is determined that the small hitting game state has ended (YES in step S1821), the main CPU 101 displays the set fluctuation time determination table, that is, the fluctuation time determination table currently used for reference, in FIG. 258. It is determined whether or not the low start special symbol fluctuation time determination table is set (step S1822). If the set fluctuation time determination table is the low start special symbol fluctuation time determination table (YES in step S1822), the main CPU 101 refers to the fluctuation time determination table for determining the special symbol fluctuation time. Is set in the variable time determination table for the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 259 (step S1823), and the variable time determination table setting process ends. On the other hand, if the set fluctuation time determination table is not the low-start special symbol fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG. 258 (NO in step S1822), main CPU 101 determines the special symbol fluctuation time. The change time determination table setting process ends without changing the change time determination table referred to at this time. In step S1822, if the set fluctuation time determination table is not the fluctuation time determination table for the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 258, the currently set fluctuation time determination table is the high fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG. It will be a start time special symbol fluctuation time determination table.

  Therefore, while determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol with reference to the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for the low start, the result of the second special lottery is obtained even if the game ball wins in the second starting port 4401. Unless it is a "big hit", the fluctuation display (long fluctuations A to C) of the second special symbol is performed for an extremely long time, and thus the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is mainly performed. Therefore, the frequency with which the small hit prize port 5400 is opened so that the game ball to the small prize prize port 5400 wins is relatively small.

  On the other hand, after the end of the small hitting game state, the table is changed to the high-start special symbol fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG. 259, and then the right-hit game ball is placed in the second starting port 4401. When a prize is won, most of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol fluctuates at a very high speed, and a game ball can be awarded to the small hit winning opening 5400 with a probability of about 1/5, and the launch ball per unit time The specific state is such that the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number exceeds one.

  In the above description, the state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of fired balls per unit time exceeds 1 is defined as the specified state. However, the expected value of the number of prize balls does not exceed 1, but the design value ( For example, the state set to 0.99) may be the second specific state. In this case, it is desirable that the expected value is higher than the expected value (for example, 0.90) when the vehicle is left-handed during the time saving state (during electric power support). During the left-handed time-saving state, shift to the second specific state triggered by a small hit, start right-handed, and then increase the expected value of three steps by shifting to the more advantageous specific state by exhausting the number of time savings Can be performed. Note that this variation in which the variation pattern changes due to a small hit is not limited to the fourth embodiment, and can be applied in a range applicable to other embodiments.

  Further, in the modification of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, as described above, when the small hitting game state ends, the special symbol for the low start is changed from the special symbol for the high start to the special symbol for the high start (see FIG. 258). Since it is changed to the symbol variation time determination table (see FIG. 259), when the variation time of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation time determination table of the special symbol for low start (in this modified example, the player It is desirable to be able to win the "small hit" when the player hits left. For example, in the first special lottery with a probability that does not exceed the expected value range (for example, 55% to 60%) of the number of launch balls per unit time in the “normal game state” in the first special lottery, When a ball is won or left-handed, a game ball is placed in the second starting port 4401 with a frequency that does not exceed the range of the expected value of the number of launch balls per unit time in the "normal game state" for the number of launch balls. It is good to win a prize.

  As described above, the main CPU 101 sets the fluctuation time determination table, which is referred to when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol, on the basis of the end of the small hitting game state of the special symbol for the low start shown in FIG. By changing the fluctuating time determination table to the fluctuating time determining table of the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 259, for example, game balls can be placed in the small hit winning opening 5400 despite being controlled to the small hitting game state. It is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest that may occur when a prize cannot be won.

  In addition, the main CPU 101 determines the variation time determination table to be referred to when determining the variation time of the special symbol from the variation time determination table of the special symbol for the low start with the end of the small hitting game state. After changing to the symbol variation time determination table, a high period is kept until a predetermined period (for example, a period until the special symbol variation display is executed a predetermined number of times, or a period such as until the big hit game ends) elapses. The change time of the special symbol is determined with reference to the start special symbol change time determination table. The main CPU 101 may change to the low start special symbol fluctuation time determination table based on the lapse of the period, or may change the low start special symbol fluctuation time based on the lapse of the period. A determination may be made as to whether to change to the determination table or to continue to refer to the high-start special symbol variation time determination table.

  By the way, in the above description, when the small hitting game state ends while the low start special symbol variation time determination table is set, the low start special symbol variation time determination table is always changed to the high start special symbol variation time determination table. But it is not limited to this. For example, when the small hitting game state ends when the special symbol fluctuation time determination table for the low start is set, the main CPU 101 sets a predetermined condition (for example, whether the main CPU 101 changes the table or not). To win this lottery, and whether a plurality of small hit symbols are provided and the table is changed if the small hit symbol is 1 and the table is not changed if the small hit symbol is 2). If the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the reference to the low start special symbol fluctuation time determination table is continued, and based on the predetermined condition being satisfied, the high start special symbol fluctuation time determination table is determined. May be changed.

[Modification of Pachinko Machine of Fourth Embodiment]
Next, a modification of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment will be described. The external configuration of a variation of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment is the same as that of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment (FIG. 270). That is, the passing gate 49, the first starting port 5442, the second starting port 4401, and the small hit prize port 5400 are all configured such that a left-hit game ball can pass or win. The large winning opening 540 is configured such that a right-hit game ball can win.

  In the variation of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines the change time of the special symbol, and in principle, in the "normal gaming state", the change of the special symbol for the low start shown in FIG. Performing with reference to the time determination table, the "high-accuracy time-short game state", "high-accuracy non-time-short game state" or "low-accuracy time-short game state", the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 272, but only during a predetermined period after the backup is cleared, referring to the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for middle start shown in FIG. 272.

  FIG. 272 is a diagram illustrating a table stored in the main ROM 102 in a variation of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, which is a table for determining a variable time (variable display time) of a special symbol for a middle start. The table shown in FIG. 272 displays the fluctuation display of the second special symbol when the result of the second special lottery is “small hit” or “loss”, and the fluctuation of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 258. The time is shorter than the time (58000 msec to 60000 msec) specified in the time determination table and longer than the time (1000 msec) specified in the fluctuation time determination table for the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. Things.

  FIG. 273 is a flowchart illustrating a variable time determination table setting process executed by the main CPU 101 in a variation of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment.

  With reference to FIG. 273, a description will be given of a variable time determination table setting process in a variation of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment.

  The main CPU 101 first determines whether or not the backup clear switch 330 has been operated to clear the backup (step S1824). If the backup has been cleared (YES in step S1824), the main CPU 101 sets the fluctuation time determination table, which is referred to when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol based on the fact that the backup has been cleared, as shown in FIG. It is set in the special symbol fluctuation time determination table for start (step S1825). On the other hand, if the backup has not been cleared (NO in step S1824), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S1826. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the big hit gaming state has ended (step S1826). If the big hit gaming state has not ended (NO in step S1826), the main CPU 101 ends the variable time determination table setting processing. Even when the big hit gaming state is not yet controlled, the main CPU 101 determines NO in step S1826. When the big hit gaming state ends (YES in step S1826), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to shift to the “normal gaming state” (step S1827). When the destination of the gaming state after the big hitting gaming state ends is the “normal gaming state” (YES in step S1827), the main CPU 101 sets the special symbol based on the transition to the “normal gaming state”. The fluctuation time determination table referred to when determining the fluctuation time is set in the fluctuation time determination table for the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 258 (step S1828), and the fluctuation time determination table setting processing ends. On the other hand, the transition destination of the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is not the "normal gaming state", that is, the transition destination is the "high-accuracy time-short gaming state", the "high-accuracy non-short-time gaming state" or the "low-accuracy time-short gaming". State "(NO in step S1827), the main CPU 101 sets the special symbol based on the transition to the" high-accuracy time-saving gaming state "," high-accuracy non-hour-saving gaming state ", or" low-accuracy time-saving gaming state ". The fluctuation time determination table referred to when determining the fluctuation time is set in the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 259 (step S1829), and the fluctuation time determination table setting processing ends.

  As described above, in the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, when the backup clear is performed, the main CPU 101 sets the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol to be referred to as the special symbol for the middle start shown in FIG. The control for changing to the fluctuation time determination table is executed.

  Then, when the change time determination table of the special symbol to be referred to is changed to the change time determination table of the special symbol for the middle start shown in FIG. The time is determined with reference to the special symbol variation time determination table for the middle start shown in FIG. That is, if the special symbol fluctuation time determination table is changed to the special symbol fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG. 272 due to the backup clear being performed, the special symbol fluctuation time determination table is maintained until the big hit game state ends. Is not changed. That is, once the change is made to the special symbol fluctuation time determination table for the middle start shown in FIG. 272, this table is not changed unless the special symbol is variably displayed and "big hit" is derived.

  In the above description, if the table is changed to the special symbol fluctuation time determination table for the middle start, this table is not changed until the big hitting game state ends. However, the table is not limited to this. When the change display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), the reference to the change time determination table of the special symbol for the middle start is ended, and the change time determination of the special symbol for the low start shown in FIG. The table may be referred to. In this case, for example, a predetermined period (until the variable display of the second special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) after the opening of the hall) is set in a state advantageous to the player according to the intention of the gaming machine manager. It becomes possible.

  Although not shown in FIG. 273, when the backup clear is performed (step S1824), the main CPU 101 reads the special symbol change time determination table for low start shown in FIG. The processing for changing to the special symbol fluctuation time determination table for the start is performed, but the fluctuation time determination for the special symbol for the medium start shown in FIG. 272 is determined from the special symbol fluctuation time determination table for the high start shown in FIG. The process of changing to a table may not be performed.

  As described above, the main CPU 101 sets the fluctuation time determination table, which is referred to when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol, to the fluctuation time of the special symbol for the middle start shown in FIG. 272 based on the fact that the backup clear has been performed. By changing to the determination table, it is possible to adjust the expected value of the prize ball number with respect to the number of launch balls per unit time, for example, at the time of opening of a hall or the like by the gaming machine manager.

  In a variation of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth example, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, among a plurality of (for example, six levels) setting values having different “big hit” probabilities in the special lottery, A gaming machine in which a special lottery is executed based on any one of the set values may be used. Then, only when the one set value is a specific set value (for example, the set value 6), when the sub CPU 201 executes a specific effect such that the one set value can be estimated, It is possible to provide more interesting gaming properties.

  As described above, if the gaming machine is to execute the special lottery based on any one of the plurality of setting values having different “big hit” probabilities in the special lottery, one set value is specified. Not only the effect that can be inferred to be the set value of, but also, for example, one set value is an odd number (for example, set values 1, 3, 5) or an even number (for example, set values 2, 4, and 6) An effect that can be inferred may be executed. For example, in the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, when the result of the second special lottery is “losing”, it is determined by referring to the special symbol variation time determination table for the middle start in FIG. 272. The average of the variable display time of the second special symbol is uniform at 60000 msec regardless of the set value. Instead of this, a table in which the average of the variable display time of the second special symbol is, for example, 60000 msec and a table in which the average is 610000 msec are stored in the main ROM, and the main CPU 101 determines that one set value is an odd number (for example, set values 1, 3). 5), a table in which the average of the variable display time of the second special symbol is, for example, 60000 msec is referred to, and if one set value is an even number (for example, the set value 2, 4, 6), The variable display time of the second special symbol may be determined with reference to a table in which the average of the variable display time of the second special symbol is, for example, 61000 msec. As a result, the player can estimate one set value based on the variable display time of the second special symbol, and can further enhance the interest in the game.

[Pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment]
Next, a description will be given of a pachinko gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment. The pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment has a partly different structure from the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254) in the board configuration of the gaming board unit 17 (see FIG. 274). Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment is different from the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment in the probability that the "small hit" is derived by performing the variable display of the second special symbol.

  FIG. 274 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 274, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254), the large-award winning port 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are provided in the gaming area 20 as in the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment. And an opening mode that enables (or facilitates) winning of a game ball to the special winning opening 540 by driving the shutter 610 by the special winning opening solenoid, which is disposed above and to the right of the liquid crystal display device 16. And a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball to the special winning opening 540. In the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, when the special winning opening 540 is in the open mode, all or almost all of the right-hit game balls win the special winning opening 540.

  Further, on the downstream side of the special winning opening 540 and on the lower right side of the liquid crystal display device 16, a normal electric accessory unit 400 is arranged. The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is a unit body in which the second starting port 440 and the ordinary electric accessory 460 are integrated, but need not necessarily be unitized and may be separate.

  Like the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the ordinary electric accessory 460 changes the ease of winning a game ball to the second starting port 440 by allowing the transparent panel 172 to move forward and backward with respect to the transparent panel 172. Alternatively, a movable shutter 4650 is provided which can be changed between a mode in which it is not possible to win a game ball to the second starting port 440 and a mode in which it is possible. Further, the ordinary electric accessory 460 includes a starting port solenoid 4630 (see, for example, FIGS. 53 and 54) and a power transmission mechanism (not shown) for transmitting the power of the starting port solenoid 4630 to the movable shutter 4650.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, when the open mode is such that the winning in the second starting port 440 is facilitated, of the game balls hit right, of the gaming balls that have not won the large winning port 540, out of the game balls hit right. All or most of them are configured to win the second starting port 440.

  In addition, a receiving member 3000 that temporarily receives game balls that have not won the big winning opening 540 among the right-hit game balls is formed on the upper right side of the ordinary electric accessory 460. The receiving member 3000 has a function of stopping or weakening the momentum of the flowing game ball and dropping the game ball to the upstream side (right side) of the movable shutter 4650.

  The movable shutter 4650 is a plate-like member on which the game ball can roll on the upper surface in the left-right direction, and is configured to be able to move forward and backward with respect to the transparent panel 172 as described above. When the movable shutter 4650 is moving forward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the second starting port 440 is in an open state, and when the movable shutter 4650 is retracting backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the second starting port 440 is in the second state. The starting port 440 is in a closed mode.

  When the movable shutter 4650 advances forward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the movable shutter 4650 can receive a game ball dropped from the receiving member 3000 on the upstream side (right side). The game ball is configured to roll with the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650 toward the downstream side (left side).

  The second starting port 440 is disposed at the most downstream side of the movable shutter 4650, and is opened so that the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650 can receive game balls rolling from the upstream side to the downstream side. . However, if the movable shutter 4650 retreats backward in a state where there is a game ball that is rolling on the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650 but has not yet reached the second starting port 440, the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650 is rolled. The moving game ball falls without winning the second starting port 440.

  Below the normal electric accessory unit 400, a flow-down path forming unit 5500 that forms a flow-down path of a game ball that has not won the second starting port 440 is arranged. The flow-down path forming section 5500 includes a first flow-down path 5501 in which a game ball dropped from the receiving member 3000 flows down when the movable shutter 4650 is retracted backward, and when the movable shutter 4650 retracts backward. And a second flow-down path 5502 through which the game balls rolling on the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650 flow down.

  In addition, the downflow path forming unit 5500 is configured such that all the game balls rolling on the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650 necessarily flow down the second downflow path 5502 when the movable shutter 4650 retreats backward. For example, a game ball on the most upstream side of the movable shutter 4650 (a game ball that has just dropped from the receiving member 3000) is configured to flow down the first flow-down path 5501. You may.

  A small hitting unit 5300 is arranged below the flow-down path forming unit 5500. The small hitting unit 5300 includes a small hitting winning opening 5400, a plate-shaped small hitting shutter 6100 capable of moving back and forth with respect to the transparent panel 172, and a small hitting winning opening solenoid for driving the small hitting shutter 6100 ( (Not shown). When the small hitting shutter 6100 is operated and the small hitting winning opening 5400 is in the open mode, the game ball that has flowed down the first flow-down path 5501 (the game ball that has reached the small hitting unit 5300 among the game balls hit right) All or most of the ball (ball) wins the small hit prize port 5400.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the first starting port 5442, the small hit winning port 5400, the small hitting shutter 6100 capable of moving back and forth with respect to the transparent panel 172, and the small hitting shutter 6100 The attacker unit 5000 is constituted by the driven small hit prize opening solenoid, but the small starting unit 5300 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment has the first starting port 5442 as a separate body.

  On the downstream side of the small hit winning opening 5400, a passing gate 49 is arranged. The passage gate 49 gives an opportunity for a normal symbol determination on the condition that a game ball passes, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. In a time-saving state, a game ball is awarded to the second starting port 440. Will be in a state of electrical support which is facilitated. Game balls that flowed down the first flow-down path 5501 but could not win the small hits win port 5400 because the small-winning winning port 5400 was closed, and all or most of the game balls that flowed down the second flow-down path 5502 It is configured to pass through the passage gate 49.

  In addition, between the big winning opening 540 and the second starting port 440, a down flow path 2500 through which a game ball can flow down is formed. It is configured such that a certain time or more is required until a game ball that does not win the winning opening 540 flows down the first flow-down path 5501 and reaches the small hitting unit 5300. The time equal to or longer than the predetermined time is at least a time longer than an interval time when the big hit game ends and a change time of the second special symbol in which the big hit game state ends and the first change starts. It is preferable that The reason will be described later.

  Also, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the probability that the "small hit" is derived by performing the variable display of the second special symbol is about one-fifth, but in the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment. If the "big hit" is not derived when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the "small hit" is always derived. That is, the probability that the result of the second special lottery is “losing” is 0, and all except “big hit” are “small hits”. It is to be noted that, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed, it is not necessarily limited that “small hit” is derived, and the probability is extremely low as compared with when “small hit” is derived. “Loss” may be derived.

(Game flow)
First, in the “normal game state”, a general player makes a left-handed strike. When the left-hit game ball wins the first starting port 5442, the main CPU 101 performs a variable display of the first special symbol. When the "big hit" is derived by performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the main CPU 101 executes control for shifting from the "normal gaming state" to the big hit gaming state.

  The pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment is configured as a gaming machine that can be controlled to be in a "normal gaming state" that is not in the power support state or in a "time reduction state" in which the power support state is set. In this “time saving state”, the probability that the “big hit” is derived when the special symbol is fluctuated and displayed may be higher or lower than the “normal gaming state”.

  In the big hit game state, a general player plays a game by right-handed. After the big hit game state ends, the main CPU 101 executes control for shifting to the “normal game state” or the “time reduction state”. When a control for shifting to the “normal game state” is executed by the main CPU 101, the general player returns to left-handed and plays the game, but the control for shifting to the “time reduction state” is executed by the main CPU 101. And play the game by right-handed.

  In the big hit game state, all or most of the right-hit game balls enter the large winning opening 540, so that it is difficult to pass the game balls through the passage gate 49 or to allow the second starting opening 440 to win game balls. It is. Therefore, it is difficult to suspend the start memory of the second special symbol in the big hit game state. On the other hand, when the game is not in the big hit game state, when the game is played by right-handing, the starting memory of the second special symbol can be held as long as the right-hit game ball does not win the small hit winning opening 5400. I have. However, in the "normal game state", since a general player plays a game by left-handing, the start storage of the second special symbol is not suspended.

  Therefore, the transition from the “normal gaming state” to the big hit gaming state, and when the big hit gaming state ends, at the time the big hit gaming state ends, there is a possibility that the start memory of the second special symbol may not be held. high. On the other hand, the state shifts from the "time saving state" to the big hit gaming state, and when the big hit gaming state ends, when the big hit gaming state ends, the starting memory of the second special symbol is held up to the upper limit of four. Probability is high.

  When the big hitting game state ends and the control to shift to the "time saving state" is executed, and when the starting memory of the second special symbol is not held at that time, the game ball that is first right-handed goes down the downflow path 2500. After flowing down and once received by the receiving member 3000, it flows down the first flow-down path 5501 without rolling on the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650, does not win the small hit winning opening 5400, and passes through the passing gate 49. Pass through. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 49, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol determination. When the ordinary symbol determination is performed, the main CPU 101 displays the variation of the ordinary symbol for a very short time, and derives the result of the ordinary symbol determination to the ordinary symbol display unit 71 (see FIG. 8). Normally, the result of the symbol determination is a hit with a probability of 100% or close to 100%. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the pass gate 49, the movable shutter 4650 moves forward with respect to the transparent panel 172 with a probability of almost 100%. , And the second starting port 440 is opened.

  When the second starting port 440 is in the open mode, the game ball that has flowed down the flow-down path 2500 is once received by the receiving member 3000 and then falls to the upstream side of the movable shutter 4650, and the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650 is removed. It rolls from the upstream side to the downstream side, and then wins the second starting port 440.

  When a game ball wins in the second starting port 440, the main CPU 101 conducts a second special lottery, and derives the result of the second special lottery after performing a variable display of the second special symbol. In the “short game state”, the main CPU 101 performs the fluctuation display of the second special symbol at a super-high speed fluctuation of 1000 msec. In the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, unlike the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed, the main CPU 101 always outputs “big hit” when the “big hit” is not derived. "Small hit" is derived. That is, when the result of the second special lottery is not “big hit”, the main CPU 101 performs the second special lottery so as to be always “small hit”. However, when the "big hit" is not derived, it is not limited to the mode in which the "small hit" is always derived. When the "big hit" is not derived, the probability that the "small hit" is derived With very low probability, "losing" may be derived very rarely.

  When the variable display of the second special symbol is performed and “small hit” is derived, the movable shutter 4650 advances forward with respect to the transparent panel 172, and the second start port 440 is in an open mode. However, as described above, when the second starting port 440 is in the open mode, all or most of the game balls dropped from the receiving member 3000 fall on the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650, and the game balls to the first downflow path 5501 Is prevented, and the game ball does not reach the small hit prize port 5400.

  Further, the game ball dropped on the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650 wins the second starting port 440 or flows down the second flow-down path 5502 and passes through the passing gate 49. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 49, the movable shutter 4650 advances forward with respect to the transparent panel 172 again with a probability of almost 100%, and the second starting port 440 is opened. Then, all or most of the game balls dropped from the receiving member 3000 again fall on the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650, and the entry of the game balls into the first flow-down path 5501 is inhibited, and the game balls fall on the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650. The game ball wins the second starting port 440 or flows down the second flow path 5502 and passes through the passing gate 49. Therefore, when the game is played in the “time saving state”, the winning start of the second special symbol can be suspended by the main CPU 101 up to the upper limit.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, when a game ball wins in the second starting port 440, a "small hit" is almost always derived when a "big hit" is not derived. In the “time saving state”, the small winning opening 5400 is almost fully open. However, in this “time saving state”, all or most of the right-hitting game balls pass through the second starting port 440 or pass through the passing gate 49, so that the game balls to the small hit winning port 5400 are Winning will be hindered. The game balls that have passed through the passage gate 49 are discharged out of the machine through the out port 57.

  At the timing when the movable shutter 4650 retreats backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the game ball dropped from the receiving member 3000 may flow down the first flow-down path 5501 and win the small hit winning opening 5400. The expected value of the number of award balls with respect to the number of launch balls per unit time does not exceed 1.

  When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and the "big hit" is derived in a state where the starting winning of the second special symbol is suspended by the main CPU 101, for example, to the upper limit, the main CPU 101 sets the big hit game state. Move to In the big hitting game state, neither the first special symbol starting condition nor the second special symbol starting condition is satisfied, so the holding of the second special symbol starting memory held up to the upper limit is maintained until the big hit gaming state ends. I do.

  In the big hit game state, as described above, all or most of the right-hit game balls win the big winning opening 540. Even if some of the game balls hit right in the big hit game state do not win the big winning opening 540, the main CPU 101 determines the normal symbol regardless of whether or not the big hit game state. , And the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbols is performed for a very short time, so that the start storage of the ordinary symbols is rarely held at the time when the big hit game state ends.

  Therefore, when the big hit game state ends, if the start storage of the second special symbol is held, if the big hit game state ends, the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied, and the main CPU 101 sets the small hit game state. (The small hitting shutter 6100 is operated to control the small hit winning opening 5400 in an open mode). At this time, since the start memory of the ordinary symbol is not held as described above, the movable shutter 4650 is retracted backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, and the game ball dropped from the receiving member 3000 is moved down the first downward. Down the route 5501, it is possible to win the small hit prize port 5400, and temporarily, the expected state of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of launch balls per unit time exceeds 1 is a specific state. This specific state is maintained for the number of the second special symbol start memories stored. However, in this specific state, all or most of the right-hit game balls flow down the first flow-down path 5501 and enter the small hit prize hole 5400, so that it is difficult for the game balls to reach the pass gate 49. As a result, since the second starting port 440 is not in the open mode, the starting memory of the second special symbol is not newly held, and only the held starting memory is consumed. Then, the specific state ends when all the holdings of the start memory of the second special symbol are exhausted.

  When the specific state ends, the main CPU 101 no longer controls the small hitting game state, and the game ball can pass through the pass gate 49. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 49, as described above, the movable shutter 4650 advances forward with respect to the transparent panel 172 with a probability of almost 100%, and the second starting port 440 is opened. Then, all or most of the game balls dropped from the receiving member 3000 again fall on the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650, and the entry of the game balls into the first downflow path 5501 is hindered, and the small hit winning opening 5400 is won. Is difficult.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed, "small hit" is derived as long as it is not "big hit". In this case, the main CPU 101 displays the variation of the second special symbol in any one of the long variations A to C (see, for example, FIG. 258), so that there is no merit of right-handed gaming.

  As described above, the limited period such as the specific state after the end of the big hit game state is obtained in the big hit game state by making the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of fired balls per unit time exceed 1. In addition to the prize balls that can be obtained, prize balls can be obtained even in a specific state. In particular, if the number of prize balls that can be acquired in one small hitting game state is, for example, 100 balls, if the starting memory of the second special symbol is suspended to the upper limit of four at the time when the big hitting game state ends, About 400 prize balls can be acquired, and it is possible to greatly motivate the player to play the game. At this time, similarly to the first embodiment, even if it is notified that a larger number of prize balls can be acquired than the jackpot prize balls that can be originally acquired by displaying the four small jackpots as a series of effects with the previous jackpot. Good. This special state is unlikely to occur in the "normal game state", and is likely to occur in the "high-precision time-saving game state" or the "low-precision time-short game state" which is the power support state. It is possible to give a great sense of expectation to a jackpot that can occur in the “low-probability time-saving gaming state”. Further, as in the other embodiments, a jackpot type may be provided such that the specific state is continued as the “probably variable non-saving time state” until the next jackpot as well as four times after the jackpot.

In addition, in the “time reduction state”, when the holding of the ordinary symbol is interrupted, the period in which the movable shutter 4650 is closed increases, and the winning in the small hit winning opening 5400 becomes different from the intention of the designer. Things can happen. In this case, it is desirable to open and close the movable shutter 4650 so as not to interrupt the holding of the ordinary symbols. For example, it is desirable to define an opening pattern such that a 1000 msec opening, a 50 msec closing, a 1000 msec opening, and a 50 msec closing are repeated in one winning of a normal symbol, and the total opening time becomes 6000 msec. At this time, for the closing time of 50 msec, the game ball rolling on the movable shutter 4650 is not caught by the next opening, and the game ball immediately above the movable shutter 4650 is also caused to fall by the first downflow path even by natural fall. It is desirable that the time does not flow into the 5501. By doing so, game balls passing through the passage gate 49 via the second downflow path 5502 at a ratio of several balls to one ball are generated, so that the normal downflow to the first downflow path 5501 is not interrupted. Of the game balls can be suppressed.

  Note that the above-described specific state can be realized in the “time reduction state” in which the power support state is set after the big hit game state ends, but is not necessarily realized only in the “time reduction state” in which the power support state is set. In other words, the “time reduction state” in which the electric support state is set is a state in which winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is facilitated as compared with the “normal game state”, but the “normal game state” If the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is not facilitated as compared with the above, the electronic support state is not established. For this reason, even in the “normal game state”, the result of the ordinary symbol determination performed based on the fact that the right-hitting game ball has passed through the passing gate 49 is a hit with a probability of 100% or a probability close to 100%. The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning in the second starting opening 440 is set to one ball, and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to a long fluctuation in the "normal game state", and after the big hit game state ends. In the gaming state, by making the speed change super fast, the specific state can be realized without changing the gaming state after the big hitting gaming state ends to the “time reduction state” in which the electric support state is reached.

[Sixth Embodiment Pachinko Machine]
Next, a description will be given of a pachinko gaming machine according to a sixth embodiment. The pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment has a partly different configuration from the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254) in the board surface configuration of the gaming board unit 17 (see FIG. 275). In the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is controlled to the "normal gaming state" which is not the electric support state or the "highly accurate time-saving gaming state" which is the electric support state. . In the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, the special symbol variation time (variable display time) determination table referred to in the “high-accuracy time-saving gaming state” and the “high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state” is also the same as the first embodiment. Different from the example pachinko machine.

  FIG. 275 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 275, the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment is similar to the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254). And an opening mode that enables (or facilitates) winning of a game ball to the special winning opening 540 by driving the shutter 610 by the special winning opening solenoid, which is disposed above and to the right of the liquid crystal display device 16. And a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball to the special winning opening 540. In the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, when the special winning opening 540 is in the open mode, all or most of the right-hit game balls are configured to win the special winning opening 540.

  A passing gate 49 is disposed downstream of the special winning opening 540 and to the right of the liquid crystal display device 16. The pass gate 49 normally gives an opportunity for symbol determination on condition that the game ball passes.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment is provided with a first starting port through which a right-hit game ball can be awarded downstream of the passage gate 49 in addition to the first starting port 5442 provided conventionally. I have. For the sake of distinction, the first starting port arranged on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 is referred to as a first starting port 5443 for the sake of convenience. The control by the main CPU 101 is almost the same as when a game ball is won in the mouth 5443.

  Above the first starting port 5443, there is provided a movable member 4652 that can be changed between a mode in which it is impossible for the game ball to enter the first starting port 5443 (closed mode) and a mode in which it is possible (open mode). ing. The main CPU 101 activates the movable member 4652 at a higher frequency than in the "normal game state" based on the result of the ordinary symbol determination being a hit in the "high-accuracy time-saving game state". The winning of 5443 is facilitated.

  A second starting port 440 is disposed below and below the first starting port 5443. When a game ball is won in the second starting port 440, the main CPU 101 performs a change display of the second special symbol. However, like the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the probability that the "small hit" is derived is about 5 minutes. It is 1.

  Below the first starting port 5443, a small hitting shutter 6100 that can move forward and backward with respect to the small hit winning port 5400 and the transparent panel 172 is arranged. The small hitting shutter 6100 can be driven by a small hit winning opening solenoid (not shown). When the small hitting shutter 6100 operates in the forward direction with respect to the transparent panel 172, the small hit winning opening 5400 is in a closed mode. It becomes an open mode. If the result of the second special lottery is "small hit", the main CPU 101 performs a fluctuation display of the second special symbol and derives a result indicating "small hit". When the result of "small hit" is derived, the main CPU 101 controls the small hitting game state in which the small hitting shutter 6100 is operated so that the small hit winning opening 5400 is in an open mode.

  An out port 5444 for discharging a game ball outside the machine without winning a prize is disposed at the upper right of the first start port 5443.

  In addition, the right-hitting game ball flows down any one of a flowing path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443, a flowing path 5451 toward the second starting port 440, and a flowing path 5452 toward the out port 5444. It is constituted, for example, by an obstacle nail so as to flow down the route. Of these three flow paths, the flow path of the game ball having the highest flow rate is the flow path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443, and then the flow path 5451 toward the second start port 440, and the flow rate of the game ball is the highest. Is a downflow path 5452 toward the out port 5444.

  The game balls flowing down the flow-down path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443 are configured such that when the first starting port 5443 is in an open mode, all or most of the game balls enter the first starting port 5443. . Therefore, when the first start port 5443 is in the open mode, even if the small hit prize port 5400 is in the open mode, the game ball flowing down the flow path 5450 toward the first start port 5443 is the small hit prize port. It is difficult to win 5400.

  On the other hand, when the game ball cannot enter the first starting port 544, the game ball flowing down the flowing path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443 is guided to the right side of the first starting port 5443. He reaches the small hit prize port 5400. At this time, if the small hit prize port 5400 is in the open mode, the game ball wins in the small hit prize port 5400, and the main CPU 101 sends the game ball to the small hit prize port 5400 via the payout / launch control circuit 300. Pay out prize balls based on the winning of. Game balls that have reached the small hit prize port 5400 but have not won the small hit prize port 5400 flow further downstream, and are eventually discharged out of the machine through the out port 57. Therefore, in the “high-precision time-saving gaming state” in which it is easy to win a prize to the first starting port 5443 at a higher frequency than in the “normal gaming state”, even if the small hitting winning port 5400 is in the open mode, Although it is difficult for game balls to win in the winning opening 5400, the winning frequency to the first starting port 544 is lower than that in the "high-precision time-saving game state". , A larger amount of game balls flow toward the small hit prize opening 5400, and these large amounts of game spheres win the small hit prize opening 5400 if the small hit prize opening 5400 is in an open mode. Can be done.

(Game flow)
Next, the flow of a game in the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment will be described. The main CPU 101 controls the game state to any one of the “normal game state”, the “high-accuracy time-saving game state”, and the “high-accuracy non-time-saving game state”. However, in addition to this, although not essential, it may be controlled to the “low-probability time-saving gaming state”.

  In the “normal game state”, when a game ball fired toward the game area 20 wins the first starting port 5442, the main CPU 101 performs a first special lottery. If the result of the first special lottery is “big hit”, the main CPU 101 executes control to shift to a big hit gaming state. In this "normal game state", the main CPU 101 refers to the low start special symbol fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG. Determine the time.

  When the big hit game state ends, the main CPU 101 determines the type of the big hit according to the hit selection symbol command related to the big hit, as in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, and according to the determined type of the big hit. Then, control is performed to shift the gaming state after the big hitting gaming state ends to the “normal gaming state” or the “high-accuracy time-saving gaming state”.

  In the “high-accuracy non-time-saving game state” and the “high-accuracy non-time-saving game state” which is controlled after the time-saving game is consumed in the “high-accuracy time-saving game state”, the pachinko game of the first embodiment is performed. Unlike the machine, the special symbol change time is determined with reference to the special symbol change time determination table in FIG.

  FIG. 276 is a table stored in the main ROM 102 in the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, which is another example of a variable time (variable display time) determination table for a special symbol for a high start (another example of FIG. 259). ). The difference between the high start special symbol change time determination table shown in FIG. 276 and the high start special symbol change time determination table shown in FIG. 259 is that the result of the first special lottery is “big hit”. At one point, the change display of the first special symbol can be performed for an extremely long time, for example, 300,000 msec (long change F) to 600,000 msec (long change D). When the result of the second special lottery is “losing”, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed in a very short time, for example, 1000 msec.

  As described in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the result of one of the first special lottery and the second special lottery is a "big hit", and the change of the special symbol based on the "big hit". During the display, even if the start condition of the other special symbol is satisfied, the other special lottery is executed as a non-winning process that does not become a "big hit". Therefore, when the result of the first special lottery is “big hit”, during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol based on the “big hit”, even if the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied, the main CPU 101 The second special lottery is executed as a non-winning process that does not result in a “big hit”.

  However, even if the main CPU 101 executes the non-winning process in which the second special lottery does not become the "big hit", in the non-winning process, the main CPU 101 wins the "small hit" with a probability of about 1/5. In the “high-precision time-saving gaming state”, since all or most of the game balls flowing down the flow path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443 win the first starting port 5443, it is difficult to win the small hit winning port 5400. It is. However, when the game mode shifts from the “high-accuracy time-saving game state” to the “high-accuracy non-time-saving game state”, the game is no longer in the power support state. The frequency of winning in the small hit winning opening 5400 without winning 5443 increases, and the expected value of the number of award balls with respect to the number of firing balls per unit time increases.

  That is, when the result of the first special lottery is “big hit” in the “high-precision time-saving gaming state”, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol for an extremely long time, for example, 600,000 msec (long fluctuation D) is performed. During the period (until the result of the "big hit" is derived), for example, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed in an extremely short time such as 1000 msec (super-speed fluctuation), so that the time-saving game is digested. When the determined number of time-saving games is exhausted, the main CPU 101 executes control for shifting from the “high-precision time-saving game state” to the “high-accuracy non-time-saving game state”. Until the fluctuation display of the first special symbol ends and the result of "big hit" is derived, the result of the second special lottery does not become "big hit", during which, for example, 1000 msec (super-speed fluctuation) The fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed in an extremely short time, and the prize ball is obtained by winning the “small hit” with a high probability of about 1/5. This is a specific state in which the expected value of the number of award balls exceeds 1. In this way, it is possible to enhance amusement of a game by realizing the game property of obtaining a prize ball and creating an unlimited specific state. In addition, it is preferable that the gauge configuration is such that when the player makes a right hit, the hold of the second start memory always becomes the upper limit (for example, four).

  Note that the number of working hours may always be a fixed number (for example, 100 times). However, if the number of times saved in the “high-accuracy time-saving gaming state” is made different each time a special symbol is changed and a “big hit” is derived, it is possible to further enhance interest. For example, by making the number of times reduced in the “high accuracy time reduction gaming state” different each time “big hit” is derived, the result of the first special lottery becomes “big hit” in the “high accuracy time reduction gaming state” ( Due to the timing, the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a long variation), the following fun occurs. In other words, it does not mean that the timing at which the result of the first special lottery becomes “big hit” (the fluctuation display of the first special symbol becomes a long fluctuation) in the “high-precision time-saving gaming state” should be early. For example, when the number of time savings is 100, if the fluctuation display of the first special symbol has a long fluctuation at an early timing, the period of the specific state may be shortened. There is also a possibility that the fluctuation display of the 1 special symbol is stopped and the state is controlled to the big hit game state. Further, when the number of time savings is a relatively short number (for example, 24 times), the longer the fluctuation display of the first special symbol becomes at the earlier timing, the longer the benefit as the specific state can be received. . As described above, since the number of time savings can be made different each time a “big hit” is derived, it is possible to enhance the entertainment of the game. May be performed.

  However, even if the number of time savings is not disclosed by at least the control of the main CPU 101 or the sub CPU 201 until at least the transition to the “high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state”, It is difficult to know whether the game will transition from "" to "high-precision non-time saving game state", so enhance the interest in gaming from a different perspective than when performing a performance that suggests or specifies the number of determined time savings It becomes possible.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 276, the result of the first special lottery in the “high-accuracy time-saving gaming state” or the “high-accuracy non-hour-saving gaming state” was “big hit”. At this time, the main CPU 101 determines the variation time of the first special symbol at any variation time from the long variation D to the long variation F by lottery. Since the long fluctuations D to F have different fluctuation times, the long fluctuation D having the longest fluctuation time is the most advantageous for the player, and the long fluctuation F having the shortest fluctuation time is the most disadvantageous for the player. . In this way, by setting the variation time of the first special symbol to any one of the plurality of variation times, the gaming interest can be further enhanced. Further, if the main CPU 101 or the sub CPU 201 does not disclose which of the long fluctuations D to F is determined, the player does not know the end timing of the specific state. Can be further increased.

  In FIG. 276, when the result of the first special lottery is “big hit”, the main CPU 101 is configured to determine any of the long variation D to the long variation F. Thus, the fluctuation time in which the degree of profit for the player is low (for example, 10000 msec) may be determined.

  Further, in the above description, after the big hit game state is finished, the game is controlled to the “highly accurate non-time saving game state” through the “highly accurate time saving game state”, but the present invention is not limited to this. Immediately after the end of the state, the state may be controlled to the “high-precision non-time saving game state”. In particular, after the big hit gaming state ends, the normal jackpot controlled to the "high accuracy non-saving time gaming state" via the "high accuracy time saving gaming state", and the "high accuracy time saving gaming state" after the big hit gaming state ends. And a premium jackpot controlled to the “high-precision non-time saving game state” without passing through, and in the special lottery executed by the main CPU 101, the premium jackpot is won with a predetermined probability according to the hit selection symbol command. It may be configured as follows.

  Further, in the above, when the result of the first special lottery is “big hit”, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined to be one of the long fluctuations D to F. However, the change time of the first special symbol does not necessarily have to be a long change for all “big hits”. For example, only when a specific “big hit” among a plurality of big hit types, the first special symbol May be determined as the fluctuation times of the long fluctuations D to F.

  Also, in the above, also in the “high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state”, when the result of the first special lottery is “big hit” as in the “high-accuracy time-saving gaming state”, the main CPU 101 sets the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. Is determined to be any of the long fluctuation D to the long fluctuation F. Alternatively, in the “highly accurate non-time saving game state”, a fluctuation time determination table different from that in FIG. 276 is provided. When the result of the first special lottery is “big hit” in the “high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state”, a fluctuation time (for example, 1000 msec) in which the degree of profit is low for the player may be determined with a high probability. That is, when the result of the first special lottery is “big hit” in the “high-accuracy time-saving game state”, the time-saving game is digested by performing the variation time of the second special symbol at a super-high speed, and the time-saving game is digested. The expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of fired balls per unit time is increased in the later “high-probability non-time-saving game state”, while the result of the first special lottery is “big hit” in the “high-probability non-time-saving game state”. If there is, the change time of the first special symbol may be changed to a big hit game state immediately by performing a super speed change such as 1000 msec. In this case, when the number of executable times is determined in advance in the “high-precision time-saving gaming state”, the result of the first special lottery is “big hit”, which is more advantageous to the player than in other states. It is possible to give a premier hit, and the player in the "high accuracy time reduction game state" which is originally disadvantageous in the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of fired balls per unit time than the "high accuracy time reduction game state" The expectation of "big hit" can be increased.

  It should be noted that although not only the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment but also all of the first to eighth embodiments of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, as described above, the main CPU 101 Performs both the second special lottery and the first special lottery in a predetermined order within the same interrupt processing, so that the control load on the main CPU 101 is reduced, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special lottery are performed. The configuration is such that the change display of the special symbol can be performed in parallel.

  Incidentally, as described above, it is rare that both the second special lottery and the first special lottery are performed in a predetermined order within the same interrupt processing. However, the main CPU 101 determines whether one of the first special lottery and the second special lottery performed in the same interrupt processing is not a “big hit” at the same time. If the result of the special lottery is "big hit", the other special lottery is executed as a non-winning process, so that the first special lottery and the second special lottery performed in the same interrupt process Are prevented from being a "big hit" at the same time. However, as described above, in the same interrupt processing, if the result of one of the special lotteries (the one in which the special lottery was performed first) is “small hit”, the other special lottery is performed in the non-winning processing. However, since the special lottery is performed as usual, it is possible to prevent the “small hit” having a relatively low profit level from canceling the “big hit” having a relatively high profit level.

  In such a gaming machine, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of launch balls per unit time is controlled to a “highly accurate non-time saving gaming state” exceeding 1, and the result of the first special lottery is “big hit”. , And the variable display of the first special symbol is performed for an extremely long time, for example, 600,000 msec (long variation D in FIG. 276), the variable display of the first special symbol is performed. Since the result of the second lottery does not become a "big hit" while playing, a new game in which the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of launch balls per unit time exceeds 1 is guaranteed. Sex can be provided.

  In particular, when the result of the first special lottery is “big hit”, the main CPU 101 determines that the display of the fluctuation of the first special symbol is, for example, any one of the long fluctuations DF (see FIG. 276) having different fluctuation times. By doing so, the time during which the specific state is guaranteed will be different, and it will be possible to enhance the game entertainment. In particular, when the fluctuation time is determined to be the longest fluctuation D, a special effect to elevate the player may be performed by the sub CPU 201. If the main CPU 101 or the sub CPU 201 does not disclose which of the length fluctuations D to F is determined by the main CPU 101, the player cannot know how long the specific state continues. In this case, too, interest can be enhanced.

  As described above, when the result of the first special lottery is “big hit”, while the variable display of the first special symbol is being performed, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of launch balls per unit time is changed. In a gaming machine having a specific state exceeding one, it is preferable to perform the special lottery in the order of the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the same interrupt processing. This is because, when the first special lottery is performed first and the result is “big hit”, the second special lottery is set as a non-winning process and a specific state is set. However, this is not an essential requirement, and the special lottery may be performed in the order of the second special lottery and the first special lottery.

[Modification of Pachinko Machine of Sixth Embodiment]
Next, a modification of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, a first starting port is provided on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 in addition to the first starting port 5442 provided conventionally, but the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment has In the modified example, the configuration is different in that the first startup port 5442 is not provided. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, in the "normal gaming state", a game is played by left-handing, and in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" or the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", a game is played by right-handed. However, in the variation of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, in any of the "normal gaming state", the "high-accuracy time-short gaming state" and the "high-accuracy non-short-hour gaming state", This is a configuration for performing.

  Note that, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, in the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, the game ball flowing down the downflow path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443 is the first starting port. When 5443 is in the open mode, all or most of the game balls are configured to win the first starting port 5443. Therefore, when the first start port 5443 is in the open mode, even if the small hit prize port 5400 is in the open mode, the game ball flowing down the flow path 5450 toward the first start port 5443 is the small hit prize port. It is difficult to win 5400. Further, in a mode in which it is impossible to win a game ball to the first starting port 544, the game ball flowing down the flow path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443 is guided to the right side of the first starting port 5443. He reaches the small hit prize port 5400. At this time, if the small hit prize port 5400 is in the open mode, the game ball wins in the small hit prize port 5400, and the main CPU 101 sends the game ball to the small hit prize port 5400 via the payout / launch control circuit 300. Pay out prize balls based on the winning of. Game balls that have reached the small hit prize port 5400 but have not won the small hit prize port 5400 flow further downstream, and are eventually discharged out of the machine through the out port 57.

  In a variation of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines the “variable time of the special symbol” in the “normal gaming state”, the “highly accurate time reduction gaming state”, and the “highly accurate non time reduction gaming state”. Is determined with reference to the special symbol variation time determination table in FIG. 277 unless a specific condition described later is satisfied.

  277 is a table stored in the main ROM 102 in the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, and is another example of a variable time (variable display time) determination table for a special symbol for a low start (another example of FIG. 258). ). The table shown in FIG. 277 is different from the table shown in FIG. 258 in that, when the result of the first special lottery is “big hit”, the variable display of the first special symbol is, for example, 300,000 msec (long variation G). The point is that the variable display can be performed for an extremely long time.

(Game flow)
Next, a flow of a game in a variation of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment will be described. As described above, the main CPU 101 controls the game state to any one of the “normal game state”, the “high-accuracy time-saving game state”, and the “high-accuracy non-time-saving game state”. However, in addition to this, although not essential, the game may be controlled to the “low-probability time-saving game state” in which the game is played by right-handed.

  In the “normal game state”, the “high-accuracy time-saving game state”, and the “high-accuracy non-time-saving game state”, when the game ball fired toward the game area 20 wins the first starting port 5443, the main CPU 101 One special lottery is performed, and based on the result of the first lottery, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined with reference to the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG.

  In the “high-precision time-short game state” that is the power support state, all or most of the game balls that have flowed down the downflow path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443 win the first starting port 5443. Therefore, it is difficult to win the small hit prize port 5400. However, when the game mode shifts from the "high-accuracy time-saving game state" to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state", the gaming ball that has flowed down the downflow path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443 is no longer in the power support state. It is possible to reach the small hit winning opening 5400 vicinity without winning the 5443. However, in the variation of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, as described above, the main CPU 101 determines the change time of the special symbol, unless a specific condition is satisfied, and determines the change time of the special symbol in FIG. Determine with reference to the decision table. That is, if the result of the second special lottery is not “big hit” simply because the electric support status is not displayed, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed for an extremely long time such as 580000 msec to 600,000 msec. There is no or almost no open mode.

  Therefore, in a variation of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines that the first special symbol has a very long variation pattern (long variation G) as the specific condition described above. Thus, control is performed to change from the low start special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. 277 to the high start special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. 278. The fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for high start of FIG. 278 is different from the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for low start of FIG. 277 when the result of the second special lottery is “small hit” and “ When "losing", the change display of the second special symbol can be performed for an extremely short time, for example, 1000 msec (super-speed change).

  FIG. 279 shows a variation executed by the main CPU 101 when the variation time of the first special symbol is determined to be an extremely long variation pattern (long variation G) in a variation of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a time determination table setting process.

  With reference to FIG. 279, a description will be given of a fluctuation time determination table setting process that is executed when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined to be an extremely long fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation G). The main CPU 101 first determines whether or not the first special lottery has been executed (step S1831). If the first special lottery has not been executed (NO in step S1831), the main CPU 101 executes the variable time determination table setting process without changing the variable time determination table referred to when determining the special symbol fluctuation time. finish. When determining that the first special lottery has been executed (YES in step S1831), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the first special symbol is determined to be the long variation G (step S1832). If the variation pattern of the first special symbol is not determined to be the long variation G (NO in step S1832), the main CPU 101 does not change the variation time determination table referred to when determining the variation time of the special symbol, The variable time determination table setting process ends. When the variation pattern of the first special symbol is determined to be the long variation G (YES in step S1832), the main CPU 101 sets the variation time determination table that has been set, that is, the variation time determination table currently used for reference. 277, it is determined whether or not the low start special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. 277 (step S1833). If the set variation time determination table is a low start special symbol variation time determination table (YES in step S1833), the main CPU 101 refers to the variation time determination table for determining the special symbol variation time. Is set in the change time determination table for the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 278 (step S1834), and the change time determination table setting processing ends. On the other hand, if the set fluctuation time determination table is not the low start special symbol fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG. 277 (NO in step S1833), the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation time of the special symbol. The change time determination table setting process ends without changing the change time determination table referred to at this time. In step S1833, if the set fluctuation time determination table is not the fluctuation time determination table for the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 277, the currently set fluctuation time determination table is the high fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG. 278. It is a special symbol fluctuation time determination table for starting.

  Therefore, while the change time of the special symbol is determined with reference to the change time determination table of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. Unless the result of the special lottery is "big hit", the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (long fluctuations A to C) is performed for an extremely long time, and thus the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is mainly performed. Therefore, the frequency with which the small hit prize port 5400 is opened so that the game ball to the small prize prize port 5400 wins is relatively small.

  On the other hand, when the variation time of the first special symbol is determined to be a variation pattern (long variation G) which is extremely long, the table is changed to the variation time determination table for the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 278. Later, when the right-hitting game ball wins in the second starting port 4401, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is almost not only fluctuated at a very high speed, but also with a small hit winning port 5400 with a probability of about 1/5. , And the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of launch balls per unit time exceeds one.

  As described above, the main CPU 101 sets the fluctuation time determination table, which is referred to when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol, based on the fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation G) in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is extremely long. By changing from the low start special symbol fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG. 277 to the high start special symbol fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG. 278, the first special symbol fluctuation time is changed. During the continuation, the second special symbol is variably displayed and the "big hit" is not derived. Therefore, a prize ball that can be obtained in the specific state described above and a prize ball that can be obtained in the subsequent jackpot game state can be a premium jackpot in which a large amount of prize balls are paid out to the player, thereby enhancing the gaming interest. It becomes possible.

  Further, when such a premium jackpot is set, the sub CPU 201 sets the above-mentioned specific state before the result of the first special lottery is derived to be "big hit" (before being controlled to the big hit gaming state). If a premium effect indicating that the big hit game state is a continuously executed big hit game state is executed on the liquid crystal display device 16 via, for example, the display control circuit 204, the gaming interest can be enhanced.

  As a result of the first special lottery, the main CPU 101 can execute a jackpot game (hereinafter, referred to as a “2R jackpot game” in this paragraph) in a manner that is difficult for the player to grasp, and such a 2R jackpot game is performed. If the second special symbol is variably displayed in the long variation G when the player wins the game, and if the 2R big hit game is controlled to the “highly accurate non-time saving game state”, the game state is specified. State, 2R big hit game, transition to the specific state. Therefore, in such a case, it is possible to make the player think that the specific state has been continuously executed. The 2R jackpot game is a jackpot game in which, for example, a round game in which the special winning opening 540 is opened for about 18000 msec is executed for two rounds. However, if the game can be executed in a manner that is difficult for the player to grasp, another big hit game may be used instead of the above 2R big hit game.

  In addition, the main CPU 101 determines that the variation time of the first special symbol is determined to be an extremely long variation pattern (long variation G), and the high CPU start special symbol variation time determination table from the low start special symbol variation time determination table. After changing to the fluctuating time determination table, until a predetermined period (for example, a period until the special symbol fluctuating display is executed a predetermined number of times, or a period until the big hit game ends), a high start The special symbol change time is determined with reference to the special symbol change time determination table. The main CPU 101 may change to the low start special symbol fluctuation time determination table based on the lapse of the period, or may change the low start special symbol fluctuation time based on the lapse of the period. A determination may be made as to whether to change to the determination table or to continue to refer to the high-start special symbol variation time determination table.

  By the way, in the above, when the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for low start is set, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is determined to be a very long fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation G). Although the table is always changed to the special symbol fluctuation time determination table for the high start, it is not limited to this. For example, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined to be a very long fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation G) while the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for low start is set, the main CPU 101 sets the predetermined time. It is determined whether or not a condition (for example, the main CPU 101 performs a change lottery to determine whether to change the table and wins the change lottery, etc.). The special symbol fluctuation time determination table may be continued to be changed to a special symbol fluctuation time determination table for a high start based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. Further, instead of the change lottery described above, a long variation G-1 for changing the variable time determination table and a long variation G-2 for not changing the variable time determination table may be provided, each having a selectivity of 50%.

  In the modification of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, a game is performed by right-handing in any of the "normal gaming state", the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", and the "high-accuracy non-hours-saving gaming state". However, instead of this, in any of the “normal game state”, the “high-accuracy time-short game state”, and the “high-accuracy non-short-time game state”, the game may be played by left-handed. In this case, a left-hit game ball can win both the first starting port and the second starting port (in the sense that one ball plays both the first starting port and the second starting port). However, when the first special symbol is fluctuating and displayed based on the result of the first special lottery being "big hit", the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is easily fluctuated at an ultra-high speed, Even in the "normal game state", it is possible to set the specific state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of fired balls per unit time exceeds 1 before shifting to the big hit game state.

[Seventh Embodiment Pachinko Machine]
Next, a pachinko gaming machine according to a seventh embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment has a configuration that is partially different from the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254) in the board configuration of the gaming board unit 17 (see FIG. 280). In the pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is controlled to the "normal gaming state" which is not the electric support state or the "high-precision time-saving gaming state" which is the electric support state. . If a certain number of times (for example, 100 times) of the time saving game are consumed without deriving the "big hit" in the "high-accuracy time-saving game state", the state shifts to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state" which is not the electric support state. As described above, the point that the number of time reductions is constant is different from the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. However, as in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, one of the plurality of time reductions is determined as one of the number of time reductions. May be performed. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment, the special symbol variation time (variable display time) determination table in the “high-accuracy time-saving gaming state” and the “high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state” is also determined by the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. It is different from the special symbol fluctuation time (variable display time) determination table for high start of the gaming machine (see FIG. 259).

  FIG. 280 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 280, the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment is similar to the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 254) in that the special winning opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are arranged in the gaming area 20. An opening mode in which the game ball can be placed in the special winning opening 540 by driving the shutter 610 by the special winning opening solenoid, which is arranged at the upper right of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the inside. And a closed mode in which it is impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball to the special winning opening 540. In the pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment, when the special winning opening 540 is in the open mode, all or most of the right-hit game balls are configured to win the special winning opening 540.

  Further, a passing gate 49 is disposed on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16. The passing gate 49 is configured so that most of the right-hitting game balls that have not won the special winning opening 540 can pass through. The pass gate 49 gives a trigger for a normal symbol determination on condition that a game ball passes.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment is similar to the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, except that the right-handed gaming machine is also provided on the downstream side of the passage gate 49 in addition to the first opening 5442 provided conventionally. The ball has a first opening for winning. This first starting port is the first starting port 5443, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment. Also, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, the control by the main CPU 101 is the same when a game ball is won in the first starting port 5442 and when a game ball is won in the first starting port 5443. .

  Above the first start port 5443, a movable member 4653 that is constantly operated at a constant cycle under the control of the main CPU 101 is provided. The movable member 4653 may be opened and closed a number of times by a large number of open patterns, for example, “close 3000 msec → open 100 msec → open 10000 msec → open 200 msec → close 7000 msec → open 300 m → close 10000 msec → close 700 msec → open 300 msec” By setting the operation as one cycle, it is difficult to understand the opening timing while operating constantly at a constant cycle.

  When the movable member 4653 is opened, all or most of the right-hit game balls pass through the passage gate 49, and all or most of the game balls enter the first starting port 5443. On the other hand, if the movable member 4653 is closed, the right-hit game ball flows down from the first starting port 5443 without winning the first starting port 5443.

  A second starting port 440 is disposed downstream of the first starting port 5443. When a game ball is won in the second starting port 440, the main CPU 101 performs a change display of the second special symbol. However, like the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the probability that the "small hit" is derived is about 5 minutes. It is 1.

  Above the second starting port 440, a second starting port shutter 4654 that can move forward and backward with respect to the transparent panel 172 is disposed. The second starting port shutter 4654 can be driven by a second starting port solenoid (not shown). When the shutter 4654 for the second starting port is operated in the forward direction with respect to the transparent panel 172, the second starting port 440 is in the closed state. When the shutter 4654 for the second starting port is operated in the rear direction with respect to the transparent panel 172, the second starting port 440 is closed. The starting port 440 is in an open mode. In the “high-accuracy time-saving gaming state”, the main CPU 101 sets the second start-up shutter 4654 to “normal” based on the result of the normal symbol determination being a hit so that the second start-up opening 440 is in an open mode. It is operated at a higher frequency than the “game state” so that winning in the second starting port 440 is facilitated.

  On the downstream side of the second starting port 440, a small hitting shutter 6100 that can move forward and backward with respect to the small hit winning opening 5400 and the transparent panel 172 is disposed. The small hitting shutter 6100 can be driven by a small hit winning opening solenoid (not shown). When the small hitting shutter 6100 operates in the forward direction with respect to the transparent panel 172, the small hit winning opening 5400 is in a closed mode. It becomes an open mode.

  Note that when the second starting port 440 is in the open mode, all or most of the right-hit game balls win the second starting port 440, and when the second starting port 440 is in the closed mode, the right-handed The configured game ball is configured to reach the small hitting shutter 6100.

  When the small hit prize port 5400 is in the open mode, all or most of the game balls that have reached the small hit shutter 6100 win the small hit prize port 5400 and the small hit prize port 5400 is in the closed mode. Is configured to be discharged out of the machine through the out port 57.

(Game flow)
Next, the flow of a game in the pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment will be described. The main CPU 101 controls the game state to any one of the “normal game state”, the “high-accuracy time-saving game state”, and the “high-accuracy non-time-saving game state”. However, in addition to this, although not essential, it may be controlled to the “low-probability time-saving gaming state”.

  In the “normal game state”, when a game ball fired toward the game area 20 wins the first starting port 5442, the main CPU 101 performs a first special lottery. If the result of the first special lottery is “big hit”, the main CPU 101 executes control to shift to a big hit gaming state. In this "normal game state", the main CPU 101 refers to the low start special symbol fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG. Determine the time.

  When the big hit game state ends, the main CPU 101 determines the type of the big hit according to the hit selection symbol command related to the big hit, as in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, and according to the determined type of the big hit. Then, control is performed to shift the gaming state after the big hitting gaming state ends to the “normal gaming state” or the “high-accuracy time-saving gaming state”.

  In the “high-accuracy non-time-saving game state” and the “high-accuracy non-time-saving game state” which is controlled after the time-saving game is consumed in the “high-precision non-time-saving game state”, the pachinko game of the first embodiment is performed. Unlike the machine, when the result of the first special lottery is "big hit", the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is displayed for an extremely long time, for example, 300,000 msec (long fluctuation F) to 600,000 msec (long fluctuation D). After that, the change time of the special symbol is determined with reference to the change time determination table of the special symbol from which the "big hit" can be derived. This is the same as the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment. In addition, when the result of the second special lottery is “losing”, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed in a very short time, for example, 1000 msec, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment. It is.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment and the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, when the result of the first special lottery is “big hit”, , The main CPU 101 executes the second special lottery as a non-winning process that does not become a "big hit" even if the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied.

  However, similar to the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, even if the main CPU 101 executes the non-winning process in which the second special lottery does not become a "big hit", the non-winning process has a probability of about one-fifth. Wins "Small hit". In the “high-precision time-saving gaming state”, all or most of the game balls that have not won the first starting port 5443 win the second starting port 440 (the number of winning balls when the second starting port 440 is won). Is one ball), it is difficult to win the small hit prize port 5400. However, when the game shifts from the “high-accuracy time-saving game state” to the “high-accuracy non-time-saving game state”, the gaming ball that has not won the first starting port 5443 wins the second starting port 440 because it is no longer in the power support state. The frequency of winning the small hit prize port 5400 without doing so increases, and the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of launch balls per unit time increases.

  That is, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, when the result of the first special lottery is “big hit” in the “high-precision time-saving gaming state”, it takes an extremely long time, for example, 600,000 msec (long fluctuation D). While the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is being performed (until the result of "big hit" is derived), the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is displayed in a very short time, for example, 1000 msec (super-speed fluctuation). The time-saving game is consumed by being performed, but when the determined number of time-saving games is consumed, the main CPU 101 controls to shift from the “high-precision time-saving game state” to the “high-probability non-time-saving game state”. Execute Until the fluctuation display of the first special symbol ends and the result of "big hit" is derived, the result of the second special lottery does not become "big hit", during which, for example, 1000 msec (super-speed fluctuation) The fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed in an extremely short time, and the prize ball is obtained by winning the “small hit” with a high probability of about 1/5. This is a specific state in which the expected value of the number of award balls exceeds 1. In this way, it is possible to enhance amusement of a game by realizing the game property of obtaining a prize ball and creating an unlimited specific state. It should be noted that, when the player makes a right hit, the second start memory is always held at the upper limit (for example, four).

  Note that the number of working hours may always be a fixed number (for example, 100 times). However, if the number of time savings in the “high-precision time-saving gaming state” is made different each time a special symbol is fluctuated and a “big hit” is derived, similar to the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, Can be increased. For example, by making the number of times reduced in the “high-precision time-saving gaming state” different each time “big hit” is derived, the result of the first special lottery becomes “big hit” (the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is Due to the relationship with the timing (which results in a long variation), the following fun occurs. In other words, it does not mean that the timing at which the result of the first special lottery becomes “big hit” (the fluctuation display of the first special symbol becomes a long fluctuation) should be early. For example, when the number of time savings is 100, if the fluctuation display of the first special symbol has a long fluctuation at an early timing, the period of the specific state may be shortened. There is also a possibility that the fluctuation display of the 1 special symbol is stopped and the state is controlled to the big hit game state. Further, when the number of time savings is a relatively short number (for example, 24 times), the longer the fluctuation display of the first special symbol becomes at the earlier timing, the longer the benefit as the specific state can be received. . In this way, by making the number of time savings different each time the “big hit” is derived, it is possible to enhance the entertainment interest of the game. Therefore, the determined number of time savings is suggested or specified by, for example, the control of the sub CPU 201. A directing may be performed.

  However, even when the number of time savings is not disclosed by the control of either the main CPU 101 or the sub CPU 201, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment, the player can perform the “high accuracy time saving gaming state” at any timing. It is difficult to know whether the game will shift to the “high-accuracy non-time saving game state” from the point of view. Becomes possible.

  As shown in FIG. 276, when the result of the first special lottery is “big hit”, the main CPU 101 sets the variation time of the first special symbol, as in the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, as shown in FIG. Any variation time from the long variation D to the long variation F is determined by lottery. In this way, by setting the variation time of the first special symbol to any one of the plurality of variation times, the gaming interest can be further enhanced. Moreover, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, if the main CPU 101 or the sub CPU 201 does not disclose which of the long fluctuations D to F is determined, the player can Since the end timing of the specific state is not known, it is possible to further enhance the game entertainment.

  In FIG. 276, when the result of the first special lottery is “big hit”, the main CPU 101 is configured to determine any of the long fluctuation D to the long fluctuation F. As described in the example of the pachinko game machine, the fluctuation time (for example, 10,000 msec) in which the degree of profit for the player is low may be determined with a predetermined probability.

  In the above description, after the big hit game state is completed, the game is controlled to the “highly accurate non-time saving game state” through the “highly accurate time reduction game state”, but the present invention is not limited to this. As described in the pachinko gaming machine of the embodiment, after the big hit gaming state ends, the game may be controlled to the “highly accurate non-time saving gaming state” immediately. In particular, after the big hit gaming state ends, the normal jackpot controlled to the "high accuracy non-saving time gaming state" via the "high accuracy time saving gaming state", and the "high accuracy time saving gaming state" after the big hit gaming state ends. And a premium jackpot controlled to the “high-precision non-time saving game state” without passing through, and in the special lottery executed by the main CPU 101, the premium jackpot is won with a predetermined probability according to the hit selection symbol command. It may be configured as follows.

  Further, in the above, when the result of the first special lottery is “big hit”, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined to be one of the long fluctuations D to F. However, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol does not necessarily have to be a long fluctuation for all “big hits”. For example, as described in the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, for example, a specific May be determined to be the fluctuation time of the long fluctuation D to the long fluctuation F only when the “big hit” is set.

[Eighth Embodiment Pachinko Machine]
Next, a description will be given of a pachinko gaming machine according to an eighth embodiment. The pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment has a partly different configuration from the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254) in the board configuration of the gaming board unit 17 (see FIG. 281). In the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is controlled to the "normal gaming state" which is not the electric support state or the "high-precision non-time saving gaming state" which is the electric support state. You. It should be noted that the game may be controlled to be in the "high accuracy time reduction game state" or the "low accuracy time reduction game state", but this is not essential in the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment. Further, as in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, when one of the plurality of time reductions is determined to be one of the number of time reductions, and the number of time reductions determined in the “high accuracy time reduction gaming state” is exhausted. It may be controlled to a “high-precision non-time saving game state”. Hereinafter, an external configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 281 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 281, the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment is similar to the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254), except that the special winning opening 540 and the special electric auditors 600 are set in the gaming area 20. An opening mode in which the game ball can be placed in the special winning opening 540 by driving the shutter 610 by the special winning opening solenoid, which is arranged at the upper right of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the inside. And a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball to the special winning opening 540. In the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, when the special winning opening 540 is in the open mode, all or most of the right-hit game balls are configured to win the special winning opening 540.

  Further, on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16, an accessory device 3500 is disposed downstream of the special winning opening 540, and a right-hit game ball can enter the accessory device 3500. I have. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the accessory device 3500 may be arranged such that a left-hit game ball can enter.

  The accessory device 3500 has an entrance 3502 that can take in a game ball therein, and a rolling surface 3530 on which a game ball that has entered the inside from the entrance 3502 can roll. The played game ball is temporarily retained inside the accessory device 3500 by rolling on the rolling surface 3530.

  At an approximate center of the rolling surface 3530, there is provided an interference member 3520 that constantly rotates and changes the movement of the game ball when the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 3530 comes into contact. If the game ball only rolls on the rolling surface 3530, it only rolls around the interference member 3520, but is hit off when it interferes with the interference member 3520. The hit game balls can be received in the first reception port 3540 or the second reception port 3550. The game ball once taken into the accessory device 3500 rolls on the rolling surface 3530 until it is received by the first receiving port 3540 or the second receiving port 3550, and thus stays inside the accessory device 3500. The time will be different each time. In addition, the first reception port 3540 and the second reception port 3550 are not limited to the ports that can receive the game balls, and may be areas through which the game balls can pass.

A movable member 3510 is provided above the entrance 3502 so that the movable member 3510 can move forward and backward with respect to the transparent panel 172. The movable member 3510 always allows a game ball to enter the accessory device 3500. It is located forward with respect to the transparent panel 172 so as to prevent entry. Then, only when a specific condition described later is satisfied, the movable member 3510 operates in the backward direction, the entrance 3502 is opened, and only one game ball can be taken into the inside of the accessory device 3500. ing. Although not shown in FIG. 281, when a plurality of game balls enter the entrance 3502 when the movable member 3510 is operated, only one game ball is taken into the accessory device 3500, Other game balls are discharged outside the machine. If a game ball is not fired, the main CPU 101 maintains the entrance 3502 in an open state until one game ball is taken into the accessory device 3500.

  The above-mentioned special winning opening 540 provided above the accessory device 3500 is a game ball winning when the first special symbol is fluctuated and a “big hit” is derived and controlled to the big hit game state. Hereinafter, in the description of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, it will be referred to as a first special winning opening 540. The first special winning opening 540 is opened when the shutter 610 is driven by a first special winning opening solenoid (not shown) to enable (or facilitate) the winning of the game ball, and the winning of the game ball. And a closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult).

  A pass gate 49, which is a trigger for normal symbol determination, is arranged below the accessory device 3500. When a game ball passes through the pass gate 49, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol determination. When the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit, the main CPU 101 sets the blade member 4620 to, for example, an open mode of about 5900 msec, and then to a closed mode. While the blade member 4620 is in the open mode, winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is facilitated. In addition, the second starting port 440 is configured to be able to win when right-handed similarly to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (see FIG. 5) according to the first embodiment.

  On the downstream side of the passage gate 49, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed and the "big hit" is derived and the state is controlled to the big hit game state, a game ball can be won. Two major winning openings 5403 are provided. The second special winning opening 5403 is opened by enabling the shutter 6103 to be driven by a second special winning opening solenoid (not shown), thereby enabling (or facilitating) the winning of the game ball, and the winning of the game ball. And a closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult).

  On the downstream side of the second big winning port 5403, a small winning port 5400 is provided. The small hit prize opening 5400 has an opening mode in which the small hitting shutter 6100 is driven by a small hit prize opening solenoid (not shown) to enable (or facilitate) winning of the game ball, and It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed mode in which winning is impossible (or difficult).

  If the right-hitting game ball does not win any of the first large winning opening 540, the accessory device 3500, the second large winning opening 5403, the small winning opening 5400, and the second starting opening 440, the out opening 57. From the aircraft.

  The difference between the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment and the pachinko gaming machines of the first to seventh embodiments is a process until the gaming machine is controlled to the big hit gaming state. A process until the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment is controlled to the big hit gaming state will be described.

  First, in the “normal game state”, the main CPU 101 determines the change time of the special symbol with reference to the change time determination table of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. Therefore, since there is no merit of winning the game ball in the second starting port 440, the game is played by left-handing which can cause the first starting port 5442 to win the game ball. When the left-hit game ball wins the first starting port 5442, the main CPU 101 executes a first special lottery. Then, the first special symbol is fluctuated and the result of the first special lottery is derived. In this “normal game state”, the main CPU 101 determines the change time of the special symbol with reference to the change time determination table of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. At this time, when “big hit” is derived as a result of the first special lottery, the main CPU 101 drives the shutter 610 to perform a plurality of round games in which the first big winning opening 540 is shifted to the open mode and the closed mode. Control to a special game state performed over the round. As described above, when the gaming ball has won the first starting port 5442, the process up to the control of the big hit gaming state is not much different from the pachinko gaming machines of the first to sixth embodiments.

  Next, when the big hit gaming state ends and the game is controlled to the “high-accuracy non-time saving game state”, the main CPU 101 triggers the end of the big hit gaming state to refer to when determining the special symbol fluctuation time. The symbol change time determination table is changed to the special symbol change time determination table for high start shown in FIG. Then, in the “high-accuracy non-time saving game state”, the main CPU 101 determines the change time of the special symbol with reference to the change time determination table of the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. Further, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, in the second special lottery that is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, the “small hit” is won with a probability of about 1/5. However, in the first special lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442, the player does not win the "small hit" or wins with a very low probability compared to the second special lottery even if he wins. Has only become. Therefore, in this “highly accurate non-time saving game state”, the game is played by right-handed. When the right-hit game ball wins the second starting port 440, the main CPU 101 executes a second special lottery. Then, the second special symbol is fluctuated and the result of the second special lottery is derived. In the “high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state”, as in the case of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, a specific state is obtained in which the expected value of the number of awarded balls with respect to the number of launched balls per unit time exceeds one. Therefore, when the big hitting game state ends and is controlled to the “high-accuracy non-time saving game state”, the sub CPU 201 is used as an effect indicating that the big hitting game state is controlled to a specific state advantageous to a player different from the big hit game state. Then, a rejoicing image that rejoices the player is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

  Even if the variation display of the second special symbol is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 and the "big hit" is derived, the main CPU 101 does not immediately control the big hit gaming state. First, only the condition device is operated as a first condition which is one of the conditions for controlling to the big hit gaming state. After operating the condition device, the main CPU 101 refers to, for example, a high-start special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. (2) The change time of the special symbol is determined, and the change display of the second special symbol is performed based on the determined time. . When a game ball wins in the small hit prize port 5400, for example, 15 prize balls are paid out, and the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of launch balls per unit time exceeds one.

  In the above description, when the condition device is activated by deriving the "big hit" based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440. The small hitting game is executed at a high frequency to obtain a prize ball. However, when the condition device is activated based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, the condition device is activated. In general, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is not performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 until the big hit gaming state ends. Therefore, instead of the above, when the condition device is operated by deriving the “big hit” based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, for example, based on the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 49, Winning opening (second starting opening 440 in the present embodiment) facilitated by the opening and closing drive by the ordinary electric accessory 460 (blade member 4620), for example, by increasing the probability that the result of the ordinary symbol determination performed is a hit. May be increased to increase the expected value of the number of award balls with respect to the number of launch balls per unit time. In this case, when a game ball wins the winning opening facilitated by the opening / closing drive by the ordinary electric accessory 460 (blade member 4620), it is necessary to pay out at least two or more game balls as a prize ball. Also, the main CPU 101 sets a relatively long time before the condition device is activated so that the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of launch balls per unit time is not increased when the condition device is not activated. It is preferable to change the normal symbol fluctuation time to a relatively short time based on the activation of the condition device over the normal symbol fluctuation time.

  When the condition device operates, the main CPU 101 operates the movable member 3510 to take in only one game ball into the accessory device 3500. When the game ball taken into the accessory device 3500 is received by the first reception port 3540 or the second reception port 3550, the main CPU 101 sets a second condition, which is a further condition for controlling the big hit game state. Activate the accessory continuous operation device. Assuming that the condition device is operating, the main CPU 101 drives the shutter 610 to shift the second big winning opening 5403 between the open mode and the closed mode when the accessory continuous operating device is operated. Is controlled to a special game state performed over a plurality of rounds. As described above, when the gaming ball has won the second starting port 440, the process until the gaming state is controlled to the big hit gaming state is significantly different from the pachinko gaming machines of the first to seventh embodiments.

  In addition, when the game ball taken into the accessory device 3500 is received by the first reception port 3540 and when it is received by the second reception port 3550, for example, a round game executed in the big hit game state is performed. It is preferable to provide a difference in the degree of advantage, such as a difference in the number of rounds. However, it is not always necessary to provide a plurality of receiving ports functioning as conditions for operating the accessory continuous apparatus, as in the first receiving port 3540 and the second receiving port 3550, and one receiving port is used. The main CPU 101 may operate the accessory continuous operation device when a game ball is received.

  In the above, the main CPU 101 drives the shutter 610 to open and close the first big winning port 540 in the big hit game state controlled based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442. In the jackpot game state controlled based on winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, the shutter 6103 is driven to open the second big winning port 5403 between the open mode and the closed mode. A round game is performed using a different winning port, such as a round game to be shifted. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The big hit game state controlled based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442, and the big hit game state controlled based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, Thus, a round game may be performed using the same special winning opening.

  In addition, when the first special symbol is fluctuated and a “big hit” is derived, a game ball is taken into the accessory device 3500 and is received by the first reception port 3540 or the second reception port 3550. It is controlled to the jackpot game state without going through the process, because the main CPU 101 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device when the result of the first special lottery is derived. .

  By the way, as described above, the game ball taken into the accessory device 3500 is temporarily retained in the accessory device 3500 until it is received in the first reception port 3540 or the second reception port 3550. . Thus, a time difference can be generated between the occurrence of the condition device and the activation of the accessory continuous operation device. That is, despite the fluctuation display of the second special symbol being performed and the "big hit" being derived, it is not controlled to the big hit game state until the accessory continuous operation device is operated. The specific state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls exceeds 1 is extended. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed and “big hit” is derived, the sub CPU 201 performs as an effect indicating that the specific state is extended, A rejoicing image that rejoices the player is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In addition, since the above-mentioned specific state is for a limited time period after the condition device is operated, it is not known how long it will last. Therefore, the sub CPU 201 sets the first reception port 3540 or the second reception port 3550 so that the game ball cannot be received. The support effect for supporting the player is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

  As described above, when the second starting port 440 is won, not only the operation of the condition device (the first condition is satisfied) such that the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed and the "big hit" is derived, but also the condition Assuming that the device has been activated, a time difference is provided, and when the accessory continuous operation device is activated (the second condition is satisfied), the state is controlled to the big hit game state, whereby the prize for the number of fired balls per unit time is obtained. The specific state in which the expected value of the number of balls exceeds 1 can be extended, and the entertainment interest can be enhanced.

  In addition, since the time from the activation of the condition device as the first condition to the activation of the continuous accessory actuation device as the second condition is different each time, the ratio of the number of awarded balls to the number of fired balls per unit time is different. It becomes difficult for the player to predict how long the specific state in which the expected value exceeds 1 will continue, and it is possible to further enhance the interest in the game.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, the operation of the condition device and the operation of the accessory continuation device are set to the first condition and the second condition for controlling to the big hit game state, but are not limited thereto. However, for example, in a so-called one-type and two-type multifunction peripheral, the first-type winning and the two-type winning may be set as the first condition and the second condition for controlling to the big hit game state. For example, in a so-called one-type and two-type multifunction peripheral, the same accessory device 3500 as the accessory device 3500 described in the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment is provided. During normal times (when neither one type nor two types occur), the main CPU 101 refers to, for example, a low start special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. Determine the time. Then, when the special symbol is changed and the “winning” is derived by one type of “winning”, the main CPU 101 operates the movable member 3510 so as to take in one game ball into the accessory device 3500. Let it. Further, the main CPU 101 presupposes that the special symbol is changed and displayed after one type is reached, for example, by referring to the high start special symbol change time determination table shown in FIG. Is determined. On the other hand, one game ball taken into the accessory device 3500 rolls on the rolling surface 3530 and is hit when it comes into contact with the interference member 3520. When the game ball hit by the interference member 3520 is received in, for example, the first reception port 3540, two kinds of hits are achieved, and the main CPU 101 controls the game state to the big hit game. Such a so-called one-type and two-type multifunction machine cannot have a concept that the expected state of the awarded ball count with respect to the number of fired balls per unit time exceeds 1 to extend the specific state. The kind hit can be set as a first condition and a second condition for controlling the game to the big hit game state, and after the hit per kind as the first condition, two kinds as the second condition Since the time until the hit becomes different every time, it becomes difficult for the player to predict how long a specific state in which the expected value of the number of awarded balls with respect to the number of fired balls per unit time exceeds 1 will be continued, thereby enhancing the game entertainment. Becomes possible.

[Modification of Pachinko Machine of Eighth Embodiment]
Next, a modification of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment will be described. The variation of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment is significantly different from the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment in that a special symbol variation time determination table referred to when determining the special symbol variation time is, for example, This is an opportunity to change from the low start special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. 258 to, for example, the high start special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. In the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, the main CPU 101 changes the special symbol change time determination table referred to when determining the special symbol change time upon the end of the big hit game state. In the modification of the pachinko gaming machine of the embodiment, the change is made in response to the operation of the condition device.

  Further, based on the activation of the condition device, for example, a special symbol for a low start shown in FIG. 258 may be stored in a special symbol variation time determination table, which is referred to when the main CPU 101 determines the special symbol variation time. If the change time determination table is changed from the change time determination table to the change time determination table for the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 259, for example, even when a game ball is awarded at the first starting port 5442, the condition device is generated. After that, a time difference can be generated between the time when the accessory continuous operation device is activated.

  In the variation of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, the special winning opening may be only one of the first special winning opening 540 and the second special winning opening 5403 shown in FIG. Similarly, as for the shutter, only one of the shutter 610 and the shutter 6103 may be used. Therefore, in the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, it is assumed that the second special winning opening 5403 and the shutter 6103 are not provided, and the first special winning opening 540 and the shutter 610 are provided. Therefore, the first special winning opening 540 does not need to be distinguished from the other special winning openings. Therefore, in the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, the first special winning opening 540 is simply referred to as the special winning opening 540.

  Specifically, first, in the “normal game state”, the main CPU 101 refers to the low-start special symbol fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG. 258 to determine the special symbol fluctuation time. A game is played by hitting. When the left-hit game ball wins the first starting port 5442, the main CPU 101 executes a first special lottery. Then, the first special symbol is fluctuated and when the "big hit" is derived as a result of the first special lottery, the main CPU 101 immediately controls the gaming state to the big hit like the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment. Instead, first, the condition device is operated as the first condition for controlling the big hit game state.

  Further, the main CPU 101 sets the special symbol fluctuation time determination table, which is referred to when determining the special symbol fluctuation time, in response to the activation of the condition device, as shown in FIG. Change to a time determination table. Here, in the second special lottery that is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, the “small hit” is won with a probability of about 1/5, and the game ball to the first starting port 5442 is set. In the first special lottery performed based on the winning of the prize, the "small hit" will not be won, or even if the prize is won, it will be won with a very low probability compared to the second special lottery. Is played by right-handed. When a game is played by this right-handed operation, a specific state is achieved in which the expected value of the number of awarded balls with respect to the number of launched balls per unit time exceeds 1.

  Further, after operating the condition device, the main CPU 101 refers to, for example, a variable time determination table of a special symbol for a high start shown in FIG. 259 based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, for example. In order to determine the fluctuation time of the second special symbol and to perform the fluctuation display of the second special symbol based on this, the small hit game is executed at a high frequency, and the winning frequency of the game ball to the small hit winning port 5400 is determined. Enhanced. When a game ball wins in the small hit prize port 5400, for example, 15 prize balls are paid out, and the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of launch balls per unit time exceeds one.

  In the modification of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, the winning opening facilitated by opening and closing by, for example, the ordinary electric accessory 460 (blade member 4620). (In the present embodiment, the winning frequency of game balls to the second starting port 440) may be increased to increase the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of launch balls per unit time.

  In addition, as with the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, the accessory device 3500 is configured such that a right-hit game ball can enter, but is not limited to this, and a left-hit game is provided. The ball may be arranged so that it can enter.

  After the condition device is activated, the main CPU 101 activates the movable member 3510 in the same manner as when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed and the “big hit” is derived in the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment. Then, only one ball is taken into the accessory device 3500. When the game ball taken into the accessory device 3500 is received by the first reception port 3540 or the second reception port 3550, the main CPU 101 sets a second condition, which is a further condition for controlling the big hit game state. Activate the accessory continuous operation device. Assuming that the condition device is operating, the main CPU 101 activates the shutter 610 when the accessory continuous operating device is operated, and performs a plurality of round games for shifting the special winning opening 540 between the open mode and the closed mode. Control to a special game state performed over the round. As described above, in the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, the first condition for controlling the big hitting game state even when the gaming ball has won the first starting port 5442 is the first condition. Assuming that the device is activated and the condition device is activated, a time difference can be generated to activate the accessory continuous operation device, which is the second condition. In this case, the main CPU 101 does not stop the measurement of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol only by operating the condition device, but measures the fluctuation time of the second special symbol based on the fact that the continuous operation device for the accessory is operated. Execute stop control.

  Therefore, after the condition device is activated, it is possible to create a specific state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of fired balls per unit time exceeds 1, for a limited period of time, which is unknown for how long. Becomes possible.

  When the game is controlled to the “high-precision non-time-saving game state” after the big hit game state is ended, similarly to the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment, the number of awarded balls with respect to the number of fired balls per unit time is determined. The specific state where the expected value exceeds 1 can be set, and a time difference can be caused between the activation of the condition device and the activation of the accessory continuous operation device.

[Modification of Modification of Pachinko Machine of Eighth Embodiment]
The modification of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment can be further modified as follows. In a modification of the modification of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, the board configuration of the game board unit 17 is, for example, a board configuration shown in FIG. 282 instead of the board configuration shown in FIG. Hereinafter, an external configuration of a modification of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 282 is an example of a front view showing an appearance of a game board unit in a modification of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment.

  The board configuration shown in FIG. 282 is a combination of the board configuration shown in FIG. 275 and the board configuration shown in FIG. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 282, the special winning opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are arranged at the upper right of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the gaming area 20. The special winning opening 540 is opened when the shutter 610 is driven by a special winning opening solenoid (not shown), thereby enabling (or facilitating) winning of the game ball. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed mode in which winning is impossible (or difficult). When the special winning opening 540 is in the open mode, all or most of the right-hit game balls are configured to win the special winning opening 540.

  On the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 and downstream of the special winning opening 540, the same role as the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment or the accessory device 3500 described in the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment. An object device 3500 is arranged.

  A passing gate 49 is disposed downstream of the special winning opening 540 and to the right of the accessory device 3500. The pass gate 49 normally gives an opportunity for symbol determination on condition that the game ball passes.

  Further, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment and the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment (see FIG. 281), in addition to the first starting port 5442 provided conventionally, the pachinko gaming machine is disposed downstream of the passage gate 49. The first starting port 5443 in which a right-hitting game ball can be awarded (the number of prize balls when the first starting port 5443 is awarded is, for example, one ball) and the first starting port 5443 for winning a game ball. A movable member 4652 whose easiness can be changed, a second starting port 440 arranged below and below the first starting port 5443 (the number of prize balls when the second starting port 440 is won is one ball, for example); It has. The main CPU 101 sets the movable member 4652 at a higher frequency than the "normal game state" based on the result of the ordinary symbol determination in the "high accuracy time reduction game state" or the "low accuracy time reduction game state". When activated, winning in the first starting port 5443 is facilitated. When a game ball wins in the second starting port 440, the main CPU 101 performs a fluctuation display of the second special symbol. Here, unlike the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the "small hit" is derived. When the “big hit” is not derived, the probability is that all or almost “small hit” is derived, but the probability that the “small hit” is derived is not limited to this.

  Also, unlike FIG. 281, similarly to FIG. 254, below the first starting port 5443, a small hit prize port 5400 (the number of prize balls when the small prize port 5400 is won is, for example, 15 balls) and transparent are provided. A small hitting shutter 6100 that can move forward and backward with respect to the panel 172 is disposed. The small hitting shutter 6100 can be driven by a small hit winning opening solenoid (not shown). When the small hitting shutter 6100 operates in the forward direction with respect to the transparent panel 172, the small hit winning opening 5400 is in a closed mode. It becomes an open mode. If the result of the second special lottery is "small hit", the main CPU 101 performs a fluctuation display of the second special symbol and derives a result indicating "small hit". When the result of "small hit" is derived, the main CPU 101 controls the small hitting game state in which the small hitting shutter 6100 is operated so that the small hit winning opening 5400 is in an open mode.

  At the upper right of the first starting port 5443, as in FIG. 254, an out port 5444 for discharging a game ball out of the machine is arranged, but is not necessarily required.

  Similarly to FIG. 281, out of the right-hitting game balls, the game balls that did not win the large winning opening 540 and did not enter the accessory device 3500 also have a flow-down path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443. For example, an obstruction nail is formed so as to flow down any one of the flow path 5451 toward the second starting port 440 and the flow path 5452 toward the out port 5444. Among these three flow paths, the flow path of the game ball having the highest flow rate is the flow path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443, and then the flow path 5451 toward the second start port 440, and the flow rate of the game ball is the highest. The lower rate is the downflow path 5452 toward the out port 5444.

  Also, as in FIG. 281, when the first starting port 5443 is in the open mode, all or most of the game balls flow to the first starting port 5443, as in the case of FIG. It is configured to win. Therefore, when the first start port 5443 is in the open mode, even if the small hit prize port 5400 is in the open mode, the game ball flowing down the flow path 5450 toward the first start port 5443 is the small hit prize port. It is difficult to win 5400. On the other hand, when the game ball cannot enter the first starting port 544, the game ball flowing down the flowing path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443 is guided to the right side of the first starting port 5443. He reaches the small hit prize port 5400. At this time, if the small hit prize port 5400 is in the open mode, the game ball wins in the small hit prize port 5400, and the main CPU 101 sends the game ball to the small hit prize port 5400 via the payout / launch control circuit 300. Pay out prize balls based on the winning of. Game balls that have reached the small hit prize port 5400 but have not won the small hit prize port 5400 flow further downstream, and are eventually discharged out of the machine through the out port 57.

  Further, the main CPU 101 refers to, for example, the variation time determination table of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 258 in the “normal gaming state”, similarly to the modification of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment. The change time of the special symbol is determined, and the change display of the first special symbol is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 in which the left-hit game ball can win, and the "big hit" is displayed. When the result is derived, only the condition device of the condition device and the accessory continuous operating device is operated. The main CPU 101 changes to, for example, a high start special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. 259 when the condition device is activated. As described above, in the "normal game state", even if the condition device is generated based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442, from the occurrence of the condition device to the activation of the accessory continuous operation device. It is possible to cause a time difference between the two. Then, during the period from when the condition device is generated based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 to when the accessory continuous operation device is operated, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is performed in a state where the condition device is operated. Even if the display is performed, the result of "big hit" is not derived, and the main CPU 101 controls the small hitting game state with high frequency based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440. The game ball is won in the small hit prize port 5400, so that the prize ball is obtained and the game is unlimited. In this way, during the period from the occurrence of the condition device to the activation of the accessory continuous operation device, the result of the "big hit" is not derived, and the prize ball can be obtained by the small hitting game state and the all-you-can-eat state Is secured, and the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of launch balls per unit time can be set to a specific state exceeding 1.

  Further, in the “normal game state”, the main CPU 101 determines the change time of the special symbol with reference to the change time determination table of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 258, for example, and after the big hit game state ends. For example, when the game is controlled to the “high-precision time-saving game state”, the change to the high-start special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. Is also good. In this case, the main CPU 101 determines, based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5443 that the right-hitting game ball can win, in the “high-precision time-saving game state” after the big hit game state ends. When the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the result of the "big hit" is derived, only the condition device of the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device is operated, and the condition device is generated. It is possible to cause a time lag until the object continuous operation device operates. Then, when the determined number of time-saving games is exhausted in the “high-accuracy time-saving game state”, the main CPU 101 performs control to shift the game state to the “high-accuracy non-time-saving game state”. In this “high-precision non-time saving game state”, since the game ball enters the first starting port 544 in a non-electric support state in which it is impossible or difficult to win, the downflow path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443 flows down. The game ball reaches the small hit winning opening 5400. In other words, in the "high-precision time-saving gaming state", during the period from the occurrence of the condition device to the activation of the accessory continuous operation device, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed while the condition device is operating. The result of "big hit" is not derived even when the game is controlled to the small hitting game state based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, and the small hitting winning port 5400 The ball can be won, and the prize ball can be obtained and the game is unlimited. In this way, even when the game is controlled to the “high-precision time-saving game state” after the big hit game state is completed, the “high-precision time-saving game state” is maintained during the period from when the condition device is generated to when the accessory continuous operation device is operated. Under the condition that the game has been shifted to the "non-time-saving game state", the state of the all-you-can-win prize ball by the small hit game state is secured without deriving the result of "big hit", and the launch ball per unit time The specific state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number exceeds 1 can be set.

  In each of the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment and the modified example of the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, the condition device is determined based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442. Since the condition device can be operated, even if the player makes a left-handed operation on the premise that the condition device is operated, the accessory is placed on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the accessory continuous operation device can be operated. Preferably, a continuous actuation gate 3560 is provided. In this case, the main CPU 101 executes control for operating the accessory continuous operation device based on the fact that the game ball has passed the accessory continuous operation gate 3560 on the assumption that the condition device is operating. In this way, by providing the successively actuated operation gate 3560 through which the game ball can pass when the game ball is fired in a different launch mode from the accessory device 3500, for example, only the condition device can be used just before the hall closing time. When the game ball is in operation, the ball is allowed to pass through the accessory continuous operation gate 3560 without entering the accessory device 3500, whereby the game state can be quickly shifted to the jackpot game state.

[4. Pachinko gaming machine according to fourth embodiment]
[Expansion example of game characteristics by arrangement of various members in game area, etc.]
As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention and the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment have been described. The game may be extended as follows. Hereinafter, a pachinko gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment will be described.

  The pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment has a configuration not mentioned in the following description (for example, various members (especially, a left area) arranged in a gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine), control by the main CPU 101, and control by the sub CPU 201. The basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (see FIG. 5) according to the first embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment. However, it may have the same basic configuration as the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment (see FIG. 254). Further, the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment may have a setting function similarly to the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment can adopt various variations of the embodiment, and will be described separately in first to fourth examples.

  In addition, as the members constituting the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, there are members provided also in the pachinko machines according to the first to third embodiments (for example, a special winning opening or the like). In the pachinko machines according to the fourth embodiment, for the sake of convenience, some machines have the same reference numerals, while others have different reference numerals.

  In this specification, the first example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment is referred to as the pachinko gaming machine of the first example of the fourth embodiment (the second to fourth examples are also referred to). The same shall apply). On the other hand, the first example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment is simply referred to as the pachinko gaming machine of the first example (the same applies to the second to seventh examples). That is, an example in which “the fourth embodiment” is described before the example means an example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, and “the fourth embodiment” is described before the example. An example in which is not described means an example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment.

[Pachinko gaming machine of the first example of the fourth embodiment]
FIG. 283 is an example of a front view showing an appearance of a game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine of Example 1 of Embodiment 4. As shown in FIG. 283, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first example of the fourth embodiment, a special gaming member 4000 is disposed at the lower right of the liquid crystal display device 16. The special game member 4000 includes a special winning opening 5401, a special electric accessory 6010, a general winning opening 560, and a flow path forming member 590 for forming a flow path of a right-hit game ball. In the special game member 4000 shown in FIG. 283, various members constituting the special game member 4000 are not unitized, but may be unitized.

  As with the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the special electric accessory 6010 is configured such that a shutter 6020 is driven by a special winning opening solenoid (not shown). Transition (drive) to an open mode in which it is possible (or easy) to win a game ball into the special winning opening 5401 and a closed mode in which it is impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball into the special winning port 5401. It is configured to be possible.

  In addition, a receiving member 3001 that once receives a right-hit game ball is formed above and to the right of the shutter 6020. The receiving member 3001 has a function of stopping or weakening the momentum of the flowing game ball, and dropping the game ball to the upstream side (right side) of the shutter 6020.

  The shutter 6020 is a plate-like member on which the game ball can roll on the upper surface in the left-right direction, and is configured to be able to move forward and backward with respect to the transparent panel 172. When the shutter 6020 advances forward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the special winning opening 5401 is in an open mode, and when the shutter 6020 is retracted backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the special winning opening 5401 opens. It becomes a closed mode. When a game ball wins in the special winning opening 5401, the main CPU 101 pays out, for example, 15 prize balls via the payout / firing control circuit 300.

  When the shutter 6020 advances forward with respect to the transparent panel 172, it is possible to receive, on the upstream side (right side), a game ball that has been hit right and dropped from the receiving member 3000. The game ball received on the side is configured to roll with the upper surface of the movable shutter 6020 toward the downstream side (left side).

  The special winning opening 5401 is arranged at the most downstream side of the shutter 6020, and is opened so that a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the shutter 6020 from the upstream side to the downstream side can be received. However, if the shutter 6020 retreats backward in a state where there is a game ball that has been rolling on the upper surface of the shutter 6020 but has not yet reached the big winning opening 5401, the upper surface of the shutter 6020 has been rolled. The game ball falls without winning the large winning opening 5401.

  Below the special electric accessory 6010, more specifically, below the shutter 6020, a flow-down path forming member 590 that forms a flow-down path of a game ball that has not won the large winning opening 5401 is arranged. The flow-down path forming member 590 includes a first flow-down path 5901 in which a game ball dropped from the receiving member 3001 flows down when the shutter 6020 is retracted backward, and a shutter when the shutter 6020 retreats backward. It is configured to form a second downflow path 5902 through which the game balls rolling on the upper surface of the 6020 flow down.

  Note that the flow-down path forming member 590 may be configured so that the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the shutter 6020 flows down the second flow-down path 5902 when the shutter 6020 retreats backward. It is not necessary that all the game balls rolling on the upper surface of the shutter 6020 when the shutter 6020 retreats backward flow down the second flow-down path 5902. Therefore, of the game balls that have rolled on the upper surface of the shutter 6020, some of the game balls on the upstream side (for example, the game balls that have just dropped from the receiving member 3001) pass through the first downflow path 5901. It may be configured to flow down.

  The game ball that has flowed down the first flow-down path 5901 is discharged out of the machine from the out port 57 without winning any of the winning ports.

  A general winning port 560 is disposed downstream of the second flow-down path 5902, and the game balls flowing down the second flow-down path 5902 are configured so that all or almost all of the game balls win the general winning port 560. When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 560, the main CPU 101 pays out, for example, four prize balls via the payout / firing control circuit 300.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the first example of the fourth embodiment has a first special symbol or a second special symbol, like the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment or the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. Is displayed and the "big hit" is derived, the main CPU 101 controls the big hit gaming state which is advantageous to the player.

  In the big hit game state, the main CPU 101 executes a round game in which the big winning opening 5401 is opened in a predetermined mode over a plurality of rounds. The round game of one round is a game in which the special winning opening 5401 is opened, for example, for a predetermined period (for example, 30,000 msec), or the special winning opening 5401 is opened until a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls) of game balls are won. That is, the special winning opening 5401 repeats opening and closing every round.

  Therefore, each time the round game of one round is completed and the shutter 6020 retreats backward, the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the shutter 6020 flows down the second flow-down path 5902 and enters the general winning opening 560. I do. For example, if a round game of 15 rounds is executed in the big hit game state, the number of times that the shutter 6020 retreats backward in one big hit game state is 15 times. When the average number of game balls rolling on the upper surface of the shutter 6020 when the shutter 6020 retreats backwards is, for example, three, about 45 game balls are generally won in one big hitting game state. There will be a chance to win the mouth 560. Then, assuming that the number of award balls when one game ball wins in the general winning opening 560 is four, about 180 award balls may be paid out.

  As described above, by arranging the special game members 4000 in the game area 20 as described above (only by arranging the arrangement positions of various structural members), the special game members 4000 are paid out by the jackpot game (winning to the special winning opening 5401). In addition to the number of prize balls, prize balls are paid out based on a prize in the general prize port 560, so that it is possible to enhance gaming interest.

  The opening mode of the special winning opening 5401 in the round game (that is, the operating mode of the shutter 6020) is not necessarily limited to one opening / closing operation per round as long as there is regularity. An opening and closing operation may be performed. For example, a mode in which the opening of 10,000 msec is repeated three times may be considered as a one-round game. As described above, if the opening and closing operation of the special winning opening 5401 (the operation mode of the shutter 6020) is performed a plurality of times in one round game, there is a possibility that a larger amount of game balls may be paid out. It is possible to further enhance interest.

[Pachinko gaming machine of a second example of the fourth embodiment]
FIG. 284 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine of the second example of the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 284, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second example of the fourth embodiment, a special gaming member 4100 is arranged in a region on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16. The special game member 4100 has a large winning opening 5401, a special electric accessory 6010, a general winning opening 560, a plate-shaped movable member 5602 capable of changing the general winning opening 560 between an open mode and a closed mode, It comprises a starting port 440, a passing gate 49, a small hit winning port 5400, a small hitting shutter 6100, and a small hit winning port solenoid (not shown) for driving the small hitting shutter 6100. In the special game member 4100 shown in FIG. 284, various members constituting the special game member 4100 are not unitized, but may be unitized.

  The special electric accessory 6010 is arranged on the upper right of the liquid crystal display device 16 and, like the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment or the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, a special winning opening solenoid (FIG. When the shutter 6020 is driven by the not-shown), an opening mode in which a game ball can be (or easily) won to the special winning opening 5401, and a game ball cannot be won to the special winning opening 5401 (or not). (Differential) and a closed mode (drive).

  A right-hitting game ball collides with the buffer member 950, so that the momentum of the game ball is reduced. Then, the game ball, whose momentum has been weakened by colliding with the buffer member 950, falls to the upstream side (right side) of the shutter 6020.

  The shutter 6020 is a plate-like member on which the game ball can roll on the upper surface in the left-right direction, and is configured to be able to move forward and backward with respect to the transparent panel 172. When the shutter 6020 advances forward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the special winning opening 5401 is in an open mode, and when the shutter 6020 is retracted backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the special winning opening 5401 opens. It becomes a closed mode.

  When the shutter 6020 advances forward with respect to the transparent panel 172, it is possible to receive, on the upstream side (right side), a game ball that has been beaten to the right and weakened by the buffer member 950, The game ball received on the upstream side is configured to roll with the upper surface of the shutter 6020 toward the downstream side (left side).

  The special winning opening 5401 is arranged at the most downstream side of the shutter 6020, and is opened so that a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the shutter 6020 from the upstream side to the downstream side can be received. However, if the shutter 6020 retreats backward in a state where there is a game ball that has been rolling on the upper surface of the shutter 6020 but has not yet reached the big winning opening 5401, the upper surface of the shutter 6020 has been rolled. The game ball falls without winning the large winning opening 5401.

  Below the special electric accessory 6010, more specifically, below the shutter 6020, a flow-down path forming member 591 that forms a flow-down path of a game ball that has not won the big winning port 5401 is arranged. The downflow path forming member 591 includes a first downflow path 5903 through which a right-hit game ball flows down when the shutter 6020 is retracted backward, and an upper surface of the shutter 6020 when the shutter 6020 is retracted backward. And a second downflow path 5904 through which the game balls rolling down are formed. The first downflow path 5903 and the second downflow path 5904 are partitioned by a partition wall 594 so that the game balls cannot go to each other.

  Note that the flow-down path forming member 591 may be configured so that the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the shutter 6020 flows down the second flow-down path 5904 when the shutter 6020 retreats backward. It is not always necessary that all the game balls rolling on the upper surface of the shutter 6020 when the shutter 6020 retreats backward flow down the second flow-down path 5904. Therefore, of the game balls that have rolled on the upper surface of the shutter 6020, some of the game balls on the upstream side may be configured to flow down the first flow-down path 5903.

  In the first flow path 5903, a general winning opening 560, a second starting opening 440, and a small winning opening 5400 are arranged in this order from the upstream side to the downstream side. The small hit prize port 5400 is not an essential component in the pachinko gaming machine of the first example of the fourth embodiment.

  The general winning opening 560 can be displaced between a closed state in which the movable ball 5602 is closed and the game ball cannot be won, and an open mode in which the movable member 5602 is operated so that the game ball can be won. I have. When the general winning opening 560 is in the open mode, all or most of the game balls that have flowed down the first flow-down path 5903 without winning the general winning opening 560 can be awarded.

  Above the second starting port 440, the game balls that have flowed down the first downflow route 5903 without winning the large winning opening 540 among the right-hitting gaming balls, and have not even won the general winning opening 560. A receiving member 3002 for once receiving is formed. The receiving member 3002 has a function of stopping or weakening the momentum of the flowing game ball and dropping the game ball above the second starting port 440.

  Above the second starting port 440, a guiding nail for guiding a game ball to the second starting port 440 is implanted, and the game ball that has dropped from the receiving member 3002 to above the second starting port 440 is guided by the guiding nail. It is configured to be guided by the nail and to win the second starting port 440 with a probability of approximately three quarters. In addition, by setting the number of winning balls at the time of winning a game ball to the second starting port 440 to be one, the degree of expectation becomes less than 1 even if the player hits right in a normal game state.

  The small hit prize opening 5400 is configured to be displaceable between a closed mode and an open mode by a small hit shutter 6100 that can move forward and backward with respect to the transparent panel 172. That is, when the small hitting shutter 6100 advances forward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the small hit winning opening 5400 is closed, and when the small hitting shutter 6100 is retracted backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the small hit winning opening is formed. 5400 is an open mode. Note that game balls that have fallen from the receiving member 3002 above the second starting port 440 but have not won the second starting port 440 flow down to the upstream side (right side) of the small hitting shutter 6100.

  The right-hit game ball did not win the large winning opening 5401 and flowed down the first flow-down route 5903, but did not win any of the general winning opening 560, the second starting opening 440, and the small hit winning opening 5400. The game ball is discharged out of the machine through the out port 57.

  A passing gate 49, which is a trigger for a normal symbol determination, is arranged in the second downflow path 5904. When a game ball passes through the passing gate 49, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol determination. In this ordinary symbol determination, a hit is determined with a probability of 100% or extremely close to 100%. When the result of the ordinary symbol determination is a hit, the main CPU 101 sets the movable member 5602 to an open state of, for example, about 5900 msec, and then to a closed state. While the movable member 5602 is in the open state, the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 560 is facilitated. When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 560, the main CPU 101 pays out, for example, 15 prize balls via the payout / firing control circuit 300. The general winning opening 560 does not serve as a trigger for paying out a prize ball even if a game ball is won, but does not serve as a trigger for starting a change display of a special symbol (a trigger for executing a special lottery), for example.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second example of the fourth embodiment includes the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, and the pachinko gaming machine according to the first example of the fourth embodiment. Similarly to the machine, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed and the "big hit" is derived, the main CPU 101 controls the big hit gaming state which is advantageous to the player.

  In the big hit game state, the main CPU 101 executes a round game in which the big winning opening 5401 is opened in a predetermined mode over a plurality of rounds. The round game of one round is a game in which the special winning opening 5401 is opened, for example, for a predetermined period (for example, 30,000 msec), or the special winning opening 5401 is opened until a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls) of game balls are won. That is, the special winning opening 5401 repeats opening and closing every round.

  Note that, in a jackpot game state in which a round game is executed over a plurality of rounds, an interval period is provided between the round game and the round game. During this interval period, the shutter 6020 moves backward with respect to the transparent panel 172. , And the special winning opening 5401 is closed.

  When the round game of one round is completed and the shutter 6020 retreats backward, the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the shutter 6020 flows down the second flow-down path 5904. The game ball that has flowed down the second flow-down path 5904 passes through the pass gate 49, and the main CPU 101 displays the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol for a very short time, and as a result of the ordinary symbol determination, 100% or 100% as described above. % Is derived with a probability close to%. When a winning is derived as a result of the ordinary symbol determination, the main CPU 101 sets the movable member 5602 to an open state for about 5900 msec so that a game ball can enter the general winning opening 560, and a time of about 5900 msec elapses. Then, a closed mode is set.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the second example of the fourth embodiment, the main CPU 101 sets the movable member 5602 so that the general winning opening 560 is in an open state during an interval between round games. Activate. In other words, at least while the general winning opening 560 is in the open mode by the operation of the movable member 5602 (about 5900 msec), the large winning port 5401 is in the closing mode, so that the right-hitting game ball is passed through the first downflow path 5903. , And all or most of the prize balls enter the general winning opening 560. In addition to the number of prize balls paid out by the jackpot game (winning to the special winning opening 5401), the prize balls are based on the winning in the general winning opening 560. Is paid out, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment. Note that the opening end condition of the movable member 5602 is 5900 ms. In addition to this condition, the movable member 5602 may be immediately closed when a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of prizes is won in the general winning school 560 in one opening. Good. In this case, if the firing is continued, it is more likely that a predetermined number of prizes will be won before the elapse of 5900 ms. Therefore, the interval period may be set shorter than 5900 ms. Alternatively, up to four ordinary symbols can be held, the interval period is set to 5900 ms, and after a predetermined number of prizes, the movable member 5602 is opened again by winning the ordinary symbols, so that a further prize can be achieved.

  As described above, only by arranging the arrangement positions of various structural members arranged in the game area 20, in addition to the number of prize balls paid out by the jackpot game (winning to the special winning opening 5401), the general winning opening 560 Prize balls can be paid out based on winning.

  For example, suppose that an average of about 7 game balls wins in the general winning opening 560 in one interval period, and the number of winning balls when one game ball wins in the general winning opening 560 is 15 balls as described above. If so, approximately 105 prize balls may be paid out in one interval period. Assuming that the number of rounds of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is, for example, 15 rounds, about 1575 prize balls are paid out in addition to the number of prize balls paid out by the jackpot game (winning to the special winning opening 5401). Will be.

  It is preferable that the main CPU 101 does not suspend the start storage of the ordinary symbol based on the passing of the game ball through the passage gate 49. However, the start memory of the ordinary symbol may be suspended.

[Pachinko gaming machine of a third example of the fourth embodiment]
FIG. 285 is an example of a front view showing an appearance of a game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine of Example 3 of Embodiment 4. The pachinko gaming machine according to the third example of the fourth embodiment is a so-called one-type and two-type multifunction peripheral, which is used not only when a special symbol is displayed and a “big hit” is derived, The main CPU 101 also controls the big hitting game state when a game ball enters a specific area opened due to establishment of the predetermined condition and the game ball is received in a specific port called a V attacker. .

  As shown in FIG. 285, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third example of the fourth embodiment, a special gaming member 4200 is arranged in a region on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16. The special game member 4200 changes the pass gate 49, the special winning opening 5402, the special electric accessory 6015, the specific opening 777, the non-specific opening 778, the general winning opening 560, and the general winning opening 560 between an open mode and a closed mode. A movable member 5602 having a plate-like shape, a second starting port 440, and the like. In the special game member 4200 shown in FIG. 285, various members constituting the special game member 4200 are not unitized, but may be unitized.

  At the upper right of the liquid crystal display device 16, a pass gate 49 serving as a trigger for a normal symbol determination is arranged. When a game ball passes through the pass gate 49, the main CPU 101 extracts a normal symbol random number, and Make a decision. In this ordinary symbol determination, a hit is determined with a probability of 100% or extremely close to 100%. Further, the main CPU 101 determines the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol based on the extracted ordinary symbol random number. Then, the variation of the ordinary symbol is displayed according to the determined variation pattern, and the result of the ordinary symbol determination is derived.

  On the downstream side of the passage gate 49, a special winning opening 5402 and a special electric accessory 6015 are arranged. The special electric accessory 6015 is similar to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the pachinko gaming machines according to the first and second examples of the fourth embodiment, When the shutter 6030 is driven by a special winning opening solenoid (not shown), an opening mode that enables (or facilitates) the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 5402, and the opening of the game ball to the special winning opening 5402. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed mode in which winning is impossible (or difficult).

  More specifically, a specific opening 777 and a non-specific opening 778 are disposed downstream of the special winning opening 5402 and downstream of the shutter 6030. When the special symbol is fluctuated and the “small hit” is derived (if the result of the special lottery is “small hit”), the main CPU 101 operates the opening / closing member 5603 to operate the specific port 777 or the non-special port. A game ball can enter the specific port 778.

  However, when the opening / closing member 5603 is operated so that the game ball can be received in the specific port 777 or the non-specific port 778, the game ball is hardly received in the non-specific port 778, and 100% or extremely 100%. The game ball enters the specific opening 777 with a probability close to%. The specific port 777 is a port that triggers a big hit game state when a game ball enters, and the non-specific port 778 is a port that does not generate a big hit game state even if a game ball enters. Further, the specific port 777 and the non-specific port 778 are not limited to the ports that can receive the game balls, and may be areas through which the game balls can pass.

  When the game ball enters the specific opening 777, the main CPU 101 controls the big hit game state. On the other hand, even if the game ball is received in the non-specific port 778, it does not serve as an opportunity to be controlled to the big hit game state.

  On the downstream side of the specific opening 777, the non-specific opening 778, and the opening / closing member 5603, a general winning opening 560 is arranged. The general winning opening 560 is closed by a movable member 5602. Then, when the result of the ordinary symbol determination is a hit, the main CPU 101 sets the movable member 5602 to the open mode, and the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 560 is facilitated. After a predetermined time has elapsed, the main CPU 101 sets the movable member 5602 to a closed mode. When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 560, the main CPU 101 pays out, for example, one prize ball via the payout / firing control circuit 300. This general winning opening 560 only serves as an opportunity to pay out one prize ball even if a game ball wins, and does not serve as an opportunity to start a change display of a special symbol (execution of a special lottery), for example. Absent.

  A second starting port 440 is arranged downstream of the general winning port 560. However, when the movable member 5602 is in the open mode, all or most of the game balls hit right and reach the movable member 5602 win the general winning opening 560. Winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the movable member 5602 is in the closed mode, the game ball hit right and reaches the movable member 5602 is guided above the second starting port 440 without winning the general winning opening 560. However, even if the right-hit game ball reaches the vicinity of the movable member 5602, not all of the game balls that have reached the movable member 5602 fall on the movable member 5602, and fall out from the right side of the movable member 5602, There are also game balls that are discharged out of the machine from the out port 57 without winning any of the winning ports.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the third example of the fourth embodiment, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol determination to determine a hit with a probability of 100% or extremely close to 100%, and furthermore, a variable display time of the normal symbol. , The movable member 5602 is almost fully open. Therefore, all or most of the game balls hit right and reach the movable member 5602 win the general winning opening 560, and hardly reach the second starting opening 440.

(Game flow)
Next, the flow of the game will be described. When the player makes a right hit when the game is not controlled to the big hit game state, the game ball first passes through the pass gate 49. The main CPU 101 performs the fluctuation display of the normal symbol based on the passing of the game ball through the passage gate 49, and derives the result of the normal symbol determination.

  When the result of the normal symbol determination is derived, the movable member 5602 becomes a normal hit with a probability of 100% or extremely close to 100%, and the movable member 5602 is in the open mode. Usually, even when the movable member 5602 is in the closed state at the time when the game ball falls on the upstream side of the movable member 5602, the game ball passes through the movable member 5602 because the fluctuation display time of the symbol is usually short. (Before the game ball falling on the upstream side of the movable member 5602 rolls toward the downstream side and passes through the movable member 5602), the movable member 5602 is in the open state, and the second starting port 440 is opened. Therefore, the possibility that the game ball will be won at the second starting port 440 is extremely low. That is, it can be said that the movable member 5602 is almost in a state of being almost fully open.

  By the way, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 49, the main CPU 101 performs a variable display of the normal symbol based on the game ball. The variable display of the normal symbol includes an opening interval time, a time during which the normal symbol is variably displayed, and Ending interval time. The main CPU 101 activates the movable member 5602 based on the fact that the variation display of the ordinary symbol has been performed and the winning has been derived (the variation display of the ordinary symbol has ended after the ending interval time has elapsed) to set the movable member 5602 to the open mode. After a lapse of a predetermined time, a closed mode is set. Therefore, for example, the opening interval time and the ending interval time are set to be longer, and the fluctuation display time of the ordinary symbol is changed to the time required for the game ball to pass through the opening / closing member 5602 (the game dropped to the upstream side of the movable member 5602). When the ball is rolled downstream and passes through the movable member 5602), the game ball that has passed through the movable member 5602 may win the second starting port 440. Occurs.

  When a game ball wins in the second starting port 440, the main CPU 101 conducts a second special lottery, and derives the result of the second special lottery after performing a variable display of the second special symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine of the third example of the fourth embodiment, the probability that the “big hit” is derived by performing the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is, for example, 1/319, and the “small hit” is derived. Is 318/319, for example, and there is no "loss". However, "losing" may be performed with an extremely low probability (for example, 1/319).

  When the “small hit” is derived by performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the main CPU 101 operates the movable member 5602. When the movable member 5602 is in the open state, as described above, the game ball enters the specific port 777 at a probability of 100% or extremely close to 100%, and the game ball rarely enters the non-specific port 778.

  When the game ball enters the specific opening 777, the main CPU 101 controls the big hit game state and executes a round game over a plurality of rounds.

  Note that, as described above, not all the game balls that have been hit right and have reached the vicinity of the movable member 5602 go to the movable member 5602, and there are also game balls that go to the out port 57. Further, since the movable member 5602 is almost fully open, the game ball hardly wins the second starting port 440 and wins the general winning opening 560. However, even if a game ball wins in the general winning opening 560, the number of award balls is one. Therefore, even if the player always hits right, the expected value of the number of awarded balls with respect to the number of launched balls per unit time does not exceed 1 in a normal time when the game mode is not a big hit gaming state.

  By the way, as described above, if the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is set to be longer by setting the opening interval time or the ending interval time, for example, there is a possibility that the game ball passing through the movable member 5602 will win the second starting port 440. .

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine of the third example of the fourth embodiment, the first pattern in which the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is relatively short and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol in which the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is relatively long are set as the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol. Two patterns are prepared. Note that the fluctuation pattern of the ordinary symbol is stored in, for example, the main ROM 102 (see FIG. 9). The first pattern is a time shorter than a time required for the game ball to pass through the opening / closing member 5602, and the second pattern is a time shorter than a time required for the game ball to pass the opening / closing member 5602. Is also a long time. Then, the main CPU 101 extracts a normal symbol random number based on, for example, passing through the passage gate 49, determines a variation pattern of the ordinary symbol using the extracted ordinary symbol random number, and determines a variation pattern of the determined ordinary symbol. The fluctuation display of the normal symbol is performed in the fluctuation pattern. Therefore, if the determined variation pattern of the ordinary symbol is the first pattern, there is almost no possibility that the game ball will win the second starting port 440, and if the variation pattern of the determined ordinary symbol is the second pattern, There is a possibility that the game ball will win the second starting port 440.

  The main CPU 101 determines the variation pattern of the normal symbol as the first pattern with a probability of 299/300, for example, and determines the second pattern with a probability of 1/300. When the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol is determined to be the second pattern and the game ball wins in the second starting port 440, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed, and as described above, the “big hit” is generated with a probability of 1/1319. Is derived, and "small hit" is derived with a probability of 318/319 even if "big hit" is not derived. When the "small hit" is derived, the main CPU 101 executes control for operating the opening / closing member 5603 so that the game ball can enter the specific port 777 or the non-specific port 778. When the opening / closing member 5603 is operated, the game ball enters the specific port 777 at a probability of 100% or extremely close to 100%, so that the main CPU 101 controls the big hit game state.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the third example of the fourth embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having novel gaming properties that have never been seen before.

  It should be noted that a large number of variation patterns may be prepared as the variation patterns of the ordinary symbols. However, most of the variation patterns are preferably shorter than the time required for the game ball to pass through the opening / closing member 5602. If a large number of fluctuation patterns of a longer time than the time required for the game ball to pass through the opening / closing member 5602 are prepared, the frequency of winning the game ball to the second starting port 440 increases, and the big hit game state is frequently performed. Because it may be executed by

  Further, if the probability that the fluctuation pattern of the ordinary symbol is determined as the second pattern is too low, there is almost no gaming ball passing through the opening / closing member 5603, so that the interest may be reduced. Therefore, in the variation display of the second special symbol performed based on the winning rate of the game ball passing through the opening / closing member 5602 to the second starting port 440 and the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 440, "small hit" is displayed. And the probability that the game ball enters the specific opening 777 when the opening / closing member 5603 is operated based on the fact that “small hit” is derived in the variable display of the second special symbol. By appropriately changing one or more of them, the probability of being determined as the second pattern can be increased. Then, not only the pleasure of whether the game ball simply passes through the opening / closing member 5603, but also whether the game ball passing through the opening / closing member 5603 wins the second starting port 440, the game ball is placed in the second starting port 440. It is possible to entertain the player in multiple stages, such as whether a "small hit" is derived when winning, and whether a game ball enters the specific opening 777 when the "small hit" is derived. Become.

[Pachinko Machine of Fourth Embodiment of Fourth Embodiment]
FIG. 286 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine of Example 4 of Embodiment 4.

  As shown in FIG. 286, the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth example of the fourth embodiment has a first start port on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 in addition to the first start port 5442 provided conventionally. ing. For the sake of distinction, the first starting port arranged on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 is referred to as a first starting port 5443 for the sake of convenience. The control by the main CPU 101 is almost the same as when a game ball is won in the mouth 5443. However, the difference is that the number of prize balls is four when the first starting port 5442 receives a game ball, whereas the number of prize balls is one when the first starting port 5443 receives a game ball.

  In the area on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16, a special game member 4300 is arranged. The special game member 4300 includes a special winning opening 540, a special electric accessory 600, the passing gate 49, the above-described first starting port 5443, the second starting port 440, an ordinary electric accessory 6300, and the like.

  The special winning opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are arranged on the upper right of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the game area 20.

  The special electric accessory 600 is configured such that the shutter 610 is driven by a special winning opening solenoid (not shown), thereby enabling (or facilitating) winning of a game ball to the special winning opening 540, and a special winning combination. A closed mode in which it is impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball into the mouth 540, and a displacement (drive) mode. In the open mode in which the winning of the game ball into the special winning opening 540 is facilitated, all or most of the right-hit game balls are configured to win the special winning opening 540. Note that the special winning opening 540 has a probable change attacker (not shown) therein, and for example, when the game ball is detected to enter the probable change attacker while being controlled to the jackpot game state, the main game is performed. The CPU 101 controls the game state after the big hit game state ends to the “high-precision time-short game state” or the “high-precision non-time-short game state”, and the big hit without detecting the entry of the game ball into the probable change attacker. When the gaming state ends, the gaming state after the end of the big hitting gaming state is controlled to the “normal gaming state” or the “low-probability time-saving gaming state”.

  Downstream of the special winning opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600, a passing gate 49 which is usually a trigger for symbol determination is arranged. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 49, the main CPU 101 extracts a normal symbol random number and performs a normal symbol determination.

  In the normal symbol judgment, in the "normal game state" or the "high-accuracy non-time saving game state" which is not the electric support state, it is better to have no advantage when right-handed than when left-handed Although the hit is determined only with a relatively low probability, the hit is determined with a probability close to 100% or extremely close to 100% in the “high-precision time-short game state” or the “low-precision time-short game state” which is the electric support state.

  A first starting port 5443 and a normal electric accessory 6300 are arranged downstream of the passage gate 49 and below and to the right of the liquid crystal display device 16. The ordinary electric accessory 6300 includes a plate-shaped shutter 6310, a solenoid (not shown), and a power transmission mechanism (not shown) for transmitting the power of the solenoid to the shutter 6310.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth example of the fourth embodiment, when the open mode is such that the prize to the first starting port 5443 is facilitated, of the game balls hit right, the large prize port 540 is won. All or almost all of the changed game balls are configured to win the first starting port 5443.

  In addition, a receiving member 3000 that temporarily receives game balls that have not won the large winning opening 540 among the right-hit game balls is formed on the upper right side of the ordinary electric accessory 6300. The receiving member 3000 has a function of stopping or weakening the momentum of the flowing game ball and dropping the game ball to the upstream side (right side) of the shutter 6310.

  The shutter 6310 is a plate-shaped member on which the game ball can roll on the upper surface in the left-right direction, and is configured to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction with respect to the transparent panel 172 as described above. When the shutter 6310 is positioned forward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the first starting port 5443 is in a closed state, and when the shutter 6310 is positioned rearward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the first starting port 5443 is closed. 5443 is an open mode. When the winning is derived by performing the variable display of the normal symbol, the main CPU 101 operates the shutter 6310 to change the first starting port 5443 from the closed mode to the open mode.

  When the shutter 6310 is advanced forward with respect to the transparent panel 172, it is possible to receive a game ball dropped from the receiving member 3000 on the upstream side (right side), and receive the game ball on this upstream side. The game ball is configured to roll with the upper surface of the shutter 6310 facing downstream (left side).

  A second starting port 440 is disposed downstream of the first starting port 5443 and the shutter 6310. However, when the first starting port 5443 is in the open mode by the shutter 6310, all or most of the game balls hit right and reaching the shutter 6310 enter the first starting port 5443, so that the second starting port 440 is set. It is difficult to win game balls. On the other hand, when the first starting port 5443 is closed by the shutter 6310, the game ball hit right and reaches the shutter 6310 does not win the first starting port 5443, but is above the second starting port 440. Led to. However, even if the right-hit game ball reaches the vicinity of the shutter 6310 (the game ball drops from the receiving member 3000), not all of the game ball is guided to the shutter 6310, and the game ball falls out from the right side of the shutter 6310. There are also game balls that are discharged out of the machine from the out port 57 without winning any of the winning ports. In addition, even if the game ball is guided to above the second starting port 440, there is a game ball that is discharged from the out port 57 to the outside of the machine without winning any of the winning ports including the second starting port 440.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth example of the fourth embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines that the normal symbol determination is 100% in the “high-precision short-time gaming state” or the “low-precision short-time gaming state” which is the electric support state. Since the hit is determined with a probability extremely close to 100%, and since the fluctuation display time of the ordinary symbol is short, the shutter 6310 is almost in a state of being almost fully open. Therefore, in the “high-accuracy time-short game state” or the “low-accuracy time-short game state”, all or most of the game balls hit right and reached the shutter 6310 win the first starting port 5443 and reach the second starting port 440. It is rarely reached. When a game ball is won in the first starting port 5443, the main CPU 101 pays out a prize ball via the payout / launch control circuit 300, and the number of prize balls at this time is one. In addition, since there are game balls that pass through the right side of the shutter 6310 and head toward the out port 57, in the “high-accuracy time-short game state” or the “low-accuracy time-short game state”, a right-handed player wins the prize for the number of shot balls per unit time. The expected number of balls does not exceed 1. In the “normal game state” or the “high-precision non-time saving game state” which is not the power support state, the main CPU 101 normally uses a symbol so that it is not more advantageous to strike right than to strike left. The determination is made such that the hit is determined only with a relatively low probability.

  On the other hand, when shifting from the "high-accuracy time-saving game state" to "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" or shifting from the "low-accuracy time-short gaming state" to the "normal gaming state", it is no longer in the electric support state, so the normal symbol determination The hit is determined only with a relatively low probability, and the shutter 6310 that has been almost in a nearly open state is closed. Then, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5443 is inhibited, and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 becomes possible.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth example of the fourth embodiment, in the “normal gaming state”, the main CPU 101 refers to, for example, a low-start special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. 258. Then, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined. In the “high-accuracy time-saving game state”, the “high-accuracy non-time-saving game state”, or the “low-accuracy time-short gaming state”, the main CPU 101 sets a change time determination table for a special symbol for high start shown in FIG. With reference to this, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined. Therefore, a general player plays a game by left-handing in the "normal game state", and selects one of the "high-accuracy time-short game state", the "high-accuracy non-short-time game state", and the "low-accuracy time-short game state". In the game state, the game is played by right-handed. In the “normal game state”, even if the player hits right, the shutter 6310 is closed and the game ball rarely wins in the first starting port 5443, and the game ball wins in the second starting port 440. This is also because, unless the result of the second special lottery is “big hit”, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed for a long time of about 10 minutes (long fluctuations A to C), and the player is only lost.

  By the way, when the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery is “big hit”, the main CPU 101 determines the big hit type (hit time selection symbol command) determined with reference to FIGS. 287 and 288. The number of rounds of the round game to be executed in the big hit game state, the game state after the big hit game ends, and the like are determined.

  FIG. 287 is an example of a symbol determination table (first starting port, second starting port) stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 in the pachinko gaming machine of Example 4 of Embodiment 4. FIG. 288 is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 in the pachinko gaming machine of Example 4 of Embodiment 4. 13 and FIG. 257, the main CPU 101 determines the number of rounds to be executed in the big hit game in accordance with the big hit hit symbol design command, the big hit game ends, and the big hit game state. In order to determine the type of big hit, such as whether to turn on the probable change flag and whether to turn on the time saving flag in the game state after the transition to the general game state (a game state other than the big hit game state, the same applies hereinafter). Is a table to be referred to. In addition, similarly to FIG. 257, the number of working hours is determined to be any one of 24, 30, 36, 42, 48, and 100 times.

  287 and 288 are different from FIGS. 12, 13, 256, and 257 in the method of determining whether to turn on the probability change flag. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth example of the fourth embodiment, even if the result of the special lottery is “big hit”, the probability changing flag is turned on based on the result of the special lottery (hit selection symbol command). Rather than determining whether or not to do so, as described above, the determination is made based on whether or not the entry of the game ball into the probable change attacker in the big hit game state is detected.

  As shown in the big hit type determination table of FIG. 288, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is “big hit”, the ease of entry of the game ball into the certainty changing attacker according to the hit selection symbol command is reduced. Is different. For example, if the hit selection symbol command is “z3”, the main CPU 101 controls the big hit game state in a manner that it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probable change attacker, and the hit selection symbol command is “z10”. For example, the game state is controlled to the big hit game state in such a manner that the game ball can easily enter the probable change attacker.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth example of the fourth embodiment, the “difficulty of entering a game ball into a probable attacker” is that a game ball enters a probable attacker while being controlled to a jackpot game state. This is an embodiment with almost no possibility. In addition, the “aspect of easy entry of a game ball into a probable attacker” is such that a game ball almost enters a probable attacker while being controlled to a jackpot game state (to a high-probability game state with a probability close to almost 100%). Controlled).

  The ease with which the game ball can enter the probable change attacker can be changed by, for example, the operation mode of the movable piece provided in the special winning opening 540. That is, if the hit selection symbol command is, for example, “z3”, the main CPU 101 activates the operation mode of the movable piece in the big hit game state such that it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the probable change attacker. On the other hand, if the hit selection symbol command is, for example, “z10”, the main CPU 101 activates the operation mode of the movable piece in the big hit game state so that the game ball can easily enter the probable change attacker.

  In addition, the method of creating a mode in which the game ball is difficult to enter the probable change attacker and a mode in which the game ball is easy to enter are not limited to this. For example, it is conceivable to provide another special winning opening (not shown) which does not include the positive change attacker, separately from the special winning opening 540 including the positive change attacker therein. When the game ball can easily enter the probable change attacker (for example, when the hit selection symbol command is, for example, “z10”), the game is controlled to the big hit game state in which the special winning opening 540 is opened, and the game to the certain change attacker is performed. When the ball is difficult to enter (for example, when the hit selection symbol command is, for example, “z3”), by controlling the big hit game state in which the other big winning ports are opened without opening the big winning port 540, It is possible to create a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probable change attacker and a mode in which the game ball is easy to enter. The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment as long as it is possible to create an embodiment in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probable change attacker and an easy embodiment.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth example of the fourth embodiment, as can be seen with reference to FIG. 287 and FIG. 288, when the result of the first special lottery is “big hit”, the game ball to the probability changing attacker The probability of being controlled to the big hitting game state in a mode in which the player can easily enter (the hit selection symbol command is “z6” to “z11”, “z13”) is 50%. On the other hand, when the result of the second special lottery is "big hit", the big hit game is performed in a mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probable change attacker (the hit selection symbol command is "z20" to "z25", "z27"). The probability of being controlled to a state is 80%.

  Therefore, when the big hit game state ends and shifts to the “high accuracy time reduction game state” or the “low accuracy time reduction game state”, it is difficult or impossible to win a game ball to the second starting port 440 in these game states. Therefore, when a special symbol is fluctuated in these game states and a “big hit” is derived, the main CPU 101 changes the game state after the big hit game state ends with a probability of 50%. The game state in which the flag is turned on (“highly accurate time reduction game state”, “highly accurate non-time reduction game state”) is controlled.

  Then, when the time-saving game of the determined number of time-saving is completed without the "big hit" being derived as a result of the special lottery in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", the main CPU 101 changes the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" to " The control for shifting to the “high-accuracy non-time saving game state” is executed. In this “high-precision non-time saving game state”, when the special symbol is changed and the “big hit” is derived, the main CPU 101 has a probability of 80% to change the game state after the big hit game state ends. In this case, the game state is controlled to the game state in which the probability change flag is turned on (“highly accurate time reduction game state”, “highly accurate non-time reduction game state”).

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth example of the fourth embodiment, the gaming state in which the probable change flag is turned on when the result of the special lottery is "big hit" without changing the firing mode of the gaming ball. It is possible to provide new game characteristics such as changing the probability (hereinafter, referred to as “probability change probability”) controlled to (“high-probability time-saving gaming state”, “high-probability non-time-saving gaming state”). It becomes.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth example of the fourth embodiment, when shifting from the big hit gaming state to the “highly accurate time reduction gaming state”, the timing at which the probability change probability changes (“highly accurate time reduction gaming state” to “highly accurate time reduction gaming state”). The number of time savings before shifting to the “uncertain time saving gaming state” is different each time, so that the gaming interest can be enhanced.

  In addition, by not disclosing the determined number of times saved by either the main CPU 101 or the sub CPU 201, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the timing at which the probability change probability changes, thereby further enhancing the interest in the game. be able to.

  Furthermore, when the big hit game state is completed and the state is shifted to the “high accuracy time reduction game state” or the “low accuracy time reduction game state”, whether the state is the “high accuracy time reduction game state” or the “low accuracy time reduction game state” Is not disclosed by any of the main CPU 101 and the sub CPU 201, it is possible to provide more interesting game characteristics. In other words, when the game is in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", it is more advantageous for the player to shift to the "high-accuracy non-hour-saving gaming state" at an early stage (the probability of change in probability is increased). On the other hand, when the game is in the "low-probability time-short game state", the longer the control is performed to the "low-probability time-short game state", the greater the merit for the player. Therefore, depending on whether the current gaming state is the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" or the "low-probability time-saving gaming state", whether the end timing of the time-saving game is earlier or later is different. It is possible to increase.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth example of the fourth embodiment, when the result of the special lottery is “big hit”, the number of times saved may be 0 (the hit selection symbol command is “z12”). , “Z13”, [z26], “z27”). In this case, even if the number of time savings is the same 0, the stimulus that the big hitting game state is ended and immediately controlled to the “high-precision non-time saving game state” or controlled to the “normal game state” It is possible to provide various game characteristics. In the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth example of the fourth embodiment, in any of the first special lottery and the second special lottery, immediately after the jackpot gaming state ends, the “highly accurate non-time saving gaming state” (The probability that the hit selection symbol command is selected as “z13” or “z27”), and the probability of being immediately controlled to the “normal game state” (the hit selection symbol command is “z12” or The probability of being controlled to the “high-precision non-time-saving gaming state” is immediately changed between the first special lottery and the second special lottery, although the probability of being selected as “z26” is the same. It may be.

  As can be said in common for all of the above-described embodiments, examples, and modifications, when a game ball is fired in a specific mode (for example, right-handed), the game ball can win at a high frequency. Regarding the winning port (for example, the second starting port 440 in FIG. 284), regardless of whether it is a winning port where the electronic support functions or a winning port where the electronic support does not function, when the game ball wins, It is preferable that the number of prize balls paid out by the CPU 101 (payout / firing control circuit 300) is one. Thus, for example, even if the player fires a game ball in a specific mode during the “normal game state”, the expected value of the number of award balls with respect to the number of fire balls per unit time may exceed 1. It can be impossible.

[Other extended examples]
Each of the above embodiments, each of the examples, and each of the modified examples are exemplifications. It is needless to say that can be partially replaced or combined in. That is, the components described in each embodiment, each example, and each modification can be arbitrarily combined with each other.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following gaming machines can be provided.

[Appendix 1]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in the starting port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the symbol variation indicating the big hit is displayed by executing the suspended symbol variation game. A gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed is known.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol change game is being played, a first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting a possibility of a jackpot, and a possibility that the held symbol change game may become a jackpot (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

  In recent years, there has been a tendency to increase the effect of the effect by increasing the type of effect, such as a gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-192817.

  However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the type of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time in the course of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or more to process data having a large data capacity, such as video data, it is required that the processing be performed smoothly even in such a case. Has been.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a process smoothly while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 1 includes a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) on which a variable display of an identification symbol is performed based on establishment of a fixed condition, and information on the variable display that has not been performed. Holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of start-up memory (for example, a random number value for determining a jackpot or a symbol for determining symbols); When the variable display is performed for one start memory stored by the above, the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed using the effect time until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. Display control means (for example, step S205, etc.) for controlling the execution of the identification symbol, and the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. Symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324) capable of determining the number of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuations) to be executed, and a specific start in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. When the memory (reach or big hit) is included, an effect mode determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining an effect mode for the start memory until the variable display of the specific start memory is performed. Wherein the effect mode determination means determines the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determination means for the start memory until the variable display of the specific start memory is performed. And the effect mode (for example, character) performed during the execution of the symbol effect (for example, temporary fluctuation) divided into the predetermined unit regardless of the unit of the starting memory. Specific effect determination unit (for example, for determining a subtraction effect) of data, characterized by having a step S372, etc.).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), when a specific start memory is included in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding unit, the variable display of the specific start memory is performed. Can be determined before the variable display is started, so that even if the data capacity is large, the effect on the start memory (that is, the start memory in which the variable display has not yet been performed) can be determined. Processing can be performed. In addition, since the number of executions of the symbol effect one or more times is determined for each of the start memories stored by the holding means, a variable display for one start memory is displayed, but a plurality of start effects are displayed in appearance. It looks as if the variable display for the memory is being performed, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the production. Further, the determined number of executed symbol effects is divided into predetermined units, and the effect mode performed during execution of the symbol effects divided into the predetermined units is determined. Smooth processing can be performed.

  If the start memory stored by the holding means includes a specific start memory in which a variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation), the variable display is performed in a specific mode. Nevertheless, when the result of the hit determination is out of the question, even if a production mode having a relatively high expectation degree is performed thereafter (for example, a character subtraction process is performed), such a production mode is not considered. The interest of the player decreases. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the above (1), when a plurality of specific start memories are included in the plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, the earliest of the plurality of specific start memories is first. The effect mode for the start memory up to the first specific start memory variably displayed is determined, and the effect mode is not determined for the start memory variably displayed after the first specific start memory. Thus, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Here, the “variable display of the identification symbol” means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display of one start memory, and On the other hand, even if the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of times of the variable display is one.

  The “stop effect” of the identification symbol is a stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification symbol performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both effects (for example, final stop).

  Further, `` if the variable display is performed for one start memory, the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol using the effect time until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. "Is performed" means not only the time during which variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display is performed for the next start memory. Therefore, the "symbol effect in which the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is the time until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed if the variable display is in the middle, and the interval is also the last in the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) The gaming machine according to (1), further including a holding effect control unit (for example, step S205 or the like) for controlling an image related to the start memory stored in the holding unit to be displayed on the display unit. Wherein the at least one effect control means controls at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed so as not to display an image relating to the starting memory stored in the at least one hold means. And

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), since the image relating to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from being conscious of the variable display in the unit of the start memory. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode without being influenced by the result of one game, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), the effect mode determination unit includes the specific start memory in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding unit. When there is no start memory, the effect mode is determined for all the start memories stored by the holding means, and the effect mode for the last stored start memory among the start memories stored by the hold means is determined by the start memory. Has a suggestion effect deciding means (for example, step S358, etc.) for deciding on an effect mode suggesting that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode, even though the specific start memory is not used. The suggestion effect determining means, when the starting memory is not stored by the holding means, an effect mode indicating that the variable effect of the identification symbol is performed in the specific mode. Characterized in that it is configured so as not be determined.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means do not include a specific start memory, it is not necessary to determine the effect mode again. Although it is unlikely that the above burden will increase, it is considered difficult to maintain the player's expectation for the display effect. Therefore, the effect mode for the last stored start memory among the start memories stored by the holding means suggests that the variable effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode in spite of not being a specific start memory. By determining the effect mode, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation of the display effect. In addition, when the starting memory is not stored by the holding means, an effect mode indicating that the variable effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode is not determined, so that the control load does not increase.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 1, processing can be performed smoothly while suppressing a decrease in interest.

[Appendix 2]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in the starting port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the symbol variation indicating the big hit is displayed by executing the suspended symbol variation game. A gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed is known.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol change game is being played, a first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting a possibility of a jackpot, and a possibility that the held symbol change game may become a jackpot (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

  In recent years, there has been a tendency to increase the effect of the effect by increasing the type of effect, such as a gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-192817.

  However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the type of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time in the course of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or more to process data having a large data capacity, such as video data, it is required that the processing be performed smoothly even in such a case. Has been.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a process smoothly while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 2 includes a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of an identification symbol based on a predetermined condition being satisfied, and information about the variable display that has not been performed. Holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of start-up memory (for example, a random number value for determining a jackpot or a symbol for determining symbols); When the variable display is performed for one start memory stored by the above, the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed using the effect time until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. Display control means (for example, sub-CPU 201) for controlling the execution of the identification symbol, and a change effect and a stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. Effect effect determining means (for example, step S324 etc.) capable of determining the number of executed symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuation), and one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. (For example, step S372 and the like), and the effect mode determining means is determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means. The symbol effect of the number of executions is divided into predetermined units, and an effect mode (for example, a character subtraction effect) performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined unit regardless of the unit of the start memory is determined. The specific effect determination means (for example, step S370, etc.), and the specific start memory is included in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. If not, the effect mode is determined for all the start memories stored by the holding means, and the effect mode for the last stored start memory among the start memories stored by the holding means is determined by the start memory. Suggestion effect determining means (for example, a reach effect of gaseous reach) that suggests that the change effect of the identification symbol is performed in the specific mode, even though is not the specific start memory. For example, there is a step S358), and the suggestion effect determination means, when the starting memory is not stored by the holding means, the effect mode suggesting that the variable effect of the identification symbol is performed in the specific mode. Is determined so as not to be determined.

  According to the gaming machine of (1), the effect mode for one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means can be determined before the variable display is started, so that the data capacity is large. Even if it does, smooth processing can be performed. In addition, since the number of executions of the symbol effect one or more times is determined for each of the start memories stored by the holding means, a variable display for one start memory is displayed, but a plurality of start effects are displayed in appearance. It looks as if the variable display for the memory is being performed, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the production. Further, the determined number of executed symbol effects is divided into predetermined units, and the effect mode performed during execution of the symbol effects divided into the predetermined units is determined. Smooth processing can be performed.

  In addition, when the starting memory stored by the holding unit does not include the specific starting memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation), the player's expectation of the display effect is maintained. Can be difficult. Therefore, in this case, the effect mode is determined for all the start memories stored by the holding means, and the effect mode for the last stored start memory among the start memories stored by the hold means is determined by the start mode. Despite the fact that the memory is not a specific starting memory, by determining a production mode that suggests that the variable design of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode, the expectation of the player for the display performance is maintained. ing.

  Here, the “variable display of the identification symbol” means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display of one start memory, and On the other hand, even if the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of times of the variable display is one.

  The “stop effect” of the identification symbol is a stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification symbol performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both effects (for example, final stop).

  Further, `` if the variable display is performed for one start memory, the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol using the effect time until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. "Is performed" means not only the time during which variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display is performed for the next start memory. Therefore, the "symbol effect in which the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is the time until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed if the variable display is in the middle, and the interval is also the last in the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) In the gaming machine described in the above (1), based on a starting port (for example, a second starting port 440) in which a game ball can be won and a winning of the game ball in the starting port, the identification symbol is displayed. And a variation pattern determining means (for example, main CPU 101) for determining a variation pattern when variable display is performed, wherein the holding means (for example, main CPU 101) determines that a game ball has won the starting port. The starting memory is configured to be able to be held on the basis of the starting memory, and the symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, the sub CPU 201) stores the starting memory stored in the holding means when a game ball is won in the starting opening. Is determined on the basis of the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination means.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the number of executions of the symbol effect determined with respect to the starting memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the fluctuation pattern. More specifically, if the variation pattern has a relatively long variation time, the number of executed symbol effects increases, and if the variation pattern has a relatively short variation time, the number of executed symbol effects decreases. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol effect is reduced, and it is difficult for the player to know that one or more symbol effects are being executed for one start memory. In addition, since the number of executions of the symbol effect determined with respect to the start memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the variation pattern, the symbol effect for each start memory is not increased without increasing the load on the game. The number of executions can be easily determined.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), a holding effect control means (for example, step S205) for controlling an image related to a start memory stored in the holding means to be displayed on the display means. , Etc.), and the on-hold effect control means controls at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed, so that an image related to the start storage stored in the on-hold means is not displayed. It is characterized by doing.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), since the image relating to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from being conscious of the variable display in the unit of the start memory. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode without being influenced by the result of one game, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 2, processing can be smoothly performed while suppressing a decrease in interest.

[Appendix 3]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in the starting port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the symbol variation indicating the big hit is displayed by executing the suspended symbol variation game. A gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed is known.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol change game is being played, a first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting a possibility of a jackpot, and a possibility that the held symbol change game may become a jackpot (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

  In recent years, there has been a tendency to increase the effect of the effect by increasing the type of effect, such as a gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-192817.

  However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the type of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time in the course of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or more to process data having a large data capacity, such as video data, it is required that the processing be performed smoothly even in such a case. Has been.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a process smoothly while enhancing a staging effect.

(1) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 3, wherein a start port (for example, a second start port 440) provided in the game area and a display means for variably displaying an identification symbol based on reception of a game ball in the start port. (For example, the liquid crystal display device 16) and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed (for example, a random number for jackpot determination or a random number for symbol determination) are stored in a predetermined number (for example, four) as start-up memory. A first effect mode is determined for the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to the above, and for the starting memory stored by the holding means when the variable display of the identification symbol is performed. First effect mode determining means for setting effect data according to the determined first effect mode, and start storage stored by the holding means when a game ball is received in the starting port. A second production mode determining means for determining a second production mode as a target, and setting the production data according to the determined second production mode, wherein the second production mode determining means comprises the first production mode. The second effect mode is determined using the effect data of the first effect mode determined by the determining means.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the second effect mode in which the effect mode is determined for the starting memory stored by the holding means when the game ball is received in the starting port is stored by the holding means. Although there is not enough time to make the display immediately when the identification symbol is displayed, the first effect mode is determined based on the starting memory stored by the holding means when the variable display of the identification symbol is performed. Since the determination is made using the effect data, smooth processing can be performed even if the data volume is large.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, execution of a symbol effect (for example, temporary fluctuation) in which a change effect and a stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding unit. A symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) capable of determining the number, wherein the first effect mode determining means determines the symbol effect execution number determining means with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means; The symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the above is divided into predetermined units, and an effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined unit is determined regardless of the unit of the start memory. It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the number of executions of the symbol effect is determined once or a plurality of times with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means, so that the display is variable with respect to one start memory In appearance, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is being performed, and the effect can be enhanced. In addition, the determined number of executions of the symbol effect is divided into predetermined units, and the effect mode performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined unit is determined, so that it is possible to further enhance the effect. It becomes.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 3, processing can be performed smoothly while enhancing the effect of the effect.

[Appendix 4]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in the starting port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the symbol variation indicating the big hit is displayed by executing the suspended symbol variation game. A gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed is known.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol change game is being played, a first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting a possibility of a jackpot, and a possibility that the held symbol change game may become a jackpot (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

  In recent years, there has been a tendency to increase the effect of the effect by increasing the type of effect, such as a gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-192817.

  However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the type of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time in the course of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or more to process data having a large data capacity, such as video data, it is required that the processing be performed smoothly even in such a case. Has been.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a process smoothly while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 4 includes a lottery means (for example, step S117) for performing a hit determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and a variable identification symbol based on the result of the hit determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) on which display is performed and information on the variable display which has not been performed (for example, a random number value for determining a big hit or a random number value for determining a symbol) are stored in a predetermined number as a starting memory. (For example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to (for example, four), and when the variable display is performed for one start memory stored by the hold means, the one start memory is displayed. A display control unit (for example, a step control unit) that performs control such that the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed by using the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory is performed. 205) and a special game state executing means (for example, step S96 etc.) capable of executing a special game (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on the result of the hit determination being a specific result. And the game state after the execution of the special game can be controlled to an advantageous game state (for example, a time-saving game state or a high-probability game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state for different periods each time. Advantageous state control means, and effect control means (for example, step S205 or the like) for controlling a display effect displayed on the display means, wherein the effect control means has an index effect having a predetermined degree of expectation for the game state. At least the execution number of the (character subtraction effect) and the execution timing of which variable display in the advantageous game state the index effect is executed in, The advantageous gaming state according to the information relating to the gaming state of the advantageous gaming state (for example, information as to whether or not the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state) and the period of controlling the advantageous gaming state (for example, the number of working hours). Effect pre-determination means (for example, scenario pre-setting processing (FIG. 138)) which is determined before being controlled, and an effect on one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means in the advantageous game state. Specific effect determining means (for example, step S370 etc.) for determining an aspect, wherein the specific effect determining means executes the index effect in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. When the index start memory is included, the index effect is replaced with the execution timing determined by the effect pre-determination means, and any one of the one or more start memories is used. An effect re-determining means (for example, step S358) for deciding to execute the variable display according to the start storage is provided.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the index effect having a predetermined degree of expectation for the gaming state is executed in the variable display in the advantageous gaming state, but the execution timing of the index effect is changed to the advantageous gaming state. Determined before being controlled. Therefore, even if the data capacity is large, since there is enough time before the index effect is performed, it is possible to perform smooth processing. However, before being controlled to the advantageous game state, it is a time when the start memory for the index effect has not been held yet, so depending on the situation when the variable display is performed, it is determined before being controlled to the advantageous game state. The index effect cannot always be performed at the set execution timing. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, when the index start memory is included in the one or more start memories stored by the holding means, the execution timing of the index effect is set to one or more of the start memories. It is determined again to be executed in any variable display related to the start memory. Thereby, even if the data capacity is large, the index effect can be performed by smooth processing.

(2) In the gaming machine according to the above (1), the execution timing of the index effect determined by the effect pre-determining means may be changed to the M-th variable display in a game state after the special game is executed. When the predetermined number that can be stored as start-up memory by the holding unit is N, the effect re-determining unit replaces the execution timing of the index effect determined by the effect pre-determining unit. In the game state after the execution of the special game, the variable display at any one of the ranges of [M- (predetermined number N-1)] to [M + (predetermined number N-1)] It is to decide to perform an index effect.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the execution timing of the index effect determined by the effect re-determining means is determined without largely deviating from the execution timing of the index effect determined before being controlled to the advantageous gaming state. be able to.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding unit include a specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific manner. Specific start determining means (for example, step S330, etc.) for determining whether or not the effect is determined, and the effect re-determining means is configured to store the specific start memory in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. Is determined, the determination is made that any one of the variable displays in the start memory until the variable display relating to the specific start memory is performed is performed.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), even if the start memory stored by the holding means includes the specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, the reach variation), the control in the control can be prevented. The index effect can be performed by smooth processing without excessively increasing the burden on the user. That is, if the specific starting memory is included in the starting memory stored by the holding unit, it is necessary to determine the effect mode again, and there is a possibility that the control burden may be increased. In this regard, according to the gaming machine of the above (3), when the specific start memory is included in the start memory stored by the holding means, the start memory until the variable display of the specific start memory is performed. Is determined, the control load can be reduced as much as possible.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 4, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

[Appendix 5]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in the starting port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the symbol variation indicating the big hit is displayed by executing the suspended symbol variation game. A gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed is known.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol change game is being played, a first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting a possibility of a jackpot, and a possibility that the held symbol change game may become a jackpot (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

  In recent years, there has been a tendency to increase the effect of the effect by increasing the type of effect, such as a gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-192817.

  However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the type of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time in the course of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or more to process data having a large data capacity, such as video data, it is required that the processing be performed smoothly even in such a case. Has been.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to suppress a decrease in interest. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of performing processing smoothly.

(1) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 5 includes a lottery device (for example, step S117) that performs a hit determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and a variable identification symbol based on the result of the hit determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) on which display is performed and information on the variable display which has not been performed (for example, a random number value for determining a big hit or a random number value for determining a symbol) are stored in a predetermined number as a starting memory. When the variable display is performed on the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) which can be stored up to the start memory stored by the holding means, the next start memory after the one start memory is displayed. A display control unit (for example, step S205 or the like) that controls so that the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed using the effect time until the variable display is performed; Special game state execution means capable of executing a special game (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on the result of the hit determination being a specific result, and a game after the special game is executed Advantageous state control means capable of controlling the state to an advantageous gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state or a high-probability gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state over a different period each time; The number of executions of the index effect having a degree (subtraction effect of the character) and the execution timing of executing the index effect in any of the variable displays in the advantageous game state include at least information relating to the gaming state of the advantageous gaming state ( For example, the information on whether or not the game is in the high-probability game state) and the period (for example, the number of working hours) controlled to the advantageous game state, An effect pre-determination means (for example, a scenario pre-setting process (FIG. 138)) to be determined before being controlled to a state, and a change effect and a stop effect of the identification symbol with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means A symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) capable of determining the number of symbol effects (for example, provisional fluctuations) to be performed, and one or a plurality of symbol effects stored by the holding means in the advantageous game state Effect state determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining an effect state with respect to the start memory, wherein the effect state determining means includes one or a plurality of start memories stored by the suspending means. An indicator effect execution determining means (for example, step S338) for determining whether or not an indicator start memory for executing the indicator effect is included; When it is determined by the indicator effect execution determination means that the indicator start memory is included in one or more start memories stored in the memory, a change is made to the execution timing determined by the effect advance determination means. An effect that divides the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determination means into a predetermined unit and determines in which symbol effect divided into the predetermined unit the index effect is to be executed. Redetermining means (for example, step S358 or the like).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the index effect having a predetermined degree of expectation for the gaming state is executed in the gaming state after the special gaming state is executed, but the execution timing of the index effect is , Before being controlled to the advantageous gaming state. Therefore, even if the data capacity is large, since there is enough time before the index effect is performed, it is possible to perform smooth processing. However, before being controlled to the advantageous game state, it is a time when the start memory for the index effect has not been held yet, so depending on the situation when the variable display is performed, it is determined before being controlled to the advantageous game state. The index effect cannot always be performed at the set execution timing. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, when the index start memory is included in the one or more start memories stored by the holding means, the execution timing of the index effect is set to one or more of the start memories. It is determined again to be executed in any variable display related to the start memory. Thereby, even if the data capacity is large, the index effect can be performed by smooth processing.

  In addition, since the number of executions of the symbol effect once or a plurality of times is determined with respect to the start memory stored by the suspending means, a variable display for one start memory is displayed, but a plurality of start memories are displayed in appearance. It appears as if the variable display is being performed on, and the effect of the production can be enhanced. In addition, the determined number of executed symbol effects is divided into predetermined units, and the index effect is executed in any of the symbol effects divided into the predetermined units, so that it is possible to further enhance the effect.

(2) In the gaming machine according to the above (1), the index effect execution determination means may include, in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, an index start memory in which the index effect is executed. Although it is determined whether or not the index effect is included, when there are a plurality of start memories stored by the holding unit, it is determined until which of the plurality of start memories is used to execute the index effect. It is characterized in that it is configured not to do so.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when there are a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, it is determined whether or not the index starting memory is included. Since it is not determined whether or not the index effect is executed in the start memory, the effect of the effect can be enhanced without increasing the control load. The reason why it is not determined until which of the plurality of start memories the index effect is executed in is determined by the effect predetermination means even if the plurality of start memories include the index start memory. This is because the execution timing is determined again.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (2), the effect mode determination means may be a specific start in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. When the memory (reach or big hit) is included, the effect form is determined for the start memory until the variable display for the specific start memory is performed. .

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), even if the start memory stored by the holding means includes the specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach fluctuation), it is interesting. Can be suppressed. That is, when the start memory stored by the holding means includes a specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation), the variable display is performed in the specific mode. Nevertheless, when the result of the hit determination is out of the question, even if a production mode having a relatively high expectation degree is performed thereafter (for example, a character subtraction process is performed), such a production mode is not considered. The interest of the player decreases. In this regard, according to the gaming machine of (3), when one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means include a specific start memory (reach or big hit), the specific start memory is stored. Because the effect mode for the start memory until the variable display is performed is determined, and the effect mode is not determined for the start memory variably displayed after the specific start memory, the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 5, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

[Appendix 6]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in the starting port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the symbol variation indicating the big hit is displayed by executing the suspended symbol variation game. A gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed is known.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol change game is being played, a first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting a possibility of a jackpot, and a possibility that the held symbol change game may become a jackpot (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

  In recent years, there has been a tendency to increase the effect of the effect by increasing the type of effect, such as a gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-192817.

  However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the type of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time in the course of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or more to process data having a large data capacity, such as video data, it is required that the processing be performed smoothly even in such a case. Has been.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a process smoothly while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 6 includes a lottery unit (for example, step S117) that performs a hit determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a variable identification symbol based on the result of the hit determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) on which display is performed and information on the variable display which has not been performed (for example, a random number value for determining a big hit or a random number value for determining a symbol) are stored in a predetermined number as a starting memory. When the variable display is performed on the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) which can be stored up to the start memory stored by the holding means, the next start memory after the one start memory is displayed. A display control unit (for example, step S205 or the like) that controls so that the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed using the effect time until the variable display is performed; Special game state execution means (for example, step S96 or the like) capable of executing a special game (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on the result of the hit determination being a specific result; The game state after the execution of the game state, the advantageous game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (for example, time-saving game state or high-probability game state), the advantageous state control means that can be controlled for different periods each time The number of executions of the index effect (subtraction effect of the character) having a predetermined degree of expectation in the game state and the execution timing of which variable display in the advantageous game state the index effect is executed at least in the advantageous game state (For example, information on whether or not the game state is a high-probability game state) and a period (for example, hour (The number of times) and the effect pre-determination means (for example, scenario pre-setting processing (FIG. 138)) to be determined before being controlled to the advantageous gaming state; A symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 etc.) capable of determining the number of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuations) in which the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed; Effect state determining means (for example, step S372 and the like) capable of determining an effect state for one or a plurality of start memories stored by the suspending means; (For example, a subtraction effect of an enemy character) and a second index effect (for example, a subtraction effect of an ally character) having a lower degree of expectation than the first index effect. And at least one of the first index effect and the second index effect is determined. The first index memory for executing the first index effect and / or the second index start memory for executing the second index effect are included in one or a plurality of start memories stored by Index effect execution determining means (for example, step S338) for determining whether or not the first index start memory and / or the second index start memory are stored in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. Is included by the indicator effect execution determination means, the previous time instead of the execution timing determined by the effect advance determination means, The symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determination means is divided into predetermined units, and the first index effect and / or the second index effect is performed in any of the symbol effects divided into the predetermined unit. Effect redetermining means (for example, step S358) for determining whether to execute.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), as an index effect having a predetermined degree of expectation for a gaming state, a first index effect having a relatively high degree of expectation and an expectation relatively lower than the first index effect. A second index effect having a degree is prepared. The first index effect and the second index effect are both executed in the variable display in the advantageous game state, but the execution timing of the first index effect and / or the second index effect is set in the advantageous game state. Before being controlled. Therefore, even if the data capacity is large, there is ample time before the first index effect and / or the second index effect is performed, so that smooth processing can be performed. However, before the state is controlled to the advantageous game state, the start memory for the first index effect and / or the second index effect is not yet held, so depending on the situation when the variable display is performed, it may be advantageous. At the execution timing determined before being controlled to the gaming state, the first index effect and / or the second index effect cannot always be performed. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, when one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means include the index start memory, the execution timing of the first index effect and / or the second index effect is changed. , Is determined again to be executed in the variable display related to any one of the start memories from one or a plurality of start memories. Thereby, even if the data capacity is large, the index effect can be performed by smooth processing. In the re-determination of the execution timing of the first index effect and / or the second index effect, it is preferable that the execution order of the first index effect and / or the second index effect determined by the effect predetermining means is maintained. .

  In addition, since the number of executions of the symbol effect once or a plurality of times is determined with respect to the start memory stored by the suspending means, a variable display for one start memory is displayed, but a plurality of start memories are displayed in appearance. It appears as if the variable display is being performed on, and the effect of the production can be enhanced. Further, since the determined number of executed symbol effects is divided into predetermined units, and the first index effect and / or the second index effect is executed in any of the symbol effects divided into the predetermined units, further effect is provided. The effect can be enhanced.

(2) In the gaming machine according to the above (1), the index effect execution determining means includes the first index start memory and / or the first index start memory in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. Although it is determined whether or not a two-index start memory is included, when there are a plurality of start memories stored by the holding unit, the first index effect or the first index effect is determined in any one of the plurality of start memories. And / or determining whether or not the second index effect is to be executed, and the first index start memory and the second index start in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding unit. When both of the memories are included, the execution order of the first index effect and the second index effect is determined.

  According to the gaming machine of (2), when there are a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, it is determined whether or not the first index start memory and / or the second index start memory are included. However, since it is not determined which of the plurality of start memories is used to execute the first index effect and / or the second index effect, the effect of control is increased without increasing the control load. be able to. It is not determined whether the first index effect and / or the second index effect is executed in any one of the plurality of start memories because the first index effect and / or the second index effect are stored in the plurality of start memories. This is because even if the storage is included, the execution timing determined by the effect pre-determination means is determined again. However, when both the first index start memory and the second index start memory are included in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, the execution order of the first index effect and the second index effect is performed. About to judge. This is because, when re-determining the execution timing of the first index effect and the second index effect, the execution order of the first index effect and the second index effect determined by the effect pre-determination means is maintained. It is.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), the effect mode determination means includes a specific start memory (reach or big hit) in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. Is included, the effect form is determined for the start memory until the variable display for the specific start memory is performed.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), even if the start memory stored by the holding means includes the specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach fluctuation), it is interesting. Can be suppressed. That is, when the start memory stored by the holding means includes a specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation), the variable display is performed in the specific mode. Nevertheless, when the result of the hit determination is out of the question, even if a production mode having a relatively high expectation degree is performed thereafter (for example, a character subtraction process is performed), such a production mode is not considered. The interest of the player decreases. In this regard, according to the gaming machine of (3), when one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means include a specific start memory (reach or big hit), the specific start memory is stored. Because the effect mode for the start memory until the variable display is performed is determined, and the effect mode is not determined for the start memory variably displayed after the specific start memory, the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 6, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

[Appendix 7]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in the starting port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the symbol variation indicating the big hit is displayed by executing the suspended symbol variation game. A gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed is known.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol change game is being played, a first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting a possibility of a jackpot, and a possibility that the held symbol change game may become a jackpot (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

  In recent years, there has been a tendency to increase the effect of the effect by increasing the type of effect, such as a gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-192817.

  However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the type of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time in the course of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or more to process data having a large data capacity, such as video data, it is required that the processing be performed smoothly even in such a case. Has been.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a process smoothly while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to attachment 7 has a lottery means (for example, step S117) for performing a hit determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and a variable identification symbol based on the result of the hit determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) on which display is performed and information on the variable display which has not been performed (for example, a random number value for determining a big hit or a random number value for determining a symbol) are stored in a predetermined number as a starting memory. (For example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to (for example, four), and when the variable display is performed for one start memory stored by the hold means, the one start memory is displayed. A display control unit (for example, a step control unit) that performs control such that the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed by using the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory is performed. 205) and a special game state executing means (for example, step S96 etc.) capable of executing a special game (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on the result of the hit determination being a specific result. And an advantageous state control means (controllable to control a game state after the execution of the special game to an advantageous game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (for example, a time-saving game state or a high-probability game state). For example, with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means and the start memory stored by the holding means, a symbol capable of determining the number of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuation) in which the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed. The effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324) and, in the advantageous gaming state, an effect state for one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means can be determined. And a presentation mode determination unit (for example, step S372 etc.), wherein the production mode determination unit divides the symbol production of the number of executions determined by the symbol production execution number determination unit into predetermined units, and A specific effect determination unit (for example, the sub CPU 201) that determines an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined unit regardless of the storage unit, an index effect having a predetermined degree of expectation for the game state ( A specific effect (for example, in the one or a plurality of start memories stored by the timing determining means (for example, scenario pre-setting processing (FIG. 138), step S370, etc.) and the holding means) for determining the execution timing of the subtraction effect) , Reach fluctuation) is executed, and the execution timing of the specific effect and the execution timing of the index effect are different from each other. When there is no overlap, the specific effect is executed out of the total number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, temporary fluctuation) determined for each of the one or more start memories stored by the holding unit. The number of executions of the symbol effect in which the index effect is performed is subtracted from the number of executions of the symbol effect up to the point in time, and a suggestion effect (reach precursor) indicating that the specific effect is performed can be executed prior to the specific effect. It is characterized by having a suggested effect execution determining means (for example, step S358 or the like) for determining the number of symbol effects.

  According to the gaming machine of (1), the effect mode for one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means can be determined before the variable display is started, so that the data capacity is large. Even if it does, smooth processing can be performed. In addition, since the number of executions of the symbol effect one or more times is determined for each of the start memories stored by the holding means, a variable display for one start memory is displayed, but a plurality of start effects are displayed in appearance. It looks as if the variable display for the memory is being performed, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the production. Further, the determined number of executed symbol effects is divided into predetermined units, and the effect mode performed during execution of the symbol effects divided into the predetermined units is determined. Smooth processing can be performed.

  Further, although the specific start memory is included in the one or more start memories stored by the holding unit, the execution timing of the specific effect and the execution timing of the index effect related to the specific start memory do not overlap. In this case, the number of symbol effects executed until the specific effect is executed is subtracted from the number of index effects executed, and the number of symbol effects that can execute the suggestion effect (reach precursor) is determined. Therefore, in any of the specific effect, the index effect, and the suggestion effect, the execution timing can be determined before the variable display is started, so that a smooth process can be performed. In addition, since the index effect and the suggestion effect can be executed at a suitable timing, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Here, the “variable display of the identification symbol” means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display of one start memory, and On the other hand, even if the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of times of the variable display is one.

  The “stop effect” of the identification symbol is a stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification symbol performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both effects (for example, final stop).

  Further, `` if the variable display is performed for one start memory, the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol using the effect time until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. "Is performed" means not only the time during which variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display is performed for the next start memory. Therefore, the "symbol effect in which the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is the time until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed if the variable display is in the middle, and the interval is also the last in the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) In the gaming machine according to the above (1), the suggestion effect execution determining means includes the specific start memory in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, and includes the specific effect memory. When the execution timing and the execution timing of the indicator effect overlap each other, execution of the symbol effect (for example, temporary fluctuation) determined for each of one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding unit. From the total number of symbols, subtract the number obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of symbol effects performed in which the index effect is performed, and determine the number of symbol effects capable of executing the suggested effect (reach precursor) performed prior to the specific effect. It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the execution timing of the specific effect and the execution timing of the index effect overlap, the index effect is executed when the specific effect is being executed. Since the specific effect and the index effect are performed repeatedly from the flow of the suggestive effect, the effect can be enhanced.

(3) The gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), further comprising a holding effect control means for controlling an image related to a start memory stored in the holding means to be displayed on the display means, The attraction effect control means is characterized in that when at least the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed, control is performed such that an image related to the start memory stored in the attraction means is not displayed.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), since the image relating to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from being conscious of the variable display in the unit of the start memory. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode without being influenced by the result of one game, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 7, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

[Appendix 8]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in the starting port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the symbol variation indicating the big hit is displayed by executing the suspended symbol variation game. A gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed is known.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol change game is being played, a first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting a possibility of a jackpot, and a possibility that the held symbol change game may become a jackpot (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

  In recent years, there has been a tendency to increase the effect of the effect by increasing the type of effect, such as a gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-192817.

  However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the type of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time in the course of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or more to process data having a large data capacity, such as video data, it is required that the processing be performed smoothly even in such a case. Has been.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a process smoothly while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 8 includes a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of an identification symbol based on a predetermined condition being satisfied, and information about the variable display that has not been performed. Holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of start-up memory (for example, a random number value for determining a jackpot or a random number for symbol design); When a specific result is displayed, a special game execution means (for example, step S96, etc.) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player, and an effect executed in a game state after the special game is executed A first index effect having a relatively high degree of expectation (for example, a subtractive effect of an enemy character) and a second index effect having a relatively low degree of expectation (for example, taste). At least a character subtraction effect is prepared, and an indicator effect timing determining means (for example, a scenario pre-setting process (FIG. 138) for determining execution timings of the first indicator effect and the second indicator effect, step S370) Etc.), a specific effect (for example, a reach effect) in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode, and whether the first index effect and / or the second index effect are performed in the same variable display. (For example, step S346, etc.), and an effect mode determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining an effect mode for one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding unit. The effect mode determination means may include a statement that the specific effect and the first index effect are performed in the same variable display. When it is cut off, the first effect mode determination means (for example, step S350 or the like) that determines that the first index effect is to be performed in the variable display in which the specific effect is performed, and the specific effect and the second index effect Is determined in the variable display in which the specific effect is performed, the second effect mode determining means for determining that the second index effect is not performed in the variable display in which the specific effect is performed.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), as an index effect having a predetermined degree of expectation for a gaming state, a first index effect having a relatively high degree of expectation and an expectation relatively lower than the first index effect. A second index effect having a degree is prepared. In addition, it is determined whether or not the first index effect and / or the second index effect is performed when a specific effect (for example, a reach effect) is being performed. Here, when the index effect performed when the specific effect is being performed is the first index effect, the specific effect and the first index effect are performed in the same variable display. On the other hand, when the index effect performed when the specific effect is being performed is the second index effect, the specific effect and the second index effect are not performed in the same variable display. That is, if the first index effect is performed during the execution of the variable display performed in the specific mode, both effects can give the player a relatively high sense of expectation. The indicator production is performed. On the other hand, even if the second index effect is performed during execution of the variable display performed in a specific mode, it is difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation in the variable display. In particular, even if the variable display is developed into a variable display having a higher degree of expectation, it is still difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation. Therefore, the specific effect and the second index effect are not performed in the same variable display. In this way, the effect is suitably enhanced.

  Here, the “variable display of the identification symbol” means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display of one start memory, and On the other hand, even if the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of times of the variable display is one. In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification symbol performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both effects (for example, final stop).

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, execution of a symbol effect (for example, temporary fluctuation) in which a change effect and a stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding unit. A symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.) capable of determining the number, and the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means are divided into predetermined units, and the start memory unit is used. And a specific effect determining means (for example, a sub CPU 201) for determining an effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined unit. Prior to the effect, a suggestion effect execution determining means (for example, step S3) for determining the number of symbol effects capable of executing a suggestion effect (reach precursor) indicating that the specific effect is performed. And having 8, etc.).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), prior to the specific effect, a suggestion effect (reach precursor) indicating that the specific effect is performed is executed, so that the effect can be further enhanced.

(3) The gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), further comprising a holding effect control means for controlling an image related to a start memory stored in the holding means to be displayed on the display means, The attraction effect control means is characterized in that when at least the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed, control is performed such that an image related to the start memory stored in the attraction means is not displayed.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), since the image relating to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from being conscious of the variable display in the unit of the start memory. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode without being influenced by the result of one game, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 8, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

[Appendix 9]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in the starting port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the symbol variation indicating the big hit is displayed by executing the suspended symbol variation game. A gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed is known.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol change game is being played, a first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting a possibility of a jackpot, and a possibility that the held symbol change game may become a jackpot (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

  In recent years, there has been a tendency to increase the effect of the effect by increasing the type of effect, such as a gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-192817.

  However, although the effect of the effect can be enhanced by increasing the type of the effect, for example, data such as video has a large data capacity, so if the effect is not effectively performed, not only the interest decreases, but also the control load increases, Not preferred.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing an effect effectively.

(1) The gaming machine according to appendix 9 has a lottery means (for example, step S117) for performing a hit determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on a predetermined condition being satisfied, and an identification symbol based on a result of the hit determination. The display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) for performing the variable display and the information about the variable display that has not been performed (for example, the random number for jackpot determination or the symbol for pattern determination) are used as the start memory. The holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) and the starting memory stored by the holding means prior to the specific starting memory, It is determined whether or not to execute a first effect (for example, a black effect) having a predetermined degree of expectation with respect to the result of the hit determination with respect to the start memory, and also to determine whether the specific start memory is to be executed. First effect execution determining means (for example, step S205, etc.) for determining whether or not to execute the first effect, and a start memory which is another effect different from the first effect, and which is stored by the holding means. Among them, a second effect (for example, a movable character effect) having a predetermined degree of expectation with respect to the result of the hit determination for the specific start memory stored last is stored in all the storages stored by the holding unit. A second effect execution determining means (for example, step S205 or the like) for determining whether or not to execute the start effect, and determining that the first effect is not to be executed for the specific start operation; A second production non-execution determining means for changing the second production so as not to execute the second production when the execution of the second production is performed for the specific start memory. thing And it features.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), even if it is determined that the second effect is to be performed for the specific start memory, it is determined that the first effect is not to be performed for the specific start memory. Is changed so that the second effect is not executed for a specific start memory, so that it is not necessary to perform a meaningless effect, and not only is a decrease in interest being suppressed, but also the effect is effectively performed. It becomes possible. In other words, even if it is determined that the second effect is to be executed for a specific start memory, if it is determined that the first effect is not to be executed for a specific start memory, a specific start memory is not executed. The expectations are not very high. Therefore, even if it is determined that the second effect is to be executed for a specific start memory, the execution of the meaningless effect is omitted by changing the second effect so as not to be executed, It is designed to provide effective production.

  Note that “executing the first effect (second effect) for the start memory” means that the first effect (second effect) that changes the held effect image itself indicating that the start memory is stored. Executing, performing the first effect (second effect) on the suspended effect image indicating that the start memory is stored, and performing the first effect (when the variable display of the start memory is performed). Executing the second effect).

(2) In the gaming machine according to the above (1), the start memory stored by the holding unit prior to the specific start memory is a hit with another start memory different from the specific start memory. A third effect confirmation unit (for example, step S205 or the like) for confirming whether or not to execute a third effect having a predetermined degree of expectation with respect to the result of the determination; The deciding means, when it is determined that the third effect is to be executed with respect to the pre-start memory stored by the holding means before the specific start memory, the specific start memory and the pre-start It is characterized in that it is determined whether or not to execute the first effect with respect to the start memory between the memory and the memory.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the start memory determined to execute the third effect is not determined whether or not to execute the first effect, and the specific start memory and the previous memory are not determined. Since the first effect is performed for the start memory between the start memory and the start memory, an effective effect can be performed without unnecessarily increasing the control load.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 9, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of effectively performing an effect.

[Appendix 10]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in the starting port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the symbol variation indicating the big hit is displayed by executing the suspended symbol variation game. A gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed is known.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol change game is being played, a first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting a possibility of a jackpot, and a possibility that the held symbol change game may become a jackpot (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

  In recent years, there has been a tendency to increase the effect of the effect by increasing the type of effect, such as a gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-192817.

  However, although the effect of the effect can be enhanced by increasing the type of the effect, for example, data such as video has a large data capacity, so if the effect is not effectively performed, not only the interest decreases, but also the control load increases, Not preferred.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing an effect effectively.

(1) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 10 includes a lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a hit determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and an identification symbol based on the result of the hit determination. The display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) on which the variable display is performed and the information on the variable display that has not been performed (for example, the random number for jackpot determination or the symbol for symbol determination) are stored in a start-up memory as predetermined. Hold means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a number (for example, four), and a hit determination for a particular start memory last held among the start memories held by the hold means The first effect (for example, a countdown effect) that may indicate the result of the above is specified from the variable display of the start memory stored earlier than the specific start memory. First effect execution determining means (for example, step S205 or the like) for determining whether or not to continuously execute the variable display for the start memory, and at least when the variable display for the specific start memory is performed, A second effect that determines whether or not to execute a second effect (for example, a movable character effect) that can indicate the result of the hit determination for a specific start memory, separately from whether or not to execute the first effect. Execution determination means (for example, step S205 etc.), wherein the first effect executed from the variable display of the start memory stored before the specific start memory is the specific effect. Is continuously executed up to the variable display of the start memory, it is determined that the result of the hit determination for the specific start memory is a hit or it is likely that the result is a hit. In both cases, when the variable display for the specific start memory has not been continuously executed, it is determined that the result of the hit determination for the specific start memory is incorrect or the probability that the result is high is high. It is determined that the first effect is not to be continuously executed until the variable display of the specific start memory is performed, and the second effect is executed in the variable display of the specific start memory. When the effect is determined, a second effect non-execution determining means (for example, step S205 or the like) for changing the second effect not to be executed in the variable display of the specific start memory is further provided.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, it is determined that the first effect is not to be continuously executed until the variable display for the fixed start memory is executed, and the second effect is executed for the variable display for the specific start memory. When it is determined that the second effect is to be executed in the variable display for the specific start memory, it is not necessary to perform a meaningless effect, and not only is the interest reduced, The effect can be effectively performed. That is, if the first effect is not continuously executed until the variable display for the specific start memory is performed, it is highly likely that the result of the hit determination for the specific start memory is determined to be incorrect or the result is high. . Until such a case, if the second effect is performed in the variable display for the specific start memory, not only a meaningless effect is performed but also the interest may be reduced. Therefore, even if it is determined that the second effect is to be executed in the variable display for the specific start memory, the execution of the meaningless effect is omitted by changing the second effect so as not to be executed. It is intended to perform a directing.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 10, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of effectively performing an effect.

[Supplementary Note 11]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in the starting port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the symbol variation indicating the big hit is displayed by executing the suspended symbol variation game. A gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed is known.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol change game is being played, a first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting a possibility of a jackpot, and a possibility that the held symbol change game may become a jackpot (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

  In recent years, there has been a tendency to increase the effect of the effect by increasing the type of effect, such as a gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-192817.

  However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the type of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time in the course of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or more to process data having a large data capacity, such as video data, it is required that the processing be performed smoothly even in such a case. Has been.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a process smoothly while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 11 includes a lottery means (for example, step S117) for performing a win determination based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for displaying a predetermined effect image. A display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of executing control relating to the fluctuation effect of the identification symbol and executing control relating to the expected effect image based on the result of the hit determination; And a sound output control means (for example, a sound control circuit 205) for controlling the output of the game, wherein the display control means has a predetermined degree of expectation for the result of the hit determination. The specific effect control means (for example, step S903) for controlling the expected effect image to be displayed without displaying the fluctuation effect of the identification symbol, and the fluctuation effect of the identification symbol Is displayed, an information image display control means (for example, step S905) for controlling an information image relating to the gaming machine to be displayed on the display means, and the sound output control means is provided with the specific effect control means. When the variation effect of the identification symbol is not displayed, the variation effect of the identification symbol is displayed by the muffling unit (for example, step S904) that does not output the variation sound related to the variation effect of the identification symbol, and the information image display control unit. When not performed, it has a fluctuating sound control means (for example, step S906) for outputting a fluctuating sound for the fluctuating effect of the identification symbol.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), unnecessary processing can be omitted without giving the player a sense of incongruity, and processing can be performed smoothly while suppressing a decrease in interest. Note that, as the information image related to the gaming machine, for example, information that is desired to be transmitted to a player or a hall clerk, regardless of the result of the hit determination. Specific examples thereof include an error message screen when an error occurs, a warning image when an illegal operation is performed, a recovery screen after a power failure, and the like.

(2) In the gaming machine according to the above (1), the information image display control means cuts off the power when the fluctuation effect of the identification symbol is displayed as an information image related to the gaming machine, and thereafter recovers. The control is performed so that the restored image (for example, FIG. 167 (C)) displayed when this is done is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), in the restoration image after the power failure, even if the restoration image is displayed and the fluctuation effect of the identification symbol cannot be visually recognized, it can be grasped that the fluctuation effect of the identification symbol is being performed. .

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 11, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

[Supplementary Note 12]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in the starting port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the symbol variation indicating the big hit is displayed by executing the suspended symbol variation game. A gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed is known.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol change game is being played, a first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting a possibility of a jackpot, and a possibility that the held symbol change game may become a jackpot (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

  In recent years, there has been a tendency to increase the effect of the effect by increasing the type of effect, such as a gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-192817.

  However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the type of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time in the course of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or more to process data having a large data capacity, such as video data, it is required that the processing be performed smoothly even in such a case. Has been.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a process smoothly while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 12 performs variable display of an identification symbol when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device) that displays a result of a hit determination when the identification symbol stops. 16), an operation means (effect button 62) operable by the player, and a specific effect execution lottery based on the result of the hit determination based on the operation means being operated within a predetermined period, A first effect execution means (FIG. 164 (B)) for executing the specific effect based on the execution lottery, and executing the specific effect execution lottery based on the lapse of a predetermined time; 164 (C), wherein the first effect execution means executes the specific effect when the operation means is not operated within the predetermined period. First, The effect executing means does not execute the specific effect when the first effect is executed by the first effect executing means within the same variable display, while the operation means is not operated within the predetermined period. When the first effect is not executed by the first effect executing means, the specific effect is executed.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), when the operation of the operation means is not performed, the specific notification mode is not executed, and when the specific notification mode is executed, the specific notification mode is further changed. It will not be executed. On the other hand, when the specific notification mode has not been executed yet, the specific notification mode may be executed. As a result, unnecessary processing can be omitted without a sense of incongruity, and processing can be performed smoothly while suppressing a decrease in interest.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 12, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

[Appendix 13]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that displays a symbol when a symbol is variably displayed and the symbol is stopped and displayed. If the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed. For example, up to four variable displays of symbols are held as start-up memories, and variable display is performed for each start-up memory.

  Some gaming machines of this type perform a display effect that expects a special game to be performed before the result of the game is displayed, thereby enhancing the effect (for example, JP 2006-246964 A).

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, since the display effect is performed only for the start storage unit, if the display effect is not such that the special game is expected to be performed, There is a possibility that the sense of expectation is lost with respect to the variable display of the symbol, and the interest may be reduced at that point.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to prevent a player from being conscious of a display effect in a starting memory unit, and to appropriately suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 13 includes a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of an identification symbol based on a predetermined condition being satisfied, and information about the variable display that has not been performed. Holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of start-up memory (for example, a random number value for determining a jackpot or a symbol for determining symbols); When the variable display is performed for one start memory stored by the above, the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed using the effect time until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. And a start-up memory stored by the holding unit, a symbol effect in which a variable effect and a stop effect of the identification symbol are performed (for example, a temporary effect). (D), a symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.) capable of determining the number of executions, and a specific start memory (for example, reach fluctuation effect) among one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. Is included, the effect mode determination means (for example, step S332 etc.) capable of determining the effect mode for the start memory until the variable display of the specific start memory is performed. ), When the effect mode determination means includes a plurality of the specific start memories in the plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, Along with determining the effect form for the start memory until the variable display is performed for the earliest specific start memory in which the variable display is performed first, the earliest specific start memory is used. The symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuations) of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determination means are divided into predetermined units with respect to the start memory until the variable display is performed. Irrespective of the above, there is provided a specific effect determination means (for example, step S372, etc.) for determining an effect mode (for example, a character subtraction effect) performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined unit. .

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the number of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuations) in which the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed is determined with respect to the start memory stored by the holding unit. . That is, once a symbol effect is performed for each start memory stored by the holding means, one or more symbol effects are executed for each start memory stored by the holding means. Since the number is determined, it appears as though the variable display is performed for a plurality of start memories, although it is a variable display for one start memory. Moreover, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory, and a plurality of symbols determined for another start memory in which the variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one start memory. There is a possibility that an effect mode that extends over a part of the symbol effect may be determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode without being affected by one game result. Further, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the unit of the start memory, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  If the start memory stored by the holding unit includes a specific start memory in which a variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, a reach variation effect), the variable display is performed in a specific mode. Nevertheless, when the result of the hit determination is incorrect, even if an effect that can give the player a high expectation is performed thereafter (for example, a character subtraction process is performed), such an effect is performed. The player's interest in the mode is reduced. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the above (1), when a plurality of specific start memories are included in the plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, the earliest of the plurality of specific start memories is first. The effect mode for the start memory up to the first specific start memory variably displayed is determined, and the effect mode is not determined for the start memory variably displayed after the first specific start memory. Thus, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Here, the “variable display of the identification symbol” means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display of one start memory, and On the other hand, even if the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of times of the variable display is one.

  The “stop effect” of the identification symbol is a stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification symbol performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both effects (for example, final stop).

  Further, `` if the variable display is performed for one start memory, the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol using the effect time until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. "Is performed" means not only the time during which variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display is performed for the next start memory. Therefore, the "symbol effect in which the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is the time until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed if the variable display is in the middle, and the interval is also the last in the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) The gaming machine according to (1), further including a holding effect control unit (for example, step S205 or the like) for controlling an image related to the start memory stored in the holding unit to be displayed on the display unit. Wherein the at least one effect control means controls at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed so as not to display an image relating to the starting memory stored in the at least one hold means. It is assumed that.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), since the image relating to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the variable display in the unit of the start memory can be made more transparent to the player. Can be.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), the effect mode determination unit includes the specific start memory in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding unit. When there is no start memory, the effect mode is determined for all the start memories stored by the holding means, and the effect mode for the last stored start memory among the start memories stored by the hold means is determined by the start memory. Is determined to be an effect mode (for example, a gaseous reach predictive effect) that suggests that a variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode (for example, a reach change effect) even though the specific start memory is not the specific start memory. It has a suggestion effect determination means (for example, step S366 etc.), and when the start memory is not stored by the holding means, Characterized in that it is configured so as not to determine the suggested representation embodiment the effect that the fluctuation effect of identification symbols in modal is performed.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means do not include a specific start memory, it is not necessary to determine the effect mode again. Although it is unlikely that the above burden will increase, it is considered difficult to maintain the player's expectation for the display effect. Therefore, the effect mode for the last stored start memory among the start memories stored by the holding means suggests that the variable effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode in spite of not being a specific start memory. By determining the effect mode, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation of the display effect. In addition, when the starting memory is not stored by the holding means, the effect is not determined to indicate that the variable effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific manner, so that an increase in control load is suppressed. .

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 13, it is possible to prevent the player from being conscious of the display effect in the unit of the start memory, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix 14]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that displays a symbol when a symbol is variably displayed and the symbol is stopped and displayed. If the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed. For example, up to four variable displays of symbols are held as start-up memories, and variable display is performed for each start-up memory.

  Some gaming machines of this type perform a display effect that expects a special game to be performed before the result of the game is displayed, thereby enhancing the effect (for example, JP 2006-246964 A).

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, since the display effect is performed only for the start storage unit, if the display effect is not such that the special game is expected to be performed, There is a possibility that the sense of expectation is lost with respect to the variable display of the symbol, and the interest may be reduced at that point.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to prevent a player from being conscious of a display effect in a starting memory unit, and to appropriately suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 14 includes a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of an identification symbol based on a predetermined condition being satisfied, and information about the variable display that has not been performed. Holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of start-up memory (for example, a random number value for determining a jackpot or a symbol for determining symbols); When the variable display is performed for one start memory stored by the above, the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed using the effect time until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. Display control means (for example, the sub CPU 201) for controlling the execution of the identification symbol, and the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are stored in the start memory stored by the holding means. A symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) capable of determining the number of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuations) to be executed, and an effect mode for one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means (For example, step S372 and the like), wherein the effect mode determining means is determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means. The specific effect determination unit that divides the symbol effect of the number of executions into a predetermined unit and determines an effect mode performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined unit regardless of the unit of the start memory, and When one or more start memories stored by the holding means do not include a specific start memory (for example, a start memory in which a reach variation effect is recorded), The effect mode is determined for all the start memories stored by the retaining means, and the effect mode for the last stored start memory among the start memories stored by the holding means is determined by the start memory being the specific mode. Suggestion effect determination means (for example, step S356, etc.) that determines an effect mode (for example, a gusset reach indication effect) that suggests that the variable effect of the identification symbol is performed in the specific mode, even though the memory is not the start memory. ).

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the number of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuations) in which the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed is determined with respect to the start memory stored by the holding unit. . That is, once a symbol effect is performed for each start memory stored by the holding means, one or more symbol effects are executed for each start memory stored by the holding means. Since the number is determined, it appears as though the variable display is performed for a plurality of start memories, although it is a variable display for one start memory. Moreover, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory, and a plurality of symbols determined for another start memory in which the variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one start memory. There is a possibility that an effect mode that extends over a part of the symbol effect may be determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode without being affected by one game result. Further, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the unit of the start memory, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, when the start memory stored by the holding means does not include the specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach fluctuation effect), the player's expectation of the display effect is maintained. It may be difficult to cause Therefore, in this case, the effect form is determined for all the start memories stored by the holding means, and the start memory stored last by the holding means is stored last (variable display is performed last). By determining the effect mode for the start memory as an effect mode that suggests that the variation design of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode even though the start memory is not the specific start memory, the player for the display effect is determined. The expectation of is maintained.

  Here, the “variable display of the identification symbol” means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display of one start memory, and On the other hand, even if the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of times of the variable display is one.

  The “stop effect” of the identification symbol is a stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification symbol performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both effects (for example, final stop).

  Further, `` if the variable display is performed for one start memory, the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol using the effect time until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. "Is performed" means not only the time during which variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display is performed for the next start memory. Therefore, the "symbol effect in which the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is the time until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed if the variable display is in the middle, and the interval is also the last in the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) In the gaming machine described in the above (1), based on a starting port (for example, a second starting port 440) in which a game ball can be won and a winning of the game ball in the starting port, the identification symbol is displayed. And a variation pattern determining means (for example, main CPU 101) for determining a variation pattern when variable display is performed, wherein the holding means (for example, main CPU 101) determines that a game ball has won the starting port. The starting memory is configured to be able to be held on the basis of the starting memory, and the symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, the sub CPU 201) stores the starting memory stored in the holding means when a game ball is won in the starting opening. Is determined based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination means.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the number of executions of the symbol effect determined with respect to the starting memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the fluctuation pattern. More specifically, if the variation pattern has a relatively long variation time, the number of executed symbol effects increases, and if the variation pattern has a relatively short variation time, the number of executed symbol effects decreases. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol effect is reduced, and it is difficult for the player to know that one or more symbol effects are being executed for one start memory.

(3) The gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), further comprising a holding effect control means for controlling an image related to a start memory stored in the holding means to be displayed on the display means, The on-hold effect control means controls at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed, so that an image related to the start memory stored in the on-hold means is not displayed. It is.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), since the image relating to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the variable display in the unit of the start memory can be made more transparent to the player. Can be.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 14, it is possible to enhance the effect of the movable body effect and suppress a decrease in interest.

[Appendix 15]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine which performs a hit determination and executes a game advantageous to a player according to a result of the hit determination.

  In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the hit determination is displayed, a movable body effect of operating the movable body is performed in order to expect that the result of the hit determination is a result that is advantageous to the player. There is something that can be enhanced.

  As such a movable body effect, for example, a technique is known in which the movable body is moved by the expansion / contraction operation of a pantograph and the movable body is inclined at the same time as the expansion / contraction operation of the pantograph starts (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229852). reference).

  However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, for example, at the time when the operation of the movable body is started, a plurality of operations by the movable body such as movement and inclination of the movable body can be grasped. Yes, there was a risk that interest would be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to enhance a performance effect by a movable body performance and suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to attachment 15 includes a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of an identification symbol based on a predetermined condition being satisfied, and information about the variable display that has not been performed. Holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of start-up memory (for example, a random number value for determining a jackpot or a symbol for determining symbols); When the variable display is performed for one start memory stored by the above, the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed using the effect time until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. And a start-up memory stored by the holding unit, a symbol effect in which a variable effect and a stop effect of the identification symbol are performed (for example, a temporary effect). A symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) capable of determining the number of executed motions) and an effect mode determination capable of determining an effect mode for one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means Means (for example, step S372 and the like), wherein the effect mode determination means stores a specific start memory (for example, a reach variation effect) in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. When the start memory is not included, the effect memory number determination means for determining the number of start memories to be determined for the effect mode so as to be different each time. On the other hand, when determining the effect mode, the symbol effect (for example, temporary fluctuation) of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means is divided into predetermined units and the start storage is performed. A specific effect determination unit that determines an effect mode (for example, a character subtraction effect) performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined unit regardless of the unit, and a start memory stored by the holding unit. An effect mode for the last stored start memory is an effect mode (for example, indicating that the variable effect of the identification symbol is performed in the specific mode even though the start memory is not the specific start memory, for example, The present invention is characterized by having a suggestion effect determining means (for example, step S356) for determining a gaseous reach indication effect.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the number of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuations) in which the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed is determined with respect to the start memory stored by the holding unit. . That is, once a symbol effect is performed for each start memory stored by the holding means, one or more symbol effects are executed for each start memory stored by the holding means. Since the number is determined, it appears as though the variable display is performed for a plurality of start memories, although it is a variable display for one start memory. Moreover, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory, and a plurality of symbols determined for another start memory in which the variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one start memory. There is a possibility that an effect mode that extends over a part of the symbol effect may be determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode without being affected by one game result. Further, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the unit of the start memory, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, when the starting memory stored by the holding unit does not include the specific starting memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation), the player's expectation of the display effect is maintained. Can be difficult. Therefore, in this case, the number of start memories to be determined for the effect mode is determined so as to be different each time, and the start memories stored by the holding unit are stored last (lastly, the variable display is performed). Is performed) is determined by determining an effect mode for the start memory to an effect mode that suggests that a variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode even though the start memory is not a specific start memory. The expectation of the player for the production is maintained.

  In addition, the number of start memories to be determined for the production mode is determined so as to be different each time, because the number of the start memories to be determined for the production mode is determined based on the number of the start memories to be determined in the specific mode. It is not easy to grasp that the variable display is not performed (even if an effect mode suggesting that the variable display of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode is displayed is that the suggested effect mode is gaseous). In order to

  Here, the “variable display of the identification symbol” means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display of one start memory, and On the other hand, even if the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of times of the variable display is one.

  The “stop effect” of the identification symbol is a stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification symbol performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both effects (for example, final stop).

  Further, `` if the variable display is performed for one start memory, the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol using the effect time until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. "Is performed" means not only the time during which variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display is performed for the next start memory. Therefore, the "symbol effect in which the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is the time until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed if the variable display is in the middle, and the interval is also the last in the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) In the gaming machine described in the above (1), based on a starting port (for example, a second starting port 440) in which a game ball can be won and a winning of the game ball in the starting port, the identification symbol is displayed. And a fluctuation pattern determining means (for example, step S57) for determining a fluctuation pattern when the variable display is performed, wherein the holding means stores the start memory based on a game ball winning in the start opening. The symbol effect execution number determination means, when a game ball wins in the starting port, the number of executions of the symbol effect for the start memory stored in the holding means, The determination is made based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination means.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the number of executions of the symbol effect determined with respect to the starting memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the fluctuation pattern. More specifically, if the variation pattern has a relatively long variation time, the number of executed symbol effects increases, and if the variation pattern has a relatively short variation time, the number of executed symbol effects decreases. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol effect is reduced, and it is difficult for the player to know that one or more symbol effects are being executed for one start memory.

(3) The gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), further comprising a holding effect control means for controlling an image related to a start memory stored in the holding means to be displayed on the display means, The on-hold effect control means controls at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed, so that an image related to the start memory stored in the on-hold means is not displayed. It is.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), since the image relating to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the variable display in the unit of the start memory can be made more transparent to the player. Can be.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 15, it is possible to increase the effect of the movable body effect and suppress a decrease in interest.

[Appendix 16]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in the starting port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the symbol variation indicating the big hit is displayed by executing the suspended symbol variation game. A gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed is known.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol change game is being played, a first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting a possibility of a jackpot, and a possibility that the held symbol change game may become a jackpot (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

  In recent years, there has been a tendency to increase the effect of the effect by increasing the type of effect, such as a gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-192817.

  However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the type of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time in the course of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or more to process data having a large data capacity, such as video data, it is required that the processing be performed smoothly even in such a case. Has been.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a process smoothly while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 16 includes a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of an identification symbol based on a predetermined condition being satisfied, and information about the variable display that has not been performed. Holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of start-up memory (for example, a random number value for determining a jackpot or a random number for symbol design); Special game execution means (for example, step S96 or the like) capable of executing a special game (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player when a specific result is displayed, and a game after the special game is executed As an effect to be executed in the state, an indicator effect timing determining means (for example, an indicator effect timing determining unit that determines in advance the execution timing of the indicator effect (subtraction effect) having a predetermined degree of expectation for the game state (for example Scenario pre-setting processing (FIG. 138), etc.), an effect mode determining means (for example, step S374, etc.) capable of determining an effect mode for one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, Whether the stored one or more start memories include a specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, a reach variation effect) and an index start memory in which the index effect is performed. Effect information determining means (for example, step S346 or the like) for determining whether or not the indicator start memory is included in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the suspending means. The index effect is replaced with the execution timing determined by the index effect timing determining means, and the one or more start memories are used. There is an effect re-determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) for deciding to execute in the variable display related to the starting storage of any one, and the effect re-determining means includes one or more start-ups stored by the holding means. When it is determined by the effect information determination means that the specific start memory and the index start memory are included in the memory, regardless of the execution timing determined by the index effect timing determination means, The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to determine that the indicator effect for the indicator start memory is to be performed before the variable display for the specific start memory.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), since the execution timing of the index effect is determined in advance, even if the data volume of the index effect is large, there is enough time before the index effect is performed. Processing can be performed. Further, when a specific start memory and an index start memory are included in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, a specific start memory is determined regardless of the execution timing determined by the index effect timing determination means. Since it is determined that the index effect on the index start memory is performed prior to the variable display on the start memory, the effect can also be enhanced. That is, when an index effect is performed during execution of the variable display performed in a specific mode, and when the expected degree of expectation for the index effect is relatively low, a player It is difficult to have expectations. In particular, even if the variable display is developed into a variable display having a higher degree of expectation, it is still difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation. Therefore, when a specific start memory and an index start memory are included in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, the index effect is performed before the variable display for the specific start memory. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the production effect.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1), the effect mode determination unit includes the specific start memory (reach or big hit) in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding unit. In such a case, it is configured to determine an effect mode for the start memory until the variable display of the specific start memory is performed.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), even if the start memory stored by the holding means includes the specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach fluctuation effect), A decrease in interest can be suppressed. In other words, when the start memory stored by the holding unit includes a specific start memory in which a variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, a reach variation effect), the variable display is performed in a specific mode. Nevertheless, when the result of the hit determination is incorrect, even if an effect that can give the player a high expectation is performed thereafter (for example, a character subtraction process is performed), such an effect is performed. The player's interest in the mode is reduced. In this regard, according to the gaming machine of (2), when one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means include a specific start memory (a reach or a big hit), the specific start memory is stored. Since the effect mode for the start memory until the variable display is performed is determined, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 16, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

[Appendix 17]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in the starting port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the symbol variation indicating the big hit is displayed by executing the suspended symbol variation game. A gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed is known.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol change game is being played, a first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting a possibility of a jackpot, and a possibility that the held symbol change game may become a jackpot (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

  In recent years, there has been a tendency to increase the effect of the effect by increasing the type of effect, such as a gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-192817.

  However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the type of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time in the course of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or more to process data having a large data capacity, such as video data, it is required that the processing be performed smoothly even in such a case. Has been.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a process smoothly while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 17 includes a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of an identification symbol based on a predetermined condition being satisfied, and information about the variable display that has not been performed. Holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of start-up memory (for example, a random number value for determining a jackpot or a random number for symbol design); When a specific result is displayed, a special game execution means (for example, step S96 or the like) capable of executing a special game (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player, and a start memory stored by the holding means On the other hand, a symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.) capable of determining the number of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuations) in which the fluctuation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed. As an effect performed in the game state after the execution of the special game, a first index effect (for example, a subtraction effect of an enemy character) having a relatively high degree of expectation and a relative effect than the first index effect At least a second index effect having a low degree of expectation (for example, a subtraction effect of a friendly character) is prepared, and an index effect timing for determining in advance the execution timing of each of the first index effect and the second index effect. When the determination means (for example, a scenario pre-setting process (FIG. 138)) and a specific effect (for example, a reach change effect) in which the change effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode, the first index effect or And / or the duplication determining means (for example, step S346) for determining whether or not the second index effect is performed, and the storing means. Effect state determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining an effect state for the start memory to be executed, wherein the effect state determining means stores the one or more start memories to be determined as the effect state. On the other hand, when determining the effect mode, the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means was divided into predetermined units, and was divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the starting memory. The specific effect determining means for determining an effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect; and the specific effect is determined when the duplication determining means determines that the second index effect is performed when the specific effect is performed. The second index effect is not performed when the specific effect is performed by deciding that the second index effect is performed in a symbol effect before the is performed. It is characterized by having an index effect timing re-determining means (for example, step S358).

  According to the gaming machine of (1), since the execution timing of each of the first index effect and the second index effect is determined in advance, it is assumed that the data capacity of the first index effect and / or the second index effect is large. Also, since there is enough time before the first index effect and / or the second index effect is performed, smooth processing can be performed. Further, when it is determined that the second index effect is performed when the specific effect (for example, reach fluctuation effect) is performed, the second index effect is performed in a symbol effect before the specific effect is performed. By being determined, the second index effect is not performed when the specific effect is performed, so that the effect can also be enhanced. That is, when the second index effect is performed during the execution of the variable display performed in the specific mode, it is difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation in the variable display. In particular, even if the variable display is developed into a variable display having a higher degree of expectation, it is still difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation. Then, by making the second index effect performed in the symbol effect before the specific effect is performed, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  The first index effect is advantageous when the second index effect is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, before the ally character is completely annihilated) before the predetermined number of times is executed (for example, before the ally character is completely annihilated). (For example, a high probability gaming state). Further, the second index effect is relatively performed when the first index effect is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, before the enemy character is completely annihilated) before the predetermined number of times is executed (for example, before the enemy character is completely annihilated). It has a function of notifying that it is an unfavorable game state (for example, a low-probability game state).

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1), the index effect timing determination means determines the execution timing of each of the first index effect and the second index effect during execution of the special game, In the game state after the special game has been executed, the effect mode determination means determines an effect mode for the starting memory stored by the holding means when the variable display is performed.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the execution timing of each of the first index effect and the second index effect is determined during the execution of the special game, so that the processing can be performed more smoothly.

(3) The gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), further comprising a holding effect control means for controlling an image related to a start memory stored in the holding means to be displayed on the display means, The attraction effect control means is characterized in that when at least the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed, control is performed such that an image related to the start memory stored in the attraction means is not displayed.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), since the image relating to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from being conscious of the variable display in the unit of the start memory. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode without being influenced by the result of one game, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 17, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

[Appendix 18]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in the starting port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the symbol variation indicating the big hit is displayed by executing the suspended symbol variation game. A gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed is known.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol change game is being played, a first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting a possibility of a jackpot, and a possibility that the held symbol change game may become a jackpot (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

  In recent years, there has been a tendency to increase the effect of the effect by increasing the type of effect, such as a gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-192817.

  However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the type of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time in the course of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or more to process data having a large data capacity, such as video data, it is required that the processing be performed smoothly even in such a case. Has been.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a process smoothly while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 18 includes a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of an identification symbol based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and information about the variable display that has not been performed. Holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of start-up memory (for example, a random number value for determining a jackpot or a random number for symbol design); When a specific result is displayed on a special game execution means capable of executing a special game (for example, a jackpot game state) which is advantageous to the player, and a starting memory stored by the holding means, The symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324) capable of determining the number of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuation) in which the variable effect and the stop effect are performed, and the special game is executed. The first index effect (for example, the subtraction effect of the enemy character) having a relatively high degree of expectation as an effect executed in the gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state), and the effect relatively relative to the first index effect At least a second index effect having a low degree of expectation (for example, a subtraction effect of an ally character) is prepared, and an index effect timing determination for determining in advance the execution timing of each of the first index effect and the second index effect. Means, and whether or not the first index effect and / or the second index effect is performed when a specific effect (for example, reach fluctuation effect) in which the fluctuation effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode is performed. (For example, step S346, etc.) for determining the effect, and an effect capable of determining an effect mode for the start memory stored by the suspending means. Pattern determining means (for example, step S372 etc.), wherein the effect mode determining means determines the effect mode for the one or a plurality of start memories to be determined as the effect mode. The symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the number-of-executions determining means is divided into predetermined units, and an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined unit is determined regardless of the unit of the start memory. When the specific effect determination means (for example, step S372) performs the second index effect when the specific effect is performed, the duplication determination means determines that the specific effect is performed rather than the specific effect is performed. An indicator effect that determines that the second indicator effect is to be performed in the previous symbol effect, so that the second indicator effect is not performed when the specific effect is performed. A timing redetermining unit (for example, step S358, etc.), and when the duplication determination unit determines that the first index effect is performed when the specific effect is performed, the specific effect is performed. Wherein the first index effect is performed.

  According to the gaming machine of (1), since the execution timing of each of the first index effect and the second index effect is determined in advance, it is assumed that the data capacity of the first index effect and / or the second index effect is large. Also, since there is enough time before the first index effect and / or the second index effect is performed, smooth processing can be performed. Further, when it is determined that the second index effect is performed when the specific effect (for example, reach fluctuation effect) is performed, the second index effect is performed in a symbol effect before the specific effect is performed. By being determined, the second index effect is not performed when the specific effect is performed, so that the effect can also be enhanced. That is, when the second index effect is performed during the execution of the variable display performed in the specific mode, it is difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation in the variable display. In particular, even if the variable display is developed into a variable display having a higher degree of expectation, it is still difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation. Then, by making the second index effect performed in the symbol effect before the specific effect is performed, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  The first index effect is advantageous when the second index effect is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, before the ally character is completely annihilated) before the predetermined number of times is executed (for example, before the ally character is completely annihilated). (For example, a high probability gaming state). Further, the second index effect is relatively performed when the first index effect is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, before the enemy character is completely annihilated) before the predetermined number of times is executed (for example, before the enemy character is completely annihilated). It has a function of notifying that it is an unfavorable game state (for example, a low-probability game state).

  Further, when it is determined that the first index effect is performed when the specific effect is performed, the first index effect is performed when the specific effect is performed. This is because, when the first index effect is performed during the execution of the variable display performed in a specific mode, it is highly possible that the player has a sense of expectation for the variable display, and the first index effect and This is because the staging effect is enhanced by any of the variable displays.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1), the index effect timing determination means determines the execution timing of each of the first index effect and the second index effect during execution of the special game, In the game state after the special game has been executed, the effect mode determination means determines an effect mode for the starting memory stored by the holding means when the variable display is performed.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the execution timing of each of the first index effect and the second index effect is determined during the execution of the special game, so that the processing can be performed more smoothly.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), a holding effect control means (for example, step S205) for controlling an image related to a start memory stored in the holding means to be displayed on the display means. , Etc.), and the on-hold effect control means controls at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed, so that an image related to the start storage stored in the on-hold means is not displayed. It is characterized by doing.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), since the image relating to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from being conscious of the variable display in the unit of the start memory. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode without being influenced by the result of one game, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 18, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

[Appendix 19]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in the starting port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the symbol variation indicating the big hit is displayed by executing the suspended symbol variation game. A gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed is known.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol change game is being played, a first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting a possibility of a jackpot, and a possibility that the held symbol change game may become a jackpot (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

  In recent years, there has been a tendency to increase the effect of the effect by increasing the type of effect, such as a gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-192817.

  However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the type of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time in the course of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or more to process data having a large data capacity, such as video data, it is required that the processing be performed smoothly even in such a case. Has been.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a process smoothly while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 19 includes a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of an identification symbol based on a predetermined condition being satisfied, and information about the variable display that has not been performed. Holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of start-up memory (for example, a random number value for determining a jackpot or a random number for symbol design); When a specific result is displayed, a special game execution means (for example, step S96 or the like) capable of executing a special game (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player, and a start memory stored by the holding means On the other hand, a symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.) capable of determining the number of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuations) in which the fluctuation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed. As an effect performed in the game state after the special game has been executed, an index effect determination means (for example, a scenario pre-setting process (see FIG. 9) for determining in advance the execution timing of an index effect having a predetermined degree of expectation for the game state) 138)) and, when a specific effect (for example, a reach variation effect) in which the identification symbol is variably displayed in a specific mode is performed, an overlap determining means (for example, to determine whether or not the index effect is performed) , Step S346, etc.), and an effect mode determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining an effect mode for the start-up memory stored by the holding means, wherein the effect mode determining means includes the effect mode. In determining the rendering mode for the one or more start memories to be determined, the symbol rendering execution number determination unit determines the rendering mode. Specific effect determination means for dividing the symbol effect of the executed number into predetermined units, and determining an effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined unit regardless of the unit of the start memory, and The symbol determined for the one or more start memories to be determined for the effect mode, when it is determined by the duplication determining means that the index effect is not performed when the specific effect is performed. Only if there is a number of executions of the symbol effect obtained by subtracting the number of executions of the index effect from the total number of executions of the effect, prior to the specific effect, a suggestion effect indicating that the specific effect is to be performed. Characterized in that it has a suggestion effect execution determination means for determining

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), since the execution timing of the index effect is determined in advance, even if the data volume of the index effect is large, there is enough time before the index effect is performed. Processing can be performed. Further, when it is determined that the index effect is not performed when the specific effect (for example, the reach fluctuation effect) is performed, the symbol effect determined for one or a plurality of start memories to be determined as the effect mode. Only when there is a symbol effect execution number obtained by subtracting the index effect execution number from the total number of executions of the symbol effect (that is, only when it is greater than 0), a suggestion effect that suggests that the specific effect is performed is specified. Since the execution is performed prior to the effect, it is possible to perform an effective effect such that the specific effect is expected by the suggestive effect while performing the smooth processing.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1), the specific effect (for example, reach fluctuation) is executed in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding unit. When the specific effect is included and the indicator effect is determined to be performed when the specific effect is performed by the duplication determining means, each of the one or more start memories stored by the suspending means is stored. Is subtracted from the total number of executions of the symbol effects (for example, provisional fluctuations) determined for the symbol effect by subtracting 1 from the number of executions of the symbol effects in which the index effect is performed, and is performed prior to the specific effect. The number of design effects that can execute the suggestion effect (reach precursor) is determined.

  According to the gaming machine of (2), when it is determined by the overlap determination means that the index effect is to be performed when the specific effect is performed, the suggestive effect is performed at an appropriate timing prior to the specific effect. Becomes more effective.

(3) The gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), further comprising a holding effect control means for controlling an image related to a start memory stored in the holding means to be displayed on the display means, The attraction effect control means is characterized in that when at least the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed, control is performed such that an image related to the start memory stored in the attraction means is not displayed.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), since the image relating to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from being conscious of the variable display in the unit of the start memory. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode without being influenced by the result of one game, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 19, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

[Appendix 20]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in the starting port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the symbol variation indicating the big hit is displayed by executing the suspended symbol variation game. A gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed is known.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol change game is being played, a first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting a possibility of a jackpot, and a possibility that the held symbol change game may become a jackpot (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

  In recent years, there has been a tendency to increase the effect of the effect by increasing the type of effect, such as a gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-192817.

  However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the type of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time in the course of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or more to process data having a large data capacity, such as video data, it is required that the processing be performed smoothly even in such a case. Has been.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a process smoothly while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 20 includes a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) on which a predetermined effect image is displayed, and a display control unit (for example, a display) for controlling at least a variable effect of the identification symbol. A control circuit 204) and sound output control means (for example, a sound control circuit 205) for controlling a predetermined effect sound to be output, wherein the sound output control means systematizes the effect sound colors by a plurality of channels. In accordance with a change in the mode of the effect image displayed on the display means, the effect sound color output from the channel is changed, while the channel of the identification symbol system is fixed. The sound output from a channel of the system of the identification symbol is muted according to a mode of the variation effect of the identification symbol.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), unnecessary processing can be omitted without giving the player a sense of incongruity, and processing can be performed smoothly while suppressing a decrease in interest. Note that, as the information image related to the gaming machine, for example, information that is desired to be transmitted to a player or a hall clerk, regardless of the result of the hit determination. Specific examples thereof include an error message screen when an error occurs, a warning image when an illegal operation is performed, a recovery screen after a power failure, and the like.

  In addition, the present invention may employ the following configuration as an effect that can give a player a sense of expectation for the result of the hit determination. That is, a gaming machine configured to be capable of performing a game by receiving power supply, a lottery means for performing a hit determination based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and a display means for displaying a predetermined effect image, Display control means capable of executing the control relating to the fluctuation effect of the identification symbol as a main effect, and executing the control relating to another effect as a sub-effect, a speaker from which an effect sound is output, and a display device which is displayed on the display means. Sound output control means for controlling the effect sound according to the effect image to be output from the speaker, the display control means as an effect having a predetermined degree of expectation for the result of the hit determination, A special effect control unit that executes the control relating to the character effect as a main effect, and executes the control relating to the change effect of the identification symbol as a sub-effect, and a change effect of the identification symbol. When the supply of the power is stopped when the control according to the above is performed as the main effect, and thereafter the supply of the power is restored, the control according to the variation effect of the identification symbol is executed as a sub-effect. However, it has a return effect control means for controlling the effect image relating to the return of the power supply to be mainly displayed, and the sound output control means, when the fluctuation effect of the identification symbol is not displayed by the specific effect control means. Does not output the fluctuating sound related to the fluctuating effect of the identification symbol, but fluctuates sound output control for outputting the fluctuating sound related to the fluctuating effect of the identification symbol when the reversing effect control means does not display the fluctuating effect of the identification symbol. It is a gaming machine having means. Even in such a gaming machine, unnecessary processing can be omitted without giving the player a sense of incongruity, and the processing can be smoothly performed while suppressing a decrease in interest. In addition, the main production is the production that is the main side of the production and the side where the player's gaze is directed, and the secondary production is displayed on the display means together with the main production, but the player's gaze is It is a production on the side that is difficult to face.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 20, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

[Appendix 21]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in the starting port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the symbol variation indicating the big hit is displayed by executing the suspended symbol variation game. A gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed is known.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol change game is being played, a first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting a possibility of a jackpot, and a possibility that the held symbol change game may become a jackpot (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

  In recent years, there has been a tendency to increase the effect of the effect by increasing the type of effect, as in a gaming machine described in, for example, JP-A-2015-192817.

  However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the type of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time in the course of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or more to process data having a large data capacity, such as video data, it is required that the processing be performed smoothly even in such a case. Has been.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a process smoothly while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to attachment 21 is a gaming machine that outputs a warning sound when a predetermined error occurs, and includes a lottery means (for example, step S117) for performing a hit determination based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) on which a predetermined effect image is displayed, and a control relating to a change effect of the identification symbol can be executed, and a control relating to an expected effect image based on the result of the hit determination Executable display control means (for example, the display control circuit 204), a speaker (for example, the speaker 24) from which the effect sound is output, and the effect image displayed on the display means including the warning sound. Sound output control means (for example, a sound control circuit 205) for controlling the produced sound to be output from the speaker, wherein the sound output control means When a specific effect having an expected degree is executed, the specific output control means (for example, step S904) that maintains the output of the warning sound and silences the output of the fluctuation effect of the identification symbol, while maintaining the output of the warning sound. It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), unnecessary processing can be omitted without giving the player a sense of incongruity, and processing can be performed smoothly while suppressing a decrease in interest. Note that, as the information image related to the gaming machine, for example, information that is desired to be transmitted to a player or a hall clerk, regardless of the result of the hit determination. Specific examples thereof include an error message screen when an error occurs, a warning image when an illegal operation is performed, a recovery screen after a power failure, and the like.

(2) In the gaming machine according to the above (1), it is possible to output the effect tone by a plurality of channels according to the system, and to output the effect tone output from the channel in accordance with the effect image displayed on the display means. A changeable shared channel, a warning system channel, and a channel of the identification symbol system, wherein the specific output control means changes the effect sound color through the shared channel according to the effect image displayed on the display means. When the specific effect is executed, the state of the channel of the warning system is maintained, and the output from the channel of the system of the identification symbol is muted.

  The gaming machine of the above (2) is a more specific example of the above (1), in which unnecessary processing is omitted without giving the player a sense of incongruity, and smooth processing is performed while suppressing a decrease in interest. Can be performed.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 21, processing can be smoothly performed while suppressing a decrease in interest.

[Supplementary Note 22]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that performs a hit determination and displays a symbol in a fluctuating manner, and displays the result of the game when the fluctuating-displayed symbol is stopped and displayed. If the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the hit determination is displayed, there is a display effect that expects that there is a possibility that a special game may be performed, so that the effect is enhanced (for example, JP-A-2006-246964).

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, since the display effect is performed only for the hit determination unit, if the display effect is not such that a special game can be expected to be performed, the game machine is changing. There is a possibility that the sense of expectation for the variable display of the symbol is lost and the interest is reduced at that time.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to prevent a player from being conscious of a display effect in a hit determination unit and suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 22 includes a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of an identification symbol based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and a next display after one variable display is performed. Display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) for controlling such that the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed until the variable display is performed, and the change of the identification symbol for each variable display. Symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 etc.) capable of determining the number of symbol effects executed in which an effect and a stop effect are performed, and effect mode determining means capable of determining an effect mode for a plurality of variable displays (For example, step S372 and the like), wherein the effect mode determining means divides the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining device into a predetermined unit and divides the symbol effect into the predetermined unit. La Specific effect determination means (e.g., step S372, or the like) that determines the representation embodiment made during the design effect was characterized by having a.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the number of symbol effects (for example, temporary change) in which the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed for each variable display is determined. That is, although one symbol effect is normally performed for each variable display, the number of symbol effects performed once or a plurality of times is determined for each start memory, so that one variable display ( Although it is one game), it looks as if a plurality of variable displays (a plurality of games) are performed on the appearance. Moreover, each symbol effect is divided into predetermined units regardless of the game unit. Then, an effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode without being affected by one game result. Further, it is possible to execute a display effect without making the player aware of the variable display in the game unit, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Here, the “variable display of the identification symbol” means a series of display from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display for one game, and indicates one display of the game. On the other hand, even if the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of times of the variable display is one.

  The “stop effect” of the identification symbol is a stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification symbol performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both effects (for example, final stop).

(2) In the gaming machine according to the above (1), the effect mode determining means determines one or a plurality of variable displays as an effect section, and is included in the effect section as a section effect performed in the effect section. In addition to determining an effect mode for the variable display, the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determination means for the variable display included in the effect section is divided into predetermined units. In addition, there is provided a section effect mode determining means for determining an effect mode performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined unit regardless of the variable display unit.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the number of executions of the symbol effect is determined for a plurality of variable displays included in the effect section, so that the player is not further conscious of the variable display in game units. Can be

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (2), the effect mode determining means includes a part of the symbol effect of the number of executions determined for one variable display included in the effect period, and the effect period. And a part of the symbol effect of the execution number determined for the other variable displays included in the variable display can be divided as a predetermined unit over a plurality of variable displays. .

According to the gaming machine of (3) above,
An effect mode that spans a part of the symbol effect determined for one variable display included in the effect section and a part of a plurality of symbol effects determined for another variable display included in the effect section It could be decided. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode without being affected by one game result. Further, it is possible to execute a display effect without making the player aware of the variable display in the game unit, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 22, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by preventing the player from being conscious of the display effect in the hit determination unit.

[Appendix 23]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that performs a hit determination and displays a symbol in a fluctuating manner, and displays the result of the game when the fluctuating-displayed symbol is stopped and displayed. If the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the hit determination is displayed, there is a display effect that expects that there is a possibility that a special game may be performed, so that the effect is enhanced (for example, JP-A-2006-246964).

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, since the display effect is performed only for the hit determination unit, if the display effect is not such that a special game can be expected to be performed, the game machine is changing. There is a possibility that the sense of expectation for the variable display of the symbol is lost and the interest is reduced at that time.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to suppress a decrease in amusement in a favorable manner while keeping a display effect in a hit determination unit from being conscious of a player. .

(1) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 23 includes a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of an identification symbol based on a predetermined condition being satisfied, and information about the variable display that has not been performed. Holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of start-up memory (for example, a random number value for determining a jackpot or a symbol for determining symbols); (For example, step S54, step S55, etc.), when the variable display is performed for one start memory, the effect time until the variable display for the next start memory after the one start memory is performed is set. A display control means (for example, step S205 or the like) for controlling so that a fluctuation effect and a stop effect of the identification symbol are performed, and a start record stored by the holding means. A symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 etc.) capable of determining the number of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuations) in which the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed; When a specific start memory (reach or big hit) is included in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the above, an effect on the start memory until a variable display of the specific start memory is performed. Effect state determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining an aspect, wherein the effect state determining means performs the symbol effect on the start memory until the variable display of the specific start memory is performed. The symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the execution number determining means is divided into predetermined units, and during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined unit regardless of the unit of the start memory. Has a specific effect determination means for determining the effect mode to be performed, the specific effect determination means, when determining the effect mode performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined unit, from the specific start memory Although it is also possible to determine an effect mode that straddles the previously stored start memory and the specific start memory, the effect mode that straddles the specific start memory and the start memory stored after the specific start memory is determined. It is configured not to be determined.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the number of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuations) in which the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed is determined with respect to the start memory stored by the holding unit. . That is, once a symbol effect is performed for each start memory stored by the holding means, one or more symbol effects are executed for each start memory stored by the holding means. Since the number is determined, it appears as though the variable display is performed for a plurality of start memories, although it is a variable display for one start memory. Moreover, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory, and a plurality of symbols determined for another start memory in which the variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one start memory. There is a possibility that an effect mode that extends over a part of the symbol effect may be determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode without being affected by one game result. Further, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the unit of the start memory, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  If the start memory stored by the holding unit includes a specific start memory in which a variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, a reach variation effect), the variable display is performed in a specific mode. Nevertheless, when the result of the hit determination is out of the question, even if an effect mode that can give a high sense of expectation to the player may be performed thereafter (for example, a character subtraction process is performed), such a situation may occur. The interest of the player in the effect mode is reduced. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the above (1), when a plurality of specific start memories are included in the plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, the earliest of the plurality of specific start memories is first. The effect mode for the start memory up to the first specific start memory variably displayed is determined, and the effect mode is not determined for the start memory variably displayed after the first specific start memory. Thus, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, in determining an effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into a predetermined unit, an effect mode that straddles the start memory stored before the specific start memory and the specific start memory is determined. Can. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode without being affected by one game result. Further, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the unit of the start memory, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. On the other hand, the effect mode that straddles the specific start memory and the start memory stored after the specific start memory is not determined. This allows the player's gaze to be directed to the fluctuation effect of the identification symbol performed in a specific mode, rather than the effect mode performed during the execution of the symbol effect, and to give the fluctuation effect a sense of expectation. Can be.

  Here, the “variable display of the identification symbol” means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display of one start memory, and On the other hand, even if the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of times of the variable display is one.

  The “stop effect” of the identification symbol is a stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification symbol performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both effects (for example, final stop).

  Further, `` if the variable display is performed for one start memory, the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol using the effect time until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. "Is performed" means not only the time during which variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display is performed for the next start memory. Therefore, the "symbol effect in which the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is the time until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed if the variable display is in the middle, and the interval is also the last in the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) The gaming machine according to the above (1), further comprising a holding effect control means for controlling an image relating to the start memory stored in the holding means to be displayed in a predetermined display area, wherein the holding effect control is provided. The means is characterized in that when at least the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed, control is performed so that an image relating to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), since the image relating to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the variable display in the unit of the start memory can be made more transparent to the player. Can be.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), the effect mode determination unit includes the specific start memory in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding unit. When there is no start memory, the effect mode is determined for all the start memories stored by the holding means, and the effect mode for the last stored start memory among the start memories stored by the hold means is determined by the start memory. Has a suggestion effect deciding means (for example, step S358, etc.) for deciding on an effect mode suggesting that a variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode, even though the specific start memory is not the specific start memory. It is assumed that.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means do not include a specific start memory, it is not necessary to determine the effect mode again. Although it is unlikely that the above burden will increase, it is considered difficult to maintain the player's expectation for the display effect. Therefore, the effect mode for the last stored start memory among the start memories stored by the holding means suggests that the variable effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode in spite of not being a specific start memory. By determining the effect mode, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation of the display effect.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 23, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interests by making the display effect in the hit determination unit invisible to the player.

[Appendix 24]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that performs a hit determination and displays a symbol in a fluctuating manner, and displays the result of the game when the fluctuating-displayed symbol is stopped and displayed. If the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the hit determination is displayed, there is a display effect that expects that there is a possibility that a special game may be performed, so that the effect is enhanced (for example, JP-A-2006-246964).

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, since the display effect is performed only for the hit determination unit, if the display effect is not such that a special game can be expected to be performed, the game machine is changing. There is a possibility that the sense of expectation for the variable display of the symbol is lost and the interest is reduced at that time.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to prevent a player from being conscious of a display effect in a hit determination unit, and to appropriately suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to appendix 24 includes a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of an identification symbol based on a predetermined condition being satisfied, and information about the variable display that has not been performed. (For example, a jackpot determination random number value or a symbol determination random number value) can be stored as a start memory up to a predetermined number (e.g., step S54, step S55, etc.); When the variable display is performed for the start memory, control is performed so that the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed using the effect time until the variable display for the next start memory after the one start memory is performed. The display control means and the start memory stored by the holding means, the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, temporary fluctuation) in which the fluctuation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed. Determinable symbol effect execution number determining means (e.g., step S324) and effect mode determining means (e.g., step S324) capable of determining an effect mode for one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means Step S372 etc.), and when the specific starting memory is not included in one or a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, the effect mode determining means is stored by the holding means. In determining the effect mode for all the start memories stored in the storage unit and determining the effect mode for all the start memories stored by the holding unit, the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining unit is determined. The symbol effect is divided into predetermined units, and the effect mode performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined unit (regardless of the unit of the start memory) is described. Characterized in that it has a specific effect determination means for constant.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the number of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuations) in which the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed is determined with respect to the start memory stored by the holding unit. . That is, once a symbol effect is performed for each start memory stored by the holding means, one or more symbol effects are executed for each start memory stored by the holding means. Since the number is determined, it appears as though the variable display is performed for a plurality of start memories, although it is a variable display for one start memory. Moreover, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory, and a plurality of symbols determined for another start memory in which the variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one start memory. There is a possibility that an effect mode that extends over a part of the symbol effect may be determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode without being affected by one game result. Further, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the unit of the start memory, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  By the way, when the starting memory stored by the holding unit does not include the specific starting memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, the reach variation effect), the starting memory stored by the holding unit is not included. As compared with the case where a specific start memory is included, the control load is small, and the effect mode can be determined for more start memories. On the other hand, the presentation mode is determined.

  Here, the “variable display of the identification symbol” means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display of one start memory, and On the other hand, even if the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of times of the variable display is one.

  The “stop effect” of the identification symbol is a stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification symbol performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both effects (for example, final stop).

  Further, `` if the variable display is performed for one start memory, the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol using the effect time until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. "Is performed" means not only the time during which variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display is performed for the next start memory. Therefore, the "symbol effect in which the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is the time until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed if the variable display is in the middle, and the interval is also the last in the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
A starting port (for example, a second starting port 440) in which a game ball can be won, and a fluctuation pattern for determining a fluctuation pattern when the identification symbol is variably displayed based on winning of the game ball in the starting port. Determining means (for example, step S173 etc.), wherein the holding means is configured to be able to hold the starting memory based on a winning of a game ball in the starting port, and the symbol effect execution number The determining means (for example, the sub CPU 201) determines the number of executions of the symbol effect with respect to the starting memory stored in the holding means when the game ball wins in the starting port, by the variation pattern determining means. It is characterized in that it is determined based on a fluctuation pattern.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the number of executions of the symbol effect determined with respect to the starting memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the fluctuation pattern. More specifically, if the variation pattern has a relatively long variation time, the number of executed symbol effects increases, and if the variation pattern has a relatively short variation time, the number of executed symbol effects decreases. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol effect is reduced, and it is difficult for the player to know that one or more symbol effects are being executed for one start memory.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), a holding effect control means (for example, step S205) for controlling an image related to a start memory stored in the holding means to be displayed on the display means. , Etc.), and the on-hold effect control means controls at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed, so that an image related to the start storage stored in the on-hold means is not displayed. It is characterized by doing.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), since the image relating to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the variable display in the unit of the start memory can be made more transparent to the player. Can be.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 24, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game by making the display effect in the hit determination unit invisible to the player.

[Appendix 25]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that performs a hit determination and displays a symbol in a fluctuating manner, and displays the result of the game when the fluctuating-displayed symbol is stopped and displayed. If the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the hit determination is displayed, there is a display effect that expects that there is a possibility that a special game may be performed, so that the effect is enhanced (for example, JP-A-2006-246964).

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, since the display effect is performed only for the hit determination unit, if the display effect is not such that a special game can be expected to be performed, the game machine is changing. There is a possibility that the sense of expectation for the variable display of the symbol is lost and the interest is reduced at that time.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to prevent a player from being conscious of a display effect in a hit determination unit, and to appropriately suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 25 includes a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of an identification symbol based on a predetermined condition being satisfied, and information about the variable display that has not been performed. (For example, a jackpot determination random number value or a symbol determination random number value) can be stored as a start memory up to a predetermined number (e.g., step S54, step S55, etc.); When the variable display is performed for the start memory, control is performed so that the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed using the effect time until the variable display for the next start memory after the one start memory is performed. A display control means (for example, step S205 etc.) and a start effect stored by the holding means, a symbol effect in which a change effect and a stop effect of the identification symbol are performed. A symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 etc.) capable of determining the number of executions (for example, temporary fluctuation), and an effect mode for one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means can be determined. Effect state determining means (for example, step S372 and the like), and the effect state determining means includes a specific start memory (for example, a reach fluctuation effect) in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. Is not included, the effect mode (for example, a character subtraction effect) is determined for all the start memories stored by the holding means, and is stored by the holding means. In determining the effect mode for all the start memories, the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means is divided into predetermined units. A specific effect determination unit that determines an effect mode performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined unit, and an effect mode for the last stored start memory among the start memories stored by the holding unit. In spite of the fact that the start memory is not the specific start memory, the suggestion effect is determined to be an effect mode (for example, a gassing reach indication effect) that suggests that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in the specific mode. It is characterized by having determining means (for example, step S358).

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the number of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuations) in which the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed is determined with respect to the start memory stored by the holding unit. . That is, once a symbol effect is performed for each start memory stored by the holding means, one or more symbol effects are executed for each start memory stored by the holding means. Since the number is determined, it appears as though the variable display is performed for a plurality of start memories, although it is a variable display for one start memory. Moreover, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory, and a plurality of symbols determined for another start memory in which the variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one start memory. There is a possibility that an effect mode that extends over a part of the symbol effect may be determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode without being affected by one game result. Further, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the unit of the start memory, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, when the starting memory stored by the holding unit does not include the specific starting memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation), the player's expectation of the display effect is maintained. Can be difficult. Therefore, in this case, the effect mode is determined for all the start memories stored by the holding means, and the effect mode for the last stored start memory among the start memories stored by the hold means is determined by the start mode. Despite the fact that the memory is not a specific starting memory, by determining a production mode that suggests that the variable design of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode, the expectation of the player for the display performance is maintained. ing.

  If the start memory stored by the holding means includes a specific start memory in which a variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation), the variable display is performed in a specific mode. Nevertheless, when the result of the hit determination is out of the question, even if a production mode having a relatively high expectation degree is performed thereafter (for example, a character subtraction process is performed), such a production mode is not considered. The interest of the player decreases. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the above (1), when a plurality of specific start memories are included in the plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, the earliest of the plurality of specific start memories is first. The effect mode for the start memory up to the first specific start memory variably displayed is determined, and the effect mode is not determined for the start memory variably displayed after the first specific start memory. Thus, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Here, the “variable display of the identification symbol” means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display of one start memory, and On the other hand, even if the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of times of the variable display is one.

  The “stop effect” of the identification symbol is a stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification symbol performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both effects (for example, final stop).

  Further, `` if the variable display is performed for one start memory, the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol using the effect time until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. "Is performed" means not only the time during which variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display is performed for the next start memory. Therefore, the "symbol effect in which the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is the time until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed if the variable display is in the middle, and the interval is also the last in the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) In the gaming machine described in the above (1), based on a starting port (for example, a second starting port 440) in which a game ball can be won and a winning of the game ball in the starting port, the identification symbol is displayed. And a variation pattern determining means (for example, main CPU 101) for determining a variation pattern when variable display is performed, wherein the holding means (for example, main CPU 101) determines that a game ball has won the starting port. The starting memory is configured to be able to be held on the basis of the starting memory, and the symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, the sub CPU 201) stores the starting memory stored in the holding means when a game ball is won in the starting opening. Is determined based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination means.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the number of executions of the symbol effect determined with respect to the starting memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the fluctuation pattern. More specifically, if the variation pattern has a relatively long variation time, the number of executed symbol effects increases, and if the variation pattern has a relatively short variation time, the number of executed symbol effects decreases. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol effect is reduced, and it is difficult for the player to know that one or more symbol effects are being executed for one start memory.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), a holding effect control means (for example, step S205) for controlling an image related to a start memory stored in the holding means to be displayed on the display means. , Etc.), and the on-hold effect control means controls at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed, so that an image related to the start storage stored in the on-hold means is not displayed. Is what you do.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), since the image relating to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the variable display in the unit of the start memory can be made more transparent to the player. Can be.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 25, a decrease in interest can be suppressed by making the display effect in the unit of the hit determination unit invisible to the player.

[Supplementary Note 26]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that performs a hit determination and displays a symbol in a fluctuating manner, and displays the result of the game when the fluctuating-displayed symbol is stopped and displayed. If the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the hit determination is displayed, there is a display effect that expects that there is a possibility that a special game may be performed, so that the effect is enhanced (for example, JP-A-2006-246964).

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, since the display effect is performed only for the hit determination unit, if the display effect is not such that a special game can be expected to be performed, the game machine is changing. There is a possibility that the sense of expectation for the variable display of the symbol is lost and the interest is reduced at that time.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to prevent a player from being conscious of a display effect in a hit determination unit, and to appropriately suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 26 includes a display unit (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of an identification symbol based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and information about the variable display that has not been performed. (For example, a jackpot determination random number value or a symbol determination random number value) can be stored as a start memory up to a predetermined number (e.g., step S54, step S55, etc.); When the variable display is performed for the start memory, control is performed so that the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed using the effect time until the variable display for the next start memory after the one start memory is performed. The display control means and the start memory stored by the holding means, the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, temporary fluctuation) in which the fluctuation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed. Determinable symbol effect execution number determining means (eg, step S324) and effect mode determining means (eg, step S372) capable of determining an effect mode for one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. Etc.), and when the specific start memory is not included in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, the effect mode determination unit is a determination target of the effect mode. The effect target number determining means for determining the number of start memories so as to be different each time, and in determining the effect mode for the start memory to be determined for the effect mode, is determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means. A specific effect determination unit that divides the symbol effect of the performed number into predetermined units and determines an effect mode performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined unit, And an effect mode for the last stored start memory among the start memories stored by the holding means, in the specific mode, the variable effect of the identification symbol even though the start memory is not the specific start memory. It is characterized by having a suggestion effect determination means for determining an effect mode that suggests that the event is performed.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the number of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuations) in which the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed is determined with respect to the start memory stored by the holding unit. . That is, once a symbol effect is performed for each start memory stored by the holding means, one or more symbol effects are executed for each start memory stored by the holding means. Since the number is determined, it appears as though the variable display is performed for a plurality of start memories, although it is a variable display for one start memory. Moreover, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory, and a plurality of symbols determined for another start memory in which the variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one start memory. There is a possibility that an effect mode that extends over a part of the symbol effect may be determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode without being affected by one game result. Further, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the unit of the start memory, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, when the starting memory stored by the holding unit does not include the specific starting memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation), the player's expectation of the display effect is maintained. Can be difficult. Therefore, in this case, the number of start memories to be determined for the effect mode is determined to be different each time, and the effect mode for the last stored start memory among the start memories stored by the holding means is determined. Is determined to be an effect mode that suggests that a variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode even though the start memory is not a specific start memory, so that the player's expectation of the display effect is maintained. I am trying to be.

  The number of start memories to be determined for the production mode is determined so as to be different each time. Not to be easily grasped (even if an effect mode suggesting that the identification symbol is fluctuated and displayed in a specific mode is displayed, the suggestive effect mode is a spoiler). That's why.

  If the start memory stored by the holding means includes a specific start memory in which a variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation), the variable display is performed in a specific mode. Nevertheless, when the result of the hit determination is out of the question, even if a production mode having a relatively high expectation degree is performed thereafter (for example, a character subtraction process is performed), such a production mode is not considered. The interest of the player decreases. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the above (1), when a plurality of specific start memories are included in the plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, the earliest of the plurality of specific start memories is first. The effect mode for the start memory up to the first specific start memory variably displayed is determined, and the effect mode is not determined for the start memory variably displayed after the first specific start memory. Thus, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Here, the “variable display of the identification symbol” means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display of one start memory, and On the other hand, even if the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of times of the variable display is one.

  The “stop effect” of the identification symbol is a stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification symbol performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both effects (for example, final stop).

  Further, `` if the variable display is performed for one start memory, the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol using the effect time until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. "Is performed" means not only the time during which variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display is performed for the next start memory. Therefore, the "symbol effect in which the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is the time until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed if the variable display is in the middle, and the interval is also the last in the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1), the effect target number determining means determines the number of start memories to be determined for the effect mode by lottery.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the number of start memories to be determined for the production mode is determined by lottery, so the number of start memories to be determined for the production mode is easily and randomly determined. be able to.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), a holding effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 201) for controlling an image relating to a start memory stored in the holding means to be displayed on the display means. ) Is further provided, wherein the on-hold effect control unit controls at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination unit is displayed, so that the image related to the start memory stored in the on-hold unit is not displayed. Things.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), since the image relating to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the variable display in the unit of the start memory can be made more transparent to the player. Can be.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 26, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by not making the player aware of the display effect in the hit determination unit.

[Appendix 27]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, there has been known a gaming machine in which a hit is determined and a symbol is fluctuated, and when a fluctuated display is stopped and displayed, a game result is displayed. If the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that controls a gaming state after a special game is completed to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player, such as a time-saving gaming state (for example, JP-A-2006-2006). No. 122247).

  However, in a gaming machine controlled to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player separately from the special game, if the period controlled in the specific game state is lengthened, the winning probability in the hit determination must be reduced, Interestingness may decrease. On the other hand, if the period during which the game is controlled to the specific game state is shortened, the player may be disadvantaged, and in any case, interest may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to appropriately perform a specific game state performed separately from a special game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to attachment 27 includes a lottery means (for example, step S117) for performing a hit determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a variable identification symbol based on the result of the hit determination. Display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for performing display, and it is possible to execute a special game (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on the result of the hit determination being a specific result. And a lottery promotion control means capable of executing a control (for example, a time-saving gaming state) for promoting the win determination compared to a normal game state, and a winning probability in the win determination in the normal game state. A probability changing means capable of setting a high probability (for example, a high-probability game state) as compared with a secret effect in which it is not explicitly specified whether or not the winning probability in the hit determination is the high probability (eg, For example, concealment effect execution means (for example, step S205 or the like) capable of executing concealment A stage 2002) and information on the variable display that has not been performed yet are stored as a start memory up to a predetermined number (for example, four). When the variable display is performed for the possible holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) and one start memory stored by the holding means, the variable display for the next start memory after the one start memory is performed. Display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) for performing control so that the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed using the effect time until the effect is performed, and at least control for facilitating the hit determination. In the playing state, a change effect and a stop effect of the identification symbol are performed on the start memory stored by the holding unit. Symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.) for determining the number of effect executions, and effect mode determining means for determining an effect mode for one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means ( For example, step S372 etc.), the effect mode determining means divides the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining device into predetermined units, and The specific effect determining means for determining an effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined unit. As an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the determination is the high probability, an effect mode performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined unit (for example, (A subtractive effect of the character).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), in the gaming state in which the control for accelerating the hit determination is executed at least, the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are stored in the start memory stored by the holding means. The number of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuations) to be performed is determined. That is, once a symbol effect is performed for each start memory stored by the holding means, one or more symbol effects are executed for each start memory stored by the holding means. Since the number is determined, it appears as though the variable display is performed for a plurality of start memories, although it is a variable display for one start memory. Therefore, while suppressing the period in which the control for promoting the winning determination is performed, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the period is suppressed, and the winning probability in the winning determination can be made appropriate. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage that can be given to the player, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  The symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory, and a plurality of symbols determined for another start memory in which the variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one start memory. There is a possibility that an effect mode that extends over a part of the symbol effect may be determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode without being affected by one game result. In addition, since the display effect can be executed without making the player aware of the variable display in the unit of the start memory, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the period during which the control for promoting the hit determination is being executed. Moreover, when the confidential effect is being performed, the effect performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into predetermined units as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the hit determination is a high probability. Since the mode is determined, even if the execution period of the control for accelerating the hit determination is suppressed, it is possible to direct the player's gaze to the above-described effect mode, and it is possible to further suppress the decrease in interest. It becomes.

  Here, the “variable display of the identification symbol” means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display of one start memory, and On the other hand, even if the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of times of the variable display is one.

  The “stop effect” of the identification symbol is a stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification symbol performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both effects (for example, final stop).

  Further, `` if the variable display is performed for one start memory, the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol using the effect time until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. "Is performed" means not only the time during which variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display is performed for the next start memory. Therefore, the "symbol effect in which the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is the time until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed if the variable display is in the middle, and the interval is also the last in the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) The gaming machine according to (1), further including a holding effect control unit (for example, step S205 or the like) for controlling an image related to the start memory stored in the holding unit to be displayed on the display unit. Wherein the at least one effect control means controls at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed so as not to display an image relating to the starting memory stored in the at least one hold means. It is assumed that.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), since the image relating to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the number of symbol effects to be executed is determined with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means. In addition to this, the degree of progress from the start of the control for promoting the hit determination (that is, the number of times the start memory has been exhausted while the control for promoting the hit determination has been executed (the number of executed games) Number)) is difficult to grasp. As a result, it is possible to cause the player to gaze at the presentation mode performed as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is set to a high probability, and the execution period of the control for promoting the winning determination is further increased. It is possible to make the player less conscious.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), the effect mode determination means may display the variable display in a specific mode in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding section. When the specific start memory to be performed is not included, the effect mode is determined for all the start memories stored by the holding unit, and the last one of the start memories stored by the holding unit is stored. Suggestion effect determination means (for example, suggestion effect determination means) that determines the effect mode for the start memory to be an effect mode that suggests that the variable effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode, even though the start memory is not the specific start memory. , Step S358, etc.).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means do not include a specific start memory, it is not necessary to determine the effect mode again. Although it is unlikely that the above burden will increase, it is considered difficult to maintain the player's expectation for the display effect. Therefore, the effect mode for the last stored start memory among the start memories stored by the holding means suggests that the variable effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode in spite of not being a specific start memory. By determining the effect mode, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation of the display effect.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 27, it is possible to enhance the effect of the movable body effect and suppress a decrease in interest.

[Appendix 28]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, there has been known a gaming machine in which a hit is determined and a symbol is fluctuated, and when a fluctuated display is stopped and displayed, a game result is displayed. If the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that controls a gaming state after a special game is completed to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player, such as a time-saving gaming state (for example, JP-A-2006-2006). No. 122247).

  However, in a gaming machine controlled to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player separately from the special game, if the period controlled in the specific game state is lengthened, the winning probability in the hit determination must be reduced, Interestingness may decrease. On the other hand, if the period during which the game is controlled to the specific game state is shortened, the player may be disadvantaged, and in any case, interest may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to appropriately perform a specific game state performed separately from a special game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the supplementary note 28 has a lottery means (for example, step S117) for performing a hit determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and a variable identification symbol based on the result of the hit determination. Display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for performing display, and it is possible to execute a special game (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on the result of the hit determination being a specific result. And a lottery promotion control means capable of executing a control (for example, a time-saving gaming state) for promoting the win determination compared to a normal game state, and a winning probability in the win determination in the normal game state. A probability changing means capable of setting a high probability (for example, a high-probability game state) as compared with a secret effect in which it is not explicitly specified whether or not the winning probability in the hit determination is the high probability (eg, For example, concealment effect execution means (for example, step S205, etc.) that can execute concealment A stage 2002, and holding means (for example, information about the variable display that has not been performed yet) can be stored up to a predetermined number as start-up storage , Step S54, step S55, etc.), and when the variable display is performed for one start memory stored by the holding unit, the effect until the variable display for the next start memory after the one start memory is performed. A display control means (for example, step S205 or the like) for performing control such that a fluctuation effect and a stop effect of the identification symbol are performed using time, and a game state (for example, at least control for promoting the hit determination is performed) In the time-saving game state), the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding unit. The number of symbol effect executions (for example, provisional fluctuations) to be executed, and a symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324), and an effect mode for one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. Effect state determining means (for example, step S372 etc.) that can be determined, wherein the effect state determining means divides the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means into predetermined units. A specific effect determining means (for example, step S372 or the like) for determining an effect mode performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined unit regardless of the unit of the start memory. Is an effect state that, when a specific start memory is stored by the holding unit, the start memory stored before the specific start memory and the specific start memory are straddled. Although it is possible to determine such a state, it is configured not to determine an effect mode that spans the specific start memory and the start memory stored after the specific start memory, and when the concealment effect is being executed. Determining an effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined unit, as indicating the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the hit determination is the high probability. . .

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), in the gaming state in which the control for accelerating the hit determination is executed at least, the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are stored in the start memory stored by the holding means. The number of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuations) to be performed is determined. That is, once a symbol effect is performed for each start memory stored by the holding means, one or more symbol effects are executed for each start memory stored by the holding means. Since the number is determined, it appears as though the variable display is performed for a plurality of start memories, although it is a variable display for one start memory. Therefore, while suppressing the period in which the control for promoting the winning determination is performed, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the period is suppressed, and the winning probability in the winning determination can be made appropriate. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage that can be given to the player, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  The symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory, and a plurality of symbols determined for another start memory in which the variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one start memory. There is a possibility that an effect mode that extends over a part of the symbol effect may be determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode without being affected by one game result. In addition, since the display effect can be executed without making the player aware of the variable display in the unit of the start memory, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the period during which the control for promoting the hit determination is being executed. Moreover, when the confidential effect is being performed, the effect performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into predetermined units as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the hit determination is a high probability. Since the mode is determined, even if the execution period of the control for accelerating the hit determination is suppressed, it is possible to direct the player's gaze to the above-described effect mode, and it is possible to further suppress the decrease in interest. It becomes.

  Further, in determining an effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into a predetermined unit, the effect mode is stored (variably displayed first) before a specific start memory (for example, reach fluctuation effect). An effect mode that straddles the start memory and the specific start memory can be determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode without being affected by one game result. Further, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the unit of the start memory, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. On the other hand, an effect mode that straddles a specific start memory and a start memory stored later (variably displayed) after the specific start memory is not determined. This allows the player's gaze to be directed to the fluctuation effect of the identification symbol performed in a specific mode, rather than the effect mode performed during the execution of the symbol effect, and to give the fluctuation effect a sense of expectation. Can be. Here, the “specific start memory” corresponds to a start memory in which a variable display that gives a player an expectation that the result of the hit determination is a specific result, such as a reach fluctuation, is performed. I do.

  Here, the “variable display of the identification symbol” means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display of one start memory, and On the other hand, even if the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of times of the variable display is one.

  The “stop effect” of the identification symbol is a stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification symbol performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both effects (for example, final stop).

  Further, `` if the variable display is performed for one start memory, the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol using the effect time until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. "Is performed" means not only the time during which variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display is performed for the next start memory. Therefore, the "symbol effect in which the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is the time until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed if the variable display is in the middle, and the interval is also the last in the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) The gaming machine according to the above (1), further comprising a holding effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 201) for controlling an image related to a start memory stored in the holding means to be displayed on the display means. The holding effect control means controls at least when an effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed so that an image related to a start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed. Is what you do.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), since the image relating to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the number of symbol effects to be executed is determined with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means. In addition to this, the degree of progress from the start of the control for promoting the hit determination (that is, the number of times the start memory has been exhausted while the control for promoting the hit determination has been executed (the number of executed games) Number)) is difficult to grasp. As a result, it is possible to cause the player to gaze at the presentation mode performed as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is set to a high probability, and the execution period of the control for promoting the winning determination is further increased. It is possible to make the player less conscious.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), the effect mode determination unit includes the specific start memory in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding unit. When there is no start memory, the effect mode is determined for all the start memories stored by the holding means, and the effect mode for the last stored start memory among the start memories stored by the hold means is determined by the start memory. Has a suggestion effect deciding means (for example, step S358, etc.) for deciding on an effect mode suggesting that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode, even though the specific start memory is not the specific start memory. Things.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means do not include a specific start memory, it is not necessary to determine the effect mode again. Although it is unlikely that the above burden will increase, it is considered difficult to maintain the player's expectation for the display effect. Therefore, the effect mode for the last stored start memory among the start memories stored by the holding means suggests that the variable effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode in spite of not being a specific start memory. By determining the effect mode, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation of the display effect.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 28, since a specific game state performed separately from the special game can be suitably performed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[Appendix 29]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, there has been known a gaming machine in which a hit is determined and a symbol is fluctuated, and when a fluctuated display is stopped and displayed, a game result is displayed. If the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that controls a gaming state after a special game is completed to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player, such as a time-saving gaming state (for example, JP-A-2006-2006). No. 122247).

  However, in a gaming machine controlled to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player separately from the special game, if the period controlled in the specific game state is lengthened, the winning probability in the hit determination must be reduced, Interestingness may decrease. On the other hand, if the period during which the game is controlled to the specific game state is shortened, the player may be disadvantaged, and in any case, interest may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to appropriately perform a specific game state performed separately from a special game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 29 includes a lottery means (for example, step S117) for performing a hit determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a variable identification symbol based on the result of the hit determination. Display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for performing display, and it is possible to execute a special game (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on the result of the hit determination being a specific result. And a lottery promotion control means capable of executing a control (for example, a time-saving gaming state) for promoting the win determination compared to a normal game state, and a winning probability in the win determination in the normal game state. A probability changing means capable of setting a high probability (for example, a high-probability game state) as compared with a secret effect in which it is not explicitly specified whether or not the winning probability in the hit determination is the high probability (eg, For example, concealment effect execution means (for example, step S205 or the like) capable of executing concealment A stage 2002) and information on the variable display that has not been performed yet are stored as a start memory up to a predetermined number (for example, four). When the variable display is performed for the possible holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) and one start memory stored by the holding means, the variable display for the next start memory after the one start memory is performed. Display control means (for example, step S205, etc.) for controlling the fluctuation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol by using the effect time until the effect is performed, and at least control for promoting the hit determination. In the present gaming state, the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding unit. Symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.) for determining the number of effect executions, and effect mode determining means for determining an effect mode for one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means ( For example, step S372 and the like), and when the specific starting memory is not included in the starting memory stored by the holding means, In determining the effect mode for the start memory and determining the effect mode for all the start memories stored by the holding means, the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means is determined. Is divided into predetermined units, and a specification for determining an effect mode (for example, a character subtraction effect) performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units A gaming machine having an effect determination unit (for example, step S372).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), in the gaming state in which the control for accelerating the hit determination is executed at least, the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are stored in the start memory stored by the holding means. The number of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuations) to be performed is determined. That is, once a symbol effect is performed for each start memory stored by the holding means, one or more symbol effects are executed for each start memory stored by the holding means. Since the number is determined, it appears as though the variable display is performed for a plurality of start memories, although it is a variable display for one start memory. Therefore, while suppressing the period in which the control for promoting the winning determination is performed, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the period is suppressed, and the winning probability in the winning determination can be made appropriate. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage that can be given to the player, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  The symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory, and a plurality of symbols determined for another start memory in which the variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one start memory. There is a possibility that an effect mode that extends over a part of the symbol effect may be determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode without being affected by one game result. In addition, since the display effect can be executed without making the player aware of the variable display in the unit of the start memory, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the period during which the control for promoting the hit determination is being executed. Moreover, when the confidential effect is being performed, the effect performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into predetermined units as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the hit determination is a high probability. Since the mode is determined, even if the execution period of the control for accelerating the hit determination is suppressed, it is possible to direct the player's gaze to the above-described effect mode, and it is possible to further suppress the decrease in interest. It becomes.

  By the way, when the starting memory stored by the holding means does not include the specific starting memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach fluctuation), the starting memory stored by the holding means is not included. As compared with the case where a specific start memory is included, the control load is small, and the effect mode can be determined for more start memories. On the other hand, the presentation mode is determined.

  Here, the “variable display of the identification symbol” means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display of one start memory, and On the other hand, even if the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of times of the variable display is one.

  The “stop effect” of the identification symbol is a stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification symbol performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both effects (for example, final stop).

  Further, `` if the variable display is performed for one start memory, the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol using the effect time until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. "Is performed" means not only the time during which variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display is performed for the next start memory. Therefore, the "symbol effect in which the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is the time until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed if the variable display is in the middle, and the interval is also the last in the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) In the gaming machine described in the above (1), based on a starting port (for example, a second starting port 440) in which a game ball can be won and a winning of the game ball in the starting port, the identification symbol is displayed. And a variation pattern determining means (for example, main CPU 101) for determining a variation pattern when variable display is performed, wherein the holding means (for example, main CPU 101) determines that a game ball has won the starting port. The starting memory is configured to be able to be held on the basis of the starting memory, and the symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, the sub CPU 201) stores the starting memory stored in the holding means when a game ball is won in the starting opening. Is determined on the basis of the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination means.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the number of executions of the symbol effect determined with respect to the starting memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the fluctuation pattern. More specifically, if the variation pattern has a relatively long variation time, the number of executed symbol effects increases, and if the variation pattern has a relatively short variation time, the number of executed symbol effects decreases. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol effect is reduced, and it is difficult for the player to know that one or more symbol effects are being executed for one start memory. As a result, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to grasp the period in which the control for promoting the hit determination is being performed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), a holding effect control means (for example, step S205) for controlling an image related to a start memory stored in the holding means to be displayed on the display means. , Etc.), and the on-hold effect control means controls at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed, so that an image related to the start storage stored in the on-hold means is not displayed. It is characterized by doing.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), since the image relating to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the number of symbol effects to be executed is determined for the start memory stored by the holding means. In addition to this, the degree of progress from the start of the control for promoting the hit determination (that is, the number of times the start memory has been exhausted while the control for promoting the hit determination has been executed (the number of executed games) Number)) is difficult to grasp. As a result, it is possible to cause the player to gaze at the presentation mode performed as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is set to a high probability, and the execution period of the control for promoting the winning determination is further increased. It is possible to make the player less conscious.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 29, it is possible to appropriately perform a specific game state performed separately from the special game, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

[Appendix 30]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, there has been known a gaming machine in which a hit is determined and a symbol is fluctuated, and when a fluctuated display is stopped and displayed, a game result is displayed. If the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that controls a gaming state after a special game is completed to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player, such as a time-saving gaming state (for example, JP-A-2006-2006). No. 122247).

  However, in a gaming machine controlled to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player separately from the special game, if the period controlled in the specific game state is lengthened, the winning probability in the hit determination must be reduced, Interestingness may decrease. On the other hand, if the period during which the game is controlled to the specific game state is shortened, the player may be disadvantaged, and in any case, interest may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to appropriately perform a specific game state performed separately from a special game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to attachment 30 includes a lottery means (for example, step S117) for performing a hit determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and a variable identification symbol based on a result of the hit determination. Display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for performing display, and it is possible to execute a special game (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on the result of the hit determination being a specific result. And a lottery promotion control means capable of executing a control (for example, a time-saving gaming state) for promoting the win determination compared to a normal game state, and a winning probability in the win determination in the normal game state. A probability changing means capable of setting a high probability (for example, a high-probability game state) as compared with a secret effect in which it is not explicitly specified whether or not the winning probability in the hit determination is the high probability (eg, For example, concealment effect execution means (for example, step S205 or the like) capable of executing concealment A stage 2002) and information on the variable display that has not been performed yet are stored as a start memory up to a predetermined number (for example, four). When the variable display is performed for the possible holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) and one start memory stored by the holding means, the variable display for the next start memory after the one start memory is performed. Display control means (for example, step S205, etc.) for controlling the fluctuation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol by using the effect time until the effect is performed, and at least control for promoting the hit determination. In the present gaming state, the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding unit. Symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.) for determining the number of effect executions, and effect mode determining means for determining an effect mode for one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means ( For example, step S372 and the like), and when the specific start memory is not included in the one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, the effect mode determination means stores the predetermined start memory. In determining the effect mode for all the start memories to be performed and determining the effect mode for all the start memories stored by the holding means, the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means The symbol effect is divided into predetermined units (regardless of the unit of the starting memory), and the effect state performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined unit. (For example, a character effect subtraction effect), and the effect mode with respect to the last start memory stored in the start memory stored by the holding means, wherein the start memory is the specific start memory. Nevertheless, a suggestion effect determination means (for example, step S358, etc.) for determining an effect mode (for example, a gaseous reach indication effect) that suggests that the variation design of the identification symbol is performed in the specific mode is performed. It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), in the gaming state in which the control for accelerating the hit determination is executed at least, the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are stored in the start memory stored by the holding means. The number of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuations) to be performed is determined. That is, once a symbol effect is performed for each start memory stored by the holding means, one or more symbol effects are executed for each start memory stored by the holding means. Since the number is determined, it appears as though the variable display is performed for a plurality of start memories, although it is a variable display for one start memory. Therefore, while suppressing the period in which the control for promoting the winning determination is performed, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the period is suppressed, and the winning probability in the winning determination can be made appropriate. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage that can be given to the player, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  The symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory, and a plurality of symbols determined for another start memory in which the variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one start memory. There is a possibility that an effect mode that extends over a part of the symbol effect may be determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode without being affected by one game result. Further, since the display effect can be executed without making the player aware of the variable display in the start memory unit, the degree of progress from the start of the control for promoting the hit determination (that is, the control for promoting the hit determination is not performed). The remaining period to be executed) can be hardly recognized by the player. Moreover, when the confidential effect is being performed, the effect performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into predetermined units as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the hit determination is a high probability. Since the mode is determined, even if the execution period of the control for accelerating the hit determination is suppressed, it is possible to direct the player's gaze to the above-described effect mode, and it is possible to further suppress the decrease in interest. It becomes.

  Further, when the start memory stored by the holding means does not include the specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach fluctuation effect), the player's expectation of the display effect is maintained. It may be difficult to cause Therefore, in this case, the effect mode is determined for all the start memories stored by the holding means, and the effect mode for the last stored start memory among the start memories stored by the hold means is determined by the start mode. Despite the fact that the memory is not a specific starting memory, by determining a production mode that suggests that the variable design of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode, the expectation of the player for the display performance is maintained. ing.

  Here, the “variable display of the identification symbol” means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display of one start memory, and On the other hand, even if the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of times of the variable display is one.

  The “stop effect” of the identification symbol is a stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification symbol performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both effects (for example, final stop).

  Further, `` if the variable display is performed for one start memory, the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol using the effect time until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. "Is performed" means not only the time during which variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display is performed for the next start memory. Therefore, the "symbol effect in which the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is the time until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed if the variable display is in the middle, and the interval is also the last in the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1), a variation pattern when the variable display of the identification symbol is performed based on a starting port in which a game ball can be won and a winning of the game ball in the starting port. (For example, step S173, etc.), and the holding means is configured to be able to hold the start memory based on a winning of a game ball in the starting port, The symbol effect execution number determining means determines the number of symbol effect executions for the starting memory stored in the holding means when the game ball wins in the starting port, and changes the number of times the symbol effect is executed by the fluctuation pattern determining means. It is characterized in that it is determined based on a pattern.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the number of executions of the symbol effect determined with respect to the starting memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the fluctuation pattern. More specifically, if the variation pattern has a relatively long variation time, the number of executed symbol effects increases, and if the variation pattern has a relatively short variation time, the number of executed symbol effects decreases. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol effect is reduced, and it is difficult for the player to know that one or more symbol effects are being executed for one start memory. As a result, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to grasp the period in which the control for promoting the hit determination is being performed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), a holding effect control means (for example, step S205) for controlling an image related to the starting memory stored in the storage means to be displayed on the display means. , Etc.), and the on-hold effect control means controls at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed, so that an image related to the start storage stored in the on-hold means is not displayed. It is characterized by doing.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), since the image relating to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the number of symbol effects to be executed is determined for the start memory stored by the holding means. Accordingly, it is difficult to grasp the degree of progress from the start of the control for promoting the hit determination (that is, the remaining period in which the control for promoting the hit determination is executed). As a result, it is possible to cause the player to gaze at the presentation mode performed as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is set to a high probability, and the execution period of the control for promoting the winning determination is further increased. It is possible to make the player less conscious.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 30, a specific gaming state performed separately from the special gaming can be suitably performed, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

[Appendix 31]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, there has been known a gaming machine in which a hit is determined and a symbol is fluctuated, and when a fluctuated display is stopped and displayed, a game result is displayed. If the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that controls a gaming state after a special game is completed to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player, such as a time-saving gaming state (for example, JP-A-2006-2006). No. 122247).

  However, in a gaming machine controlled to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player separately from the special game, if the period controlled in the specific game state is lengthened, the winning probability in the hit determination must be reduced, Interestingness may decrease. On the other hand, if the period during which the game is controlled to the specific game state is shortened, the player may be disadvantaged, and in any case, interest may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to appropriately perform a specific game state performed separately from a special game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to attachment 31 includes a lottery means (for example, step S117) for performing a hit determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and a variable identification symbol based on a result of the hit determination. Display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for performing display, and it is possible to execute a special game (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on the result of the hit determination being a specific result. And a lottery promotion control means capable of executing a control (for example, a time-saving gaming state) for promoting the win determination compared to a normal game state, and a winning probability in the win determination in the normal game state. A probability changing means capable of setting a high probability (for example, a high-probability game state) as compared with a secret effect in which it is not explicitly specified whether or not the winning probability in the hit determination is the high probability (eg, For example, concealment effect execution means (for example, step S205 or the like) capable of executing concealment A stage 2002) and information on the variable display that has not been performed yet are stored as a start memory up to a predetermined number (for example, four). When the variable display is performed for the possible holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) and one start memory stored by the holding means, the variable display for the next start memory after the one start memory is performed. Display control means (for example, step S205, etc.) for controlling the fluctuation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol by using the effect time until the effect is performed, and at least control for promoting the hit determination. In the present gaming state, the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding unit. Symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.) for determining the number of effect executions, and effect mode determining means for determining an effect mode for one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means ( For example, step S372) includes the following: wherein the effect mode determining means includes a specific mode in which the variable effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. When the start memory (reach or big hit) is not included, the effect target number determining means for determining an effect mode for a different number of start memories each time from the start memory stored by the holding means, the effect mode In determining the effect mode for the starting memory to be determined, the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means is divided into predetermined units. A specific effect determining means for determining an effect mode (for example, a character subtraction effect) performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined unit (regardless of the unit of the start memory), and the different number each time. Of the start memory stored last, suggests that the variable effect of the identification symbol is performed in the specific mode even though the start memory is not the specific start memory. It is characterized by having a suggested effect determination means (for example, step S358 or the like) for determining an effect mode (for example, a gaseous reach predictive effect).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), at least in the gaming state in which the control for accelerating the hit determination is executed, the change effect of the identification symbol and the stop effect are performed on the start memory stored by the holding means. The number of executed symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuations) is determined. That is, once a symbol effect is performed for each start memory stored by the holding means, one or more symbol effects are executed for each start memory stored by the holding means. Since the number is determined, it appears as though the variable display is performed for a plurality of start memories, although it is a variable display for one start memory. Therefore, while suppressing the period in which the control for promoting the winning determination is performed, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the period is suppressed, and the winning probability in the winning determination can be made appropriate. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage that can be given to the player, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  The symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory, and a plurality of symbols determined for another start memory in which the variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one start memory. There is a possibility that an effect mode that extends over a part of the symbol effect may be determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode without being affected by one game result. Further, since the display effect can be executed without making the player aware of the variable display in the start memory unit, the degree of progress from the start of the control for promoting the hit determination (that is, the control for promoting the hit determination is not performed). The remaining period to be executed) can be hardly recognized by the player. Moreover, when the confidential effect is being performed, the effect performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into predetermined units as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the hit determination is a high probability. Since the mode is determined, even if the execution period of the control for accelerating the hit determination is suppressed, it is possible to direct the player's gaze to the above-described effect mode, and it is possible to further suppress the decrease in interest. It becomes.

  Further, when the start memory stored by the holding means does not include the specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach fluctuation effect), the player's expectation of the display effect is maintained. It may be difficult to cause Therefore, in this case, the number of start memories to be determined for the effect mode is determined to be different each time, and the effect mode for the last stored start memory among the start memories stored by the holding means is determined. Is determined to be an effect mode that suggests that a variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode even though the start memory is not a specific start memory, so that the player's expectation of the display effect is maintained. I am trying to be.

  The number of start memories to be determined for the production mode is determined so as to be different each time. Not to be easily grasped (even if an effect mode suggesting that the identification symbol is fluctuated and displayed in a specific mode is displayed, the suggestive effect mode is a spoiler). That's why.

  Here, the “variable display of the identification symbol” means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display of one start memory, and On the other hand, even if the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of times of the variable display is one.

  The “stop effect” of the identification symbol is a stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification symbol performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both effects (for example, final stop).

  Further, `` if the variable display is performed for one start memory, the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol using the effect time until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. "Is performed" means not only the time during which variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display is performed for the next start memory. Therefore, the "symbol effect in which the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is the time until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed if the variable display is in the middle, and the interval is also the last in the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1), the effect target number determining means determines the number of start memories to be determined for the effect mode by lottery.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the number of start memories to be determined for the production mode is determined by lottery, so the number of start memories to be determined for the production mode is easily and randomly determined. be able to.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), a holding effect control means (for example, step S205) for controlling an image related to a start memory stored in the holding means to be displayed on the display means. , Etc.), and the on-hold effect control means controls at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed, so that an image related to the start storage stored in the on-hold means is not displayed. It is characterized by doing.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), since the image relating to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the variable display in the unit of the start memory can be made more transparent to the player. Can be.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 31, the specific gaming state performed separately from the special game can be suitably performed, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

[Supplementary Note 32]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, there has been known a gaming machine in which a hit is determined and a symbol is fluctuated, and when a fluctuated display is stopped and displayed, a game result is displayed. If the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, the game state after the end of the special game is set to a specific game state such as a time-saving game state, etc., and whether or not the winning probability in the hit determination is a high probability is concealed and predetermined. There has been known a gaming machine in which it is disclosed whether or not a high probability is reached when the number of played games is exhausted (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240529).

  As described above, some gaming machines that conceal whether or not the probability is high in the specific gaming state include an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the probability is high in the specific gaming state.

  However, in a gaming machine in which the specific game state ends when the predetermined number of game times is exhausted, the player can easily know the end timing of the specific game state simply by grasping the number of played games. I will. When the end timing of the specific game state approaches, even if an effect indicating the degree of expectation of the high probability is performed, the sense of expectation for the high probability is weakened and the interest may be reduced. .

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to make it difficult to grasp the end timing of a specific game state, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to attachment 32 includes a lottery means (for example, step S117) that performs a hit determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a variable identification symbol based on the result of the hit determination. Display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for performing display, and it is possible to execute a special game (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on the result of the hit determination being a specific result. A lottery promotion control means capable of executing a control (for example, a time-saving gaming state) for promoting the hit determination as compared with a normal gaming state until the hit determination is performed a predetermined number of times; At least during the execution of the control for facilitating the winning determination, the winning probability in the determination can be changed to a higher probability (for example, a higher-probability gaming state) than a normal gaming state. Means, and secretion effect execution means (for example, step S205, etc.) capable of executing a secretion effect (for example, secret A stage 2002) that makes it unspecified whether or not the winning probability in the hit determination is the high probability. And information on the variable display that has not been performed yet is stored by the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) as start-up memory. When the variable display is performed for one start memory, the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed using the effect time until the variable display for the next start memory after the one start memory is performed. Display control means (for example, the sub CPU 201), and at least in the gaming state in which the control for promoting the hit determination is executed. A symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) for determining the number of symbol effects executed in which the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the storing means; Effect state determining means (for example, step S372 or the like) capable of determining an effect state for one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, wherein the effect state determining means is configured to execute the symbol effect The symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the determination means is divided into predetermined units, and a determination is made to determine an effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined unit regardless of the unit of the start memory. It is characterized by having effect determination means (for example, step S372 and the like).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), in the gaming state in which the control for accelerating the hit determination is executed at least, the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are stored in the start memory stored by the holding means. The number of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuations) to be performed is determined. That is, once a symbol effect is performed for each start memory stored by the holding means, one or more symbol effects are executed for each start memory stored by the holding means. Since the number is determined, it appears as though the variable display is performed for a plurality of start memories, although it is a variable display for one start memory. For this reason, even if the end timing of the period in which the control for promoting the hit determination is executed is determined in advance, it is difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of the execution period.

  The symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory, and a plurality of symbols determined for another start memory in which the variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one start memory. There is a possibility that an effect mode that extends over a part of the symbol effect may be determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode without being affected by one game result. Further, since the display effect can be executed without making the player aware of the variable display in the start memory unit, the degree of progress from the start of the control for promoting the hit determination (that is, the control for promoting the hit determination is not performed). The remaining period to be executed) can be hardly recognized by the player. Moreover, when the confidential effect is being performed, the effect performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into predetermined units as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the hit determination is a high probability. Since the mode is determined, the player's consciousness can be directed to the above-mentioned effect mode rather than the remaining period in which the control for promoting the hit determination is performed, and the decrease in interest can be further suppressed. It becomes.

  Here, the “variable display of the identification symbol” means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display of one start memory, and On the other hand, even if the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of times of the variable display is one.

  The “stop effect” of the identification symbol is a stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification symbol performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both effects (for example, final stop).

  Further, `` if the variable display is performed for one start memory, the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol using the effect time until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. "Is performed" means not only the time during which variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display is performed for the next start memory. Therefore, the "symbol effect in which the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is the time until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed if the variable display is in the middle, and the interval is also the last in the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) The gaming machine according to the above (1), further comprising a holding effect control means for controlling an image relating to the starting memory stored in the holding means to be displayed on the display means, wherein the holding effect control means Is characterized in that, when at least the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed, control is performed so that an image related to start storage stored in the holding means is not displayed.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), since the image relating to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the number of symbol effects to be executed is determined with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means. Accordingly, it is difficult to grasp the degree of progress from the start of the control for promoting the hit determination (that is, the remaining period in which the control for promoting the hit determination is executed). As a result, the player can be interested in an index effect that can infer the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is a high probability, and the end timing of the control for promoting the winning determination can be more improved. This makes it more difficult for the player to grasp.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), when there are a plurality of starting memories stored by the recording and holding means, the effect mode determining means may include one of the plurality of starting memories. A part of the design effect of the number of executions determined for the start memory and a part of the design effect of the number of executions determined for the other start memories are divided as a predetermined unit that spans a plurality of start memories. And a specific effect mode determining means (for example, step S372 or the like) capable of determining an effect mode performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined unit regardless of the unit of the start memory. I do.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), it is possible to determine an effect mode so as to straddle a plurality of starting memories without being constrained by one game result. Further, it is possible to execute a display effect in which the player is not conscious of the variable display in the unit of the start storage, and it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of the control for promoting the hit determination.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 32, by making it difficult to grasp the end timing of the specific gaming state, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[Appendix 33]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, there has been known a gaming machine in which a hit is determined and a symbol is fluctuated, and when a fluctuated display is stopped and displayed, a game result is displayed. If the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, the game state after the end of the special game is set to a specific game state such as a time-saving game state, etc., and whether or not the winning probability in the hit determination is a high probability is concealed and predetermined. There has been known a gaming machine in which it is disclosed whether or not a high probability is reached when the number of played games is exhausted (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240529).

  As described above, some gaming machines that keep secret or not with high probability in a specific gaming state perform a highly probable effect that indicates the degree of expectation of high probability in a specific gaming state.

  However, in a gaming machine in which a high-probability effect that indicates whether or not a high probability is high in a specific gaming state and indicates a degree of expectation of a high probability in the specific gaming state is performed, a high probability is used. Otherwise, an effect with a low degree of expectation is likely to be selected, and if such an effect with a low degree of expectation is performed, interest may be reduced.

  On the other hand, if an effect with a high degree of expectation is performed despite the fact that the probability is not high, the player will only be given an unnecessary sense of expectation, and the discouragement given to the player at the end of the specific game state will not be measured.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a display effect performed in a specific game state with interest to suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to attachment 33 includes a lottery means (for example, step S117) for performing a hit determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a fixed condition, and a variable identification symbol based on the result of the hit determination. Display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for performing display, and it is possible to execute a special game (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on the result of the hit determination being a specific result. A lottery promotion control means (for example, step S171 or the like) capable of executing a control (for example, a time-saving gaming state) for promoting the hit determination as compared with a normal gaming state for a predetermined period; The winning probability in the winning determination may be set to a higher probability (for example, a high-probability gaming state) than the normal gaming state while at least the control for promoting the winning determination is being performed. And a confidential period (for example, confidential A stage 2002) capable of executing a display effect that does not explicitly indicate whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability. An index effect execution means (for example, step S370 or the like) capable of executing an index effect capable of giving an expectation that the winning probability in the hit determination is the high probability, and the effect performed as the entire effect in the concealment period. A scenario determining means (for example, a scenario pre-setting process (FIG. 138)) for determining a scenario of the index effect before the control for promoting the hit determination is performed; When the control for accelerating the hit determination is completed, it is determined whether or not the winning probability in the hit determination is the high probability. And determining the index presentation scenario as shown.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the scenario of the index effect performed as the entire effect in the confidential period is determined in advance before the control for promoting the hit determination is performed. The production scenario can proceed. That is, before the confidential period ends, it may be awkward if the indicator effect determines whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player. In this regard, according to the present invention, the interest in the index effect can be maintained until the confidential period ends, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

(2) In the gaming machine according to the above (1), holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number of pieces of information about the variable display that has not been performed as start-up storage; With respect to the start memory stored by the holding means, a symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, a variable effect and a stop effect of the identification symbol, which can determine the number of executions of a symbol effect (for example, temporary fluctuation) to be performed) Step S324, etc.), and an effect mode determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining an effect mode for one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding unit, and determining the effect mode. The means, for the start memory stored by the holding means, the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determination means is divided into predetermined units, The specific effect determining means for determining a representation embodiment made during the design effect divided into the predetermined unit regardless of the unit of the serial start memory (e.g., step S372, etc.) and has a.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, the temporary change) in which the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the retaining means is determined. . That is, once a symbol effect is performed for each start memory stored by the holding means, one or more symbol effects are executed for each start memory stored by the holding means. Since the number is determined, it appears as though the variable display is performed for a plurality of start memories, although it is a variable display for one start memory. Moreover, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory, and a plurality of symbols determined for another start memory in which the variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one start memory. There is a possibility that an effect mode that extends over a part of the symbol effect may be determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode without being affected by one game result. Further, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the unit of the start memory, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Note that “variable display” means a series of displays from the start of the change display of the identification symbol for one start memory to the stop display, and the change of the identification symbol for one start memory. Even if the effect and the stop effect are repeated a plurality of times, the number of times of variable display is one.

  The “stop effect” of the identification symbol is a stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification symbol performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both effects (for example, final stop).

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), a holding effect control means (for example, a sub effect control means) for controlling an image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means to be displayed in a predetermined display area. CPU 201), wherein the on-hold effect control means controls the display of the image related to the start memory stored in the on-hold means when at least the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed. Is what you do.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), since the image relating to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the number of symbol effects to be executed is determined for the start memory stored by the holding means. Accordingly, it is difficult to grasp the degree of progress from the start of the control for promoting the hit determination (that is, the remaining period in which the control for promoting the hit determination is executed). As a result, the player can be interested in an index effect that can give an expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is high.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 33, it is possible to make the display effect performed in the specific gaming state interesting, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[Appendix 34]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, there has been known a gaming machine in which a hit is determined and a symbol is fluctuated, and when a fluctuated display is stopped and displayed, a game result is displayed. If the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, the game state after the end of the special game is set to a specific game state such as a time-saving game state, etc., and whether or not the winning probability in the hit determination is a high probability is concealed and predetermined. There has been known a gaming machine in which it is disclosed whether or not a high probability is reached when the number of played games is exhausted (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240529).

  As described above, some gaming machines that keep secret or not with high probability in a specific gaming state perform a highly probable effect that indicates the degree of expectation of high probability in a specific gaming state.

  However, in a gaming machine in which a high-probability effect that indicates whether or not a high probability is high in a specific gaming state and indicates a degree of expectation of a high probability in the specific gaming state is performed, a high probability is used. Otherwise, an effect with a low degree of expectation is likely to be selected, and if such an effect with a low degree of expectation is performed, interest may be reduced.

  On the other hand, if an effect with a high degree of expectation is performed despite the fact that the probability is not high, the player will only be given an unnecessary sense of expectation, and the discouragement given to the player at the end of the specific game state will not be measured.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a display effect performed in a specific game state with interest to suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to attachment 34 includes a lottery means (for example, step S117) for performing a hit determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a variable identification symbol based on the result of the hit determination. Display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for performing display, and it is possible to execute a special game (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on the result of the hit determination being a specific result. A gaming machine, and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed is stored by the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing a predetermined number of pieces of information as start-up memory. When the variable display is performed for one start memory, the change of the identification symbol is performed using the effect time until the variable display is performed for the next start memory after the one start memory. Display control means (for example, step S205, etc.) for controlling the start and stop effects and control for promoting the hit determination (for example, a time-saving game state) as compared with a normal game state are executed for a predetermined period. The possible lottery promotion control means and the winning probability in the hit determination are set to a high probability (for example, a high-probability gaming state) compared to the normal gaming state at least while the control for promoting the hit determination is being executed. A probability changing means capable of performing a display effect that does not explicitly indicate whether or not the winning probability in the hit determination is set to the high probability. An index effect execution means (for example, step S370 or the like) capable of executing an index effect capable of giving an expectation that the probability is the high probability; Scenario determination means (for example, scenario pre-setting processing (FIG. 138)) for preliminarily determining the scenario of the index effect performed as the entire effect in the concealment period before the control for promoting the hit determination is performed. At least in the concealment period, the symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step) for determining the number of symbol effects to be executed in which the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. S324 etc.), wherein the indicator effect execution means divides the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determination means into predetermined units, and irrespective of the start memory unit, And special effect determination means for determining that the indicator effect is to be performed as an effect performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into units. The scenario determining means determines the scenario of the index effect so that when the control for promoting the hit determination is finished, it is specified whether or not the winning probability in the hit determination is the high probability. It is characterized by doing.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), at least during the concealment period, the symbol effect (for example, the temporary variation) in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding unit. The number is determined. That is, one symbol effect is normally performed for each start memory stored by the holding means, but at least during the confidential period, one or more times for each start memory stored by the holding means. Since the number of executions of the symbol effect is determined, the appearance appears as if the variable display is performed for a plurality of start memories, although it is a variable display for one start memory. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to know the end timing of the concealment period. Furthermore, since the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory, it is much more difficult to grasp the end timing of the concealment period.

  In addition, an index effect that can give a sense of expectation that the winning probability in the hit determination is high is determined as the effect performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into predetermined units. This index effect is determined before the control for promoting the hit determination is performed before the scenario performed as the entire effect in the confidential period is executed, and when the control for promoting the hit determination is completed, the winning in the hit determination is determined. It is specified whether or not the probability is high.

  In this way, an index effect that can give a sense of expectation that the winning probability in the hit determination is high while keeping the player from being conscious of the end timing of the concealment period and thus the end timing of the control for promoting the hit determination is performed. At the same time, when the control for accelerating the win determination is finished, whether or not the winning probability in the hit determination is set to a high probability is clearly indicated by the index effect. Therefore, unlike a conventional gaming machine in which it is disclosed whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is a high probability when a certain period of the confidential period has elapsed, the end timing of the concealing period and thus the end of the control for promoting the winning determination By making the timing invisible to the player, it is possible to execute an effect in which whether or not the winning probability in the hit determination is a high probability is clearly indicated by the outcome of the index effect. In the case where the index effect is, for example, a game effect between a friend and an enemy, an effect such as a high probability determination when the friend wins can be realized.

  Here, the “variable display of the identification symbol” means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display of one start memory, and On the other hand, even if the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of times of the variable display is one.

  The “stop effect” of the identification symbol is a stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification symbol performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both effects (for example, final stop).

  Further, `` if the variable display is performed for one start memory, the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol using the effect time until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. "Is performed" means not only the time during which variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display is performed for the next start memory. Therefore, the "symbol effect in which the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is the time until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed if the variable display is in the middle, and the interval is also the last in the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) The gaming machine according to the above (1), further comprising a holding effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 201) for controlling an image related to a start memory stored in the holding means to be displayed on the display means. The holding effect control means controls at least when an effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed so that an image related to a start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed. I do.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), since the image relating to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the number of symbol effects to be executed is determined with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means. Accordingly, it is difficult to grasp the degree of progress from the start of the control for promoting the hit determination (that is, the remaining period in which the control for promoting the hit determination is executed). As a result, it is possible to interest the player in the index production that can give a sense of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is a high probability, and the winning probability in the winning determination is high due to the outcome of the index production. It is possible to give the player the impression that the presence or absence is disclosed.

(3) In the gaming machine described in the above (1) or (2), when the special effect determination means has a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, one of the plurality of start memories is provided. A part of the design effect of the number of executions determined for the start memory and a part of the design effect of the number of executions determined for the other start memories are divided as a predetermined unit that spans a plurality of start memories. And a specific effect mode determining means (for example, step S372 or the like) capable of determining an effect mode performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined unit regardless of the unit of the start memory. I do.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), it is possible to determine an effect mode so as to straddle a plurality of starting memories without being constrained by one game result. Further, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the start storage unit, and it is more difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of the concealment period, and thus the end timing of the control for promoting the hit determination. be able to.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 34, display effects performed in the specific gaming state can be made interesting, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[Appendix 35]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, there has been known a gaming machine in which a hit is determined and a symbol is fluctuated, and when a fluctuated display is stopped and displayed, a game result is displayed. If the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, the game state after the end of the special game is set to a specific game state such as a time-saving game state, etc., and whether or not the winning probability in the hit determination is a high probability is concealed and predetermined. There has been known a gaming machine in which it is disclosed whether or not a high probability is reached when the number of played games is exhausted (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240529).

  As described above, some gaming machines that keep secret or not with high probability in a specific gaming state perform a highly probable effect that indicates the degree of expectation of high probability in a specific gaming state.

  However, in a gaming machine in which a high-probability effect that indicates whether or not a high probability is high in a specific gaming state and indicates a degree of expectation of a high probability in the specific gaming state is performed, a high probability is used. Otherwise, an effect with a low degree of expectation is likely to be selected, and if such an effect with a low degree of expectation is performed, interest may be reduced.

  On the other hand, if an effect with a high degree of expectation is performed despite the fact that the probability is not high, the player will only be given an unnecessary sense of expectation, and the discouragement given to the player at the end of the specific game state will not be measured.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a display effect performed in a specific game state with interest to suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 35 includes a lottery unit (for example, step S117) that performs a hit determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a variable identification symbol based on the result of the hit determination. Display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for performing display, and it is possible to execute a special game (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on the result of the hit determination being a specific result. A gaming machine, a lottery promotion control means capable of executing a control (for example, a time reduction gaming state) for promoting the win determination compared to a normal gaming state for a predetermined period, and a winning probability in the win determination, A probability changing unit that can be set to a high probability (for example, a high-probability game state) compared to a normal game state while at least the control for promoting the hit determination is performed; In addition to providing a concealment period (for example, concealment A stage 2002) in which a display effect that does not explicitly indicate whether or not the winning probability in the determination is the high probability is provided, the winning probability in the winning determination is determined in the confidential period. An index effect execution means capable of executing an index effect (for example, a character subtraction effect) capable of estimating whether or not the probability is high, and a scenario of the index effect performed as an entire effect in the secret period, Before the control for promoting the determination is executed, the scenario determination means for determining in advance is provided, and the lottery promotion control means includes a plurality of periods for performing the control for promoting the hit determination, each of which has a different period. And a promotion period determining means (for example, step S172, etc.) for determining any one of the periods. The means is configured such that, when the control for promoting the hit determination is completed according to the period determined by the promotion period determining means, whether or not the winning probability in the hit determination is set to the high probability is specified. And determining a scenario for the indicator effect.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the scenario of the index effect performed as the entire effect in the confidential period is determined before the control for promoting the hit determination is performed, and the hit determination is promoted. When the control is completed, it is specified whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is high. Here, the index effect is an effect that allows the user to infer whether or not the winning probability in the hit determination is the high probability. Further, the execution period of the control for accelerating the hit determination is determined to be different each time, so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of the concealment period.

  In this way, an index effect is provided that allows the player to guess whether or not the winning probability in the hit determination is high while keeping the player from being conscious of the end timing of the concealment period, and thus the end timing of the control for promoting the hit determination. At the same time, when the control for accelerating the win determination is finished, whether or not the winning probability in the hit determination is set to a high probability is clearly indicated by the index effect. Therefore, unlike a conventional gaming machine in which it is disclosed whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is a high probability when a certain period of the confidential period has elapsed, the end timing of the concealing period and thus the end of the control for promoting the winning determination By making the timing invisible to the player, it is possible to execute an effect in which whether or not the winning probability in the hit determination is a high probability is clearly indicated by the outcome of the index effect. In the case where the index effect is, for example, a game effect between a friend and an enemy, an effect such as a high probability determination when the friend wins can be realized.

(2) In the gaming machine according to the above (1), holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number of pieces of information about the variable display that has not been performed as start-up storage; With respect to the start memory stored by the holding means, a symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, a variable effect and a stop effect of the identification symbol, which can determine the number of executions of a symbol effect (for example, temporary fluctuation) to be performed) Step S324), and an effect mode determining means (for example, step S372) capable of determining an effect mode for one or a plurality of start memories stored by the suspending means. Divides the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means into a predetermined unit with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means, and The specific effect determining means for determining a representation embodiment made during the design effect divided into the predetermined unit regardless of the unit of storage (e.g., step S370, etc.) and having a.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, the temporary change) in which the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding unit is determined. . That is, once a symbol effect is performed for each start memory stored by the holding means, one or more symbol effects are executed for each start memory stored by the holding means. Since the number is determined, it appears as though the variable display is performed for a plurality of start memories, although it is a variable display for one start memory. Moreover, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory, and a plurality of symbols determined for another start memory in which the variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one start memory. There is a possibility that an effect mode that extends over a part of the symbol effect may be determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode without being affected by one game result. Further, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the unit of the start memory, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Note that “variable display” means a series of displays from the start of the change display of the identification symbol for one start memory to the stop display, and the change of the identification symbol for one start memory. Even if the effect and the stop effect are repeated a plurality of times, the number of times of variable display is one.

  The “stop effect” of the identification symbol is a stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification symbol performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both effects (for example, final stop).

(3) The gaming machine according to the above (2), further comprising a holding effect control means for controlling an image relating to the starting memory stored in the holding means to be displayed in a predetermined display area, wherein the holding effect control The means controls at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed, so that an image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), since the image relating to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the number of symbol effects to be executed is determined for the start memory stored by the holding means. Accordingly, it is difficult to grasp the degree of progress from the start of the control for promoting the hit determination (that is, the remaining period in which the control for promoting the hit determination is executed). As a result, the player can be interested in an index effect that can infer the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is high.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 35, display effects performed in the specific gaming state can be made interesting, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[Appendix 36]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, there has been known a gaming machine in which a hit is determined and a symbol is fluctuated, and when a fluctuated display is stopped and displayed, a game result is displayed. If the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the hit determination is displayed, there is a display effect that expects that there is a possibility that a special game may be performed, so that the effect is enhanced (for example, JP-A-2006-246964).

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, since the display effect is performed only for the hit determination unit, if the display effect is not such that a special game can be expected to be performed, the game machine is changing. There is a possibility that the sense of expectation for the variable display of the symbol is lost and the interest is reduced at that time.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to prevent a player from being appropriately conscious of a display effect in a hit determination unit and suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 36 includes a display unit (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of an identification symbol based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and information about the variable display that has not been performed. Holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of start-up memory (for example, a random number value for determining a jackpot or a symbol for determining symbols); When the variable display is performed for one start memory stored in (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.), the effect time until the variable display for the next start memory after the one start memory is performed is used. Display control means for controlling the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol to be performed, and the variation effect of the identification symbol with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means. A symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324) capable of determining the number of symbol effects (for example, provisional fluctuations) in which the stop effect is performed, and one or more of the start memories stored by the holding means. A plurality of start memories are determined as a production section, and as a section production performed in the production section, a production mode determination unit (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining a production mode for the start memory included in the production section. The effect mode determination means determines whether or not the section effect is being executed, and when it is determined that the section effect is not being executed, the effect section is determined again and the effect section is determined. By determining an effect form of the section effect performed in the effect section, the section effect is repeatedly performed without interruption.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, one or a plurality of start memories out of the start memories stored by the holding means are determined as the effect section. Since such a section effect is repeatedly performed without interruption, it is possible to keep the player from being aware that the effect is a start memory unit effect, and to maintain a sense of expectation for a long period of time.

  It should be noted that the above-described manner in which the section effect is “repeated repeatedly without interruption” includes, of course, a manner in which the suspended start memory is performed without interruption as long as there is a reserved start memory. Even if, for example, the demonstration effect is executed in the middle, if the section effect is executed when the start memory is held thereafter, it is included in the above-mentioned "repeated without interruption". . Also, when there are a plurality of starting ports (for example, when there is a first starting port 5442 and a second starting port 440), when a game ball enters one of the starting ports (for example, the first starting port 5442). Does not perform the section effect, but also includes a mode in which the section effect is repeatedly performed without interruption when a game ball enters the other starting port (for example, the second starting port 440).

(2) In the gaming machine according to the above (1), the effect mode determining means performs the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means for a start memory included in the effect section. Having a section effect mode determining means (for example, a sub CPU 201) for determining an effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units and irrespective of the unit of the start memory. It is.

  According to the gaming machine of (2), the effect mode is determined regardless of the unit of the start memory, so that the effect mode can be determined so as to straddle a plurality of start memories. Further, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the unit of the start memory, and it is possible to provide a novel game in which it is difficult to make the player aware of the game result for each start memory.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (2), the section effect mode determination means includes a part of the symbol effect of the number of executions determined for one start memory included in the effect section, and the effect A part of the symbol effect of the execution number determined for the other start memories included in the section is configured to be able to be divided as a predetermined unit across a plurality of start memories.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), it is possible to determine the effect mode without being bound by one game result. Further, since the display effect can be executed without making the player aware of the variable display in the unit of the start memory, the range of the effect can be widened, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 36, it is possible to prevent the player from being conscious of the display effect in the hit determination unit, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, regarding the “expectation” described in each of the above supplementary notes, the expectation (reliability) for a predetermined internal state (that is, an advantageous state) such as a jackpot or a high-probability game state of each announcement effect is defined by each notice. The probability that the performance will be executed and the "big hit" or "high-probability game state" will be performed, the probability that each preview performance will be performed and the "big hit" or "high-probability game state" will be performed, and the It is a numerical value obtained by dividing by a sum of probabilities of a predetermined internal state (that is, a disadvantageous state) such as a probability of a “losing” and a “low-probability gaming state”. However, since the “expectation” may include a case where the expectation is 100% and a case where the expectation is 0%, there is a case where the above-mentioned division is not strictly satisfied (for example, when the effect is executed) In this case, it is not appropriate to divide 1 by 0 because it may include a case where the game state or a hit is reported definitely, and in this case, the expected degree includes the concept of 100%, 0%, or the presence / absence. That would be).

[Supplementary Note 37-1 to Supplementary Note 37-8]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit game is started and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. If the above-mentioned big hit is a probable big hit, after the big hit game ends, it is controlled to the high probability game state.

  As a gaming machine of this type, the state of a game element (structural element or control element) that affects the rate of ball entry into the entrance or the tendency to pay out a ball is determined by a game setting value input in advance by a predetermined setting input means. There is disclosed a pachinko gaming machine that sets a state corresponding to.

  According to such a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, so that it is not possible to adjust or maintain the configuration of the gaming board such as a gaming nail or an accessory. Even if this is the case, it is possible to prevent uniformity in payout tendency for each game store or each game console.

(First issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although the pitching tendency of each gaming table can be set arbitrarily, a structural element that affects the ball entry rate to the entrance and the balling tendency is determined. Alternatively, it is only possible to change the state of the control element according to the set value, and it cannot be said that the degree of contribution to the improvement of the game entertainment is necessarily large.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the state of a gaming element according to a setting while improving the interest. is there.

  In order to solve the first problem, a gaming machine according to attachment 37-1 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine described in Appendix 37-1
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, an operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330 and an operation of turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, six setting values from setting 1 to setting 6);
Lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of steps S3073, S3083, and S3118) capable of executing a lottery based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
Display means (for example, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74) for performing a variable display of a symbol (for example, a special symbol) in a predetermined variation pattern over a predetermined variation time;
A variation pattern determining unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3078) that determines a variation pattern performed by the display unit based on the result of the lottery;
A variation pattern table storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing a variation pattern table used for determining the variation pattern;
A symbol display control unit that performs the symbol variation display (for example, a special symbol variation display) over a variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination unit, and stops and displays in a manner indicating the result of the lottery. For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3093);
With
The variation pattern table storage means,
A fluctuation pattern table (for example, FIG. 3) that is defined so that the probability that the fluctuation time is determined to be a relatively short fluctuation pattern (for example, normal fluctuation B) increases as the set value set by the setting change control unit increases. The special symbol fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG. 170 is stored.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the higher the set value set by the setting change control means, the shorter the fluctuation time becomes. Therefore, the higher the set value, the more the number of lotteries per unit time, and hence the lottery result. Expectation is raised, and it becomes possible to improve game entertainment.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
A lottery number counting means (for example, main CPU 101) for counting the number of executions of the lottery from a specific time is further provided.
The variation pattern table storage means,
As the setting value set by the setting change control unit becomes higher, the probability of being determined as the short variation pattern becomes higher than the variation pattern table in another variation pattern table (for example, FIG. 172). And a special symbol change time determination table when the indicated change count is 1001 or more).
The variation pattern determination means,
When the number of executions of the lottery counted by the lottery number counting means satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, when a jackpot lottery of 1001 or more special symbols has been performed after the big hit game state has been completed), The other variation pattern table may be used to determine the variation pattern.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the number of lotteries executed by the lottery number counting means satisfies a predetermined condition, the variation pattern can be determined using another variation pattern table. Therefore, the higher the set value, the more the number of lotteries per unit time becomes remarkably increased, and when the number of executions of the lottery is a specific number of times of execution, the degree of expectation of the player is increased, and it is possible to improve the gaming interest. Note that the “predetermined condition” corresponds to, for example, a case where a big hit of a predetermined symbol or more (for example, 1001 times or more) is performed after the big hit gaming state ends, but is not limited thereto.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (2),
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Adequacy determining means (main CPU 101 performing steps S3072 and S3082) for determining whether or not the game information stored in the game information storage means is suitable or not at a predetermined timing;
When the game information stored in the game information storage unit is determined to be inappropriate by the appropriateness determination unit while the symbol change display is being performed, a lottery for the symbol change display is performed. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the processing of step S3722) for controlling the game so that the game cannot proceed even if the symbol is not stopped and displayed in a mode indicating the result;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when the symbol variation display (for example, the special symbol variation display) is performed, it is determined whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not. May be done. In this case, even if the symbols are not stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery for the variable display of the symbols, if it is determined that the game information is inappropriate in the determination of appropriateness / non-applicability, The game is not allowed to proceed. As a result, security can be ensured.

  In order to solve the first problem, a gaming machine according to attachment 37-2 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine described in Appendix 37-2
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, an operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330 and an operation of turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, six setting values from setting 1 to setting 6);
Lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of steps S3073, S3083, and S3118) capable of executing a lottery based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
A display effect (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) in which a symbol effect by a predetermined symbol (for example, a decorative symbol fluctuating effect) is performed, and a result of the lottery can be indicated by a stop mode of the symbol;
A stop mode determining unit (for example, a sub CPU 201 capable of executing the process of step S3205) that determines a stop mode of the symbol that can be shown on the display unit based on a result of the lottery;
A stop mode table storage unit (for example, the program ROM 202) that stores a stop mode table (for example, a decorative symbol determination table in FIG. 171) used for determining the symbol stop mode by the stop mode determining unit;
Symbol effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 201 capable of executing the process of step S3207) for controlling the symbols to be stopped in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determining means;
When the symbol is displayed in a mode (for example, a first mode, a second mode, or a specific mode) indicating that the result of the lottery is a specific result (for example, a big hit), a plurality of benefits that are advantageous to the player (For example, the main CPU 101 executing the big hit game control in FIG. 10) for giving any profit among (for example, 4R normal big hit, 4R certain big hit, 10R normal big hit, 10R certain big hit),
With
The profit providing means,
The symbol is displayed in a stop mode indicating that the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), and when the stop mode is a specific stop mode (for example, a specific mode), the plurality of profits are displayed. Among them, it is configured to be able to give a specific profit having a relatively high degree of advantage (for example, 10R probability change big hit),
The stop mode determining means includes:
When the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), as the set value set by the setting change control unit increases, the probability that the symbol stop mode is stopped in the specific stop mode is increased. The stop mode of the symbol can be determined so as to be raised.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), as the set value set by the setting change control means becomes higher, the symbol stop mode is stopped in a specific stop mode having a relatively high advantage among a plurality of profits. It is possible to increase the probability that the game will be played, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The stop mode determining means includes:
When the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), the set value set by the setting change control unit is the same, regardless of the set value, while the probability that the specific profit is given is the same. , The symbol stop mode is determined so that the probability of the symbol stop mode being stopped in the specific stop mode is increased.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), the setting change is performed while the probability that the specific profit is given is the same regardless of the setting. As the set value set by the control means becomes higher, the probability of stopping in the specific stop mode is increased, so that it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Adequacy determining means (main CPU 101 performing steps S3072 and S3082) for determining whether or not the game information stored in the game information storage means is suitable or not at a predetermined timing;
If the game information stored in the game information storage unit is determined to be inappropriate by the appropriateness determination unit while the symbol effect is being performed, the result of the lottery is the specific result. In addition, even if the stop mode of the symbol is determined to be stopped in the specific stop mode by the stop mode determination unit, the game control unit (for example, executing the processing of step S3722) so as not to allow the game to proceed. Main CPU 101),
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when a symbol effect (for example, a decorative symbol fluctuating effect) is being performed, the suitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined. Sometimes. In this case, even if it is determined that the result of the lottery is a specific result and the pattern stop mode is determined to be stopped in the specific stop mode, it is inappropriate in determining whether the game information is appropriate or inappropriate. When it is determined that the game is not proceeded. As a result, security can be ensured.

  In order to solve the first problem, a gaming machine according to attachment 37-3 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine described in Supplementary Note 37-3 is
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, an operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330 and an operation of turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, six setting values from setting 1 to setting 6);
Lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of steps S3073, S3083, and S3118, including both the big hit lottery and the main symbol determination lottery) which can execute the lottery based on the establishment of the predetermined condition;
Lottery table storage means for storing a lottery table used for the lottery (for example, a table showing a selection rate of a main symbol when the result of the special symbol big hit determination in FIG. 173 or 174 is a big hit);
Display means (for example, a first special symbol display unit 73 and a second special symbol display unit 74) for performing at least a variable display of symbols,
Symbol display control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3093) for performing a variable display of the symbol and stopping and displaying the symbol in a manner indicating the result of the lottery;
The symbol is displayed in a mode (for example, Toku-zu 1-1 to Toku-zu 1-8, Toku-zu 2-1 to Toku-zu 2-4) indicating that the result of the lottery is a specific result (for example, a big hit). When displayed, a profit providing means (for example, as shown in FIG. 10) that provides any one of a plurality of profits (for example, 4R normal big hit, 4R certain big hit, 10R normal big hit, 10R certain big hit) that are advantageous to the player. A main CPU 101 for executing a jackpot game control);
With
The lottery table storage means,
A plurality of lottery tables are stored in which a lottery probability for a specific profit having a relatively high degree of advantage (for example, 10R probability change big hit) among the plurality of profits differs according to a set value,
The lottery means,
The lottery is configured to be able to be performed using a lottery table corresponding to a set value set by the setting change control means.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), since the lottery is performed using a plurality of lottery tables in which the lottery probability for the specific profit having a relatively high advantage is different according to the set value, the setting change control means sets the lottery. It is possible to vary the degree of profit given to the player according to the set value that has been set, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The profit providing means,
As the specific profit, at least a special game state advantageous to the player and a high-probability game state in which the profit is provided with a relatively high probability in the game state after the completion of the special game state are provided. And
The lottery table storage means,
It stores a plurality of tables in which the probability of being controlled to the high-probability gaming state differs according to a set value.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the probability of being controlled to the high-probability gaming state varies depending on the set value, so that it is possible to improve the gaming interest.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The profit providing means,
As the specific profit, a specific game state in which the lottery is promoted (for example, a time reduction game state) is further provided,
The lottery table storage means,
A plurality of tables are stored in which the probability of being controlled to the specific game state is different depending on a set value.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the probability of being controlled to the specific gaming state is different depending on the set value, so that it is possible to improve the gaming interest.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3),
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Adequacy determining means (main CPU 101 performing steps S3072 and S3082) for determining whether or not the game information stored in the game information storage means is suitable or not at a predetermined timing;
When the symbol variation display is being performed, if the game information stored in the game information storage unit is determined to be inappropriate by the appropriateness determination unit, the lottery for the symbol variation display is determined. Even if the result is a result of giving the specific profit, a game control means (for example, main CPU101 executing the processing of step S3722) for controlling the game so as not to proceed,
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of (4), when the symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the suitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if the result of the lottery relating to the variable display of the symbols is the result of giving the specific profit, the game cannot be advanced. As a result, security can be ensured.

  In order to solve the first problem, a gaming machine according to attachment 37-4 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 37-4
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, an operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330 and an operation of turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, six setting values from setting 1 to setting 6);
A plurality of starting ports including a first starting port and a second starting port provided in the game area;
Special lottery means for performing a special lottery in a different lottery mode based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of a game ball into each of the plurality of starting ports (for example, a main lottery capable of executing the processing of steps S3073, S3083, and S3118) CPU 101);
Special game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the big hit game control of FIG. 10) capable of executing a special game that operates based on the result of the special lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit);
Based on the result of the special lottery being a specific result (for example, a small hit), a specific game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing a specific game having a lower degree of advantage than the special game;
With
The special lottery means,
In performing the special lottery based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of a game ball into the starting port, the special lottery is performed in accordance with a setting value set by the setting change control unit. Can be done differently,
The specific game execution means,
Irrespective of the set value set by the setting change control means, a higher frequency is obtained when a game ball enters the second starting port than when a game ball enters the first starting port. The specific game is configured to be executable.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the probability of a specific result can be different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means, and regardless of the set value set by the setting change control means, The specific game is executed more frequently when the game ball enters the second starting port than when the game ball enters the first starting port. That is, when a game ball is won in the second starting port, it is possible to vary the execution frequency of the specific game in accordance with the set value on the assumption that the specific game is executed at a high frequency. It is possible to improve interest.

  Note that "the specific game can be executed more frequently when a game ball enters the second starting port than when a game ball enters the first starting port". When a game ball enters the starting port of the game ball, a hit determination (including a probability of 0) for a specific result is performed, but the probability that the specific result is obtained in the hit determination is that the game ball has entered the second starting port. This includes not only a mode lower than the above but also a mode in which a hit determination situation for a specific result is not performed when a game ball enters the first starting port.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
A normal starting port (for example, a passing gate 49) provided in the game area,
A normal lottery means for performing a normal lottery based on the entry (for example, passing) of a game ball into the normal starting port (for example, a main CPU 101 for performing a normal hit determination in the normal game of FIG. 10);
Based on the result of the ordinary lottery being a predetermined result (for example, a normal hit), a starting variable control means (for example, , Main CPU 101),
The first special symbol is fluctuated and displayed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port (first starting port 420), and the game ball is moved to the second starting port (first starting port 440). Special symbol variation display control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variation display of the second special symbol based on the approach;
The first game state (for example, a normal game in which both the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are set to OFF) so long that the time (for example, an average time of 1000 seconds) of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol affects the progress of the game. State), or a second game state (for example, shorter than the variable display time (for example, average time 1 sec) of the second special symbol is shorter than the time (for example, average time 10 sec) for the variable display of the first special symbol. A game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) controllable to an advantageous game state in which the probable change flag is set to ON and the time saving flag is set to OFF;
Is further provided.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), in the second gaming state, the variation display of the second special symbol is shorter than the variation display time of the first special symbol, so that the specific game is executed with high frequency. In addition, it is possible to make the execution frequency of the specific game different according to the set value without increasing the execution frequency of the ordinary lottery.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Display means for displaying the result of the special lottery (for example, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74);
Adequacy determining means (main CPU 101 performing steps S3072 and S3082) for determining whether or not the game information stored in the game information storage means is suitable or not at a predetermined timing;
The game information stored in the game information storage means by the adequacy determination means is inappropriate before the result of the special lottery is displayed although the game ball has entered the start port (for example, the second start port). Is determined, the game cannot be advanced without executing the specific game by the specific game execution means even if the result of the special lottery (for example, the second special lottery) is the specific result. Game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the process of step S3722),
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), even if a game ball enters a starting port (for example, a second starting port), a special lottery performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port (for example, Before the result of the second special lottery is shown (for example, during the special symbol change display), the suitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if the result of the special lottery (for example, the second special lottery) performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port (for example, the second starting port) is a specific result (for example, a small hit). Even if the game information is determined to be inappropriate in the determination of suitability or inappropriateness, the game cannot be advanced before the specific game (for example, the small hit game) is executed. As a result, security can be ensured.

  In order to solve the first problem, a gaming machine according to attachment 37-5 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine described in Supplementary Note 37-5:
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, an operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330 and an operation of turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, six setting values from setting 1 to setting 6);
A starting port provided in the game area,
Special lottery means for performing a special lottery based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of a game ball into the starting port,
First special game execution means capable of executing a first special game that operates based on the result of the special lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit);
A normal starting port (for example, a passing gate 49) provided in the game area,
A normal lottery means for performing a normal lottery based on the entry (for example, passing) of a game ball into the normal starting port (for example, a main CPU 101 for performing a normal hit determination in the normal game of FIG. 10);
Based on the result of the ordinary lottery being a predetermined result (for example, a normal hit), a starting variable control means (for example, , Main CPU 101),
Based on the result of the special lottery performed based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of a game ball into the starting port being a specific result (for example, a small hit), a specific area where a specific port is provided Specific area variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of operating a predetermined movable piece so that a game ball can easily enter (for example, receive) the game ball;
A second special game execution means capable of executing a second special game that operates based on a game ball being received in the specific port provided in the specific area;
With
The specific area variable control means,
The predetermined movable piece is configured to be able to be operated so that the ease of entry of the game ball into the specific area may be different according to the set value set by the setting change control means. Features.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), since the probability of a specific result is made different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means, a predetermined value is set according to the set value. The operation frequency of the movable piece is different, and the opportunity to give the privilege can be made different according to the set value, so that the entertainment of the game can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
Actuation of the predetermined movable piece by the specific area variable control means,
The ease of entry (e.g., acceptance) of a game ball into the starting port is changed according to the set value set by the setting change control means (e.g., the probability of a normal hit is changed, By making the execution frequency of the special lottery different according to the set value, the ease of entry of the game ball into the specific area is reduced by the set value. It is characterized in that it is performed in such a manner that it can be different according to

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the ease of entry of the game ball into the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) can be different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. Since the lottery is performed, the amount of the privilege given based on the entry of the game ball into the specific area will be different depending on the set value set, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
Actuation of the predetermined movable piece by the specific area variable control means,
By making the probability of the specific result (for example, a small hit) in the special lottery different according to the set value set by the setting change control means, ease of entry of the game ball into the specific area is improved. Is performed in such a manner as to be able to vary depending on the set value.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), the ease of entry of the game ball into the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) can be different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. Since the lottery is performed, the amount of the privilege given based on the entry of the game ball into the specific area is different depending on the set value set, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (3),
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Display means for displaying the result of the special lottery (for example, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74);
Adequacy determining means (main CPU 101 performing steps S3072 and S3082) for determining whether or not the game information stored in the game information storage means is suitable or not at a predetermined timing;
Before the result of the special lottery is displayed although the game ball has entered the starting port, if the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be inappropriate by the appropriateness determination means, Even if the result of the special lottery is a specific result, game control means for controlling the specific area variable control means to prevent the game from proceeding without operating the predetermined movable piece (for example, the processing in step S3722 A main CPU 101 for execution);
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (4), even if the game ball enters the starting port, before the result of the special lottery performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port is displayed (for example, the special symbol) Of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined to be appropriate or inappropriate. In this case, even if the result of the special lottery performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening is a specific result, when it is determined that the game information is inappropriate in the determination of suitability or inappropriateness of the game information Is configured so that a game cannot be advanced before a predetermined movable piece operates. As a result, security can be ensured.

  In order to solve the first problem, a gaming machine according to attachment 37-6 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine described in Supplementary Note 37-6 is:
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, an operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330 and an operation of turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, six setting values from setting 1 to setting 6);
Lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of steps S3073, S3083, and S3118) capable of executing a lottery based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
Based on the result of the lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit), a special game state control means (for example, executing the big hit game control of FIG. 10) which can be controlled to a special game state (for example, a big hit game state). Main CPU 101);
Game state control means capable of controlling the game state after the end of the special game state to an advantageous game state (for example, a high-probability game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (for example, a certain A main CPU 101 that proceeds with the game after setting a flag),
After being controlled to the special game state, a counting means (for example, a main unit) that counts the number of times (for example, the number of loops) in which the special game state and the advantageous game state are repeated without being controlled to the normal game state. CPU 101);
With
The game state control means,
When the result of the lottery in the advantageous gaming state is the special result, the special gaming state is configured to be controllable,
When the number of times counted by the counting means reaches a specified number, the game state after the end of the special game state is controlled to the normal game state,
The prescribed number of times,
The apparatus is characterized in that it can be changed according to the set value set by the setting change control means.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the special game state and the advantageous game state can be repeated up to a specified number of times, and the specified number of times differs according to the set value set by the setting change control means. It is possible to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
A specified number determining means for determining the specified number by lottery (for example, a main CPU 101 for performing a limiter number lottery);
The prescribed number of times determining means,
It is characterized in that the lottery for determining the specified number of times is performed such that the expected value for the specified number of times differs according to the set value set by the setting change control means.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the specified number of times that the special game state and the advantageous game state can be repeated is determined by lottery, and the expected value for the specified number of times is set by the setting change control means. Therefore, it is possible to improve game entertainment.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Adequacy determining means (main CPU 101 performing steps S3072 and S3082) for determining whether or not the game information stored in the game information storage means is suitable or not at a predetermined timing;
If the game information stored in the game information storage unit is determined to be inappropriate by the suitability determination unit, the counting unit may perform the counting even if the number counted by the counting unit is less than the specified number. A game control means for controlling the game to be unable to proceed without the number of times counted by the specified number of times reaching the specified number of times (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the processing of step S3722);
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the number of times the special game state and the advantageous game state are repeated (ie, the number of loops) without being controlled to the normal game state has not reached the specified number (ie, during the loop). ), It may be determined whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not. In this case, even if the game is in a loop, if it is determined that the game information is inappropriate in the determination of suitability / inappropriateness, the game cannot be advanced without reaching the specified number of loops. I have. As a result, security can be ensured.

  In order to solve the first problem, a gaming machine according to attachment 37-7 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 37-7 is:
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, an operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330 and an operation of turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, six setting values from setting 1 to setting 6);
Lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3073, step S3083, and step S3118) capable of executing a lottery based on establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, acceptance of a game ball into the first starting port 440). ,
Game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game, including controlling the special game state based on the result of the lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit) (for example, the big hit game control of FIG. 10). Main CPU 101 to execute),
Effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 201 (display control circuit 204)) capable of at least executing an opening effect performed at the start of the special game state and an ending effect performed at the end of the special game state;
With
The lottery means,
While performing the lottery in a mode where the higher the set value set by the setting change control means the higher the advantage,
The effect control means,
The opening effect and the ending effect are performed such that at least one of the time required for the opening effect and the time required for the ending effect can be longer as the setting value set by the setting change control unit becomes higher. It is characterized by being constituted.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), while the set value is higher, the lottery is performed in a mode in which the advantage is higher, and at least one of the time required for the opening effect and the time required for the ending effect. Can be longer as the set value is higher. Therefore, in the high setting, it is possible to suppress the prize balls paid out per unit time while improving the entertainment interest of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
Symbol variation display control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3093) for performing symbol variation display based on the result of the lottery;
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Adequacy determining means (main CPU 101 performing steps S3072 and S3082) for determining whether or not the game information stored in the game information storage means is suitable or not at a predetermined timing;
Further comprising
The lottery means,
Regardless of whether or not it is controlled to the special game state, it is possible to extract a random number based on winning of a game ball to the starting port,
The adequacy determining means,
Even when it is controlled to the special game state, it is configured to be able to determine the suitability of the game information,
The game control means,
When the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, a game progress non-permission for controlling so that the game cannot proceed even if the game is controlled to the special game state. (For example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S3722).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the discrimination between the game information and the suitability may be executed even when the game machine is controlled to the special game state. In such a case, if it is determined that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the game cannot proceed even if the game is controlled to the special game state, so security is ensured. In addition, it is possible to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

  In order to solve the first problem, a gaming machine according to attachment 37-8 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 37-8
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, an operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330 and an operation of turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, six setting values from setting 1 to setting 6);
A plurality of entrances having at least a first entrance (e.g., a continuously operated left gate 3100) and a second entrance (e.g., a continuously operated right gate 3110);
An entry permitting unit (for example, a sorting device 1120) configured to allow a game ball to enter any of the plurality of entrances;
Different profits are obtained when a game ball enters the first entrance and when a game ball enters the second entrance (for example, if the number of rounds is different, if there is a starting port below the entrance, lottery will be performed. Profit giving means (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the big hit game control in FIG. 10) capable of giving the player different execution or not);
With
The approach permitting means,
Out of the first entrance and the second entrance, the ease of entry of the game ball may be different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. I do.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), there is a possibility that the profit given to the player differs when the game ball enters the first entrance and when the game ball enters the second entrance. Thus, the ease of entry of the game ball between the first entrance and the second entrance can be varied according to the set value set by the setting change control means. In addition, as to which of the first entrance and the second entrance the game ball enters, the state of the game element according to the setting can be aimed at by the player because the player can aim at the game entrance while improving the game interest. Can be suitably changed.

  Note that “a different profit can be given to a player when a game ball enters the first entrance and when a game ball enters the second entrance”. In addition to the case where the number of rounds in the jackpot game state differs between when the ball enters and when the game ball enters the second entrance, one entrance is a starting port which is a lottery trigger and the other entrance is a lottery This corresponds to a case where the winning opening is not a trigger.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
Starting ports (for example, a first starting port 5442, a second starting port 440) provided in the game area;
Lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing steps S3073, S3083, and S3118) for performing a lottery based on a game ball being received at the starting port;
Display means (for example, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74) for performing variable display of symbols based on the result of the lottery;
Game information relating to the progress of the game including information on the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result on the hold storage and the variable display, the set value) Game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) capable of storing
An appropriateness determining unit (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S3072 and S3082) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage unit is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing;
If the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the player is notified even if a game ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the processing of step S3722) for controlling the game so as not to proceed without giving a profit;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), during the fluctuation display of the symbol, when the game ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance, but the profit has not been given yet, it is stored in the game information storage means. Appropriateness / inappropriateness of the game information is determined in some cases. In this case, if it is determined that the game information is inappropriate in the determination of suitability or inappropriateness of the game information despite the possibility that the profit may be given to the player, the game proceeds without giving the player a benefit. It is configured so that it cannot be done. As a result, security can be ensured.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (2),
Based on the fact that the result of the lottery is a special result, at least the first entry port and the second entry port are provided with entry validating means for validating the entry of a game ball (for example, a main device for operating a condition device) CPU 101).
The profit providing means,
When a game ball enters the first entrance, a predetermined profit (for example, an 8R jackpot game state) can be given to the player,
When a game ball enters the second entrance, a specific profit (for example, a 16R big hit game state) having a profit degree larger than the predetermined profit can be given to the player.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), the player plays the game aiming at the second entrance where a specific profit with a higher profit may be given, and it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game. It becomes.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 37-1 to Supplementary Note 37-8 of the present invention having the above-described configuration, it is possible to suitably change the state of the game element according to the setting while improving the interest.

[Appendix 38]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit game is started and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. If the above-mentioned big hit is a probable big hit, after the big hit game ends, it is controlled to the high probability game state.

  As a gaming machine of this type, the state of a game element (structural element or control element) that affects the rate of ball entry into the entrance or the tendency to pay out a ball is determined by a game setting value input in advance by a predetermined setting input means. There is disclosed a pachinko gaming machine that sets a state corresponding to.

  According to such a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, so that it is not possible to adjust or maintain the configuration of the gaming board such as a gaming nail or an accessory. Even if this is the case, it is possible to prevent uniformity in payout tendency for each game store or each game console.

(Second task)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, for example, anomalies may occur in game setting values and the like, and security is ensured. Is hard to say.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of changing a state of a gaming element according to a setting while improving security.

  In order to solve the second problem, a gaming machine according to attachment 38 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 38
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, an operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330 and an operation of turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, six setting values from setting 1 to setting 6);
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103))
Lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3073, step S3083, and step S3118) for performing a lottery based on establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, acceptance of a game ball to the first starting port 440);
Symbol variation display control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3093) for performing symbol variation display based on the result of the lottery;
An adequacy determining means (e.g., the main CPU 101 performing the processing of steps S3072 and S3082) for determining whether or not the game information is appropriate at a predetermined timing (e.g., timing of receiving a game ball into the first starting port 440); ,
When the symbol variation display is being performed, if the game information stored in the game information is determined to be inappropriate by the appropriateness determination unit, the symbol variation display is performed. Game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the processing of step S3722) for controlling the game so that the game cannot proceed;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), it may be determined whether the game information is appropriate or inappropriate when the symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In such a case, if it is determined that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the progress of the game is not permitted even if the symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. It is possible to improve.

  According to the gaming machine with the above configuration of the present invention, it is possible to change the state of the gaming element according to the setting while improving security.

[Appendix 39]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit game is started and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. If the above-mentioned big hit is a probable big hit, after the big hit game ends, it is controlled to the high probability game state.

  As a gaming machine of this type, the state of a game element (structural element or control element) that affects the rate of ball entry into the entrance or the tendency to pay out a ball is determined by a game setting value input in advance by a predetermined setting input means. There is disclosed a pachinko gaming machine that sets a state corresponding to.

  According to such a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, so that it is not possible to adjust or maintain the configuration of the gaming board such as a gaming nail or an accessory. Even if this is the case, it is possible to prevent uniformity in payout tendency for each game store or each game console.

(Third task)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming machine, changing the payout tendency according to the set value does not necessarily require a light design load. Hard to say.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing a state of a gaming element according to a setting while reducing a design load. It is in.

  In order to solve the third problem, a gaming machine according to attachment 39 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 39
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, an operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330 and an operation of turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, six setting values from setting 1 to setting 6);
Random number generating means for generating a random number with a predetermined width (for example, a main CPU 101 that generates a random number value by executing a program);
Random number extracting means for extracting a random number based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, main CPU 101 executing the process of step S3073);
A table storage means (for example, main RAM 103) for storing a lottery table (for example, a big hit random number determination table) for defining a total random number (for example, a range of big hit determination random numbers) and a specific random number (for example, big hit determination value data); ,
A lottery is performed using the random number extracted by the random number extracting means (for example, the process of step S3118), and when the extracted random number is a specific random number (for example, big hit determination value data), the game is controlled to a special game state. Possible special game state control means;
With
The table storage means,
A lottery table in which at least the number of the total random numbers is different according to the setting value set by the setting change control means is stored,
The random number generating means,
The present invention is characterized in that a total number of random numbers specified in the lottery table is generated in accordance with a set value set by the setting change control means.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), by changing the denominator (the range of the random number for jackpot determination) having a larger number of digits than the numerator (the number of jackpot determination value data), the probability of being controlled to the special game state (ie, Jackpot probability), it is possible to set the jackpot probability finer for each set value compared to a method in which the range of the jackpot determination random number is fixed and the number of jackpot determination value data is changed according to the set value. It becomes possible.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
Symbol variation display control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3093) for performing symbol variation display based on the result of the lottery;
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
When a random number is extracted based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, the appropriateness determining unit (step S1) determines whether or not the total random number generated by the random number generating unit is appropriate or not by the time the variable display of the symbol is started. S3072, the main CPU 101 which performs the processing of step S3082),
When the total random number generated by the random number generating means is determined to be inappropriate by the appropriateness determining means, a game control means (for example, a main CPU 101 executing the processing of step S3722) for controlling the game so as not to proceed;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the total random number generated by the random number generating means is determined to be inappropriate, the game is not allowed to proceed. It is possible to finely set the big hit probability for each.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention having the above-mentioned configuration, it is possible to preferably change the state of the gaming element according to the setting while reducing the design load.

[Supplementary Note 40 and Supplementary Note 41]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit game is started and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. If the above-mentioned big hit is a probable big hit, after the big hit game ends, it is controlled to the high probability game state.

  As a gaming machine of this type, the state of a game element (structural element or control element) that affects the rate of ball entry into the entrance or the tendency to pay out a ball is determined by a game setting value input in advance by a predetermined setting input means. There is disclosed a pachinko gaming machine that sets a state corresponding to.

  According to such a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, so that it is not possible to adjust or maintain the configuration of the gaming board such as a gaming nail or an accessory. Even if this is the case, it is possible to prevent uniformity in payout tendency for each game store or each game console.

(Fourth task)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, while it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each game console, the player becomes skeptical by being able to arbitrarily set the payout tendency. , There is a possibility that the interest may decrease.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably suppressing a decrease in interest while changing the state of a gaming element according to a setting. It is in.

  In order to solve the fourth problem, a gaming machine according to attachment 40 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 40
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, an operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330 and an operation of turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, six setting values from setting 1 to setting 6);
A plurality of winning ports (for example, a first starting port 5442, a second starting port 440, and general winning ports 53 to 56) provided in the game area and including a starting port;
A privilege granting unit (for example, a payout device 350) for granting a privilege (for example, a prize ball) based on a game ball being received in any of the plurality of winning ports;
Lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3073, step S3083, step S3118) which can execute the lottery based on the game ball being received in the starting port;
A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) on which at least a symbol fluctuation effect performed based on the result of the lottery is performed;
When a fluctuation effect of the symbol is being performed in a specific mode (for example, a reach effect) indicating that the result of the lottery may be a specific result, a specific winning opening of the plurality of winning openings Setting suggestion means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of suggesting setting value information on the setting value set by the setting change control means based on the game ball being received in
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the setting change control is performed based on the fact that the gaming ball is received in the specific winning opening when the symbol fluctuating effect is performed in the specific mode (for example, the reach effect). Since there is a possibility that the setting value information about the setting value set by the means may be suggested, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player becomes suspicious. In addition, when the symbol fluctuation effect is performed in a specific mode, the player may stop firing the game ball, but such a situation can be suppressed.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
A specified number determining means for determining the specified number by lottery (for example, a main CPU 101 for performing a limiter number lottery);
A specific mode determination unit (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S3078) that determines whether to perform the symbol fluctuating effect in the specific mode (for example, the reach effect);
A specific winning opening determining means for randomly determining any of the plurality of winning openings as the specific winning opening when it is determined by the specific aspect determining means that the symbol variation effect is to be performed in the specific mode; (For example, the main CPU 101);
Is further provided.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the specific winning opening is randomly determined to be one of the plurality of winning openings instead of the fixed winning opening, so that it is possible to enhance the gaming interest. It is preferable that the specific winning opening determined at random is kept confidential without being disclosed. As a result, the player has an interest in which winning opening should be aimed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Adequacy determining means (main CPU 101 performing steps S3072 and S3082) for determining whether or not the game information stored in the game information storage means is suitable or not at a predetermined timing;
If the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the setting change control means sets the game even if a game ball is received in the specific winning opening. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the processing of step S3722) for controlling the game so as not to proceed without suggesting the set value information on the set value;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when the fluctuation effect of the symbol is performed, or when the game ball is received in the specific winning opening but the set value information is not suggested yet, the game information storage is performed. Suitability or inadequacy of the game information stored in the means may be determined. In this case, even if the setting value information may be suggested, if it is determined that the game information is inappropriate in the determination of suitability / inappropriateness, the setting value set by the setting change control unit is determined. The game cannot be advanced without suggesting the set value information. As a result, security can be ensured.

  In order to solve the fourth problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to attachment 41 having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 41
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, an operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330 and an operation of turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, six setting values from setting 1 to setting 6);
Starting ports (for example, a first starting port 5442, a second starting port 440) provided in the game area;
Lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing steps S3073, S3083, and S3118) for performing a lottery based on a game ball being received at the starting port;
Display means (for example, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74) for performing variable display of symbols based on the result of the lottery;
Game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game, including controlling the special game state based on the result of the lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit) (for example, the big hit game control of FIG. 10). Main CPU 101 to execute),
Setting of the set value set by the setting change control means based on satisfying a predetermined condition relating to acceptance of a game ball to the starting port (for example, that an overflow point has reached a predetermined point, etc.) Setting suggestion means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of suggesting value information;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of (1), the current set value (the set value set by the setting change control means) is determined based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition relating to the acceptance of the game ball to the starting port. Since the setting value information can be suggested, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player becomes suspicious. Further, the execution of the game is promoted so that the game ball is received in the starting port. In addition, "the predetermined conditions related to the acceptance of the game ball in the starting port are satisfied" means, for example, that although the game ball was received in the starting port, the holding upper limit was reached, It is assumed that there is no such case, or that the game ball has been accepted at the starting port and the point has reached the predetermined point when the point was not held due to the upper limit of holding due to the holding upper limit, etc. But not limited to these.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Adequacy determining means (main CPU 101 performing steps S3072 and S3082) for determining whether or not the game information stored in the game information storage means is suitable or not at a predetermined timing;
Further comprising
The game control means,
If the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the predetermined condition may be satisfied when a game ball is received in the starting port ( For example, even if the overflow point reaches a predetermined point, etc., a game progress non-permission means (for example, a game progress non-permission means (e.g., a game progress non-permission means) that controls the game to not proceed without suggesting the set value information on the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, , And a main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S3722.

  According to the gaming machine of (2), when the symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the suitability or inappropriateness of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if there is a possibility that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball is received at the starting port, in the determination of the suitability or inappropriateness of the game information performed by the reception of the game ball at the starting port. When it is determined that the game is inappropriate, the game cannot proceed without suggesting the set value information about the set value set by the setting change control means. As a result, security can be ensured.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 40 and the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 41 of the present invention having the above-described configuration, it is possible to appropriately suppress a decrease in interest while changing the state of the game element according to the setting.

[Appendix 42]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit game is started and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. If the above-mentioned big hit is a probable big hit, after the big hit game ends, it is controlled to the high probability game state.

  As a gaming machine of this type, the state of a game element (structural element or control element) that affects the rate of ball entry into the entrance or the tendency to pay out a ball is determined by a game setting value input in advance by a predetermined setting input means. There is disclosed a pachinko gaming machine that sets a state corresponding to.

  According to such a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, so that it is not possible to adjust or maintain the configuration of the gaming board such as a gaming nail or an accessory. Even if this is the case, it is possible to prevent uniformity in payout tendency for each game store or each game console.

(Fifth subject)
However, according to the gaming machine described in JP-A-2005-065977, although the payout tendency can be set arbitrarily for each gaming machine, payout management may not be easy.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of easily managing payouts.

  In order to solve the fifth problem, a gaming machine according to attachment 42 having the following structure is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 42
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, an operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330 and an operation of turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, six setting values from setting 1 to setting 6);
Game control means (for example, main CPU 101) for controlling the progress of the game based on the set value set by the setting change control means;
Payout means (for example, a payout device 350) for paying out game media based on winnings as a result of the game;
Special game execution means (for example, such as, A main CPU 101 for executing the jackpot game control in FIG. 10);
A data totaling means (for example, a payout / launch control circuit 300) capable of totalizing data relating to the game medium paid out by the payout means;
A data display control unit (main CPU 101) for displaying data aggregated by the data aggregation unit in a predetermined display area (performance display monitor 334);
With
The data aggregation means includes:
All history totaling means for totalizing the data based on all game histories,
A set value-based history tally unit that totals the data based on the game history for each set value,
The data display control means,
A gaming machine characterized by being able to display data totalized by the all history totaling means and / or data totalized by the set value-specific history totaling means.
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), one or both of the data totaled by the total history totaling means and the data totaled by the set value-specific history totaling means can be displayed. Ball management can be performed easily.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention having the above-mentioned configuration, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of easily managing payouts.

[Supplementary Note 43]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit game is started and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. If the above-mentioned big hit is a probable big hit, after the big hit game ends, it is controlled to the high probability game state.

  As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine whose specifications can be changed is disclosed (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010833).

  According to such a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010833, the specifications of the gaming machine can be easily changed, and thus the exchange of storage means for storing effect data necessary for executing the effect is performed. Becomes unnecessary, and waste can be eliminated.

(Sixth task)
However, according to the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010833, although it is possible to eliminate waste, there is a possibility that simply changing the specifications may lack interest.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest.

In order to solve the sixth problem, a gaming machine according to attachment 43 having the following configuration is provided.
(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 43
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, an operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330 and an operation of turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), the game performance is determined in accordance with the set value. A setting change control unit (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, six setting values of setting 1 to setting 6) different from each other;
A game control means (for example, main CPU 101) for controlling the progress of the game in a game based on the set value set by the setting change control means;
With
The game control means,
Lottery means capable of executing a lottery (for example, processing of step S3073, step S3083, step S3118) based on a game property according to the set value set by the setting change control means;
A special game execution means capable of executing a special game (for example, a big hit game control in FIG. 10) in which a privilege according to a set value set by the setting change control means is provided based on a result of the lottery;
At least.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), it is possible to execute a game with different game properties based on the set value set by the setting change control means on one gaming machine, and the game machine manager or the like can execute the game. It is possible to give a variety of ways of utilizing the gaming machine.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The game control means,
When the lottery is set to the first set value among the plurality of set values, in the high probability state in which the lottery is performed with a relatively high probability, if the lottery is not won within a predetermined period, the high probability state is set. A first game control means (for example, main CPU 101) for executing a game under a game property (for example, ST specification) for ending the game,
When the plurality of set values are set to the second set value, in the high probability state in which the lottery is performed with a relatively high probability, the high probability state does not end until the lottery is won. A second game controller (for example, the main CPU 101) that executes a game under continuous game characteristics (for example, a probable change loop specification);
At least.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), although both the game property by the first game control means and the game property by the second game control means are controlled to the high-probability game state, the first game control means The high-probability game state may be terminated midway without continuing to the next big hit game state in the game property of the second game control means, and the high-probability game state is controlled to the next special game state in the game property by the second game control means. It is greatly different in that it is continuously executed until In this way, it is possible to switch between two seemingly similar but substantially different game characteristics so that the manager of the gaming machine can use the pachinko gaming machine with a wider range. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving entertainment.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention having the above-mentioned configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest.

[Appendix 44 to Appendix 56]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and variably displays a symbol based on a result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the gaming state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

  In this type of gaming machine, any one of a plurality of setting values indicating a probability relating to a player's advantage or disadvantage in a game, such as a probability that the result of the lottery is a specific result, is set. There has been known a gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on a set value (for example, see paragraph [0063] of JP-A-2011-206588). The above set values can be set by an authorized person such as a gaming machine manager of a hall, for example.

(Seventh task)
However, in a gaming machine in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set values, for example, unauthorized change of the set values or confirmation of the set values is performed by an unauthorized person, There is a concern that various problems may occur, such as changes in

  Further, since the above set values are important elements for both the hall and the player, they must be strictly managed by an authorized person, and the management requires convenience.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a highly convenient gaming machine capable of coping with a problem relating to a set value.

  In order to solve the seventh problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to attachment 44 configured as follows.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 44
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values;
Predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit;
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value;
When power is turned on, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means,
With
The first control means includes:
A setting state control means for controlling to a setting state in which the one set value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on at least while the setting operation means is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state). (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024 or step S3026);
A first storage unit (for example, a main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the set value information on the one set value;
Transmission means capable of transmitting various information to the second control means, and capable of transmitting at least setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed. , A command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing in step S3055).
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting unit;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information for receiving an initialization command or a power-off recovery command). A second storage unit (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing
Display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) in which the history information is displayed based on a predetermined operation.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), by performing a predetermined operation, the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information can be browsed. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that an unauthorized third party has changed or confirmed a setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the information screen, it is determined whether or not the fraud has been performed. Can be tracked. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales.

  Note that the setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value is changed, and the set value is checked when the set value is checked. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the operation has been performed. When the setting operation information is set value change information, the set value information is set value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the set value confirmation information, the set value information on the one set value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one set value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

  In addition, the “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, or when the setting operation information is received by the second control unit. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The display control means,
The information screen can be displayed when the power is turned on in a state where the setting operation means is operated, and an information screen for restricting the display of the information screen during the execution of the game even if the predetermined operation is performed It is characterized by having a limiting means (for example, the sub CPU 201 for ending the hole menu task when NO is determined in step S3301, and the sub CPU 201 for executing the processing in step S3315 when determining YES in step S3314).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the information screen is a screen displayed when the power is turned on in a state where the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during execution of the game. Is also a screen whose display is restricted. That is, if the power is not turned on while the setting operation unit is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the information screen is not displayed. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

  In order to solve the seventh problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to attachment 45 having the following structure.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 45
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values;
Predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit;
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value;
When power is turned on, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means,
With
The first control means includes:
A setting state control means for controlling to a setting state in which the one set value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on at least while the setting operation means is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state). (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024 or step S3026);
A first storage unit (for example, a main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the set value information on the one set value;
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least setting operation information (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed, and the one set value (For example, the command output port 106 and the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3055).
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting unit;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information for receiving an initialization command or a power-off recovery command). A second storage unit (for example, the work RAM 203) capable of storing the set value information as history information;
Display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen showing the history information based on a predetermined operation;
The display control means,
A first screen display control means for displaying a first screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen in FIG. 223) in which history information not including the setting value information among the history information is displayed based on the predetermined operation; (For example, the sub CPU 201 displaying the setting change / confirmation history screen in FIG. 223);
On the condition that the first screen is displayed, a second screen display control means for displaying a second screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen in FIG. 225) showing history information including at least the set value information. (For example, the sub CPU 201 displaying the setting change / confirmation history screen in FIG. 225).

  According to the gaming machine of (1), by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse the information screen in which the setting operation information, the time information relating to the setting operation information, and the setting value information are displayed as history information. Therefore, it is possible to cope with various problems related to the set value. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that an unauthorized third party has changed or confirmed a setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the information screen, it is determined whether or not the fraud has been performed. Can be tracked. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales.

  In addition, when a predetermined operation is performed, first, a first screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen in FIG. 223) in which history information that does not include setting value information among history information is displayed, On the condition that the screen is displayed, a second screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen in FIG. 225) in which history information including setting value information is displayed is displayed.

  In addition, the transmission unit that can transmit various information to the second control unit may transmit the setting operation information and the setting value information together or separately. The setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value is changed, and the set value is checked when the set value is checked. This is the set value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. When the setting operation information is set value change information, the set value information is set value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the set value confirmation information, the set value information on the one set value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one set value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

  In addition, the “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, or when the setting operation information is received by the second control unit. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The second screen display control means includes:
The second screen is configured to be displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the second screen showing the history information including the set value information is displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied, so that the set value information can be easily browsed. It is not possible to prevent the setting value information from being viewed for fraud. The specific condition is, for example, a case where a proper password is input.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2),
The display control means,
The information screen can be displayed when the power is turned on in a state where the setting operation means is operated. It has a screen limiting means.

  According to the gaming machine of (3), the information screen is a screen displayed when the power is turned on in a state where the setting operation unit is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during execution of the game. Is also a screen whose display is restricted. That is, if the power is not turned on while the setting operation unit is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the information screen is not displayed. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

  In order to solve the seventh problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to attachment 46 having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine described in Appendix 46
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values;
Predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit;
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value;
When power is turned on, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means,
With
The first control means includes:
A setting state control means for controlling to a setting state in which the one set value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on at least while the setting operation means is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state). (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024 or step S3026);
A first storage unit (for example, a main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the set value information on the one set value;
Transmission means capable of transmitting various information to the second control means, and capable of transmitting at least setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed. , A command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing in step S3055).
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting unit;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information at which the initialization command or the power interruption recovery command is received) A second storage unit (for example, the work RAM 203) capable of storing
Display control means capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) in which the history information is displayed, based on a predetermined operation;
After the information screen is displayed, the information screen can be displayed until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until a command for generating an effect control object is received), but the information is displayed when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Information screen display restricting means for restricting the display of the screen (for example, the sub CPU 201 executing the hole menu display prohibition processing in step S3316).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), by performing a predetermined operation, the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information can be browsed. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that an unauthorized third party has changed or confirmed a setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the information screen, it is determined whether or not the fraud has been performed. Can be tracked. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales.

  In addition, the displayed information screen can be displayed until a predetermined condition is satisfied, but the display is restricted when the predetermined condition is satisfied. For this reason, once the predetermined condition is satisfied, the information screen cannot be browsed, so even if an unauthorized person attempts to browse illegally, the information screen cannot be easily browsed and security can be secured. It becomes.

  Note that the setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value is changed, and the set value is checked when the set value is checked. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the operation has been performed. When the setting operation information is set value change information, the set value information is set value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the set value confirmation information, the set value information on the one set value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one set value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

  In addition, the “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, or when the setting operation information is received by the second control unit. It may be time.

  In order to solve the seventh problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to attachment 47 configured as follows.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 47
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values;
Predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit;
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value;
When power is turned on, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means,
With
The first control means includes:
A setting state control means for controlling to a setting state in which the one set value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on at least while the setting operation means is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state). (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024 or step S3026);
A first storage unit (for example, a main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the set value information on the one set value;
Transmission means capable of transmitting various information to the second control means, and capable of transmitting at least setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed. , A command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing in step S3055).
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting unit;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information for receiving an initialization command or a power-off recovery command). A second storage unit (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing
A normal screen (e.g., a guide initial image) that can be viewed by an unspecified person (e.g., a player) and a specific screen (e.g., a gaming machine administrator) that can be viewed only by A display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying any one of a plurality of screens including an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) on which history information is displayed on the display means; , And
The display control means,
The normal screen can be displayed as long as the power is turned on, while the information screen is turned on when at least the setting operation unit is operated (for example, the setting key is turned on). Characterized in that it is configured to be displayed on the display.

  According to the gaming machine of (1), the predetermined display means includes a normal screen that can be browsed by an unspecified person (for example, a player) and a specific person (for example, a gaming machine manager) An information screen that can be viewed only by the user is displayed. The normal screen can be displayed as long as the power is turned on, while the information screen is not displayed only when the power is turned on, and is turned on at least while the setting operation unit is operated. It is configured not to be displayed unless there is. Therefore, the information screen cannot be easily viewed by an unspecified person who does not have the authority, and it is possible to suppress unauthorized viewing.

  By the way, the above normal screen may not be interpreted as being viewable by an unspecified person if, for example, only the player who has registered as a member can view it, Since anyone can browse (if there is only a desire to browse), it can be said that this is a normal screen that can be browsed by an unspecified person. On the other hand, the information screen cannot be viewed even if the user wants to view the information screen. For example, the information screen is a screen that can be viewed only by an authorized person such as a gaming machine administrator.

  Furthermore, in the information screen that can be viewed only by a specific person, the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information, so that it is possible to cope with various problems related to the setting value. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that an unauthorized third party has changed or confirmed a setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the information screen, it is determined whether or not the fraud has been performed. Can be tracked. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales.

  Note that the setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value is changed, and the set value is checked when the set value is checked. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the operation has been performed. When the setting operation information is set value change information, the set value information is set value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the set value confirmation information, the set value information on the one set value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one set value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

  In addition, the “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, or when the setting operation information is received by the second control unit. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The display control means,
The information screen can be displayed when the power is turned on in a state where the setting operation means is operated, and the information screen restriction means for restricting the display of the information screen during the execution of the game (for example, NO in step S3301) The sub CPU 201 terminates the hole menu task when determined, and the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S3315 when determined to be YES in step S3314).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the information screen is a screen displayed when the power is turned on in a state where the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during execution of the game. Is also a screen whose display is restricted. That is, if the power is not turned on while the setting operation unit is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the information screen is not displayed. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

  In order to solve the seventh problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to attachment 48 having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 48
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values;
Predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit;
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value;
When power is turned on, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means,
With
The first control means includes:
A setting state control means for controlling to a setting state in which the one set value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on at least while the setting operation means is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state). (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024 or step S3026);
A first storage unit (for example, a main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the set value information on the one set value;
Transmission means capable of transmitting various information to the second control means, and capable of transmitting at least setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed. , A command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing in step S3055).
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting unit;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information for receiving an initialization command or a power-off recovery command). A second storage unit (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing
A display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) showing the history information based on a predetermined operation;
An information erasing unit (for example, a sub CPU 201 that executes processing of step S3306, step S33160, etc.) for erasing the history information from the second storage unit when a specific operation is received,
The information erasing means,
It is configured to receive the specific operation only when a specific condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), by performing a predetermined operation, the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information can be browsed. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that an unauthorized third party has changed or confirmed a setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the information screen, it is determined whether or not the fraud has been performed. Can be tracked. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales.

  Moreover, when a specific operation (for example, an operation of pressing the main button 662 after selecting the item of “clear”) is received, the history information is erased. Only when the condition is satisfied (for example, when the input password is appropriate), it can be accepted. Therefore, for example, even if an unauthorized person attempts to erase the history of change of the set value, confirmation of the set value, or browsing for the purpose of fraud, such erase cannot be executed unless a specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fraud history from being intentionally erased. Further, for those who have the authority, the history information can be deleted, so that the convenience can be improved.

  Note that the setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value is changed, and the set value is checked when the set value is checked. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the operation has been performed. When the setting operation information is set value change information, the set value information is set value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the set value confirmation information, the set value information on the one set value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one set value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

  In addition, the “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, or when the setting operation information is received by the second control unit. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The transmitting means,
It is possible to further transmit setting value information about the one setting value,
The second storage means,
The set value information can also be stored as the history information,
The display control means,
It is possible to display an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen in FIG. 225) in which the history information includes the setting value information,
The information erasing means,
The history information including the set value information is deleted from the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine of (2), when the information screen is displayed, it is possible to browse more useful information such as setting value information. In addition, such useful information can be deleted by an authorized person, so that convenience can be improved.

  The transmitting means may transmit the setting operation information and the setting value information together or separately.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The information erasing means,
When the history information is deleted from the second storage unit, only a part of the history information stored in the second storage unit as the history information can be deleted.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), the history information to be deleted from the history information stored in the second storage means can be selected by an authorized person, so that the convenience is improved. For example, the history information is displayed by associating one set operation information, one date and time information, and one set value information (for example, see FIG. 225). The information erasing means may erase the associated history information (for example, for each No shown in FIG. 225), or may erase each item of the information of a plurality of items included in the history information ( For example, all of the items of the date and time, the operation type, and the setting value shown in FIG. 225 may be deleted.

  In order to solve the seventh problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to attachment 49 having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 49
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values;
Predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit;
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value;
When power is turned on, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means,
With
The first control means includes:
A setting state control means for controlling to a setting state in which the one set value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on at least while the setting operation means is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state). (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024 or step S3026);
A first storage unit (for example, a main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the set value information on the one set value;
Transmission means capable of transmitting various information to the second control means, and capable of transmitting at least setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed. , A command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing in step S3055).
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting unit;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information for receiving an initialization command or a power-off recovery command). A second storage unit (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing
Display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen showing the history information based on a predetermined operation;
The setting operation information includes:
It is information that can distinguish the operation type of the information indicating that the one set value has been changed or the information indicating that the one set value has been confirmed. ,
The display control means,
Regardless of the type of the setting operation information, a list information screen (for example, a list screen) in which the setting operation information, the time information, and the setting value information are all shown as history information;
A specific information screen (for example, a narrowing-down screen) corresponding to a specific type of the setting operation information and showing the setting operation information, the time information, and the set value information as history information can be selectively displayed. It is characterized by comprising.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), by performing a predetermined operation, the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information can be browsed. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that an unauthorized third party has changed or confirmed a setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the information screen, it is determined whether or not the fraud has been performed. Can be tracked. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales.

  Moreover, regardless of the type of the setting operation information, the setting operation information, the time information and the setting value information all correspond to a specific type of setting operation information, and an information screen of a list shown as history information. Since the setting operation information, the time information and the set value information can be selectively displayed on a specific information screen displayed as history information, the convenience of an operator (for example, a gaming machine administrator) is improved. Can be.

  Note that the setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value is changed, and the set value is checked when the set value is checked. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the operation has been performed. When the setting operation information is set value change information, the set value information is set value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the set value confirmation information, the set value information on the one set value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one set value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

  In addition, the “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, or when the setting operation information is received by the second control unit. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The display control means,
Only when a specific condition is satisfied, the information screen of the list and the specific information screen can be selectively displayed.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the list information screen and the specific information screen can be selectively displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied, so that the history information is browsed for the purpose of fraud. Can be suppressed. The specific condition is, for example, a case where a proper password is input.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2),
The transmitting means,
It is possible to further transmit setting value information about the one setting value,
The second storage means,
The set value information can also be stored as the history information,
The display control means,
An information screen including the set value information in the history information can be displayed.

  According to the gaming machine of (3), when the information screen is displayed, it is possible to browse more useful information such as setting value information. In addition, such useful information can be deleted by an authorized person, so that convenience can be improved.

  The transmitting means may transmit the setting operation information and the setting value information together or separately.

  In order to solve the seventh problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to attachment 50 having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 50
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values;
Predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit;
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value;
When power is turned on, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means,
With
The first control means includes:
A setting state control means for controlling to a setting state in which the one set value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on at least while the setting operation means is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state). (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024 or step S3026);
A first storage unit (for example, a main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the set value information on the one set value;
Transmission means capable of transmitting various information to the second control means, and capable of transmitting at least setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed. , A command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing in step S3055).
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting unit;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information for receiving an initialization command or a power-off recovery command). A second storage unit (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing
Based on a predetermined operation, a normal screen (for example, a hole menu screen) in which the history information is not displayed can be displayed, and when a predetermined operation is performed in the normal screen, an information screen (in which the history information is displayed) Display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying a setting change / confirmation history screen);
The information screen can be displayed until the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until YES is determined in step S3312, step S3313 or step S3314), but when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the display of the information screen is restricted. Information screen display restricting means (for example, the sub CPU 201 which executes the processing of step S3315 when YES is determined in step S3312, step S3313 or step S3314),
The second storage means,
When the information screen is displayed by performing the predetermined operation on the normal screen, a browsing history indicating that the information screen has been browsed can be stored as one of the history information,
Until the display of the information screen is restricted, even if the number of times the information screen is displayed by performing the predetermined operation on the normal screen is a plurality of times, as one browsing history. It is configured to be stored.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), by performing a predetermined operation, the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information can be browsed. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that an unauthorized third party has changed or confirmed a setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the information screen, it is determined whether or not the fraud has been performed. Can be tracked. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales.

  Further, the information screen can be displayed until the predetermined condition is satisfied, but the display is restricted when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

  The information screen is displayed by performing a predetermined operation on the normal screen. At this time, the browsing history is stored in the second storage means. However, even if the number of times the information screen is displayed multiple times by performing a predetermined operation on the normal screen until the display of the information screen is restricted, it is recorded as one set history information. Is done. This makes it difficult for a person who has performed setting changes, setting confirmations, browsing of information screens, etc. for the purpose of fraud to intentionally create many browsing histories. In particular, in the case of the browsing history, unlike the change or confirmation of the set value, the browsing is performed a plurality of times without going through the process of turning on the power while the setting operation unit is operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state). The effect is great because it is possible to make a large number of histories intentionally.

  Note that the setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value is changed, and the set value is checked when the set value is checked. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the operation has been performed. When the setting operation information is set value change information, the set value information is set value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the set value confirmation information, the set value information on the one set value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one set value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

  In addition, the “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, or when the setting operation information is received by the second control unit. It may be time.

  In order to solve the seventh problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to attachment 51 having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 51
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values;
Predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit;
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value;
When power is turned on, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means,
With
The first control means includes:
A setting state control means for controlling to a setting state in which the one set value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on at least while the setting operation means is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state). (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024 or step S3026);
A first storage unit (for example, a main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the set value information on the one set value;
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least setting operation information (for example, which can distinguish whether the one set value has been changed or the one set value has been confirmed) Transmission means (for example, the command output port 106 and the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3055) capable of transmitting the setting operation command).
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting unit;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information for receiving an initialization command or a power-off recovery command). A second storage unit (for example, the work RAM 203) capable of storing the setting change history information or the history information including the setting confirmation history information;
Based on a predetermined operation, a normal screen (for example, a hole menu screen) in which the history information is not displayed can be displayed, and when a predetermined operation is performed in the normal screen, an information screen (in which the history information is displayed) Display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying a setting change / confirmation history screen),
The second storage means,
When the information screen is displayed by performing the predetermined operation on the normal screen, browsing history information indicating that the information screen has been browsed, can be stored as one of the history information,
Further, when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated,
When the confirmation of the one set value and the browsing of the information screen are performed, while both the setting confirmation history information and the browsing history information are displayed,
When the one set value is changed and the information screen is viewed, only the browsing history information of the setting change history information and the browsing history information is displayed. Features.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), by performing a predetermined operation, the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information can be browsed. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that an unauthorized third party has changed or confirmed a setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the information screen, it is determined whether or not the fraud has been performed. Can be tracked. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales.

  By the way, when a fraud involving a setting change is performed, it is possible to detect the possibility of fraud with a setting change history that is not stored in the gaming machine manager's memory. It is difficult to detect that there is a possibility of fraud only from the confirmation history of the setting. In addition, it is considered that the person who conducts the fraud mainly browses after confirming the setting, rather than browsing after changing the setting. Therefore, when the power is turned on while the setting operation unit is operated, when one set value is confirmed and the information screen is browsed, both the set confirmation history information and the browse history information are displayed. Is displayed, and when one set value is changed and the information screen is viewed, only the viewing history information of the setting change history information and the viewing history information is displayed. This makes it possible to minimize the amount of history information displayed on the display means, and to prevent the total number of histories from increasing unnecessarily and making it difficult to detect fraud.

  Note that "when the one set value is changed and the information screen is browsed, only the browsing history information of the setting change history information and the browsing history information is displayed." By storing only the browsing history information out of the setting change history information and the browsing history information in the second storage means, only the browsing history information is displayed. Although the information may be stored in the second storage means, only the browsing history information among these pieces of information may be displayed under the control of the display control means. The former is more preferable.

  In addition, the “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, or when the setting operation information is received by the second control unit. It may be time.

  In order to solve the seventh problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to attachment 52 having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 52:
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values;
Predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit;
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value;
When power is turned on, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means,
With
The first control means includes:
A setting state control means for controlling to a setting state in which the one set value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on at least while the setting operation means is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state). (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024 or step S3026);
A first storage unit (for example, a main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the set value information on the one set value;
Transmission means capable of transmitting various information to the second control means, and capable of transmitting at least setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed. , A command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing in step S3055).
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting unit;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information for receiving an initialization command or a power-off recovery command). A second storage unit (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing
A display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) showing the history information based on a predetermined operation;
When the amount of history information stored in the second storage unit exceeds a predetermined amount, a history deletion unit that executes control for deleting at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage unit (for example, , A sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S3306).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), by performing a predetermined operation, the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information can be browsed. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that an unauthorized third party has changed or confirmed a setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the information screen, it is determined whether or not the fraud has been performed. Can be tracked. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales.

  By the way, the above-mentioned history information is stored in the second storage means (for example, the work RAM 203), but since the amount of history information that can be stored in the second storage means has an upper limit, it is stored in the second storage means. When the amount of history information increases, there is a possibility that a situation may occur in which it is not possible to record history information in the second storage means. Therefore, when the history information stored in the second storage means exceeds a predetermined amount, new history information is recorded by deleting at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means. This prevents the situation of not being able to do so.

  Note that “when the amount of history information stored in the second storage means exceeds a predetermined amount, at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means is deleted”. The history information may be erased by overwriting the history information already stored in the storage means with the new history information, or the new history information may be stored in the second storage means. At this time, when there is a possibility that the history information exceeds the predetermined amount, at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means may be deleted before storing the history information. Also, even when new history information is not stored in the second storage means, when there is a possibility that storing more history information in the second storage means may exceed the upper limit, the new history information may be stored in the second storage means. At least a part of the existing history information may be deleted.

  The setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value is changed, and the set value is checked when the set value is checked. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the operation has been performed. When the setting operation information is set value change information, the set value information is set value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the set value confirmation information, the set value information on the one set value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one set value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

  In addition, the “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, or when the setting operation information is received by the second control unit. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The display control means,
The information screen can be displayed when the power is turned on in a state where the setting operation means is operated, and information for restricting the display of the information screen even when the predetermined operation is performed during execution of the game It has a screen restricting means (for example, a sub CPU 201 for ending the hole menu task when NO is determined in step S3301, and a sub CPU 201 for executing the process in step S3315 when determining YES in step S3314). .

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the information screen is a screen displayed when the power is turned on in a state where the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during execution of the game. Is also a screen whose display is restricted. That is, if the power is not turned on while the setting operation unit is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the information screen is not displayed. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

  In order to solve the seventh problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to attachment 53 configured as follows.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 53
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values;
Predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit;
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value;
When power is turned on, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means,
With
The first control means includes:
When the power is turned on while at least the setting operation unit is operated (for example, the setting key is in an ON state), the setting change state in which the one set value can be changed or the one set value is confirmed. Setting state control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024 or step S3026) for controlling to a setting confirmation state in which the setting can be performed;
A first storage unit (for example, a main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the set value information on the one set value;
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control unit, and at least a setting unit that can transmit setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed, for example, A command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3055).
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting unit;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information for receiving an initialization command or a power-off recovery command). A second storage unit (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing
An information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) in which the history information is displayed in the setting change state and / or the setting confirmation state can be displayed on the display unit, and the setting change state or / and the setting can be displayed. Display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of restricting the display of the information screen so that the information screen is not displayed when the confirmation state ends.
The display control means,
At least when the setting change state ends, the information screen can be displayed without restricting the display of the information screen until a predetermined time elapses even if the setting change state ends (for example, steps S3310 and S311). Can be performed), and
Even if the setting change state ends, control can be performed so that the display of the information screen is not restricted as long as a predetermined operation on the information screen is performed on the information screen displayed after the end of the setting change state ( Steps S311 to S3314 can be repeated).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), since at least the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information can be viewed on the information screen that is displayed as the history information, various problems relating to the setting value can be achieved. Can be handled. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that an unauthorized third party has changed or confirmed a setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the information screen, it is determined whether or not the fraud has been performed. Can be tracked. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales.

  In addition, since the information screen is displayed in the setting change state and / or the setting confirmation state, security such that an unauthorized third party cannot easily view the information screen is ensured. Moreover, at least when the setting change state is controlled, the display of the information screen is not restricted until a predetermined operation on the information screen is performed until a predetermined time elapses after the end of the setting change state. In addition, the convenience of the operator can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The transmitting means,
When at least the one set value is changed, it is also possible to transmit set value information about the one set value,
The display control means,
In the setting change state and / or the setting confirmation state, an information screen in which the set value information on the one set value is included in the history information can be displayed on the display means.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when displaying the history screen, the set value information for one set value is also displayed, so that an authorized person can browse more detailed history information. . In particular, since the set value information for one set value is useful information for business, it can be used for hall management.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The display control means,
Even if a predetermined operation related to the information screen is performed on the information screen displayed after the setting change state is completed, when the specific information related to the progress of the game is received by the receiving unit, the information screen is displayed. (For example, the sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S3315 when YES is determined in step S3314).

  According to the gaming machine of (3), even if a predetermined operation related to the information screen is performed on the information screen, the display of the information screen is forcibly performed when the reception unit receives the specific information related to the progress of the game. , The execution of the game is not hindered. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the convenience of the operation by the authorized person and to suppress the unauthorized operation by the unauthorized third person while ensuring the state in which the game can be executed.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3),
On the information screen displayed after the setting change state is completed, it is configured to be able to grasp that the game is executable without obstructing the predetermined operation on the information screen (for example, , While the setting is being changed or the setting is being checked, the LED 25 is fully lit in white, while the setting is changed or the setting is completed, and the LED 25 is completely lit in red.)
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of (4), in the information screen displayed after the setting change state ends, a state in which a game can be executed without obstructing a predetermined operation on the information screen from being performed. Since the game can be executed, it is possible to prevent occurrence of a problem that the game cannot be executed without being able to grasp the fact that the game can be executed.

  In order to solve the seventh problem, a gaming machine according to attachment 54 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 54
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values;
Predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit;
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value;
When power is turned on, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means,
With
The first control means includes:
A setting state control means for controlling to a setting state in which the one set value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on at least while the setting operation means is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state). (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024 or step S3026);
A first storage unit (for example, a main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the set value information on the one set value;
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control unit, and at least a setting unit that can transmit setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed, for example, A command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3055).
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting unit;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information for receiving an initialization command or a power-off recovery command). A second storage unit (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing
Display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a hole menu screen, a screen of a hole menu item) on which various information can be displayed in the setting state on the display means; And
The information screen includes:
A history screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) in which the history information is shown, and a non-history screen (for example, a hall) in which the history information is shown by performing a predetermined operation although the history information is not shown. Menu screen) and at least a plurality of information screens,
The display control means,
A screen updating means (for example, a step updating means) for controlling to display another information screen when a predetermined operation is performed while any one of the plurality of information screens is displayed on the display means. The sub CPU 201 that executes the processing of S33051, step S33057, step S33073, and the like;
In the setting state, when the non-history screen is displayed, the non-history screen is continuously displayed even if the predetermined operation is not performed (for example, when the hole menu display process of step S302 is performed). If no item is selected in the process of step S3303, the hole menu screen is continuously displayed. On the other hand, when the history screen is displayed, the predetermined operation must be performed for a predetermined time or more. For example, a specific display control unit that controls the display of the history screen to be terminated (for example, the sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S3315 when YES is determined in step S33072).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), at least the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information can be browsed on the history screen in which the history information is displayed as the history information. Can be handled. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that an unauthorized third party has changed a setting value or confirmed a setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the history screen, it is determined whether the fraud has been performed. Can be tracked. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales.

  In addition, a non-history screen in which history information is not displayed is continuously displayed without performing a predetermined operation, but a history screen in which history information is displayed is terminated if a predetermined operation is not performed for a predetermined time or more. I do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the history information from being continuously displayed and viewed by an unauthorized third party. Note that “continuous display” also includes terminating the display once and displaying again. That is, it is important whether the display is performed even if the predetermined operation is not performed for a predetermined time or more, or whether the display is not performed.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The transmitting means,
When at least the one set value is changed, it is also possible to transmit set value information about the one set value,
The display control means,
When the history screen is displayed on the display unit in the setting state, the history screen is also configured to display setting value information on the one setting value.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when displaying the history screen, the set value information for one set value is also displayed, so that an authorized person can browse more detailed history information. . In particular, since the set value information for one set value is useful information for business, it can be used for hall management.

  In order to solve the seventh problem, a gaming machine according to attachment 55 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 55
A control related to the progress of the game can be executed based on any one of the plurality of set values, and information related to the progress of the game including the set value information about the one set value can be stored. First control means having one storage means (for example, main control circuit 100);
Predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit;
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value;
A specific operation unit (for example, a backup clear switch 330) used for an operation of erasing information stored in the first storage unit;
When power is turned on, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means,
With
The first control means includes:
When the specific operation unit is operated and the power is turned on in a state where the setting operation unit is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state), the setting change state in which the one set value can be changed is set. A setting change state control unit to be controlled (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024);
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, at least setting change information (for example, a setting change start command) indicating that the one set value is changed, a set value for the one set value The information (for example, the set value information after change when the set value is changed) and the erase process for erasing the information stored in the first storage unit are executed. Transmission means (for example, the command output port 106 or the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3055) capable of transmitting information (for example, an initialization command) indicating that
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting unit;
When the setting change information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting change information received by the receiving means and time information related to the setting change information (for example, time information at which the initialization command or the power interruption recovery command is received) A second storage unit (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing
Information display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying on the display means an information screen showing the history information at least in the setting change state;
Erasure execution information notifying means capable of notifying that the erasing process has been executed (for example, the display control circuit 104, the audio control circuit 205 for controlling the audio output of the speaker 24, and the LED control circuit 206 for controlling the lighting mode of the LED 25). And
The erasure execution information notifying means,
When the erasing process (for example, the backup clearing process) is executed without being controlled to the setting change state, a first mode (for example, a display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) in which it is possible to grasp that the erasing process has been executed. A first notification means (sub CPU 201) for notifying by a character display such as "RAM is cleared", a voice output such as "RAM is cleared", and all the red lights of the LED 25.
When the erasing process is executed in accordance with the control of the setting change state, it is more difficult to grasp that the erasing process is executed than in the first mode so that the visual recognition of the information screen is not hindered. Second notification means (for example, not displaying on the liquid crystal display device 16 but only outputting a sound such as "Setting has been changed. RAM has been initialized" and turning on the LED 25 in red only) ( And a sub CPU 201).

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, at least the setting change information and the time information related to the setting change information can be viewed on the information screen that is displayed as the history information. Can be handled. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that a third party without authority has changed the setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the information screen, it is possible to track whether or not the fraud was performed. It is possible to do. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales.

  The erasing process for erasing the information stored in the first storage means (for example, a backup clearing process) is performed without being controlled to the setting change state, and also when the setting is changed to the setting change state. May be executed. When the erasing process is executed without being controlled by the setting change state, the erasing process is notified in the first mode in which the execution of the erasing process can be grasped. Can be suppressed. On the other hand, when the erasing process is executed due to the control of the setting change state, the main purpose is to change one set value, and the erasing process is only executed accordingly. Therefore, the notification is made in the second mode, which is more difficult to grasp than in the first mode. Furthermore, when the erasing process is executed in accordance with the control to the setting change state, an information screen showing the history information is displayed. In the second mode, the information screen is displayed so as not to be disturbed. Since the execution of the erasing process is notified, convenience can be ensured.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
In addition to audio output means (for example, speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined audio,
The second control means includes:
The apparatus further includes audio control means (for example, an audio control circuit 206) capable of controlling the audio output from the audio output means,
The first notifying means includes:
Notifying that the erasing process has been performed using both the display unit and the audio output unit,
The second notification means,
It is characterized in that the execution of the erasing process is notified by using only the audio output unit among the display unit and the audio output unit.

  According to the gaming machine of (2), when the erasing process (for example, the backup clearing process) is executed without being controlled to the setting change state, the notification is made by using both the display unit and the sound output unit. Therefore, it is possible to clearly grasp that the erasing process has been performed. On the other hand, when the erasing process is executed due to the control of the setting change state, the notification is performed using only the audio output unit of the display unit and the audio output unit, so that the visibility of the information screen is hindered. It is possible to grasp the execution of the erasing process while preventing the erasing process from being performed, and to suppress the execution of the erasing process by, for example, a third party who does not have authority while improving the convenience.

  According to the gaming machines of Supplementary Note 44 to Supplementary Note 55 of the present invention having the above-described configuration, it is possible to provide a highly convenient gaming machine that can cope with a problem related to a set value.

[Appendix 56]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and variably displays a symbol based on a result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the gaming state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

  In this type of gaming machine, any one of a plurality of setting values indicating a probability relating to a player's advantage or disadvantage in a game, such as a probability that the result of the lottery is a specific result, is set. There has been known a gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on a set value (for example, see paragraph [0063] of JP-A-2011-206588). The above set values can be set by an authorized person such as a gaming machine manager of a hall, for example.

(Eighth task)
However, in a gaming machine in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value, for example, the unauthorized change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value is performed by an unauthorized person. There is a concern that various problems may occur, such as a change of the control board or an unauthorized replacement of the control board.

  Further, since the above set values are important factors for both the hall and the player, they should be strictly managed by authorized persons.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of coping with a problem relating to a set value.

  In order to solve the eighth problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to supplementary note 56 configured as follows.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 56
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values;
Predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit;
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value;
With
The first control means includes:
At least when the setting operation unit is operated, the setting state control unit (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024 or step S3026) controls the setting state to be able to change or confirm the one set value. )When,
A storage unit (for example, a main RAM 103) capable of storing setting value information on at least the one setting value;
Transmission means capable of transmitting various kinds of information to the second control means, and capable of transmitting at least the set value information of the one set value (for example, the command output port 106 or the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3055) And having
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the setting value information transmitted from the transmitting unit;
Based on the reception of the setting value information by the receiving means, using the received setting value information and the setting value information received prior to the setting value information to determine the suitability of the one setting value Setting determining means (for example, a sub CPU 201 for determining whether or not the previous set value and the current set value match);
An abnormal-time process executing means (for example, a sub-CPU 201 for executing a setting-value abnormal-time process) for executing an abnormal-time process when the one set value is judged to be inappropriate by the setting judging means. Features.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the second control means determines the suitability of the one set value by using the set value information about the one set value transmitted a plurality of times from the first control means. It becomes possible. In other words, even if the first control means can determine the suitability of one set value, the one set value is normal, for example, when the first control means is exchanged improperly. Regardless of whether the set value is abnormal or not, the first control means determines that one set value is normal. Therefore, by allowing the second control means to determine the suitability of the one set value, even if the first control means is exchanged improperly, etc., for example, Compliance can be found immediately.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The transmitting means,
It is also possible to transmit setting operation information (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed,
The second control means includes:
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information are stored separately from the storage unit capable of storing as history information. Means (for example, work RAM 203);
Display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying, on a predetermined display means, an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) showing the history information based on a predetermined operation. It is characterized.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, by performing a predetermined operation, the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information can be browsed. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that an unauthorized third party has changed or confirmed a setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the information screen, it is determined whether or not the fraud has been performed. Can be tracked. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales.

  When transmitting both the setting operation information and the setting value information, the transmitting means capable of transmitting various information to the second control means may transmit these information together or separately. The setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value is changed, and the set value is checked when the set value is checked. This is the set value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. When the setting operation information is set value change information, the set value information is set value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the set value confirmation information, the set value information on the one set value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one set value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

  In addition, the “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, or when the setting operation information is received by the second control unit. It may be time.

  According to the gaming machine with the above-mentioned configuration of supplementary note 56 of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of coping with a problem relating to a set value.

[Appendix 57]

  Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a game advantageous to a player is executed based on a result of the lottery.

  As this kind of gaming machine, a gaming machine having a plurality of functions in one device has been proposed. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-170505 discloses that in order to be pressed by a player and to give an impact to the player, the player jumps out of a main body of the gaming machine to a position largely protruding regardless of the operation of the player. A disclosed push button is disclosed.

(Ninth problem)

  By the way, in the case of checking the operation of the accessory, various sensors, and the like, for example, a device having a plurality of functions in one device, such as a push button described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-170505, has poor maintainability. There is concern about the fear.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the maintainability of a single device having a plurality of functions. is there.

  In order to solve the ninth problem, a gaming machine according to attachment 57 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 57
A gaming machine that can perform a lottery (for example, a special lottery) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and can execute a game advantageous to the player based on a result of the lottery,
An accessory (eg, accessory 1000) operable based on the result of the lottery;
A composite means having one or more functions (for example, a production button 62);
Various sensors provided for the progress of the game (for example, a first starting port switch 421, etc.),
Predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
At least a maintenance item determining unit that determines a maintenance item to be executed from among a plurality of maintenance items including an operation check of the accessory, a function check of the composite unit, and a detection check of the various sensors (for example, the process of step S33084 An executable sub CPU 201);
In determining the maintenance item, a selection screen (for example, FIG. 231) in which any one of a plurality of maintenance items including an operation check of the accessory, a function check of the composite unit, and a detection check of the various sensors can be selected. A maintenance screen display control unit for displaying at least a maintenance screen (for example, the sub CPU 201 capable of executing the processing of step S33083);
With
The maintenance item determining means includes:
It is possible to determine the maintenance item selected in the selection screen displayed by the maintenance screen display control means,
The maintenance screen display control means,
The composite means having a single function but having a plurality of functions is configured to be displayed on the selection screen so that an item can be selected for each function (for example, the item “effect button 1” in FIG. (It is displayed so that you can select any of the items of "staging button 2")
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), as for the composite means having one but a plurality of functions, an item can be selected for each function on a selection screen on which any one of a plurality of maintenance items can be selected. Since the information is displayed, it is possible to improve the maintainability.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The composite means,
At least, an operation function and a directing function that can be executed based on the result of the lottery,
The maintenance item determining means includes:
When the item of the operation function (for example, the effect button 1) is selected on the selection screen, the maintenance item related to the operation function is determined, and the item of the effect function (for example, the effect button 2) is selected. In such a case, it is characterized in that it can be determined as a maintenance item related to the effect function.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the item of the operation function is selected, the maintenance item relating to the operation function is determined, and when the item of the effect function is selected, the maintenance item relating to the effect function is determined. Since it is configured to be determinable, it is possible to appropriately perform maintenance on both the operation function and the production function.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention having the above-mentioned configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the maintainability of a single device having a plurality of functions.

[Supplementary Note 58]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine that executes a game advantageous to a player based on a result of a lottery performed based on establishment of a predetermined condition, a gaming machine having a movable role that operates based on a result of the lottery is known. I have.

  As this type of gaming machine, there has been disclosed a gaming machine having a first movable role and a second movable role each having a different driving source as a movable role that operates based on the result of a lottery (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. H10-163873). 2018-15273).

(Tenth task)
By the way, in the gaming machine described in, for example, JP-A-2018-15273 provided with a plurality of movable members having different driving sources, maintenance work may be complicated and troublesome. This is remarkable especially when there is a possibility that a plurality of movable objects having different driving sources may interfere with each other.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to reduce the burden of maintenance work even when the driving source includes a plurality of different movable objects. It is to provide a game machine.

  In order to solve the tenth problem, a game machine according to attachment 58 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 58
A gaming machine that can perform a lottery (for example, a special lottery) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and can execute a game advantageous to the player based on a result of the lottery,
A first character and a second character that are operable based on the result of the lottery and have different driving sources,
Various sensors provided for the progress of the game (for example, a first starting port switch 421, etc.),
Predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
At least a maintenance item determining unit (for example, a step for determining a maintenance item to be executed) among a plurality of maintenance items including an operation check of the first accessory, an operation check of the second accessory, and a detection check of the various sensors. A sub CPU 201 capable of executing the process of S33084);
In determining the maintenance item, a selection screen (for example, a selection screen that can select any one of a plurality of maintenance items including an operation check of the first accessory, an operation check of the second accessory, and a detection check of the various sensors) , A maintenance screen display control unit (for example, the sub CPU 201 capable of executing the processing of step S33083) for displaying at least the maintenance screen of FIG.
With
The maintenance item determining means includes:
It is possible to determine the maintenance item selected in the selection screen displayed by the maintenance screen display control means,
The maintenance screen display control means,
On the selection screen, not only the operation check of the first character and the second character alone but also the operation check when both the first character and the second character are operated are selected. (For example, the item of "director 1 + 2" in FIG. 231 is displayed).
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), not only the operation check of each of the first character and the second character but also the operation check when both the first character and the second character are operated. Can also be selected on the selection screen, so that the burden of maintenance work can be reduced.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The maintenance screen display control means,
It is configured such that the operation confirmation when the second character is operated after the first character is operated can be selected on the selection screen (for example, “directing character 1 → 2” in FIG. 231). Items etc. are displayed)
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of (2), even when the operation start timing of the first accessory and the operation start timing of the second accessory can be different, the second accessory is operated after the first accessory is operated. Since the operation check at the time of operating can be selected on the selection screen, it is possible to reduce the complexity of the maintenance work and further improve the maintainability.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
A third character that is operable based on a result of the lottery and has a different driving source from any of the first character and the second character;
The maintenance screen display control means,
When there is a possibility that the first and / or the second accessory and the third and the third accessory may interfere with each other when they operate, the first and / or the second accessory 231. The selection screen is configured to be able to be displayed in such a manner that neither the nor the third character can be operated (for example, it is displayed so that the item of “directing character 1 + 3” in FIG. 231 cannot be selected). )
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when there is a possibility that the first and / or the second character and the third character may interfere with each other when they are operated, the selection screen may be used to display Since it is not possible to select a mode of operating either the first and / or the second and third special effects, it is possible to improve the maintainability.

  According to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration of Supplementary Note 58 of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the maintainability of one device having a plurality of functions.

[Supplementary Note 59, Supplementary Note 60]

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and variably displays a symbol based on a result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the gaming state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

  In this type of gaming machine, any one of a plurality of setting values indicating a probability relating to a player's advantage or disadvantage in a game, such as a probability that the result of the lottery is a specific result, is set. There has been known a gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on a set value (for example, see paragraph [0063] of JP-A-2011-206588). The above set values can be set by an authorized person such as a gaming machine manager of a hall, for example.

(Eleventh problem)

  By the way, in a gaming machine in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value, the set value is an important factor for both the hall and the player because the set value is related to payout. However, for example, an abnormality may occur in the set value due to, for example, a power interruption.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which a set value can be appropriately maintained.

  In order to solve the eleventh problem, a game machine according to attachment 59 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 59
A storage that can execute control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values and that can store information related to the progress of the game including the set value information for the one set value Control means (for example, main control circuit 100) having means (for example, main RAM 103);
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value;
A specific operation unit (for example, a backup clear switch 330) used for an operation of erasing information stored in the storage unit;
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the control means when the power is turned on;
With
The control means includes:
When the specific operation unit is turned on and the power is turned on in a state where the setting operation unit is turned on, a state control unit that controls the one set value to a setting change state in which the one set value can be changed (for example, , The main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S3024.
The state control means includes:
When the power supply is stopped in the setting change state, even if the power is turned on without performing the ON operation of the setting operation means and / or the ON operation of the specific operation means, the control is changed to the setting change state. The power can be restored in the setting change state when the power supply is possible or when the supply of power is stopped (for example, the process of step S3024 is performed when NO is determined in step S3021).
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), even if, for example, a power interruption or the like occurs while being controlled to the setting change state, when the power is turned on thereafter, the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change state or the power supply Since the power is restored in the setting change state when the supply was stopped, the set value is always set and the set value is appropriately maintained. That is, for example, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a set value is not set due to an unintended power interruption or the like in a setting change state.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The control means includes:
When the setting operation unit is turned off after the one set value is changed in the setting change state, the set value determining unit that fixes the one set value to the changed set value (for example, And a main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S32480.
The set value determination means is:
When the setting operation unit is controlled to the setting change state without being turned ON, or when power is restored in the setting change state when power supply is stopped, the setting operation unit is turned ON. When the OFF operation is further performed after the setting, the one set value is set to the changed set value.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned ON, or when the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the setting is performed. Although it is necessary to once turn on the operation unit, by performing an operation that is not different from the normal operation such as turning off the setting operation unit, it becomes possible to determine one set value. Thereby, even if the setting operation unit is controlled to the setting change state without being turned ON or the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, a complicated operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to preferably prevent a situation in which a set value is not set.

  In order to solve the eleventh problem, a gaming machine according to attachment 60 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 60
A control related to the progress of the game can be executed based on any one of the plurality of set values, and a storage capable of storing information related to the progress of the game including the set value information on the one set value Control means having means (for example, main control circuit 100);
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value;
A specific operation unit (for example, a backup clear switch 330) used for an operation of erasing information stored in the storage unit;
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the control means when the power is turned on;
With
The control means includes:
According to the operation state of the setting operation unit and the operation state of the specific operation unit, the state after power is turned on, the setting change state in which the one set value can be changed, and the one setting There is a state control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024, step S3026, step S3028, etc.) which can be controlled to any one of a plurality of states including a setting confirmation state in which a value can be confirmed. And
The state control means includes:
When the power supply is stopped in the setting confirmation state and the power supply is thereafter turned on, control is performed to any one of the plurality of states according to the operation state of the setting operation unit and the operation state of the specific operation unit. (For example, executing the processing of step S3022 to step S3028),
The power supply was stopped in the setting change state, and when the power was turned on thereafter, the control could be performed in the setting change state or the power supply was stopped regardless of the operation state of the setting operation unit and the specific operation unit. The power can be restored in the setting change state at this time (for example, the process of step S3024 is performed when NO is determined in step S3021).
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a set value is not set due to the occurrence of power interruption or the like, while ensuring the convenience of the operator. That is, the setting check state is a state in which one set value can only be checked and one set value cannot be changed. For example, even if unintended power interruption or the like occurs, one set value It is unlikely to affect. On the other hand, the setting change state is a state in which one set value can be changed. For example, when an unintended power interruption or the like occurs, the one set value may be affected. Therefore, when the power supply is stopped in the setting confirmation state, when the power supply is thereafter turned on, the power supply is switched to one of a plurality of states according to the operation state of the setting operation unit and the operation state of the specific operation unit. Control, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change state, when the power is subsequently turned on, it is controlled to the setting change state or in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped. By restoring the power, the convenience of the operator is ensured, and the occurrence of a situation in which the set value is not set due to an unintended power interruption or the like is prevented.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The state control means includes:
When the specific operation unit is turned on and the power is turned on in a state where the setting operation unit is turned on, the control unit switches to the setting change state,
The control means includes:
When the setting operation unit is turned off after the one set value is changed in the setting change state, the set value determination unit that fixes the one set value to the changed set value is further provided. Have
The set value determination means is:
When the setting operation unit is controlled to the setting change state without being turned ON, or when power is restored in the setting change state when power supply is stopped, the setting operation unit is turned ON. When the OFF operation is further performed after the setting, the one set value is set to the changed set value.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned ON, or when the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the setting is performed. Although it is necessary to once turn on the operation unit, by performing an operation that is not different from the normal operation such as turning off the setting operation unit, it becomes possible to determine one set value. Thereby, even if the setting operation unit is controlled to the setting change state without being turned ON or the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, a complicated operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to preferably prevent a situation in which a set value is not set.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 59 and the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 60 configured as described above, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately maintaining set values.

[Supplementary Note 61]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and variably displays a symbol based on a result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the gaming state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

  In this type of gaming machine, any one of a plurality of setting values indicating a probability relating to a player's advantage or disadvantage in a game, such as a probability that the result of the lottery is a specific result, is set. There has been known a gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on a set value (for example, see paragraph [0063] of JP-A-2011-206588). The above set values can be set by an authorized person such as a gaming machine manager of a hall, for example.

(Twelfth task)
By the way, in a gaming machine in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value, the set value is an important factor for both the hall and the player, because the set value is related to payout. However, there is a possibility that an abnormality may occur in the set value due to, for example, generation of noise or fraud.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which a set value can be appropriately maintained.

  In order to solve the twelfth problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to attachment 61 configured as follows.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 61
A storage that can execute control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values and that can store information related to the progress of the game including the set value information for the one set value Control means (for example, main control circuit 100) having means (for example, main RAM 103);
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value;
A specific operation unit (for example, a backup clear switch 330) used for an operation of erasing information stored in the storage unit;
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the control means when the power is turned on;
With
The control means includes:
A setting change state control means for controlling the setting operation means to a setting change state in which the one set value can be changed when the specific operation means is turned on and the power is turned on in a state where the setting operation means is turned on; (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024);
An appropriateness determining unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3721) for determining whether the information stored in the storage unit is appropriate or not;
If it is determined that the information stored in the storage unit is inappropriate, the abnormality control unit (steps S3722 to S3727 performs control in an abnormal state (for example, a state in which steps S3722 to S3727 are executed). The main CPU 101), and
In the case where the power supply is stopped in the abnormal state, if the setting is not controlled after the power is turned on, the game is executed even if an operation of erasing information stored in the storage unit is performed. The control is performed so that the game cannot be performed (for example, the process of step S31790 is not performed when NO is determined in step S31770), while the control is performed so that the game can be performed when controlled to the setting change state after power-on (for example, step S31770). A game execution unit (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the process of step S17) that executes a process of step S31790 when YES is determined in S31770 and YES is determined in step S31780.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), when an abnormal state occurs due to, for example, generation of noise or misconduct, and the power supply is stopped in such abnormal state, the gaming machine is not controlled to the setting change state after the power is turned on. When the game is performed, the game cannot be executed even if the operation of erasing the information stored in the storage means is performed, and the game can be executed when the game is controlled to the setting change state after the power is turned on. . When an abnormal state occurs, the set value information stored in the storage means is likely to be abnormal, so only when the set value is controlled to be changed so that the set value is always changed, The game can be executed, and the set value is appropriately maintained.

  According to the gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration of Supplementary Note 61 of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine whose set value can be appropriately maintained.

[Supplementary Note 62]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and variably displays a symbol based on a result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the gaming state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

  In this type of gaming machine, any one of a plurality of setting values indicating a probability relating to a player's advantage or disadvantage in a game, such as a probability that the result of the lottery is a specific result, is set. There has been known a gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on a set value (for example, see paragraph [0063] of JP-A-2011-206588). The above set values can be set by an authorized person such as a gaming machine manager of a hall, for example.

(Thirteenth task)
However, in a gaming machine in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set values, for example, unauthorized change of the set values or confirmation of the set values is performed by an unauthorized person, There is a concern that various problems may occur, such as changes in

  Further, since the above set values are important factors for both the hall and the player, they should be strictly managed by authorized persons.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of coping with a problem relating to a set value.

  In order to solve the thirteenth problem, a gaming machine according to attachment 62 having the following structure is provided.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 62
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values;
Predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit;
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value;
When power is turned on, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means,
With
The first control means includes:
State control means for controlling to a setting state in which the one set value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on at least in a state where the setting operation means is turned on (for example, a setting key is turned on). (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing processes such as step S3024, step S3026, and step S3028);
Although the game cannot be executed in the setting state, the game execution means can be controlled to execute the game when the setting state ends (for example, the game is executed in the setting processing in step S3020 in which the game return processing in step S3030 has not been executed yet). When the setting process of step S3020 ends, the game return process of step S3030 is executed when the setting process of step S3020 is completed, and the main CPU 101 executes a power-on process for enabling execution of the game, and
Transmission means capable of transmitting various information to the second control means, and capable of transmitting at least setting operation information (for example, operation type information) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed. A command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3055).
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting unit;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, an effect indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed has been set, and a setting operation effect execution means (for example, , A sub-CPU 201 for executing control for fully turning on the LED 25 in red via the LED control circuit 206).
The setting operation effect execution means,
Even if the set state ends and the game can be executed, the effect indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed has been executed until a predetermined period elapses. It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), when setting operation information is received by the receiving means, an effect indicating that one set value is changed or confirmed is executed in a setting state where the game cannot be executed. Further, even if the setting state ends and the game can be executed, an effect indicating that one set value has been changed or confirmed is executed until a predetermined period elapses. For this reason, it is possible to easily find such a fraud when the setting value is illegally changed or the setting value is confirmed, and it is possible to suppress the fraud itself.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The setting operation effect execution means,
After the setting state is completed and the game can be executed, an effect indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed can be visually recognized as a state in which the game can be executed. It is characterized in that it is configured to be executable.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), since an effect indicating that one set value has been changed or confirmed has been executed in such a manner that it can be visually recognized that the game can be executed, It is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered while an effect indicating that the set value has been changed or confirmed has been executed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The state control means includes:
A setting change state control unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024) for controlling the one set value to a changeable setting state;
The second control means includes:
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information at which the initialization command or the power interruption recovery command is received) Storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing as history information;
An information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) showing the history information in the setting state can be displayed on the display means, and the information screen is not displayed when the setting state ends. Display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of restricting display,
The display control means,
When receiving the setting operation information indicating that the setting change state has been completed by the receiving means, even if the setting change state has ended, the display of the information screen is not restricted until a predetermined time has elapsed. It is characterized in that an information screen can be displayed (for example, the processing of steps S3301 to S3314 can be executed).

  According to the gaming machine of (3) above, in the setting state, the information screen showing the history information can be displayed on the display means, and when the setting state ends, the display of the information screen is restricted. Therefore, in the setting state, it is possible to cope with various problems related to the setting value by browsing the information screen showing the history information. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that an unauthorized third party has changed or confirmed a setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the information screen, it is determined whether or not the fraud has been performed. Can be tracked. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales. Furthermore, when the setting screen ends, the display of the information screen is restricted, and when the setting operation information indicating that the setting change state has been completed is received, even if the setting change state has been completed, until the predetermined time elapses. Can display an information screen. Therefore, even if the fraud is performed, the fraud can be easily found, and the fraud itself can be suppressed.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention having the above-mentioned configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of coping with the problem relating to the set value.

[Supplementary Notes 63-1 to 63-26]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine which performs variable display of a first special symbol when a game ball wins in a first starting port, and variably displays a second special symbol when a game ball wins in a second starting port. Then, when it is displayed that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a specific result, it is controlled to a special game state advantageous to the player.

  As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine using a function of simultaneously performing variable display of a first special symbol and variable display of a second special symbol is disclosed. For example, the small special probability of the second special symbol is made higher than that of the first special symbol, the lottery probability is high, and it is easy to win the first starting port. A gaming machine is disclosed that ends facilitation of winning in the first starting port, shifts to a high-precision non-time saving game state, makes it possible to execute a small hitting game, and increases the number of pitches. (See, for example, JP-A-2016-174800).

  The gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-174800 has a new game property utilizing a function of simultaneously performing the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. There is a demand for a gaming machine having new gaming properties.

  The inventions of Supplementary Notes 63-1 to 63-26 have been made in view of such a point, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine having new gaming properties.

(1) The gaming machine described in Appendix 63-1
A gaming machine capable of providing a prize ball or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by firing a game ball toward a game area,
A first starting port (for example, the first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left-handed) toward the game area;
First lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) for performing a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) based on the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port;
First special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying the first special symbol and deriving the result of the first lottery;
A second starting port (for example, the second starting port 440 of FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball fired in a specific manner (for example, right-handed) toward the game area;
A second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) for performing a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) based on the reception of the game ball to the second starting port;
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying a second special symbol and deriving a result of the second lottery;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, a special game executing means (for example, a main game) for executing a special game advantageous to the player. CPU 101);
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the special lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small hitting shutter 6100 in FIG. 254). ) To execute a specific game (for example, a small hitting game) for executing a specific game (for example, a small hitting game) in which a prize ball or a prize ball data is given to a winning port when a game ball is received. Main CPU 101);
A game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that can be controlled to any of a plurality of game states;
Effect control means capable of executing a predetermined effect,
With
The second lottery means,
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed,
The game state control means,
A normal game state (for example, a normal game state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low,
Although the probability of deriving the special result is relatively high, and when the game ball is fired in the specific mode, the specific game is executed based on the reception of the game ball to the second starting port, but the winning Since the acceptance of game balls in the mouth is hindered, an advantageous game state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of launch balls per unit time is less than 1 (for example, a highly accurate time-saving game state) When,
The probability of deriving the special result is relatively high, and the acceptance of the game ball to the winning opening becomes easier than the advantageous game state, so that the game ball is fired in the specific mode per unit time. A specific game state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of launch balls is greater than any of the normal game state and the advantageous game state (for example, a highly accurate non-time saving game state);
And can be controlled to any of a plurality of game states including at least
A state transition control unit (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of executing a control of transitioning from the advantageous game state to the specific game state at a timing that may be different each time when controlled to the advantageous game state;
The effect control means,
When the specific game is executed in the advantageous game state, the timing for shifting to the specific game state (the number of reduced time-saving games, (Remaining number of time-saving games minus the number of time-saving games subtracted).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), in the advantageous gaming state, although the specific game is executed at a high frequency based on the acceptance of the gaming ball to the second starting port, the gaming ball to the winning port is provided. Acceptance may be disturbed, which may cause player discomfort. Therefore, when the specific game is executed in the advantageous game state, by performing an effect indicating the timing of shifting to the specific game state by using the time provided for the execution of the specific game, it is possible that the game may be given to the player. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having new gaming properties, such as reducing pleasure.

  Note that “performing the second lottery so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed” means that the specific condition is satisfied when the first lottery is performed. It does not have to be established (for example, to win a small hit). For example, in the first lottery, a determination is made as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, but the probability that a specific condition is satisfied is 0 (for example, a mode in which a small-hit winning probability is 0 when a small-hit lottery is performed). ), And a mode in which it is not determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a mode in which a small hit lottery itself is not performed).

  In addition, the “effect indicating the timing of shifting to the specific game state” is, for example, the number of remaining time-short games obtained by subtracting the number of time-short games consumed from the prescribed number of times (the determined number of time-saving games). The mode is not limited as long as the timing at which the transition from the advantageous game state to the specific game state can be grasped.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 63-2
A gaming machine capable of providing a prize ball or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by firing a game ball toward a game area,
A first starting port (for example, the first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left-handed) toward the game area;
(First holding means capable of storing a first start memory up to a predetermined number (for example, four) based on the game ball being received in the first start port)
First lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) for performing a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) based on the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port;
First special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying the first special symbol and deriving the result of the first lottery;
A second starting port (for example, the second starting port 440 of FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball fired in a specific manner (for example, right-handed) toward the game area;
A second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) for performing a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) based on the reception of the game ball to the second starting port;
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying a second special symbol and deriving a result of the second lottery;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, a special game executing means (for example, a main game) for executing a special game advantageous to the player. CPU 101);
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the special lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small hitting shutter 6100 in FIG. 254). ) To execute a specific game (for example, a small hitting game) for executing a specific game (for example, a small hitting game) in which a prize ball or a prize ball data is given to a winning port when a game ball is received. Main CPU 101);
A game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that can be controlled to any of a plurality of game states;
Effect control means capable of executing a predetermined effect,
With
The second lottery means,
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed,
The game state control means,
A normal game state (for example, a normal game state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low,
Although the probability of deriving the special result is relatively high, and when the game ball is fired in the specific mode, the specific game is executed based on the reception of the game ball to the second starting port, but the winning Since the acceptance of game balls in the mouth is hindered, an advantageous game state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of launch balls per unit time is less than 1 (for example, a highly accurate time-saving game state) When,
The probability of deriving the special result is relatively high, and the acceptance of the game ball to the winning opening becomes easier than the advantageous game state, so that the game ball is fired in the specific mode per unit time. A specific game state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of launch balls is greater than any of the normal game state and the advantageous game state (for example, a highly accurate non-time saving game state);
And can be controlled to any of a plurality of game states including at least
A state transition control unit (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of executing a control of transitioning from the advantageous game state to the specific game state at a timing that may be different each time when controlled to the advantageous game state;
The effect control means,
Effect determination means (for example, a sub CPU 201) for determining whether to execute a timing suggestion effect indicating a transition timing to the specific game state when the specific game is executed in the advantageous game state;
When the effect determination means determines that the timing suggestion effect is to be executed, a timing suggestion effect of executing an effect indicating the timing of shifting to the specific game state using a time provided for the execution of the specific game. Execution means (for example, sub CPU 201),
The effect determination means,
It is characterized in that it is determined whether or not to execute the timing suggestion effect so that the execution frequency of the timing suggestion effect may be different depending on the shift timing (for example, the number of times of saving time).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), in the advantageous gaming state, although the specific game is executed at a high frequency based on the acceptance of the gaming ball to the second starting port, the gaming ball to the winning port is provided. Acceptance may be disturbed, which may cause player discomfort. Therefore, when the specific game is executed in the advantageous game state, by performing an effect indicating the timing of shifting to the specific game state by using the time provided for the execution of the specific game, it is possible that the game may be given to the player. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having new gaming properties, such as reducing pleasure.

  By the way, in the specific game state, the specific game is executed at a high frequency based on the reception of the game ball to the second starting port. Therefore, if the execution frequency of the timing suggestion effect is high, the interest may be reduced, Therefore, the execution frequency of the execution of the timing suggestion effect lottery is determined based on the transition condition from the advantageous game state to the specific game state (for example, if the time-saving game is used as the transition condition, the specified number of times may be different each time (determined. By making it different according to the number of times of saving time)), it is possible to execute a balanced timing suggestion effect. Further, the player can also estimate the specified number of times from the execution frequency of the timing suggestion effect, and it is interesting to compare the transition timing to the specific game state suggested by the timing suggestion effect with the specified number of times estimated by the player. Can also be given.

  Note that “performing the second lottery so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed” means that the specific condition is satisfied when the first lottery is performed. It does not have to be established (for example, to win a small hit). For example, in the first lottery, a determination is made as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, but the probability that a specific condition is satisfied is 0 (for example, a mode in which a small-hit winning probability is 0 when a small-hit lottery is performed). ), And a mode in which it is not determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a mode in which a small hit lottery itself is not performed).

  In addition, the “effect indicating the timing of shifting to the specific game state” is, for example, the number of remaining time-short games obtained by subtracting the number of time-short games consumed from the prescribed number of times (the determined number of time-saving games). The mode is not limited as long as the timing at which the transition from the advantageous game state to the specific game state can be grasped.

(1) The gaming machine described in Supplementary Note 63-3 is
A gaming machine capable of providing a prize ball or data in place of the prize ball as a result of a game performed by firing a game ball toward a game area,
A first starting port (for example, the first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left-handed) toward the game area;
First lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) for performing a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) based on the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port;
First special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying the first special symbol and deriving the result of the first lottery;
A second starting port (for example, the second starting port 440 of FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball fired in a specific manner (for example, right-handed) toward the game area;
A second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) for performing a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) based on the reception of the game ball to the second starting port;
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying a second special symbol and deriving a result of the second lottery;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, a special game executing means (for example, a main game) for executing a special game advantageous to the player. CPU 101);
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the special lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small hitting shutter 6100 in FIG. 254). ) To execute a specific game (for example, a small hitting game) for executing a specific game (for example, a small hitting game) in which a prize ball or a prize ball data is given to a winning port when a game ball is received. Main CPU 101);
A game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that can be controlled to any of a plurality of game states;
Effect control means capable of executing a predetermined effect,
With
The second lottery means,
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed,
The game state control means,
A normal game state (for example, a normal game state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low,
Although the probability of deriving the special result is relatively high, and when the game ball is fired in the specific mode, the specific game is executed based on the reception of the game ball to the second starting port, but the winning Since the acceptance of the game ball in the mouth is hindered, an advantageous game state (for example, a highly accurate time-saving game state) in which the number of awarded balls or the expected value of the award ball data with respect to the number of fired balls per unit time is less than 1 ,
The probability of deriving the special result is relatively high, and the acceptance of the game ball to the winning opening becomes easier than the advantageous game state, so that the game ball is fired in the specific mode per unit time. A specific game state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of launch balls is greater than any of the normal game state and the advantageous game state (for example, a highly accurate non-time saving game state);
And can be controlled to any of a plurality of game states including at least
A state transition control unit (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of executing a control of transitioning from the advantageous game state to the specific game state at a timing that may be different each time when controlled to the advantageous game state;
The effect control means,
When being controlled to the advantageous gaming state, an index (for example, a determined number of hours saved) that can indicate a transition timing to the specific gaming state is displayed, and when shifting from the advantageous gaming state to the specific gaming state, An index display unit (for example, a sub CPU 201) that changes (for example, subtracts and displays) the index so as to approach the specific mode each time the variable display is performed so that the index becomes a specific mode (for example, 0). ).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), when controlled to the advantageous gaming state, it is not known at what timing the game is shifted to the specific gaming state, and the player becomes suspicious and may lose interest. Therefore, an index that can indicate the timing of transition to the specific game state is displayed, and when transitioning from the advantageous game state to the specific game state, the index is set to the specific mode so that the variable mode approaches the specific mode every time the variable display is performed. By changing the index, it is possible for the player to know that the game will shift to the specific game state when the index is in the specific mode, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

(2) In the gaming machine of the above (1),
The indicator display means,
When controlled to the advantageous gaming state, an index that can indicate a timing different from the transition timing to the specific gaming state is displayed as an initial index, and apart from the variable display, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, Also, a specific index display unit (for example, a sub CPU 201) that changes the index so as to approach the specific mode even when the mission is achieved is provided.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), not only the variable display is performed and the index approaches the specific mode but also the index changes when the specific condition is satisfied. It is possible to enhance the entertainment of the game until shifting to the specific game state.

  In addition, “the timing different from the transition timing to the specific game state” is, for example, a case where the transition to the specific game state is performed when the variable display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, the determined number of time savings). It means a false number different from the number.

  Further, “changing the index” includes not only a change approaching a specific mode (for example, a change approaching 0), but also a change away from a specific mode (for example, a change moving away from 0). For example, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the mission is achieved), the index is changed so as to approach the specific mode, and when the specific condition is not satisfied (for example, when the mission fails), the index is changed from the specific mode. The index that moves away may be changed.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
Before the transition timing in the advantageous gaming state, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed to derive the special result, and based on the special result being derived. When the executed special game is completed and further controlled to the advantageous game state,
The specific indicator display means,
In place of the initial index, it is configured to be able to continuously display the index displayed when the special result is derived.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), a special result is derived and a special game is executed before the transition timing (for example, before the determined time-saving game is consumed) in the advantageous game state, and the special game is executed. Is ended and the state is controlled again to the advantageous game state, the index is displayed continuously from the index displayed when the special result is derived. Therefore, it is possible for the player to see that the mode of the indicator changes from the continuation of the previous time, and a loss that may be caused by executing the special game before the index changes to the specific mode in the last advantageous gaming state. The feeling can be reduced.

  Note that “performing the second lottery so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed” means that the specific condition is satisfied when the first lottery is performed. It does not have to be established (for example, to win a small hit). For example, in the first lottery, a determination is made as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, but the probability that a specific condition is satisfied is 0 (for example, a mode in which a small-hit winning probability is 0 when a small-hit lottery is performed). ), And a mode in which it is not determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a mode in which a small hit lottery itself is not performed).

(1) The gaming machine described in Supplementary Note 63-4
A gaming machine capable of providing a prize ball or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by firing a game ball toward a game area,
A first starting port (for example, the first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left-handed) toward the game area;
First lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) for performing a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) based on the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port;
First special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying the first special symbol and deriving the result of the first lottery;
A second starting port (for example, the second starting port 440 of FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball fired in a specific manner (for example, right-handed) toward the game area;
A second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) for performing a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) based on the reception of the game ball to the second starting port;
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying a second special symbol and deriving a result of the second lottery;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, a special game executing means (for example, a main game) for executing a special game advantageous to the player. CPU 101);
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small hitting shutter 6100 in FIG. 254) Is operated to execute a specific game (for example, a small hitting game) that facilitates the reception of a prize ball or a winning port provided with prize ball data when the game ball is received (for example, a main game). CPU 101);
A game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that can be controlled to any of a plurality of game states;
Effect control means (for example, sub-CPU 201) for controlling a specific effect when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived. When,
With
The second lottery means,
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed,
The game state control means,
A normal game state (for example, a normal game state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low,
When the derivation probability of the special result is relatively high and the game ball is fired in the specific mode, the specific game is executed based on the reception of the game ball to the second starting port, Since the acceptance of the game ball into the winning opening is hindered, an advantageous game state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of launch balls per unit time is less than 1 (for example, a highly accurate time reduction game state) )When,
Since the derivation probability of the special result is relatively high, and the acceptance of the game ball to the winning opening becomes easier than the advantageous game state, when the game ball is fired in the specific mode, the unit time A specific game state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of launch balls per unit is larger than any of the normal game state and the advantageous game state (for example, a high-precision non-time-saving game state);
And can be controlled to any of a plurality of game states including at least
A state transition control unit (for example, a main CPU 101) capable of executing a control for transitioning to the specific game state after the variable display is performed a specified number of times, which may be different each time when controlled to the advantageous game state; ,
The effect control means,
When the variable display of the second special symbol is performed as the last variable display of the specified number of times, and when the special result (for example, a big hit) is derived during the variable display of the second special symbol, It has a specific effect execution means for executing the same effect as the specific effect that can be performed or an effect that is difficult to distinguish (for example, a reach effect).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), when the game machine is controlled to the advantageous game state, the game machine can be controlled to shift to the specific game state after performing the variable display a specified number of times. Also, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed as the last variable display of the specified number of times, a specific effect that can be performed when a special result is derived during the variable display of the second special symbol. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having a new gaming property such that an effect that is difficult to distinguish from the same effect or a specific effect is executed. In particular, the last variable display of the specified number of times suggests that there is a possibility that the game will be shifted to the specific game state, and it is possible to stimulate the player's willingness to play. In addition, usually, in the advantageous game state or the specific game state, there is no guarantee that a specific effect is always executed, but in the last variable display of the specified number of times, the same effect as the specific effect or an effect that is difficult to distinguish is executed. Therefore, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Note that “performing the second lottery so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed” means that the specific condition is satisfied when the first lottery is performed. It does not have to be established (for example, to win a small hit). For example, in the first lottery, a determination is made as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, but the probability that a specific condition is satisfied is 0 (for example, a mode in which a small-hit winning probability is 0 when a small-hit lottery is performed). ), And a mode in which it is not determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a mode in which a small hit lottery itself is not performed).

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
A specified number determination unit (for example, a main CPU 101 that determines the number of time savings) that determines the specified number of times to be one of a plurality of specified numbers;
The specific effect execution means,
The specific effect is not limited to the specified number of times determined by the specified number of times determination means, and the variable effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol at least one of the plurality of specified times is variably displayed. It is configured to be executable.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the specified number of times is determined to be one of the plurality of specified numbers. In addition, the same effect as a specific effect or an effect that is difficult to distinguish is not limited to the determined number of times, and is performed during the variable display of the special symbol in at least one of the number of times specified, so each time, , The player can be instigated, and the specified number of games can be very hot for the player.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
In the special game,
As a special game to be executed when the first special result is derived, a first special game to which a large amount of prize balls or prize ball data is given (for example, a big hit game of 8R),
As a special game to be executed when the second special result is derived, a second special game (for example, a 2R jackpot) in which a prize ball or prize ball data provided is smaller than the first special game is given. Game) and
The effect control means,
A first special effect execution means capable of executing a first special effect when the first special result may be derived;
A second special effect execution means capable of executing a second special effect when the second special result may be derived;
Has,
The specific effect execution means,
The specific effect is executed in the same mode as the second special effect or in a mode indistinguishable in appearance.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when shifting from the advantageous gaming state to the specific gaming state, the specific mode is the same as when there is a possibility that the second special game may be executed, or in a mode in which it is indistinguishable in appearance. Since the effect is executed, it is possible to reduce discouragement that may occur due to not being a special game when shifting from the advantageous game state to the specific game state.

(1) The gaming machine described in Supplementary Note 63-5 is:
A gaming machine capable of providing a prize ball or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by firing a game ball toward a game area,
A first starting port (for example, the first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left-handed) toward the game area;
First holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of first start memories based on the game balls being received in the first starting port,
First lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) for performing a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) for the first start memory based on the first start condition being satisfied;
First special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying the first special symbol and deriving the result of the first lottery;
A second starting port (for example, the second starting port 440 of FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball fired in a specific manner (for example, right-handed) toward the game area;
A second holding unit (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of second starting memories based on the game balls being received in the second starting port;
A second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) for performing a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) for the second start memory based on the satisfaction of the second start condition;
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying a second special symbol and deriving a result of the second lottery;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, a special game executing means (for example, a main game) for executing a special game advantageous to the player. CPU 101);
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small hitting shutter 6100 in FIG. 254) Is operated to execute a specific game (for example, a small hitting game) that facilitates the reception of a prize ball or a winning port provided with prize ball data when the game ball is received (for example, a main game). CPU 101);
Game state control means controllable to any of a plurality of game states,
Prior to the first lottery and / or the second lottery, the first starting memory stored in the first holding unit and / or the second starting memory stored in the second holding unit is Prior determination means (for example, main CPU 101) for determining whether a special result can be derived and whether the specific condition can be satisfied;
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined effect;
With
The second lottery means,
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed,
The game state control means,
A normal game state (for example, a normal game state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low,
The derivation probability of the special result is relatively high, and when the game ball is fired in the specific mode, the execution frequency of the specific game executed based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second start port is the execution frequency of the specific game. A specific game state (for example, a high-precision non-time saving game state) that is higher than the normal game state,
It is configured to be controllable to any of a plurality of game states including at least,
The effect control means,
In the specific game state, each of the second start-up memory stored by the second holding unit and the other second start-up memory stored next to the one second start-up memory is the specific start-up memory. When it is determined by the pre-determination means that a condition can be satisfied and that the special result can be derived, the specific game and the special game appear to be one advantageous game. It is characterized by having a series production execution means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of executing a series production (for example, a premier production) capable of performing the following.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), in the specific game state, when the specific game and the special game are determined to be executed by the preliminary determination means, the specific game and the special game are one advantageous game. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having a new gaming property, such as performing a series of effects that can be viewed as if. When this series of effects is performed, the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data obtained by adding the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data given in the specific game and the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data given in the special game Can be paid, so that a larger amount of prize balls or prize ball data can be paid out than the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data provided in one special game, and it is possible to enhance gaming interest. It becomes.

  Note that “performing the second lottery so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed” means that the specific condition is satisfied when the first lottery is performed. It does not have to be established (for example, to win a small hit). For example, in the first lottery, a determination is made as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, but the probability that a specific condition is satisfied is 0 (for example, a mode in which a small-hit winning probability is 0 when a small-hit lottery is performed). ), And a mode in which it is not determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a mode in which a small hit lottery itself is not performed).

  In addition, the description of “specific conditions may be satisfied” and “special results may be derived” include descriptions that the specific conditions may not be satisfied and the special results may not be derived, respectively. However, this is because when a special result (for example, “big hit”) is derived in one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the other lottery result is “special result”. Is taken into account in that a loss may be displayed.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The effect control means,
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and the special result may be derived, a special display is performed during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Special effect execution means (for example, sub CPU 201) for executing an effect (for example, a reach effect);
After the special game is started, an interval effect execution means (for example, a sub CPU 201) for executing an interval effect between the end of one round game and the start of the next round game;
Has,
The series effect execution means,
After the specific game is executed, during the variable display of the second special symbol with respect to the second start memory, in which the special result is determined by the preliminary determination unit, the special effect is performed. It is characterized in that it is possible to execute an effect in the same manner as the interval effect or in a mode indistinguishable in appearance without executing it.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second starting memory, which is determined by the preliminary determination means that the special result is to be derived, the special effect is originally intended. When being executed, the series effect execution means, during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second start memory, in which after the specific game is executed, it is determined by the preliminary determination means that the special result is derived is determined by the preliminary determination means. Since the effect is executed in the same manner as the interval effect or in a manner indistinguishable in appearance without executing the special effect, it is possible to reduce the unnaturalness that can occur between the specific game and the special game. .

(1) The gaming machine described in Supplementary Note 63-6 is:
A gaming machine capable of providing a prize ball or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by firing a game ball toward a game area,
A first starting port (for example, the first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left-handed) toward the game area;
First holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of first start memories based on the game balls being received in the first starting port,
First lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) for performing a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) for the first start memory based on the first start condition being satisfied;
First special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying the first special symbol and deriving the result of the first lottery;
A second starting port (for example, the second starting port 440 of FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball fired in a specific manner (for example, right-handed) toward the game area;
A second holding unit (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of second starting memories based on the game balls being received in the second starting port;
A second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) for performing a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) for the second start memory based on the satisfaction of the second start condition;
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying a second special symbol and deriving a result of the second lottery;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, a special game executing means (for example, a main game) for executing a special game advantageous to the player. CPU 101);
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small hitting shutter 6100 in FIG. 254) Is operated to execute a specific game (for example, a small hitting game) that facilitates the reception of a prize ball or a winning port provided with prize ball data when the game ball is received (for example, a main game). CPU 101);
Game state control means controllable to any of a plurality of game states,
Prior to the first lottery and / or the second lottery, the first starting memory stored in the first holding unit and / or the second starting memory stored in the second holding unit is Prior determination means (for example, main CPU 101) for determining whether a special result can be derived and whether the specific condition can be satisfied;
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined effect;
With
The second lottery means,
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed,
The game state control means,
A normal game state (for example, a normal game state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low,
The derivation probability of the special result is relatively high, and when the game ball is fired in the specific mode, the execution frequency of the specific game executed based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second start port is the execution frequency of the specific game. A specific game state (for example, a high-precision non-time saving game state) that is higher than the normal game state,
It is configured to be controllable to any of a plurality of game states including at least,
The effect control means,
In the specific game state, a plurality of second start memories are stored by the second holding means, and the second start memory and the special start memory in which the specific condition can be satisfied are stored in the plurality of second start memories. When it is determined by the pre-determination means that both of the second start memory from which the result of the second game can be derived are included, it is as if the specific game and the special game are one advantageous game. It is characterized by having a series production execution means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of executing a series production (for example, a premier production) that can be shown.

  According to the gaming machine of (1), when a plurality of second start memories are stored by the second holding means in the specific game state, a special result is derived for all of the plurality of second start memories. It is determined whether or not a specific condition can be satisfied or not before the second lottery. Then, the plurality of second start memories stored by the second holding unit include both a start memory in which a specific condition can be satisfied and a start memory from which the special result can be derived. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having a new gaming property, such as performing a series of productions that can make the specific game and the special game appear as one advantageous game when it is determined that It becomes. When this series of effects is performed, the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data obtained by adding the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data given in the specific game and the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data given in the special game Can be paid, so that a larger amount of prize balls or prize ball data can be paid out than the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data provided in one special game, and it is possible to enhance gaming interest. It becomes.

  Further, "performing the second lottery so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed" means that the specific condition is satisfied when the first lottery is performed. It does not have to be established (for example, to win a small hit). For example, in the first lottery, a determination is made as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, but the probability that a specific condition is satisfied is 0 (for example, a mode in which a small-hit winning probability is 0 when a small-hit lottery is performed). ), And a mode in which it is not determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a mode in which a small hit lottery itself is not performed).

  Further, the second start memory in which a specific condition can be satisfied and the second start memory in which a special result can be derived need not be stored in the second holding means continuously. A start memory preliminarily determined to be lost may be included between a start memory that can be established and a start memory from which a special result can be derived.

  In addition, the description of “specific conditions may be satisfied” and “special results may be derived” include descriptions that the specific conditions may not be satisfied and the special results may not be derived, respectively. However, this is because when a special result (for example, “big hit”) is derived in one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the other lottery result is “special result”. Is taken into account in that a loss may be displayed.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The effect control means,
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and the special result may be derived, a special display is performed during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Special effect execution means (for example, sub CPU 201) for executing an effect (for example, a reach effect);
After the special game is started, an interval effect execution means (for example, a sub CPU 201) for executing an interval effect between the end of one round game and the start of the next round game;
Has,
The series effect execution means,
After the specific game is executed, during the variable display of the second special symbol with respect to the second start memory, in which the special result is determined by the preliminary determination unit, the special effect is performed. It is characterized in that it is possible to execute an effect in the same manner as the interval effect or in a mode indistinguishable in appearance without executing it.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second starting memory, which is determined by the preliminary determination means that the special result is to be derived, the special effect is originally intended. When being executed, the series effect execution means, during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second start memory, in which after the specific game is executed, it is determined by the preliminary determination means that the special result is derived is determined by the preliminary determination means. Since the effect is executed in the same manner as the interval effect or in a manner indistinguishable in appearance without executing the special effect, it is possible to reduce the unnaturalness that can occur between the specific game and the special game. .

(1) The gaming machine described in Supplementary Note 63-7 is:
A gaming machine capable of providing a prize ball or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by firing a game ball toward a game area,
A first starting port (for example, the first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left-handed) toward the game area;
First holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of first start memories based on the game balls being received in the first starting port,
First lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) for performing a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) for the first start memory based on the first start condition being satisfied;
First special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying the first special symbol and deriving the result of the first lottery;
A second starting port (for example, the second starting port 440 of FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball fired in a specific manner (for example, right-handed) toward the game area;
A second holding unit (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of second starting memories based on the game balls being received in the second starting port;
A second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) for performing a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) for the second start memory based on the satisfaction of the second start condition;
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying a second special symbol and deriving a result of the second lottery;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, a special game executing means (for example, a main game) for executing a special game advantageous to the player. CPU 101);
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small hitting shutter 6100 in FIG. 254) Is operated to execute a specific game (for example, a small hitting game) that facilitates the reception of a prize ball or a winning port provided with prize ball data when the game ball is received (for example, a main game). CPU 101);
Game state control means controllable to any of a plurality of game states,
Prior to the first lottery and / or the second lottery, the first starting memory stored in the first holding unit and / or the second starting memory stored in the second holding unit is Prior determination means (for example, main CPU 101) for determining whether a special result can be derived and whether the specific condition can be satisfied;
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined effect;
With
The second lottery means,
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed,
The game state control means,
A normal game state (for example, a normal game state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low,
The derivation probability of the special result is relatively high, and when the game ball is fired in the specific mode, the execution frequency of the specific game executed based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second start port is the execution frequency of the specific game. A specific game state (for example, a high-precision non-time saving game state) that is higher than the normal game state,
It is configured to be controllable to any of a plurality of game states including at least,
The effect control means,
In the specific game state, a plurality of second start memories are stored by the second holding means, and the second start memory and the special start memory in which the specific condition can be satisfied are stored in the plurality of second start memories. When it is determined by the pre-determination means that both of the second start memory from which the result of the second game can be derived are included, it is as if the specific game and the special game are one advantageous game. It has a series production execution means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of executing a series production (for example, a premium production) that can be shown,
The series effect execution means,
When the predetermination unit determines that the first start memory stored by the first holding unit does not include the start memory from which the special result can be derived, the series of effects is performed. Characterized by performing the following.

  According to the gaming machine of (1), when a plurality of second start memories are stored by the second holding means in the specific game state, a special result is derived for all of the plurality of second start memories. It is determined whether or not a specific condition can be satisfied or not before the second lottery. Then, the plurality of second start memories stored by the second holding unit include both a start memory in which a specific condition can be satisfied and a start memory from which the special result can be derived. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having a new gaming property, such as performing a series of productions that can make the specific game and the special game appear as one advantageous game when it is determined that It becomes. When this series of effects is performed, the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data obtained by adding the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data given in the specific game and the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data given in the special game Can be paid, so that a larger amount of prize balls or prize ball data can be paid out than the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data provided in one special game, and it is possible to enhance gaming interest. It becomes.

  By the way, in the case of performing a series of productions in which a specific game and a special game can be made to appear as if they are one advantageous game, the second startup memory from which a series of productions is started but a special result can be derived Before the "big hit" is derived, there is a possibility that the first special symbol is variably displayed and a special result is derived. Therefore, by executing a series of effects when it is determined by the pre-determination means that the first memory stored by the first holding means does not include a startup memory from which a special result can be derived. In such a case, the occurrence of such a situation is suppressed.

  Note that the second start memory in which a specific condition can be satisfied and the second start memory in which a special result can be derived need not be stored in the second holding means continuously. A start memory preliminarily determined to be lost may be included between a start memory that can be established and a start memory from which a special result can be derived.

  In addition, the description of “specific conditions may be satisfied” and “special results may be derived” include descriptions that the specific conditions may not be satisfied and the special results may not be derived, respectively. However, this is because when a special result (for example, “big hit”) is derived in one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the other lottery result is “special result”. Is taken into account in that a loss may be displayed.

  Further, "performing the second lottery so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed" means that the specific condition is satisfied when the first lottery is performed. It does not have to be established (for example, to win a small hit). For example, in the first lottery, a determination is made as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, but the probability that a specific condition is satisfied is 0 (for example, a mode in which a small-hit winning probability is 0 when a small-hit lottery is performed). ), And a mode in which it is not determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a mode in which a small hit lottery itself is not performed).

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The effect control means,
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and the special result may be derived, a special display is performed during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Special effect execution means (for example, sub CPU 201) for executing an effect (for example, a reach effect);
After the special game is started, an interval effect execution means (for example, a sub CPU 201) for executing an interval effect between the end of one round game and the start of the next round game;
Has,
The series effect execution means,
After the specific game is executed, during the variable display of the second special symbol with respect to the second start memory, in which the special result is determined by the preliminary determination unit, the special effect is performed. It is characterized in that it is possible to execute an effect in the same manner as the interval effect or in a mode indistinguishable in appearance without executing it.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second starting memory, which is determined by the preliminary determination means that the special result is to be derived, the special effect is originally intended. When being executed, the series effect execution means, during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second start memory, in which after the specific game is executed, it is determined by the preliminary determination means that the special result is derived is determined by the preliminary determination means. Since the effect is executed in the same manner as the interval effect or in a manner indistinguishable in appearance without executing the special effect, it is possible to reduce the unnaturalness that can occur between the specific game and the special game. .

(1) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 63-8:
A gaming machine capable of providing a prize ball or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by firing a game ball toward a game area,
A first starting port (for example, the first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left-handed) toward the game area;
First holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of first start memories based on the game balls being received in the first starting port,
First lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) for performing a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) for the first start memory based on the first start condition being satisfied;
First special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying the first special symbol and deriving the result of the first lottery;
A second starting port (for example, the second starting port 440 of FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball fired in a specific manner (for example, right-handed) toward the game area;
A second holding unit (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of second starting memories based on the game balls being received in the second starting port;
A second lottery unit (for example, the main CPU 101) for performing a second lottery (for example, a first special lottery) for the second start memory based on the establishment of the second start condition;
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying a second special symbol and deriving a result of the second lottery;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, a special game executing means (for example, a main game) for executing a special game advantageous to the player. CPU 101);
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small hitting shutter 6100 in FIG. 254) Is operated to execute a specific game (for example, a small hitting game) that facilitates the reception of a prize ball or a winning port provided with prize ball data when the game ball is received (for example, a main game). CPU 101);
Game state control means controllable to any of a plurality of game states,
Prior to the first lottery and / or the second lottery, the first starting memory stored in the first holding unit and / or the second starting memory stored in the second holding unit is Prior determination means (for example, main CPU 101) for determining whether a special result can be derived and whether the specific condition can be satisfied;
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined effect;
With
The second lottery means,
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed,
The game state control means,
A normal game state (for example, a normal game state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low,
The derivation probability of the special result is relatively high, and when the game ball is fired in the specific mode, the execution frequency of the specific game executed based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second start port is the execution frequency of the specific game. A specific game state (for example, a high-precision non-time saving game state) that is higher than the normal game state,
It is configured to be controllable to any of a plurality of game states including at least,
The special results include:
After the special game is executed, the first special result is controlled to a gaming state in which the derivation probability of the special result is relatively low, and after the special game is executed, the special result A second special result of controlling the game state in which the derivation probability of the game is relatively high is included,
The prior determination means,
When it is determined that the special result is derived, it is also possible to determine whether the special result is the first special result or the second special result,
The effect control means,
In the specific game state, a plurality of second start memories are stored by the second holding means, and a specific second start memory that can satisfy the specific condition is included in the plurality of second start memories. When it is determined by the pre-determination means that both a special second start memory from which a special result can be derived is included, it is determined whether the specific game and the special game are one advantageous game. Has a series production execution means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of executing a series production (for example, a premiere production) that can be shown as follows.
The series effect execution means,
When the special second start memory is determined to be the second special result by the preliminary determination means, first an effect indicating that the special second start memory is the first special result. During the variable display of the second special symbol for the special second start memory, a promotion effect indicating that the first special result has been promoted to the second special result can be executed. It is characterized by being done.

  According to the gaming machine of (1), when a plurality of second start memories are stored by the second holding means in the specific game state, a special result is derived for all of the plurality of second start memories. It is determined whether or not a specific condition can be satisfied or not before the second lottery. Then, the plurality of second start memories stored by the second holding unit include both a start memory in which a specific condition can be satisfied and a start memory from which the special result can be derived. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having a new gaming property, such as performing a series of productions that can make the specific game and the special game appear as one advantageous game when it is determined that It becomes. When this series of effects is performed, the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data obtained by adding the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data given in the specific game and the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data given in the special game Can be paid, so that a larger amount of prize balls or prize ball data can be paid out than the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data provided in one special game, and it is possible to enhance gaming interest. It becomes.

  By the way, when a series of effects that can be made to appear as if they are one advantageous game with a specific game and a special game are performed, a special game is derived between the specific game and the special game. Since the variable display of the second special symbol is sometimes performed, the variable display may cause an unnatural state in which time is generated between the specific game and the special game. Therefore, when the second start memory determined to be a special result by the preliminary determination means is the second special result, first, even though the special second start memory is the second special result, Performs an effect indicating that it is the first special result, and is promoted from the first special result to the second special result during the variable display of the second special symbol for the special second start memory. And a promotion effect indicating the effect is performed. This makes it possible to suppress unnaturalness that can occur between the specific game and the special game.

  Note that the specific second start memory in which a specific condition can be satisfied and the special second start memory in which a special result can be derived need not be stored in the second holding means continuously. Between the specific second start memory in which the condition can be satisfied and the special second start memory in which a special result can be derived, a start memory determined in advance as a loss may be included.

  In addition, the description of “specific conditions may be satisfied” and “special results may be derived” include descriptions that the specific conditions may not be satisfied and the special results may not be derived, respectively. However, this is because when a special result (for example, “big hit”) is derived in one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the other lottery result is “special result”. Is taken into account in that a loss may be displayed.

  Further, "performing the second lottery so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed" means that the specific condition is satisfied when the first lottery is performed. It does not have to be established (for example, to win a small hit). For example, in the first lottery, a determination is made as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, but the probability that a specific condition is satisfied is 0 (for example, a mode in which a small-hit winning probability is 0 when a small-hit lottery is performed). ), And a mode in which it is not determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a mode in which a small hit lottery itself is not performed).

(1) The gaming machine described in Supplementary Note 63-9 is:
A gaming machine capable of providing a prize ball or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by firing a game ball toward a game area,
A first starting port (for example, the first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left-handed) toward the game area;
First holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of first start memories based on the game balls being received in the first starting port,
First lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) for performing a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) for the first start memory based on the first start condition being satisfied;
First special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying the first special symbol and deriving the result of the first lottery;
A second starting port (for example, the second starting port 440 of FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball fired in a specific manner (for example, right-handed) toward the game area;
A second holding unit (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of second starting memories based on the game balls being received in the second starting port;
A second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) for performing a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) for the second start memory based on the satisfaction of the second start condition;
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying a second special symbol and deriving a result of the second lottery;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, a special game executing means (for example, a main game) for executing a special game advantageous to the player. CPU 101);
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small hitting shutter 6100 in FIG. 254) Is operated to execute a specific game (for example, a small hitting game) that facilitates the reception of a prize ball or a winning port provided with prize ball data when the game ball is received (for example, a main game). CPU 101);
Game state control means controllable to any of a plurality of game states,
Prior to the first lottery and / or the second lottery, the first starting memory stored in the first holding unit and / or the second starting memory stored in the second holding unit is Prior determination means (for example, main CPU 101) for determining whether a special result is derived and whether the specific condition is satisfied;
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined effect;
With
The second lottery means,
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed,
The game state control means,
A normal game state (for example, a normal game state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low,
The derivation probability of the special result is relatively high, and when the game ball is fired in the specific mode, the execution frequency of the specific game executed based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second start port is the execution frequency of the specific game. A specific game state (for example, a high-precision non-time saving game state) that is higher than the normal game state,
It is configured to be controllable to any of a plurality of game states including at least,
The second special symbol variable control means,
The variable display of the second special symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, normal reach for high start, super reach A for high start, super reach B for high start) and the predetermined time A variable display time (for example, a super-speed fluctuation) that is variably displayed only for a short time shorter than the variable display time.
The effect control means,
In the specific game state, each of the second start-up memory stored by the second holding unit and the other second start-up memory stored next to the one second start-up memory is the specific start-up memory. When it is determined by the pre-determination means that a condition can be satisfied and the special result can be derived, the specific game and the special game appear to be one advantageous game. A series production execution means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of executing a series production (for example, a premiere production) capable of performing
The series effect execution means,
The series effect is configured to be executed when the variable display of the second special symbol performed for the other second start storage is performed by the short-time variable display.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), in the specific game state, when the specific game and the special game are determined to be executed by the preliminary determination means, the specific game and the special game are one advantageous game. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having a new gaming property, such as performing a series of effects that can be viewed as if. When this series of effects is performed, the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data obtained by adding the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data given in the specific game and the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data given in the special game Can be paid, so that a larger amount of prize balls or prize ball data can be paid out than the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data provided in one special game, and it is possible to enhance gaming interest. It becomes.

  By the way, when a series of effects that can be made to appear as if they are one advantageous game with a specific game and a special game are performed, a special game is derived between the specific game and the special game. Since the variable display of the second special symbol is sometimes performed, the variable display may cause an unnatural state in which time is generated between the specific game and the special game. Therefore, when the variable display of the second special symbol performed for the other second start storage (the second start storage determined that the special result is derived by the preliminary determination unit) is performed by the short-time variable display. , To perform a series of productions. This makes it possible to suppress unnaturalness that can occur between the specific game and the special game.

  Note that “performing the second lottery so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed” means that the specific condition is satisfied when the first lottery is performed. It does not have to be established (for example, to win a small hit). For example, in the first lottery, a determination is made as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, but the probability that a specific condition is satisfied is 0 (for example, a mode in which a small-hit winning probability is 0 when a small-hit lottery is performed). ), And a mode in which it is not determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a mode in which a small hit lottery itself is not performed).

  In addition, the description of “specific conditions may be satisfied” and “special results may be derived” include descriptions that the specific conditions may not be satisfied and the special results may not be derived, respectively. However, this is because when a special result (for example, “big hit”) is derived in one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the other lottery result is “special result”. Is taken into account in that a loss may be displayed.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The effect control means,
When the execution of the special game is started, the game further includes opening effect execution means (for example, main CPU 101) for executing an opening effect for a predetermined time,
The second special symbol variable control means,
In the specific game state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed and the special result is derived, the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed at a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 50%). And can be executed only for a short time shorter than the predetermined time (for example, 1000 msec of super-speed fluctuation),
The series effect execution means,
When the variable display of the second special symbol performed for the other second start memory is performed for the short time, the series of variable display of the second special symbol performed for the one second start memory is performed. It is configured to perform a production.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed and a special result is derived, the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed only for a short time shorter than a predetermined time. When performed, a series of effects is performed during the variable display of the second special symbol performed for one second start memory, so that unnaturalness that can occur between the specific game and the special game can be reduced. It becomes possible.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The effect control means,
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and the special result may be derived, a special display is performed during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Special effect execution means (for example, sub CPU 201) for executing an effect (for example, a reach effect);
After the special game is started, an interval effect execution means (for example, a sub CPU 201) for executing an interval effect between the end of one round game and the start of the next round game;
Has,
The series effect execution means,
After the specific game is executed, during the variable display of the second special symbol with respect to the second start memory, in which the special result is determined by the preliminary determination unit, the special effect is performed. It is characterized in that it is possible to execute an effect in the same manner as the interval effect or in a mode indistinguishable in appearance without executing it.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), during the variable display of the second special symbol in the second starting memory in which the special determination is made by the preliminary determination means, a special effect is normally provided. When being executed, the series effect executing means, during the variable display of the second special symbol with respect to the second start memory, in which after the specific game has been executed, it is determined by the preliminary determining means that a special result is to be derived. Since the effect is executed in the same manner as the interval effect or in a manner indistinguishable in appearance without executing the special effect, it is possible to reduce the unnaturalness that can occur between the specific game and the special game. .

(1) The gaming machine described in Supplementary Note 63-10 is
A gaming machine capable of providing a prize ball or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by firing a game ball toward a game area,
A first starting port (for example, the first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left-handed) toward the game area;
First holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of first start memories based on the game balls being received in the first starting port,
First lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) for performing a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) for the first start memory based on the first start condition being satisfied;
First special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying the first special symbol and deriving the result of the first lottery;
A second starting port (for example, the second starting port 440 of FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball fired in a specific manner (for example, right-handed) toward the game area;
A second holding unit (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of second starting memories based on the game balls being received in the second starting port;
A second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) for performing a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) for the second start memory based on the satisfaction of the second start condition;
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying a second special symbol and deriving a result of the second lottery;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, a round game for opening and closing a predetermined movable member is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. Special game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) for executing a game,
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small hitting shutter 6100 in FIG. 254) Is operated to execute a specific game (for example, a small hitting game) that facilitates the reception of a prize ball or a winning port provided with prize ball data when the game ball is received (for example, a main game). CPU 101);
Game state control means controllable to any of a plurality of game states,
Prior to the first lottery and / or the second lottery, the first starting memory stored in the first holding unit and / or the second starting memory stored in the second holding unit is Prior determination means (for example, main CPU 101) for determining whether a special result can be derived and whether the specific condition can be satisfied;
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined effect;
With
The second lottery means,
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed,
The game state control means,
A normal game state (for example, a normal game state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low,
The derivation probability of the special result is relatively high, and when the game ball is fired in the specific mode, the execution frequency of the specific game executed based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second start port is the execution frequency of the specific game. A specific game state (for example, a high-precision non-time saving game state) that is higher than the normal game state,
It is configured to be controllable to any of a plurality of game states including at least,
The prior determination means,
When the special game is being executed, at least with respect to the second starting memory stored in the second holding means, it is determined whether or not the specific condition can be satisfied prior to the second lottery. And
The effect control means,
When the specific game state is controlled after the special game is completed, the specific condition is satisfied with respect to the second start storage stored in the second holding unit during execution of the special game. When the possibility is determined by the preliminary determination means, a specific effect execution means (for example, the sub CPU 201) for performing a specific effect indicating that the number of rounds of the round game executed in the special game has increased in a pseudo manner. It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), when the special game is controlled to the specific game state after the end of the special game, during the execution of the special game before the control to the specific game state, the second holding means When it is determined by the pre-determination means that a specific condition can be satisfied for the stored second start memory, a specific effect indicating that the number of rounds of the round game executed in the special game has increased in a pseudo manner. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having a new gaming property such that the game is performed. When such a special effect is performed, the round game executed in the special game does not change, but it is possible to make it appear as if the number of rounds has increased, and the number of rounds is larger than the number of rounds that should have been executed. By making the player think that the round game is performed over the round, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

  Note that “performing the second lottery so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed” means that the specific condition is satisfied when the first lottery is performed. It does not have to be established (for example, to win a small hit). For example, in the first lottery, a determination is made as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, but the probability that a specific condition is satisfied is 0 (for example, a mode in which a small-hit winning probability is 0 when a small-hit lottery is performed). ), And a mode in which it is not determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a mode in which a small hit lottery itself is not performed).

  In addition, the description of "a special result can be derived" and "a specific condition can be satisfied" include a description that a special result may not be derived and a specific condition may not be satisfied, respectively. However, this is because when a special result (for example, “big hit”) is derived in one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the other lottery result is “special result”. Is taken into account in that a losing may be displayed.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The effect control means,
When the special game is over, the game device includes an end effect control unit that performs an end effect (for example, an ending effect) indicating the end of the special game,
The end effect control means,
When the specific effect is performed, the end effect is not performed when the special game ends, but is performed when the specific game that can be executed after the special game ends ends. It is characterized.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the specific effect is performed, the end effect, which is originally performed when the special game ends, is not performed when the specific effect is performed, and is executed after the special game ends. Since the game is performed when a specific game is completed, it is possible to increase the credibility that the number of rounds has increased.

(1) The gaming machine described in Supplementary Note 63-11 is
A gaming machine capable of providing a prize ball or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by firing a game ball toward a game area,
A first starting port (for example, the first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left-handed) toward the game area;
First holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of first start memories based on the game balls being received in the first starting port,
First lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) for performing a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) for the first start memory based on the first start condition being satisfied;
First special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying the first special symbol and deriving the result of the first lottery;
A second starting port (for example, the second starting port 440 of FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball fired in a specific manner (for example, right-handed) toward the game area;
A second holding unit (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of second starting memories based on the game balls being received in the second starting port;
A second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) for performing a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) for the second start memory based on the satisfaction of the second start condition;
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying a second special symbol and deriving a result of the second lottery;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, a special game executing means (for example, a main game) for executing a special game advantageous to the player. CPU 101);
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when a lottery result is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, a small hitting shutter 6100) is operated. A specific game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) for executing a specific game (for example, a small hit game) which makes it easy to receive a prize ball or a winning port provided with prize ball data when a game ball is received. ,
A game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that can be controlled to any of a plurality of game states;
Prior determination means (for example, the main CPU 101) for determining whether or not the special result can be derived before the second lottery, at least for the second start storage stored in the second holding means;
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined effect;
With
The variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol variable control means and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol variable control means can be performed in parallel,
The second lottery means,
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed,
The game state control means,
The first gaming state (for example, the expected value of the variable display execution number of the first special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the variable display execution number of the second special symbol per unit time) The expected value of the execution number of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the execution number of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time. Second gaming state (for example, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-saving time gaming state)
And can be controlled to any of a plurality of game states including at least, and can be shifted from the second game state to the first game state,
The effect control means,
In the first game state, when the second starting memory is stored by the second holding means, an effect suggesting a determination result of the second determining memory by the preliminary determining means is determined by a predetermined condition. It is characterized by being configured to be executable based on the establishment.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), in the first gaming state, the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time is longer than the expected value of the execution number of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time. Since the expected value of the number of times is larger, the game is played by firing game balls in a normal manner. In the second gaming state, the expected value of the number of times of execution of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the number of times of execution of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time. Since it is large, a game is played by firing a game ball in a specific mode. Then, when shifting from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the second starting memory may be stored by the second holding means. In the first gaming state, since the expected value of the number of times of performing the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is low, the derivation of the result of the second lottery is delayed, and the interest may be reduced. Therefore, in the first game state, when the second starting memory is stored by the second holding means, an effect indicating the determination result of the second determining memory by the preliminary determining means is satisfied, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having new gaming properties, such as executing based on the above. Thereby, even if the derivation of the result of the second lottery is delayed, the determination result by the preliminary determination unit is suggested, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. In particular, even if a plurality of second start memories are stored in the second holding means when the second game state shifts to the first game state, the second start condition for all of the plurality of second start memories is stored. Since the judgment result by the pre-judgment means is suggested without waiting for the establishment of, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. In particular, when the second start memory stored in the second holding means is the predetermined number which is the upper limit when the transition from the second gaming state to the first gaming state is made, the effect is remarkable.

  Note that “performing the second lottery so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed” means that the specific condition is satisfied when the first lottery is performed. It does not have to be established (for example, to win a small hit). For example, in the first lottery, a determination is made as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, but the probability that a specific condition is satisfied is 0 (for example, a mode in which a small-hit winning probability is 0 when a small-hit lottery is performed). ), And a mode in which it is not determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a mode in which a small hit lottery itself is not performed).

  In addition, the description of “a special result can be derived” includes a description that a special result may not be derived, but this is one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. On the one hand, when a special result (for example, "big hit") is derived, a loss may be displayed even if the other lottery result is "special result". .

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The effect control means,
As the predetermined condition, based on that the game ball fired in the normal mode is received in a predetermined reception port different from the first startup port, the preliminary determination means for the second startup storage It is characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute an effect that suggests the result of the determination by.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the reception of the game ball fired in the normal mode to the predetermined reception port different from the first starting port, and An effect indicating the result of the determination by the preliminary determination unit regarding the starting memory is executed. Therefore, even if it shifts from the second game state in which game balls are fired in a specific mode to the first game state in which game balls are fired in a normal mode, it is possible to promote the promotion of a game.

  Note that the above predetermined condition may be established based on that one game ball fired in a normal mode is received in a predetermined reception port, or may be fired in a normal mode. It may be established based on the fact that a plurality of game balls have been received at a predetermined reception port. Further, in addition to the above conditions, a predetermined condition may be established based on the establishment of a weighting condition.

(1) The gaming machine described in Supplementary Note 63-12 is
A gaming machine capable of providing a prize ball or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by firing a game ball toward a game area,
A first starting port (for example, the first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left-handed) toward the game area;
First holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of first start memories based on the game balls being received in the first starting port,
First lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) for performing a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) for the first start memory based on the first start condition being satisfied;
First special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying the first special symbol and deriving the result of the first lottery;
A second starting port (for example, the second starting port 440 of FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball fired in a specific manner (for example, right-handed) toward the game area;
A second holding unit (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of second starting memories based on the game balls being received in the second starting port;
A second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) for performing a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) for the second start memory based on the satisfaction of the second start condition;
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying a second special symbol and deriving a result of the second lottery;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, a special game executing means (for example, a main game) for executing a special game advantageous to the player. CPU 101);
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when a lottery result is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, a small hitting shutter 6100) is operated. A specific game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) for executing a specific game (for example, a small hit game) which makes it easy to receive a prize ball or a winning port provided with prize ball data when a game ball is received. ,
A game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that can be controlled to any of a plurality of game states;
Prior determination means (for example, the main CPU 101) for determining whether or not the special result can be derived before the second lottery, at least for the second start storage stored in the second holding means;
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined effect;
With
The variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol variable control means and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol variable control means can be performed in parallel,
The second lottery means,
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed,
The game state control means,
The first gaming state (for example, the expected value of the variable display execution number of the first special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the variable display execution number of the second special symbol per unit time) The expected value of the execution number of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the execution number of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time. Second gaming state (for example, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-saving time gaming state)
And can be controlled to any of a plurality of game states including at least, and can be shifted from the second game state to the first game state,
The effect control means,
In the first game state, when the second starting memory is stored by the second holding means, the second determining means determines whether or not the second starting memory is stored. A second start-result preliminary effect means (for example, sub-effects) that can execute a special suggestion effect (for example, a waiting force suppression effect) that suggests that the determination result is the special result based on a predetermined condition being satisfied. CPU 201),
A first reach effect indicating that the special result may be derived after the variable display of the first special symbol is performed when a result of the first lottery is at least the special result. Reach effect execution means (for example, sub CPU 201) for executing
Has,
The reach effect execution means,
Even though the special suggestion effect has been executed by the second start result preliminary effect means, the first reach effect is executed based on the result of the first lottery being the special result, and When the variation display of the second special symbol for the specific second start memory is started during execution of the 1-reach effect, the first reach effect is indicated to indicate that the result of the first lottery is a loss. After a temporary stop in the losing mode, a second reach effect different from the first reach effect can be executed.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), in the first gaming state, the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time is longer than the expected value of the execution number of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time. Since the expected value of the number of times is larger, the game is played by firing game balls in a normal manner. In the second gaming state, the expected value of the number of times of execution of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the number of times of execution of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time. Since it is large, a game is played by firing a game ball in a specific mode. Then, when shifting from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the second starting memory may be stored by the second holding means. In the first gaming state, since the expected value of the number of times of performing the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is low, the derivation of the result of the second lottery is delayed, and the interest may be reduced. Therefore, in the first game state, when a specific second start memory from which a special result is derived is stored by the second holding unit, the determination result of the specific second start memory by the preliminary determination unit is determined. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having new gaming properties, such as executing a suggested effect based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. Thereby, even if the derivation of the result of the second lottery is delayed, the determination result by the preliminary determination unit is suggested, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  By the way, the special suggestion effect is performed at a stage where the variable display of the second special symbol for the specific second start memory has not yet started. Accordingly, the first reach effect is executed based on the fact that the result of the first lottery is a special result, and during the execution of the first reach effect, the variation display of the second special symbol for the specific second start memory is displayed. May be started. Accordingly, the first reach effect is executed based on the fact that the result of the first lottery is a special result, and during the execution of the first reach effect, the variation display of the second special symbol for the specific second start memory is displayed. When started, the first reach effect is temporarily stopped in a losing manner, and then a second reach effect different from the first reach effect is started. The second reach production is performed based on the fact that the result of the first lottery is a special result inherited from the first reach production, but is a different reach production from the first reach and the second reach. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to detect that the second reach effect is based on the result of the first lottery being a special result. Thereby, it is possible to control the special game state based on the result of the first lottery, not the result of the second lottery, without giving a sense of incongruity to the player.

  Note that “performing the second lottery so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed” means that the specific condition is satisfied when the first lottery is performed. It does not have to be established (for example, to win a small hit). For example, in the first lottery, a determination is made as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, but the probability that a specific condition is satisfied is 0 (for example, a mode in which a small-hit winning probability is 0 when a small-hit lottery is performed). ), And a mode in which it is not determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a mode in which a small hit lottery itself is not performed).

  In addition, the description of “a special result can be derived” includes a description that a special result may not be derived, but this is one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. On the one hand, when a special result (for example, "big hit") is derived, a loss may be displayed even if the other lottery result is "special result". .

  In addition, “the predetermined condition is satisfied” is, for example, preferably a condition that can be satisfied as a result of the player playing the game, from the viewpoint of promoting the game. For example, when a game ball is won, the game may be established based on a winning in a prize ball or a general winning port to which prize ball data is given, or based on a predetermined number or more of game balls winning in the general winning port. May be established, or may be established based on winning of a game ball to the first starting port.

(2) In the gaming machine of the above (1),
The reach effect execution means,
Even though the second reach production is performed based on the result of the first lottery being the special result, the second reach production is performed with the result of the second lottery being the special result. The effect is to make it appear as if it were performed based on

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the second reach effect is an effect that makes it appear as if the result of the second lottery is a special result, so that the player is further enhanced. It is possible to control to the special game state based on the result of the first lottery without giving a feeling of strangeness.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The second start result pre-stage effect means,
As the predetermined condition, based on that the game ball fired in the normal mode is received in a predetermined reception port different from the first startup port, the preliminary determination means for the second startup storage It is characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute an effect that suggests the result of the determination by.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the reception of the game ball fired in a normal manner to the predetermined reception port different from the first starting port, and the second condition is satisfied. An effect indicating the result of the determination by the preliminary determination unit regarding the starting memory is executed. Therefore, even if it shifts from the second game state in which game balls are fired in a specific mode to the first game state in which game balls are fired in a normal mode, it is possible to promote the promotion of a game.

  Note that the above predetermined condition may be established based on that one game ball fired in a normal mode is received in a predetermined reception port, or may be fired in a normal mode. It may be established based on the fact that a plurality of game balls have been received at a predetermined reception port. Further, in addition to the above conditions, a predetermined condition may be established based on the establishment of a weighting condition.

(1) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Notes 63-13 is:
A gaming machine capable of providing a prize ball or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by firing a game ball toward a game area,
A first starting port (for example, the first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left-handed) toward the game area;
First holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of first start memories based on the game balls being received in the first starting port,
First lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) for performing a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) for the first start memory based on the first start condition being satisfied;
First special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying the first special symbol and deriving the result of the first lottery;
A second starting port (for example, the second starting port 440 of FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball fired in a specific manner (for example, right-handed) toward the game area;
A second holding unit (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of second starting memories based on the game balls being received in the second starting port;
A second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) for performing a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) for the second start memory based on the satisfaction of the second start condition;
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying a second special symbol and deriving a result of the second lottery;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, a special game executing means (for example, a main game) for executing a special game advantageous to the player. CPU 101);
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when a lottery result is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, a small hitting shutter 6100) is operated. A specific game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) for executing a specific game (for example, a small hit game) which makes it easy to receive a prize ball or a winning port provided with prize ball data when a game ball is received. ,
A game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that can be controlled to any of a plurality of game states;
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined effect;
With
The variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol variable control means and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol variable control means can be performed in parallel,
The second lottery means,
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed,
The game state control means,
The first gaming state (for example, the expected value of the variable display execution number of the first special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the variable display execution number of the second special symbol per unit time) The expected value of the execution number of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the execution number of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time. Second gaming state (for example, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-saving time gaming state)
And can be controlled to any of a plurality of game states including at least, and can be shifted from the second game state to the first game state,
The effect control means,
When being controlled to the first gaming state, an effect image based on the result of the first lottery is displayed in a predetermined display area,
In the first gaming state, when the result of the second lottery is the special result, in a mode in which viewing of the effect image based on the result of the first lottery displayed in the predetermined display area is not hindered, A suggestion effect means (for example, a sub CPU 201) for performing a suggestion effect for suggesting to the player that the result of the second lottery is the special result,
The suggestion means,
When the variation display of the first special symbol performed when the variation display of the second special symbol is started is based on the special result, a non-execution process is performed so that the suggestion effect is not always performed. It is characterized by performing.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), in the first gaming state, an effect image based on the result of the first lottery is displayed in a predetermined display area, so that the result of the second lottery is a special result. However, it is extremely difficult for a player to detect it. Therefore, in the first gaming state, when the result of the second lottery is a special result, the fact that the result of the second lottery is a special result in a mode that does not hinder the visual recognition of the effect image based on the result of the first lottery. Is performed in a manner that can be grasped by the player. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the result of the second lottery is a special result. However, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the variable display of the first special symbol may be a variable display based on a special result. In such a case, the sub CPU 201 can provide a gaming machine having a new game property such as performing a process of not performing the suggestion effect so that the suggestion effect is not always performed. Become. This allows the player to not notice that the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and a special result may be derived, and based on the fact that the result of the first lottery is a special result. Control to a special game state.

  Note that “performing the second lottery so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed” means that the specific condition is satisfied when the first lottery is performed. It does not have to be established (for example, to win a small hit). For example, in the first lottery, a determination is made as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, but the probability that a specific condition is satisfied is 0 (for example, a mode in which a small-hit winning probability is 0 when a small-hit lottery is performed). ), And a mode in which it is not determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a mode in which a small hit lottery itself is not performed).

(1) The gaming machine described in Supplementary Note 63-14 is
A gaming machine capable of providing a prize ball or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by firing a game ball toward a game area,
A first starting port (for example, the first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left-handed) toward the game area;
First holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of first start memories based on the game balls being received in the first starting port,
First lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) for performing a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) for the first start memory based on the first start condition being satisfied;
First special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying the first special symbol and deriving the result of the first lottery;
A second starting port (for example, the second starting port 440 of FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball fired in a specific manner (for example, right-handed) toward the game area;
A second holding unit (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of second starting memories based on the game balls being received in the second starting port;
A second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) for performing a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) for the second start memory based on the satisfaction of the second start condition;
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying a second special symbol and deriving a result of the second lottery;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, a special game executing means (for example, a main game) for executing a special game advantageous to the player. CPU 101);
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when a lottery result is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, a small hitting shutter 6100) is operated. A specific game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) for executing a specific game (for example, a small hit game) which makes it easy to receive a prize ball or a winning port provided with prize ball data when a game ball is received. ,
A game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that can be controlled to any of a plurality of game states;
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined effect;
With
The variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol variable control means and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol variable control means can be performed in parallel,
The second lottery means,
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed,
The game state control means,
The first gaming state (for example, the expected value of the variable display execution number of the first special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the variable display execution number of the second special symbol per unit time) The expected value of the execution number of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the execution number of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time. Second gaming state (for example, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-saving time gaming state)
And can be controlled to any of a plurality of game states including at least, and can be shifted from the second game state to the first game state,
The effect control means,
In the first game state, when the second special symbol is variably displayed and the specific condition is satisfied, an effect indicating the execution timing of the specific game executed based on the satisfaction of the specific condition. The present invention is characterized by having timing suggestion effect executing means executed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), in the first gaming state, the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time is longer than the expected value of the execution number of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time. Since the expected value of the number of times is larger, the game is played by firing game balls in a normal manner. In the second gaming state, the expected value of the number of times of execution of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the number of times of execution of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time. Since it is large, a game is played by firing a game ball in a specific mode. Then, when shifting from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the variable display of the second special symbol may be being executed. In the first game state, since the expected value of the number of times of execution of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is low, the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is not easily ended, and the result of the second lottery is not completed. May be delayed and interest may be reduced. In particular, if the result of deriving that the specific condition is satisfied is derived after the derivation of the result of the second lottery is delayed, the interest of interest is significantly reduced. Therefore, in the first game state, when the second special symbol is variably displayed and a specific condition is established, an effect indicating the execution timing of the specific game to be executed based on the establishment of the specific condition, It is possible to provide a gaming machine having new gaming properties, such as executing based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. Thereby, even if the result indicating that the specific condition is satisfied is derived after the derivation of the result of the second lottery is delayed, the execution timing of the specific game is suggested, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. It becomes possible.

  Note that “performing the second lottery so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed” means that the specific condition is satisfied when the first lottery is performed. It does not have to be established (for example, to win a small hit). For example, in the first lottery, a determination is made as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, but the probability that a specific condition is satisfied is 0 (for example, a mode in which a small-hit winning probability is 0 when a small-hit lottery is performed). ), And a mode in which it is not determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a mode in which a small hit lottery itself is not performed).

  In addition, “the predetermined condition is satisfied” is, for example, preferably a condition that can be satisfied as a result of the player playing the game, from the viewpoint of promoting the game. For example, when a game ball is won, the game may be established based on a winning in a prize ball or a general winning port to which prize ball data is given, or based on a predetermined number or more of game balls winning in the general winning port. May be established, or may be established based on winning of a game ball to the first starting port.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
Prior to the second lottery, at least the second start storage stored in the second holding unit further includes a preliminary determination unit (for example, the main CPU 101) that determines whether or not the specific condition can be satisfied. ,
The timing suggestion effect execution means,
When the second starting memory is stored by the second holding means, and when it is determined that the specific condition can be satisfied by the preliminary determining means for the second starting memory, the specific condition is determined. The execution timing of the specific game to be executed based on the establishment of is indicated.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the first gaming state shifts to the second gaming state, not only is the variable display of the second special symbol being executed, but also the second holding means is used for the second special symbol. A starting memory may be stored. In the first gaming state, since the expected value of the number of times of performing the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is low, the derivation of the result of the second lottery is delayed, and the interest may be reduced. In particular, if a result indicating that a specific condition is satisfied is derived after the derivation of the result of the second lottery is delayed, the interest of interest is significantly reduced. Therefore, in the first game state, when the second starting memory is stored by the second holding means, if it is determined by the preliminary determining means for the second starting memory that the specific condition can be satisfied, By suggesting the execution timing of the specific game to be executed based on the establishment of the specific condition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest that may be caused by a delay in deriving the result of the second lottery.

  In addition, the description of "the specific condition may be satisfied" includes a description that the specific condition may not be satisfied, but this is one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. On the one hand, when a special result (for example, "big hit") is derived, even if the other lottery result is a "specific result", a loss may be displayed in some cases. is there.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The timing suggestion effect execution means,
As the predetermined condition, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on that the game ball fired in the normal mode is received in a predetermined reception port different from the first starting port. An effect indicating the execution timing of the specific game executed when the specific condition is satisfied is configured to be executable.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the reception of the game ball fired in a normal manner to the predetermined reception port different from the first starting port, and the second condition is satisfied. An effect that indicates the execution timing of a specific game that is executed when a special symbol is variably displayed and a specific condition is satisfied is executed. Therefore, even if the game state shifts from the second game state in which the game balls are fired in a specific mode to the first game state in which the game balls are fired in a normal mode, it is determined based on the reception of the game balls into a predetermined reception port. Since the execution timing of the game is suggested, it is possible to promote the promotion of the game.

  Note that the above predetermined condition may be established based on that one game ball fired in a normal mode is received in a predetermined reception port, or may be fired in a normal mode. It may be established based on the fact that a plurality of game balls have been received at a predetermined reception port. Further, in addition to the above conditions, a predetermined condition may be established based on the establishment of a weighting condition.

(1) The gaming machine described in Supplementary Note 63-15 is
A gaming machine capable of providing a prize ball or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by firing a game ball toward a game area,
A first starting port (for example, a first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) and a second starting port (for example, a second starting port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball fired toward the game area;
The first starting memory is stored up to a predetermined number (for example, four) based on the reception of the game ball in the first starting port, and the first starting memory is stored based on the reception of the game ball in the second starting port. Holding means (for example, main CPU 101) for storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of two start-up memories;
A first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) is performed on the first start memory based on the first start condition being satisfied, and the first lottery is performed on the second start memory based on the second start condition being satisfied. Lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery);
Special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying a first special symbol based on the result of the first lottery and variably displaying a second special symbol based on the result of the second lottery;
When a special result is derived by variably displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol and performing a special game advantageous to the player (for example, the main CPU 101);
With
The lottery means,
Even if the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed, as long as the first starting condition or the second starting condition is satisfied, the special symbol corresponding to the established starting condition is not changed. Normal lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing lottery,
When both the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, a specific lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs both the first lottery and the second lottery in a predetermined order;
Has,
The specific lottery means,
When both the first lottery and the second lottery are performed in a predetermined order, but the result of any one of the first lottery and the second lottery performed earlier is the special result. The non-winning process is executed so that the result of another lottery does not become the special result.

  According to the gaming machine of (1), since both the first special lottery and the second special lottery are performed in a predetermined order, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special lottery are reduced while reducing the control load. The variable display of symbols can be performed in parallel. In addition, when one of the lotteries has a special result, the other lottery is executed as a non-winning process so that both the first lottery and the second lottery do not have a special result at the same time. By doing so, it is possible to provide a new game property such that both the first lottery and the second lottery can be prevented from having special results at the same time.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The normal variable display pattern having a relatively large expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time is relatively different from the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time. Storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing at least an extremely small long-time variable display pattern;
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a main CPU 101) for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol to one of the plurality of variable display patterns;
A game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) for controlling to any one of a plurality of game states;
Further comprising
The game state control means,
The expected value of the execution number of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is smaller than the expected value of the execution number of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time, and the launch sphere per unit time A first gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number is smaller than 1;
The expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time. A second gaming state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number is larger than the first gaming state (for example, a highly accurate non-time saving gaming state);
Can be controlled to any of a plurality of game states including
The variable display pattern determining means,
The variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol can be determined to be the normal variable display pattern at least in the first gaming state, and the result of the first lottery in the second gaming state is The long-term variable display pattern can be determined based on a special result.

  According to the gaming machine of (2), when the result of the first lottery in the second gaming state is a special result, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in a long-time variable display pattern. In addition, if the result of the first lottery is a special result, a non-winning process is executed in which the result of the second lottery does not become a special result, so that the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in a long-time variable display pattern. While playing the game, it is possible to provide a new game property such that the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of launch balls per unit time guarantees a game in the first game state.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (2),
The storage means,
As the long-term variable display pattern, a plurality of long-term variable display patterns having different expected values of the number of times of execution of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time are stored,
The variable display pattern determining means,
The variable display pattern for variable display of the first special symbol, which is determined based on the result of the first lottery in the second game state being the special result, is the plurality of long-time variable display patterns. Characterized in that it is determined to be one of the following.

  According to the gaming machine of (3), when the result of the first lottery in the second gaming state is a special result, the variable display of the first special symbol is the expected value of the number of times of performing the variable display per unit time. Is determined to be one of a plurality of long-time variable display patterns different from each other, so that a period in which a game in the first game state is guaranteed depends on which of the plurality of long-time variable display patterns is determined. As a result, it is possible to enhance the entertainment interest of the game.

(1) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Notes 63-16,
A gaming machine capable of providing a prize ball or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by firing a game ball toward a game area,
A first starting port (for example, a first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) and a second starting port (for example, a second starting port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball fired toward the game area;
The first starting memory is stored up to a predetermined number (for example, four) based on the reception of the game ball in the first starting port, and the first starting memory is stored based on the reception of the game ball in the second starting port. Holding means (for example, main CPU 101) for storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of two start-up memories;
A first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) is performed on the first start memory based on the first start condition being satisfied, and the first lottery is performed on the second start memory based on the second start condition being satisfied. Lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery);
Special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying a first special symbol based on the result of the first lottery and variably displaying a second special symbol based on the result of the second lottery;
When a special result is derived by variably displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol and performing a special game advantageous to the player (for example, the main CPU 101);
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when a small hit is won), a specific game (for example, a small hit game) having a lower profit degree than when the special game is executed is executed. A specific game execution means to be executed (for example, main CPU 101);
With
The lottery means,
Even if the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed, as long as the first starting condition or the second starting condition is satisfied, the special symbol corresponding to the established starting condition is not changed. Normal lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing lottery,
When both the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, a specific lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs both the first lottery and the second lottery in a predetermined order;
Has,
The specific lottery means,
When both the first lottery and the second lottery are performed in a predetermined order, but the result of any one of the first lottery performed first and the second lottery is the special result. , Perform a non-winning process so that the result of another lottery does not become the special result,
When the specific condition is satisfied in any one of the first lottery and the second lottery performed earlier, the non-winning process is not performed, and the result of the other lottery is the special lottery. It is characterized by conducting a lottery so that a result can be obtained.

  According to the gaming machine of (1), since both the first special lottery and the second special lottery are performed in a predetermined order, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special lottery are reduced while reducing the control load. The variable display of symbols can be performed in parallel. In addition, when one of the lotteries has a special result, the other lottery is executed as a non-winning process so that both the first lottery and the second lottery do not have a special result at the same time. By doing so, it is possible to provide a new game property such that both the first lottery and the second lottery can be prevented from having special results at the same time.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The normal variable display pattern having a relatively large expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time is relatively different from the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time. Storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing at least an extremely small long-time variable display pattern;
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a main CPU 101) for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol to one of the plurality of variable display patterns;
A game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) for controlling to any one of a plurality of game states;
Further comprising
The game state control means,
The expected value of the execution number of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is smaller than the expected value of the execution number of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time, and the launch sphere per unit time A first gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number is smaller than 1;
The expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time. A second gaming state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number is larger than the first gaming state (for example, a highly accurate non-time saving gaming state);
Can be controlled to any of a plurality of game states including
The variable display pattern determining means,
The variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol can be determined to be the normal variable display pattern at least in the first gaming state, and the result of the first lottery in the second gaming state is The long-term variable display pattern can be determined based on a special result.

  According to the gaming machine of (2), when the result of the first lottery in the second gaming state is a special result, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in a long-time variable display pattern. In addition, if the result of the first lottery is a special result, a non-winning process is executed in which the result of the second lottery does not become a special result, so that the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in a long-time variable display pattern. While playing the game, it is possible to provide a new game property such that the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of launch balls per unit time guarantees a game in the first game state.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (2),
The storage means,
As the long-term variable display pattern, a plurality of long-term variable display patterns having different expected values of the number of times of execution of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time are stored,
The variable display pattern determining means,
The variable display pattern for variable display of the first special symbol, which is determined based on the result of the first lottery in the second game state being the special result, is the plurality of long-time variable display patterns. Characterized in that it is determined to be one of the following.

  According to the gaming machine of (3), when the result of the first lottery in the second gaming state is a special result, the variable display of the first special symbol is the expected value of the number of times of performing the variable display per unit time. Is determined to be one of a plurality of long-time variable display patterns different from each other, so that a period in which a game in the first game state is guaranteed depends on which of the plurality of long-time variable display patterns is determined. As a result, it is possible to enhance the entertainment interest of the game.

(1) The gaming machine described in Supplementary Note 63-17 is
A first starting port (for example, the first starting port 5442 in FIG. 270) capable of receiving a game ball fired in a predetermined manner (for example, left-handed) toward the game area;
First lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing a first lottery based on reception of a game ball to the first starting port,
A first special symbol variable control unit (for example, the main CPU 101) that variably displays a first special symbol based on a result of the first lottery unit and derives a result of the first lottery (for example, the first special lottery). When,
A second starting port (for example, the second starting port 4401 in FIG. 270) capable of receiving a game ball fired in the predetermined mode (for example, left-handed) toward the game area;
A second lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) based on the reception of the game ball to the second starting port;
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying a second special symbol and deriving a result of the second lottery;
Storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing a plurality of tables in which variable display patterns provided for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol are provided;
Variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern to be used for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol by using any one of the plurality of tables (for example, the variable display pattern determining means shown in FIG. A main CPU 101 for executing a time determination table setting process);
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, "big hit") is derived, a special game execution means (for example, a special game advantageous to the player) is executed. , Main CPU 101);
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small hitting shutter 6100 in FIG. 270) Is operated to execute a specific game (for example, a small hit game) in which when a game ball is received, a prize ball or a prize hole to which prize ball data is given (for example, a small hit prize port 5400) is easily received. Specific game execution means (for example, main CPU 101),
With
The second lottery means,
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed,
The storage means,
As a table used for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the second special symbol,
A first table in which a plurality of variable display patterns in which the expected value of the number of times of execution of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is relatively small is prepared (for example, the fluctuation time of the special symbol for low start in FIG. 258) A determination table), and a second table (for example, a high-start pattern shown in FIG. 259) in which a plurality of variable display patterns in which the expected value of the variable display execution number of the second special symbol per unit time is relatively large are prepared. Special symbol fluctuation time determination table)
At least remember,
The variable display pattern determining means,
The variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the second special symbol is always determined using the first table, and the variable of the first special symbol is changed based on the reception of the game ball to the first starting port. And a second special symbol variable display pattern determining means that can be determined using the second table instead of the first table based on the display being performed and the specific condition being satisfied. .

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the second special symbol is changed based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied based on the reception of the game ball to the first starting port. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having a new gaming property, such as changing from the first table to the second table. In addition, for example, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest that may occur when a game ball cannot be made to enter a winning port even though a specific game is executed.

  Note that “performing the second lottery so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed” means that the specific condition is satisfied when the first lottery is performed. It does not have to be established (for example, to win a small hit). For example, in the first lottery, a determination is made as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, but the probability that a specific condition is satisfied is 0 (for example, a mode in which a small-hit winning probability is 0 when a small-hit lottery is performed). ), And a mode in which it is not determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a mode in which a small hit lottery itself is not performed).

(1) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Notes 63-18,
A gaming machine to which a prize ball or prize ball data can be given as a result of a game performed by firing a game ball toward a game area,
A first starting port (for example, the first starting port 5442 in FIG. 268) capable of receiving a game ball fired toward the game area;
First lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing a first lottery based on reception of a game ball to the first starting port,
First special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying the first special symbol and deriving the result of the first lottery;
A second starting port (for example, the second starting port 4401 in FIG. 268) capable of receiving a game ball fired toward the game area;
A second lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing a second lottery based on the reception of the game ball to the second starting port,
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying a second special symbol and deriving a result of the second lottery;
When a special result is derived by variably displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol and performing a special game advantageous to the player (for example, the main CPU 101);
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small hitting shutter 6100 in FIG. 268) Is activated, and when a game ball is received, a specific game (for example, a small hit) which facilitates acceptance into a specific winning port (for example, the small hit port 5400 in FIG. 268) to which a prize ball or prize ball data is given. A specific game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) for executing a game);
Game state control means controllable to any of a plurality of game states,
With
The game state control means,
A normal game state (for example, "normal game state") in which the derivation probability of the special result is relatively low;
An advantageous game state in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively high and the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of launch balls per unit time is less than 1 (for example, a “highly accurate time reduction game state”). )When,
The derivation probability of the special result is relatively high, and the frequency of accepting game balls to the specific winning opening by executing the specific game is increased, so that the number of award balls or the number of award balls relative to the number of launch balls per unit time is increased. A specific game state in which the expected value of the number of data is larger than any of the normal game state and the advantageous game state (for example, a “highly accurate non-time saving game state”);
And can be controlled to any of a plurality of game states including at least
When a special symbol is variably displayed in the advantageous gaming state a specified number of times (for example, the determined number of times saved), state transition control means capable of executing control for shifting from the advantageous gaming state to the specific gaming state (for example, A main CPU 101).

  According to the gaming machine of (1), when the special symbol is variably displayed in the advantageous gaming state a predetermined number of times, the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of launch balls per unit time is changed to the normal game state And a specific game state larger than any of the advantageous game state. Therefore, even if a special result is not derived in the advantageous gaming state, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a new gaming property such that a decrease in interest can be suppressed by shifting to the specific gaming state.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
By determining the specified number of times to be one of a plurality of specified numbers (for example, 24, 30, 36, 42, 48, and 100 times), the advantageous game state is switched to the specific game state. A transition timing determining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of making the transition timing different each time;
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) for performing a predetermined effect without explicitly indicating the prescribed number of times determined by the shift timing determining means;
Is further provided.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), it is possible to make it difficult or impossible for the player to grasp the transition timing from the advantageous gaming state to the specific advantageous gaming state, thereby further enhancing the interest. It becomes possible.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
Variable display pattern determining means (for example, main CPU 101) for determining at least a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the second special symbol;
A first table in which a plurality of variable display patterns in which the expected value of the number of times of execution of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is relatively small is prepared (for example, the variation of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 258) A time (variable display time) determination table) and a second table in which a plurality of relatively large variable display patterns are prepared (for example, a variable time (variable display time) determination table for a special symbol for a high start in FIG. 259). Storage means for storing at least (for example, main ROM 102);
Further comprising
The variable display pattern determining means,
The variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the second special symbol is determined with reference to the first table at least in the advantageous gaming state, and the transition from the advantageous gaming state to the specific gaming state is performed. On the basis of the first table, is determined with reference to the second table,
The second lottery means,
The second lottery is configured to perform the specific condition with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed.

  According to the gaming machine of (3), based on the transition from the advantageous gaming state to the specific gaming state, the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the second special symbol is changed to the second special pattern per unit time. A variable display pattern in which the expected value of the number of times of execution of the variable display of the symbol is relatively large is determined, and a specific condition is established with a higher probability in the second lottery than when the first lottery is performed. Therefore, the specific game is executed at a high frequency. In this way, it is possible to realize a specific game state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of launch balls per unit time is larger than any of the normal game state and the advantageous game state.

(1) The gaming machine described in Supplementary Notes 63-19 is
When a predetermined movable member is operated, a special starting port that facilitates or enables reception of a game ball,
A normal starting area (for example, the pass gate 49 of FIG. 274) that can receive the game ball;
A normal lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101) capable of performing a normal lottery in a mode in which all or a rough lottery is a normal hit based on a game ball passing through the normal starting area;
Based on the result of the ordinary lottery being the ordinary hit, the predetermined movable member is actuated, and movable control means (for example, the main CPU 101) for facilitating or enabling reception of the game ball to the special starting port. )When,
Holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing a predetermined number (for example, four) of start memories based on the reception of the game ball in the special starting port;
Special lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing a special lottery for the start memory based on the satisfaction of the start condition;
When a special result is variably displayed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, a special game (for example, a special winning game (for example, a big winning game 540 in FIG. 274)) that enables the reception of a game ball to a special winning game (a big winning game 540 in FIG. 274). Special game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) for executing a big hit game)
A specific movable member (for example, a small hitting shutter 6100) based on the fact that the result of the special lottery is a specific result (for example, a small hit) that is all or an approximate result when the result is not the special result. The specific game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101) for executing a specific game (for example, a small hit game) that enables the game ball to be received in a specific winning port (for example, the small hit port 5400 in FIG. 274) by operating )When,
The game state after the end of the special game is changed to an advantageous game state in which the specific movable member is substantially in an operable state because all or approximately the specific result is obtained unless the result of the special lottery is the special result. A game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that can be controlled to a time saving state),
At least when a game ball is received in the special winning port and when a game ball is received in the specific winning port, a prize providing means (for example, from the main CPU 101) capable of providing a prize ball or prize ball data is provided. A payout / launch control circuit that pays out prize balls according to the order of
With
At least during the execution of the special game, the starting memory is stored by the holding means based on the reception of the game ball to the special starting port, but the starting condition is not established,
The normal starting area is
During the execution of the special game, it is configured such that it becomes difficult or impossible to pass the game ball to the normal starting area by receiving the game ball in the special winning opening, and during the execution of the special game. Even if there is no, when the specific movable member is in the operating state, it is configured such that it is difficult or impossible to pass the game ball to the normal starting area by receiving the game ball in the specific winning opening. It is characterized by becoming.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), it is difficult or impossible to pass the game ball to the normal starting area during the execution of the special game, and even if the special game is not being executed, the specific movable member It is difficult or impossible to pass the game ball to the normal starting area when is operated. Therefore, until the special lottery for the start memory stored in the holding means is executed when the special game is completed, the specific movable member is substantially in the operating state, and the specific start is performed during the execution of the specific game. When the special game is executed by making it difficult or impossible to pass the game ball, the prize ball or the prize ball data given during the execution of the special game, and the starting storage number stored in the holding means Prize ball or prize ball data that is given by executing the specific game of the minute, and the number of prize balls or prize ball data given when the special game is executed once. The expected value of the number can be increased. Thereby, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having new gaming properties.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
After the end of the special game, before the game is controlled to the advantageous game state, an interval control means (for example, main CPU 101) for controlling to an interval state is further provided,
The starting conditions are:
Even if the start memory is stored in the holding means when the special game is finished, it is configured not to be established as long as it is controlled to the interval state,
The specific winning opening is provided downstream of the special winning opening,
The ball path of the game ball between the special winning opening and the specific winning opening,
A game ball that has not been accepted in the special winning opening is more than the total time of the time controlled to the interval state and the time required for the specific movable member to operate when the starting condition is satisfied. It is characterized in that the time to reach the mouth is longer.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the special winning opening is not accepted than the total time of the time controlled in the interval state and the time required for the specific movable member to operate when the starting condition is satisfied. The time required for the game ball to reach the specific winning opening becomes longer. Therefore, when a game ball that cannot reach the special winning opening due to reaching the special winning opening immediately after the end of the special game reaches the specific winning opening, the specific movable member will be activated, so that the special winning opening is provided. The game balls are accepted and it becomes difficult or impossible to pass the game balls to the normal starting area. Thereby, during the execution of the specific game for the number of start memories stored in the holding means at the time of the end of the special game, the game ball is reliably received in the specific winning opening, and the game ball is won in the specific winning opening. It is possible to guarantee an opportunity to give a prize ball or prize ball data based on the.

(1) The gaming machine described in Supplementary Note 63-20 is
A gaming machine to which a prize ball or prize ball data can be given as a result of a game performed by firing a game ball toward a game area,
A first starting port (for example, the first starting port 5443 in FIG. 275) that facilitates or enables reception of a game ball fired in a predetermined manner (for example, right-handed) toward the game area;
A first special lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of performing a first special lottery based on reception of a game ball into the first starting port;
First special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and deriving the result of the first special lottery;
A second starting port (for example, the second starting port 440 of FIG. 275) capable of receiving a game ball fired in the predetermined manner toward the game area and not received by the first starting port;
A second special lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of performing a second special lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port;
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of variably displaying a second special symbol and deriving a result of the second special lottery;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result is derived, special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) for controlling a special game state advantageous to the player is provided. ,
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when a lottery result is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, a small hitting shutter 6100 in FIG. 275) Is operated, and when a game ball is received, a specific game (for example, a small hit) that facilitates acceptance into a specific winning port (for example, the small hit winning port 5400 in FIG. 275) to which a prize ball or prize ball data is given. A specific game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) for executing a game);
A game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that can be controlled to any of a plurality of game states;
With
The game state control means,
The first gaming state (for example, the expected value of the execution number of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the execution number of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time) Normal gaming state),
A second game state (for example, a high-precision short-time game state) in which reception of game balls to the first start port is easier than in the first game state, and reception of game balls to the first start port is It becomes more difficult than in the second gaming state, and a larger amount of gaming balls can flow toward the specific winning opening than in the second gaming state, and the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed per unit time Is larger than the expected value of the number of times of execution of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time in the first gaming state (for example, a highly accurate non-time saving gaming state),
And can be controlled to any of a plurality of game states including at least
State transition control means capable of executing control for shifting from the second game state to the third game state when the variable display of the special symbol is performed a specified number of times (for example, the determined number of times saved) in the second game state. (For example, the main CPU 101),
The second special symbol variable control means,
Even if the first special symbol is being variably displayed, the second special symbol can be variably displayed, and when the first special symbol is variably displayed and the special result is derived. During the variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol is variably displayed so that the special result is not derived,
The first special symbol variable control means,
At least when the result of the first special lottery in the second game state is the special result, the first special symbol can be changed in a long fluctuation pattern (for example, long fluctuations DF in FIG. 276) over a certain period of time. By making it possible to derive the special result after performing the display, in the third game state shifted from the second game state, the first special symbol is variably displayed in the long variation pattern. The number of shot balls per unit time by enabling the specific game to be executed based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port so that the chance of giving a prize ball or prize ball data can be increased. , The expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data is set higher than any of the first game state and the second game state.

  According to the gaming machine of (1), when the result of the first special lottery performed in the second gaming state is a special result, the variable display of the first special symbol can be performed for a long time. When the result of the first special lottery is a special result, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed so that the special result is not derived until the special result is derived. When the variable display of the special symbol is performed a specified number of times in the second game state, the state is shifted from the second game state to the third game state. In the third gaming state, a larger amount of gaming balls flow toward the specific winning opening as compared to the second gaming state. Therefore, when the result of the first special lottery is a special result and the variable display of the first special symbol is performed for a long time, the second start-up opening is performed during the variable display of the first special symbol performed for a long time. When the specific game is executed based on the acceptance of the game ball, the game ball flowing toward the specific winning port becomes acceptable to the specific winning port. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having new gaming properties, such as giving an opportunity.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
A symbol variation effect by a plurality of identification symbols is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the symbol is controlled so that the result of the first special lottery or the second special symbol is displayed. It further includes effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201),
The symbol effect control means,
When the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery is a special result, a plurality of reach effect patterns (for example, normal reach for low start, super reach A for low start, super reach B for low start in FIG. 277) ) Has a reach effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 201) for performing the symbol change effect in any of the reach effect patterns,
The long fluctuation pattern over the certain time or more,
The variable display of the first special symbol is performed for a longer time than any of the plurality of reach effect patterns.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery is a special result, the symbol variation effect is performed in any one of the plurality of reach effect patterns. However, when the result of the first special lottery performed in the second game state is a special result, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed for a longer time than any of the plurality of reach effect patterns. By executing a specific game that can be easily accepted into a specific winning opening, an opportunity to give a prize ball or prize ball data can be secured with more assurance, and it is possible to further enhance interest.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
By determining the specified number of times to be one of a plurality of specified numbers (24, 30, 36, 42, 48, and 100 times), the second game state is switched to the third game state. A transition timing determining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of making the transition timing different each time;
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) for performing a predetermined effect without specifying the specified number of times (for example, the determined number of time savings) determined by the shift timing determining means;
Is further provided.

  According to the gaming machine of (3) above, it is possible to make the relationship between the timing at which the result of the first special lottery becomes a special result and the timing of transition from the third gaming state to the second gaming state interesting. It becomes. That is, it does not mean that the timing when the result of the first special lottery becomes a special result in the third gaming state is earlier. For example, if the transition timing from the third gaming state to the second gaming state is late, if the result of the first special symbol becomes a special result at an early timing, the period of the second gaming state may be shortened. In addition, if the transition timing from the third gaming state to the second gaming state is earlier, the earlier the first special symbol results in a special result, the longer the benefit as the second gaming state can be. it can. In this manner, the predetermined number of times the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed in the third game state can be made different each time, so that the gaming interest can be enhanced.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3),
The effect control means,
When shifting from the second game state to the third game state while the variable display of the first special symbol is being performed in the length variation pattern, a series of advantageous games is performed together with the special game state. It is characterized by further including a specific effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 201) capable of executing a specific effect indicating execution.

  According to the gaming machine of (3) above, in the specific state, a game advantageous to the player exceeding the prize ball paid out in one special game state is executed at a stage where the special game state is not yet controlled. It is possible to further enhance the interest in the game.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Notes 63-21
A gaming machine to which a prize ball or prize ball data can be given as a result of a game performed by firing a game ball toward a game area,
When a predetermined movable member (for example, the movable member 4653 in FIG. 280) is operated, a first starting port (for example, in FIG. 280) in which game balls fired in a predetermined manner toward the game area can be received or enabled. First starting port 5443),
A movable control means (for example, a main CPU 101) for activating the predetermined movable member to facilitate or enable reception of the game ball to the first starting port;
A first special lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of performing a first special lottery based on reception of a game ball into the first starting port;
First special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and deriving the result of the first special lottery;
A second starting port (for example, the second starting port 440 of FIG. 280) capable of receiving a game ball fired in the predetermined manner toward the game area and not received by the first starting port;
A second special lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of performing a second special lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port;
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of variably displaying a second special symbol and deriving a result of the second special lottery;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, "big hit") is derived, a special game execution means (for example, a special game advantageous to the player) is executed. , Main CPU 101);
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small hit), the specific movable member (for example, the small hitting shutter 6100 in FIG. 280) is turned off. Activating a specific game to execute a specific game in which it is easy to receive a prize ball or a specific prize port to which prize ball data is given when a game ball is received (for example, a small winning port 5400 in FIG. 280). Means (for example, main CPU 101);
With
The second special lottery means,
The second special lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first special lottery is performed;
The second special symbol variable control means,
Even if the first special symbol is being variably displayed, the second special symbol can be variably displayed, and when the first special symbol is variably displayed and the special result is derived. During the variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol is variably displayed so that the special result is not derived,
The first special symbol variable control means,
When the result of the first special lottery is the special result, the first special symbol is variably displayed in a long variation pattern (for example, long variation D to F in FIG. 276) over a certain period of time, and By making it possible to derive a special result, while the variable display of the first special symbol is being performed in the long variation pattern, the specific game is executed based on the reception of the game ball to the second starting port. It is characterized in that the game balls can sometimes be accepted into the specific winning opening, so that the chances of giving prize balls or prize ball data can be increased.

  According to the gaming machine of (1), when the result of the first special lottery is a special result, the variable display of the first special symbol can be performed for a long time. When the result of the first special lottery is a special result, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed so that the special result is not derived until the special result is derived. Therefore, when the result of the first special lottery is a special result and the variable display of the first special symbol is performed for a long time, the second start-up opening is performed during the variable display of the first special symbol performed for a long time. When the specific game is executed based on the reception of the game ball, the reception of the game ball to the specific winning opening becomes possible, so that the opportunity to give the prize ball or the prize ball data increases, and the prize ball or the prize ball It is possible to provide a gaming machine having new gaming properties, such as an opportunity to acquire data and give unlimited opportunities.

  Note that “performing the second special lottery so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first special lottery is performed” means that when the first special lottery is performed, (For example, winning a small hit) is not essential. For example, in the first special lottery, it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, but the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is 0 (for example, a small hit lottery with a small hit lottery is 0). Aspect) and an aspect in which the determination itself as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied is not performed (for example, an aspect in which the small hit lottery itself is not performed).

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
Further comprising a game state control means that can be controlled to any of a plurality of game states,
The predetermined movable member,
Always working in a certain regular manner,
The specific winning opening,
It is configured to be able to receive a game ball fired in the predetermined manner toward the game area and not received by any of the first starting port and the second starting port,
The game state control means,
The first gaming state (for example, the expected value of the execution number of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the execution number of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time) Normal gaming state),
To the second starting port, so that all or substantially all of the game balls fired in the predetermined manner toward the game area and not received by the first starting port can be received by the second starting port. The expectation value of the second game state (for example, a high-precision time-short game state) in which the acceptance of the game ball is easier than the first game state, and the execution number of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time are A larger amount of game balls than the second game state is directed toward the specific winning opening because the game balls larger than the first game state are more difficult to receive the game balls in the second start port than in the second game state. A third gaming state (for example, a highly accurate non-time saving gaming state) in which the player can flow down
And can be controlled to any of a plurality of game states including at least
When the variable display of the special symbol is performed a specified number of times in the second game state, a state transition control unit (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of executing control for shifting from the second game state to the third game state is provided. It is characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the variable display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times in the second gaming state, the state is shifted from the second gaming state to the third gaming state. In the third game state, it is more difficult to receive the game balls into the second starting port than in the second game state, so that a larger amount of the game balls flow toward the specific winning port than in the second game state. I do. The third winning game is configured such that the specific winning opening is configured to be able to receive a game ball that is fired in a predetermined manner toward the game area and is not received by any of the first starting port and the second starting port. In the state, during the variable display of the first special symbol, which is performed for a long time, the prize ball or the prize ball data is obtained and the game is unlimited, so that the entertainment of the game can be further enhanced.

(1) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Notes 63-22,
A gaming machine to which a prize ball or prize ball data can be given as a result of a game performed by firing a game ball toward a game area,
Game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) capable of storing game information relating to the progress of the game,
When a predetermined operation is performed, a data clearing unit (for example, a main CPU 101 executing the process of step S23) capable of clearing game information stored in the game information storing unit (for example, the main RAM 103);
A first starting port (for example, the first starting port 5442 in FIG. 270) capable of receiving a game ball fired in a predetermined manner (for example, left-handed) toward the game area;
First lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) for performing a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) based on the reception of the game ball to the first starting port;
First special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying a first special symbol based on the result of the first lottery means and deriving the result of the first lottery;
A second starting port (for example, the second starting port 4401 in FIG. 270) that is easy to receive a game ball fired in the predetermined mode (for example, left-handed) toward the game area;
A second lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) based on the reception of the game ball to the second starting port;
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying a second special symbol and deriving a result of the second lottery;
Storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing a plurality of tables in which variable display patterns provided for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol are provided;
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, main CPU 101) for determining a variable display pattern to be used for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol by using any one of the plurality of tables; ,
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, "big hit") is derived, a special game execution means (for example, a special game advantageous to the player) is executed. , Main CPU 101);
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small hitting shutter 6100 in FIG. 270) Is operated to execute a specific game (for example, a small hitting game) that facilitates the reception of a prize ball or a winning port provided with prize ball data when the game ball is received (for example, a main game). CPU 101);
With
The second lottery means,
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed,
The storage means,
As a table used for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the second special symbol,
A first table in which a plurality of variable display patterns in which the expected value of the number of times of execution of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is relatively small is prepared (for example, the fluctuation time of the special symbol for low start in FIG. 258) A determination table), and a second table (for example, for the middle start in FIG. 272) in which a plurality of variable display patterns having relatively large expected values of the number of times of execution of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time are prepared. Special symbol fluctuation time determination table)
At least remember,
The variable display pattern determining means,
Although the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the second special symbol is always determined using the first table, the game information stored in the game information storage unit has been cleared by the data clear unit. It is characterized by having a second special symbol variable display pattern determining means which can be determined only by using the second table.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the second special symbol is changed from the first table based on the clearing of the game information stored in the game information storage means. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having new gaming properties, such as changing to a second table. In particular, for example, when the gaming machine administrator clears the game information stored in the game information storage means before the opening of the hall, the second special symbol per unit time when fired in a predetermined manner toward the game area is Since the expected value of the execution number of the variable display can be increased, the payout adjustment can be performed.

  Note that “performing the second lottery so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed” means that the specific condition is satisfied when the first lottery is performed. It does not have to be established (for example, to win a small hit). For example, in the first lottery, a determination is made as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, but the probability that a specific condition is satisfied is 0 (for example, a mode in which a small-hit winning probability is 0 when a small-hit lottery is performed). ), And a mode in which it is not determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a mode in which a small hit lottery itself is not performed).

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
Game control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of a plurality of set values having different degrees of advantage for the player;
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined effect;
Further comprising
The effect control means,
A variable display pattern provided for variable display of the second special symbol is determined using the second table, and when the one set value is a specific set value, a specific effect capable of executing a specific effect It has the effect execution means.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the player can guess one set value from the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the second special symbol, thereby further enhancing the gaming interest. be able to.

(1) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Notes 63-23,
A gaming machine to which a prize ball or prize ball data can be given as a result of a game performed by firing a game ball toward a game area,
A first starting port (for example, the first starting port 5443 in FIG. 275) capable of receiving a game ball fired toward the game area;
First lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) for performing a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) based on the reception of the game ball to the first starting port;
First special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying a first special symbol based on the result of the first lottery means and deriving the result of the first lottery;
A second starting port (for example, the second starting port 440 in FIG. 275) capable of receiving a game ball fired toward the game area;
A second lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) based on the reception of the game ball to the second starting port;
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying a second special symbol and deriving a result of the second lottery;
Storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing a plurality of tables in which variable display patterns provided for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol are provided;
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, main CPU 101) for determining a variable display pattern to be used for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol by using any one of the plurality of tables; ,
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, a combination of big hit symbols) is derived, a special game execution means (for executing a special game advantageous to the player) For example, the main CPU 101),
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when a lottery result is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, a small hitting shutter 6100) is operated. When a game ball is received, a specific game (for example, a small hit game) for executing a specific game (for example, a small hit game) that can be easily received at a prize ball (for example, a small hit prize port 5400) to which prize balls or prize ball data is given Execution means (for example, main CPU 101);
With
The second lottery means,
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed,
The second special symbol variable control means,
The variable display of the second special symbol can be performed even when the first special symbol is being variably displayed, and when the special result is derived by the variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol is displayed. (2) In the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is configured to be performed so that the special result is not derived.
The storage means,
As a table used for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the second special symbol,
A first table in which a plurality of variable display patterns having a relatively small expected value of the number of times of execution of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time are prepared (the variable time determination table of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 277) ), And a second table in which a plurality of variable display patterns having a relatively large expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time are prepared (variation of the special symbol for high start in FIG. 278). Time determination table)
At least remember,
The variable display pattern determining means,
The variable display pattern used for the variable display of the first special symbol from which the special result is derived is determined to be a specific variable display pattern longer than a specified time (for example, a long variation G in FIG. 277). A possible first special symbol display pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the processing of step S1832);
The variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the second special symbol is always determined using the first table, and the variable display of the first special symbol is started with the specific variable display pattern. And a second special symbol variable display pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the processing of step S1834) which can be determined based on the second table in place of the first table. .

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is usually determined with reference to the first table, but the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined to be a fluctuation pattern longer than the specified time. By changing the first table to the second table based on the fact that the first special symbol has been changed, the specific game is guaranteed while the fluctuation time of the first special symbol continues, and it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

  Note that “performing the second lottery so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed” means that the specific condition is satisfied when the first lottery is performed. It does not have to be established (for example, to win a small hit). For example, in the first lottery, a determination is made as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, but the probability that a specific condition is satisfied is 0 (for example, a mode in which a small-hit winning probability is 0 when a small-hit lottery is performed). ), And a mode in which it is not determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a mode in which a small hit lottery itself is not performed).

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
When the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in the specific variable display pattern, a series of advantageous games are executed between the specific game and the special game at a stage where the special game has not been executed yet. It is characterized by further comprising an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 201) capable of executing a specific effect indicating the above.

  According to the gaming machine of (2), when the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol is determined to be the specific variable display pattern and the specific game is executed, the special game is still executed. At this stage, it is shown that a game more advantageous to the player is executed than when the special game is executed once, so that it is possible to further enhance the interest in the game.

(1) The gaming machines of Supplementary Notes 63-24
A first starting port (for example, the first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left-handed) toward the game area;
First lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of performing a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) based on the reception of the game ball to the first starting port;
A first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of variably displaying a first special symbol and deriving a result of the first lottery;
When a predetermined movable member (for example, the movable shutter 4650 in FIG. 254) is activated, a second start port (for example, FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball fired in a specific manner (for example, right-handed) toward the game area. 254, a second opening 440);
A second lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of performing a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) based on the reception of the game ball to the second starting port;
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of variably displaying a second special symbol and deriving the result of the second lottery;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, a special game executing means (for example, a main game) for executing a special game advantageous to the player. CPU 101);
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when a lottery result is a small hit), a specific movable member (for example, a small hitting shutter 6100) is operated. A specific game for executing a specific game (for example, a small hit game) that can be easily received at a specific winning port (for example, a small winning port 5400) to which a prize ball or prize ball data is given when a game ball is received. Execution means (for example, main CPU 101);
Game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) for controlling the game state after the execution of the special game to any of a plurality of game states,
With
The second lottery means,
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed,
The game state control means,
A normal game state (for example, a normal game state) in which the probability that the special result is derived is relatively low and the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data per unit time is smaller than 1; ,
The probability that the special result is derived is relatively high, the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port is relatively easy, and the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of launch balls per unit time An advantageous gaming state in which the expected value of is less than 1 (for example, a highly accurate time-saving gaming state);
The probability that the special result is derived is relatively high, the acceptance of game balls into the second starting port is relatively difficult, and the number of prize balls or prize ball data with respect to the number of launch balls per unit time A specific game state (for example, a highly accurate non-time saving game state) in which the expected value of
And can be controlled to any of a plurality of game states including at least
In a gaming state where it is relatively easy to receive a game ball to the second starting port (for example, a high-accuracy short-time gaming state, a low-accuracy short-time gaming state),
When the game ball is fired in the normal mode and received by the first starting port, the first special symbol is variably displayed and the special result is derived, the special game is executed. The other game state is controlled to the normal game state or the specific game state,
When the game ball is fired in the specific mode and received by the second starting port, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed, and the special result is derived, the special game is executed. The gaming state is configured to be controlled to the advantageous gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the game ball is fired in a normal mode even though the game state is relatively easy to receive the game ball into the second starting port, and the first special symbol is formed. When a special result is derived by performing the variable display, after the special game is executed, the degree of profit for the player is relatively high (the number of prize balls or the prize ball data with respect to the number of launch balls per unit time). (The expected value of the number is larger than both the normal game state and the advantageous game state). Further, in a game state in which it is relatively easy to receive the game ball into the second starting port, the game ball is fired in a specific mode, the second special symbol is variably displayed, and a special result is derived. After the special game is executed, the degree of profit for the player is relatively low (the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of launch balls per unit time is less than 1). Is controlled. That is, when the game balls are fired in the normal mode in the game state where the reception of the game balls to the second starting port is relatively easy, the benefit that the game balls are easily received to the second starting port is obtained. Although there is a disadvantage that it cannot be performed, there is a possibility that the game is controlled to a specific game state. On the other hand, when a game ball is fired in a specific mode in a game state in which it is relatively easy to receive a game ball into the second starting port, the game ball can be easily received into the second starting port. Can be enjoyed, but it can be controlled not in a specific game state but in an advantageous game state. In this manner, the game mode (right-handed or right-handed) determines which of a thrilling game with a relatively high risk and a high return and a stable game with a relatively low risk and a low return is to be executed. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having a new gaming property, such that a player can be given a selection right by left-handing.

  Note that “performing the second lottery so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed” means that the specific condition is satisfied when the first lottery is performed. It does not have to be established (for example, to win a small hit). For example, in the first lottery, a determination is made as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, but the probability that a specific condition is satisfied is 0 (for example, a mode in which a small-hit winning probability is 0 when a small-hit lottery is performed). ), And a mode in which it is not determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a mode in which a small hit lottery itself is not performed).

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
In the game state where the reception of the game ball to the second starting port is relatively easy, when the game ball is fired in the normal mode and when the game ball is fired in the specific mode, the unit is It is characterized in that the ratio of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data to the number of launch balls per time is substantially the same.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the ratio of the number of awarded balls to the number of launched balls per unit time between when a game ball is fired in a normal mode and when a game ball is fired in a specific mode Are substantially the same, the player can determine the firing mode of the game ball according to his / her desire without considering the advantages and disadvantages.

(1) The gaming machine described in Supplementary Note 63-25 is
A gaming machine to which a prize ball or prize ball data can be given as a result of a game performed by firing a game ball toward a game area,
A first starting port (for example, the first starting port 5443 in FIG. 282) capable of receiving a game ball fired in a specific manner toward the game area;
First lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) for performing a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) based on the reception of the game ball to the first starting port;
First special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying a first special symbol based on the result of the first lottery means and deriving the result of the first lottery;
A game ball that has not been received by the first starting port can be received, and when a game ball is received, a predetermined number of prize balls or a specific prize port to which prize ball data is given (for example, a small winning port shown in FIG. 282). 5400)
A second starting port (for example, the second starting port 440 in FIG. 282) capable of receiving a game ball fired in the specific mode (for example, right-handed) toward the game area;
A second lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing a second lottery based on the reception of the game ball to the second starting port,
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying a second special symbol and deriving a result of the second lottery;
When at least the first special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, "big hit") is derived, a first condition (for example, a condition device) that is an execution condition of a special game advantageous to the player is provided. ) And a second condition (for example, the operation of the accessory continuous operating device), a first condition fulfilling means (for example, the main CPU 101) for fulfilling only the first condition,
Temporarily retaining means (for example, the accessory device 3500 in FIG. 282) that allows the game balls to enter based on the first condition being satisfied, and allows the entered game balls to temporarily stay. )When,
A specific port (for example, a specific port 3540 in FIG. 282) capable of receiving a game ball staying in the temporary staying means;
A second condition establishment means (for example, main CPU 101) for satisfying the second condition when a game ball is received in the specific port;
Special game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) for executing a special game advantageous to the player based on the first condition being satisfied and the second condition being satisfied;
When the variable display of the second special symbol is performed and a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of “small hit” is derived), the specific movable member (for example, A specific game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101) for operating the hitting shutter 6100) to execute a specific game that facilitates acceptance into the specific winning opening;
A first state (for example, a “high-accuracy time-saving gaming state”) in which the game balls can be easily received in the first starting port, and it is more difficult to receive the game balls in the first starting port than the first state; State control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can be controlled to any of a second state (for example, a “high-accuracy non-time saving game state”) that is or is impossible;
With
When a predetermined condition is satisfied in the first state (for example, when the determined number of time-saving games has been exhausted), the state control means may change the state from the first state to the second state. It is configured to be possible,
In the second state, between the time when the first condition is satisfied and the time when the second condition is satisfied based on the reception of the game ball to the first opening, and in the second state, When the specific game is executed based on the acceptance of the game ball, the game ball fired in the specific mode becomes easy to be accepted in the specific winning opening, and the prize ball with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time It is characterized in that the expected value of the number or prize ball data is increased.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), in the first state in which game balls can be easily received into the first starting port, even if the specific movable member is operating, the game balls fired in a specific mode. Is unlikely or low in a particular winning opening. On the other hand, in the second state where it is difficult or impossible to receive the game ball into the first starting port, the game ball fired in a specific mode is received into the specific winning port if the specific movable member is operated. Can be In addition, in a state where the first condition is satisfied by the variable display of the first special symbol being performed and the special result being derived, even if the game ball is received in the second starting port, a special The variable display of the second special symbol is performed so that a specific condition can be satisfied without a result being derived. Therefore, when the first condition is satisfied based on the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port, the second starting port is set on condition that the second state is maintained until the second condition is satisfied. When a specific game is executed based on the acceptance of game balls, prize balls or prize ball data are acquired and unlimited, and the expected value of the number of prize balls or prize ball data with respect to the number of launch balls per unit time can be increased It becomes possible to provide a gaming machine having a new gaming property.

  In the gaming machine of (1), the specific game is executed when the second special symbol is variably displayed and a specific condition is satisfied, but the first special symbol is variably displayed. When performed, the specific game is executed with a very low probability (for example, 1/320) than the probability (for example, 1/5) that the second special symbol is variably displayed and the specific game is executed. It is not the meaning of excluding the mode performed.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
Storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing at least a plurality of tables prepared with variable display patterns provided for variable display of the second special symbol;
Variable display pattern determining means (for example, main CPU 101) for determining at least a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the second special symbol by referring to any one of the plurality of tables;
Further comprising
The storage means,
As a table used for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the second special symbol,
A first table in which a plurality of variable display patterns in which the expected value of the number of times of execution of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is relatively small is prepared (for example, the fluctuation time of the special symbol for low start in FIG. 258) A determination table), and a second table (for example, a high-start pattern shown in FIG. 259) in which a plurality of variable display patterns in which the expected value of the variable display execution number of the second special symbol per unit time is relatively large are prepared. Special symbol fluctuation time determination table),
At least remember,
The variable display pattern determining means,
In a normal game state (for example, a "normal game state"), a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the second special symbol is determined with reference to the first table, and the special game is executed. In the second game state (for example, “high-accuracy time-saving game state”, “high-accuracy non-time-saving game state”), a variable display pattern to be used for variable display of the second special symbol can be determined by referring to the second table. It is characterized by comprising

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), in the normal gaming state, the variable display pattern to be provided for the variable display of the second special symbol is determined with reference to the first table, so that the game is performed for a relatively long time. The fluctuation time of the second special symbol is performed. On the other hand, in the game state after the special game is executed, the variable display pattern to be used for the variable display of the second special symbol is determined with reference to the second table. A symbol change display is performed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the small hit game in the game state after the special game is executed as compared with the normal game state, and to suppress the execution frequency of the small hit game in the normal game state. It becomes. When the first condition is satisfied in the game state after the special game is executed, the specific game is executed based on the reception of the game ball into the second starting port until the second condition is satisfied. As a result, the prize ball or the prize ball data can be obtained and the state can be set as it is, and the interest can be enhanced.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The temporary stay means,
It is configured such that the time for which the entered game balls temporarily stay can be different each time.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), the time during which the game ball stays in the staying means may be different each time. That is, since the time from when the first condition is satisfied to when the second condition is satisfied is different each time, the state where the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of launch balls per unit time is large is determined. It is difficult for the player to predict whether the game will continue, and it is possible to further enhance the interest in the game.

(1) The gaming machine described in Supplementary Notes 63-26
A gaming machine to which a prize ball or prize ball data can be given as a result of a game performed by firing a game ball toward a game area,
A first starting port (for example, a first starting port 5442 in FIG. 281) capable of receiving a game ball fired toward the game area;
First lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) for performing a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) based on the reception of the game ball to the first starting port;
First special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying a first special symbol based on the result of the first lottery means and deriving the result of the first lottery;
A second starting port (for example, the second starting port 440 in FIG. 281) capable of receiving a game ball fired toward the game area;
A second lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) based on the reception of the game ball to the second starting port;
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for variably displaying a second special symbol and deriving a result of the second lottery;
Storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing at least a plurality of tables prepared with variable display patterns provided for variable display of the second special symbol;
Variable display pattern determining means (for example, main CPU 101) for determining at least a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the second special symbol by referring to any one of the plurality of tables;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, "big hit") is derived, a first condition which is an execution condition of a special game advantageous to the player (E.g., operation of the condition device) and a second condition (e.g., operation of the accessory continuous operation device), a first condition establishment unit (e.g., the main CPU 101) that satisfies only the first condition;
Temporarily retaining means (for example, the accessory device 3500 in FIG. 281) that allows the game balls to enter based on the first condition being satisfied and allows the entered game balls to be temporarily retained. )When,
A specific port (for example, the specific port 3540 in FIG. 281) capable of receiving the game ball staying in the temporary staying means;
A second condition establishment means (for example, main CPU 101) for satisfying the second condition when a game ball is received in the specific port;
Special game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) for executing a special game advantageous to the player based on the first condition being satisfied and the second condition being satisfied;
When the second special symbol is variably displayed and a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when a result of “small hit” is derived), the specific movable member (for example, the small By operating the hitting shutter 6100), when a game ball is received, a predetermined number of prize balls or a specific prize port to which prize ball data is given (for example, a small prize port 5400 in FIG. 281) can be easily received. A specific game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) for executing a specific game,
With
The storage means,
As a table used for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the second special symbol,
A first table in which a plurality of variable display patterns in which the expected value of the number of times of execution of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is relatively small is prepared (for example, the fluctuation time of the special symbol for low start in FIG. 258) A determination table), and a second table (for example, a high-start pattern shown in FIG. 259) in which a plurality of variable display patterns in which the expected value of the variable display execution number of the second special symbol per unit time is relatively large are prepared. Special symbol fluctuation time determination table),
At least remember,
The variable display pattern determining means,
A first pattern determining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the second special symbol with reference to the first table in a normal game state; A second pattern determination that can determine a variable display pattern to be used for variable display of the second special symbol with reference to the second table until the second condition is satisfied after the condition is satisfied. Means (for example, main CPU 101),
Has,
From the time when the first condition is satisfied based on the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port to the time when the second condition is satisfied, based on the reception of the game ball to the second starting port. By increasing the execution frequency of the specific game, the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of launch balls per unit time is configured to be increased.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), in the normal gaming state, the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the second special symbol is determined with reference to the first table, so that the variable display pattern is used for a relatively long time. The fluctuation time of the second special symbol is performed. On the other hand, during the period from when the first condition is satisfied to when the second condition is satisfied, the variable display pattern to be used for the variable display of the second special symbol is determined with reference to the second table. A relatively short-time change display of the second special symbol is performed. Therefore, when the first condition is satisfied based on the reception of the game ball to the first starting port, the change display of the second special symbol is performed in a relatively short time, and until the second condition is satisfied. In the meantime, the execution frequency of the specific game based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port is increased, the prize ball or the prize ball data is acquired and the all-you-can-eat is obtained, and the prize ball number or the prize ball data with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time It is possible to provide a gaming machine having new gaming properties, such as increasing the expected value of the number.

  In the gaming machine of (1), the specific game is executed when the second special symbol is variably displayed and a specific condition is satisfied, but the first special symbol is variably displayed. When performed, the specific game is executed with a very low probability (for example, 1/320) than the probability (for example, 1/5) that the second special symbol is variably displayed and the specific game is executed. It is not the meaning of excluding the mode performed.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The temporary stay means,
It is configured such that the time for which the entered game balls temporarily stay can be different each time.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the time during which the game ball stays in the staying means can be different each time. That is, since the time from when the first condition is satisfied to when the second condition is satisfied is different each time, the state where the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of launch balls per unit time is large is determined. It is difficult for the player to predict whether the game will continue, and it is possible to further enhance the interest in the game.

  According to the inventions of Supplementary Notes 63-1 to 63-26, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having new gaming properties.

[Supplementary Notes 64-1 to 64-4]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there have been known gaming machines in which various winning devices such as a general winning opening and a starting opening are provided in a game area. When a game ball fired at a game ball wins a prize device, a prize ball corresponding to the winning device is paid out.

  As a gaming machine of this type, among gaming balls fired in a specific area, a game ball that has entered a predetermined entrance is distributed toward a first location or a second location and is released. A gaming machine having a device and having different profits when discharged toward a first location and when released toward a second location is disclosed (for example, JP-A-2015-47336). Gazette).

  According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-47336, the amount of profit obtained when the game is released toward the first location and when the game is released toward the second location is made different. It is possible to realize not only the distribution of the game balls discharged by the distribution device but also the distribution of profits.

  However, in recent years, gaming machines having further new gaming properties have been desired.

  The inventions of Supplementary Notes 64-1 to 64-4 have been made in view of such a point, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine having new gaming properties.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 64-1
A game board on which a game area is formed (for example, a transparent panel 172);
A game ball has a rolling surface (for example, the upper surface of the shutter 6020 in FIG. 283) on which the game ball can roll, and a normal position where the rolling surface is located rearward of the gaming board (for example, a special winning opening in FIG. 283). 5401 is a closed mode) and a special movable member operable between an advance position where the rolling surface is located forward of the game board (for example, a large winning opening 5401 in FIG. 283 is an open mode). (Eg, shutter 6020 in FIG. 282)
When the special movable member is operated toward the advanced position, a special winning opening (for example, a large winning opening 5401 in FIG. 283) capable of receiving a game ball rolling on the rolling surface,
A first downflow path (for example, the first downflow path 5901 in FIG. 283) and a second downflow path (for example, the second downflow path 5902 in FIG. 283) which are the downflow paths of the game balls that have not been accepted in the special winning opening. )When,
An outlet (eg, the out port 57 in FIG. 283) capable of receiving a game ball flowing down the first flow path;
A normal winning port (for example, a general winning port 560 in FIG. 283) capable of accepting a game ball flowing down the second flowing path;
No prize ball or prize ball data is given when a game ball is received at the discharge port, and at least when a game ball is received at the special prize port or the normal prize port, the special prize port and the normal prize port are provided. Prize providing means (for example, a payout / launch control circuit 300 for paying out prize balls in accordance with a command from the main CPU 101) capable of providing a predetermined amount of prize balls or prize ball data;
When a special result is derived as a result of the game, by performing a round game in which the special movable member is operated between the normal position and the advance position, it is easy to receive a game ball to the special winning opening. Special game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) for executing a special game
With
When the special movable member is at the normal position, a game ball flowing down the game area flows down the first flow path,
When the special movable member is operated from the advanced position to the normal position while the game ball is rolling on the rolling surface, the game ball rolling on the rolling surface is the second ball. It is characterized by being configured to be able to flow down the downflow path.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), when the special movable member is operated from the advanced position to the normal position while the rolling surface of the special movable member is rolling, the rolling surface is rolled. The game ball is configured to be able to flow down the second flow path. In addition, all or almost all of the game balls flowing down the second flow-down path are configured to win the normal winning opening. As described above, by merely devising the arrangement positions of the various structural members, each time a round game is performed, a new gaming property is provided in which a prize ball or prize ball data can be given based on a prize in a normal winning opening. It becomes possible to provide a gaming machine. Also, when a special game is executed, in addition to the prize balls or prize ball data given based on winning in the special winning opening, prize balls or prize ball data are given based on winning in the normal winning opening. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the entertainment interest of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The special game execution means,
A round game in which the special movable member is operated between the normal position and the advance position is to be executed over a plurality of round games,
In at least one round game of the plurality of round games, the normal position and the normal position so that a game ball rolling on the rolling surface can be given a plurality of opportunities to flow down the second flow path. It is configured to be operated a plurality of times with respect to the advanced position.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), in the one round game, a plurality of opportunities are provided for the game balls rolling on the rolling surface to flow down the second flow path, so that the game ball to the normal winning opening is provided. The number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data provided based on the winning can be increased, and it is possible to further enhance the interest in the game.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 64-2
A game board on which a game area is formed (for example, a transparent panel 172);
A game ball has a rolling surface (for example, the upper surface of the shutter 6020 in FIG. 284) on which the game ball can roll, and a normal position where the rolling surface is located rearward of the gaming board (for example, a special winning opening in FIG. 284). A special movable member configured to be operable between an advancing position in which the rolling surface is located forward of the gaming board (for example, a large winning opening 5401 in FIG. 284 is open). (For example, shutter 6020 in FIG. 284)
When the special movable member is operated toward the advance position, a special winning opening (for example, a large winning opening 5401 in FIG. 284) capable of receiving a game ball rolling on the rolling surface,
A first downflow path (for example, the first downflow path 5903 in FIG. 284) and a second downflow path (for example, the second downflow path 5904 in FIG. 284) which are the downflow paths of the game balls that have not been accepted in the special winning opening. )When,
When a predetermined movable member (for example, the movable member 5602) is operated, a general winning opening (for example, a general winning opening 560) capable of receiving a game ball flowing down the first flowing path,
When a game ball is received at least in the special winning opening or the general winning opening, award providing means (for example, A payout / firing control circuit 300 for paying out a prize ball according to a command from the main CPU 101);
When a special result is derived as a result of the game, a round game in which the special movable member is operated between the normal position and the advance position is performed over a plurality of rounds, so that a game ball to the special winning opening is provided. Special game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) for executing a special game that facilitates acceptance of
A normal area (for example, a pass gate 49 in FIG. 284) through which a game ball flowing down the second flow path can pass;
It is possible to operate the predetermined movable member based on the passage of the game ball to the normal area, and to enable the reception of the game ball to the general winning opening by operating the predetermined movable member. Movable control means (for example, main CPU 101);
With
When the special movable member is at the normal position, the game ball flowing down the game area is configured not to reach the normal area by flowing down the first flow path,
When the special movable member is operated from the advanced position to the normal position while the game ball is rolling on the rolling surface, the game ball rolling on the rolling surface is the second ball. It is configured to be able to reach the ordinary area by flowing down the flowing path.

  According to the gaming machine of (1), when the special movable member is operated from the advanced position to the normal position, the game ball rolling on the rolling surface flows down the second flow path and passes through the normal area. Therefore, the movable member operates so that the general winning opening is in an open state between round games. In other words, at least while the general winning opening is in the open mode due to the operation of the movable member, the special winning opening is in the closing mode, so that the right-played game ball flows down the first flow-down path, and all or almost all of the balls flow down. Wins the general winning opening. In this way, by simply devising the arrangement positions of various structural members, in addition to the prize balls or prize ball data paid out based on the prize in the special prize port, the prize ball or prize based on the prize in the general prize port. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having new gaming properties, such as providing ball data. Also, when a special game is executed, in addition to the prize ball or prize ball data given based on winning in the special winning opening, a prize ball or prize ball data is given based on winning in the general winning opening. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the entertainment interest of the game.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 64-3 is:
A normal starting area (for example, a pass gate 49 in FIG. 285) through which game balls fired toward the game area can pass;
A normal holding means (for example, main CPU 101) for holding a predetermined number of normal start memories based on the passage of the game ball to the normal start area;
A normal lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101) for performing a normal lottery for the normal start memory so that a predetermined result is always or approximately obtained based on the establishment of the normal start condition;
A normal symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variable display of the normal symbol and deriving the result of the ordinary lottery;
By operating a predetermined movable member (for example, the movable member 5602 in FIG. 285), a general winning opening (for example, a changeable state between a closed mode in which game balls cannot be received and an open mode in which game balls can be received) , The general winning opening 560 in FIG. 285),
Storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing a plurality of operation patterns as the operation pattern of the predetermined movable member;
When the variable display of the ordinary symbol is performed and a predetermined result (for example, a hit) is derived, the predetermined movable member is operated in any one of the plurality of operation patterns, and the closed mode is operated. A movable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that can be changed to the above-mentioned possible open mode;
When the general winning opening is in the open mode, the game ball is almost unacceptable, and the general winning opening is in the closed mode and the special starting port can be accepted only for the game ball not accepted in the general winning opening. (For example, the second starting port 440);
A special lottery means for performing a special lottery based on the reception of the game ball to the special starting port so as to roughly achieve a specific result (for example, a small hit);
Special symbol variable control means for performing variable display of special symbols and deriving the result of the special lottery,
When the special result is variably displayed and a specific result is derived, a specific movable member (for example, the opening / closing member 5603 in FIG. 285) is actuated, and a specific winning opening ( For example, specific port 777)
A special game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) for executing a special game advantageous to the player based on the reception of the game ball in the specific winning opening;
With
The normal starting conditions are:
As long as the normal start memory is held in the normal holding means, the condition is satisfied on condition that the general winning opening is in the closed mode,
The storage means,
An opening time from when the predetermined result is derived to when the general winning opening is in the open mode, and an ending time from when the general winning opening is in the closed mode to when the normal starting condition is satisfied. Each is a relatively short normal operation pattern (for example, a first pattern), and at least one of the opening time and the ending time is a relatively long special operation pattern (for example, a second pattern).
At least remember,
The movable control means,
Usually, by operating the predetermined movable member in the normal operation pattern, the acceptance of the game ball to the special starting port is hindered, and when a special condition is satisfied (for example, when the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is the second pattern). Only when the pattern is determined), by operating the predetermined movable member in the special operation pattern, the game ball is received in the special starting port, and the game ball is received in the specific winning port. It is characterized by making possible.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the ordinary lottery always or almost has a predetermined result, so that the general winning opening is almost fully open except for the opening time and the ending time. When the general winning opening is in the open mode, almost all of the gaming balls are accepted by the general winning opening, so that the acceptance of the gaming balls to the special starting opening is hindered. However, when the specific condition is satisfied, the predetermined movable member operates in a special operation pattern in which at least one of the opening time and the ending time is relatively long, during which the general winning opening is in a closed state, Game balls can be accepted to the special starting port. Then, based on the reception of the game ball to the special starting port, a specific movable member operates, the reception of the game ball to the specific winning opening becomes possible, and a special game is executed. It is possible to play a game by sex.

(1) The gaming machine described in Supplementary Note 64-4:
When a predetermined movable member (for example, the shutter 6310 in FIG. 286) is operated, a first special start port (for example, FIG. 28) capable of receiving a game ball fired in a specific manner (for example, right-handed) toward the game area. 286, a first starting port 5443);
On the basis of the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit), the movable member for operating the predetermined movable member to facilitate the reception of the game ball to the first special starting port. Control means (for example, main CPU 101);
A first lottery means capable of performing a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) based on reception of a game ball to the first special starting port (for example, a main CPU 101);
A first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of variably displaying a first special symbol and deriving a result of the first lottery;
A second special start port (for example, the second start port 440 in FIG. 286) configured to be able to receive only game balls that have not been received by the first special start port;
A second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of performing a second lottery (for example, a first special lottery) based on the reception of the game ball to the second special starting port;
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of variably displaying a second special symbol and deriving the result of the second lottery;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, a special game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101) for executing a special game advantageous to the player )When,
If a specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the special game (entering a probable change attacker), the game state after the end of the special game is changed to a specific game state in which the probability of deriving the special result is increased (for example, a high accuracy time reduction). Specific game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) for controlling the game state)
A first state (for example, an electric support state) in which it is relatively easy to receive game balls in the first special start port, and a second state in which game balls are relatively difficult to be received in the first special start port. A state control unit (for example, the main CPU 101) that can be controlled to any state after the state (for example, the non-electric support state);
With
During the execution of the special game, an expected value (for example, ease of entry into the probability change attacker) at which the specific condition is satisfied depends on when the first lottery is performed and when the second lottery is performed. Are configured differently,
When the state control means is controlled to the first state (for example, a high-precision time-saving game state), it becomes relatively easy to receive a game ball to the first special starting port, and the second state is controlled. 2 While it is more difficult to receive game balls in the special opening than in the first special opening,
When the state control unit is controlled to the second state (for example, a high-accuracy non-time saving game state), it becomes relatively difficult to receive a game ball to the first special starting port, It is characterized in that the game ball is configured to be more easily received in the second special starting port than in the first state.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), it is possible to change the probability of being controlled to a specific game state in which the probability of deriving a special result is increased without changing the firing mode of the game ball toward the game area. It is possible to provide excellent game characteristics.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
An expectation that the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the special game is configured to be higher when the second lottery is performed than when the first lottery is performed,
The state control means includes:
When the variable display of the special symbol is performed a specified number of times (for example, 24, 30, 36, 42, 48, and 100 times) in the first state, the state is shifted from the first state to the second state. It has a state transition control means capable of executing control.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the variable display of the special symbol is performed a prescribed number of times in the first state where it is more difficult to receive the game ball into the second special start port than in the first special start port, the second The state is shifted to the second state in which the reception of the game ball to the special starting port is easier than the first state. That is, when the state is shifted from the first state to the second state, the frequency at which the second lottery is performed becomes higher than in the first state. During the execution of the special game, the expectation value under which the specific condition is satisfied is higher when the second lottery is performed than when the first lottery is performed, and thus the special result is not easily derived in the first state. Even if it is, the interest will be enhanced without discouraging the player.

  According to the inventions of Supplementary Notes 64-1 to 64-4, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having new gaming properties.

  [Other extended examples]

  Note that all the inventions described in this and other embodiments can be applied to pachinko machines, game machines, slot machines, and all other gaming machines without departing from the spirit of the invention. it can.

  In addition, each of the above-described embodiments, each of the examples, and each of the modified examples, including the above-mentioned additional notes, are examples. It is needless to say that each configuration shown in each embodiment, each example, and each modified example can be partially replaced or combined in another embodiment, another example, and another modified example. No. That is, the components described in each embodiment, each example, and each modification can be arbitrarily combined with each other.

16 LCD Display 24 Speaker 35 Power Switch 49 Passage Gate 101 Main CPU
103 RWM (Main RAM)
104 Sub SPU
203 Work RAM
328 Setting key 330 Backup clear switch 440 Second starting port 540 Big winning opening 560 General winning opening 610 Shutter 662 Main button 664 Select button 5400 Small winning opening 6100 Small winning shutter

Claims (2)

When a predetermined movable member is operated, a first special start port capable of receiving a game ball fired in a specific manner toward the game area,
Movement control means for actuating the predetermined movable member based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, thereby facilitating the reception of the game ball to the first special starting port,
First lottery means capable of performing a first lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball to the first special starting port,
A first special symbol variable control means capable of variably displaying a first special symbol and deriving a result of the first lottery;
A second special start port configured to be acceptable only for game balls not accepted by the first special start port;
A second lottery means capable of performing a second lottery based on the reception of the game ball to the second special starting port;
A second special symbol variable control means capable of variably displaying a second special symbol and deriving a result of the second lottery;
A special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to a player when a variable result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed and a special result is derived;
When a specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the special game, a specific game state control unit that controls a game state after the special game is completed to a specific game state in which the probability of deriving the special result is increased,
One of a first state in which it is relatively easy to receive a game ball to the first special start port and a second state in which it is relatively difficult to receive a game ball to the first special start port. Controllable state control means;
With
An expectation that the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the special game is configured to be different between when the first lottery is performed and when the second lottery is performed,
When being controlled to the first state by the state control means, it is relatively easy to receive the game ball into the first special start port, so that the game ball can be transferred to the second special start port. Receiving is more difficult than the first special opening,
When the state control means is controlled to the second state, it is relatively difficult to receive the game balls in the first special start port, so that the game balls in the second special start port A gaming machine characterized in that receiving is easier than in the first state. An expectation that the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the special game is configured to be higher when the second lottery is performed than when the first lottery is performed,
The state control means includes:
The method according to claim 1, further comprising: state transition control means capable of executing control for transitioning from the first state to the second state when the variable display of the special symbol is performed a specified number of times in the first state. Gaming machine.